Q DB e PDF

Precautions for Choosing the Products For safe use
Mitsubishi will not be held liable for damage caused by factors found not to be the cause • To use the products given in this catalog properly, always read the "manuals" before
of Mitsubishi; machine damage or lost profits caused by faults in the Mitsubishi products; starting to use them.
• This product has been manufactured as a general-purpose part for general industries,
damage, secondary damage, accident compensation caused by special factors
and has not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system
unpredictable by Mitsubishi; damages to products other than Mitsubishi products; and to
used in purposes related to human life.
other duties. • Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power, electric power,
aerospace, medicine or passenger movement vehicles, consult with Mitsubishi.
• This product has been manufactured under strict quality control. However, when
installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails,
MELSEC-Q DATA BOOK

install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system.
Country/Region Sales office Tel/Fax

U.S.A Mitsubishi Electric Automation Inc. Tel : +1-847-478-2100
500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills, IL 60061 Fax : +1-847-478-2396
Brazil MELCO-TEC Rep. Com.e Assessoria Tecnica Ltda. Tel : +55-11-283-2423
AV. Paulista 1471, Conj. 308, Sao Paulo City, Sao Paulo State, Brazil Fax : +55-11-288-3047
Germany Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. German Branch Tel : +49-2102-486-0
Gothaer Strasse 8 D-40880 Ratingen, GERMANY Fax : +49-2102-486-7170
U.K Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. UK Branch Tel : +44-1707-276100
Travellers Lane, Hatfield, Herts., AL10 8XB,UK Fax : +44-1707-278695
Italy Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Italian Branch Tel : +39-039-6053344
Centro Dir. Colleoni, Pal. Perseo - Ingr.2 Fax : +39-039-6053312
Via Paracelso 12, 20041 Agrate B., Milano, Italy
Spain Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Spanish Branch Tel : +34-93-565-3131
Carretera de Rubi 76-80 Fax : +34-93-589-2948
08190 Sant Cugat del Valles, Barcelona, Spain
France Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. French Branch Tel : +33-1-5568-5568
25 Boulevard des Bouvets, F-92741 Nanterre Cedex, France Fax : +33-1-5568-5685
South Africa Circuit Breaker Industries LTD Tel : +27-11-928-2000
Tripswitch Drive, Elandsfontein Gauteng, South Africa Fax : +27-11-392-2354
Hong Kong Ryoden Automation Ltd. Tel : +852-2887-8870
10th Floor, Manulife Tower, 169 Electric Road, North Point, HongKong Fax : +852-2887-7984
China Ryoden Automation Shanghai Ltd. Tel : +86-21-6475-3228
3F Block5 Building Automation Instrumentation Plaza 103 Fax : +86-21-6484-6996
Cao Bao Rd. Shanghai 200233 China
Taiwan Setsuyo Enterprise Co., Ltd. Tel : +886-2-2299-2499
6F., No.105 Wu-Kung 3rd.RD, Wu-Ku Hsiang, Taipei Hsine, Taiwan Fax : +886-2-2299-2509
Korea HAN NEUNG TECHNO CO., LTD. Tel : +82-2-3660-9552
1F Dong Seo Game Channel Bldg., 660-11,Deungchon-dong Kangsec-ku, Fax : +82-2-3664-8372
Seoul, Korea
Singapore Mitsubishi Electric Asia Pte, Ltd. Tel : +65-6473-2308
307 Alexandra Road #05-01/02, Fax : +65-6476-7439
Mitsubishi Electric Bulding Singapore 159943
Thailand F. A. Tech Co.,Ltd. Tel : +66-2-682-6522
898/28,29,30 S.V.City Building, Office Tower 2, Floor Fax : +66-2-682-6020
17-18 Rama 3 Road, Bangkpongpang, Yannawa, Bangkok 10120
Indonesia P.T. Autoteknindo SUMBER MAKMUR Tel : +62-21-663-0833
Jl. Muara Karang Selatan Blok a Utara No.1 Kav. Fax : +62-21-663-0832
No.11 Kawasan Industri/Pergudangan Jakarta-Utara 14440
India Messung Systems Put,Ltd. Tel : +91-20-712-2807
Electronic Sadan NO:111 Unit No15, M.I.D.C BHOSARI,PUNE-411026,India Fax : +91-20-712-0391
Australia Mitsubishi Electric Australia Pty. Ltd. Tel : +61-2-9684-7777
348 Victoria Road, PostalBag, No 2, Rydalmere, N.S.W 2116, Australia Fax : +61-2-9684-7245
ELECTRIC CORPORATION
HEAD OFFICE: 1-8-12,OFFICE TOWER Z 14F HARUMI CHUO-KU 104-6212,JAPAN
NAGOYA WORKS: 1-14,YADA-MINAMI 5,HIGASHI-KU,NAGOYA,JAPAN
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Nagoya Works is a factory certified for ISO14001 (standards for environmental
Ministry of International Trade and Industry for service transaction permission. management systems) and ISO9001 (standards for quality assurance management systems)
New publication,effective Nov. 2002

Specifications subject to change without notice.
L(NA)-08029E-A 0211(MEE) http://www.nagoya.melco.co.jp/english/

1. CPU SELECTION POINTS
2. OVERVIEW
3. QCPU
4. NETWORK/INFORMATION PROCESSING MODULES
5. I/O MODULES
6. ANALOG MODULES
7. HIGH-SPEED COUNTER, POSITIONING MODULES
8. CURRENT CONSUMPTION
9. POWER SUPPLY MODULES
10. BASE UNITS
11. ACCESSORIES
12. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
13. PARTNER PRODUCTS
14. PROGRAMMING
15. SIMULATION/OFFLINE DEBUGGING FUNCTIONS
16. PROJECT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
17. REMOTE MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS
18. PC-RELATED PRODUCTS
Appendices
Contents
1. CPU SELECTION POINTS .................................................................................................................................. 1-1
2. OVERVIEW
2.1 QCPU Specification List........................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Compatibility of QCPU with AnS/Q2AS.................................................................................................................... 2-9
3. QCPU
3.1 General Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Basic Model QCPU: Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU................................................................................................................. 3-2
3.2.1 Applicable Mode List....................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.2 System Configuration ..................................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.3 Performance and Functions of CPU Modules ............................................................................................... 3-10
3.2.4 CPU Built-In Memories ................................................................................................................................. 3-18
3.3 High Performance Model QCPU: Q02(H)/Q06H/Q12H/Q25HCPU ........................................................................ 3-20
3.3.1 Applicable Model List.................................................................................................................................... 3-20
3.3.2 System Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 3-28
3.3.4 CPU Built-In Memories/Memory Cards ......................................................................................................... 3-41
3.4 Process QCPU: Q12PH/Q25PHCPU..................................................................................................................... 3-44
3.4.1 Applicable Model List.................................................................................................................................... 3-44
3.4.2 System Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 3-48
3.4.4 CPU Built-In Memories/Memory Cards ......................................................................................................... 3-61
3.5 Overview of Multiple CPU System (Other than Basic Model QCPU)...................................................................... 3-64
4. NETWORK/INFORMATION PROCESSING MODULES

4.1 Network Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Ethernet Interface Module: QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71-100......................................................................... 4-9
4.3 MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC Network: QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21G, QJ71LP21GE, QJ71BR11 ........................... 4-17
4.4 MELSECNET/H Remote I/O Network: QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21G, QJ71LP21GE, QJ71BR11,
QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QJ72LP25GE, QJ72BR15....................................................................................... 4-27
4.5 MELSECNET/H Repeater Module for Coaxial Bus: A6BR10, A6BR10-DC ........................................................... 4-38
4.6 FL-net (OPCN-2) Interface Module: QJ71FL71-F01, QJ71FL71-B2-F01 ............................................................... 4-40
4.7 FL-net (OPCN-2) Interface Module Setting/Monitoring Tool: GX Configurator-FL.................................................. 4-44
4.8 CC-Link: QJ61BT11............................................................................................................................................... 4-46
4.9 CC-Link/LT Master Module: QJ61CL12 ................................................................................................................. 4-55
4.10 AS-i Master Module: QJ71AS92 .......................................................................................................................... 4-60
4.11 AS-i Master Module Setting/Monitoring Tool: GX Configurator-AS....................................................................... 4-63
4.12 PROFIBUS-DP Interface Module: QJ71PB92D, QJ71PB93D.............................................................................. 4-65
4.13 DeviceNet Master-Slave Module: QJ71DN91 ...................................................................................................... 4-67
4.14 Serial Communication Modules: QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2 .................................................................................... 4-69
4.15 Serial Communication Module Setting/Monitoring Tool: GX Configurator-SC ...................................................... 4-75
4.16 Intelligent Communication Modules: QD51, QD51-R24 ....................................................................................... 4-77
4.17 MELSECNET/MINI-S3: A1SJ71PT32-S3, A1SJ71T32-S3................................................................................... 4-81
4.18 MELSEC-I/O LINK: A1SJ51T64........................................................................................................................... 4-82
Contents-1
4.19 OPCN-1 Open PLC Network: A1SJ71J92-S3, A1SJ72J95 .................................................................................. 4-83
4.20 S-Link: A1SJ71SL92N ......................................................................................................................................... 4-84
5. I/O MODULES
5.1 Overview of I/O Modules.......................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Input Modules .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3 Output Modules...................................................................................................................................................... 5-16
5.4 I/O Composite Modules.......................................................................................................................................... 5-28
5.5 Interrupt Module: QI60 ........................................................................................................................................... 5-32
5.6 Blank Cover Module: QG60 ................................................................................................................................... 5-33
6. ANALOG MODULES
6.1 Analog to Digital Converter Modules: Q64AD, Q68ADV, Q68ADI............................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Channel-Isolated High-Resolution Analog to Digital Converter Modules: Q64AD-GH, Q62AD-DGH
(with Signal Conditioning function).......................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3 Analog to Digital Converter Modules Setting/Monitoring Tool: GX Configurator-AD............................................... 6-13
6.4 Digital to Analog Converter Modules: Q62DA, Q64DA, Q68DAV, Q68DAI ............................................................ 6-14
6.5 Channel-Isolated Digital to Analog Converter Module: Q62DA-FG ........................................................................ 6-19
6.6 Digital to Analog Converter Modules Setting/Monitoring Tool: GX Configurator-DA............................................... 6-23
6.7 Thermocouple Input Module, Channel-Isolated Thermocouple/Micro Voltage Input Module:
Q64TD, Q64TDV-GH............................................................................................................................................ 6-24
6.8 Temperature Input Module: Q64RD ....................................................................................................................... 6-32
6.9 Thermocouple Input Module Setting/Monitoring Tool: GX Configurator-TI ............................................................. 6-37
6.10 Temperature Control Module: Q64TCTT, Q64TCTTBW, Q64TCRT, Q64TCRTBW ............................................ 6-38
6.11 Temperature Control Module Setting/Monitoring Tool: GX Configurator-TC ........................................................ 6-47
7. HIGH-SPEED COUNTER, POSITIONING MODULES

7.1 High-Speed Counter Modules: QD62, QD62E, QD62D ........................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Channel-Isolated Pulse Input Module: QD60P8-G ................................................................................................... 7-7
7.3 Counter Modules Setting/Monitoring Tool: GX Configurator-CT............................................................................. 7-13
7.4 Type QD70 Positioning Module: QD70P4,QD70P8 ............................................................................................... 7-14
7.5 Positioning Module Setting/Monitoring Tool: GX Configurator-PT.......................................................................... 7-21
7.6 Type QD75P/QD75D Positioning Module: QD75P1,QD75P2, QD75P4, QD75D1, QD75D2, QD75D4 ................. 7-22
7.7 Type QD75 Positioning Module: QD75M1,QD75M2,QD75M4 ............................................................................... 7-34
7.8 Positioning Module Setting/Monitoring Tool for QD75: GX Configurator-QP .......................................................... 7-43
8.1 Current Consumption Calculation ............................................................................................................................ 8-1

9.1 Power Supply Modules: Q61SP, Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q62P, Q63P, Q64P, A1S61PN, A1S62PN, A1S63P........... 9-1
10. BASE UNITS

10.1 Base Units: Q3 SB, Q3 B, Q5 B. Q6 B,QA1S6 B, QA65B.......................................................................... 10-1
Contents-2
11. ACCESSORIES
11.1 Accessories: Batteries, Cables, Connectors and Terminal Blocks ....................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Spring Clamp Terminal Block: Q6TE-18S ............................................................................................................ 11-6
11.3 IDC (Insulation Displacement Connector) Terminal Block Adapter, Dedicated Tool: Q6TA32, Q6TA32-TOL ...... 11-8
11.4 Relay Terminal Module, Connection Cable:A6TE2-16SRN, AC TE .............................................................. 11-10

12.1 External Dimensions ............................................................................................................................................ 12-1

13.1 Partner Products .................................................................................................................................................. 13-1
14. PROGRAMMING
14.1 Sequence Programs ............................................................................................................................................ 14-1
14.1.1 Basic Model QCPU: Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU.................................................................................................. 14-1
14.1.2 High Performance Model QCPU: Q02(H)/Q06H/Q12H/Q25HCPU ......................................................... 14-11
14.1.3 Process CPU:Q12PH/Q25PHCPU ......................................................................................................... 14-33
14.1.4 MELSEC-Q Series Instructions............................................................................................................... 14-53
14.1.5 Process CPU Instructions ....................................................................................................................... 15-61
14.2 Network Setting: GX Developer ......................................................................................................................... 14-62
14.3 Data Conversion Software:GX Converter........................................................................................................... 14-63
14.4 Peripheral Device............................................................................................................................................... 14-64
14.5 Peripheral Device Connection Module: AJ65BT-G4-S3 ..................................................................................... 14-65
15. SIMULATION/OFFLINE DEBUGGING FUNCTIONS

15.1 Sequence Simulation ........................................................................................................................................... 15-1
16. PROJECT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS

16.1 Project Management Tool .................................................................................................................................... 16-1
17. REMOTE MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

17.1 Remote Maintenance Tool: GX RemoteService-I................................................................................................. 17-1

18.1 MX Series ............................................................................................................................................................ 18-1
18.1.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................... 18-1
18.1.2 Active X Communication Support Tool: MX Component ........................................................................... 18-3
18.1.3 Excel Communication Support Tool: MX Sheet ...................................................................................... 18-12
18.1.4 Graphic Data Package: MX Parts ........................................................................................................... 18-18
18.2 Network Boards ................................................................................................................................................. 18-20
18.2.1 MELSECNET/H Boards: Q80BD-J71LP21-25, Q80BD-J71LP21G, Q80BD-J71BR11 ........................... 18-20
18.2.2 MELSECNET/10 Boards: A70BD-J71QLP23, A70BD-J71QLP23G, A70BD-J71QBR13,
A70BD-J71QLR23 .................................................................................................................................. 18-22
18.2.3 CC-Link Boards: A80BDE-J61BT11, A80BDE-J61BT13 ........................................................................ 18-24
18.2.4 External Dimensions ............................................................................................................................... 18-26
Contents-3
APPENDICES
App.1 Safety Precautions........................................................................................................................................... App-1
App.2 Mounting and Installation ............................................................................................................................... App-2
App.3 MELFANSweb ............................................................................................................................................... App-8
App.4 A Mode .......................................................................................................................................................... App-9
App.4.1 Comparison between Q Mode and A Mode of PLC CPU ................................................................. App-9
App.4.2 Compatibility of A Mode PLC and Ans ........................................................................................... App-11
App.4.3 System Configuration ..................................................................................................................... App-12
App.4.4 CPU Modules: Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A, Q06HCPU-A ................................................................ App-13
App.4.5 CPU Built-in Memories/Memory Cards .......................................................................................... App-15
App.5 Instructions for Diversion of Conventional System ......................................................................................... App-18
App.5.1 Diversion of AnSHCPU for Basic Model QCPU .............................................................................App-18
App.5.2 Transition from A2AS/A2USH CPU to Basic Model QCPU ............................................................ App-20
App.6 Model List .................................................................................................................................................... App-23
App.6.1 PLC QCPU/Process CPU Model List ............................................................................................. App-23
App.6.2 QCPU- A Mode Model List ............................................................................................................. App-29
App.6.3 High Performance Model QCPU/A Mode Common Model List ...................................................... App-30
App.6.4 Accessories Shared Among Q/AnS Series I/O ............................................................................... App-34
App.6.5 CC-Link Remote Devices ............................................................................................................... App-35
App.6.6 CC-Link/LT Remote Devices .......................................................................................................... App-40
App.6.7 Software and Peripheral Devices ................................................................................................... App-41
App.6.8 Personal Computer Network Boards .............................................................................................. App-44
App.6.9 GOT-A900 Graphic Operation Terminal ......................................................................................... App-45
App.7 Worldwide Sales/Service Network ............................................................................................................... App-49
Contents-4
1. CPU SELECTION POINTS
1
A wide range of MELSEC-Q series products are highly adaptable to your systems.
This chapter provides points for selecting a suitable CPU model. Use this chapter as a reference for model selection when
configuring your control system.
CPU Selection Points
The MELSEC-Q series has two CPU module types: "Basic model" developed for those who want to design an easy and
compact, small-scaled system. "High Performance model" developed for those who want to utilize fast processing and
system expandability.
Refer to the CPU selection points 1) to 12) given in this chapter and choose the CPU that meets your system.
Program capacity
Process CPU
(k steps) High Performance model
Large capacity memory

Q25H Q25PH
Number of programs: 252 programs (Q25H, Q25PH)
File registers (built-in memory): 128k points (Note 1)
250
(Q12H, Q25H, Q12PH, Q25PH)
Fast processing
Number of I/O device points: 8,192 points
(including those for remote I/O)
Number of I/O points (Note 2): 4,096 points
ROM operation can be performed with built-in ROM.
SFC programs is available.
Multiple CPU system is available.
Motion CPU is mountable.
Q12H Q12PH
PC CPU module is mountable.
120
Real number operation, trigonometric function,
character string processing and PID control.
FBDs are usable (Q12PH, Q25PH).
Basic model
Integral with power supply and base (Q00J)

60 Q06H
With built-in serial communication function (Q00/01)
Number of I/O device points: 2,048 points (including those for remote I/O)
Number of I/O points (Note 2): 256 points (Q00J)
1,024 points (Q00/01)
30 ROM operation can be performed with built-in ROM. Q02 Q02H
Q01
Q00J Q00
10
200 150 100 80 50 30

Basic instruction processing time
(ns) (Note 3)
Note 1: Can be increased by a memory card. (Reference: Maximum 1017k points when a 2M byte SRAM card is used)
Note 2: Indicates the number of I/O points that can be used on the main/extension base. (Does not include those for remote
I/O.)
Note 3: Indicates the processing time for execution of the LD instruction.
Basic model QCPU : Generic term of the Q00J, Q00 and Q01CPUs
High Performance model QCPU: Generic term of the Q02(H), Q06H, Q12H and Q25HCPUs
Process CPU : Generic term of the Q12PH and Q25PHCPUs
1-1
CPU
SELECTION
POINTS
<Example for Q00JCPU>

CPU Selection Point 1): I/O Points Used for X/Y000
Control/Monitoring 128 points for I/O Number of
I/O points
07F
The scale of a CPU system is determined by the number (max.)
256 points
of actual I/O points to be controlled/monitored, and the Number of
For remote I/O
number of internal device points used for data processing. 0FF I/O device points
2048 points
The controlled/monitored I/O includes those on
main/extension bases, remote I/O and link devices 2048-128=
transferred via a network, and intelligent function modules, 1920 points
e.g. analog modules.
7FF
Point 1)-1: I/O points
Indicates the number of I/O (X/Y) device points used by Point 1)-3: Link device points
the I/O and intelligent function modules mounted on the Indicates the link relays (B) and link devices (W) in
main/extension base(s). The number of each module's I/O MELSECNET/H.
points is predetermined by the actual module itself, and is The following table shows the Max. link device points.
automatically occupied when the module is mounted onto Note that there are restrictions on the Max. link device
the main/extension base. points depending on the network configuration and similar.
The I/O (X/Y) device is used as an input signal from For more information on MELSECNET/H, please refer to
sensors, switches and other external devices, or outputs to Chapter 4, Section 4.4 and 4.5.
PLC CPU
actuators, contactors and other external devices. These
Item Basic Model High Performance Model
devices are a resultant of the ON/OFF operation in the Q00J Q00 Q01 Q02 Q02 Q06 Q12 Q25
CPU module. H H H H
It is also used as an interface signal between the CPU and I/O device points 2048 8192
intelligent function module. I/O points 256 1024 4096
(max.) 1)-1
Max. I/O capacity is shown in table Point 1)-3. Link Link 2048 8192
device relay
Q00JCPU QX41 QX41 Q62DA Q64AD QJ61 points
BT11 Link 2048 8192
1)-3
register
(Note 1.3)
32 32 16 16 32
points points points points points
Process CPU
I/O No. Item
X000 X020 X/Y040 X/Y050 X/Y060 Q12PH Q25PH
(Note 1.1) to to to to to I/O device points 8192
01F 03F 04F 05F 07F I/O points 4096
(max.) 1)-1
Sum of used I/O points Link Link 8192
32+32+16+16+32= device relay
128 points points
Link 8192
1)-3
register
(Note 1.3)
Note 1.1: The I/O numbers of each slot can be changed in the
parameters configuration. Note 1.3: In default
Point 1)-2: I/O points for remote I/O CPU Selection Point 2): Memory Capacity
Using a CC-Link or MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
(Note 1.2) allows control of I/O, which are at a great
Point 2)-1: Program/comment capacity
Programs/comments are stored in the program memory,
distance from the CPU module.
standard ROM, and memory card (Note 2.1). Each type of
The High Performance model and process CPU can both
CPU has a different memory capacity.
use up to 8,192 I/O device points (X/Y), including actual
The table on the next page indicates the memory
I/O, and remote I/O.
capacities when the program memory and standard ROM
(Maximum 2,048 I/O points in Basic model.)
are used as storage destinations.
Note 1.2: Both the High Performance mode and process CPU
support the MELSECNET/H remote I/O network.
1-2
CPU
SELECTION
POINTS
1
The memory capacity given is the sum of the parameter, Note 2.1: A memory card is available for the High Performance
program, comment, intelligent function module parameter, model and process CPU.
and device initial value (Note 2.2) capacities. Note 2.2: The device initial value is available for the High
By using the standard ROM or memory card, the High Performance model and process CPU.
Performance model and process CPU can increase the Note 2.3: The Basic model’s ROM function allows Data files
available memory capacity. The Basic model cannot stored in the program memory to be transferred to the
increase the memory capacity even though it has the standard ROM. However, only files stored in the
standard ROM. (Note 2.3) program memory can be transferred to the standard
When choosing a suitable CPU and memory card (Note ROM, therefore the memory capacity cannot be
2.1), it is recommended to calculate the capacity of the increased.
memory used with the memory capacity of the storage
In addition to the method of transferring data from the
destination, and then to select a model with a slightly
program memory to the standard ROM/memory card.
larger memory capacity.
The High Performance model and process CPU also
For information on how to calculate the used memory
capacity, please refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.2.4 and allow data to be written directly from GX Developer to
3.3.4, Built-in memory/memory card. the standard ROM/memory card.
Point 2)-2: Device points

The following table shows the Max. device points.
PLC CPU
Process CPU
Item Basic model High Performance model
Q00J Q00 Q01 Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25H Q12PH Q25PH
Program capacity (step) 2)-1 8k 14k 28k 60k 124k 252k 124k 252k
Parameter/program/comment capacity (byte) 58k 94k 112k 240k 496k 1008k 496k 1008k
2)-1 (Note 2.4)
Device points Input X 2048 8192 8192
(in default) Output Y 2048 8192 8192
2)-2 Internal relay M 8192 8192 8192
(Note 2.5) Latch relay L 2048 8192 8192
Annunciator F 1024 2048 2048
Edge relay V 1024 2048 2048
Step relay S 2048 (Note 2.6) 8192 8192
Special link relay SB 1024 2048 2048
Link relay B 2048 8192 8192
Timer T 512 2048 2048
Retentive timer ST 0 0 0
Counter C 512 1024 1024
Data register D 11136 12288 12288
Link register W 2048 8192 8192
Link special register SW 1024 2048 2048
File register When CPU built-in memory None 32k 32k 32k/64k 128k 128k
points 2)-3 (standard RAM) is used (Note 2.7)
When SRAM card is used None (memory card 1017k (Note 2.8) 1017k
cannot be used) (Note 2.8)
Note 2.4: For the Basic model .................................................. Indicates the sum of parameter, program, comment and intelligent function
module parameter capacities.
For the High Performance model and process CPU . Indicates the sum of parameter, program, comment, intelligent function
module parameter and device initial value capacities.
Note 2.5: Using the parameters, the device points can be changed within the following ranges. (X, Y, S, SB and SW are fixed)
Basic model .............................................................. The total device capacity can be set within the range of 16.4k words.
Refer to Chapter 15, Section 15.1.1 for details.
High Performance model and process CPU.............. The total device capacity can be set within the range of 28.8k words.
However, usable bit devices are up to a total of 64k bits.
Refer to Chapter 15, Section 15.1.2 for details.
Note 2.6: Cannot be used since SFC programs are not supported.
Note 2.7: A maximum of 64k points for both the Q02HCPU and Q06HCPU with function version B or later and the first five digits of the
serial No. are "04012" or later.
Note 2.8: Maximum 1017k points when the Q2MEM-2MBS is used.
1-3
CPU
SELECTION
POINTS
Sequence Management
Point 2)-3: File register points control Motion control
The file register is designed to handle a large capacity of

data, therefore control data can be stored in it.
Servo Servo
(Example: They are useful when logging monitoring data.) amplifier amplifier
File register data is stored in the built-in standard RAM or
in the memory card (Note 2.9).
For details of the memory card(s) that can store file Management
Servo Servo
register data, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.4 Built-in Process control
motor motor
memory/memory card. Detailed explanation Chapter 3, Section 3.5
Note 2.9: The memory card is available for the High Performance Target CPU High Performance model/Process CPU
model and process CPU.
The Q00 and Q01CPU support only a standard RAM,
Point 3)-2: PC CPU system
and not a memory card. The PC CPU module provides I/O control and intelligent
The Q00JCPU cannot use file registers. function module control by C or BASIC language.
The multiple CPU system configuration with the QCPU
CPU Selection Point 3): High-level Control realizes a fast and highly flexible system through
(Multiple CPU System) coordination of sequence control, process control and
personal computer application programs, e.g. machine
You can use the QCPU together with the motion CPU and
control and process control are performed by the QCPU,
PC CPU to configure a multiple CPU system.
and data communication and large-capacity data
The features of the respective CPUs can be brought out in
processing, which are the strong fields of the personal
a variety of fields.
QCPU computer, are handled by the PC CPU.
Sequence control Motion CPU Host computer
Process CPU Motion control
Process control
PC CPU Data management
Data processing
Data communication Data
communication
Data base
PC
CPU
Note: When using CPU modules that require a large current e.g.
motion CPU and PC CPU, always calculate current Contact: Contec
consumption before implementing the system.
Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.1 for information on Detailed explanation Chapter 3, Section 3.5
calculating the current consumption. Target CPU High Performance model/Process CPU
Point 3)-1: Integration with motion CPU
The multiple CPU system configuration of the motion CPU
and QCPU integrates motion control, sequence control
and process control to achieve a high-level motion control
system.
1-4
CPU
SELECTION
POINTS
1
Point 3)-3: Combined use of multiple PLC Item
Process CPU
Q12PH Q25PH
CPUs (Load distribution)
LD instruction 34ns
By separating/dividing the CPU modules on a control basis,
MOV instruction 102ns
e.g. for machine control and data processing, fast machine PC MIX value 10.3
control can be realized independently of data processing (instruction/µs)
etc. Floating-point 782ns
Data processing (low speed) addition
Machine control (high speed) Note: The PC MIX value is the average number of instructions,
e.g. basic instructions and data processing instructions,
executed in 1µs. A larger value indicates a higher
processing speed.
Point 4)-2: Program division and priority

All controls executed by one CPU execution
Programs can be created based of their criteria and
functions, which define the execution type
Machine control CPU Data processing CPU (scan/standby/cyclic/low speed/initial) for each program.
Prioritizing execution of a program for fast processing
shortens the scan time of the sequence programs.
(Set the program execution type in the PLC parameters.)
Detailed explanation Chapter 15, Section 15.1.2/
Load distribution according to control
tacts enables stable, fast machine control. Section 15.1.3
Target CPU High Performance model/Process CPU
Detailed explanation Chapter 3, Section 3.5
Target CPU High Performance model/Process CPU Point 4)-3: Interrupt program
An interrupt program executes after temporarily pausing
CPU Selection Point 4): Scan Time the main or subroutine program. When an interrupt
Reduction/Response Level Improvement condition is true, it starts from interrupt pointer (I) and ends
at the IRET instruction.
Point 4)-1: Instruction processing speeds Create an interrupt program after the main routine
The instruction processing speeds of the CPU directly program (after FEND instruction) or insert it into a standby
influence the scan time of the CPU. As a guideline that program with other programs.
represents the processing speed of each CPU, the (1) Interrupt conditions
following table indicates the processing time of the CPU (a) Interrupt module (QI60)
basic instructions. (b) Internal timer
Note that index qualification of devices will not cause a (c) Error occurrence (Note 4.1)
processing delay. The instruction processing time varies (d) Intelligent function module (Note 4.1)
with the instruction to be executed. For details, refer to the (2) Effects
Programming Manual (Common Instructions). (a) The interrupt program is executed as soon as the
PLC CPU interrupt condition is true therefore fast response is
Item Basic Model High Performance Model achievable without the influence of scan time.
Q00J Q00 Q01 Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25H (b) The scan time can be reduced by placing the
LD instruction 200ns 160ns 100ns 79ns 34ns program, which is executed only at occurrence of
MOV instruction 700ns 560ns 350ns 237ns 102ns an interrupt condition, exclusive of the main
PC MIX value 1.6 2.0 2.7 4.4 10.3 routine.
(instruction/µs)
Detailed explanation Chapter 15, Section
Floating-point Without handling of 1815 782ns
addition floating point ns 15.1.1/Section15.1.2/ Section 15.1.3
Basic model/High Performance model/

Target CPU
Process CPU
Note 4.1: Available for the High Performance mode and process
CPU.
1-5
CPU
SELECTION
POINTS
CPU Selection Point 5): Program Basic model/High Performance model/

Target CPU
Process CPU
Productivity Improvement
Function Block (FB)
Point 5)-1: Program structuring/ Registering a specific program block as a function block
standardization (FB) makes utilization of sequence programs as a
Program division component easier.
Creation of programs based on criteria and function, and
then written to the CPU as multiple programs, allows
several developers to create different programs at the
same time, which improves program productivity.
Section 15.1.3

Label programming
Devices are replaced by labels that describe programs.
Specific devices can be assigned to actual devices and
other devices assigned automatically, allows utilization of
pre-created standard programs across similar equipment.

Section 15.1.3

Section 15.1.3

Macro instruction (User-defined instruction)
Registering and converting a frequently used program
block as a single instruction, enables efficient
programming.
Macro instruction
M.MAC1 R0 R1 R2
Display what exactly macro instructions represent
> R0 R1 MOV R0 R2
< R0 R1 MOV R1 R2

Section 15.1.2/ Section 15.1.3
1-6
CPU
SELECTION
POINTS
1
SFC language Example 1: The device test function can't turn OFF X0
A program that represents manufacturing equipment when X0 is kept ON by an external input.
processes themselves. It is structured, easy to create, and The external I/O forced-ON/OFF function can turn OFF X0
excellent for describing and viewing the entire process. for debugging.
Example 2: The device test function cannot turn OFF Y10
Initial process that is kept ON by the program when the CPU
is in RUN mode.
The external I/O forced-ON/OFF function can
Process 1 turn OFF an external output if Y10 is kept ON
by the program when the CPU is in RUN
Selective branch mode.
<Device test function>
Cannot be turned OFF by device test. X0
Process 2 Sensor input ON
(Process 2 provides X0
M100
a choice of Sensor input Facility warning notice output
ON Y10
operations which ON OFF
meet conditions) M0
Y10
Facility alarm Warning
detection ON notice output
Process
Process 3
Cannot be turned ON/OFF
during RUN by device test.
Parallel branch
<External input/output forced-ON/OFF function>
Can be turned OFF by forced input.
Process 4 to 6 GX Developer
X0
(Process 4 to 6 M100
are executed in Sensor input OFF
parallel) External output can be turned
M0 ON/OFF by forced output.
Y10
Facility alarm Warning Note: Y10 is turned OFF in output module
detection ON notice output but remains ON in ladder.
Process 7 Target CPU High Performance model/Process CPU

Utilization of GX Simulator
The operation of the sequence program that is created
Detailed explanation Chapter 15, Section 15.1.2/ using GX Developer can be checked on a personal
Section 15.1.3 computer, without having the need for a PLC CPU.
Target CPU Virtual PLC
Process CPU
Point 5)-2: Simplify initial setting program
Initial device value setting
By presetting device initial values, data preset in the Monitoring/
Program debugging
parameters can be written to the device memories
automatically at the start of program execution.
This means the initial program that sets initial values to the
device memories is not necessary.
Utilization of GX Configurator
The initial setting of various intelligent function modules Detailed explanation Chapter 16, Section 16.1
can be made without additional programming required.
Detailed explanation Refer to the corresponding section of Target CPU
Process CPU
Chapter 4
Basic model/High Performance model/ CPU Selection Point 6): High-level

Target CPU
Process CPU Programming
Point 5)-3: Debugging efficiency
Point 6)-1: High-level operation processing
External I/O forced-ON/OFF function High-level operation processing of real number operation
This function allows forcing of input (X) and output (Y) to (floating-point operation), trigonometric and other special
be turned ON/OFF from GX Developer when the CPU is functions, character string processing, and PID control is
online. This makes debugging possible without having to possible.
connect the I/O signal lines at system startup.
<Differences between device test and external I/O Target CPU High Performance model/Process CPU
forced-ON/OFF functions>
1-7
CPU
SELECTION
POINTS
CPU Selection Point 7): Maintainability Target CPU

Process CPU
Point 7)-1: Sampling trace function Note 7.1: The Basic model cannot use a memory card.
The specified devices contents (ON/OFF states, present
values) are collected and stored in the memory at given Handling device comments by instructions
intervals. GX Developer is used to set the collection
Using the following instructions, device comments can be
conditions and to check the collection results.
handled in a program.
(1) Convert device comments into ASCII codes and output
to an output module. (PRC instruction)
(2) Read device comments and store them into specified
devices. (COMRD instruction)
Point 7)-4: Online module change

When the module develops a fault, it can be changed
on-line without stopping the entire system. The modules
that can be changed are the Q series I/O modules, A/D
conversion modules (Note 7.2), D/A conversion modules
(Note 7.2), thermocouple input modules (Note 7.2),
temperature control modules (Note 7.2), and pulse input
modules (Note 7.2).
Target CPU Process CPU
Point 7)-2: Automatic write to standard ROM
from memory card Note 7.2: Applicable to function version C or later.
This function allows the parameters and sequence

programs written to a memory card in advance to be
automatically written to the standard ROM of the CPU.
Therefore, with this function you need not bring GX
Developer on-site to modify QCPU programs.
Section 3.4.3
Point 7)-3: Utilization of device comments

Annotating a program with device comments
Commenting creates an easier to understand program for
debugging or checking later.
Target CPU
Process CPU
Storing and managing device comments in the CPU

Storing device comments in the CPU memory enables
centralized management of data.
Device comments can be stored into any of the program
memory, standard ROM and memory card (Note 7.1).
1-8
CPU
SELECTION
POINTS
1
CPU Selection Point 8): Security Function CPU Selection Point 9): Serial
Communication Function
Point 8)-1: Protecting the whole CPU
Use the protection DIP-switch to inhibit overwriting to the The serial communication function is designed to provide
CPU memory from an external device. data communication between the QCPU and an external
Detailed explanation Chapter 3, Section 3.3.3/ device connected by a serial communication cable
Section 3.4.3 (RS-232/ 422/ 485).
Target CPU High Performance model/Process CPU The serial communication module (QJ71C24(-R2)) is
required to use the serial communication function. The
Point 8)-2: Protecting the memory card
Basic model CPUs (Q00, Q01) have the serial
(SRAM/Flash card only)
communication function built-in, which is also available.
The write protect switch on the memory card protects the
(Following point 9)-1)
memory from being overwritten.
Use of a modem enables remote access via dialup
connection. When the serial communication module with
Section 3.4.3
built-in modem (modem interface unit: QJ71CMO) is used,
modem initialization, etc. can be made by simple setting.
Point 8)-3: Protecting interior files (Password (Refer to Section 4.14, Chapter 4 for details.)
registration) The High Performance model allows access from a remote
Setting a file password limits the access from GX user to the QCPU via a dialup connection, which is
Developer, including write protect and read/write protect. restricted by a password. (Refer to CPU selection point
Detailed explanation Chapter 3, Section 3.2.3/ 8)-4.)
Section 3.3.3/ Section 3.4.3 Point 9)-1: Built-in serial communication

Basic model/High Performance model/ function
Target CPU
Process CPU Using the CPU having the built-in serial communication
function allows you to make data communication with an
Point 8)-4: Restricting access from network
external device, e.g. personal computer or display device,
(Remote password registration)
in the MELSEC communication protocol (MC protocol)
A password can be set to restrict access from a remote
(Note 9.1), without loading the serial communication
user using the modem function of the Ethernet interface
function module (QJ71C24(-R2)) separately.
module (QJ71E71(-B2/-100), modem interface module
(QJ71CM0) or serial communication module
(QJ71C24(-R2)).
Detailed explanation Chapter 3, Section 3.3.3/ External device
Section 3.4.3 Target CPU Basic model (except Q00JCPU)

Target CPU High Performance model/Process CPU Note 9.1: MELSEC communication protocol (MC protocol):
Communication system designed to read/write data in
the PLC CPU from an external device. No sequence
program is needed for data communication.
1-9
CPU
SELECTION
POINTS
CPU Selection Point 10): Process Control File Transfer (FTP server) function/Web function
(1) File Transfer (FTP server) function
The process CPU is a good alternative to a conventional A remote device can access program files and data
DCS-based process control system. files in the CPU module by FTP command.
The process CPU has high-level process control (2) Web function
instructions that can fully support loop control, e.g. Data in the CPU can be read/written from a
two-degree-of-freedom PID, sample PI and auto tuning commercially available Web browser via the Internet.
instructions. The fast processing of PID operation can
Detailed explanation Chapter 4, Section 4.3
respond to the increase in the number of control loops.
Using the PLC allows configuration of a system that will Target CPU
Process CPU
result in a reduction of initial and running costs.
E-mail function
Point 10)-1: High-level process instructions The Ethernet module can send/receive data to/from a
The process CPU includes all the Q4ARCPU high-level remote computer as an attachment through e-mail.
process instructions. It also has additional new process Also,
instructions. Detailed explanation Chapter 4, Section 4.3
Detailed explanation Chapter 15, Section 15.1.4 Target CPU High Performance model/Process CPU
Target CPU Process CPU
Point 11)-2: MELSECNET/H
CPU Selection Point 11): Network PLC-PLC network
Configuration This network is appropriate for large-capacity and
high-speed data communication between two or more
The MELSEC-Q series has various interface modules, remote PLC CPUs.
such as MELSECNET/H, CC-Link and Ethernet. You can also use the A/QnA series MELSECNET/10
In the QCPU, a single CPU is designed to allow interface on the same network. (When set to the
connection with multiple networks for seamless data MELSECNET/10 mode)
communication between the networks. Detailed explanation Chapter 4, Section 4.4
The number of network modules that can be used with one
CPU differs between the Basic model and High Target CPU
Process CPU
Performance model.
Remote I/O network
For details, refer to the system configuration in the QCPU
You can configure a highly reliable remote I/O system by
specification list given in Chapter 2, Section 2.1.
fast/large-capacity MELSECNET/H.
Point 11)-1: Ethernet MELSECNET/H's remote I/O network is used to control a
Realize fast data communication with an external device sub device that is located away from a main device with a
such as a personal computer or workstation. CPU module. By connecting the main and sub devices in
MELSEC communication protocol (MC protocol) enables the remote I/O network, you can shorten the I/O cable
PLC CPU data to be read/written without a PLC CPU side routing distance, reduce the wiring costs and wiring space.
program. The building block type I/O and intelligent function
The High Performance model and process CPU allow modules can be used in the remote I/O that are mounted
access to the QCPU from remote users, which can be on the main/extension base.
restricted by passwords. (Refer to CPU selection point Compared with a CC-Link remote I/O system, the remote
8)-4.) I/O network can use larger-capacity I/O points.
Ethernet is also compatible with the file transfer (FTP Since optical cables can be used as network cables, you
server) function, Web function and e-mail function (Note can lay the cables without worrying about noise.
11.1). Detailed explanation Chapter 4, Section 4.5
Note 10.1: The e-mail function is available for the High Target CPU High Performance model/Process CPU
Performance model and process CPU.
1-10
CPU
SELECTION
POINTS
1
Multiplexed remote function instructions that have been deleted or changed in the
By providing a multiplexed remote master station and a QCPU (Q mode).
multiplexed remote sub master station, the control of For details, refer to the comparison between the QCPU
remote I/O stations can be continued by the multiplexed and A/AnS given in Chapter 15, Section 15.1.1
remote sub master station instead if the multiplexed /Section 15.1.2.
remote master station becomes faulty. Using the QCPU (A mode) allows you to use the A/
This improves the system reliability. AnS series programs without any change.
(3) Cases 4, 5
Detailed explanation Chapter 4, Section 4.5 (a) Choose the QCPU (A mode) to configure a system
Target CPU Process CPU with the AnS series modules only.
(b) Choose the QCPU (Q mode) and extension base
Point 11)-3: CC-Link (QA65B/QA1S6 B) to configure a system using
By connecting devices, such as sensors and actuators, in the Q series and A/AnS series modules together.
CC-Link, you can shorten the I/O cable routing distance, (4) Case 6
reduce the wiring costs and wiring space. (Communication Choose the QCPU (Q mode) and extension base
of small-capacity data can also be made between CPUs.) (QA65B).
As CC-Link is an open network, you can choose CC-Link
QCPU (A mode)
compatible equipment from many manufacturers
The QCPU (A mode) allows the AnS series (small type)
according to your purpose.
power supply, I/O and special function modules to be used
Modules used in the remote I/O are so compact that they
on the main base (QA1S3 B) and extension base
can be built into equipment or the like that has no space of
(QA1S6 B) as they are.
installation. In addition, there are also waterproof type
The mounting holes of the AnS series bases can be used
remote I/O modules adequate to be installed outside an
without any change.
enclosure and one-touch connector type remote I/O
As for the main base, extension base and extension cable,
modules that will help reduce wiring costs. those for the A/AnS series cannot be used.
Detailed explanation Chapter 4, Section 4.9 Main base QCPU Power supply, I/O, special and
QA1S3 B is used (A mode) network modules are all for AnS
Target CPU
Process CPU
CPU Selection Point 12): Utilization of A

/AnS Series Assets
Extension cable
Case 1: You want to use the mounting holes for Q series
is used
of the AnS series bases without any
change. Extension base
QA1S6 B is used
Case 2: You want to use the system
configuration of the AnS series as it Detailed explanation Appendix 4
is. Target CPU QCPU (A mode): Q02(H)-A, Q06H-A
Case 3: You want to use the A/AnS series QCPU (Q mode) + extension base
program as it is. (QA65B/QA1S6 B)
Case 4: You want to get the most out of the The QCPU (Q mode) and Q series I/O and intelligent
A/AnS series I/O and special function modules can be used on the main base,
function modules. and the A/AnS series (large/small type) power
Case 5: The special function modules you supply, I/O and special function modules used on
can use are available from only the the extension base (QA65B/QA1S6 B).
A/AnS series. As for the extension base and extension cable, those for the
Case 6: You want to use the A series (large A/AnS series cannot be used.
Main base Q3 B is used Q mode CPU and Q series modules
type) power supply, I/O and special
function modules. Extension cables
for Q series is used
(1) Cases 1 to 2
Select the QCPU (A mode).
(2) Case 3
GX Developer can convert programs into those for
QCPU (Q mode).
Note that programs must be reexamined for access A/AnS series power supply, I/O, special and network modules
can be used on extension base (QA65B/QA1S6 B).
processing to intelligent function modules.
Also, programs must be corrected for some A/AnS Target CPU QCPU (Q mode): High Performance model
1-11
2. OVERVIEW
2.1 QCPU Specification List
Overview of Q Mode
2
With Q series CPU module series, there are a wide range of Basic models, High Performance models and process CPUs.
The Q series has been developed to be higher in performance and easier to use while inheriting MELSEC's programming
capabilities, network capabilities, various functions, and operation procedures.
The Basic model has been developed for small-scale systems, emphasizing easy and compact system design. The High
Performance model emphasizes fast processing and system expandability. The process CPU enables a process system to
be configured by PLC CPUs. It includes a variety of functions and an enhanced programming/debugging environment,
providing a flexible solution for a diverse range of process applications.
System Configuration
Basic model High Performance model Process CPU

Item Q00J Q00 Q01 Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25H Q12PH Q25PH
CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU
Main base unit Equip- Option Option (Q3 B, Q3 SB) Option
ment as (Q3 B, Q3 SB) (Q3 B)
standard
Extension base Q6 B, Q5 B Connectable Connectable (Note 6) (Note 7) Connectable
unit (Note 6) (Note 7)
QA1S6 B Not connectable Connectable (Note 6) Not connectable
QA65B Not connectable Connectable (Note 6) Not connectable
Number of extension bases 2 units 4 units 7 units 7 units
(Note 1)
Number of mountable modules 16 24 64 64
Overall extension cable length 13.2 (43.3) 13.2 (43.3) 13.2 (43.3)
(m(ft.))
Power supply Main base Equip- Needed separately Needed separately Needed separately
module ment as
standard
Extension base Unnecessary when Q5 B Unnecessary when Q5 B is used, Unnecessary
is used, Only necessary when Q6 B/QA1S6 B/QA65B when Q5 B is
Only necessary when is used used,
Q6 B is used Only necessary
when Q6 B is
used
Q series MELSECNET/H 1 4 (Note 4) 4 (Note 4)
modules having CC-Link 2 (Note 2) 64 (Note 3) 64 (Note 3)
restrictions on Ethernet 1 4 (Note 4) 4 (Note 4)
the number to Interrupt 1 1 (Note 5) 1 (Note 5)
be mounted module (QI60)
A/AnS series modules Not connectable Connectable Connectable
Multiple CPU system N/A Applicable Applicable
MELSECNET/H remote I/O N/A Applicable Applicable
network
Usable GX Developer SW7D5C-GPPW-E or later SW4D5C-GPPW-E or later SW7D5C-GPPW-
E Ver.7.12N or
later
Note 1: Includes the number of GOTs connected by Q-Bus.
Note 2: Function version B or later.
Note 3: The network parameters can be set for up to four modules per CPU. In a multiple CPU configuration, the parameters can be set for
up to 16 modules per system. (When four CPUs are used)
Up to 64 modules can be set using dedicated instructions. (Within the specified range for the number of mountable modules per
system) Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.9 for details.
Note 4: Four modules can be mounted per CPU. In a multiple CPU configuration, four modules can also be loaded per system.
Note 5: Indicates the number of loadable modules per CPU. In a multiple CPU configuration, four modules can be loaded per system.
(When four CPUs are used)
Note 6: When the Q3 SB is used, the extension base cannot be used.
Note 7: When the Q5 B is used, care must be taken for the overall current consumption. For details, refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.1 and
Chapter 11, Section 11.1.
2-1
OVERVIEW
Performance Specifications
Basic model High Performance model

Item
Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU
Control system Cyclic operation using stored program
I/O control method Refresh mode
Programming language • Relay symbol language (ladder)
• Relay symbol language (ladder)
(Sequence control dedicated • Logic symbolic language (list)
• Logic symbolic language (list)
language) • MELSAP3 (SFC), MELSAP-L
Processing LD 200ns 160ns 100ns 79ns 34ns
speed MOV 700s 560ns 350ns 237ns 102ns
(sequence PC MIX value
instruction) (instruction/µs) 1.6 2.0 2.7 4.4 10.3
(Note 1) (Note 2)
Floating-point Incompatible 1815ns 782ns
addition
Total number of instructions 249 363
(Note 3)
Real number arithmetic
(floating-point arithmetic) N/A Applicable
instruction
Character string processing
N/A (Note 4) Applicable
instruction
PID instruction N/A Applicable
Special function instruction
(Trigonometric function, square N/A Applicable
root, exponent arithmetic, etc.)
Constant scan (Program start at 1 to 2000ms
0.5 to 2000ms (can be specified in 0.5ms increments)
given time intervals) (can be specified in 1ms increments)
Program capacity 124k 252k
8k steps 14k steps 28k steps 60k steps
steps steps
Memory Program memory 240k 496k 1008k
58k bytes 94k bytes 112k bytes
capacity (drive 0) bytes bytes bytes
Memory card (RAM) Capacity of loading memory cards
None
(drive 1) (Maximum 2MB)
Memory card (ROM) Capacity of loading memory cards
None
(drive 2) (Flash card : Maximum 4MB, ATA card : Maximum 32MB)
Standard RAM 64k/128k bytes
None 64k bytes 64k bytes 256k bytes
(drive 3) (Note 7)
Standard ROM 240k 496k 1008k
58k bytes 94k bytes 112k byte
(drive 4) bytes bytes bytes
Common CPU
memory for Multiple None 8k bytes
CPU system
Max. Program memory 4 (Note 5) 28 60 124 252
number of (Note 6)
files stored Memory card (RAM) None 256 (1MB) / 288 (2MB)
Memory card (ROM) None 288 (Flash card) / 512 (ATA card)
Standard RAM None 1 (file register file only) 2 (One each of file register and local device files)
Standard ROM 4 (Note 5) 28 60 124 252
(Continued on next page)
2-2
OVERVIEW
(Continued from preceding page)
Item
Basic model High Performance model 2
Number of I/O device points 2048 points 8192 points
Number of I/O points 256 points 1024 points 4096 points
Internal relay 8192 points 8192 points
Latch relay 2048 points 8192 points
Link relay 2048 points 8192 points
Timer 512 points 2048 points
Retentive timer 0 point 0 point
(Note 8)
Counter 512 points 1024 points
Data register 11136 points 12288 points
Link register 2048 points 8192 points
Annunciator 1024 points 2048 points
Edge relay 1024 points 2048 points
File register None 32768 points 32768 32768 / 65576 points 131072 points (Note 9)
points (Note 9), (Note 11)
(Note 9)
Special link relay 1024 points 2048 points
Special link register 1024 points 2048 points
Step relay 2048 points (Note 10) 8192 points
Index register 10 points 16 points
Pointer 300 points 4096 points
Interrupt pointer 128 points 256 points
Special relay 1024 points 2048 points
Special register 1024 points 2048 points
Function input 16 points 16 points
Function output 16 points 16 points
Function register 5 points 5 points
Local device None Available
Device initial value None Available
Note 1: When devices are index-qualified, delays in processing will not occur.
Note 2: The PC MIX value is the average number of instructions, such as the basic and data processing instructions executed in 1µs. A
larger value indicates a higher processing speed.
Note 3: Does not include intelligent function module dedicated instructions.
Note 4: Only the character string data transfer instruction ($MOV) is usable.
Note 5: Parameter, program, intelligent function module parameter and device comment files can be stored.
Note 6: Up to 124 programs can be executed.
Note 7: 128k bytes for the Q02HCPU and Q06HCPU with function version is B or later and with the first five digits of the serial No. is
"04012" or later.
Note 8: Indicates the default number of points. Changeable within the parameter configuration.
Note 9: Indicates the number of points when the built-in memory (standard RAM) is used.
The memory can be increased using an SRAM card or flash card. (When a flash card is used, write from a program is disabled.)
When an SRAM card is used, up to 1041408 points are available.
For details, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.4 CPU built-in memory/memory card.
Note 10: Cannot be used because SFC programs are not supported.
Note 11: 65536 points for the Q02HCPU and Q06HCPU with function version is B or later and with the first five digits of the serial No. is
"04012" or later.
2-3
OVERVIEW
Process CPU
Item
Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU
Control system Cyclic operation using stored program
I/O control method Refresh mode
Programming Sequence
• Relay symbol type (ladder)
language control
• Logic symbolic language (list)
dedicated
• MELSAP3 (SFC), MELSAP-L
language
Language for FBD for process control
process control
Processing LD 34ns
speed MOV 102ns
(sequence PC MIX value 10.3
instruction) (instruction/µs)
(Note 1) (Note 2)
Floating-point 782ns
addition
Total number of instructions 415
(Note 3)
Real number arithmetic
(floating-point arithmetic) Applicable
instruction
Character string processing
Applicable
instruction
Process control instruction Applicable
Special function instruction
(Trigonometric function, square Applicable
root, exponent arithmetic, etc.)
Constant scan (Program start at
0.5 to 2000ms (can be specified in 0.5ms increments)
given time intervals)
Program capacity 124k steps 252k steps
Memory Program memory 496k bytes 1008k bytes
capacity (drive 0)
Memory card (RAM) Capacity of loading memory cards
(drive 1) (Maximum 2MB)
Memory card (ROM) Capacity of loading memory cards
(drive 2) (Flash card : Maximum 4MB, ATA card : Maximum 32MB)
Standard RAM 256k bytes
(drive 3)
Standard ROM 496k bytes 1008k bytes
(drive 4)
Common CPU 8k bytes
memory for Multiple
CPU system
Max. Program memory 124 252 (Note 4)
number of Memory card (RAM) 256 (1MB) / 288 (2MB)
files stored Memory card (ROM) 288 (Flash card) / 512 (ATA card)
Standard RAM 2 (One each of file register and local device files)
Standard ROM 124 252
Number of I/O device points 8192 points
Number of I/O points 4096 points
2-4
OVERVIEW
Item
Process CPU 2
Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU
Internal relay (Note 5) 8192 points
Latch relay 8192 points
Link relay 8192 points
Timer 2048 points
Retentive timer 0 points
Counter 1024 points
Data register 12288 points
Link register 8192 points
Annunciator 2048 points
Edge relay 2048 points
File register 131072 points (Note 6)
Special link relay 2048 points
Special link register 2048 points
Step relay 8192 points
Index register 16 points
Pointer 4096 points
Interrupt pointer 256 points
Special relay 2048 points
Special register 2048 points
Function input 16 points
Function output 16 points
Function register 5 points
Local device Available
Device initial value Available
Note 1: When devices are index-qualified, delays in processing will not occur.
Note 2: The PC MIX value is the average number of instructions, such as the basic and data processing instructions executed in 1µs. A
larger value indicates a higher processing speed.
Note 3: Does not include intelligent function module dedicated instructions.
Note 4: Up to 124 programs can be executed.
Note 5: Indicates the default number of points. Changeable within the parameter configuration.
Note 6: Indicates the number of points when the built-in memory (standard RAM) is used.
The memory can be increased using an SRAM card or flash card. (When a flash card is used, write from a program is disabled.)
When an SRAM card is used, up to 1041408 points are available.
For details, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.4.4 CPU built-in memory/memory card.
2-5
OVERVIEW
Functions

Item Q00J Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25H
Q00CPU Q01CPU
CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU
Latch function Applicable Applicable
Output status setting when STOP to RUN Applicable Applicable
Clock function Applicable Applicable
Remote Remote RUN/STOP Applicable Applicable
operation Remote PAUSE Applicable Applicable
Remote reset Applicable Applicable
Remote latch clear Applicable Applicable
Input Input module Applicable Applicable
response High-speed input module Applicable Applicable
time Interruption module Applicable Applicable
amendment
Setting the switches of the Q series Intelligent Applicable Applicable
Function Modules
Monitoring Monitor condition setting Applicable Applicable
function Monitor/test for local Device Applicable Applicable
Write during Online write in ladder mode Applicable Applicable
RUN Batch online file write Applicable Applicable
Measure Program list monitor Applicable Applicable
execution Interrupt program monitor Applicable Applicable
time Scan time measurement Applicable Applicable
Enforced ON/OFF for external I/O N/A Applicable
Sampling trace function N/A Applicable
Multiple-user debugging function N/A Applicable
(Pointer-specified online write)
Watchdog timer Applicable Applicable
Online module change function N/A N/A
Self-diagnosis function Applicable Applicable
Failure history Applicable Applicable
System Whole CPU N/A Applicable
protect (Using DIP switch)
Memory card Memory card cannot be fitted Applicable
(Using write protect switch)
File unit Applicable Applicable
(By registering password)
Access from network N/A Applicable
(Using remote password)
System display Applicable Applicable
LED display LED display Applicable Applicable
Preference setting N/A Applicable
Built-in serial communication function None Available None
Automatic writing to standard ROM N/A Applicable
Interrupt Interrupt module (QI60) Applicable Applicable
Internal timer Enabled (set to 2 - 1000ms (in Applicable (set to 0.5 - 1000ms (in 0.5ms
1ms increments)) increments)) (Note 2)
Error occurrence N/A Applicable
Intelligent function module N/A Applicable
Label programming N/A Applicable
Function block N/A Applicable
Macro instruction (user defined instruction) Applicable Applicable
MELSECNE Low-speed cyclic setting N/A Applicable
T/H Station-specific parameter setting N/A Applicable
Refresh parameter setting Divided into 8 Divided into 64
Routing parameter setting Divided into 8 Divided into 64
Multiplexed remote I/O network N/A N/A
Ethernet E-mail function N/A Applicable
Note 1: The overall scan time can be confirmed using SD520 and 521.
Note 2: The Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU, with function version B or later and with the first five digits of the serial No.
are "04012" or later, include the high-speed interrupt function dedicated pointer (I49).
I49: 0.2 to 1.0ms in 0.1ms increments
2-6
OVERVIEW
Process CPU
Item
Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU
2
Latch function Applicable
Output status setting when STOP to RUN Applicable
Clock function Applicable
Remote Remote RUN/STOP Applicable
operation Remote PAUSE Applicable
Remote reset Applicable
Remote latch clear Applicable
Input Input module Applicable
response High-speed input module Applicable
time Interruption module Applicable
amendment
Setting the switches of the Q series Intelligent Applicable
Function Modules
Monitoring Monitor condition setting Applicable
function Monitor/test for local Device Applicable
Write during Online write in ladder mode Applicable
RUN Batch online file write Applicable
Measure Program list monitor Applicable
execution Interrupt program monitor Applicable
time Scan time measurement Applicable
Enforced ON/OFF for external I/O Applicable
Sampling trace function Applicable
Multiple-user debugging function Applicable
(Pointer-specified online write)
Watchdog timer Applicable
Online module change function Applicable
Self-diagnosis function Applicable
Failure history Applicable
System Whole CPU Applicable
protect (Using DIP switch)
Memory card Applicable
(Using write protect switch)
File unit Applicable
(By registering password)
Access from network Applicable
(Using remote password)
System display Applicable
LED display LED display Applicable
Preference setting Applicable
Built-in serial communication function None
Automatic writing to standard ROM Applicable
Interrupt Interrupt module (QI60) Applicable
Internal timer Applicable (set to 0.5 - 1000ms (in 0.5ms increments))
Error occurrence Applicable
Intelligent function module Applicable
Label programming Applicable
Function block Applicable
Macro instruction (user defined instruction) Applicable
MELSECNET Low-speed cyclic setting Applicable
/H Station-specific parameter setting Applicable
Refresh parameter setting Applicable
Routing parameter setting Divided into 64
Multiplexed remote I/O network Applicable
Ethernet E-mail function Applicable
2-7
OVERVIEW
Hardware Specifications

Item
CPU module Power CPU alone CPU alone
supply and
main base
combined
in one
Switch RUN/STOP Applicable Applicable
(/RESET) (Note 1)
RESET/L.CLR None Applicable
Switch operation RUN/STOP Applicable Applicable
RESET Applicable Applicable
Latch clear Disabled (performed using remote
Applicable
latch clear of GX Developer)
External interface RS-232 Applicable Applicable
USB None None Available
Memory card None Applicable
LED display MODE None Applicable
RUN Applicable Applicable
ERR. Applicable Applicable
USER None (Note 2) Applicable
BAT. None (Note 2) Applicable
BOOT None Applicable
POWER Applicable None None
External H 98mm (3.86inch) 98mm (3.86inch)
dimensions W 245mm 27.4mm (1.08inch) 27.4mm (1.08inch)
(9.65inch)
D 97.5mm 89.3mm (3.52inch) 89.3mm (3.52inch)
(3.84inch)
5VDC internal current consumption 0.22A 0.25A 0.27A 0.60A 0.64A
Weight 0.66kg 0.13 kg 0.20 kg
Note 1: On the Basic model, one switch is used to perform RUN/STOP/RESET.
Note 2: Indicated by the ERR. LED.
Process CPU
Item
Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU
CPU module CPU alone
Switch RUN/STOP Applicable
RESET/L.CLR Applicable
Switch operation RUN/STOP Applicable
RESET Applicable
Latch clear Applicable
External interface RS-232 Applicable
USB Applicable
Memory card Applicable
LED display MODE Applicable
RUN Applicable
ERR. Applicable
USER Applicable
BAT. Applicable
BOOT Applicable
POWER None
External H 98mm (3.86 inch)
dimensions W 27.4mm(1.08 inch)
D 89.3mm (3.52 inch)
5VDC internal current consumption 0.64A
Weight 0.20kg
2-8
OVERVIEW
2.2 Compatibility of QCPU with
AnS/Q2AS
Compatibility of QCPU with AnS/Q2AS

2
The following table shows the compatibility between QCPU programs and AnS/Q2AS series programs. Note that this
information is a general guideline only, and that specific detail should be checked from the corresponding product manual.
Item Compatibility with AnS Compatibility with Q2AS

General program Usable after conversion into Q series program by Same as the left.
GX Developer. Note that some instructions have
been deleted or the method is described differently.
Refer to Chapter 15, Section 15.1.1 for details of
the Basic model.
Refer to Chapter 15, Section 15.1.2 for details of
the High Performance model.
Ethernet The program for Compatible for only the device memory access Compatible. Note that sequence programs and
Host computers functions. Note that some device memories are other file accessing programs need to be modified.
inaccessible. The Program must be modified to use
the other functions or to use device memories
without restrictions. For details, refer to the Q
Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol
Reference Manual.
The user Incompatible. Compatible.
application
program for PLC
MELSECNET/10 Compatible for assigning LB/LW/LX/LY/SB/SW. Compatible for LB/LW/LX/LY/SB/SW assignment.
Incompatible for MELSECNET/10 dedicated Compatible for MELSECNET/10 dedicated
instructions. instructions.
CC-Link Incompatible for sequence programs. Compatible for sequence programs.
Serial The program for Compatible for only the device memory access Compatible. Note that sequence programs and
communication Host computers functions. Note that some device memories are not other file accessing programs need to be modified.
accessible. The Program must be modified to use
the other functions or to use device memories
without restrictions. For details, refer to the Q
Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol
Reference Manual.
The user Incompatible. Compatible.
application
program for PLC
Note: For program compatibility, some of the instructions, e.g. special and network module dedicated instructions, have been deleted in Q
series or changed in specifications. For details, refer to Chapter 15, Section 15.1.1/Section 15.1.2.
2-9
3. QCPU
3.1 General Specifications
General Specifications
General specifications show the specifications of the environment where these products can be installed and operated.
Unless exceptional specifications are indicated, the general specifications apply to all Q series products. Install and operate
3
the Q series products in the environment given in the general specifications.
Item Specifications
Operating ambient 0 to 55 C
temperature
Storage ambient -25 to 75 C (Note 5)
temperature
Operating ambient 5 to 95%RH, non-condensing (Note 4)
humidity
Storage ambient 5 to 95%RH, non-condensing (Note 4)
humidity
Vibration resistance Conforming to JIS Under intermittent vibration Sweep count
B 3502, IEC 10 times each in X,
Frequency Acceleration Amplitude
61131-2 Y, Z directions
0.075mm
10 to 57Hz — (for 80 min.)
(0.003inch)
57 to 150Hz 9.8m/s2 —
Under continuous vibration
Frequency Acceleration Amplitude

0.035mm
10 to 57Hz —
(0.001inch)
57 to 150Hz 4.9m/s2 —
2
Shock resistance Conforming to JIS B 3502, IEC 61131-2 147 m/s , 3 times each in X, Y, Z directions
Operating ambiance No corrosive gases
Operating altitude 2000m (6557.38ft.) max. (Note 3)
Installation location Inside control panel
Overvoltage category II or less
(Note 1)
Pollution degree 2 or less
(Note 2)
Note 1: This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical
power distribution network and the machinery within the premises. Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is
supplied from fixed facilities. The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300 V is 2500 V.
Note 2: This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in the environment where the equipment is used.
Pollution level 2 is when only non-conductive pollution occurs but temporary conductivity may be produced due to condensation.
Note 3: The CPU cannot be used under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude 0m (0ft.). Doing so may cause a failure.
Note 4: When used with the AnS series modules, the Q series PLC should be operated within 10 to 90%RH.
Note 5: When used with the AnS series modules, the Q series PLC should be stored at -20 to 75 C .
3-1
QCPU 3.2 Basic model QCPU:
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
3.2.1 Applicable Mode List
Overview The following ‘applicable model list’ provides guidelines for

the modules that are mountable to base units only.
The following model list shows models applicable with the Accessories etc that are not mounted directly to base units,
Basic model QCPUs. A restriction on the number of e.g. optional connectors, are given in the model list at the
mountable modules applies to network and other modules. end of this book.
Module restriction information is shown in the table. Refer For the applicable model list of the High-performance,
to the respective sections of the module specifications for high-function High Performance model QCPUs, refer to
details. Chapter 3, Section 3.3.1.
Applicable Model List
Number of Current
Product Type Description Points Occupied Consumption (A) Remarks
[I/O Allocation] 5VDC 24VDC
CPU module Q00JCPU Program capacity : 8k steps, — 0.22 —
(Basic model QCPU) number of I/O points : 256 points,
number of I/O device points : 2048 points,
basic instruction processing speed : 200ns
Built-in power supply and base
Q00CPU Program capacity : 8k steps, — 0.25 —
number of I/O points : 1024 points,
Q01CPU Program capacity : 14k steps, — 0.27 —
number of I/O points : 1024 points,
Battery Q6BAT Battery for program memory, standard RAM — — —
3-2
3.2 Basic model QCPU: QCPU
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
When using Q3 SB,Q3 B,Q5 B,Q6 B base unit

(Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.2.2 "System configuration" for details of restrictions.)
Number of Current
Points Consumption (A)
Product Type Description Occupied Restrictions
[I/O 5VDC 24VDC 3
Allocation]
Slim type main Q32SB Q series module mounting base — 0.086 — 1
base unit For power supply (Q61SP) + CPU + 2 I/O slots
Q33SB Q series module mounting base — 0.086 — 1
For power supply (Q61SP) + CPU + 3 I/O slots
Main base unit Q33B Q series module mounting base — 0.105 — —
For power supply + CPU + 3 I/O slots
Q35B Q series module mounting base — 0.110 — —
Extension base unit Q52B Q series module mounting base — 0.080 — —
For 2 I/O slots
For 5 I/O slots
For power supply + 3 I/O slots
Extension cable QC05B 0.45m (1.48ft.) cable for extension base — — — 1
QC06B 0.6m (1.97ft.) cable for extension base — — — —
QC12B 1.2m (3.93 ft.) cable for extension base — — — —
QC30B 3m (9.84 ft.) cable for extension base — — — —
QC50B 5m (16.39 ft.) cable for extension bas — — — —
Slim type power Q61SP Power supply for Q3 SB, 100-240VAC input, 5VDC 2A output — — — 1
supply module
Power supply Q61P-A1 Power supply for Q3 B/Q6 B, 100-120VAC input, 5VDC — — — —
module 6A output
Q61P-A2 Power supply for Q3 B/Q6 B, 200-240VAC input, 5VDC — — — —
6A output
Q62P Power supply for Q3 B/Q6 B, 100-240VAC input, 5VDC — — — —
3A/24VDC 0.6A output
Q63P Power supply for Q3 B/Q6 B, 24VDC input, 5VDC 6A — — — —
output
Q64P Power supply for Q3 B/Q6 B, 100/200VAC input, 5VDC — — — —
8.5A output
Input module QX10 16-point 100-120VAC input module 16 [16pt X] 0.050 — —
QX28 8-point 100-240VAC input module 16 [16pt X] 0.050 — —
QX40 16-point 24VDC positive common 16 [16pt X] 0.050 — —
QX40-S1 16-point 24VDC for positive common high-speed input 16 [16pt HX] 0.060 — —
QX70 16-point 5/12VDC shared between positive and negative 16 [16pt X] 0.055 — —
commons
commons
commons
QX80 16-point 24VDC negative common 16 [16pt X] 0.050 — —
1: Refer to the relevant sections.
3-3
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU

Number of Current
[I/O 5VDC 24VDC
Allocation]
Output module QY10 16-point 240VAC/24VDC contact output 16 [16pt Y] 0.430 — —
QY18A 8-point 240VAC/24VDC contact output 16 [16pt Y] 0.430 — —
(All points independent)
QY22 16-point 100/240VAC triac output (contact) 16 [16pt Y] 0.400 — —
QY40P 16-point 12/24VDC transistor (sink) 16 [16pt Y] 0.065 0.010 —
QY50 16-point 12/24VDC transistor (sink) 16 [16pt Y] 0.080 0.020 —
QY68A 8-point 5/12/24VDC transistor (All points independent, used as 16 [16pt Y] 0.110 — —
either sink or source)
QY80 16-point 12/24VDC transistor (source) 16 [16pt Y] 0.080 0.020 —
QY81P 32-point 12/24VDC transistor (source) 32 [32pt Y] 0.095 0.040 —
I/O mixed module QH42P 24VDC, 32 input points, positive common, 32 [32pt XY] 0.130 0.015 —
12/24VDC 32 output points, transistor (sink)
QX48Y57 24VDC, 8 input points, positive common, 16 [16pt XY] 0.080 0.010 —
Interrupt module QI60 16 points of interrupt inputs 16 [16pt I] 0.14 — 1
Blank module QG60 Dustproof module for unused slot 16 [16pt S] — — —
Ethernet module QJ71E71 Ethernet interface module (10BASE-T, 10BASE5) 32 [32pt F] 0.50 — 1
QJ71E71-B2 Ethernet interface module (10BASE2) 32 [32pt F] 0.70 — 1
QJ71E71-100 Ethernet interface module (100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T) 32 [32pt F] 0.50 — 1
MELSECNET/H QJ71BR11 10Mbps communication speed-compatible coaxial bus (control 32 [32pt F] 0.75 — 1
module station, normal station) 1
QJ71LP21-25 10Mbps/25Mbps communication speed-compatible duplex 32 [32pt F] 0.55 — 1
optical loop (SI/H-PCF/QSI cable)
(control station, normal station) 1
QJ71LP21G 10Mbps communication speed-compatible duplex optical 32 [32pt F] 0.55 — 1
loop(50GI cable ) (control station, normal station) 1
QJ71LP21GE 10Mbps communication speed-compatible duplex optical 32 [32pt F] 0.55 — 1
loop(62.5GI cable ) (control station, normal station) 1
FL-net module QJ71FL71-F01 FL-net (OPCN-2) interface module 32 [32pt F] 0.50 — 1
Frame Ver. 2 compatible (10BASE-T, 10BASE5)
QJ71FL71-B2-F01 FL-net (OPCN-2) interface module 32 [32pt F] 0.70 — 1
Frame Ver. 2 compatible (10BASE2)
CC-Link module QJ61BT11 Master station, local station 32 [32pt F] 0.46 — 1
CC-Link/LT QJ61CL12 Master station 2 0.13 0.028 1
module
AS-i module QJ71AS92 AS-i master station 32 [32pt F] 0.40 — —
Serial QJ71C24 RS-232, RS-422/485, 1 channel each 32 [32pt F] 0.31 — —
communication
QJ71C24-R2 RS-232, 2 channels 32 [32pt F] 0.26 — —
module
Intelligent QD51 BASIC program, 2 channels of RS232 32 [32pt F] 0.26 — —
communication QD51-R24 BASIC program, 1 channel of RS232, 1 channel of RS-422 32 [32pt F] 0.31 — —
module
Channel Q64AD-GH Analog input (voltage, current), 4 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.89 — —
-isolated Q62AD-DGH Analog input (current), 2 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.22 — —
analog/digital With signal conditioning function
conversion module
3-4
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU

Number of Current
[I/O 5VDC 24VDC
Allocation] 3
Analog to digital Q64AD Analog input (voltage, current), 4 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.63 — —
conversion module Q68ADV Analog input (voltage), 8 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.64 — —
Q68ADI Analog input (current), 8 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.64 — —
Channel Q62DA-FG Analog output (voltage, current), 2 channels, with output monitor 16 [16pt F] 0.37 0.30 —
-isolated
digital/analog
conversion module
Digital to analog Q62DA Analog output, (voltage, current). 2 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.33 0.12 —
conversion module Q64DA Analog output, (voltage, current). 4 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.34 0.18 —
Q68DAV Analog output (voltage), 8 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.39 0.19 —
Q68DAI Analog output (current), 8 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.38 0.28 —
Channel Q64TDV-GH Thermocouple input, 4 channels, micro voltage input 16 [16pt F] 0.50 — —
-isolated Q64TD Thermocouple input, 4 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.50 — —
thermocouple input
module
Thermocouple Input Q64RD Platinum temperature-measuring resistor input (3/4 wire type), 4 16 [16pt F] 0.60 — —
Module channels
Temperature control Q64TCTT Thermocouple input, 4 channels, transistor output 16 [16pt F] 0.55 — —
module Q64TCTTBW Thermocouple input, 4 channels, transistor output, with 32 [32pt S + 0.64 — —
disconnection detection function 16pt F]
Q64TCRT Platinum temperature-measuring resistor input, 4 channels, 16 [16pt F] 0.55 — —
transistor output
Q64TCRTBW Platinum temperature-measuring resistor input, 4 channels, 32 [16pt S + 0.64 — —
transistor output, with disconnection detection function 16pt F]
High-speed counter QD62 DC input sink output 16 [16pt F] 0.30 — —
module QD62E DC input source output 16 [16pt F] 0.33 — —
QD62D Differential input sink output 16 [16pt F] 0.38 — —
Channel QD60P8-G Pulse input, 8 channels 32 [32pt F] 0.58 — —
-isolated pulse input
module
Positioning module QD70P4 Pulse train open collector output, 4 axes 32 [32pt F] 0.55 — —
QD70P8 Pulse train open collector output, 8 axes 32 [32pt F] 0.74 — —
QD75P1 Pulse train open collector output, 1 axis 32 [32pt F] 0.40 — —
QD75D1 Pulse train differential driver output, 1 axis 32 [32pt F] 0.52 — —
QD75D2 Pulse train differential driver output, 2 axes 32 [32pt F] 0.56 — —
QD75M1 SSCNET compatible, 1 axis 32 [32pt F] 0.40 — —
QD75M2 SSCNET compatible, 2 axes 32 [32pt F] 0.40 — —
X: input, HX: High-speed input, Y: output, XY: I/O mixed, F: intelligent, I: Interrupt, S: free
Note: The "positive common" input module is used by applying a positive + voltage to the common terminal, and the "negative common"
input module is used by applying a negative - voltage to the common terminal.
1 When used with the Q00JCPU, Q00CPU or Q01CPU, MELSECNET/H remote master is not applicable.
2 Any of 16, 32, 48, 64, 128, 256, 512 and 1024 points can be set with the DIP SW. (Assignment: Intelligent)
3-5
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
3.2.2 System Configuration
Basic configuration
This section is an overview of Basic model QCPU system configuration, including devices and peripherals.
(1) Devices for Q00JCPU system
MITSUBISHI
LITHIUM BATTERY
Battery Basic model QCPU

I/O, intelligent function modules
(Q6BAT) (Q00JCPU)
Extension cable
Q5 B extension base unit Q6 B extension base unit
(QC05B,QC06B,QC12B,
(Q52B,Q55B) (Q63B,Q65B,Q68B,Q612B)
QC30B,QC50B,QC100B)
Power supply, I/O, intelligent

I/O, intelligent function modules
function modules
3-6
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
(2) Devices for Q00/Q01CPU system
MITSUBISHI
LITHIUM BATTERY 3
Basic model QCPU Battery
(Q00CPU, Q01CPU) (Q6BAT)
Power supply (Note 1), Main base unit Power supply,

Slim type main base unit
I/O, intelligent (Q33B,Q35B, I/O, intelligent
(Q32SB,Q33SB,Q35SB)
function modules Q38B,Q312B) function modules
Q6 B extension
Q5 B extension Extension cable
base unit
base unit (QC05B,QC06B,QC12B, (Q63B,Q65B,
(Q52B,Q55B) QC30B,QC50B,QC100B) Q68B,Q612B)
Power supply,
I/O, intelligent
I/O, intelligent
function modules
function modules
Note 1: The slim type main base unit can use only the slim type power supply module Q61SP.
3-7
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
(3) Peripheral devices
Basic model QCPU Basic model QCPU

(Q00JCPU) (Q00CPU, Q01CPU)
RS-232 cable
(QC30R2)
Personal computer
GX Developer
(Version 7 or later)
Instructions for system configuration

(1) The total number of I/O and intelligent function modules that can be mounted on the main and extension base units is up
to 16 for the Q00JCPU, and up to 24 for the Q00CPU or Q01CPU. This total number of mountable modules also applies
when the Q6 B/Q5 B extension base unit is used. Base units with 2, 3, 5, 8, 12 I/O slots are available.
Whichever combination of base units used, the total number of loadable modules is up to 16 for the Q00JCPU and up to
24 for the Q00CPU or Q01CPU.
(2) The Basic model QCPU cannot be connected with the QA1S6 B/QA65B extension base unit. (You cannot use the
A/AnS series I/O and special function modules.)
(3) The total extension cable distance is within 13.2m(43.3ft.).
(4) Unlike the A and QnA series CPUs, the Basic model QCPU automatically recognizes the number of slots of the
connected main/extension base(s) and assigned I/O numbers.
Refer to the Basic model QCPU (Q Mode) User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection).
An example of I/O number assignment in the automatic mode of base unit setting without I/O assignment is given on the
following page.
(5) The slim type main base unit can only use the slim type power supply module Q61SP. The I/O and intelligent function
modules not including the power supply module are mountable on the Q3 B main base unit.
The slim type main base unit does not support connection of an extension base unit.
3-8
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
Q35B (5 slots occupied)

0 1 2 3 4 ............. Slot No.
Input module
Input module
Input module
Output module
Output module
Power supply
Q00CPU
module
I/O numbers assigned in terms of I/O points of slots.
3
16 16 32 16 64
......... I/O number allocating sequence
X00 X10 X20 Y40 Y50
Slot No. of extension base unit 1
X0F X1F X3F Y4F Y8F is assigned the number next to
Extension cable Q65B (5 slots occupied) the last slot No. of main base unit.
5 6 7 8 9
Output module
function module
function module
function module
Intelligent
Intelligent
Intelligent
Power supply
Vacant
1
module
Vacant slot points set in "PLC system setting"

IN OUT PLC parameter. (Default: 16 points)
32 32 32 16 16
90 B0 D0 YF0 100
Slot No. of extension base unit 2 is assigned
AF CF EF YFF 10F the number next to the last slot No. of extension
Q68B (8 slots occupied) base unit 1.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Input module
Input module
function module
function module
function module
Output module
Output module
Output module
Intelligent
Intelligent
Intelligent
Power supply
module
2
IN OUT
16 16 32 32 32 16 16 16
points points points points points points points points
X110 X120 130 150 170 Y190 Y1A0 Y1B0
X11F X12F 14F 16F 18F Y19F Y1AF Y1BF

Note: Since the maximum Q00JCPU I/O points are 256 points (X/Y0 to X/YFF), X/Y100 and higher cannot be used for the modules
mounted on the main and extension bases in the above system.
The number of mountable I/O and intelligent function modules is 16. You cannot mount 17 or more I/O and intelligent function
modules on the main and extension bases.
(6) The Basic model QCPU does not support USB communication.
(7) The Basic model QCPU is compatible with GX Developer Version 7 or later.
(8) Modules restricted on the number to be mounted.
Module Number of modules loaded Remarks
MELSECNET/H network module
QJ71LP21-25, QJ71BR11, QJ71LP21G, Up to 1
QJ71LP21GE
Ethernet interface module
Up to 1
QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71-100
CC-Link system master • local module
Up to 2 Only modules of function version B or later
QJ61BT11
Interrupt module QI60 1
(9) Only the GOT-A900 series/GOT-F900 series graphic operation terminals are usable (Q mode-compatible system OS
and communication driver must be installed.)
Note that the Q series bus interface is required for bus connection.
The bus extension connector box (A9GT-QCNB) cannot be connected to the Q00JCPU.
The GOT800 series, A77GOT and A64GOT are not compatible.
(10) The CC-Link system master/local module (QJ61BT11), DeviceNet interface module (QJ71DN91), and FL-net
(OPCN-2) interface module (QJ71FL71-F01, QJ71FL71-B2-F01) of function version B or later are compatible.
3-9
3.2 Basic model QCPU:
QCPU Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
3.2.3 Performance and functions of
CPU modules
Overview Function Explanations
The Basic model QCPU is a module designed for The following explains the functions of the Basic model
optimum control for an easy and compact system on a QCPU. Refer to Chapter 15, Section 15.1.1 Programming
small-scale. for the functions related to programming.
The following are the features of the Basic model QCPU.
High-speed program processing I/O control system
The Basic model QCPU has achieved a processing speed
The type of I/O control system for the Basic model QCPU
about five times higher in PC MIX value than that of the
is refresh mode. In refresh mode, input data from the input
conventional model (A2SHCPU).
module and output data to the output module are
Base units adopting high-speed bus system refreshed at once, when the sequence program END
The Q series base units have significantly improved data instruction is processed.
transfer speed between CPU and other modules such as
I/O, intelligent function and network modules (approx. 4 CPU module
times higher than existing models). Especially, they can CPU (operation processor) At input
Input area for refresh Input
reduce the influence of large amounts of data transfer Data memory
for input (X)
peripheral
X0 device module
to/from network modules on the scan time.
At input refresh Area for
Number of control I/O points communications
with input module At output
The Q00JCPU can control up to 256 points and the refresh Output
Data memory
Q00/Q01CPU can control up to 1024 points of I/O Y22
Y20 for output (Y)
module
mounted on the main and extension base units. When
there is a remote I/O network such as CC-Link in the Sometimes in the interrupt program, high-speed response
system, the Basic model QCPU can control up to 2048 is necessary. In this case, we use direct I/O (DX for input
points of I/O. and DY for output) for I/O control to refresh I/O data while
Expandability of up to 16 or 24 I/O slots the instructions are executing. Therefore, there is no need
If the main base unit (Q00JCPU: five I/O slots, to wait for the END instruction to execute.
Q00CPU/Q01CPU: max. 12 I/O slots) does not provide For example, when you describe X100, X100 data will be
obtained by refresh processing, but when you describe
enough I/O slots, it is possible to connect upto 2 extension
DX100, you will get the X100 data of the same input
base units to a Q00JCPU which will increase the I/O slots module acquired at the point of executing its contact
to 16. (While 4 extension base units to a Q01CPU, will instruction. This also applies to the output.
increase the I/O slots to 24)
Security Operation processing
A password can be specified to restrict access to
sequence program from third parties. The Basic model QCPU has three operation modes: RUN,
Serial communication function STOP and PAUSE. Each operation mode performs the
(Available for Q00/Q01CPU) following operation processing respectively.
This function provides communication using the MC
Operation processing in RUN mode
protocol, with the RS-232 interface of the CPU module
that is connected to a personal computer, display device (1) In the RUN mode, sequence program operation
or similar using an RS-232 cable. alternates between step 0 and END (FEND)
(The MC protocol is the abbreviation of the MELSEC instruction.
communication protocol.) (2) When entering the RUN mode, the QCPU re-outputs
ROM built-in as standard the output (Y) statuses saved at STOP if parameter
The parameters and program stored in the program setting (STOP to RUN-time output mode setting) has
memory can be transferred to the standard ROM.
been made. (The saved output data can also be
cleared before RUN.)
3-10
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU QCPU
CPU modules
Operation processing in STOP mode <For double word data>

(1) In the STOP mode, sequence program operation is Example: Setting range by digit specification of inputs X0
stopped by the RUN/STOP switch or remote STOP, or to X1F
X1F X1C X1B X18 X17 X14 X13 X10 XF XC XB X8 X7 X4 X3 X0
operation is stopped due to an error occurring.
(2) When entering the STOP mode, the QCPU saves the K1
3
specified
current output (Y) statuses and turns off all outputs (Y). range
K2 (4 points)
Device data other than the output (Y) is held. Note that specified
range
K3 (8 points)
the Q series output module can be set to hold the specified
range
output at a STOP when an error occurs. K4
specified
(12 points)
range
Operation processing in PAUSE mode K5 (16 points)
specified
(1) In the PAUSE mode, sequence program operation is range
(20 points)
K6
specified
stopped with the output (Y) and data memory status range
K7 (24 points)
held. The outputs, which are ON, are kept ON, and the specified
range
(28 points)
inputs that should turn OFF the outputs are ignored. K8
specified
range
When using this mode, therefore, fully note the system (32 points)
operation in the PAUSE mode. Specified Digits Numerical Range That Can Be Handled
Data type K1 (4 points) 0 to 15
K2 (8 points) 0 to 255
The Basic model QCPU supports three different data
K3 (12 points) 0 to 4095
types, bit, word, and double word. The following table K4 (16 points) 0 to 65535
shows the numerical ranges and the CPU module's K5 (20 points) 0 to 1048575
K6 (24 points) 0 to 167772165
internal devices to store those values.
K7 (28 points) 0 to 268435455
Data Numerical Range
K8 (32 points) -2147483648 to 2147483647 (Note 2)
Bit 0(OFF), 1(ON)
Word Word device -32768 to 32767 (Note 2) Values in parentheses are the numbers of bit device points.
Bit device Value can be handled as a collection of 4,
8, 12 and 16 bits. (Note 1) Note 2: Numerical values in an unsigned format (example: 0 to
65535 numerical range for word) are not supported.
Double Word device -2147483648 to 2147483647 (Note 2)
word Bit device Value can be handled as a collection of 4,
8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28 and 32 bits. (Note 1)
Timers' timing performance capabilities
The internal timers of the Basic model QCPU are all
Note 1: Bit devices can also handle numerical data by using digit
on-delay timers and are available in four types: low-speed
specification. In digit specification, bit devices are
timer, high-speed timer, low-speed retentive timer, and
represented by specifying them in 4-bit increments.
high-speed retentive timer.
<For word data> The timing increments are shown below.
Example: Setting range by digit specification of input X0 Timing Increments
to XF Low-speed timer Variable between 1 and 1000ms
XF XC XB X8 X7 X4 X3 X0 Low-speed retentive timer
High-speed timer Variable between 0.1 and 100ms
High-speed retentive timer
K1 specified
range
(4 points)
Note that the timing range is up to the preset timing
K2 specified
range increments × 32767. Since timer measurement is made
K3 specified (8 points) by adding the value of every scan time measured at every
range
K4 specified (12 points)
END instruction to the timer present value at OUT
range instruction processing, a measurement error of -{(1 scan
(16 points) time) + (timer limit setting)} to 1 scan time occurs.
Specified Digits Numerical Range That Can Be Handled
K1 (4 points) 0 to 15 Instructions for use of timers
K2 (8 points) 0 to 255 The timers cannot be used in interrupt programs.
K3 (12 points) 0 to 4095
K4 (16 points) -32768 to 32767
Values in parentheses are the numbers of bit device points.
3-11
CPU modules
Interrupt program performance capabilities However, if the high-speed mode is selected back up of
the index register(s) will not be done as previously in
Any of the following conditions are usable to start interrupt normal mode. Therefore, care needs to be taken while
programs. programming.
(1) Interrupt from the QI60 interrupt module
Back up of index register
(2) Cyclic interrupt by CPU's internal timer (2ms to
In the normal mode, where the save/return processing of
1000ms)
Starting time delay the index register Z is automatically executed on shift to
The following time delay is required to start an interrupt an interrupt program, use of the index register in the
program. interrupt program does not corrupt the value of the index
CPU Type Starting Time (µs) (Note 1) register.
Q00JCPU 350 Interrupt Main program
occurrence
Q00CPU 285
Q01CPU 270
Index save
Note 1: Shows the required starting time when the QI60 is
mounted on slot 0 of the main base unit. Interrupt
Start inhibiting factor program
An interrupt program is not started until the EI Index return
instruction is enabled.
Start delaying factors
With the following cases, the starting of the interrupt
In the high-speed execution mode, however, this
program is delayed. save/return processing is not performed. Hence, use of
(1) During execution of any instruction the index register in the interrupt program may produce an
(2) During processing of request for read/write of data in illegal index register value at the moment it returns to the
CPU's internal memory from GX Developer, network main program. To prevent it, use the ZPUSH/ZPOP
module, GOT, etc. instruction in the interrupt program to perform the
save/return processing of the index register in the user’s
(3) When multiple interrupt programs are started at the program.
same time, the lower priority programs wait until the
Constant scan function
processing of the higher-priority programs is complete.
Note for use of interrupt programs In the processing of a program in the CPU module, the
If the ratio of the interrupt program processing time scan time changes per scan because the processing time
compared to the total processing time is too high, it may varies depending on whether an instruction in a sequence
delay the scan execution program processing, resulting in program is executed or not. The constant scan function is
WDT error. Therefore, care should be taken when setting designed to run the sequence program repeatedly while
the interrupt conditions. maintaining a constant scan time.
When the scan time is constant, time delays in external
High-speed execution of interrupt program signal input, operation processing and output are fixed,
To shorten the time delay from when an interrupt condition therefore increasing the accuracy of controlling equipment.
is true until interrupt program processing starts, you can The constant scan time can be set in the range 1 to
choose the high-speed execution mode for an interrupt 2000ms in 1ms increments.
program. It can reduce the time delay as follows. Scan time (when constant scan time is set to 10ms)
CPU Type Starting Time (µs) (Note 1) Sequence program
Waiting time
Q00JCPU 325 END processing
Q00CPU 265
Q01CPU 255
8ms 2ms 9ms 1ms
Note 1: Shows the required starting time when the QI60 is
mounted on slot 0 of the main base. 10ms 10ms
3-12
CPU modules
Processing at instantaneous power failure Failure history

When the supplied power supply voltage for the power The Basic model QCPU stores the results of the
supply module becomes lower than the rated voltage, the
self-diagnostic function and time of failure in the CPU
Basic model QCPU detects an instantaneous power
failure and performs the following actions. memory as a failure history. Confirmation of failure can be
made even after the error is resolved. 3
When an instantaneous power failure within the
permissible time occurs System protection functions
(1) When an instantaneous power failure occurs, the
output status is held and operation processing is The Basic model QCPU has several protection functions
suspended. (system protections) against program changes from the
However, the timing of the timer(s) and watchdog timer third party.
(WDT) timing continue. (For example, when the scan
time is 190ms at the WDT setting of 200ms, the System protections have different methods for different
occurrence of a 15ms instantaneous power failure objects to be protected.
causes a watchdog timer error.) Protection of files
(2) When the instantaneous power failure is cleared,
operation processing resumes. Register passwords for each file. You can restrict both
Instantaneous power external read and write from/to the specified file.
failure occurrence Power restored
END 0 END END Correct password management achieves high protection
capability against a third party.
CPU suspends
operation. Use this method to protect programs.
A password can be set with four alphanumeric characters.
When an instantaneous power failure beyond the
Files that can be password protected include programs
permissible time occurs
The Basic model QCPU behaves the same as for when it and device comment files.
is reset and powered on, or when it is reset by the
RUN/STOP/RESET switch. Serial Communication Function
The serial communication function is designed to provide
Self-diagnostics
The Basic model QCPU has a function called data communication between the QCPU and an external
self-diagnostic function, to diagnose faults within the host device, or personal computer etc connected by a serial
CPU. Self-diagnostic is designed to prevent PLC communication cable (RS-232/ 422/ 485).
malfunctions and to improve preventive maintenance. On
detection of a fault, the CPU module ERR. LED The Q00CPU and Q01CPU include the serial
lights/flickers and stops PLC operation, for example. The communication function. (The Q00JCPU does not include
following are diagnostic items.
the serial communication function.)
Diagnostic Item Diagnostic Item
CPU hardware fault File access error The following describes the specifications, functions and
END instruction unexecuted Instruction execution not various settings necessary to make communication using
possible
the serial communication function.
RAM check Parameter setting check
Operation circuit check Link parameter error RS-232 cable
Fuse blown Instruction code error
I/O interrupt error No END instruction
Personal computer,
Intelligent function module error Pointer setting error
display device or like
Control bus error Operation check error
Instantaneous power failure FOR to NEXT instruction
occurrence structure error Communication in
Battery low CALL to RET instruction MC protocol
structure error Note: If the CPU module is disconnected from the personal
I/O module verify Interrupt program error computer, display device or similar with which
Intelligent function module Extended instruction error communication is being made in the MC protocol while
assignment error connected to GX Developer (personal computer), normal
No parameters Watchdog timer error communication can be made with GX Developer. For
Boot error File setting error information on booting the personal computer, when this
occurs, refer to the relevant instruction/manual.
3-13
CPU modules
Specifications Function List

(1) Communication specifications Function Command Processing
Clarify that the specifications of the personal computer, Bit 0401 Reads bit devices in 1-point
unit (00 1) units.
display device or similar match those of the following
Reads bit devices in 16-point
Batch read
table, before using the serial communication function. Word 0401 units.
Item Default Setting Range unit (00 0) Reads word devices in 1-point
Communication Full-duplex Fixed units.
method communication
Synchronization Start-stop synchronous Fixed Bit 1401 Writes to bit devices in 1-point
method (asynchronous) unit (00 1) units
9.6kbps Writes to bit devices in 16-point
19.2kbps Batch write
Word 1401 units
Transmission rate 19.2kbps 38.4kbps
unit (00 0) Writes to word devices in
57.6kbps
115.2kbps 1-point units
Start bit: 1 Reads bit devices in units of 16
Data bit: 8 points and 32 points by
Data format Fixed
Parity bit: ODD
Stop bit: 1 designating the device at
Random Word 1403
Transmission DTR/DSR control  random.
read unit (00 0)
Device memory
control Reads word devices in 1-point

Sum check code No Yes, No and 2-point units by designating
Transmission wait No wait No wait, 10ms to the device at random.
time 150ms (10ms
increments) Sets/resets bit devices in 1-point
Bit 1402
Write during RUN Disabled Enabled, disabled units by designating the device
unit (00 1)
setting at random.
Extension distance Max.15m (49.18ft.)  Sets/resets bit devices in units
Test
(2) Relationships between MC protocol formats and of 16 points and 32 points by
(Random
designating the units at random.
frames write) Word 1402
Writes to word devices in
unit (00 0)
Function Format 4 Format 5 1-point and 2-point units by
Communication QnA compatible 3C frame designating the device at
using ASCII QnA compatible 4C frame random.
code Registers the bit devices to be
Communication monitored in units of 16 points
using binary QnA compatible 4C frame Monitor data Word 0801 and 32 points.
code registration unit (00 0) Registers the word devices to
: Usable, : Unusable be monitored in 1-point and
2-point units.
The QnA compatible 3C frame and QnA compatible 4C Word 0802 Monitors the devices registered
Monitor
frame are designed to access all devices and all files in unit (0000) for monitoring.
the QCPU/QnACPU from the personal computer, display
device or similar.
Use the commands of the QnA compatible 3C and QnA
compatible 4C frames.
Dedicated protocol commands that were used for
communication between the AnS series computer link
module and the personal computer, display device or
similar cannot be used. For details of the MC protocol,
refer to the Q-Compatible MELSEC Communication
Protocol Reference Manual.
3-14
CPU modules
Accessible devices Clock data

Device Code/Number Device Number Data Name Description
Device
Range (Default Values) Representation Year 4 digits
Input X000 to X7FF Month 1 to 12
Hexadecimal
Output Y000 to Y7FF Day 1 to 31 (automatic leap year judgment)
Internal relay M0 to M8191 Hour 0 to 23 (24 hour system)
Latch relay L0 to L2047
Decimal Minute 0 to 59 3
Annunciator F0 to F1023 Second 0 to 59
Edge relay V000 to V1023 0 Sunday
Link relay B000 to B7FF Hexadecimal 1 Monday
Data register D0 to D11135 Decimal 2 Tuesday
Link register W000 to W7FF Hexadecimal Day of week 3 Wednesday
Contact TS0 to TS511 4 Thursday
Timer Coil TC0 to TC511 5 Friday
Current value TN0 to TN511 6 Saturday
Contact –––
Retentive
timer
Coil ––– Decimal Accuracy
Current value ––– Refer to the CPU performance specifications for accuracy.
Contact CS0 to CS511
Counter Coil CC0 to CC511 Timing range
Current value CN0 to CN511 The clock is settable from January 1, 1980 to December
Special link relay SB000 to SB3FF
Hexadecimal 31, 2079.
Special link register SW000 to SW3FF
Step relay S0 to S2047 (Note 1) Decimal Dimension
Direct input DX000 to DX7FF
Hexadecimal
Direct output DY000 to DY7FF Q00JCPU
Index register Z0 to Z9 11 (0.43)
R0 to R32767
File register
ZR0 to ZR32767 Decimal
Special relay SM0 to SM1023
Special register SD0 to SD1023
98 (3.86)
80 (3.15)
Note 1: Enabled for read only. (Write disabled)

7 (0.28)
ROM operation
The parameter and program that have been debugged 224.5 (8.84)
15.5 (0.61) 245 (9.65)
can be stored into the standard ROM. The parameter and
program stored in the standard ROM are first transferred
to the program memory (drive 0) at power-on (or when the
97.5 (3.84)
CPU module is reset), and then processed. (When setting

has been made to boot operation)
Clock function
Unit: mm (inch)
The Basic model QCPU has an internal clock function. Q00CPU, Q01CPU
Although, the clock data can be read in a sequence Q00CPU
program, it can also be utilized for system time RUN

ERR.
management, and failure history.

The Q series has intelligent function modules that use the
clock data of the CPU module.
98 (3.86)
The clock function is battery-backed during power-off of

the PLC. PULL
RS-232
89.3 (3.52) 27.4 (1.08)

Unit: mm (inch)
3-15
CPU modules
Type
Item Remarks
Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU
Control method Sequence program control method
I/O control method Direct I/O possible using
Refresh mode
device name
Programming language Relay symbol language (ladder)
(Sequence control dedicated language) logic symbolic language (list)
Processing speed LD X0 200ns 160ns 100ns
(sequence instruction) MOV (MOV D0 D1) 700ns 560ns 350ns
Constant scan (ms) Parameter setting
1 to 2000ms (can be specified in 1ms increments)
(Program start at given time intervals)
Program Number of steps 8k 8k 14k
capacity Number of files 1
Number of I/O device points 2048 points (X/Y0 to 7FF) (Note 1)
Number of I/O points 256 points (X/Y0 to FF) 1024 points (X/Y0 to 3FF) (Note 2)
Internal relay [M] Default 8192 points (M0 to 8191) Can be changed within
Latch relay [L] 2048 points (L0 to 2047) 16.4k words by
Link relay [B] 2048 points (B0 to 7FF) parameters.
Timer [T] Default 512 points (T0 to 511) (used as low-speed or high-speed timer)
Switching between low-speed and high-speed timers is set by instruction.
Low-speed/high-speed timer timing increments are parameter-set.
(Low-speed timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms increments, default 100ms)
(High-speed timer: 0.1 to 100ms, 0.1ms increments, default 10ms)
Retentive timer [ST] Default 0 point (ST0 to 511) (used as low-speed or high-speed timer)
Number of device points
Counter [C] • Normal counters Default 512 points (C0 to 511)

• Interrupt counters Max. 128 (Default 0 points, parameter setting)
Data register [D] Default 11136 points (D0 to 11135)
Link register [W] Default 2048 points (W0 to 7FF)
Annunciator [F] Default 1024 points (F0 to 1023)
Edge relay [V] Default 1024 points (V0 to 1023)
File register [R] Unavailable 32768 points (R0 to 32767 / ZR0 to 32767)
Special link relay [SB] 1024 points (SB0 to 3FF) Number of device points is
Special link register [SW] 1024 points (SW0 to 3FF) fixed
Index register [Z] 10 points (Z0 to 9)
Pointer [P] 300 points (P0 to 299)
Interrupt pointer [I] 128 points (I0 to 127)
In parameters, set the cyclic intervals of the system interrupt pointers I28 to I31
(2 to 1000ms, 1ms increments).
Special relay [SM] 1024 points (SM0 to 1023)
Special register [SD] 1024 points (SD0 to 1023)
Function input [FX] 16 points (FX0 to F)
Function output [FY] 16 points (FY0 to F)
Function register [FD] 5 points (FD0 to 4)
3-16
CPU modules

Type
Item Remarks
Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU
Device for direct access to link device.
Link direct device
Dedicated. Specified format: J \ 3
Intelligent function module direct device Device for direct access to buffer memory of intelligent function module.
Specified format: U \G
Latch (power failure compensation) range L0 to 2047 (default) Parameter setting
(Latch range setting can be made for B, F, V, T, ST, C, W and D)
Remote RUN/PAUSE contact 1 point can be set for each RUN and PAUSE contacts from X0-7FF.
Clock function Year, month, day, hour, minute, second, day of week
(Automatic leap year judgment)
Accuracy –3.2 to +5.27 (TYP +1.98) s/day at 0 C
Accuracy –2.57 to +5.27 (TYP +2.22) s/ day at 25 C
Accuracy –11.68 to +3.65 (TYP –2.64) s/ day at 55 C
Permissible instantaneous power failure Refer to the power supply
20ms Depends on power supply module.
time module section.
5VDC internal current consumption 0.22A 0.25A 0.27A
External dimensions 98(3.86)(H) × 245(9.65)(W) 98(3.86)(H) × 27.4(1.08)(W) × 89.3(3.52)(D)
× 98(3.86)(D) mm (inch) mm (inch)
Weight 0.66kg 0.13kg
Note 1: Sum of the number of I/O points on the main/extension base directly controlled by the CPU module with the number of I/O points
controlled as remote I/O by the remote I/O network
Note 2: Number of I/O points on the main/extension base directly controlled by the CPU module
Battery Life Accessories

The Q6BAT battery built in the CPU module is used to
Product Type Quantity
back up the programs and various data stored in the RAM
Battery Q6BAT 1
memory of the CPU module and to maintain timing by the
clock function during a power failure.
Manuals
The Q6BAT is not used while 5VDC is supplied from the
power supply module. The battery life of the Q6BAT The following manuals are related to the Basic model
depends on the total power failure time when 5VDC is not QCPU.
supplied from the power supply module. Name Remarks
QCPU (Q Mode) User's Manual Packed with Q3 B
Battery life (Hardware) main base and Q00JCPU
Basic model QCPU (Q Mode) User's Option
Total Power Failure Time (Hours) Backup Time
Manual (Hardware Design/Maintenance
CPU Type Guaranteed after Battery
Actual value and Inspection)
value Error ON (Hours)
Basic model QCPU (Q Mode) User's Option
Q00CPU 26,000 51,000 710 Manual (Function Explanation/Program
Q00JCPU 26,000 51,000 710 Fundamentals)
Q01CPU 5,600 15,000 420 QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Option
Manual (Common Instructions)
Note 1: If the total power failure time is less than the above value,
the battery must be changed in 10 years as a standard.
3-17
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
3.2.4 CPU Built-In Memories
Overview Intelligent function module parameter

A file for the intelligent function module parameters set
This section describes the specification of CPU module
using GX Configurator. This file does not exist if GX
memory that will store program and other user-created
Configurator was not used for setting the parameters.
data and how to calculate the necessary memory space.
Device comment
Device comment Files annotated to each device of the
Memory Makeup
CPU unit.
The Basic model QCPU uses multiple memories This file does not exist if device comments are not created.
according to the purpose of use in the CPU module. These File register
memories are identified by the access drive numbers. The File register (R, ZR) file.
memories used in the Basic model QCPU are as follows. Program memory (Drive number: 0)
CPU module
Memory that is built-in to the CPU module as standard.
The memory capacity depends on the CPU module type.
Program memory
(Drive number: 0) Type Memory Capacity (Bytes) Number of Files Stored
Q00JCPU 58k 4 (Note 1)
Q00CPU 94k 4 (Note 1)
Standard RAM
(Drive number: 3) Note1: Each of program, parameter, intelligent function module
parameter and device comment files can be stored.
Standard RAM (Drive number: 3)

Standard ROM
(Drive number: 4)
Memory that is built-in to the CPU module as standard.
Type Memory Capacity (Bytes) Number of Files Stored
Q00JCPU None —
Types of data that can be stored into each memory Q00CPU 64k 1 (Note 2)
CPU Built-In Memory Q01CPU 64k 1 (Note 2)
Standard
Memory Name Program RAM Standard
Note2: One file register file can be stored.
memory (Q00/Q01C ROM Standard ROM (Drive number: 4)
PU only)
Drive number 0 3 4 Memory that is built-in to the CPU module as standard.
File size unit 4 bytes — (Note) 4 bytes
Program Memory Number of Files Number of write
Type
Capacity (Bytes) Stored times (times)
Parameter
Intelligent parameter Q00JCPU 58k 4 (Note 3) 100,000
Device comment Q00CPU 94k 4 (Note 3) 100,000
File register Q01CPU 94k 4 (Note 3) 100,000
: Can be stored, : Cannot be stored Note3: Each of program, parameter, intelligent function module
parameter and device comment files can be stored.
Note: The Q00/Q01CPU is assigned 32k points (64k bytes) as file
registers.
When the CPU module is powered on, the parameters and
Program
programs stored in the standard ROM are first transferred
A ladder or list sequence program file.
to the program memory, and then executed within the
Parameter
program memory. (For boot operation setting)
File storing PLC parameters and network parameters set
during programming.
3-18
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
3.2.4 CPU Built-In Memories
Calculating memory capacity Calculate the sum of parameters separately for initial
setting and automatic refresh setting.
Use the following table to calculate the capacity of the files The number of parameters that can be set per module
stored in each memory (drive). using GX Configurator is shown in the following table.
The file size unit is 4 Bytes for each drive. If the file size is
less, then it is rounded up to that size. Automatic Refresh Setting 3
Module name Initial Setting (Max. number of
The User allocated system area (0 to 3K steps) is parameters set)
available for accelerating monitoring from GX Developer Q62AD-DGH 8 15
when memory would be formatted, and the user file area Q64AD-GH 4 27
size would be decline according to the user allocated Q64AD 2 13
Q68ADI 1 25
system area size. Q68ADV 1 25
File Function File Capacity (Bytes) Q62DA-FG 4 9
Q62DA 1 5
Parameter 1k + network parameter capacity (Note 1) Q64DA 1 9
Intelligent function (Note 1) Q68DAI 1 17
module parameter Q68DAV 1 17
Q64TDV-GH 6 13
Program 136 + (4 Number of steps) Q64TD 6 13
Device comment 74 + (sum of comment data sizes of devices) Q64RD 5 17
• Comment data size of one device Q64TCTT 21 45
= 10 + 10250 a + 40 b Q64TCTTBW 21 57
• a: Quotient of ((Number of device points)/256) Q64TCRT 21 45
• b: Remainder of ((Number of device Q64TCRTBW 21 57
QD62 8 14
points)/256)
QD62E 8 14
Note 1: The network parameter and intelligent function module QD62D 8 14
parameter sizes are shown in the following table. This QD60P8-G 24 8
shows the maximum capacities of the corresponding QD70P4 12 26
modules, however the size given may be smaller QD70P8 24 50
depending on the actual settings. QD75P1 — 7
QD75P2 — 14
Corresponding Module Capacity QD75P4 — 28
Ethernet 2060 (Bytes) QD75D1 — 7
QD75D2 — 14
MELSECNET/H 11466 (Bytes) + 1548 bytes QD75D4 — 28
CC-Link 1423 (Bytes/module) + 6 bytes QD75M1 — 7
Analog to digital conversion module 508 (Bytes/module) (Q68AD) QD75M2 — 14
QD75M4 — 28
Digital to analog conversion module 378 (Bytes/module) (Q68DAV) QJ71C24 — 46
Serial communication module 774 (Bytes/module) (QJ71C24-R2) QJ71C24-R2 — 47
QJ71FL71-F01 2 14
Note 2: The maximum number of points that can be stored into QJ71FL71-B2-F01 2 14
the file registers is as shown below.
QJ71AS92 — 30
Memory Type Max. Number of File Register Points Example: How to calculate the number of set parameters
Standard RAM (Drive: 3) 32768 points (Q00/Q01CPU) in automatic refresh setting.
The values of the automatic refresh setting in the above
table assume that all items have been set. For the number
Number of Parameters That Can Be Set of parameters set in automatic refresh setting, each setting
Using GX Configurator item is counted as one.
The CPU module and the MELSECNET/H remote I/O
station are restricted to the number of parameters that can
be set using GX Configurator, depending on the mounted
intelligent function modules, as shown in the following
table.
Max. Number of Parameters Set
Where Intelligent Function
Automatic
Module Is Mounted Initial setting
refresh setting
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU 512 256
Q02/Q02H/06H/Q12H/Q25HCPU 512 256
MELSECNET/H remote I/O station 512 256
When multiple intelligent function modules are mounted,
set the parameters so that the sum of all the intelligent
function modules set parameters do not exceed the This single line is counted as one parameter.
maximum number of set parameters. A vacant field is not counted. The total sum of parameters
set on this setting screen and the sum of parameters set
for other intelligent function modules is the number of
parameters set in the automatic refresh setting.
3-19
20
QCPU 3.3 High Performance model QCPU:

Q02(H)/Q06H/Q12H/Q25HCPU
3.3.1 Applicable Model List
Overview For details of restrictions, refer to the corresponding

module specification sections.
The following model list shows models applicable for the Q
The following ‘applicable model list’ provides guidelines for
mode. Note that the A/AnS series modules are also
available for the Q mode but there may be some functional
Accessories etc that are not mounted directly to base units,
restrictions. Also, among Q series network-related
e.g. optional connectors, are given in the model list at the
modules, there may be restrictions on the number of
end of this book.
mountable modules.
Information for restrictions of modules is shown in the
Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.2.1 for the applicable model
following table.
list of the Basic model QCPU compatible with a
small-scale system.

Number of Current
Product Type Description Points Occupied Consumption (A) Remarks
CPU module Q02CPU Program capacity: 28k steps, — 0.60 —
(High Performance model number of I/O points: 4096 points,
QCPU) multiple I/O device points: 8192 points,
basic instruction processing speed: 79ns
multiple PLC system compatible 1
Q02HCPU Program capacity: 28k steps, — 0.64 —
number of I/O points: 4096 points,
multiple I/O device points: 8192 points,
Memory card Q2MEM-1MBS SRAM card: 1M Bytes — 0.150 —
Q2MEM-2MBS SRAM card: 2M Bytes — 0.150 —
Q2MEM-2MBF Flash card: 2M Bytes — 0.130 —
Q2MEM-4MBF Flash card: 4M Bytes — 0.130 —
Q2MEM-8MBA ATA card: 8M Bytes — 0.054 —
Battery Q6BAT Battery for program memory, standard RAM — — —
1: Use the CPU modules of function version B or later in a multiple CPU system.
3-20
3.3 High Performance model QCPU: QCPU
When using Q3 SB, Q3 B, Q5 B, Q6 B base unit

Current
Number of
Consumption
Product Type Description Points Occupied Restrictions
(A)
[I/O Allocation
5VDC 24VDC 3
Slim type main base Q32SB Q series module mounting base — 0.086 — 1
unit For power supply (Q61SP) + CPU + 2 I/O slots
Main base unit Q33B Q series module mounting base — 0.105 — —
For 2 I/O slots
For 5 I/O slots
Extension cable QC05B 0.45m (1.48ft.) cable for extension base — — — —
Slim type power Q61SP Power supply for Q3 SB, 100-240VAC input, 5VDC 2A — — — 1
supply module output
Power supply module Q61P-A1 Power supply for Q3 B/Q6 B, 100-120VAC input, — — — —
5VDC 6A output
Q61P-A2 Power supply for Q3 B/Q6 B, 200-240VAC input, — — — —
5VDC 6A output
Q62P Power supply for Q3 B/Q6 B, 100-240VAC input, — — — —
5VDC 3A/24VDC 0.6A output
Q63P Power supply for Q3 B/Q6 B, 24VDC input, — — — —
5VDC 5A output
Q64P Power supply for Q3 B/Q6 B, 100/200VAC input, — — — —
5VDC 8.5A output
commons
commons
commons
3-21
3.3 High Performance model QCPU:
QCPU Q02(H)/Q06H/Q12H/Q25HCPU

Current
Number of
Consumption
(A)
[I/O Allocation]
5VDC 24VDC
QY22 16-point 100/240VAC triac output 16 [16pt Y] 0.400 — —
QY68A 8-point 5/12/24VDC transistor (All points independent, 16 [16pt Y] 0.110 — —
used as either sink or source)
Interrupt module QI60 16 points of interrupt inputs 16 [16pt F] 0.14 — 2
Ethernet module 1 QJ71E71-B5 Ethernet interface module (10BASE5) 32 [32pt F] 0.43 — 2
QJ71E71-100 Ethernet interface module (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX) 32 [32pt F] 0.50 — 2
MELSECNET/H module QJ71BR11 10Mbps communication speed-compatible coaxial bus 32 [32pt F] 0.75 — 2
1 (control station, normal station, remote master station)
QJ72BR15 10Mbps communication speed-compatible coaxial bus — 1.10 — 2
(For remote I/O station)
QJ71LP21-25 10Mbps/25Mbps communication speed-compatible duplex 32 [32pt F] 0.55 — 2
(control station, normal station, remote master station)
QJ72LP25-25 10Mbps/25Mbps communication speed-compatible duplex — 0.89 — 2
QJ71LP21G 10Mbps communication speed-compatible duplex optical 32 [32pt F] 0.55 — 2
loop (50GI cable) (control station, normal station, remote
master station)
QJ72LP25G 10Mbps communication speed-compatible duplex optical — 0.89 — 2
loop (50GI cable) (For remote I/O station)
QJ71LP21GE 10Mbps communication speed-compatible duplex optical 32 [32pt F] 0.55 — 2
loop (62.5GI cable)
QJ72LP25GE 10Mbps communication speed-compatible duplex optical — 0.89 — 2
loop (62.5GI cable) (For remote I/O station)
FL-net module 1 QJ71FL71-F01 FL-net (OPCN-2) interface module 32 [32pt F] 0.50 — 2
CC-Link module 1 QJ61BT11 Master station, local station 32 [32pt F] 0.46 — 2
CC-Link/LT module QJ61CL12 Master station 2 0.13 0.028 2
Profibus QJ71PB92D
DeviceNet QJ71DN91
Serial communication QJ71C24 RS-232, RS-422/485, 1 channel each 32 [32pt F] 0.31 — —
module 1 QJ71C24-R2 RS-232, 2 channels 32 [32pt F] 0.26 — —
Intelligent communication QD51 BASIC program, 2 channels of RS232 32 [32pt F] 0.26 — —
module 1 QD51-R24 BASIC program, 1 channel of RS232, 1 channel of RS-422 32 [32pt F] 0.31 — —

1: For use with CPU Nos. 2 to 4 of a multi CPU system, select the modules of function version B or later.
3-22

Current
Number of
Consumption
(A)
[I/O Allocation
5VDC 24VDC
3
Channel-isolated Q64AD-GH Analog input (voltage, current), 4 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.89 — —
analog/digital Q62AD-DGH Analog input (current), 2 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.22 — —
conversion module With signal conditioning function
Analog to digital Q64AD Analog input (voltage, current), 4 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.63 — —
conversion module 1 Q68ADV Analog input (voltage), 8 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.64 — —
Channel-isolated Q62DA-FG Analog output (voltage, current), 2 channels, with output 16 [16pt F] 0.37 0.30 —
digital/analog conversion monitor
module
Digital to analog Q62DA Analog output, (voltage, current). 2 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.33 0.12 —
conversion module 1 Q64DA Analog output, (voltage, current). 4 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.34 0.18 —
Channel-isolated Q64TDV-GH Thermocouple input, 4 channels, micro voltage input 16 [16pt F] 0.50 — —
thermocouple input module Q64TD Thermocouple input, 4 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.50 — —
Thermocouple Input Q64RD Platinum temperature-measuring resistor input (3/4 wire 16 [16pt F] 0.60 — —
module 1 type), 4 channels
Temperature control Q64TCTT Thermocouple input, 4 channels, transistor output 16 [16pt F] 0.55 — —
module 1 Q64TCTTBW Thermocouple input, 4 channels, transistor output, with 32 [16pt S + 0.64 — —
Q64TCRT Platinum temperature-measuring resistor input, 4 16 [16pt F] 0.55 — —
channels, transistor output
Q64TCRTBW Platinum temperature-measuring resistor input, 4 32 [16pt S + 0.64 — —
channels, transistor output, with disconnection detection 16pt F]
function
High-speed counter QD62 DC input sink output 16 [16pt F] 0.30 — —
module 1 QD62E DC input source output 16 [16pt F] 0.33 — —
Channel-isolated QD60P8-G Pulse input, 8 channels 32 [32pt F] 0.58 — —
pulse input module
1 QD70P8 Pulse train open collector output, 8 axes 32 [32pt F] 0.74 — —
1: For use with CPU Nos. 2 to 4 of a multi CPU system, select the modules of function version B or later.
2: Any of 16, 32, 48, 64, 128, 256, 512 and 1024 points can be set with the DIP SW. (Assignment: Intelligent)
3-23
When using QA1S6 B base unit

Number of Points Current
Product Type Description Occupied Consumption (A) Restrictions
Extension base QA1S65B AnS series module mounting base — 0.117 — —
QA1S68B AnS series module mounting base — 0.118 — —
Power supply module A1S61PN Power supply for QA1S6 B, 100-240VAC input, — — — —
5VDC 5A output
A1S62PN Power supply for QA1S6 B, 100-240VAC input, — — — —
A1S63P Power supply for QA1S6 B, 24VDC input, — — — —
5VDC 5A output
AC input module A1SX10 100-120VAC, 16 input points, terminal block 16 [16pt X] 0.050 — —
A1SX10EU 100-120VAC, 16 input points, terminal block 16 [16pt X] 0.050 — —
A1SX20 200-240VAC, 16 input points, terminal block 16 [16pt X] 0.050 — —
A1SX20EU 200-240VAC, 16 input points, terminal block 16 [16pt X] 0.050 — —
DC/AC input module A1SX30 12/24VDC, 12/24VAC, 16 input points, terminal block 16 [16pt X] 0.050 — —
DC input module A1SX40 12/24VDC, 16 input points, terminal block (sink) 16 [16pt X] 0.050 — —
A1SX40-S1 24VDC, 16 input points, terminal block, for high-speed input 16 [16pt X] 0.050 — —
(sink)
A1SX40-S2 24VDC, 16 input points, terminal block, for high leakage 16 [16pt X] 0.050 — —
current sensor (sink)
A1SX41 12/24VDC, 32 input points, connector (sink) 32 [32pt X] 0.080 — —
A1SX41-S1 24VDC, 32 input points, connector, for high-speed input 32 [32pt X] 0.120 — —
(sink)
A1SX41-S2 24VDC, 32 input points, connector, for high leakage current 32 [32pt X] 0.080 — —
sensor (sink)
A1SX42-S1 24VDC, 64 input points, connector, for high-speed input 64 [64pt X] 0.160 — —
(sink)
A1SX42-S2 24VDC, 64 input points, connector, for high leakage current 64 [64pt X] 0.090 — —
sensor (sink)
A1S42X 12/24VDC dynamic, 64 input points, connector (sink) 64 [64pt X] 0.080 — —
A1SX80 24VDC, 16 input points, terminal block, for high-speed input 16 [16pt X] 0.050 — —
(sink/source)
A1SX80-S1 24VDC, 16 input points, terminal block, for high-speed input 16 [16pt X] 0.050 — —
(sink/source)
A1SX80-S2 24VDC, 16 input points, terminal block, for high leakage 16 [16pt X] 0.050 — —
current sensor (sink/source)
3-24

DC input module A1SX81 12/24VDC, 32 input points, connector (sink/source) 32 [32pt X] 0.080 — —
A1SX81-S2 24VDC, 32 input points, connector, for high leakage current 32 [32pt X] 0.080 — — 3
sensor (sink/source)
A1SX81-S1 24VDC, 64 input points, connector (sink/source) 64 [64pt X] 0.160 — —
Contact output module A1SY10 240VAC/24VDC 2A, 16 output points, terminal block 16 [16pt Y] 0.120 0.090 —
A1SY10EU 240VAC/24VDC 2A, 16 output points, terminal block 16 [16pt Y] 0.120 0.090 —
A1SY18A 240VAC/24VDC 2A, 8 independent contact output points, 8 [16pt Y] 0.240 0.075 —
terminal block
Triac output module A1SY22 100-240VAC 0.6A, 16 output points 16 [16pt Y] 0.270 0.002 —
A1SY28A 100-240VAC 1A, 8 output points, terminal block, all points 8 [16pt Y] 0.130 — —
independent
A1SY28EU 100-240VAC 0.6A, 8 output points, terminal block, all points 8 [16pt Y] 0.270 — —
independent
Transistor output module A1SY40 12/24VDC 0.1A, 16 output points, terminal block, with fuse 16 [16pt Y] 0.270 0.016 —
(sink)
A1SY41 12/24VDC 0.1A, 32 output points, terminal block, with fuse 32 [32pt Y] 0.500 0.008 —
(sink)
(sink)
A1S42Y 12/24VDC dynamic, 64 output points, connector, with fuse 64 [64pt Y] 0.100 0.008 —
(sink)
(sink)
A1SY60 24VDC 2A, 16 output points, terminal block, with fuse (sink) 16 [16pt Y] 0.120 0.030 —
A1SY60E 5/12/24VDC 2A, 16 output points, terminal block, with fuse 16 [16pt Y] 0.200 0.020 —
(sink)
A1SY68A 5/12/24/48VDC 2A, 8 output points (independent common), 16 [16pt Y] 0.11 — —
terminal block
A1SY71 5/12VDC, 32 output points, 16mA, connector, with fuse 32 [32pt Y] 0.400 — —
(source)
A1SY81 12/24VDC 0.1A, 32 output points, connector, with fuse 32 [32pt Y] 0.500 0.008 —
(source)
A1SY82 12/24VDC, 64 output points, connector (source) 64 [64pt Y] 0.930 0.016 —
I/O composite module A1SH42 12/24VDC, 32 input points, transistor 0.1A, 32 output points 32 [32pt Y] 0.500 0.008 —
A1SH42-S1 24VDC, 32 input points, transistor 0.1A, 32 output points 32 [32pt Y] 0.500 0.008 —
A1SX48Y58 24VDC, 8 input points, transistor 0.5A, 8 output points, 16 [16pt Y] 0.060 0.060 —
terminal block
A1SX48Y18 24VDC, 8 input points, 2A contact, 8 output points, terminal 16 [16pt Y] 0.085 0.045 —
block
High-speed counter A1SD61 High-speed counter 32 [32pt F] 0.35 — 1
A1SD62 DC input sink output type 32 [32pt F] 0.14 — 1
A1SD62D Differential input sink output type (preset DC input) 32 [32pt F] 0.25 — 1
A1SD62D-S1 Differential input sink output type (preset differential input) 32 [32pt F] 0.25 — 1
A1SD62E DC input source output type 32 [32pt F] 0.14 — 1
Analog to digital conversion A1S64AD Analog input, 4 channels 32 [32pt F] 0.40 — —
module A1S68AD Analog input, 8 channels 32 [32pt F] 0.40 — —
Digital to analog conversion A1S62DA Analog output, 2 channels 32 [32pt F] 0.80 — —
module A1S68DAV 0 to ±10V, analog output, 8 channels 32 [32pt F] 0.65 — —
A1S68DAI 0 to ±20mA, analog output, 8 channels 32 [32pt F] 0.85 — —
Temperature to digital A1S62RD3N Pt100 (3 wire type) input, 2 channels 32 [32pt F] 0.49 — —
conversion module A1S62RD4N Pt100 (4 wire type) input, 2 channels 32 [32pt F] 0.39 — —
A1S68TD Thermocouple input, 8 channels 32 [32pt F] 0.32 — —
Analog I/O module A1S63ADA Analog input 2 channels, analog output 1 channel 32 [32pt F] 0.80 — —
A1S66ADA Analog input 4 channels, analog output 2 channels 64 [64pt F] 0.16 — —
Temperature control module A1S64TCTT-S1 Thermocouple input 4 channels 32 [32pt F] 0.42 — —
A1S64TCTTBW Thermocouple input, 4 channels, with heater wire breakage 32 [32pt F] 0.42 — —
-S1 detection function
A1S64TCRT-S1 Pt100 input, 4 channels 32 [32pt F] 0.42 — —
3-25

Temperature control module A1S64TCRTBW Pt100 input, 4 channels, with heater wire breakage detection 32 [32pt F] 0.42 — —
-S1 function
A1S62TCTT-S2 Thermocouple input, 2 channels 32 [32pt F] 0.28 — —
A1S62TCTTBW Thermocouple input, 2 channels, with heater wire breakage 32 [32pt F] 0.28 — —
-S2 detection function
A1S62TCRT-S2 Pt100 input, 2 channels 32 [32pt F] 0.28 — —
A1S62TCRTBW Pt100 input, 2 channels, with heater wire breakage detection 32 [32pt F] 0.28 — —
-S2 function
Pulse catch A1SP60 Pulse catch input 16 [16pt Y] 0.055 — —
Analog timer A1ST60 8 timer points 16 [16pt Y] 0.055 — —
Interrupt module A1SI61 Interrupt input, 16 points 32 [32pt F] 0.057 — 1
Positioning module A1SD70 Analog output, 1 axis 48 0.30 — —
A1SD71-S2 Pulse train output, 2 axes [first half 16pt S, 0.80 — —
A1SD71-S7 Pulse train output, 2 axes, manual pulse generator usable latter half 32pt F] 0.80 — —
A1SD75M1 SSCNET compatible, 1 axis 32 [32pt F] 0.70 — —
A1SD75M2 SSCNET compatible, 2 axes
A1SD75M3 SSCNET compatible, 3 axes
A1SD75P1-S3 Pulse train output, 1 axis 32 [32pt F] 0.70 — 1
A1SD75P2-S3 Pulse train output, 2 axes
A1SD75P3-S3 Pulse train output, 3 axes 0.78
MELSECNET/MINI-S3 A1SJ71PT32-S3 Master module for optical/twisted pair cables 32/48 [32/48pt F] 0.35 — 1
master module A1S71T32-S3 Master module for twisted pair cables only 0.30 — 1
Intelligent communication A1SD51S BASIC program module 32 [32pt F] 0.40 — 1
Position detection module A1S62LS Absolute position detection by dedicated sensor 32 [32pt F] 0.55 — —
PLC diagnostic module A1SS91 PLC diagnostic module 16 [16pt Y] 0.080 — —
Memory card module A1SD59J-S2 Memory card interface module 32 [32pt F] 0.05 — —
(Note 1)
ID interface module A1SD35D1 1 connectable reader/writer 32 [32pt F] 0.25 0.15 —
A1SD35D2 2 connectable readers/writers 32 [32pt F] 0.25 0.30 —
MELSEC-I/OLINK A1SJ51T64 Max. 16 master stations, total of 128 I/O points 64 [64pt Y] 0.115 0.09 —
B/NET module A1SJ71B62-S3 For B/NET transmission terminal control 32 [32pt F] 0.08 — —
S-LINK master A1SJ71SL92N For control of S-LINK equipment, max. 128 control I/O points 32 [32pt F] 0.20 — —
OPCN-1 master module A1SJ71J92-S3 OPCN-1 interface, for master station 32 [32pt F] 0.40 — 1
Profibus A1SJ71PB96F Profibus-FMS Client/Server 32 [32pt F] 0.56 — 1
A1SJ71PB92D Profibus-DP Master 32 [32pt F] 0.56 — —
DeviceNet A1SJ71DN91 DeviceNet Master 32 [32pt F] 0.24 — —
Modbus A1SJ71UC24-R2 Modbus RTU/ASCII Slave, RS-232 32 [32pt F] 0.10 — 1
-S2
A1SJ71UC24-R4 Modbus RTU/ASCII Slave, RS-422/485 32 [32pt F] 0.10 — 1
-S2
Blank cover A1SG60 Blank cover for I/O slot 16 [16pt vacant] — — —
A1SG62 16/32/64-point dummy module 16/32/64 0.060 — —
[16/32/64pt X]
X: input, Y: output, XY: I/O mixed, F: intelligent, S: free
Note 1: Current consumption assumes connection of the A1SD59J-MIF.
Note 2: A single QCPU cannot be used with the QI60/A1SI61/AI61/AI61-S1 together.
Only one of the QI60, A1SI61, AI61 and AI61-S1 interrupt modules is usable.
3-26
When using QA65B base unit

3
Extension base QA65B A series module mounting base — 0.117 — —
QC30B 3m (9.84ft.) cable for extension base — — — —
X: input, Y: output, XY: I/O mixed, F: intelligent, S: free
The QA65B allows the following large type A series modules to be used with the Q series CPU modules.
Product Type Product Type
For mounting
A61P, A62P, A63P, A65P
Power on power AD70, AD70D, AD71
A67P, A61PEU, A62PEU
supply supply slot AD71S1, AD71S2, AD71S7
module For mounting Positioning module AD72, AD778M, AD75M1
A66P, A68P
on I/O slot AD75M2, AD75M3, AD75P1-S3 3
AX10, AX11, AX11EU, AX20 AD75P2-S3 3, AD75P3-S3 3
AX21, AX21EU, AX31, AX31-S1
AX40, AX41, AX41-S1, AX42
MELSECNET/MINI-S3 master module AJ71PT32-S3, AJ71T32-S3 3
Input module AX42-S1, AX50, AX50-S1, AX60
AX60-S1, AX70, AX71, AX80
AX80E, AX81, AX81-S1, AX81-S2 Intelligent communication module AD51-S3, AD51H-S3 1
AX81-S3, AX81B, AX82
AY10, AY10A, AY11, AY11A Position detection module A61LS, A62LS-S5, A63LS
AY11E, AY11AEU, AY11EEU, AY13 PLC diagnostic module AS91
AY13E, AY13EU, AY15EU, AY20EU Memory card module AD59, AD59-S1
AY22, AY23, AY40, AY40P Supersonic linear scale interface
A64BTL
AY40A, AY41, AY41P, AY42 module
output module
AY42-S1, AY42-S2, AY42-S3, AY42-S4
ID interface module AD35ID1, AD35ID2
AY50, AY51, AY51-S1, AY60
AY60S, AY60E, AY60EP, AY70 MELSEC-I/O LINK module AJ51T64
AY71, AY72, AY80, AY80EP JEMANET(JPCN-1) master module AJ71J92-S3
AY81, AY81EP, AY82EP B/NET module AJ71B62-S3
I/O mixed module A42XY, AH42 External fault diagnostic module AD51FD-S3 1
High-speed counter
AD61, AD61S1 3 Voice output module A11VC
module
Analog to digital
A68AD, A68AD-S2, A68ADN, A616AD Vision sensor module AS50VS, AS50VS-GN
conversion module
Digital to Analog A62DA, A62DA-S1, A68DAV Interrupt module AI61, AI61-S1 2
conversion module A68DAI-S1,A616DAV, A616DAI Blank cover AG60
Temperature to digital A68RD3N, A68RD4N, A616TD, A60MX Dummy module AG62
conversion module A60MXRN, A60MXTN
1: Up to six modules can be mounted. (When the QA65B is used with the QA1S65B/QA1S68B, a total of six modules including the
modules of the same product name can be mounted on the QA1S65B/QA1S68B.)
2: Only one of the QI60, A1SI61, AI61 and AI61-S1 interrupt modules is usable.
3: The QnA/A Series program dedicated instructions are no longer available.
Therefore, they must be rewritten using the FROM/TO instruction.
3-27
System Configuration available. Choose the mounting bases relevant to the

modules used.
With the High Performance model QCPU, you can use the For extension base cables, use the Q series extension
Q series modules and A/AnS series modules given in the cables with both the Q series and A/AnS series module
applicable model list. bases. The A/AnS series main/extension bases and
Because of the difference in size between Q and A/AnS extension cables are unusable.
series modules, different types of mounting bases are
Basic configuration
This section describes components, peripheral devices and configuration outline for a High Performance model QCPU
system.
(1) Components in High Performance model QCPU system
MITSUBISHI
MITSUBISHI
LITHIUM BATTERY
Memory card High Performance model QCPU

Battery
(Q02CPU,Q02HCPU,Q06HCPU,
(SRAM/Flash/ATA type) Q12HCPU,Q25HCPU) (Q6BAT)
Slim type main base unit Main base unit Q series power supply, I/O,
(Q32SB, Q33SB, Q35SB) (Q33B,Q35B,Q38B,Q312B) intelligent function modules
Q series power supply (Note 2), Extension cable

(QC05B,QC06B,QC12B,QC30B,
I/O, intelligent function modules QC50B,QC100B) (Note 1)
Addition of Q series modules Addition of A/AnS series modules
Q6 B extension base unit Q5 B extension base unit QA1S6 B extension base (Note 1)
(Q63B,Q65B,Q68B,Q612B) (Q52B,Q55B) unit (QA1S65B,QA1S68B) QA65B extension base unit
Q series power supply, I/O, Q series I/O, AnS series power supply, I/O, A series power supply, I/O,
intelligent function modules intelligent function modules special function modules special function modules
Note 1: The QC05B extension cable cannot be used with the QA65B.
Note 2: The slim type main base unit can use only the slim type power supply module Q61SP.+
3-28
(2) Peripheral devices for High Performance model QCPU
3
Memory Card (Q2MEM-1MBS,
Q2MEM-2MBS,Q2MEM-2MBF, High Performance model QCPU
Q2MEM-4MBF,Q2MEM-8MBA, (Q02CPU,Q02HCPU,Q06HCPU,
Q2MEM-16MBA,Q2MEM-32MBA) Q12HCPU,Q25HCPU)
USB cable
(User-prepared)
RS-232 cable Usable with Q02HCPU,
(QC30R2) Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU
or Q25HCPU only
Personal computer
PC card adapter
GX Developer
(Q2MEM-ADP)
(Version 4 or later)
3-29

(1) The total number of I/O and intelligent function modules that can be mounted onto the main and extension bases is up
to 64. This total of mountable modules is the same for both the Q6 B/Q5 B (extension) and the QA1S6
B/QA65B (extension) bases. Also, a selection of base units from the 3 I/O slot model to the 12 I/O slot model are
available. Whichever combination of base units used, the total number of mountable modules is up to 64.
(2) You can connect the Q6 B/Q5 B and QA1S6 B/QA65B up to 7 extension bases. (Up to 8 bases including
the main base)
(3) You can also connect the Q6 B/Q5 B/QA1S6 B/QA65B while the extension numbers of Q6 B/Q5 B
must be lower than those of the QA1S6 B/QA65B.
(4) The total extension cable distance is within 13.2m (43.28ft.).
(5) Unlike the A and QnA series CPU modules, the High Performance model QCPU automatically recognizes the number of
slots of the connected main/extension base(s) and allocates the I/O numbers.
Refer to the High Performance model QCPU (Q Mode) User's Manual (Hardware Design/Maintenance and Inspection).
The following shows the I/O number automatically assigned according to default I/O assignment.
0 1 2 3 4 ............. Slot No.
Input module
Input module
Input module
Output module
Output module
Power supply
Q02CPU
module
I/O numbers assigned according to I/O points of slots.
16 16 32 16 64
X00 X10 X20 Y40 Y50
5 6 7 8 9
Output module
function module
function module
function module
Vacant
Intelligent
Intelligent
Intelligent
Power supply
1
module

32 32 32 16 16
90 B0 D0 YF0 100
AF CF EF YFF 10F the number next to the last slot No. of extension
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Input module
Input module
Output module
Output module
Output module
function module
function module
function module
Intelligent
Intelligent
Intelligent
Power supply
module
2
IN OUT
16 16 32 32 32 16 16 16
X110 X120 130 150 170 Y190 Y1A0 Y1B0
X11F X12F 14F 16F 18F Y19F Y1AF Y1BF
(6) The slim type main base unit can use only the slim type power supply module Q61SP. The I/O and intelligent function
modules not including the power supply module are mountable on the Q3 B main base unit. The slim type main
base unit does not support connection of an extension base unit. Also, the bus connection of the GOT is not supported.
(7) The Q02CPU does not support USB communication
3-30
(8) Max. number of mountable modules per system.

Module Number of mountable modules
Q series MELSECNET/H QJ71LP21-25 Up to four modules with PLC to PLC network and remote I/O network modules combined.
network module QJ71LP21G
QJ71LP21GE 3
QJ71BR11
Q series Ethernet interface QJ71E71 Up to four modules
module QJ71E71-B2
QJ71E71-100
Q series CC-Link system master QJ61BT11 Up to four modules (Note 2)
• local module
Interrupt module QI60 Only one module
A1SI61
AI61
AI61-S1
A/AnS series special function module (Note 1) Up to a total of six modules
Note1: The other modules have no restrictions on the max. mountable modules, except for the following modules.
Max. number of mountable A/AnS modules
Product Type Number of mountable modules
Intelligent communication module A1SD51S
AD51-S3
AD51H-S3
Up to a total of six modules
OPCN (OPCN-1) master module (Only when using GET/PUT service) A1SJ71J92-S3,
AJ71J92-S3
External fault diagnostic module AD51FD-S3
Note2 : Using GX Developer, the CC-Link network parameters can be set to control up to four modules. When the CC-Link dedicated
instructions are used to set parameters, there are no restrictions on the number of mounted modules.
Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.9 for the CC-Link system master • local modules for which parameters can be set using dedicated
instructions.
Note3 : The MELSECNET/MINI-S3 data link modules (A1SJ71PT32-S3, A1SJ71T32-S3, AJ71PT32-S3, AJ71T32-S3) have no restrictions
on the number to be mounted, however the automatic refresh function is not supported.
(9) The QnA/A series program dedicated instructions are no longer available.
Therefore, they must be rewritten using the FROM/TO instruction.
Product Type
High-speed counter module A1SD61, A1SD62, AD61, AD61S1
A1SD62D-S1, A1SD62E
MELSECNET/MINI-S3 A1SJ71PT32-S3, A1SJ71T32-S3, AJ71PT32-S3, AJ71T32-S3
Positioning module A1SD75P1/P2/P3-S3, AD75P1/P2/P3-S3
(10)Only the GOT-A900 series/GOT-F900 series graphic operation terminals are usable (Q mode-compatible system OS
and communication driver must be installed). Note that the Q series bus interface module is required for bus connection.
The GOT800 series, A77GOT and A64GOT do not support Q Bus connection.
(11)Mount the MELSECNET/H module for remote I/O station (QJ72BR15, QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QJ72LP25GE) on
the CPU slot of the main base. It cannot be mounted on an extension base.
3-31
32

3.3.3 Performance and functions of CPU
modules
Overview Number of control I/O points

In order to build optimal high-performance equipment, the CPUs in the High Performance model QCPU range can
High Performance model QCPU has greatly improved control up to 4096 points of I/O. Also, when used with a
processing performance and program memory capabilities, remote I/O network such as CC-Link, it can control max.
etc. It has also improved performance for data 8192 points of I/O.
communication with network modules and programming Expandability of up to 64 I/O slots
peripheral devices. In the High Performance model QCPU, up to seven
The High Performance model QCPU has the following extension base units can be connected, and up to a total
features. of 64 I/O slots can be used, if more I/O slots are needed in
High-speed program processing addition to those of the main base unit (max. 12 I/O slots).
The High Performance model QCPU has achieved Security
processing speed about five times higher in PC MIX value The High Performance model QCPU manages sequence
than that of the conventional model (A2USHCPU-S1). programs and files. A password can be specified to restrict
Base units adopting high-speed bus system access to individual files.
The Q series base units have significantly improved data Function Explanations
transfer speed between CPU and other modules such as,
I/O, intelligent function and network modules (approx. 4 to The High Performance model QCPU functions are
8 times higher than existing models). Especially, they can described below. Note that the programming-related
functions are given in Chapter 15, Section 15.1.2
reduce the influence of large amounts of data transfer
"Programming".
to/from network modules on the scan time.
Fixed scan execution program I/O control system
In addition to normal scan execution programs, you can
create fixed scan execution programs. Repeatedly running The type of I/O control system for the High Performance
at preset intervals of 0.5ms to 60s (0.5ms increments), a model QCPU is refresh mode. In refresh mode, input data
fixed scan execution program can achieve fast response from the input module and output data to the output
without influence of the entire program scan time. module are refreshed all at once, when the sequence
program END instruction is processed.
Event interruption When there are two or more scan execution programs,
Network modules and some intelligent function modules you can select whether refresh processing is carried out at
have a function to interrupt CPU modules. This function the END instruction of the last run scan execution program
allows fast response to events, which take place or at the END instruction of the corresponding scan
asynchronously with the PLC program scan, e.g. receiving execution program.
of network module data. In addition, it can remove the data CPU module
CPU (operation processor) 1 At input
transfer-related programs from scan execution programs,
Data memory
resulting in the reduction of the scan time. for input (X)
peripheral
X0 device module
Large-capacity programs At input refresh Area for
The High Performance model QCPU are available in a communications

with input module At output
2
total of five models having program capacities from 28k Data memory refresh Output
Y22
steps up to 252k steps. Therefore, an optimal CPU module Y20 for output (Y)
module
can be chosen for a particular application.
To increase the response capability, I/O control in an
Large-capacity extended memory
interrupt program may require refreshing of I/O data while
The High Performance model QCPU is equipped with a executing an instruction without having to wait for END
small PC card slot to accept a max. 32M Bytes memory processing. In that case, devices DX (input) and DY
card. A memory card will save previously used programs (output) can be used as direct I/O.
intact as a history, also stores comment files, extension file For example, when you describe X100, the X100 data
registers and other CPU module internal devices. obtained by refresh processing is used for operation.
When you describe DX100, operation is executed using
the X100 data of the same input module acquired at the
point of executing its contact instruction. This also applies
to output.
3-32
Q02(H)/Q06H/Q12H/Q25HCPU QCPU
modules
Operation processing <For word data>

Example: Setting range by digit specification of inputs X0
The High Performance model QCPU has three operation to XF
modes: RUN, STOP and PAUSE. Each operation mode XF XC XB X8 X7 X4 X3 X0
performs the following operation processing respectively.
Operation processing in RUN mode
3
K1 specified
range
(1) In the RUN mode, sequence program operation (4 points)
K2 specified
alternates between step 0 and END (FEND) range
instruction. K3 specified (8 points)
range
(2) When entering the RUN mode, the QCPU re-outputs K4 specified (12 points)
the output (Y) statuses saved at STOP if parameter range
setting (STOP to RUN-time output mode setting) has (16 points)
been made. (The saved output data can also be Specified Digits Numerical Range That Can Be Handled
cleared before RUN.)
Operation processing in STOP mode K3 (12 points) 0 to 4095
K4 (16 points) -32768 to 32767 (Note 2)
(1) In the STOP mode, sequence program operation is
Values in parentheses are the numbers of bit device points.
stopped by the RUN/STOP switch or remote STOP, or
operation is stopped due to an error occurring. <For double word data>
Example: Setting range by digit designation of inputs X0 to
(2) When entering the STOP mode, the QCPU saves the
X1F
current output (Y) statuses and turns off all outputs (Y).
Device data other than the output (Y) is held. Note that
the Q series output module can be set to hold the K1
specified
output at a STOP when an error occurs. range
K2
Operation processing in PAUSE mode specified
range
(4 points)
(1) In the PAUSE mode, sequence program operation is K3

specified (8 points)
stopped with the output (Y) and data memory status range
K4
(12 points)
held. The outputs, which are ON, are kept ON, and the specified
range
inputs that should turn OFF the outputs are ignored. K5
range
When using this mode, therefore, fully note the system K6
operation in the PAUSE mode. range
K7
Data type K8
range

The High Performance model QCPU supports five data range
types, bit, word, double word, real number and character (32 points)
string. The following table shows the numerical ranges and Specified Digits Numerical Range That Can Be Handled
the CPU module's internal devices to store those values. K1 (4 points) 0 to 15
Numerical Range K3 (12 points) 0 to 4095
Bit 0 (OFF), 1 (ON) K4 (16 points) 0 to 65535
Word Word device -32768 to 32767 (Note 2) K5 (20 points) 0 to 1048575
K6 (24 points) 0 to 167772165
Bit device Value can be handled as a collection
K7 (28 points) 0 to 268435455
of 4, 8, 12 and 16 bits. (Note 1) K8 (32 points) -2147483648 to 2147483647 (Note 2)
Double word Word device -2147483648 to 2147483647 (Note Values in parentheses are the numbers of bit device points.
2) Note 2: Numerical values in an unsigned format (example: 0 to
Bit device Value can be handled as a collection 65535 numerical range for word) are not supported.
of 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28 and 32 bits. Note 3: For 32-bit data, a real number uses two consecutive
(Note 1) registers.
Real number ±1.17549E-38 to ±3.40282E+38 (Note 3) Note 4: A character string is stored in multiple consecutive
registers and NULL (00) is used as a code to indicate the
Character ASCII code (Note 4)
end of the character string. There are no restrictions on
string
the number of usable characters.
Note 1: Bit devices can also handle numerical data by using digit Note that the character string that can be handled as a
specification. In digit specification, bit devices are constant in a program is up to 32 characters long.
represented by specifying them in 4-bit increments.
3-33
34

modules
Timers' timing performance capabilities Also, if the ratio of the fixed scan execution program
processing time compared to the total processing time is
The internal timers of the High Performance model QCPU too high, it may delay the scan execution program
are all on-delay timers and are available in four types: processing, resulting in WDT error. Therefore care should
low-speed timer, high-speed timer, low-speed retentive be taken when setting the cycle time.
timer and high-speed retentive timer.
The timing increments and timing errors are shown below. If the real-time interrupt programs I28 to I31 is used,
automatic I/O (X/Y) refresh is not made at the start and
Timing Increments
end of the interrupt program. As required, the refresh
Low-speed timer Variable between 1 and 1000ms
Low-speed retentive timer instruction must be executed to perform I/O refresh
High-speed timer Variable between 0.1 and 100ms processing.
High-speed retentive timer In contrast, a fixed scan execution program
Note that the timing range is up to the preset timing automatically performs input X and output Y refreshing
increments × 32767. Since timer measurement is made by the parameter-preset range at the start and end of the
adding the value of every scan time measured at every fixed scan execution program.
END instruction to the timer present value at OUT
instruction processing, a measurement error of -{(1 scan Interrupt program performance capabilities
time) + (timer limit setting)} to 1 scan time occurs. Any of the following starting factors are usable to start
interrupt programs.
Instructions for use of timers
(1) Interrupt from the QI60/A1SI61/AI61 interrupt module
Timers cannot be used in initial execution, standby, fixed
(2) Interrupt from the intelligent function module or network
scan execution and interrupt programs.
module
Fixed scan execution program performance (3) Cyclic interrupt by CPU's internal timer (0.5ms to
capabilities 1000ms)
A fixed scan program is run according to a user specified (4) Interrupt due to CPU error occurrence
preset time (execution cycle) and its cycle time can be set Starting time delay
from 0.5ms to 60s (0.5ms increments). The following time delay is required to start an interrupt
program.
Starting time delay
The following time delay is required to start an interrupt CPU Type Starting Time (µs)
program. Q02CPU 380
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, 165
CPU Type Starting Time (µs)
Q02CPU 380 Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, 165 Start inhibiting factor
Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU
An interrupt program is not started when the interrupt
Start inhibiting factor status is disabled. It is started after the EI instruction is
A fixed scan execution program is not started when the enabled.
interrupt status is not enabled. It is started after the EI Start delaying factors
instruction is enabled. With the following cases, the start of an interrupt program
Start delaying factors is delayed.
With the following cases, the start of a fixed scan (1) During execution of any instruction
execution program is delayed. (2) During processing of request for read/write of data in
(1) During execution of any instruction CPU's internal memory from GX Developer, network
(2) During processing of request for read/write of data in module, GOT, etc.
CPU's internal memory from GX Developer, network
(3) During execution of another fixed scan execution
module, GOT, etc.
(3) During execution of another fixed scan program or program or interrupt program
interrupt program (4) When multiple interrupt programs are started at the
(4) When multiple interrupt programs are started at the same time, the programs of lower priority wait until the
same time, the programs of lower priority wait until the processing of the higher-priority programs is complete.
processing of the higher-priority programs is complete. Instructions for use of interrupt programs
(5) When a program and an interrupt program are started If the ratio of the interrupt program processing time
simultaneously, the interrupt program has priority. compared to the total processing time is too high, it may
Instructions for setting of cycle time delay the scan execution program processing, resulting in
The execution processing time (including the starting WDT error. Therefore, care should be taken when setting
the interrupt conditions.
Delay time) of a fixed scan execution program must be set
to less than the cycle setting time of that program.
3-34
modules
High-speed execution of interrupt program High-speed interrupt function

To shorten the time delay from when an interrupt condition When an interrupt program is created using the interrupt
pointer I49, the High performance model QCPU executes
holds until interrupt program processing starts, you can
the program using the fast fixed-cycle interrupt at intervals
choose the high-speed execution mode for an interrupt of 0.2ms to 1.0ms (Note 1). Also, I/O response can be 3
program. It can reduce the time delay as follows. improved by refreshing the I/O signals and intelligent
function module buffer memory in the parameter-set range
CPU Type Delay Time (µs)
before and after the high-speed interrupt program.
Q02CPU 230
This enables high-accuracy control, such as precise
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, 100
position detection, to be executed by only the PLC CPU.
Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU
Item Description Remarks
However, if the high-speed mode is selected, the following Interrupt cycle interval 0.2 to 1.0ms 0.1ms increments
Number of interrupt 1
processing will not be done as previously in normal mode. programs
Interrupt pointer: I49
Therefore, care needs to be taken while programming. Note 1: Applicable to Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU,
Back up of index register Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU with function version B or later
and with serial No. 04012 or later.
In the normal mode, where the save/return processing of
Processing time
the index register Z is automatically executed on shift to an
Processing Item Processing Time
interrupt program, use of the index register in the interrupt Waiting time (Note 2) Maximum 37.5 s, or 37.5 s or more
program does not corrupt the value of the index register. instruction processing time
Maximum 40(s when MELSECNET/H,
Main program CC-Link or intelligent function module is
Interrupt factor mounted on extension base.
High-speed interrupt start 22 s
+ high-speed interrupt end
Index save I49 overhead 41 s
Note 2: Time when a high-speed interrupt start is made to wait by
Interrupt interrupt inhibition.
program
Instructions for using the high-speed interrupt
Index return
function
(1) A high-speed interrupt program is not executed during
interrupt inhibition. It is executed when interrupt
inhibition is canceled.
In the high-speed execution mode, however, this
(2) When I49 is being used, do not execute any other
save/return processing is not performed. Hence, use of the interrupt programs and fixed-cycle programs that use
index register in the interrupt program may produce an interrupt pointers I0 to I47, I50 to 255.
illegal index register value at the moment it returns to the (3) The "High-speed execution" interrupt
program/fixed-cycle program setting in the PLC
main program. To prevent it, use the ZPUSH/ZPOP parameter of GX Developer is invalid for the
instruction in the interrupt program to perform the high-speed interrupt function.
save/return processing of the index register in the user’s Refer to the following manual for other instructions.
High Performance Model QCPU (Q Mode) User's Manual
program.
(Function Explanation/Program Fundamentals)
Save processing of file register file name How to reduce scan time by changing setting
In the normal mode, the save/return processing of the file The following factors enable the scan time to be shorter by
register name being used are automatically performed at a changing the PLC parameter setting.
shift to and a return from an interrupt program. Hence, in A series CPU compatibility setting
the interrupt program using the QDRSET instruction to When the special relays/special registers of
SM1000/SD1000 or later are not to be used, the scan time
change the file register file name re-sets to the original file
can be reduced by setting the parameters corresponding
register file name automatically at return. to the values given in the following table.
In the high-speed execution mode, this save/return CPU Type Processing Time (ms)
processing is not performed and this should be processed Q02CPU 0.07
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, 0.03
in the user’s program as required. Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU
3-35
36

modules
Floating-point operation processing When an instantaneous power beyond the

When double precision of the floating point is not permissible time occurs
performed in the internal operation processing, the
operation processing of instructions using floating point is The High Performance model QCPU behaves the same
executed faster. as for when it is reset and powered on, or when it is reset
Refer to the following manual for the processing time of by the RESET/L.CLR switch.
floating point instructions.
QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual Forced ON/OFF of external input/output
(Common Instructions)
Forced ON/OFF of external input/output is a function that
Constant scan function
forces an input (X) and an output (Y) to turn ON/OFF by
In the processing of program in the High Performance
GX Developer when the High Performance model QCPU
model QCPU, the scan time changes per scan because
the processing time differs depending on whether an is in RUN.
instruction used in a sequence program is executed or not. <Device test function>
The constant scan function is designed to run the Cannot be turned OFF by device test. X0
Sensor input ON
sequence program repeatedly while maintaining a X0
M100
constant scan time. Sensor input ON Y10
Facility warning notice
output ON OFF
When the scan time is constant, time delays in external M0
Y10
signal input, operation processing and output are fixed, Facility alarm Warning notice
detection ON
therefore increasing the accuracy of controlling equipment. output
The constant scan time set range is from 0.5 to 2000ms. Cannot be turned ON/OFF
Scan Time at Constant Scan Setting of 10ms for <External input/output forced ON/OFF function>
Execution of Multiple Programs Can be turned OFF by forced input.
Sequence program A GX Developer
X0
Sequence program B M100
Sensor input OFF
Sequence program C External output can be turned
M0
ON/OFF by forced output.
END processing Y10
Facility alarm Warning notice Note: Y10 is turned OFF in output module
detection ON output
but remains ON in ladder.
Waiting time Forced ON/OFF of external input

8ms 2ms 9ms 1ms
When the sensor remains ON, it can be forced to OFF
10ms 10ms
without removing the external wiring.
Processing at instantaneous power failure Forced ON/OFF of external output
When the supplied power supply voltage for the power At system start-up, if the alarm status is ON, and then
supply module becomes lower than the rated voltage, the forced to OFF, the alarm status is cancelled allowing for
High Performance model QCPU detects an instantaneous continuation of testing etc.
power failure and performs the following actions.
Self-diagnostics
When an instantaneous power failure within the
permissible time occurs The High Performance model QCPU has a self-diagnostic
(1) When an instantaneous power failure occurs, the function to determine if a fault is present. Self-diagnostics
output status is held and the operation processing is
suspended. are designed to prevent PLC malfunctions and to improve
However, the timing of the timer(s) and watchdog timer preventive maintenance. On detection of a fault, an error is
(WDT) timing continue. (For example, when the scan displayed and the PLC operation is stopped, for example.
time is 190ms at the WDT setting of 200ms, the
occurrence of a 15ms instantaneous power failure The diagnostic items are listed below.
causes a watchdog timer error.)
(2) When the instantaneous power failure is cleared,
operation processing resumes.
Instantaneous power
failure occurrence Power restored
END 0 END END
CPU suspends
operation.
3-36
modules
Diagnostic Item Diagnostic Item Protection of access from Ethernet or dialup line
CPU hardware fault File access error The remote password function of the High Performance
END instruction unexecuted Instruction execution not possible
model QCPU prevents illegal access from a remote user
RAM check Parameter setting check
to the CPU module with the Ethernet interface module or
Operation circuit check Link parameter error
Fuse blown SFC parameter error
with the serial communication module using the modem 3
I/O interrupt error Instruction code error function. (The remote password function can restrict
Intelligent function module error No END instruction read/write and others of parameters, sequence programs,
Control bus error Pointer setting error and device data.)
Instantaneous power failure Operation check error The preset remote password is written to the CPU module
occurrence as a parameter.
Battery low FOR to NEXT instruction structure error
CALL to RET instruction structure error
(1) Via dialup line
I/O module verify
Intelligent function module Interrupt program error Remote password
assignment error used to check
accessibility Device on other end
No parameter Extended instruction error
Access source
Boot error SFC error Dialup line
Modem
Memory card operation error Watchdog timer error Modem
File setting error Program time exceeded
Access
Failure history
(2) Via Ethernet
The High Performance model QCPU stores the results of
Remote password
the self-diagnostic function and time of failure in the CPU used to check Device on other end
memory as a failure history. Confirmation of failure can be accessibility Access source
made even after the error is resolved.
(Host)
System protective functions Ethernet
The High Performance model QCPU has several Access

protective functions (system protections) against program The remote password function was added to the QCPU
changes from the third party. as a means to prevent illegal access (program, data
System protections have different means for different corruption, etc.) from external devices. However, this
objects to be protected. remote password function cannot prevent unauthorized
Protecting the CPU access completely.
When it is necessary to keep the PLC system safe from
Using the High Performance model QCPU DIP switches.
illegal access from any external devices, it is
External restriction of writing multiple files can be done at
recommended that further protection are implemented to
once, therefore resulting in a simple method of protection. the system.
However, a third party can easily clear the protection. We have no liability for any problems in system faults
Protecting the memory card that could occur due to illegal access.
(SRAM/Flash card only) Examples of preventives against illegal access
Use the write protect switch of the memory card to protect (When using the QJ71E71)
• Build a firewall.
the memory card from writing of files, which also results as
• Install a personal computer as a relay station, and
a simple method of protection. However, a third party can
control the relay of communication data with an
easily clear the protection. application program.
However, a third party can also easily clear the protection. • As a relay station, install an external device that can
Protection of files control the access authorization.
Register passwords for each file. You can restrict both For the external device that can control the access
external read and write from/to the specified file. authorization, consult the network service provider
Correct password management achieves high protection or device distributor.
capability against a third party. Use this method when you (When using the QJ71C24)
When the number of "Remote password mismatches"
want to protect the required files only.
detected by the remote password check function of the
Q series C24 has reached or exceeded the user-set
Files that can be password protected include programs count, disconnect the line from the PLC CPU situated on
and device comment files. the other end of the connection.
3-37
38

modules
ROM operation Accuracy

Debugged parameters and programs can be stored in the Refer to the CPU performance specifications for accuracy.
ROM. The processing of the parameters and programs Timing range
stored in the ROM is started after they have been
transferred to the program memory (drive 0) at power-on The clock can time between January 1, 1980 to December
(or CPU reset). (Boot operation setting is necessary) 31, 2079.
The CPU's built-in standard ROM (drive 4) or memory
card (ROM) (drive 2) can be used. Appearance
The QCPU which the serial number upper 5 digits are
"02092" or later supports the automatic write to standard
ROM function. This function allows the program and Q02CPU
parameter files in the memory card to be written to the
standard ROM (drive 4) of the QCPU module without Q02CPU
using GX Developer. MODE

RUN
(GX Developer is used to write program and parameter ERR.
USER
files to the memory card). BAT.

BOOT
Automatic write to standard ROM
98.0 (3.86)
(1) Programs at remote worksite can be modified easily.
• GX Developer is not needed for installing the program. PULL
Therefore, requirement of an extra personal computer

on-site to install programs, which were modified in a
design room to the QCPU is not required.
• If the QCPU is situated at a remote site, then just RS-232
sending the memory card is sufficient.
All that is required is for an on-site operator to insert a
memory card into the QCPU. (Changing of the DIP 89.3 (3.52) 27.4 (1.08)
switch positions is necessary.)
Unit: mm (inch)
(2) ATA card is useful as memory card.
• Programs are not cleared if the battery is dead.
• Data can be read from a personal computer easily. Q02CPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU,
(Write of program and parameter files to the memory card
is performed by GX Developer.) Q25HCPU
Clock function
Q02HCPU
MODE
The High Performance model QCPU has an internal clock

RUN
ERR.
USER
function. Although, the clock data can be read in a BAT.
BOOT
sequence program, it can also be utilized for system time

management, and failure history. The Q series has
98.0 (3.86)
intelligent function modules that use the clock data of the

CPU module. The clock function is battery-backed during
power-off of the PLC. PULL
Clock data USB
Data Name Description

Year 4 digits
Month 1 to 12 RS-232
Day 1 to 31 (automatic leap year judgment)

Hour 0 to 23 (24 hour system)
Minute 0 to 59 89.3 (3.52) 27.4 (1.08)
Second 0 to 59 Unit: mm (inch)
Day of week 0 Sunday
1 Monday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
3-38
modules
Type
Item Remarks
Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU
Control method Sequence program control method 3
I/O control method Refresh mode Direct I/O possible
using device name
Programming language Language dedicated to sequence control
Relay symbol language (ladder), logic symbolic language,
SFC(MELSEP-3), MELSAP-L(List)
Processing speed LD (LD X10) 79ns 34ns
(sequence instruction) MOV (MOV D0 D1) 237ns 102ns
Constant scan 0.5 to 2000ms (can be specified in 0.5ms increments) Parameter setting
Program capacity Number of steps 28k steps 28k steps 60k steps 124k steps 252k steps
Number of files 28 28 60 124 252 Two SFC/MELSAP-L

(Note 7) files included (Note 6)
Number of I/O device points 8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF) (Note 4)
Number of I/O points 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF) (Note 5)
Number Internal relay [M] Default 8192 points (M0 to 8191) Can be changed within
of device Latch relay [L] Default 8192 points (L0 to 8191) 28.8k words by
points Link relay [B] Default 8192 points (B0 to 1FFF) parameters.
Timer [T] Default 2048 points (T0 to 2047) (used as low-speed or high-speed
timer)
Switching between low-speed and high-speed timers is set by
instruction.
Retentive timer [ST] Default 0 (ST0 to 2047) (used as low-speed or high-speed timer)
Switching between low-speed and high-speed timers is set by
instruction.
• Interrupt counters Max. 2128 points
(Default 0 points, parameter setting)
Link register [W] Default 8192 points (W0 to 1FFF)
File register [R] 32768 32768 points / 131072 points (Note 1)

points 65536 points
(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 2)
Special link relay [SB] 2048 points (SB0 to 7FF) Number of device
Special link register [SW] 2048 points (SW0 to 7FF) points is fixed
Step relay [S] 8192 points (S0 to 8191)
Index register [Z] 16 points (Z0 to 15)
Pointer [P] 4096 points (P0 to 4095), set in parameters the range in which the
pointers/common pointers are used.
In parameters, set the cyclic intervals of the system interrupt pointers
I28 to I31 (0.5 to 1000ms, 0.5ms increments). (Note 3)
3-39
40

modules

Type
Item Remarks
Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU
Number Function input [FX] 16 points (FX0 to F) Number of device
of device Function output [FY] 16 points (FY0 to F) points is fixed
points Function register [FD] 5 points (FD0 to 4)
Link direct device Device for direct access to link device.
Specified format: J \
Intelligent function module direct device Device for direct access to buffer memory of intelligent function
module.
Remote RUN/PAUSE contact 1 point can be set for each RUN and PAUSE contacts from X0-1FFF.
Accuracy –3.18 to +5.25 (TYP +2.12) s/d @ 0 C
Accuracy –14.69 to +3.53 (TYP –3.67) s/d @ 55 C
Permissible instantaneous power failure time Depends on power supply module. Refer to the power
supply module section.
5VDC internal current consumption 0.60A 0.64A 0.64A 0.64A 0.64A
Weight 0.20kg 0.20kg 0.20kg 0.20kg 0.20kg
External dimensions 98 (3.86) (H) × 27.4 (1.08) (W) × 89.3 (3.52) (D) mm (inch)
Note 1: Indicates the number of points when the built-in memory (standard RAM) is used. It can be increased using an SRAM card or flash
card. (When a flash card is used, write from a program is disabled.)
When an SRAM card is used, up to 1041408 points are available. For details, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.4.
Note 2: 65536 points for the Q02HCPU and Q06HCPU whose function version is B or later and whose first five digits of the serial No. are
"04012" or later.
Note 3: The Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU, with function version B or later and the first five digits of the serial No.
"04012" or later, support the fixed-cycle interval of the high-speed interrupt pointer I49 to be set in the parameter. (0.2 to 0.1ms,
0.1ms increments)
Note 4: Sum of the number of I/O points on the main/extension base directly controlled by the CPU module and the number of I/O points
Note 6: Although a total of two SFC files that can be executed, one is the program execution management SFC file.
Note 7: The High Performance model QCPU can execute 124 files. It cannot execute 125 or more files.
Battery Life Note 1: If the total power failure time is less than the above value,
the battery must be changed in 10 years as a standard.
The Q6BAT battery built in the CPU module is used to
Accessories
back up the programs and various data stored in the RAM
memory of the CPU module and to maintain timing by the Product Type Quantity
clock function during a power failure. Battery Q6BAT 1
The Q6BAT is not used while 5VDC is supplied from the Manuals
power supply module. The battery life of the Q6BAT
depends on the total power failure time when 5VDC is not The following manuals are related to the Q mode CPU.
supplied from the power supply module. Note that the Name Remarks
QCPU (Q Mode) User's Manual Supplied with Q3 B main
SRAM card itself contains a battery (Q2MEM-BAT) and its (Hardware) base
current consumption is independent of the Q6BAT. High Performance model QCPU Optional
(Q Mode) User's Manual
(Hardware Design, Maintenance
Battery life and Inspection)
Total Power Failure Time High Performance model QCPU Optional
Backup Time after
(Hours) (Q Mode) User's Manual (Function
CPU Type Battery Error ON
Guaranteed Actual Explanation, Program
(Hours)
value value Fundamentals)
Q02CPU QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Optional
5433 13120 120 Programming Manual (Common
Q02HCPU Instructions)
2341 6435 120
Q06HCPU QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Optional
Q12HCPU Programming Manual (SFC)
1260 4228 48
Q25HCPU QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Optional
Programming Manual (PID Control
Instructions)
3-40
3.3.4 CPU Built-In Memories/Memory
Cards
Overview A program stored in the standard ROM, memory card

(RAM) or memory card (ROM) is transferred to the
This section describes the specification of CPU module
program memory at power-on and executed in the
memory that will store program and other user-created
program memory. Hence, if the program is stored in the
data and how to calculate the necessary memory space. standard ROM, memory card (RAM) or memory card
3
Note, that the Q mode is different in concept from the A (ROM), the program memory needs sufficient free space
mode. Refer to the Chapter of the A Mode for the memory to accept that program.
concept of the A mode. For use of the debugging data for trace function, a failure
Memory Makeup history or a general-purpose file, the memory card must
be loaded.
The Q mode uses multiple memories according to the Program
purpose of use in the CPU module. These memories are Ladder, list or SFC sequence program file. When running
identified by the access drive numbers. The memories multiple programs, multiple program files are also stored
used in the Q mode are as follows. It should be noted that in memory.
the High Performance model QCPU is equipped with only Parameter
one memory card slot, which accepts only one card. File storing PLC parameters and network parameters set
CPU module during programming.
Intelligent function module parameter
Intelligent function module parameter file set using GX
Memory card (RAM) Program memory
Configurator. This file does not exist if you do not use the
(Drive number: 1) (Drive number: 0)
setting made with GX Configurator.
Device comment
Memory card (ROM) Standard RAM File of device comments annotated to each device of the
(Drive number: 2) (Drive number: 3) CPU. This file does not exist if device comments are not
created.
Device initial value
Standard ROM Initial value file required when setting given initial values
(Drive number: 4) to devices in the CPU module at power-on. This file does
not exist if device initial values are not used.
File register
List of data that can be stored into each memory
File register (R, ZR) file. Setting different file names allows
CPU Built-In Memory Memory Card
multiple file register files to be stored.
Note: The file registers can be stored in the memory card
Memory card
Memory card
Memory card
SRAM card
Flash card
ATA card
Standard
Standard
Program
memory
(ROM)
(ROM)
(RAM)
Memory Name (ROM) (drive number: 2), but not in the ATA card
ROM
RAM
(Q2MEM-8MBA/16MAB/32MBA).
The file registers stored in the flash card allow read only in
Drive number 0 3 4 1 2 the program and do not allow modification of data in the
File size increment 4kB 512B program.
Program Local device
Parameter
Local devices are devices exclusively used with the
Intelligent function
module parameter corresponding programs in the presence of multiple
Device comment programs.
When processing any program, the corresponding local
File register
device data is transferred from the local device area to the
Local device
executing device area and program processing is then
Debugging data
Failure history performed.
General-purpose file
3-41
Cards
Debugging data Standard RAM (Drive number: 3)

Trace result storage file for the trace function used for Memory equipped as standard inside the CPU.
program debugging. Memory Capacity Number of Files
Type
General-purpose file (Bytes) Stored
Data file written by the FWRITE instruction. Q02HCPU 64k/128k (Note 3) 2 (Note 1)
Note that the general-purpose file can be stored in the Q06HCPU 64k/128k (Note 3) 2 (Note 1)
Q12HCPU 64k/256k (Note 2) 2 (Note 1)
ATA card (Q2MEM-8MBA/16MBA/32MBA) only. Q25HCPU 64k/256k (Note 2) 2 (Note 1)
Program memory (Drive number: 0) Note 1: One file register file and one local device file can be
stored.
Memory equipped as standard inside the CPU. Note 2: The memory capacity of the Q12HCPU or Q25HCPU
whose upper 5 digits of the serial No. are "02092" or later
The memory capacity depends on the CPU type. is 256k bytes.
Memory Capacity Number of Files Note 3: The memory capacity of the Q02HCPU or Q06HCPU
Type whose upper 5digits of the serial No. are "04012" or later
(Bytes) Stored
is 128k bytes.
Q02 (H) CPU 112k 28
Q06HCPU 240k 60
Q12HCPU 496k 124
Standard ROM (Drive number: 4)
Q25HCPU 1008k 252 Memory equipped as standard inside the CPU.
Memory Number of Number of
Up to 124 program files can be executed. Type
Capacity (Bytes) Files Stored Write Times
Q02 (H) CPU 112k 28 100,000
Memory card (RAM) (Drive number: 1) Q06HCPU 240k 60 100,000
Q12HCPU 496k 124 100,000
Memory used in the memory card interface of the CPU, Q25HCPU 1008k 252 100,000
where the SRAM card can be used.
The program stored in the standard ROM is transferred to the
Memory Capacity Number of Files program memory at power-on of the system and executed there.
Type
(Bytes) Stored
(When boot operation setting has been made)
Q2MEM-1MBS 1011.5k 256
Q2MEM-2MBS 2034k 288 Calculating Memory Capacity
The above capacity is achieved after formatting.
The program stored in the RAM memory card is transferred to the
Use the following table to calculate the capacity of the
program memory at power-on of the system and executed there. files stored in each memory (drive). Note that the file size
(When boot operation setting has been made) increment of drive 0 is 4096 bytes, and those of drives 1
to 4 are all 512 bytes. If the file size is less, then it is
Memory card (ROM) (Drive number: 2)
rounded up to that size.
Memory used in the memory card interface of the CPU, The User allocated system area (0 to 15K steps) is
where the flash card or ATA card can be used. available for accelerating monitoring from GX Developer
Memory Capacity Number of Files when memory would be formatted, and the user file area
Type
(Bytes) Stored size would be decline according to the user allocated
Q2MEM-2MBF 2035k 288
system area size.
Q2MEM-4MBF 4079k 288
Q2MEM-8MBA 7940k 512 File Function File Capacity (Bytes)
Q2MEM-16MBA 15932k 512 Parameter 1k + network parameter capacity (Note 1)
Q2MEM-32MBA 31854k 512 Intelligent parameter (Note 1)
Program 136 + (Number of steps 4)
The above capacity is achieved after formatting. Device comment 74 + (sum of comment data sizes of devices)
• Comment data size of one device
The program stored in the ROM memory card is transferred to
= 10 + 10250 a + 40 b
the program memory at power-on of the system and executed • a: Quotient of ((Number of device points)/256)
there. (When boot operation setting has been made) • b: Remainder of ((Number of device
points)/256)
Device initial value Assuming that n = setting number, 44 n +
(number of device points of setting 1 + ..... +
number of device points of setting n) 2 + 66
File register Number of file register points 2 (Note 1)
3-42
Cards
File Function File Capacity (Bytes) Memory

Write Count
Local device 72 + (set device type 6) + ((total number of Type Memory Type Capacity
(times)
set M and V points / 16) + (total number of set (bytes)
T, ST and C points / 16 18) + (number of set Q2MEM-1MBS SRAM 1,011.5k No restriction
D points)) 2 number of program files
Q2MEM-2MBS 2,034k No restriction
Failure history data (Number of failures stored 54) + 72
Debugging data Specified devices traced:
Q2MEM-2MBF Linear flash 2,035k 100,000 3
Q2MEM-4MBF ROM (Note 4) 4,079k 100,000
(20 + (number of word device points ) +
(number of bit device points / 16) 2) trace Q2MEM-8MBA ATA flash ROM 7,940k 1,000,000
count + (device range 12) + 362 Q2MEM-16MBA (Note 4) 15,932k 1,000,000
General-purpose file Number of write points set by FWRITE Q2MEM-32MBA 31,854k 1,000,000
instruction
Note 4: Both the linear flash ROM and ATA flash ROM are
Note 1: The network parameter and intelligent parameter sizes re-write enabled non-volatile memories.
are shown below. The following table indicates the
Battery Life of Q2MEM-1MBS/2MBS
maximum capacity per corresponding module and the
capacity may be less than the given size according to the The Q2MEM-1MBS/2MBS built in battery has the
setting.
following battery life. Note that the Q2MEM-1MBS/2MBS
is loaded into the PLC CPU and consumes battery current
Corresponding if power is ON.
Capacity
Module
Ethernet With e-mail setting: 12488 (bytes/module) Battery life
Without e-mail setting: 2060 (bytes/module) After SM51 is
MELSECNET/H 11466 (bytes/module) + 1548 bytes ON Ratio energized
CC-Link 1423 (bytes/module) + 6 bytes SRAM card Guaranteed Value in
(Note 5) (Guaranteed
value actual use
Analog to digital 508 (bytes/module) (Q68ADV) time after
(MIN) (TYP)
conversion module alarm
Digital to analog 378(bytes/module) (Q68DAV) occurrence)
conversion module 0% 2400hr 2.7years 20hr
Serial communication 774bytes/module) (QJ71C24-R2)
module 30% 2880hr 3.6years 20hr
Q2MEM-2MBS
50% 4320hr 4.5years 20hr
(Note 7)
Note 2: The maximum number of file register points that can be 70% 6480hr 5.0years 20hr
stored in each memory is as shown below. However, if 100% 5.0years 5.0years 50hr
other files exist in the same memory, the capacity usable 0% 2400hr 2.7years 20hr
Q2MEM-1MBS
by file registers reduces. Note that if the file registers are Manufacturing 30% 2880hr 3.6years 20hr
stored separately in different memories (drives), the file control number 50% 4320hr 4.5years 20hr
register used must be selected by the QDRSET " B" 70% 6480hr 5.0years 20hr
(Note 6) (Note 7)
instruction. In addition, the file registers stored in the 100% 5.0years 5.0years 50hr
ROM memory card are read-only and cannot be rewritten Q2MEM-1MBS 0% 690hr 6336hr 8hr
Manufacturing
by a program. 100% 11784hr 13872hr 8hr
control number
Max. Number of File Register " A"
Memory Type
Points
(Note 6)
RAM memory Q2MEM-1MBS 517,120 points
card Note 5: The ON ratio denotes the ratio of power-on time in a day
(Drive: 1) Q2MEM-2MBS 1,041,408 points (24 hours) .
ROM memory Q2MEM-2MBF 1,041,408 points (When power is on for 12 hours and off for 12 hours, the
card Q2MEM-4MBF 1,042,432 points ON ratio is 50%.)
(Drive: 2)
Note 6: The manufacturing control number is given on the SRAM
Standard RAM (Drive: 3) 32,768 points (Q02)
32,768 points/65,536 points card rear label.
(Note 3) (Q02H, Q06H) Note 7: The time in the above table applies to the case where the
131,072 points (Q12H, Q25H)
CPU used is the one whose function version is B or later
Note 3: 65,536 points for the Q02HCPU and Q06HCPU whose and with the first five digits of the serial No. are "04012"
function version is B or later and whose first five digits of or later.
the serial No. are "04012" or later.
Performance Specifications Number of Parameters That Can Be Set

Memory cards are available in SRAM type, linear flash
Using GX Configurator
ROM type and ATA flash ROM type. They are classified Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.2.4 for restrictions on the
as follows according to their applications and capacities. number of parameters that can be set using GX
Configurator for the mounted intelligent function modules.
3-43
QCPU 3.4 Process QCPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Overview For details of restrictions, refer to the corresponding

module specification sections.
The following model list shows models applicable for the
The following ‘applicable model list’ provides guidelines for
process CPUs. The Q series modules include the
network-related and other modules that are restricted in
Accessories etc that are not mounted directly to base units,
the number of mounted modules.
e.g. optional connectors, are given in the model list at the
Information for restrictions of modules is shown in the
end of this book.
following table.

Product Type Description Occupied Consumption (A) Remarks
CPU module Q12PHCPU Program capacity: 124k steps, ─ 0.64 ─
(Process QCPU) number of I/O points: 4096 points,
multiple PLC system compatible
Q25PHCPU Program capacity: 252k steps, ─ 0.64 ─
multiple PLC system compatible
Memory card Q2MEM-1MBS SRAM card: 1M Bytes ─ 0.150 ─
Q2MEM-2MBS SRAM card: 2M Bytes ─ 0.150 ─
Q2MEM-2MBF Flash card: 2M Bytes ─ 0.130 ─
Q2MEM-4MBF Flash card: 4M Bytes ─ 0.130 ─
Q2MEM-8MBA ATA card: 8M Bytes ─ 0.054 ─
Battery Q6BAT Battery for program memory, standard RAM ─ ─ ─
3-44
3.4 Process QCPU : QCPU
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
When using Q3 B, Q5 B, Q6 B base unit

Number of Current
Product Type Description Points Occupied Consumption Restrictions
[I/O Allocation] (A)
Main base unit Q33B Q series module mounting base —

5VDC 24VDC
0.105 — —
3
For power supply + CPU + I/O 8 slots
For power supply + CPU + I/O 12 slots
For 2 I/O slots
For 5 I/O slots
Extension cable QC05B 0.45m (1.48ft.) cable for extension base — — — 1
Power supply module Q61P-A1 Power supply for Q3 B/Q6 B, 100-120VAC input, — — — —
5VDC 6A output
Q61P-A2 Power supply for Q3 B/Q6 B, 200-240VAC input, — — — —
5VDC 6A output
Q63P Power supply for Q3 B/Q6 B, 24VDC input, — — — —
5VDC 6A output
5VDC 8.5A output
commons
commons
commons
QY22 16-point 100/240VAC triac output 16 [16pt Y] 0.400 — —
QY68A 8-point 5/12/24VDC transistor (All points independent, used 16 [16pt Y] 0.110 — —
as either sink or source)
3-45
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU

12/24VDC, 32 output points, transistor (sink)
12/24VDC, 7 output points, transistor (sink)
Interrupt module QI60 16 points of interrupt inputs 16 [16pt F] 0.14 — 1
Ethernet module QJ71E71-B5 Ethernet interface module (10BASE5) 32 [32pt F] 0.43 — 1
QJ71E71-100 Ethernet interface module (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX) 32 [32pt F] 0.50 — 1
MELSECNET/H module QJ71BR11 10Mbps communication speed-compatible coaxial bus 32 [32pt F] 0.75 — 1
QJ72BR15 10Mbps communication speed-compatible coaxial bus — 1.10 — 1
QJ71LP21-25 10Mbps/25Mbps communication speed-compatible 32 [32pt F] 0.55 — 1
duplex optical loop (SI/H-PCF/QSI cable)
QJ72LP25-25 10Mbps/25Mbps communication speed-compatible — 0.89 — 1
duplex optical loop (SI/H-PCF/QSI cable) (For remote
I/O station)
QJ71LP21G 10Mbps communication speed-compatible duplex 32 [32pt F] 0.55 — 1
optical loop (GI cable) (control station, normal station,
remote master station)
QJ72LP25G 10Mbps communication speed-compatible duplex — 0.89 — 1
optical loop (GI cable) (For remote I/O station)
QJ71LP21GE 10Mbps communication speed-compatible duplex 32 [32pt F] 0.55 — 1
optical loop (62.5GI cable)
QJ72LP25GE 10Mbps communication speed-compatible duplex — 0.89 — 1
optical loop (62.5GI cable) (For remote I/O station)
FL-net module QJ71FL71-F01 FL-net (OPCN-2) interface module 32 [32pt F] 0.50 — 1
CC-Link module QJ61BT11 Master station, local station 32 [32pt F] 0.46 — 1
CC-Link/LT module QJ61CL12 Master station 2 0.13 0.028 1
Profibus QJ71PB92D
DeviceNet QJ71DN91
Serial communication module QJ71C24 RS-232, RS-422/485, 1 channel each 32 [32pt F] 0.28 — —
QJ71C24-R2 RS-232, 2 channels 32 [32pt F] 0.24 — —
Intelligent communication QD51 BASIC program, 2 channels of RS232 32 [32pt F] 0.40 — —
module QD51-R24 BASIC program, 1 channel of RS232, 1 channel of 32 [32pt F] 0.40 — —
RS-422
Channel-isolated Q64AD-GH Analog input (voltage, current), 4 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.89 — —
analog/digital Q62AD-DGH Analog input (current), 2 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.22 — —
conversion module 1 With signal conditioning function
Analog to digital conversion Q64AD Analog input (voltage, current), 4 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.63 — —
module 1
Q68ADV Analog input (voltage), 8 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.64 — —
Channel-isolated Q62DA-FG Analog output (voltage, current), 2 channels, with 16 [16pt F] 0.37 0.30 —
digital/analog conversion output monitor
module 1
Digital to analog conversion Q62DA Analog output, (voltage, current). 2 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.33 0.12 —
module 1
Q64DA Analog output, (voltage, current). 4 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.34 0.18 —
3-46
3.4 Process QCPU : QCPU
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU

Number of Current
Product Type Description Points Occupied Consumption (A) Restrictions
Channel-isolated Q64TDV-GH Thermocouple input, 4 channels, micro voltage input 16 [16pt F] 0.50 — —
3
thermocouple input module Q64TD Thermocouple input, 4 channels 16 [16pt F] 0.50 — —
Thermocouple Input module Q64RD Platinum temperature-measuring resistor input (3/4 16 [16pt F] 0.60 — —
wire type), 4 channels
Temperature control module Q64TCTT Thermocouple input, 4 channels, transistor output 16 [16pt F] 0.55 — —
1 Q64TCTTBW Thermocouple input, 4 channels, transistor output, with 32 [16pt S + 0.64 — —
Q64TCRT Platinum temperature-measuring resistor input, 4 16 [16pt F] 0.55 — —
channels, transistor output
Q64TCRTBW Platinum temperature-measuring resistor input, 4 32 [16pt S + 0.64 — —
channels, transistor output, with disconnection 16pt F]
detection function
High-speed counter module QD62 DC input sink output 16 [16pt F] 0.30 — —
QD62E DC input source output 16 [16pt F] 0.33 — —
Channel-isolated QD60P8-G Pulse input, 8 channels 32 [32pt F] 0.58 — —
pulse input module 1
1: The Process CPU serial number on the rating plate ending with a C supports online module change.
2: Any of 16, 32, 48, 64, 128, 256, 512 and 1024 points can be set with the DIP SW. (Assignment: Intelligent)
3-47
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
System Configuration
The Q series modules given in the applicable model list can be used as process CPUs.
Basic configuration
This section describes the configuration of peripheral devices, and the overview of system configuration, in a process CPU
system.
(1) Components in process CPU system
MITSUBISHI
MITSUBISHI
LITHIUM BATTERY
Memory card Process CPU Battery

(SRAM/Flash/ATA type) (Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU) (Q6BAT)
Main base unit Q series power supply, I/O,

(Q33B,Q35B,Q38B,Q312B) intelligent function modules
Extension cable
(QC05B,QC06B,QC12B,
QC30B,QC50B,QC100B)
Addition of Q series modules
Q6 B extension base unit Q5 B extension base unit

(Q63B,Q65B,Q68B,Q612B) (Q52B,Q55B)
Q series power supply, I/O, Q series I/O,

intelligent function modules intelligent function modules
3-48
3.4 Process QCPU: QCPU
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
(2) Configuration of peripheral devices for process CPU
3
Memory Card (Q2MEM-1MBS,
Q2MEM-2MBS,Q2MEM-2MBF, Process CPU
Q2MEM-4MBF,Q2MEM-8MBA, (Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU)
Q2MEM-16MBA,Q2MEM-32MBA)
RS-232 cable USB cable

(QC30R2) (User-prepared)
Personal computer
PC card adapter
GX Developer
(Q2MEM-ADP)
(Version 7.12N or later)
3-49
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU

(1) The total number of I/O and intelligent function modules that can be mounted onto the main and extension bases is up
to 64. This total of mountable modules is the same whether you use the Q6 B/Q5 B (extension) base. Also, a
selection of base units from the 3 I/O slot model to the 12 I/O slot model are available. Whichever combination of base
units used, the total number of mountable modules is up to 64.
(2) You can connect the Q6 B/Q5 B up to 7 extension bases. (Up to 8 bases including the main base)
(3) The Q6 B and Q5 B can be used together.
(4) The overall extension cables distance is within 13.2m (43.28ft.).
(5) Unlike the A and QnA series CPU modules, the process CPU automatically recognizes the number of slots of the
connected main/extension base(s) and allocates the I/O numbers.
Refer to the Process CPU User's Manual (Hardware Design/Maintenance and Inspection).
The following shows the I/O number automatically assigned according to default I/O assignment.
0 1 2 3 4 ............. Slot No.
Input module
Input module
Input module
Output module
Output module
Power supply
Q25PHCPU
module
I/O numbers assigned according to I/O points of slots.
16 16 32 16 64
X00 X10 X20 Y40 Y50
5 6 7 8 9
Output module
function module
function module
function module
Vacant
Intelligent
Intelligent
Intelligent
Power supply
1
module

32 32 32 16 16
X/Y90 X/YB0X/YD0 YF0 100

X/YAFX/YCFX/YEF YFF 10F the number next to the last slot No. of extension
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Input module
Input module
Output module
Output module
Output module
function module
function module
function module
Intelligent
Intelligent
Intelligent
Power supply
module
2
IN OUT
16 16 32 32 32 16 16 16
X110 X120 X/Y130 X/Y150X/Y170 Y190 Y1A0Y1B0
X11F X12FX/Y14FX/Y16FX/Y18F Y19F Y1AFY1BF
3-50
3.4 Process QCPU: QCPU
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
(6) Max. number of mountable modules per system.

Module Number of mountable modules
Q series MELSECNET/H QJ71LP21-25 Up to four modules
network module QJ71LP21G
QJ71LP21GE
QJ71BR11
3
Q series Ethernet interface QJ71E71 Up to four modules
module QJ71E71-B2
QJ71E71-100
Q series CC-Link system master QJ61BT11 Up to four modules (Note 1)
• local module
Interrupt module QI60 Only one module
Note1: Using GX Developer, the CC-Link network parameters can be set to control up to four modules. When the CC-Link dedicated
instructions are used to set parameters, there are no restrictions on the number of loaded modules.
Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.9 for the CC-Link system master • local modules for which parameters can be set using dedicated
instructions.
(7) Only the GOT-A900 series/GOT-F900 series graphic operation terminals are usable (Q mode-compatible system OS
and communication driver must be installed). Note that the Q series bus interface module is required for bus connection.
The GOT800 series, A77GOT and A64GOT do not support Q Bus connection.
(8) Mount the MELSECNET/H module for remote I/O station (QJ72BR15, QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QJ72LP25GE) on
the CPU slot of the main base. It cannot be mounted on an extension base.
3-51
3.4 Process QCPU:
QCPU Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
CPU modules
Overview High-speed program processing

The process CPU has achieved about five times faster
Based on the High Performance model QCPU, the processing in PC MIX value than the conventional model
process CPU has been provided with additional process (A2USHCPU-S1).
control instructions, and improved in engineering
Use of base units adopting high-speed bus
environment and usability to configure a high-level process
control system excellent in cost performance. system
The process CPU has the following features. The Q series base units have significantly improved data
transfer speed to and from I/O, intelligent function and
High-level process control
network modules (approx. 4 to 8 times higher than existing
Having two-degree-of-freedom PID, sample PID and other
models). Especially, they can reduce the influence of large
process instructions, the process CPU achieves high-level
amounts of data transfer to/from network modules on the
loop control, fast processing of PID operation, therefore
scan time.
can respond to the increase in the number of loops.
Also, there is a wide choice of channel-isolated analog Fixed scan execution program
modules compatible with process control. In addition to normal scan execution programs, you can
This prevents interference between input channels for create fixed scan execution programs. Repeatedly running
accurate analog signals and eliminates the need to install at preset intervals of 0.5ms to 60s (0.5ms increments), a
an external insulating amplifier, achieving space saving fixed scan execution program can achieve fast response
and a reduction in cost. without influence on the entire program scan time.
Auto tuning function Event interruption
The auto tuning instruction has been added to the process Network modules and some intelligent function modules
CPU. have a function to interrupt CPU modules. This function
This has realized automatic adjustment of control allows fast response to events, which take place
parameter, shorter adjustment time, less dispersion. asynchronously with the PLC program scan, e.g. receiving
of network module data. In addition, it can remove the data
Online module change
transfer-related programs from scan execution programs,
When the module develops a fault, the process CPU
resulting in the reduction of the scan time.
allows the module to be changed without the system being
stopped. Large-capacity programs
The modules that can be changed are the I/O modules, The process CPU is available in two models having
analog modules (Note 1), thermocouple input modules program capacities of 124k steps and 252k steps. You can
(Note 1), temperature control modules (Note 1), and pulse choose the optimum CPU module for your equipment.
input modules (Note 1). Large-capacity extended memory
Note 1: Applicable to function version C or later. The process CPU has a small PC card slot to accept a
Multiplexed remote function memory card of up to 32M bytes. A memory card will save
With the process CPU, a MELSECNET/H multiplexed previously used programs intact as a history, also stores
remote I/O system can be configured. comment files, extension file registers and other CPU
By providing a multiplexed remote master station and a module internal devices.
multiplexed remote sub master station, the control of Number of control I/O points
remote I/O stations can be continued by the multiplexed Both types of process CPU models can control up to 4096
remote sub master station instead if the multiplexed points of I/O. Also, when used with a remote I/O network
remote master station becomes faulty. such as CC-Link, it can control max. 8192 points of I/O.
This improves the system reliability. Expandability of up to 64 I/O slots
In the process CPU range, up to seven extension base
units can be connected, and up to a total of 64 I/O slots
can be used, if more I/O slots are needed in addition to
those of the main base unit (max. 12 I/O slots).
3-52
3.4 Process QCPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU QCPU
CPU modules
Security Operation processing in RUN mode

The process CPU manages sequence programs and files. (1) In the RUN mode, sequence program operation
A password can be specified to restrict access to individual
alternates between step 0 and END (FEND)
files.
instruction.
Refer to the following manual for details of the process 3
CPU. (2) When entering the RUN mode, the process CPU
• MELSEC-Q Series QnPHCPU General Manual re-outputs the output (Y) statuses saved at STOP if
(BCN-89000-0117) parameter setting (STOP to RUN-time output mode
setting) has been made. (The saved output data can
Function Explanations also be cleared before RUN.)
The functions of the process CPU are described below. Operation processing in STOP mode
Note that the programming-related functions are given in (1) In the STOP mode, sequence program operation is
Chapter 13, Section 13.1.3 "Programming". stopped by the RUN/STOP switch or remote STOP, or
I/O control system operation is stopped due to an error occurring.
(2) When entering the STOP mode, the process CPU
The type of I/O control system for the process CPU is saves the current output (Y) statuses and turns off all
refresh mode. In refresh mode, input data from the input outputs (Y). Device data other than the output (Y) is
module and output data to the output module are held. Note that the Q series output module can be set
refreshed at once, when the sequence program END to hold the output at a STOP when an error occurs.
instruction is processed. Operation processing in PAUSE mode
When there are two or more scan execution programs, (1) In the PAUSE mode, sequence program operation is
you can select whether refresh processing is carried out at stopped with the output (Y) and data memory status
the END instruction of the last run scan execution program held. The outputs, which are ON, are kept ON, and the
or at the END instruction of the corresponding scan inputs that should turn OFF the outputs are ignored.
execution program. When using this mode, therefore, fully note the system
operation in the PAUSE mode.
CPU module
CPU (operation processor) 1 At input Data type
Data memory
peripheral
X0
for input (X)
device module The process CPU supports five data types: bit, word,
At input refresh Area for double word, real number and character string. The
communications
2
with input module At output following table shows the numerical ranges and the CPU
Y22 Data memory refresh Output module's internal devices, which can store those values.
for output (Y)
Y20
module Numerical Range
To increase the response capability, I/O control in an Bit 0 (OFF), 1 (ON)

interrupt program may require refreshing of I/O data while Word Word device -32768 to 32767 (Note 2)
executing an instruction without having to wait for END Bit device Value can be handled as a collection of
processing. In that case, devices DX (input) and DY 4, 8, 12 and 16 bits. (Note 1)
(output) can be used as direct I/O. Double word Word device -2147483648 to 2147483647 (Note 2)
Bit device Value can be handled as a collection of
For example, when you describe X100, the X100 data
4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28 and 32 bits.
obtained by refresh processing is used for operation. (Note 1)
When you describe DX100, operation is executed using Real number ±1.17549E-38 to ±3.40282E+38 (Note 3)
the X100 data of the same input module acquired at the Character ASCII code (Note 4)
point of executing its contact instruction. This also applies string
to output. Note 1: Bit devices can also handle numerical data by using digit
Operation processing specification. In digit specification, bit devices are
The process CPU has three different operation modes: represented by specifying them in 4-bit increments.
RUN, STOP and PAUSE modes. Each operation mode
performs one of the following operations processing
respectively.
3-53
3.4 Process QCPU:
QCPU Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
CPU modules
<For word data> Timers' timing performance capabilities

Example: Setting range by digit specification of inputs X0
to XF The internal timers of the process CPU are all on-delay
XF XC XB X8 X7 X4 X3 X0 timers, and are available in four types: low-speed timer,
high-speed timer, low-speed retentive timer and
K1 specified high-speed retentive timer.
range
K2 specified (4 points) The timing increments and timing errors are shown below.
range
Timing Increments
K3 specified (8 points) Low-speed timer Variable between 1 and 1000ms
range
Low-speed retentive timer
K4 specified (12 points) High-speed timer Variable between 0.1 and 100ms
range
High-speed retentive timer
(16 points)
Note that the timing range is up to the preset timing
Numerical Range That Can Be
Specified Digits
Handled
increments × 32767. Since timer measurement is made by
K1 (4 points) 0 to 15 adding the value of every scan time measured at every
K2 (8 points) 0 to 255 END instruction to the timer present value at OUT
K3 (12 points) 0 to 4095
K4 (16 points) -32768 to 32767 (Note 2) instruction processing, a measurement error of -{(1 scan
Values in parentheses are the numbers of bit device points. time) + (timer limit setting)} to 1 scan time occurs.
<For double word data> Instructions for use of timers
Example: Setting range by digit specification of inputs X0 Timers cannot be used in initial execution, standby, fixed
to X1F
scan execution and interrupt programs.
Fixed scan execution program performance

K1
specified
range
capabilities
K2
(4 points)
specified
range A fixed scan program is run according to user's preset time
K3
specified (8 points) (execution cycle) and its cycle time can be set from 0.5ms
range
K4 to 60s (0.5ms increments).
range
K5
(16 points)
Starting time delay
specified
range The following time delay is required to start an interrupt
K6
specified
range
(20 points) program.
K7
specified (24 points) CPU Type Starting Time (µs)
range
K8 Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU 165
range
Start inhibiting factor
(32 points)
A fixed scan execution program is not started when the
Numerical Range That Can Be interrupt status is not enabled. It is started after the EI
Specified Digits
Handled
K1 (4 points) 0 to 15 instruction is enabled.
K2 (8 points) 0 to 255 Start delaying factors
K3 (12 points) 0 to 4095 With the following cases, the start of a fixed scan
K4 (16 points) 0 to 65535
K5 (20 points) 0 to 1048575 execution program is delayed.
K6 (24 points) 0 to 16777215 (1) During execution of any instruction
K7 (28 points) 0 to 268435455
(2) During processing of request for read/write of data in
K8 (32 points) -2147483648 to 2147483647
(Note 2) CPU's internal memory from GX Developer, network
Values in parentheses are the numbers of bit device points. module, GOT, etc.
Note 2: Numerical values in an unsigned format (example: 0 to (3) During execution of another fixed scan program or
65535 numerical range for word) are not supported. interrupt program.
Note 3: For 32-bit data, a real number uses two consecutive
registers. (4) When multiple interrupt programs are started at the
Note 4: A character string is stored in multiple consecutive same time, the programs of lower priority wait until the
registers and NULL (00) is used as a code to indicate the processing of the higher-priority program is complete.
end of the character string. There are no restrictions on
the number of characters handled.
(5) When a program and an interrupt program are started
Note that the character string that can be handled as a simultaneously, the interrupt program has priority.
constant in a program is up to 32 characters long.
3-54
3.4 Process QCPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU QCPU
CPU modules
Instructions for setting of cycle time High-speed execution of interrupt program

The execution processing time (including the starting
Delay time) of a fixed scan execution program must be set To shorten the time delay from when an interrupt condition
to less than the cycle setting time of that program. holds until interrupt program processing starts, you can
Also, if the ratio of the fixed scan execution program
processing time compared to the total processing time is
choose the high-speed execution mode for an interrupt 3
program. It can reduce the time delay as follows.
too high, it may delay the scan execution program
processing, resulting in WDT error. Therefore, care should CPU Type Delay Time (µs)
be taken when setting the cycle time. Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU 100
If the real-time interrupt programs I28 to I31 is used, However, if the high-speed mode is selected, the following
automatic I/O (X/Y) refresh is not made at the start and processing will not be done as previously in normal mode.
end of the interrupt program. As required, the refresh Therefore, care needs to be taken while programming.
instruction must be executed to perform I/O refresh Back up of index register
processing. In the normal mode, where the save/return processing of
In contrast, a fixed scan execution program the index register Z is automatically executed on shift to an
automatically performs input X and output Y refreshing
interrupt program, use of the index register in the interrupt
the parameter-preset range at the start and end of the
program does not corrupt the value of the index register.
fixed scan execution program.
Main program
Interrupt factor
Interrupt program performance capabilities
Any of the following starting factors are usable to initiate Index save
interrupt programs.
(1) Interrupt from the QI60 interrupt module Interrupt
(2) Interrupt from the intelligent function module or network program
module Index return
(3) Cyclic interrupt by CPU's internal timer (0.5ms to
1000ms)
(4) Interrupt due to CPU error occurrence
Starting time delay In the high-speed execution mode, however, this
The following time delay is required to start an interrupt save/return processing is not performed. Hence, use of the
program. index register in the interrupt program may produce an
CPU Type Starting Time (µs) illegal index register value at the time it returns to the main
Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU 165 program. To prevent it, use the ZPUSH/ZPOP instruction
Start inhibiting factor in the interrupt program to perform the save/return
An interrupt program is not started when the interrupt processing of the index register in the user’s program.
status is disabled. It is started after the EI instruction is
Save processing of file register file name
enabled.
Start delaying factors In the normal mode, the save/return processing of the file
With the following cases, the start of an interrupt program register name being used are automatically performed at a
is delayed. shift to and a return from an interrupt program. Hence, in
(1) During execution of any instruction the interrupt program using the QDRSET to change the file
(2) During processing of request for read/write of data in register file name re-sets to the original file register file
CPU's internal memory from GX Developer, network
name automatically at return.
module, GOT, etc.
(3) During execution of another fixed scan execution In the high-speed execution mode, this save/return
program or interrupt program. processing is not performed and this should be processed
(4) When multiple interrupt programs are started at the in the user’s program as required.
same time, the programs of lower priority wait until the
processing of the higher-priority programs is complete.
Instructions for use of interrupt programs
If the ratio of the interrupt program processing time
compared to the total processing time is too high, it may
delay the scan execution program processing, resulting in
WDT error. Therefore, care should be taken when setting
the interrupt conditions.
3-55
3.4 Process QCPU:
QCPU Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
CPU modules
How to reduce scan time by changing (2) When the instantaneous power failure is cleared,
operation processing resumes.
setting Instantaneous power
The following factors enable the scan time to be shorter by failure occurrence Power restored
END 0 END END
changing the PLC parameter setting.
A series CPU compatibility setting CPU suspends
When the special relays/special registers of operation.
SM1000/SD1000 or later are not to be used, the scan time

When an instantaneous power beyond the
can be reduced by setting the parameters corresponding
permissible time occurs
The process CPU behaves the same as for when it is
to the values given in the following table.
powered on, or when it is reset with the reset switch.
CPU Type Processing Time (ms) Forced ON/OFF of external input/output
Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU 0.03
Forced ON/OFF of external I/O is a function that the
Constant scan function process CPU forcibly turns the inputs (X) and outputs (Y)
ON/OFF during RUN using GX Developer.
In the processing of program in the High Performance
<Device test function>
model QCPU, the scan time changes per scan because Cannot be turned OFF by device test. X0
the processing time differs depending on whether an Sensor input ON
X0
instruction used in a sequence program is executed or not. Sensor input
M100
ON Facility warning notice
Y10
The constant scan function is designed to run the M0
output ON OFF
Y10
sequence program repeatedly while maintaining a Facility alarm Warning notice
detection ON output
constant scan time.
When the scan time is constant, time delays in external Cannot be turned ON/OFF
signal input, operation processing and output are fixed, <External input/output forced ON/OFF function>
therefore increasing the accuracy of controlling equipment. Can be turned OFF by forced input.
The constant scan time set range is from 0.5 to X0

GX Developer
M100
2000m Sensor input OFF
External output can be turned
M0
Scan Time at Constant Scan Setting of 10ms for Y10
ON/OFF by forced output.
Execution of Multiple Programs Facility alarm

detection ON
Warning notice
output
Note: Y10 is turned OFF in output module
but remains ON in ladder.
Sequence program A
Sequence program B Forced ON/OFF of external input
Sequence program C When the sensor remains ON, it can be forced OFF
END processing without removing the external wiring.
Forced ON/OFF of external output
At system start-up, if the alarm status is ON, and then
Waiting time
8ms 2ms 9ms 1ms forced to OFF, the alarm status is cancelled allowing for
10ms 10ms
continuation of testing etc.
Online module change is a function to enable changing of
Processing at instantaneous power failure
the Q series module mounted on the main/extension base
When the supplied power supply voltage for the power during control of the PLC system. The module that
supply module becomes lower than the rated voltage, the develops a fault can be removed and replaced (same type
High Performance model QCPU detects an instantaneous module), while the system is still online.
power failure and performs the following actions. Conditions for online module change
When an instantaneous power failure within the (1) Modules that can be changed online
permissible time occurs Module Restrictions
(1) When an instantaneous power failure occurs, the Input module None
Output module
output status is held and the operation processing is
I/O hybrid module
suspended. Intelligent function Analog module Applicable to function
However, the timing of the timer(s) and watchdog timer module Thermocouple input module version "C"
Temperature control module
(WDT) timing continue. (For example, when the scan
Pulse input module
time is 190ms at the WDT setting of 200ms, the
Additional modules not mentioned above cannot be
occurrence of a 15ms instantaneous power failure
changed online.
causes a watchdog timer error.)
3-56
3.4 Process QCPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU QCPU
CPU modules
(2) GX Developer that supports online module change Diagnostic Item Diagnostic Item
CPU hardware fault File access error
GX Developer Ver. 7.10L or later is required to perform END instruction unexecuted Instruction execution not possible
online module change. RAM check Parameter setting check
Operation circuit check Link parameter error
Online module change can also be made via a
Fuse blown SFC parameter error 3
network. I/O interrupt error Instruction code error
(3) Base unit that supports online module change Intelligent function module error No END instruction
Control bus error Pointer setting error
Use the main base and Q6 B extension base, for Instantaneous power failure Operation check error
online module change, occurrence
Battery low FOR to NEXT instruction structure
Any module mounted on the Q5 B extension base error
cannot be changed online. I/O module verify CALL to RET instruction structure
error
When the Q5 B is being used, any module Intelligent function module Interrupt program error
mounted on the main base unit of the same system assignment error
No parameter Extended instruction error
cannot be changed online. Boot error SFC error
(4) Number of modules that can be changed online Memory card operation error Watchdog timer error
File setting error Program time exceeded
The number of modules that can be changed online at
any one time is one module per CPU. Failure history
Multiple modules cannot be changed simultaneously.
The process CPU stores the results of the self-diagnostic
(5) Online module change in multi CPU system function and time of failure in the CPU memory as a failure
When making the online module change of any module history. Confirmation of failure can be made even after the
used with the process CPU in a multi CPU system, error is resolved.
"Online module change enable" must be set in the System protective functions
multi CPU setting of the PLC parameter.
The process CPU has several protective functions (system
Also, there are restrictions on the versions of the CPU
protection) against program modifications from third
modules that comprise the multi CPU system. parties.
For details, refer to the overview of multi CPU system System protections have different means for different
and the instructions for multi CPU system configuration objects to be protected.
in Chapter 3, Section 3.5. Protecting the whole CPU
Using the process CPU DIP switches.
Restrictions on online module change
External restriction of writing multiple files can be done at
The following operations cannot be performed during once, therefore resulting in a simple method of protection.
online module change. However, a third party can easily clear the protection.
(1) Multiple GX Developers give online module change Protecting the memory card
requests to one CPU module. (SRAM/Flash card only)
(2) Write parameters to the CPU module that is being Use the write protect switch of the memory card to protect
changed online. the memory card from writing of files, which also results as
a simple method of protection. However, a third party can
Self-diagnostics easily clear the protection.
However, a third party can also easily clear the protection.
The process CPU has a self-diagnostic function to Protection on a file basis
determine if a fault is present. Self-diagnostics are Register passwords for each file. You can restrict both
designed to prevent PLC malfunctions and to improve external read and write from/to the specified file.
preventive maintenance. On detection of a fault, an error is Correct password management achieves high protection
capability against a third party. Use this method when you
displayed and the PLC operation is stopped, for example.
want to protect the required files only. A password can be
The diagnostic items are listed below. set with four alphanumeric characters.
Files that can be password protected include program,
device comment and device initial value files.
3-57
3.4 Process QCPU:
QCPU Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
CPU modules
Protection of access from Ethernet or dialup line ROM operation

The remote password function of the process CPU
Debugged parameters and programs can be stored in
prevents illegal access from a remote user to the CPU
ROM. The processing of the parameters and programs
module with the Ethernet interface module or with the
stored in ROM is started after they have been transferred
serial communication module using the modem function.
to the program memory (drive 0) at power-on (or CPU
(The remote password function can restrict read/write and
reset). (Boot operation setting is necessary)
others of parameters, sequence programs, and device
The CPU's built-in standard ROM (drive 4) or memory card
data.)
(ROM) (drive 2) can be used. In the process CPU,
The preset remote password is written to the CPU module program and parameter files in the memory card can be
as a parameter. written to the standard ROM (drive 4) of the QCPU module
(1) Via dialup line by the standard ROM automatic write function, without
Remote password using GX Developer.
used to check
accessibility Device on other end Automatic write to standard ROM
Access source
Dialup line
Modem (1) Programs at remote worksite can be modified easily.
Modem
• Therefore, requirement of an extra personal computer
Access on-site to install programs, which were modified in a
(2) Via Ethernet design room to the QCPU is not required.
Remote password • If the QCPU is situated at a remote site, then just
used to check Device on other end sending the memory card is sufficient.
accessibility Access source
All that is required is for an on-site operator to insert a
memory card into the QCPU. (Changing of the DIP
(Host) switch positions is necessary.)
Ethernet
(2) ATA card is useful as memory card.
Access • Programs are not cleared if the battery is dead.
The remote password function was added to the QCPU • Data can be read from a personal computer easily.
as a means to prevent illegal access (program, data (Write of program and parameter files to the memory card
corruption, etc.) from external devices. However, this is performed by GX Developer.)
remote password function cannot prevent illegal access
completely. Clock function
When it is necessary to keep the PLC system safe from
The process CPU has an internal clock function. Although,
illegal access from any external devices, it is
recommended that further protection are implemented to the clock data can be read in a sequence program, it can
the system also be utilized for system time management, and failure
We have no liability for any problems in system faults that history. The Q series has intelligent function modules that
could occur due to illegal access. use the clock data of the CPU module. The clock function
Examples of preventives against illegal access is battery-backed during power-off of the PLC.
(When using the QJ71E71) Clock data
• Build a firewall.
Data Name Description
• Install a personal computer as a relay station, and Year 4 digits
control the relay of communication data with an Month 1 to 12
application program. Day 1 to 31 (automatic leap year judgment)
• As a relay station, install an external device that can Hour 0 to 23 (24 hour system)
control the access authorization. Minute 0 to 59
Second 0 to 59
For the external device that can control the access Day of week 0 Sunday
authorization, consult the network service provider or 1 Monday
device distributor. 2 Tuesday
(When using the QJ71C24) 3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
When the number of "Remote password mismatches" 5 Friday
detected by the remote password check function of the Q 6 Saturday
series C24 has reached or exceeded the user-set count,
disconnect the line from the PLC CPU situated on the
other end of the connection.
3-58
3.4 Process QCPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU QCPU
CPU modules
Accuracy Appearance
Refer to the CPU performance specifications for accuracy. Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU
Timing range Q25PHCPU
The clock can time between January 1, 1980 to December MODE

RUN
3
ERR.
31, 2079. USER

BAT.
BOOT
PULL
USB
RS-232
89.3 (3.52) 27.4 (1.08)
Unit: mm (inch)
Type
Item Remarks
Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU
Control method Sequence program control method
I/O control method Refresh mode Direct I/O possible using
device name
Programming Sequence control dedicated Relay symbol language (ladder), logic symbolic language (list),
language language MELSAP-3 (SFC), MELSAP-L
Process control language FBD for process control
Processing speed LD 34ns
(sequence instruction) MOV(MOV D0 102ns
D1)
Constant scan 0.5 to 2000ms (can be specified in 0.5ms increments) Parameter setting
Program Number of steps 124k steps 252k steps
capacity Number of files 124 252 Two SFC/MELSAP-L
(Note 5) files included (Note 4)
Number of I/O device points 8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF) (Note 2)
Number of I/O points 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF) (Note 3)
Internal relay [M] Default 8192 points (M0 to 8191) Can be changed within
Latch relay [L] Default 8192 points (L0 to 8191) 28.8k words by
Link relay [B] Default 8192 points (B0 to 1FFF) parameters.
Timer [T] Default 2048 points (T0 to 2047) (used as low-speed or high-speed timer)
Retentive timer [ST] Default 0 (ST0 to 2047) (used as low-speed or high-speed timer)
• Interrupt counters Max. 2128 points
(Default 0 points, parameter setting)
Link register [W] Default 8192 points (W0 to 1FFF)
File register [R] 131072 points (Note 1) Number of device points
Special link relay [SB] 2048 points (SB0 to 7FF) is fixed
Special link register [SW] 2048 points (SW0 to 7FF)
3-59
3.4 Process QCPU:
QCPU Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
CPU modules

Type
Item Remarks
Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU
Step relay [S] 8192 points (S0 to 8191) Number of device points
Index register [Z] 16 points (Z0 to 15) is fixed
Pointer [P] 4096 points (P0 to 4095), set in parameters the range in which the
pointers/common pointers are used.
In parameters, set the cyclic intervals of the system interrupt pointers I28 to I31
(0.5 to 1000ms, 0.5ms increments).
Function input [FX] 16 points (FX0 to F)
Function output [FY] 16 points (FY0 to F)
Function register [FD] 5 points (FD0 to 4)
Link direct device Device for direct access to link device.
Specified format: J \
Intelligent function module direct device Device for direct access to buffer memory of intelligent function module.
Remote RUN/PAUSE contact 1 point can be set for each RUN and PAUSE contacts from X0-1FFF.
Accuracy –14.69 to +3.53 (TYP –3.67) s/d @ 55 C
Permissible instantaneous power failure time Depends on power supply module. Refer to the power supply
module section.
5VDC internal current consumption 0.64A 0.64A
External dimensions 98 (3.86) (H) × 27.4 (1.08) (W) × 89.3 (3.52) (D) mm(inch)
Note 1: Indicates the number of points when the built-in memory (standard RAM) is used. It can be increased using an SRAM card or flash
card. (When a flash card is used, write from a program is disabled.)
When an SRAM card is used, up to 1041408 points are available. For details, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.4.4.
Note 2: Sum of the number of I/O points on the main/extension base directly controlled by the CPU module and the number of I/O points
Note 4: Although a total of two SFC files that can be executed, one is the program execution management SFC file.
Note 5: The process CPU can execute 124 files. It cannot execute 125 or more files.
Battery Life Accessories

The Q6BAT battery built in the CPU module is used to Product Type Quantity
back up the programs and various data stored in the RAM Battery Q6BAT 1
memory of the CPU module and to maintain timing by the
clock function during a power failure. Manuals
The Q6BAT is not used while 5VDC is supplied from the
The following table indicates the manuals related to the
power supply module. The battery life of the Q6BAT
process CPU.
depends on the total power failure time when 5VDC is not Name Remarks
supplied from the power supply module. Note that the QCPU (Q Mode) User's Manual Supplied with Q3 B main
SRAM card itself contains a battery (Q2MEM-BAT) and its (Hardware) base
current consumption is independent of the Q6BAT. Process CPU User's Manual Optional
(Hardware Design, Maintenance
and Inspection)
Battery life Process CPU User's Manual Optional
Total Power Failure Time Backup Time (Function Explanation, Program
(Hours) after Battery
CPU Type Fundamentals)
Guaranteed Error ON
Actual value QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Optional
value (Hours)
Q12PHCPU Programming Manual (Common
1260 4228 48 Instructions)
Q25PHCPU
QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Optional
Note 1: If the total power failure time is less than the above value, Programming Manual (SFC)
the battery must be changed in 10 years as a standard. QnPHCPU Programming Manual Optional
(Process Control Instructions)
3-60
3.4 Process QCPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU QCPU
Cards
Overview A program stored in the standard ROM, memory card

(RAM) or memory card (ROM) is transferred to the
This section describes the specification of CPU module program memory at power-on and executed in the
memory that will store program and other user-created program memory. Hence, if the program is stored in the
data and how to calculate the necessary memory space. standard ROM, memory card (RAM) or memory card 3
(ROM), the program memory needs sufficient free space
Memory Makeup
to accept that program.
The process CPU uses multiple memories according to For use of the debugging data for trace function, a failure
the purpose of use in the CPU module. These memories history or a general-purpose file, the memory card must
are identified by the access drive numbers. The memories be loaded.
Program
used in the Q mode are as follows. It should be noted that
Ladder, list or SFC sequence program file. When running
the process CPU is equipped with only one memory card
multiple programs, multiple program files are also stored
slot, which accepts only one card.
in memory.
CPU module
Parameter
File storing PLC parameters and network parameters set
Memory card (RAM) Program memory during programming.
(Drive number: 1) (Drive number: 0) Intelligent function module parameter
Intelligent function module parameter file set using GX
Configurator. This file does not exist if you do not use the
Memory card (ROM) Standard RAM
setting made with GX Configurator.
(Drive number: 2) (Drive number: 3)
Device comment
File of device comments annotated to each device of the
Standard ROM CPU. This file does not exist if device comments are not
(Drive number: 4) created.
Initial value file required when setting given initial values
List of data that can be stored into each memory to devices in the CPU module at power-on. This file does
CPU Built-In Memory Memory Card
not exist if device initial values are not used.
Memory card
Memory card
Memory card
File register
SRAM card
Flash card
ATA card
Standard
Standard
Program
memory
(ROM)
(ROM)
(RAM)
Memory Name
ROM
RAM
File register (R, ZR) file. Setting different file names allows
multiple file register files to be stored.
Note: that the file registers can be stored in the memory
Drive number 0 3 4 1 2
card (ROM) (drive number: 2), but not in the ATA card
File size increment 4kB 512B
(Q2MEM-8MBA/16MAB/32MBA).
Program
The file registers stored in the flash card allow read only in
Parameter
Intelligent function the program and do not allow data changes in the
module parameter program.
Device comment
Local device
Local devices are devices exclusively used with the
File register
Local device corresponding programs in the presence of multiple
Debugging data programs.
Failure history When processing any program, the corresponding local
General-purpose file device data is transferred from the local device area to the
executing device area and program processing is then
performed.
3-61
3.4 Process QCPU:
QCPU Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Cards
Debugging data Standard ROM (Drive number: 4)

Trace result storage file for the trace function used for Memory equipped as standard inside the CPU.
program debugging. Memory
Number of Files Number of
Type Capacity
General-purpose file (Bytes)
Stored Write Times
Data file written by the FWRITE instruction. Q12PHCPU 496k 124 100,000
Note that the general-purpose file can be stored in the Q25PHCPU 1008k 252 100,000
ATA card (Q2MEM-8MBA/16MBA/32MBA) only. The program stored in the standard ROM is transferred to the
program memory at power-on of the system and executed there.
Program memory (Drive number: 0) (When boot operation setting has been made)
Memory equipped as standard inside the CPU.
The memory capacity depends on the CPU type. Calculating Memory Capacity
Memory Capacity
Type
(Bytes)
Number of Files Stored Use the following table to calculate the capacity of the
Q12PHCPU 496k 124 files stored in each memory (drive). Note that the file size
Q25PHCPU 1008k 252 increment of drive 0 is 4096 bytes, and those of drives 1
Up to 124 program files can be executed. to 4 are all 512 bytes. If the file size is less, then it is
Memory card (RAM) (Drive number: 1) rounded up to that size.
Memory used in the memory card interface of the CPU, Choose the memory with enough allowance since the
where the SRAM card can be used. system can set several files (about 4k to 20k bytes) to
Memory Capacity each memory (drive) automatically.
Type Number of Files Stored
(Bytes)
File Function File Capacity (Bytes)
Q2MEM-1MBS 1011.5k 256
Parameter 1k + network parameter capacity (Note 1)
Q2MEM-2MBS 2034k 288
Intelligent parameter (Note 1)
The above capacity is achieved after formatting. Program 136 + (Number of steps 4)
The program stored in the RAM memory card is transferred to the Device comment 74 + (sum of comment data sizes of devices)
• Comment data size of one device
program memory at power-on of the system and executed there.
= 10 + 10250 a + 40 b
(When boot operation setting has been made) • a: Quotient of ((Number of device points)/256)
• b: Remainder of ((Number of device points)
Memory card (ROM) (Drive number: 2) /256)
Memory used in the memory card interface of the CPU, Device initial value Assuming that n = setting number, 44 n +
(number of device points of setting 1 + ..... +
where the flash card or ATA card can be used.
number of device points of setting n) 2 + 66
Memory Capacity
Type Number of Files Stored File register Number of file register points 2 (Note 1)
(Bytes)
Local device 72 + (set device type 6) + ((total number of
Q2MEM-2MBF 2035k 288 set M and V points / 16) + (total number of set
Q2MEM-4MBF 4079k 288 T, ST and C points / 16 18) + (number of set
Q2MEM-8MBA 7940k 512 D points)) 2 number of program files
Q2MEM-16MBA 15932k 512 Failure history data (Number of failures stored 54) + 72
Q2MEM-32MBA 31854k 512 Debugging data Specified devices traced:
The above capacity is achieved after formatting. (20 + (number of word device points 2) +
(number of bit device points / 16) 2) trace
The program stored in the ROM memory card is transferred to
count + (device range 12) + 362
the program memory at power-on of the system and executed
General-purpose file Number of write points set by FWRITE
there. (When boot operation setting has been made) instruction
Standard RAM (Drive number: 3)
Memory equipped as standard inside the CPU.
Memory Capacity
Type Number of Files Stored
(Bytes)
Q12PHCPU 256k 2 (Note 1)
Q25PHCPU 256k 2 (Note 1)
Note 1: One file register file and one local device file can be
stored.
3-62
3.4 Process QCPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU QCPU
Cards
Note 1: The network parameter and intelligent parameter sizes Battery Life of Q2MEM-1MBS/2MBS
are shown below. The following table indicates the
maximum capacity per corresponding module and the The Q2MEM-1MBS/2MBS built in battery has the
capacity may be less than the given size according to the following battery life. Note that the Q2MEM-1MBS/2MBS
setting.
is loaded into the PLC CPU and consumes battery current 3
Corresponding if power is ON.
Capacity
Module
Ethernet With e-mail setting: 12488 (bytes/module) Battery life
Without e-mail setting: 2060 (bytes/module) After SM51 is
MELSECNET/H 11466 (bytes/module) + 1548 bytes Energized energized
Time Ratio Guaranteed Value in
CC-Link 1423 (bytes/module) + 6 bytes SRAM card (Guaranteed
(Note 4) value actual use
Analog to digital 508 (bytes/module) (Q68ADV) time after
(MIN) (TYP)
conversion module alarm
Digital to analog 378(bytes/module) (Q68DAV) occurrence)
conversion module 0% 2400hr 2.7years 20hr
Serial communication 774bytes/module) (QJ71C24-R2) 30% 2880hr 3.6years 20hr
module Q2MEM-2MBS 50% 4320hr 4.5years 20hr
Note 2: The maximum number of file register points that can be 70% 6480hr 5.0years 20hr
stored in each memory is as shown below. However, if 100% 5.0years 5.0years 50hr
other files exist in the same memory, the capacity usable Q2MEM-1MBS 0% 2400hr 2.7years 20hr
by file registers reduces. Note that if the file registers are Manufacturing 30% 2880hr 3.6years 20hr
stored separately in different memories (drives), the file control number 50% 4320hr 4.5years 20hr
" B" 70% 6480hr 5.0years 20hr
register used must be selected by the QDRSET
(Note 5) 100% 5.0years 5.0years 50hr
instruction. In addition, the file registers stored in the
Q2MEM-1MBS 0% 690hr 6336hr 8hr
ROM memory card are read-only and cannot be rewritten
Manufacturing
by a program. control number
100% 11784hr 13872hr 8hr
Memory Type Max. Number of File Register " A"

Points (Note 5)
RAM memory Q2MEM-1MBS 517,120 points Note 4: The energized time ratio denotes the ratio of power-on
card time in a day (24 hours).
Q2MEM-2MBS 1,041,408 points
(Drive: 1)
(When power is on for 12 hours and off for 12 hours, the
ROM memory Q2MEM-2MBF 1,041,408 points
energized time ratio is 50%.)
card Q2MEM-4MBF 1,042,432 points
(Drive: 2) Note 5: The manufacturing control number is given on the SRAM
Standard RAM (Drive: 3) 131,072 points (Q12PH, Q25PH) card rear label.
Performance Specifications Number of Parameters That Can Be Set

Using GX Configurator
Memory cards are available in SRAM type, linear flash
ROM type and ATA flash ROM type. They are classified Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.2.4 for restrictions on the
as follows according to their applications and capacities. number of parameters that can be set using GX
Memory
Configurator for the loaded intelligent function modules.
Write Count
Type Memory Type Capacity
(times)
(bytes)
Q2MEM-1MBS SRAM 1,011.5k No restriction
Q2MEM-2MBS 2,034k No restriction
Q2MEM-2MBF Linear flash 2,035k 100,000
Q2MEM-4MBF ROM (Note 3) 4,079k 100,000
Q2MEM-8MBA ATA flash 7,940k 1,000,000
Q2MEM-16MBA ROM (Note 3) 15,932k 1,000,000
Q2MEM-32MBA 31,854k 1,000,000
Note 3: Both the linear flash ROM and ATA flash ROM are
re-write enabled non-volatile memories.
3-63
QCPU 3.5 Overview of Multiple CPU
System
(Other than Basic Model QCPU)
What is Multiple CPU System? Data processing (slow)

Machine control (fast)
A multiple CPU system has multiple (up to four) CPU
modules on a main base unit to control the corresponding
I/O and intelligent function modules.
Process CPU
Motion CPU
PLC CPU
PLC CPU PC CPU
All controls executed by a single CPU
Process CPU
Motion CPU
(1ms or less control) (Several to several 10ms control)

PC CPU module Data processing CPU
Machine controlling CPU
The following table indicates usable CPU modules.
PLC CPU • Q02CPU
• Q02HCPU
• Q06HCPU
• Q12HCPU
• Q25HCPU
Process CPU • Q12PHCPU Machine control is made further faster by
• Q25PHCPU load distribution according to control tact
Motion CPU • Q172CPU
• Q173CPU Each CPU in the multiple CPU system controls the I/O and
• Q172CPUN
• Q173CPUN intelligent function modules preset by grouping (control
PC CPU module • PPC-CPU686(MS)-64 CPU setting).
• PPC-CPU686(MS)-128
(Refer to the Motion CPU User's Manual for modules
Configure a system by choosing the optimal CPU modules
controllable by motion CPUs.)
that meet your system scale and application. QCPU1 QCPU2
Configuration of a multi CPU system by the PLC CPU,
process CPU, motion CPU and PC CPU achieves the
seamless integration of sequence control, process control,
motion control and information processing.
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 Setting of
controlling QCPU
Direct
communication!! Controlled by QCPU1
sequence program
Host computer Controlled by QCPU2 sequence program
Definition of terms
PLC CPU PC CPU module
In the multiple CPU system, the mounted QCPUs, motion
CPUs, PC CPU module, I/O and intelligent function
modules are defined as described overleaf.
PLC number
Fast machine control insensitive to data processing, etc. In the multiple CPU system, the CPU slots are assigned to
can be achieved by separate/independent use of CPU PLC No. 1, No. 2, No. 3 and No. 4 in order from left to right
modules for different controls, e.g. machine control and to differentiate between the mounted QCPUs, PC CPUs
data processing. and motion CPUs.

These PLC numbers are used when making access from
GX Developer to the QCPUs.
3-64
3.5 Overview of Multiple CPU QCPU
System
CPU slot: PLC No. 1 The motion dedicated instructions allow control commands
Slot 0: PLC No. 2 to be given from the PLC CPU and process CPU to the
Slot 1: PLC No. 3 motion CPU.
Slot 3: PLC No. 4 Also the PLC-to-PLC communication dedicated
instructions can be used to read/write device data in the
motion CPU and notify the motion CPU/PC CPU module
3
of events.
Automatic refresh of CPU shared memories

Automatic refresh is automatically performed at END
Control CPU processing by the OSs of the CPU modules, as set in the
Indicates the QCPU, motion CPU, PC CPU module that parameters, to transfer data between the CPU shared
control the I/O and intelligent function modules mounted memories and device memories in the CPU modules.
on the main or extension base unit. For example, when Using automatic refresh, the device data used by another
PLC No. 2 controls the module mounted on slot 3, PLC No. CPU can be used as the data of the host CPU.
2 is the control CPU of the module on slot 3. Automatic refresh of the CPU shared memories allows
data to be transferred between:
Controlled module
(1) PLC CPU and PLC CPU
Indicates the I/O or intelligent function module controlled
(2) PLC CPU and process CPU
by the control CPU.
(3) PLC CPU and motion CPU
For example, when PLC No. 2 controls the module loaded
(4) Process CPU and motion CPU
on slot 3, the module on slot 3 is the controlled module of
(5) Motion CPU and motion CPU
PLC No. 2. Specify the control CPU in the parameter
(6) PLC CPU and PC CPU module
setting of GX Developer.
(7) Process CPU and PC CPU module
Non-control CPU (8) Motion CPU and PC CPU module
Indicates the QCPU, motion CPU or PC CPU module
PLC No.1 PLC No.2
other than the control CPU. CPU shared memory CPU shared memory
For example, when PLC No. 2 controls the module loaded Host PLC operation Host PLC operation
on slot 3, PLC No. 1, PLC No. 3 and PLC No. 4 are the information area Read performed information area
System area at END processing System area
non-control CPUs of the module on slot 3. of PLC No. 2
PLC No. 1 writing PLC No. 2 writing
Non-controlled module (Non-grouped module) automatic refresh area automatic refresh area
Indicates the I/O or intelligent function module other than User's free area User's free area
the controlled module. For example, when PLC No. 2 Write performed at END Write performed at END
processing of PLC No. 1 processing of PLC No. 2
controls the module loaded on slot 3, the module on slot 3
is the non-controlled module of PLC No. 1, No. 3 and No. 4. Device memory Device memory
For PLC No.1 For PLC No.1
For the QCPU No. 2, the input module For PLC No.2 Read performed For PLC No.2
on slot 3 is controlled module. at END processing
(When QCPU of PLC No. 2 controls of PLC No. 1
0 1 2 3 4
input module on slot 3)
Output module
(1) One CPU can send data of max. 2k words and the
Power supply
Input module
QCPU
QCPU
QCPU
QCPU
whole multiple CPU system can communicate data of

module
8k words. Since four refresh settings can be made for

PLC PLC PLC PLC
For PLC No. 1, No. 3 and No. 4, No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 one CPU, bit device and word device data can be
input module on slot 3 is refreshed separately.
non-controlled module. For example, bit data can be refreshed by link relays
For input module on slot 3, QCPU of PLC No. 2 and word data by link registers.
is control CPU and QCPUs of PLC No. 1, No. 3 Note that the specified devices are occupied
and No. 4 are non-control CPUs. consecutively for PLC No. 1 to PLC No. 4 by the
number of automatic refresh points.
Communication between PLC CPU, Process When designing the system, assign the devices in
CPU, Motion CPU and PC CPU consideration of the number of automatic refresh
points.
In a multiple CPU system, the automatic refresh of the (2) Set send data in 2 word increments.
CPU shared memories and the multiple CPU dedicated (3) The automatic refresh devices usable on the CPU
instructions can be used to transfer data between CPU module side are indicated on the next page.
modules.
3-65
System
Using the S(P).SFCS instruction, the motion SFC of the

Setting Allowed-Devices Instructions
motion CPU can be started from the PLC CPU/process
Data register (D) • 1 word is occupied per CPU.
Link register (W) transmission point. PLC CPU Motion CPU
File register (R, ZR) Start request
• Specify the first number as 0 Motion SFC
Link relay (B) S.SFC
Internal relay (M) or multiple of 16. instruction
Output (Y) • 1 word is occupied per 16
transmission points. (Fraction
is rounded up.)
Data transfer using multiple CPU-dedicated

instructions Note: Refer to the Motion CPU Programming Manual for details
The PLC CPU/process CPU of a multi CPU system allows
and usability of the motion-dedicated instructions.
access to the CPU shared memory to be made using the
S.TO instruction/FROM instruction. Read/write of device data
The S.TO instruction is used to write the data to the CPU The PLC-to-PLC communication dedicated instructions in
shared memory of the host PLC, and the FROM the following table allow device data to be written/read
instruction to read data from another PLC. from the PLC CPU/process CPU to the motion CPU, and
Unlike the automatic refresh of the CPU shared memories, the motion CPU/PC CPU module to be notified of events.
the instructions allow you to specify the transfer area and (Device data cannot be written/read from the PLC
number of data to be transferred freely. CPU/process CPU to the PLC CPU/process CPU or from
Note 1: The S.TO instruction is designed to write data to the CPU the motion CPU.)
shared memory of the host PLC. It cannot be used to
In addition, they cannot be used to cause the motion
write data to the CPU shared memory of another PLC.
Note 2: The FROM instruction is designed to read data from the CPU/PC CPU module to notify events.)
buffer memory of an intelligent function module. In the Instruction Description
Target CPU Modules
multiple CPU system, however, it can read the CPU motion CPU motion CPU
shared memory data of another PLC. It cannot be used to S(P).DDWR Write of host PLC CPU
read the CPU shared memory data of the host PLC. The device data to another PLC
intelligent function module device (U \G ) may also
CPU.
be used to read the CPU shard memory data of another
S(P).DDRD Read of another PLC CPU
PLC.
PLC No.1 PLC No.2 device data to host PLC
CPU shared memory CPU shared memory CPU.
Host PLC operation Host PLC operation S(P).GINT Request to start interrupt
information area information area program of another PLC
System area System area CPU.
PLC No. 1 writing Read performed by PLC CPU Motion CPU
automatic refresh area FROM instruction
Data written by S.TO Write of
instruction (Note) S.DDWR device data
instruction Device memory
Write performed by
S.TO instruction
Device memory
Sequence program Sequence program
S.TO instruction FROM instruction
execution execution
Note: User's free area is used.

Note: Refer to the Motion CPU Programming Manual for details
Control commands given by PLC CPU to and usability of the PLC-to-PLC communication-dedicated
motion CPU instructions.
In a multi CPU system, the motion dedicated instructions
in the following table allow control commands to be given CPU shared memory
from the PLC CPU/process CPU to the motion CPU. (1) The CPU shared memory is designed to transfer data
(Control commands cannot be given from the motion CPU between the CPU modules and has 4k words (4096
to the motion CPU.) words).
2048 words of 800H to FFFH can be used for the
Instruction Description
automatic refresh of device data and the multiple
S(P).SFCS Request to start a motion SFC program.
S(P).SVST Request to start a servo program.
CPU-dedicated instructions.
S(P).CHGV Axis speed change during positioning or JOG
operation.
S(P).CHGT Torque limit value change during operation/stop in
real mode.
S(P).CHGA Change of present value of axis/synchronous
encoder/cam shaft at stop.
3-66
System
GX
(2) The CPU shared memory has the "host PLC operation Developer
information area", "system area", "automatic refresh PLC No. 1 is
control CPU
area" and "user's free area".
CPU CPU QJ71
The size of the automatic refresh area is determined by PLC PLC BR11
No.1 No.2 3
the number of host PLC send points in the automatic
refresh setting.
The area after the automatic refresh area is the user's
free area.
CPU CPU QJ71 QJ71
The CPU shared memory configuration and sequence PLC PLC BR11 BR11
No.1 No.2
program accessibility are shown below.
Host PLC Another PLC
Memory Write Read Write Read
PLC No. 1 is
OH Host PLC control CPU
~ operation Disabled Disabled Disabled Enable CPU CPU QJ71
1FFH information area PLC PLC BR11
200H No.1 No.2 PLC No. 1 is
control CPU
~ System area Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
7FFH
800H Automatic
~ refresh area
Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Inter-data link transfer
FFFH
Inter-data link transfer can be performed between network
User's free area Enable Disabled Disabled Enable
modules whose controlling CPU is the same.
Host PLC operation information area Inter-data link transfer cannot be performed if the control
Stores the error contents, operation status etc. of the host CPUs differs.
PLC. (1) Inter-data link transfer can be performed
I.e. Used by another PLC to check for errors.
PLC No. 1 is
System area control CPU
Used by the OS.
Used by the OS to execute the PLC-to-PLC CPU CPU QJ71 QJ71
communication-dedicated instructions. PLC PLC BR11 BR11
No.1 No.2
Automatic refresh area
Used by the OS to perform automatic refresh of the
multiple CPU system.
Even though the S.T.D/FROM instruction cannot access
this area.
User's free area CPU CPU QJ71 CPU CPU QJ71
Provided to make communications between the CPU PLC PLC BR11 PLC PLC BR11
No.1 No.2 No.1 No.2
modules by using the S.TO and FROM instructions (U
\G ) of the multiple CPU system.
The points after those set for the automatic refresh area
are used. (2) Inter-data link transfer cannot be performed
(When automatic refresh is not performed, CPU shared PLC No. 1 is PLC No. 2 is
memory at 800H to FFFH can be used in User’s free area.) control CPU control CPU
Access to Other Stations and Access Range CPU CPU QJ71 QJ71
PLC PLC BR11 BR11
No.1 No.2
Access to other stations via MELSECNET/H
Whether control or non-control, the CPU can access other
stations up to eight network systems beyond.
CPU CPU QJ71 CPU CPU QJ71

PLC PLC BR11 PLC PLC BR11
No.1 No.2 No.1 No.2
3-67
System
GX Developer's access range Access CPU from Device via Intelligent

Function Module
(1) You can perform read/write, monitor and test
parameters/programs for the QCPU to which a Using the MELSEC communication protocol (hereafter
personal computer is connected. To make access to abbreviated to the MC protocol), the external device can
the QCPU to which a personal computer is not access Local station via Ethernet interface module
connected, specify the access destination QCPU (hereafter abbreviated to QJ71E71) or Serial
(target setup) on GX Developer. communications (hereafter abbreviated to QJ71C24). In
(2) GX Developer can access modules to which a personal addition, other network station can be accessed through
computer is connected, whether they are controlled by i.e. MELSECNET/H.
the QCPU or not. Connection of a personal computer Access to multiple CPU system
to one QCPU allows monitor, test and other operations In access from the device on the other end to the multi
to be performed for all modules controlled by the CPU system of the host station or another station, the
QCPUs in the multiple CPU system, as in a single PLC following access can be made to the control CPU (set on
system. GX Developer Version 6) or non-control CPU of the
GX Developer can also access other station QCPUs on QJ71E71/QJ71C24 or network module mounted on the
the same network such as MELSECNET/H or Ethernet. station to be accessed.
(3) GX Developer connected to another station on the Access to control CPU
same network can access all QCPUs in the multi CPU There are no restrictions on communications using the MC
system. protocol. All communication functions of the MC protocol
(4) GX Developer connected to the QCPU cannot access are available.
the motion CPUs. You can connect GX Developer Access to non-control CPU
Version 7 or later to the motion CPU to access the Among the communication functions of the MC protocol,
QCPUs of the multiple CPU system. the device memory and file read/write, remote run/stop,
intelligent function module buffer memory read/write and
other functions are available. Some functions such as the
device memory monitoring, on-demand and PLC CPU
monitoring functions are unavailable.
(Example)
Communication through GX Developer External device
Communication using the MC protocol (Communication
Local station request source)
1 2 1
: QCPU No. 1
MELSECNET/H
: QCPU No. 2
Relay station : QCPU No. 3
: QCPU No. 4
2 2 1 : QJ71C24 or network module
under control of QCPU No. 1
2 : Network module under control
of QCPU No. 2
Station to be MELSECNET/H
accessed
(Communication * Access to another station can be made regardless
2 of which CPU controls the relayed module.
request destination)
3-68
System
Processing time of QCPU for access to multiple CPU system

The processing time (response time) of the QCPU for access to the control CPU is equal to the processing time for access
to a single CPU system.
The processing time (response time) of the QCPU for access to the non-control CPU is as same as that for access to a
single CPU plus about 9ms per command. 3
However, the processing time per command for access to the multiple CPU system is longer than the above due to such
factors as the QCPU's RUN/STOP status, whether the inter-QCPU automatic refresh function is used or not, and how it is
executed.
MC protocol communication frames and accessible stations

For access to the non-control CPUs in the multiple CPU system, use the "QnA compatible 4C frame" with the QJ71C24 and
the "QnA compatible 3E frame" with the QJ71E71. The following table indicates the MC protocol communication frames and
accessible stations.
Ranges 1 to 4 in the table correspond to ranges 1 to 4 shown in the figures below.
The following table shows the definitions of control and non-control.
• Control : Indicates the High Performance QCPU/process CPU that controls the QJ71E71/QJ71C24, which connects
with the device on the other end, or the relayed network module.
• Non-control : Indicates the High Performance QCPU/process CPU that dose not control the QJ71E71/QJ71C24, which
connects with the device on the other end, or the relayed network module.
Accessible Stations
Target Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4
Used Frame
Module Non-co Non-co Non-co Non-co
Control Control Control Control
ntrol ntrol ntrol ntrol
QnA compatible Format 1 to
4C frame 4
Format 5
QnA compatible
QJ71C24 3C frame
QnA compatible Format 1 to
2C frame 4
A compatible 1C
frame
QnA compatible 3E frame
QJ71E71
A compatible 1E frame
: Accessible : Inaccessible
Note 1: The QnA compatible 4C frame and QnA compatible 3E frame are designed to access all devices and all files of the
QCPU/QnACPU.
For details of the MC protocol, refer to the Q-Compatible MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual.
When QJ71C24 is used
For access to station in
range 4, set each
multidrop- connected
station to format 5.
Multidrop connection Multidrop connection
MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/H
Device on MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/10
other end Ethernet Ethernet
(Network No.1) (Network No.n)
(Relay station)
(QJ71C24 loaded station) (QJ71C24 loaded station)
Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4
3-69
System
When QJ71E71 is used

For access to station in
range 4, set each
multidrop- connected
station to format 5.
Device on MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/H Multidrop connection

other end MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/10
Ethernet Ethernet
(Network No.1) (Relay station) (Network No.n)
Ethernet (QJ71E71 loaded station) (QJ71C24 loaded station)
Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4
In any of the above figures, when the station in range 4 is in a multiple CPU system, access can be performed to only the
control CPU of the QJ71C24 on the corresponding station.
Precautions for Multiple CPU System Product Type Function Version/Serial No.
Process CPU Q12PHCPU Function version "C" or later
Configuration
Q25PHCPU
CPU module High Performance Q02(H)CPU First five digits of serial No.
model CPU Q06HCPU "04012" or later
High Performance model QCPU function version Q12HCPU
Q25HCPU
(1) When configuring a multiple CPU system, use the High
Motion Q172CPU Version "P" or later
Performance model QCPU of function version "B". The CPU Q173CPU Version "N" or later
High Performance model QCPU of function version A Q172CPUN Version "A" or later
Q173CPUN
cannot be used in a multiple CPU system.
PC CPU PPC-CPU686 Bus interface driver
(2) When using the PC CPU module and PLC CPU module (MS)-64 (PPC-DRV-01) version "1.05" or
together, use the High Performance model QCPU PPC-CPU686 later
(MS)-128
whose function version is "B" and whose upper five
digits of the serial No. is "03051" or later as the PLC CPU module mounting position
CPU. (1) Up to four PLC CPU/process CPU modules can be
Serial No. of motion CPU mounted on the slots of the main base unit in due order,
When using the PC CPU module and motion CPU starting from the CPU slot up to slot 2. No empty slot is
together, use the product whose first digit of the serial No. allowed in between.
is as follows. (2) Mount the motion CPUs together on the slots to the
Q172CPU................................"H" or later right of the PLC CPU/process CPU. The motion CPU
Q173CPU................................"G" or later cannot be mounted on the slot to the left of the PLC
Q172CPUN, Q173CPUN ........"A" or later CPU/process CPU. For example, when mounting two
About online module change PLC CPUs and two motion CPUs, mount the PLC
In a multi CPU system, online module change can be CPUs on the CPU slot and slot 0, and the motion
made for the I/O modules, analog modules, thermocouple CPUs on slots 1 and 2.
input modules, temperature control modules and pulse CPU 0 1 2
input modules controlled by the process CPU. Online

Motion
Motion
QCPU
QCPU
supply
Power
CPU
CPU
module change cannot be performed for the modules

controlled by the High Performance CPU, motion CPU and
PC CPU modules.
When performing online module change, use the CPU
modules of the versions given in the table or later.
3-70
System
(3) Mount the PC CPU module on the right of the multiple Access ranges of control and non-control
CPU system.
The PC CPU module occupies two slots, therefore the CPUs
right-hand side slot is vacant. Control
Non-control CPU
1 Input 2 Output
CPU
GX Developer ON OFF ON OFF 3
In the multiple CPU system, GX Developer version 6 or Q Input (X) — —
later can be used. When the process CPU is used, series-compa Output (Y) — —
Version 7.12L or later is required. tible module Buffer Read — —
memory Write
Q series-compatible I/O modules AnS Input (X)

series-compa Output (Y)
The I/O modules (QX , QY ) are all compatible with the
tible module Buffer
multiple CPU system. Read
memory
They can be used by setting any of PLC No. 1 to No. 4 as Write
a control CPU. : Importable, : Read only :Not importable, —: Irrelevant

1 Even if the check box "Input condition of group outside is taken" in "Multi
CPU settings" within GX Developer is checked.
Q series-compatible intelligent function 2 Even if the check box "Output condition of group outside is taken" in
modules "Multi CPU settings" within GX Developer is checked.
(1) The intelligent function modules compatible with the
multiple CPU system are those of function versions "B"
or later. Confirmation of function version and serial
For the intelligent function modules of function versions number
"B" or later, the control CPU can be set to any of PLC The function version and serial number can be confirmed
No. 1 to No. 4. on the rating plate and in system monitoring of GX
(2) The Q series high-speed counter modules (QD62, Developer.
QD62D, QD62E) of function versions "A" or later are
Confirmation on rating plate
compatible with the multi CPU system. They can be
used by setting any of PLC No. 1 to No. 4 as a control
CPU.
(3) The Q series interrupt module (QI60) is compatible with Serial number
the multiple CPU system. It can be used by setting any (upper 5 digits)
of PLC No. 1 to No. 4 as a control CPU. Function version
(4) The other intelligent function modules of function
version "A" can be used in the multiple CPU system if
PLC No. 1 is set as a control CPU. An error will occur if
any of PLC No. 2 to No. 4 is set as a control CPU.
AnS series-compatible I/O and special Confirmation in system monitoring (product

function modules information list)
The multiple CPU system accepts the AnS
series-compatible I/O and special function modules.
(Note 1) When configuring a multi CPU system, the control
CPU of the AnS series-compatible I/O and special function
modules is only one of PLC No. 1 to No. 4. For example,
when PLC No. 2 is set as a control CPU, set the control
CPU of all slots mounted with the AnS series-compatible
Serial number Function version
I/O and special function modules to PLC No. 2. An error
will occur if another PLC No. is set for any of the AnS
series-compatible I/O and special function modules.
Note 1: Only the High Performance model CPU can be set as the
control CPU.
Clock data
The Q series has intelligent function modules that use the
clock data of the CPU module.
In the multiple CPU system, the clock data used by the
intelligent function modules are all the data of CPU No. 1.
3-71
System
Max. number of mountable modules per system

The following table lists the maximum number of mountable modules in the multiple CPU system.
Use these modules within the numbers given below.
Max, Number of Modules Mountable Max. Number of Modules Mountable
Product Type
per System per CPU
• QJ71LP21
• QJ71BR11 Up to four modules with PLC-to-PLC Up to four modules with PLC-to-PLC
Q series MELSECNET/H
• QJ71LP21-25 network and remote I/O network network and remote I/O network
network module
• QJ71LP21G modules combined modules combined
• QJ71LP21GE
• QJ71E71
Q series Ethernet interface
• QJ71E71-B2 Up to four modules Up to four modules
module
• QJ71E71-100
Q series CC-Link system
• QJ61BT11 (Note) Up to 16 modules Up to four modules
master·local module
MELSECNET/MINI-S3 data • A1SJ71PT32-S3 No restriction (However, automatic No restriction (However, automatic
link module • A1SJ71T32-S3 refresh function cannot be set) refresh function cannot be set)
• A1SD51S
AnS series special function • A1SJ71J92-S3 Up to six modules Up to six modules
module (When GET/PUT service is
used)
• A1S161 Only one module
Interrupt module • Q160 Up to four modules (up to three Only one module
modules when A1SI61 is used)
Note: Using GX Developer, the CC-Link network parameters can be set to control up to four modules. When the CC-Link dedicated
instructions are used to set parameters, there are no restriction on the number of mountable modules.
Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.9 for the CC-Link system master/local modules for which parameters can be set using dedicated
instructions.
Parameters for use of multiple CPU system To restore any PLC No. in a stop error in the multi CPU
system, reset the QCPU of PLC No. 1 or switch power off,
Unlike a single PLC system, the multiple CPU system then on again. (Resetting the QCPU in a stop error cannot
needs the setting of "No of CPUs", "control CPU" and restore it.)
"automatic refresh". 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Power supply
No of CPU setting
QCPU
QCPU
QCPU
QCPU
Set the total number of QCPUs and motion CPUs used in

the multiple CPU system.
If you need to add QCPUs or motion CPUs in the future,
No.1 CPU
No.2 CPU
No.3 CPU
No.4 CPU
set the number of CPUs including those to be added.

Control CPU setting
Set the control CPUs of the I/O and intelligent function Cannot be reset in multiple PLC system.
modules mounted on the main and extension base units in If any of these CPUs is reset, all CPUs in
the multiple CPU system. multiple PLC system will result in
Automatic refresh setting MULTI CPU DOWN.
Make setting when performing automatic refresh of the Can reset the whole multiple PLC system.
CPU shared memories in the multiple CPU system.
Processing at QCPU Stop Error Occurrence
How to Reset Multiple CPU System In the multi CPU system, the operation of the whole
In the multiple CPU system, the whole system can be reset system differs between when PLC No. 1 results in a stop
by resetting the QCPU of PLC No. 1. error and when any of PLC No. 2 to No. 4 results in a stop
The QCPUs of PLC No. 2 to No. 4 cannot be reset error.
individually.
Resetting the QCPU of PLC No. 1 resets all the QCPUs, When PLC No. 1 results in stop error
motion CPUs ,PC CPU, I/O and intelligent function If the QCPU No. 1 results in a stop error, the QCPU/motion
modules. CPU/PC CPU module No. 2 to No. 4 will all result in a stop
error, stopping the multiple CPU system.
3-72
System
When any of PLC No. 2 to No. 4 results in (2) If I/O refresh overlaps the bus access of another PLC
stop error No., the I/O refresh time increases by the value of the
following expression.
(1) When any of the QCPUs of PLC No. 2 to No. 4 results (Increased time) = (input point count + output point count)/16 N3
in a stop error, whether the whole system will stop or (number of other PLC Nos.) ( s) 3
Use the value in the following table as N3.
not depends on the "operation mode" setting in the N3
CPU Type System of main base System including
multiple CPU settings.
unit only extension base unit(s)
(2) By default, all PLC Nos. are brought to a stop if any of Q02CPU
Q02HCPU,
PLC Nos. results in a stop error. Q06HCPU,
Q12HCPU, 8.7 21
(3) When you do not want to stop all PLC Nos. at
Q25HCPU,
occurrence of a stop error in any QCPU/motion CPU, Q12PHCPU,
Q25PHCPU
/PC CPU module set parameter so that all PLC Nos.
are not brought to a stop. Total value of instruction execution time
QCPU Processing Time (1) Total value of processing times of the instructions
used in the program executed by the QCPU.
Concept of QCPU scan time Refer to the following manual for the processing time
The scan time of the QCPU is the sum of the following of the instructions.
values. QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual
(1) I/O refresh processing (Common Instructions)
(2) Total value of instruction execution times Factors which increase scan time
(3) END processing In the multi CPU system, some functions will increase the
I/O refresh time scan time. When using the following functions, add the
I/O data refresh time between the QCPU, I/O, and following values to the scan time calculation value.
intelligent function (special function) modules mounted on MELSECNET/H refresh
the main or extension base unit. Refresh time between the QCPU and MELSECNET/H
(1) I/O refresh time network module.
Use the following expression to calculate the I/O Refer to the Q-Compatible MELSECNET/H Network
refresh time, if I/O refresh does not overlap the bus System Reference Manual for the MELSECNET/H refresh
access of another PLC No. in the multi CPU system. time.
(I/O refresh time) = (input point count/16) N1 + (output point
count/16) N2 ( s) (1) The refresh time increases, if a refresh request is
Use the values in the following table as N1 and N2. given at the same time as the MELSECNET/H module
N1 N2 from another PLC on multi CPU system.
CPU Type Q6 B Q6 B (Increased time) = (send/receive word point count) N3 (number
Q3 B QA1S B Q3 B QA1S B
Q5 B Q5 B of other PLC Nos.) ( s)
Q02CPU 2.2 2.9 4.3 1.3 2.1 3.5 The number of send/receive word points is the total value of the
following transferred data.
Q02HCPU, • Link refresh data: (LB+LX+LY+SB)/16+LW
Q06HCPU, • Data of memory card transferred to file registers:
3.7 3.5
Q12HCPU, (LB+LX+LY+SB)/16+LW
1.7 2.4 1.3 2.1 • Inter-data link transfer: (LB/16+LW) 2
Q25HCPU
Refer to the following table for N4.
Q12PHCPU,
— — N3
Q25PHCPU CPU Type System of main base unit System including
Q3 B: Main base unit, Q6 B, Q5 B, QA1S B: Extension only extension base unit(s)
base unit Q02CPU
Q02HCPU,
Q06HCPU,
Q12HCPU, 0.54 1.30
Q25HCPU,
Q12PHCPU,
Q25PHCPU
3-73
System
CC-Link automatic refresh (3) The automatic refresh time increases the automatic
(1) Refresh time between the QCPU and CC-Link refresh processing of the other PLCs overlaps.
master/local module. (Use following expression)
Refer to the QJ61BT11 CC-Link System Master/Local (Increased time) = (send/receive word point count) N5 (number
Module User's Manual for the CC-Link automatic of other PLC Nos.) ( s)
Refer to the following table for N5.
refresh time.
(2) The refresh time increases by the value of the N5
following expression if an automatic refresh request is CPU Type System of main base System including
given at the same time as the CC-Link module from unit only extension base unit(s)
another PLC in multiple CPU system. Q02CPU
(Increased time) = (send/receive word point count) N4 (number Q02HCPU,
of other PLC Nos.) ( s) Q06HCPU,
The number of send/receive word points is the following transferred Q12HCPU, 0.54 1.30
data.
Q25HCPU,
• Link refresh data: (RX+RY+SB)/16+SW
Refer to the following table for N4. Q12PHCPU,
N4 Q25PHCPU
CPU Type System of main base System including
unit only extension base unit(s)
(4) Note that if large amounts of shared memory are
Q02CPU
Q02HCPU,
refreshed in the multiple CPU system, the time to
Q06HCPU, respond to GX Developer or GOT will increase
Q12HCPU, 0.54 1.30 accordingly.
Q25HCPU,
Q12PHCPU,
Q25PHCPU How to Reduce Scan Time of Multi CPU
System
Multiple CPU system automatic refresh
(1) Refresh time set for refresh setting in the multi CPU
Multi CPU system processing
If data access is made simultaneously from multiple CPUs
settings.
(QCPUs/motion CPUs/PC CPU modules) to I/O,
This is the total write time of the host CPU shared
intelligent function/network modules, and CPUs in the
memory, together with the read time of the other PLC
multiple CPU system, these processes will be performed
shared memory.
in due order, generating waiting time for other CPU
Add this value when setting the automatic refresh of
processes.
device data, and when the COM instruction is
executed.
(2) Use the following expression to calculate the
When waiting status time reaches maximum
automatic refresh time of the multiple CPU system. In the multiple CPU system, the waiting time of the host
(Automatic refresh time) = (N1 + (receive word point count) N2) PLC reaches maximum when:
(number of other PLC Nos.) + (N3 + (send word point count) N4) (1) Four QCPUs/motion CPUs/PC CPU modules are used
( s)
in the multi CPU system.
• The number of receive word points is the sum of send points of other
PLC Nos. (2) The extension base unit is used.
For example, when the host PLC is PLC No. 1, the number of receive (3) The extension base unit is mounted with the intelligent
word points is the sum of send points of PLC No. 2 to No. 4. function modules having large volume of data.
• Use the values in the following table as N1 to N4.
(4) Four QCPUs and the module mounted on the
CPU Type N1 N2 N3 N4
extension base unit are accessed simultaneously.
Q02CPU 82 0.52 106 0.17
Q02HCPU, Note that the time that occurs due to the scan time increasing
Q06HCPU, factors given above will be up to four times longer, if four CPU
Q12HCPU, modules are mounted in a multi CPU system.
27 0.44 27 0.08
Q25HCPU,
Q12PHCPU,
Q25PHCPU
How to reduce scan time of multiple CPU
system
The following methods are available to decrease the
processing time in the multiple CPU system.
(1) Reduce the number of refresh points of
MELSECNET/H, CC-Link, etc.
(2) Reduce the number of automatic refresh points
between QCPUs.
3-74
4. NETWORK/INFORMATION
PROCESSING MODULES
4.1 Network Overview
Overview When connected with intelligent equipment such as the ID

system, bar-code reader, inverter and display. The field
In production sites, the introduction of a network system network allows production data to be controlled at network
suited to applications and objectives, is significant to ensure ends through transfer of various data, in addition to ON/OFF
efficient production and appropriate quality control, in order data. This improves maintenance efficiency by centralizing
to reduce equipment size and cost by labor saving and the control of equipment operating statuses. In the Q mode,
wire-saving. the CC-Link functions having high speed and excellent data
The Q mode inherits the conventional MELSEC network 4
transmission performance have been improved to ensure
and offers a network with advanced performance, functions easier use.
and user-friendliness. CC-Link/LT is an in-panel/device wire-saving network for
reducing complicated wiring work, improper wiring, etc on
Features
the shop floor. It achieves wire saving between sensors,
Hierarchical network actuators and controllers.
Assuming a three-level network, the Q mode offers optimal

Seamless communication
network products for respective applications.
Information network [Ethernet]: The Q mode networks are seamless networks that remove
We assume that an information network is on the highest the influence of differences between network types. You
network level in production sites. Designed to transfer
production control information, quality control information, can send/receive data, remote-monitor or correct/change
equipment operating status and other information between programs regardless of differences in network level and
the PLC or equipment controller and the production control type.
computer, the information network assumes the use of the
most general-purpose Ethernet. Ethernet accepts not only a
 Ease of setting network parameters
wide variety of computers such as Windows and UNIX
type personal computers but also various Factory
Automation equipment. The Q mode has functions that For the Ethernet, MELSECNET/H and CC-Link networks of
make the best use of the Ethernet features in an easy way. Q mode, you can set the parameters and various functions
Control network [MELSECNET/H] required for network connection in GX Developer, which
We assume that a control network which links control greatly reduces the complexity related to network setting,
devices, e.g. PLC and CNC, is on the middle network level and can easily confirm the settings on the screen.
in production sites. Designed to transfer data directly related
to the operations of machinery and equipment between the Also, a dedicated utility package is available for the
control devices, the control network is required to provide RS-232/422/485 serial communication module, with which
excellent real-time capabilities. MELSECNET(II/10), the you can set the functions and communication parameters of
MELSEC control network, is highly regarded in the market the module on screen.
for its excellent real-time capabilities, simple network
settings, highly redundant reliability typified by duplex loop,
and boasts the largest share in Japan and a great number of
Cyclic communication
installations throughout the world. In the Q mode, the The basis of MELSECNET/H or CC-Link communication
MELSECNET/H inherits the features of this excellent
MELSECNET(II/10), with extra real-time capabilities and having close relationships with machine control is the cyclic
data capacities to meet further market needs. communication. Since the data of the pre-specified region is
Field network [CC-Link, CC-Link/LT] transferred periodically (cyclically) and automatically, the
We assume that a field network which links control devices, cyclic communication does not need a sequence program
such as PLC, with sensors and drive equipment is on the for data transfer.
lowest network level in production sites. While control
devices were previously linked with sensors and drive The cyclic communication data of MELSECNET/H or
equipment by wires on a point-by-point basis, the field CC-Link is sent by broadcast. Broadcasting is a method in
network can connect multiple sensors and drive equipment which the data sent from a station is received by all other
with a single network cable, reducing the wires and wiring stations. Broadcasting allows data to be transmitted to
processes.
multiple stations at once and to be shared by all stations.
4-1
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING
MODULES 4.1 Network Overview
Network modules incompatible with the Q AnS/A series network modules available for High
mode Performance QCPU
Network Name Module Type
MELSECNET(II) and MELSECNET/B cannot be used with
MELSECNET/MINI-S3 A1SJ71PT32-S3
Q mode. A1SJ71T32-S3
Also, the Ethernet, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link and serial AJ71PT32-S3
AJ71T32-S3
communication/computer link modules for AnS/Q2AS
I/OLINK A1SJ51T64
series cannot be used. Use the Q series modules. AJ51T64
OPCN-1 A1SJ71J92-S3
Other networks AJ71J92-S3
S-LINK A1SJ71SL92N
The Ethernet, MELSECNET/H, CC-Link network,
B/NET A1SJ71B62-S3
RS-232/422/485 serial communication modules (modem AJ71B62-S3
interface module included), ID interface module and FL-net Intelligent communication A1SD51S
AD51-S3
(OPCN-2) interface module, etc. developed for Q mode can
AD51H-S3
be used with the Q mode. In addition, the other ID interface A1SD35ID1
network-compatible modules developed for AnS/A series A1SD35ID2
AD35ID1
can be used with the High Performance QCPU. When using
AD35ID2
any of those network modules, mount it on the extension
base for A series modules QA1S6 B/QA65B.
Since there may be restrictions on their use, refer to the
explanation sections of the corresponding modules.
Ranges accessible by GX Developer/MX Component using the routing function

The ranges accessible by GX Developer (SW4D5C-GPPW-E or later), MX Component (SW0D5C-ACT-E or later) and MX
Links (SW3D5F-CSKP-E) using the routing function are given below. Refer to the following table for the PLC types given in the
description.
MELSECNET/10
Ethernet Module Serial Communication
Type CPU Type MELSECNET/H CC-Link Module Type
Type Module Type
Module Type
I Q00J/Q00/Q01/Q02/ QJ71E71 QJ71LP21-25 QJ71C24 QJ61BT11
Q02H/Q06H/Q12H/ QJ71E71-B2 QJ71BR11 QJ71C24-R2
Q25H/Q12PH/Q25PH QJ71E71-100 QJ71LP21G(E)
II Q2A(S1)/Q3A/Q4A/ AJ71QE71N-B2 AJ71QLP21 AJ71QC24N AJ61QBT11
Q2AS(S1)/Q2ASH(S1) AJ71QE71N-B5T AJ71QBR11 AJ71QC24N-R2/R4 A1SJ61QBT11
A1SJ71QE71N-B2 A1SJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QC24N
A1SJ71QE71N-B5T A1SJ71QBR11 A1SJ71QC24N-R2
III A2U(S1)/A3U/A4U/ AJ71E71N-B2 AJ71LP21 AJ71UC24 AJ61BT11
Q02-A/Q02H-A/
AJ71E71N-B5T AJ71BR11 AISJ71UC24-R2/R4 A1SJ61BT11
Q06H-A/
A2AS(S1)/A2USH-S1 A1SJ71E71N-B2 A1SJ71LP21
IV Other than above A1SJ71E71N-B5T A1SJ71BR11
If the combinations of CPU module and communication module type are other than what is shown in the above list, the accessible range may
differ from the one given.
The Ethernet modules which can perform relay processing for making other station access from a request source to a target station, having
the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 relay communication function, are shown below.
• Q series Ethernet modules (modules corresponding to Type-I in the above table)
• QnA series Ethernet modules (function version B modules among modules corresponding to Type-II in the above table)
The other Ethernet modules cannot perform relay processing for making other station access.
4-2
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING
4.1 Network Overview MODULES
When connecting via MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, or Ethernet

Network 2 to 7
Request
source Network 1 Relay station Relay station Network 8 Target station
GX Developer 1 7 1
MX Component 4
Target station
2
CC-Link
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4 Condition 5

Request Source Type of relay Type of networks 2 Type of relay Type of target Access Range
Type of network 1
station 1 to 8 stations 2 to 7 station 1
GX Developer Ethernet I MELSECNET/10 I, II or III I PLC on path up to
MELSECNET/H target station 2
I I, II or III II, III or IV PLC on path up to
target station 1
II I, II or III — PLC of type II on
path up to target
station 1
III — — Inaccessible
IV — — PLC of type IV on
network 2
MELSECNET/10 I, II or III I, II or III I PLC on path up to
I, II or III I, II or III II, III or IV PLC on path up to
target station 1
IV IV — PLC of type III or IV
(Note 1) on network 2
MX Component Ethernet I I, II or III I, II, III or IV PLC on path up to
target station 1
II or III I, II or III — PLC of the same
type as relay
station 1 on path up
to target station 1
IV — — PLC of type III or IV
on network 2
MELSECNET/10 I, II or III I, II or III I, II, III or IV PLC on path up to
IV IV — PLC of type III or IV
(Note 1 ) on network 2
Note 1: 1) The MELSECNET/10 board for ISA bus and the SW3DNF-MNET10 driver are required to connect the personal computer installed
with GX Developer or MX Component to MELSECNET/10.The access ranges for the SW2DNF-MNET10 driver or earlier are
different from those in the above table.
2) The MELSECNET/H board for PCI bus and the driver of SW0DNC-MNET or later are required to connect GX Developer or MX
Component to MELSECNET/H.
To connect to MELSECNET/H, use GX Developer of SW6D5C-GPPW or later or MX Component of SW2D5C-ACT or later.
4-3
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING
When connecting via CC-Link

Network 2 to 8
Request
source Network 1 Relay station Relay station Target station
(CC-Link) Network 9
GX Developer 1 8 1
MX Component
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3

Request Source Access Range
Type of relay station 1 Type of networks 2 to 9 Type of relay stations 2 to 9
GX Developer I or II MELSECNET/10 I, II or III PLC of the same type as
MELSECNET/H relay station 1 on path up to
target station 1
III or IV — — PLC on network 1
MX Component — — — PLC on network 1
Note 2: The CC-Link board for PCI bus and the SW3DNFCC-Link driver or later are required to connect the personal computer installed with
GX Developer or MX Component to CC-Link. The access range for the SW2DNFCC-Link driver or earlier are different from those in
the above table.
When connecting via CPU port or serial communication/computer link module (1)
Request
source CPU port, serial communication module
GX Developer
MX Component
Network 2 to 7
Connected PLC
Network 1 Relay station Relay station Network 8 Target station

1 7 1
Target station
2
CC-Link
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4

Request source Type of connected Type of networks 1 Type of relay Type of target Access Range
PLC to 8 stations 1 to 7 station 1
GX Developer I MELSECNET/10 I, II or III I PLC on path up to target
MELSECNET/H station 2
I I, II or III II, III or IV PLC on path up to target
station 1
II I, II or III II, III or IV PLC of type II on path up to
target station 1
III I, II or III II, III or IV PLC of type III or IV on path
up to target station 1
IV — — PLC of type III or IV on
network 1
MX Component I I, II or III II, III or IV PLC on path up to target
station 1
II I, II or III II, III or IV PLC of type II on path up to
target station 1
III I, II or III II, III or IV PLC of type III or IV on path
up to target station 1
IV — — PLC of type III or IV on
network 1
4-4
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING
When connecting via CPU port or serial communication/computer link module (2)
Request
source CPU port, serial communication module
GX Developer
MX Component
Network 2 to 8
Connected PLC
4
Network 1 Relay station Relay station Target station
(CC-Link) Network 9
1 8 1
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4 Condition 5

Request Source Type of Type of network Type of relay Type of networks Type of relay Access Range
connected PLC 1 station 1 2 to 9 stations 2 to 8
GX Developer I CC-Link I, II or III MELSECNET/10 I, II or III PLC of type I on path up to
MX Component MELSECNET/H target station 1
II, III or IV — — — Accessible to connected
PLC only
Ranges accessible by MELSEC communication protocol of Ethernet module

The ranges accessible using the MELSEC communication protocol of the Ethernet module are given below. Refer to the
following table for the PLC types given in the description.
MELSECNET/10 Module
Type CPU Type Ethernet Module Type CC-Link Module Type
Type
I Q00J/Q00/Q01/Q02/Q02H/ QJ71E71 QJ71LP21-25, QJ71BR11, QJ61BT11
Q06H/Q12H/Q25H/Q12PH/ QJ71E71-B2 QJ71LP21G(E)
Q25PH QJ71E71-100
II Q2A(S1)/Q3A/Q4A/ AJ71QE71N-B2 AJ71QLP21 AJ61QBT11
Q2AS(S1)/Q2ASH(S1) AJ71QE71N-B5T AJ71QBR11 A1SJ61QBT11
A1SJ71QE71N-B2 A1SJ71QLP21
A1SJ71QE71N-B5T A1SJ71QBR11
III A2U(S1)/A3U/A4U/ AJ71E71N-B2 AJ71LP21, AJ71BR11 AJ61BT11
Q02-A/Q02H-A/ AJ71E71N-B5T A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ61BT11
Q06H-A/ A1SJ71E71N-B2 A1SJ71BR11
A2AS(S1)/A2USH-S1 A1SJ71E71N-B5T
IV Other than above
If the combination of CPU module and communication module type is other than that shown in the above list, the accessible range may differ
from the one given.
The levels of the MELSEC communication protocol supported by the Ethernet modules are as listed below.
Ethernet Module Type Protocol Level
QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71-100 1, 2, 3, 4
AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T 1, 2, 3
AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-B5T 1
Protocol level 1 and level 2
Request
source Network 1 Relay station
(Ethernet) Network 2 Target station
Personal 1
Computer
Condition 1 Condition 2
Request Source Type of relay Type of network Access Range
station 1 2
Personal computer I, II, III or IV MELSECNET/10 PLC on path up to target station
MELSECNET/H
4-5
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING
Protocol level 3
Network 2 to 7
Request
source Network 1 Relay station Relay station
(Ethernet) Network 8 Target station
Personal 1 7
Computer

Personal computer I or II MELSECNET/10 I, II or III PLC on path up to target
MELSECNET/H station
III or IV — — Protocol level 3 is unusable.
Protocol level 4
Network 2 to 7
Request
source Network 1 Relay station Relay station Target station
(Ethernet) Network 8
Personal 1 7 1
Computer
Target station
2
CC-Link

Request source Type of relay station Type of networks Type of relay Type of target Access Range
1 2 to 8 stations 2 to 7 station 1
Personal computer I MELSECNET/10 I, II or III I PLC on path up to target
I MELSECNET/10 I, II or III II or III PLC on path up to target
II, III or IV — — — Protocol level 4 is unusable.
Ranges accessible by MELSEC communication protocol of serial communication module

The ranges accessible using the MELSEC communication protocol of the serial communication module are given below.
Refer to the following table for the PLC types given in the description.
Type CPU Type Serial Communication Module Type MELSECNET/10 Module Type CC-Link Module Type
I Q00J/Q00/Q01/Q02/Q02H/Q06H/Q QJ71C24 QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21G(E), QJ61BT11
12H/Q25H/Q12PH/Q25PH QJ71C24-R2 QJ71BR11
II Q2A(S1)/Q3A/Q4A/ AJ71QC24N AJ71QLP21 AJ61QBT11
Q2AS(S1)/Q2ASH(S1) AJ71QC24N-R2/R4 AJ71QBR11 A1SJ61QBT11
A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QLP21
A1SJ71QC24N-R2 A1SJ71QBR11
III A2U(S1)/A3U/A4U/ AJ71UC24 AJ71LP21, AJ71BR11 AJ61BT11
Q02-A/Q02H-A/ A1SJ71UC24-R2/R4 A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ61BT11
Q06H-A/ A1SJ71BR11
A2AS(S1)/A2USH-S1
IV Other than above
If the combination of CPU module and communication module type is other than what is shown in the above list, the accessible range may
differ from the one given.
The levels of the MELSEC communication protocol supported by the serial communication modules are as listed below.
Serial Communication Module Type Protocol Level
QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2 1, 2, 3, 4
AJ71QC24N, AJ71QC24N-R2/R4, A1SJ71QC24N, A1SJ71QC24N-R2 1, 2, 3
AJ71UC24, AISJ71UC24-R2/R4 1
4-6
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING
Protocol level 1 and level 2
Serial communication module

Request Relay Target
source Network
station station
Personal
Computer
4
Condition 1 Condition 2
Request Source Type of relay Access Range
Type of network
station
Personal computer I, II, III or IV MELSECNET/10 PLC on path up to target station
MELSECNET/H
Protocol level 3
Network 1 to 7

Request Relay Relay Network 8 Target
source station 1 station 8 station
Personal
Computer

Personal computer I or II MELSECNET/10 I, II or III PLC on path up to target
MELSECNET/H station
III or IV — — Protocol level 3 is unusable.
Protocol level 4
Network 1 to 7

Request Relay Relay Network 8 Target
source station 1 station 8 station 1
Personal
Computer
Target
station 2
CC-Link

Request source Type of relay station Type of networks 1 Type of relay Type of target Access Range
1 to 8 stations 2 to 8 station 1
Personal computer I MELSECNET/10 I, II or III I PLC on path up to target
I MELSECNET/10 I, II or III II or III PLC on path up to target
II, III or IV — — — Protocol level 4 is unusable.
4-7
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING
Whole network system configuration
Programming software
GX Developer (SW4D5C-GPPW-E or later)
Communication support software
MX Component (SW0D5C-ACT-E or later)
GX Developer (SW4D5C-GPPW-E or later)
Communication support software
Ethernet module MX Component (SW0D5C-ACT-E or later)
For 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX : QJ71E71-100 MELSECNET/10 ISA bus board (Note 1)
For 10BASE5/10BASE-T : QJ71E71 For optical cable : A70BDE-J71QLP23 (GE)
For 10BASE2 : QJ71E71-B2 For coaxial cable : A70BDE-J71QBR13
MELSECNET/H PCI bus board
For optical cable : Q80BD-J71LP21-25,
Q80BD-J71LP21G(E)
For coaxial cable : Q80BD-J71BR11
MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network)

MELSECNET/H module MELSECNET/H module
For optical cable : QJ71LP21-25, For optical cable : QJ71LP21-25,
QJ71LP21G(E) QJ71LP21G(E)
For coaxial cable : QJ71BR11
For coaxial cable : QJ71BR11
CC-Link/LT module: QJ61CL12

CC-Link/LT
CC-Link module : QJ61BT11 MELSECNET/H
(Remote I/O network)
MELSECNET/H module
For optical cable : QJ72LP25-25,
Terminal block Sensor connector Cable type QJ72LP25G(E)
type digital I/O type digital I/O digital I/O For coaxial cable : QJ72BR15
CC-Link
Partner maker product groups

Personal computer interface board Digital I/O,
Display, operation terminal Analog I/O,
Solenoid valve, various sensors, converter Temperature input,
Conveyor, drive, robot, etc. ID,
FREQROL inverter,
MELSERVO AC servo, High-speed counter, etc.
Personal computer PCI
bus board,
MELSEC PLC,
GOT display, etc.
Note 1: Usable in MELSECNET/10 mode. (Driver of version SW3DNF-MNET10 or later is required.)

MELSECNET/H mode is not supported.
4-8
NETWORK/
4.2 Ethernet Interface Module: INFORMATION
QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2, PROCESSING
QJ71E71-100 MODULES
Overview Fixed buffer communication

The Ethernet interface module (hereafter referred to as the Data transfer between the PLC and personal computer or
"QJ71E71") is used on the PLC side to connect a host another PLC, can be done by using the fixed buffer
system, e.g. personal computer or work station, and Q communication function.
mode PLC via Ethernet (10BASE5, 10BASE2, 10BASE-T, In fixed buffer communications, the PLC can transmit data
100BASE-TX) to collect/change PLC data, monitor CPU actively, so it can send data to the host system when a
module operation, control the status, and transfer any data given condition is true, i.e. at the occurrence of a 4
through TCP/IP or UDP/IP communication. machinery/equipment error. In data communications using
Currently, Ethernet is the most widespread network for fixed buffers, up to 1k word of data can be sent/received
connecting information processors such as personal between PLCs or between PLC and host system. The 16
computers and workstations. By mounting an Ethernet 1k-word fixed buffers available for the QJ71E71 are used
interface module on the PLC base unit, production-related by allocating them as sending or receiving buffers to or
management information can be transmitted rapidly to from any equipment.
personal computers or workstations.
Random access buffer communication
Features
The communication function using the random access
10BASE5/10BASE2/10BASE-T/100BASE-TX buffer provides a means to transfer 1k word or more data.
When using the random access buffer for data
You can choose from four different network types,
communication, up to 6k words of data can be transferred.
10BASE5, 10BASE2, 10BASE-T, and 100BASE-TX.
With the random access buffer communication function,
Communication using MC protocol large amounts of data can be transferred, if the data
MELSEC communication protocol is used as a capacity is insufficient for the fixed buffer communication
communication function for access between personal (max. 1k word).
computer and PLC CPU (Note 1). In addition, the random access buffer can transfer data
In data communications using the MELSEC between PLCs as virtual memory.
communication protocol (hereafter referred to as the "MC
protocol"), PLC data and program file read/write, PLC Communications with remote locations,
CPU status control (remote RUN/STOP), etc. can be automatic notice
performed from a host system. With this protocol, Using the e-mail send/receive function, up to 6k words of
sequence programs are not needed since the PLC data can be sent to or received from a remote computer as
sends/receives all data under the commands of the host an attached file (Note 2) or up to 960 words of text data in
system. an e-mail. (Note 3) If sending an e-mail automatically is
In communications using the MC protocol, one required, with the monitor function of the PLC CPU, the
communication allows read/write of up to 960 points (960 QJ71E71 monitors the status of the PLC CPU device
words) of word devices. conditions at fixed intervals and sends an e-mail
Note 1: Equivalent to the reading/writing data in the PLC CPU
automatically when the user set conditions match.
function of the A/QnA series PLC.
Note that up to 16 e-mail addresses can be registered for
MX Component transmission.
Note 2: Binary/ ASCII/ CSV (Comma Separated Value) is
When using MX Component, if the target in the host supported for send and binary for receive, as an attached
system is a personal computer, a communication program file.
can be created easily, without concern for the details Note 3: The Basic model QCPU does not support the e-mail send/
(communication procedure) of the MC protocol. receive function.
 
MX Component supports Visual Basic and Visual C++
functions and also VBScript and VBA.
4-9
NETWORK/
INFORMATION 4.2 Ethernet Interface Module:
PROCESSING QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2,
MODULES QJ71E71-100
Communications with other PLCs Easy parameter setting (program-less)

The communication function using data link instructions is By using the network parameter setting of "GX Developer",
available for read/write of device data and any other data you can set the parameters for initial processing of the
to/from other PLCs. QJ71E71 and logical link processing (open processing)
In communications using data link instructions, read/write with other devices on the screen, significantly simplifying
of device data and any other data from one PLC to sequence programs and enhancing the visual recognition
another PLC, PLC CPU status control (remote of the network setting status.
RUN/STOP), etc. can be performed if data communication
Connection of multiple MELSOFT products
with other PLCs is established using Ethernet.
TCP/IP or UDP/IP communication enables connection with
Number of simultaneously opened
a MELSOFT product (GX Developer, GT SoftGOT, MX
communication lines
Component, etc.). Also, using the user connections and
With the user connection, a maximum of 16 system connection (GX Developer communication port)
communication channels can be opened (logical channels indicated in the table permits the simultaneous connection
can be connected) to provide simultaneous data of multiple MELSOFT products. [GT SoftGOT is only
communication. available for the system connection (GX Developer
Two communication channels are used for sending and communication port (for UDP/IP communication).).
receiving by fixed buffer communication with the same Connection using TCP/IP communication: Max. 17 units
equipment. Connection using UDP/IP communication: Max. 63 units (a
• Opening one communication channel allows communications by single port enables connection of multiple units.)
MC protocol from host system, random accessing buffer
communications, and fixed buffer communications from host Programming via Ethernet
system/PLC CPU (sending or receiving with procedure). The
Through Ethernet, the PLC can be programmed and
communication channel for fixed buffer communications
monitored from GX Developer on the personal computer.
(sending or receiving) with no procedure does not permit
With this function, you can perform
connection with another data communications system (such as
communications using MC protocol). programming/monitoring at a remote location utilizing the
• The following are the logical connections of the QJ71E71 fast communication of Ethernet.
available for communication with the device on the other end.
Communications via multiple networks
User connections are the communication channels that are
opened from the Q series CPU for data communication with the When accessing the PLC from the host system using the
device on the other end. MC protocol, or when accessing the PLC from the GX
System connections are the communication channels that are Developer and MX Component installed personal
opened by the QJ71E71 when the user uses the corresponding computers, access can be made to the PLC located
functions.
beyond multiple MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H and
Logical channel
No. of
Remarks Ethernet networks. Through Ethernet, the PLC can be
channels
programmed and monitored from GX Developer on the
User connection 16 Opened by user
System connection — — personal computer.
Automatic open UDP port 1 Used by user
FTP communication port 1 For file transfer function
Compatibility with remote password function
GX Developer communication 1 For TCP/IP
port communication This function prevents illegal access from a remote user to
GX Developer communication 1 For UDP/IP the Q series CPU via the QJ71E71(Note 4). The remote
port communication
password for access to the Q series CPU by the user is
HTTP port for Web function 1 QJ71E71-100 only
Electronic mail port 2 SMTP, POP3 checked by the QJ71E71.
Note 4: The Basic model QCPU does not support the remote
password function.
4-10
NETWORK/
QJ71E71-100 MODULES
Access via the Internet using Web function "Basic" in the Remarks field indicates the instructions
explained in the Ethernet User's Manual (Basic) and
The Web function is designed for a system manager to "Application" indicates the instructions explained in the
monitor a remote Q series CPU via the Internet using a Ethernet User's Manual (Application).
general purpose Web browser. The Web function is usable Note 1: Unavailable for the Basic model QCPU.
with the QJ71E71-100 only. Note 2: The Basic model QCPU supports the following
An external Web server is needed to use the Web function.
instructions.
Setting up a communication library (Note 5), PLC's
• SREAD: Equivalent to that of the READ instruction.
accessing user-created program and user-created screen
• SWRITE: Equivalent to that of the WRITE instruction. 4
(for Web browser) for the Web server enables access from
the user-created screen to the PLC.
In effect to the access from the user-created program set
Program Compatibility
up for the Web server, the QJ71E71-100 performs the The sequence program of the system which uses the A
requested processing and returns the result to the Web series/QnA series Ethernet interface module (e.g.
server. (A system configuration example is given in the A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-B2, hereafter referred to
function list.) as "E71") and the program of its host system can be
Note 5: Contact your local Mitsubishi Representative to obtain the utilized for the system using the QJ71E71.
communication library and sample screen. The compatibility of an E71 program that uses the
QJ71E71 for data communications is described below.
Ethernet Module-Dedicated Instructions Compatibility with Compatibility with
Program for A Series Program for QnA Series
The following Ethernet dedicated instructions can be used Ethernet Module Ethernet Module
to program the QJ71E71. Compatible
Host system side However, only data in Compatible
Instruction program (Note 1) PLC is accessible in (Note 5, 6)
Classification Description Remarks
Name MC protocol. (Note 7)
Connection OPEN Opens connection. Basic PLC side program Compatible
Incompatible
processing CLOSE Closes connection. Basic (Note 1) (Note 2, 3,4)
Reads data received by fixed
BUFRCV Basic Note 1: In any of the above cases, performance and
buffers.
Reads data received by fixed communication timing are incompatible. Communications
BUFRCVS buffers in interrupt program. Basic
(Note 1) is not possible by utilizing the unmodified program.
Uses fixed buffers to send data of Therefore always check the program operation when
BUFSND Basic
device on other end.
MRECV Receives e-mail.(Note 1) Application utilizing the program.
MSEND Sends e-mail. (Note 1) Application Note 2: The QJ71E71 has no E2PROM. Delete any instances in
READ
Reads word device of other
Application the program to access the E2PROM.
station.
Reads receive data from other Note 3: For the QJ71E71, it is not necessary to set in the program
RECV Application
station PLC. whether communications are possible or not during PLC
Reads receive data from other
CPU STOP (GX Developer parameters are used for
Communicat- RECVS station PLC in interrupt program. Application
ion (Note 1) setting). Delete the sequence program used for this
processing Makes transient request to other
REQ station PLC (remote run/stop, Application setting.
clock data read, write).
Note 4: The LED ON status/switch setting status read from the
SEND Sends data to other station PLC. Application
Reads data from word device of buffer memory of the QJ71E71 are different from those of
SREAD other station (with completion Application the AJ71QE71.
device). (Note 2)
Writes data to word device of Note 5: When using the file transfer (FTP server) function, the
SWRITE other station (with completion Application default value of the FTP login name and FTP password
device). (Note 2)
Writes data to the word device of specified on the external device side changes from
WRITE Application
other stations.
"AJ71QE71" to "QJ71E71".
Reads data from the word device
ZNRD Application
of other stations. Note 6: For file access in the Q series CPU using MC protocol,
Writes data to the word device of
ZNWR Application create a new program since a new dedicated command
other stations.
ERRCLR
Clears errors (ERROR LED off,
Basic
will be used.
Error error log clear)
processing Note 7: Access can be made in the same range as that of the
ERRRD Reads error information. Basic
Re-initial UINI conventional A series CPU for read/write communications
Performs re-initial processing. Basic
processing (MC protocol level 1) of data in the PLC CPU compatible
with the conventional A series E71.
4-11
NETWORK/
MODULES QJ71E71-100
Appearance
QJ71E71
QJ71E71
RUN ERR.
INIT. COM.ERR.
OPEN
SD RD
10BASE-T
98 (3.86)
10BASE5
( 1)
R1
+12
12G
(For connection EXT.POWER
of 10BASE5)
90.5 (3.56) 27.4
(1.08)
( 1)
R1
(For connection
of 10BASE-T)
QJ71E71-B2
QJ71E71-B2
RUN ERR.
INIT. COM.ERR.
OPEN
SD RD
29.2 (1.15)
23.65
98 (3.86)
(0.93)
90.5 (3.56) 27.4

(1.08)
QJ71E71-100
QJ71E71-100
RUN ERR.
INIT. COM.ERR.
OPEN 100M
SD RD
98 (3.86)
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
( 1)
R1
QJ71E71-100
90.5 (3.56) 27.4

(1.08)
Unit: mm (inch)
1 When connecting a cable, the bend radius (R1: guideline

value) near the connector should be (cable outline × 4) or
more.
4-12
NETWORK/
QJ71E71-100 MODULES
Function List
Function Outline
MC protocol Reads/writes data from/to CPU module in accordance with MC protocol from host system.
communications PLC always performs passive processing.
Communications using Sends or receives data using 16 1k-word fixed buffers. Sequence program is required for data transfer.
fixed buffers
Random access buffer Sends or receives data using the random accessing buffer (6k words) in QJ71E71. PLC reads/writes data from/to the random
communications accessing buffer, and the host system accesses that data to establish communications. 4
Main function
Sending/receiving Transfers data by e-mail, can also be used with PLC monitoring function to transmit alarm information, etc. automatically by
by e-mail (Note 1) e-mail.
Max number of e-mail addresses : 16
Target of monitoring function : CPU module status, CPU module devices (max. 16 types)
Number of monitoring function conditions : 1(Can be set per device)
Access via the Internet This function is designed for the system manager to use a commercially available Web browser to monitor a remote Q series
using Web function CPU via the Internet. Sending/receiving an MC protocol message in HTTP enables the device memory in the Q series CPU to
(Note 2) be accessed and remote RUN/STOP etc to be performed.
Contact your local Mitsubishi representative to obtain the communication library and the sample screen.
Router relay function Sends data to personal computer, etc. located beyond router.
Data link instruction Instructions for data communication with other PLCs (MELSEC) via Ethernet.
File transfer Transfers file by FTP. Can read/write programs and data stored in CPU module as files.
Sub function
Broadcasting Sends data to all the other personal computers, etc. within the same segment using UDP/IP.
Existence check Checks whether devices on the other end are operating properly or not if communications had not been made with them for
given period.
(Use GX Developer to set existence confirmed/not confirmed and time interval.)
Error information When data communications error occurs, stores in buffer memory up to 16 sets of error history information including message
sub-headers, other device IP addresses, etc.
Self loop-back test Checks hardware including communication circuit of QJ71E71. (Set in GX Developer)
Note 1: Unavailable for the Basic model QCPU.
Note 2: You can use the Web function of QJ71E71-100. The outline of a system configuration for using the Web function is shown below.
Internet (Public dial-up line)
Internet service Internet service

provider(ISP) provider(ISP)
HTTP
Screen data, PLC CPU data
Web server software Web browser (either of the following)

(Any of the following OS-compatible) Microsoft R Internet Explorer
Firewall Web server
Internet Information Server 4.0 4.0 or later
Internet Information Services 5.0
Personal Web Server 4.0 Netscape R Communicator
Communication library 4.05 or later
Sample screen (HTML file)
User-created screen (HTML file)
PLC accessing ASP file
Router HTTP
PLC CPU data

Performs processing requested by
Web server and returns result.
QJ71E71-100
(Sample screen)
4-13
NETWORK/
MODULES QJ71E71-100
Specifications
Item QJ71E71-100 QJ71E71 QJ71E71-B2
100BASE-TX 10BASE-T 10BASE-T 10BASE5 10BASE2
Transmission Data transmission speed
100Mbps 10Mbps
specifications (bps)
Transmission method Base band
Max. inter-node distance
— 2500 (8196.72) 925 (3032.79)
(m (ft.))
Max. segment length (m (ft.)) 100 (327.87) (Note 1) 500 (1639.34) 185 (606.56)
Cascade
Max. number of nodes /
connection of up to Cascade connection of up to four levels 100 units/segment 30 units/segment
connection
two levels
Min. node interval (m (ft.)) — 2.5 (8.2) 0.5 (1.64)
Send/receive data Max number of
storage memory simultaneously opened 16 connections (connections usable in sequence program)
connections
Fixed buffer 1k word × 16 areas
Random accessing buffer 6k words × 1 area
Electronic attached file 6k words × 1 area (Note 4)
mail 960k words × 1 area (Note 4)
text
Max. number of MC protocol communication 960 words
data per Fixed buffer communication 1k words
communication Random buffer
6k words
communication
Data send/receive instructions 480 words (RECVS, RECV, READ, SREAD, SEND, WRITE, SWRITE instructions)
Read from Q/QnACPU : 230 words (ZNRD, ZNWR instructions)
Data send/receive instructions 230 words
Read from other than Q/QnACPU : 32 words (ZNRD, ZNWR instructions)
Mountable station Q series CPU (Q mode), MELSECNET/H (remote I/O station) (Note 2)
Number of I/O signals occupied 32 points (I/O assignment: Intelligent)
12VDC external supply power capacity
(Note 3)
(transceiver)
External dimensions 98 (3.86) (H) 27.4 (1.08) (W) 90.5 (3.57) (D) (mm (inch))
Weight 0.11kg 0.13kg 0.14kg
10BASE5, 10BASE2 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX

Segment length
Node Transceiver
Hub
Terminator
(Note 5)
Segment length
Segment length
Hub
QJ71E71
Repeater
Node Node
Max. inter-node
distance
Node Node
Note 1: Length between hub and node.

Note 2: The MELSECNET/H remote I/O station accepts the QJ71E71 of function version B or later.
For restrictions and other details, refer to the Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Fundamentals).
Note 3: Considering a voltage drop (max. 0.80V) in the module, use the one that satisfies the transceiver and AUI cable specifications.
Note 4: The following indicates the specifications of the e-mail send/receive function.
The PLC CPU-based e-mail send/receive function and random access buffer-based communication function cannot be used
together. Only either of the functions can be used. (The Ethernet module's PLC CPU monitor function-based e-mail send/receive
function and random access buffer-based communication function can be used together.)
Note 5: The cascade connection of hubs is up to four levels for 10BASE-T and up to two levels for 100BASE-TX.
4-14
NETWORK/
QJ71E71-100 MODULES
E-mail specifications
Item Specifications
Transmission attached file 6k words × 1 area
Data size
specification text 960 words × 1
send/receive Data transfer method Send : Either an attached file or text is sent. (Selected)
data Subject Receive : Attached file is received.
Subject US-ASCII format or ISO-2022-JP (Base64)
Attached file format MIME format 4
MIME Version 1.0
Binary, ASCII or CSV can be selected.
Data format of attached file File name: XXXX.bin (binary), XXXX.asc (ASCII), XXXX.csv (CSV)
(CSV : Comma Separated Value)
Disabled (only one file can be sent/received)
Division of attached file
When divided files are received, the first file portion is received and the others are discarded.
Subject : Base 64/7 bits
Send (encode) Text : 7 bits
Attached file : Base 64
Subject : (Not decoded)
Text : (Un-receivable)
Receive(decode) Attached file : Base 64/7 bits/8 bits/Quoted Printable
When sending electronic mail from the device to the PLC on the other end, specify the encoding
system (Base 64/7 bits/8 bits/Quoted Printable) of the attached file.
Encryption No
Compression No
Communications with the mail SMTP (sending server) port number = 25
server POP3 (receiving server) port number = 110
System Equipment
The following equipment is required for configuring an Ethernet system.
10BASE-5 : QJ71E71 10BASE-2 : QJ71E71-B2

Terminator Ethernet coaxial cable Transceiver RG58A/U or RG58C/U
Terminator
coaxial cable
Other end of
communications
AUI cable
(Transceiver cable) T type
Other end of connector
communications Ethernet
card
QJ71E71
QJ71E71
DC power
supply
10BASE-T : QJ71E71, QJ71E71-100 100BASE-TX : QJ71E71-100
Hub Hub (For 10Mbps) Hub Hub (For 100Mbps)
Other end of Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable

communications
QJ71E71
QJ71E71
Other end of Other end of

communications communications
4-15
NETWORK/
MODULES QJ71E71-100
<QJ71E71 accessories> <Software>

Product Description Type Description Remarks
Manual Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual GX Developer SW4D5C-GPPW-E or later
(Hardware) (Note 2)
MX Component SW0D5C-ACT-E or later
<QJ71E71-B2 accessories>
Product Description : Must be obtained. : Obtained at users discretion.
Manual Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual Note 2: GX Developer Version 7 or later is required to use the
(Hardware) QJ71E71-100.
<QJ71E71-100 accessories> <Separately obtained manuals>
Product Description Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic)
Manual Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual
Specifications
(Hardware) Pre-operation settings and procedures
Compatibility with remote password function
<Separately obtained products>(Note 1) Maintenance, inspection, troubleshooting
Logical line connection method
The following equipment must be obtained separately. Communications using MC protocol (Note 3)
Communications using fixed buffers
(When 10BASE5 is connected) Communications using random accessing buffer
Dedicated instructions (instructions related to open processing and data
Product Description
transfer)
Transceiver Ethernet Standard-compliant product. Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Application)
Product where SQETEST (Signal Quality
Error Test) or heartbeat will operate. How to confirm the existence of other nodes
E-mail function
Coaxial cable Ethernet Standard-compliant product. PLC CPU's monitoring function
AUI cable Ethernet Standard-compliant product. Function to establish communications via MELSECNET/10
N type terminator Ethernet Standard-compliant product. Function to establish communications by data link instructions
For file transfer (FTP server)
12VDC power supply Power supply for transceiver Dedicated instructions (instructions related to open processing and data
(When 10BASE2 is connected) transfer)
Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Web Function) (Note 4)
Product Description
Operating environment
Coaxial cable Ethernet Standard-compliant product. Operation procedure
RG58A/U or RG58C/U (50 ) Using the sample screen to check Web function operation.
BNC type terminator Ethernet Standard-compliant product Creation of PLC accessing file
(AMP INC. 221629-4 or equivalent) MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual
T type connector Ethernet Standard-compliant product Protocol specification manual that describes the communication
(Hirose Electric's UG-274/U(1S) or functions using the MC protocol for serial communication
equivalent) module/Ethernet interface module, send and receive frames of
communication, and send and receive procedures.
(When 10BASE-T is connected) This manual also explains the remote password unlocking and locking
frames.
Product Description
Unshielded twisted pair Ethernet Standard-compliant product. Note 3: The description of the MELSEC Communication protocol
cable (UTP cable) Category 3 (4, 5) is not given.
Jack Ethernet Standard-compliant product. RJ45 For the communication method, refer to the MELSEC
Hub Ethernet Standard-compliant product. For
Communication Protocol Reference Manual.
10BASE-T.
(For 10Mbps) Note 4: Explains the Web function that can be used with the
(When 100BASE-TX is connected) QJ71E71-100.
Product Description Ethernet is a registered trademark of XEROX CORP, U.S.A.

Shielded twisted pair Ethernet Standard-compliant product.  
Microsoft, Visual Basic and Visual C++ are registered
cable (STP cable) Category 5
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and
Jack Ethernet Standard-compliant product. RJ45
Hub Ethernet Standard-compliant product. For other countries.
100BASE-TX. Netscape is a registered trademark of Netscape Communication
(For 100Mbps) Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Note 1: Refer to <Separately obtained manuals> for acquiring
manuals separately.
4-16
4.3 MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC NETWORK/
network: INFORMATION
QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21G, PROCESSING
QJ71LP21GE, QJ71BR11 MODULES
Overview It also has dedicated devices of link relays B (ON/OFF

data) and link registers W (16-bit numerical data) used for
MELSECNET/H is a network system that has improved
cyclic communication. B and W operate as the shared
performance capabilities compared to MELSECNET/10. It
memories of that network and can be handled as ordinary
has the functions and performance capabilities required to
internal relays and data registers in programs, so you can
realize the centralized control of manufacturing lines by
create programs without being conscious of the network
connecting multiple PLCs and a personal computer. 4
configuration. (Note 2)
MELSECNET/H network module has the functions of both Note 2: The link relays B and link registers W are the names of
data in the CPU module. They are called LB and LW in
MELSECNET/10 mode (designed for connection to the
the network module, respectively, and the data actually
existing MELSECNET/10 system constructed with the A shared on the network are LB and LW. Since the CPU
module cannot handle LB and LW directly, LB/LW data
series/QnA series PLCs) and MELSECNET/H mode
are read into the CPU module after they are shifted to
(where only the Q series PLCs are used to configure a B/W.
network for higher performance). You can choose one To transfer much more data than MELSECNET/10,
between these modes. MELSECNET/H has been increased from the 8k points LB
Note 1: The QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21G, QJ71LP21GE and and LW capacities of MELSECNET/10 to 16k points.
QJ71BR11 can be used with a control/normal station for If link relays B and link registers W are insufficient, you
PLC to PLC network and a master station for remote I/O
can use link inputs (LX) and link outputs (LY). Note that
network. Note that function version B or later may be
using the link inputs and link outputs are different from link
used as a master module for remote I/O network.
relays and link registers, and they may be used only in
Features 1-to-1 communications.
High-speed network MELSECNET/H network
The MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H are 10Mbps

and 10Mbps/25Mbps token passing networks, respectively.
(The transmission speed of 25Mbps in the
MELSECNET/H is enabled only for a system configured to
use the QJ71LP21-25.) Since the transmission is always B000 B000 B000
assigned cyclically in a token passing network, data

transmission is maintained even if the number of
B000 controlled in one PLC can be represented as contact
connections or communications with the network
data in the other PLCs, without being conscious of the
increases. Hence, this network is suitable for facility
network configuration.
control requiring real-time capabilities.
The MELSECNET/H has a shorter processing time in the Applicable cables
network module than the MELSECNET/10 to reduce the
When configuring the MELSECNET/H network system,
link scan time.
optical fiber and coaxial cables can be used.
This has improved performance in both transient
They have the following features.
transmission and cyclic transmission.
Optical fiber cables
User-friendly network (1) Optical fiber has high noise immunity.
(2) The SI/H-PCF/broad-band H-PCF/QSI cable can be
MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H have a cyclic
used for long-distance wiring of 500m/1km/1km/1km
communication system for data communications. The
inter-station distance at 10Mbps transmission speed or
cyclic communication system is designed to transfer data
200m/400m/1km/1km inter-station distance at 25Mbps
periodically or automatically the data pre-specified in the
transmission speed. The GI cable can be used for
network parameters and does not need programming for
wiring of 2km inter-station distance at 10Mbps
data transfer.
transmission speed.
4-17
NETWORK/ 4.3 MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC
INFORMATION network:
PROCESSING QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21G,
MODULES QJ71LP21GE, QJ71BR11
Coaxial cables Control station shifting function

(1) Cables can be fabricated easily by the user. When the specified control station is disconnected due to
(2) Cables are low in price. a fault such as power-off, the normal station replaces the
specified control station (to act as a sub-control station) to
High reliability
continue communication.
When a problem occurs, network recovery may take a Automatic return function
long time since many PLCs are connected over a wide When the station previously disconnected as a faulty
range and cables are run in ducts and ceilings which are station is recovered, it returns to the network automatically
difficult to replace, etc. The MELSECNET/10 and to resume data communication.
MELSECNET/H have functions capable of dealing with
Network monitoring
this problem to improve reliability.
Loopback function (Optical duplex loop system In the MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H network
only) systems, the network status can be diagnosed easily from
With optical duplexed loop cables, if a fault occurs, such GX Developer. If any error occurs in the network, the
as cable breakage or PLC failure, it is disconnected from cause of the error can be found quickly, resulting in easier
the network in order to continue normal transmission with troubleshooting.
operable stations. The diagnosis methods are as follows:
Station Forward Station (1) Network diagnosis (host station information): Checks
No. 1 loop No. 2 the network status of the connected host station.
(2) Other station information: Checks the network status of
Reverse loop
the other specified station.
Station Station (3) Network test: Makes link start/stop of the host station,
No. 4 No. 3 specified station, or all stations.
(4) Setting confirmation test: Checks the station number,
network number, and group number set for each
Station Station station.
No. 1 No. 2 (5) Station sequence confirmation test: For optical loop
system, checks the station sequence of
forward/reverse loop on the network.
Breakage
Station Station (6) Loop test: Checks the loop status of the optical loop
No. 4 No. 3 system.
(7) Communications test: Checks whether
Station disconnection function (Coaxial bus
communications can be made between the host station
system only)
and specified station.
When a station becomes faulty due to power-off, for
example, that station is disconnected from the network to MELSECNET/H mode system
continue normal transmission with operable stations.
The MELSECNET/H mode is recommended for the PLC
Station Station Station
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 to PLC network, which consists of the QCPU (Q mode)
only. It achieves faster, larger-capacity communication
Station 3 faulty than the MELSECNET/10 mode.
faulty
When using the QCPU (A mode), the MELSECNET/H
Station Station Station
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 modules cannot be used. Use the AnS series
MELSECNET/10 modules.
The cables used are the optical or coaxial cables as used
in the MELSECNET/10 network system.
4-18
Appearance
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71LP21-25
(Q mode)
Q02CPU
(Q mode)
Q02CPU
(Q mode)
Q02CPU
For control station/normal station
QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21G, QJ71LP21GE
QJ71LP21-25
RUN MNG
T.PASS. D.LINK
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
MELSECNET/H STATION NO.

78
45 6
90 1
X10 23
78
MELSECNET/10 mode system
456
90 1
X1 23
98 (3.89)
Choose the MELSECNET/10 mode when connecting the IN
QCPU (Q mode) to an existing MELSECNET/10 network

BCD
67 A
EF 2
89
system configured with the ACPU, QnACPU, etc. In
MODE
01
345
addition, the QCPU (A mode) can also be connected to OUT
the MELSECNET/10 network.

A1SJ71QLP21
QJ71LP21-25
A1SJ71LP21
A1SJ71LP21
QJ71LP21-25
A2USHCPU
Q2ASCPU
(A mode)
Q02CPU
(Q mode)
Q02CPU
90 (3.54) 1 27.4 (1.08)

-S1
1:Please contact your nearest Mitsubishi Electric representative

for details.
MELSECNET/10 QJ71BR11
QJ71BR11
MELSECNET/H Dedicated Instructions

RUN MNG
T.PASS. D.LINK
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
STATION NO. 78
For the QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21G, QJ71LP21GE and
45 6
90 1
X10 23
78
45 6
90 1
X1
QJ71BR11, the MELSECNET/H dedicated instructions

23
BCD
89A
EF 2
MODE
01
67
3 45
listed below can be used to create programs for data 98 (3.86)
transfer other than cyclic communication.

Instruction Description Target Station
SEND Writes data to target station Q mode
network module QnA/Q2AS
RECV Reads data written by SEND
RECVS instruction from network module. QJ71BR11
(RECVS is executed in interrupt

program.) 90 (3.56) 55 (2.17) 27.4 (1.08)
READ Reads data to target station CPU
SREAD module. Unit: mm (inch)
WRITE Writes data to target station CPU
SWRITE module.
REQ Performs remote operation for
target station CPU.
ZNRD Reads data from target station Q mode
CPU module. QnA/Q2AS
ZNWR Writes data to target station CPU A mode
module. AnU/A2AS
RRUN Remote run of target station CPU Q mode
module
RSTOP Remote stop of target station CPU
module
RTMRD Reads clock information from
target station CPU module.
RTMWR Writes clock information to target
station CPU module.
4-19
Comparison between MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10

MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10 Remarks
Host PLC type Q mode Q mode QnA/Q2AS A mode, AnU/A2AS
Applicable other station PLC type Q mode
Q mode, A mode, QnA/Q2AS, A/AnS, A70BD series
MELSECNET/H
MELSECNET/10 board
board
Number of cyclic LX/LY (1Bit) 0 to 1FFF
0 to 1FFF (8192 points)
points per network (8192 points)
LB (1Bit) 0 to 3FFF
(16384 points)
LW (1 word) 0 to 3FFF
(16384 points)
Number of cyclic Cyclic
Max. 2000 bytes Max. 2000 bytes Total of LY, LB and
transmission points communications
LW
per station Low-speed cyclic Max. 2000 bytes No
Transmission speed 10Mbps/25Mbps 10Mbps 10Mbps 10Mbps
Link scan time Short Normal Normal Normal
PLC to PLC network and remote I/O
PLC to PLC network PLC to PLC network PLC to PLC network, remote I/O network
network
Cable Optical SI/H-PCF/
broad-band H-PCF/
QSI
(Note 2)
Optical GI-50/125
Optical GI-62.5/125
Coaxial (3C/5C-2V) (simplex bus) (simplex bus) (simplex bus, duplex loop)
Max. number of networks 239 239 239 255
Max. number of groups 32 9 9 9
Dedicated ZCOM
instructions REQ Check the details of
ZNRD, ZNWR the dedicated
READ, WRITE, instructions in the
SREAD, SWRITE relevant
SEND, RECV programming
RRUN, RSTOP manual.
RTMRD,RTMWR
Routing function (Note 1) (Note 3) (Note 1) (Note 3) (Note 1) (Note 3) (Note 1)
32-bit data split prevention function Yes Yes No No
Note 1: Accessible to the PLC on the network located beyond seven relay (gateway) PLCs which connect two MELSECNET/H,
MELSECNET/10 or Ethernet networks. Note that the A mode does not have the Ethernet relay function.
Note 2: Some cables are not compatible with some CPU types. Check details in the corresponding catalog.
Note 3: When the MD function is used on the MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 board to access another station, access via Ethernet
cannot be made.
4-20
Connection with an Existing Network Connecting the existing MELSECNET/10

System (PLC to PLC network) and new
This section describes the compatibility of the Q series MELSECNET/10 network (Method 2)
PLC (Q mode) for additional connection to an existing New
MELSECNET network.
Note 1: The compatibility specifications of the Q series PLC (A A/AnS QnA/Q2AS Q series PLC
mode) with the existing network are different from those of (Q mode)
Module 1
Module 2
New
the Q series PLC (Q mode). The Q series PLC (A mode)
has the same network capability as that of the AnS and Existing MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET 4
can be connected to all networks available with the AnS. /10
Q series PLC
QnA/Q2AS A/AnS (Q mode)
Connecting the Q series (Q mode) to the
existing MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC
network) AnU/AnUS/QnA/Q2AS
PLC
New
A/AnS QnA/Q2AS
[Modules required for relay PLC]
Module
Module 1 (existing module)

Existing MELSECNET/10
MELSECNET/10 module compatible with
A/AnS/QnA/Q2AS
QnA/Q2AS A/AnS Q series PLC
(Q mode) Module 2 (newly added module)
[Modules required for Q series PLC (Q mode)] AJ71LP21/A1SJ71LP21/AJ71QLP21(S)/A1SJ71QLP21
QJ71LP21-25: For optical SI/QSI/H-PCF cable (S): For optical SI/QSI cable
QJ71LP21G, QJ71LP21GE: For optical GI cable AJ71BR11/A1SJ71BR11/AJ71QBR11/A1SJ71QBR11:
QJ71BR11: For coaxial 75 cable
[Instructions] For coaxial 75 cable
Use the QJ71LP21-25/QJ71LP21G/QJ71LP21GE/ [Instructions]
QJ71BR11 in the MELSECNET/10 mode. Module 1 is the existing MELSECNET/10 module.
Connecting the existing MELSECNET/10 Module 2 is a MELSECNET/10 module for
(PLC to PLC network) and new A/AnS/QnA/Q2AS.
MELSECNET/H network (Method 1) Connecting the Q series PLC (Q mode) to
New
an existing MELSECNETII or
A/AnS QnA/Q2AS Q series PLC
(Q mode) MELSECNET/B network
Module 1
Module 2
New
Existing MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/H The Q series PLC (Q mode) cannot be connected to an
existing MELSECNET(II) or MELSECNET/B network.
Q series PLC
QnA/Q2AS A/AnS (Q mode)
Q series PLC A/AnS QnA/Q2AS
(Q mode)
Existing MELSECNET(II), Q series PLC
[Modules required for relay PLC] MELSECNET/B (Q mode)
Module 1
QJ71LP21-25: For optical SI/QSI/H-PCF cable
QnA/Q2AS A/AnS
QJ71LP21G, QJ71LP21GE: For optical GI cable
Module 2
QJ71LP21-25: For optical SI/QSI/H-PCF cable
QJ71LP21G, QJ71LP21GE: For optical GI cable
[Instructions]
Use module 1 in the MELSECNET/10 mode.
Module 2 may also be used in the MELSECNET/H
mode.
4-21
Connecting the existing MELSECNET (II) or [Modules required for relay PLC]
MELSECNET/B network and new Module 1 (existing module)
MELSECNET/10 network MELSECNET (II) or MELSECNET/B module compatible
with A/AnS/QnA/Q2AS
New
Module 2 (newly added module)
A/AnS QnA/Q2AS Q series PLC
(Q mode)
AJ71LP21/A1SJ71LP21/AJ71QLP21(S)/A1SJ71QLP21
Module 1
Module 2
New (S): For optical SI/QSI cable

Existing MELSECNET(II),
MELSECNET AJ71BR11/A1SJ71BR11/AJ71QBR11/A1SJ71QBR11:
MELSECNET/B
/10
Q series PLC For coaxial 75 cable
QnA/Q2AS A/AnS (Q mode) [Instructions]
A/AnS/QnA/Q2AS Module 1 is the existing MELSECNET (II) or
PLC MELSECNET/B module.
Module 2 is an MELSECNET/10 module for
A/AnS/QnA/Q2AS.
Function List
Usable Mode
Function Outline
MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10
Cyclic Refreshes link relays and link registers assigned in network common parameters periodically
communication to all stations in the same network.
Low-speed cyclic Using this system to communicate data that does not require high-speed communication
communication reduces ordinary cyclic communication data volumes and increases speed.
(Note)
Transient Uses network instructions in the sequence program to transfer data to/from stations specified
communication in the instructions. Several different instructions give the choice of data transfer methods.
Data communication function
Group function You can specify multiple stations on the same network as a certain group. By specifying a
group for data transmission in transient communication. Data can be broadcasted to specific
stations only.
Multiplex In duplex loop system, data can be transmitted using each loop of the duplex loop. This
transmission enables faster communication than 10Mbps/25Mbps.
function
32-bit data Prevents data from being transmitted at 16 bit intervals during 32-bit data transmission.
assurance
Network When adding a PLC to an existing network, data transmission from that station is stopped
debugging mode and only data receiving is allowed until the debugging of the program is completed.
Interrupt program Allows a station to interrupt the CPU module of another station to start a sequence program.
start (Note)
Inter-data link When there are multiple networks, some of the data communicated cyclically in one network
transfer (Note) is automatically transferred to another network
Routing function When there are multiple networks, data can be transferred to/from a station on network
where host station is not connected directly. This function is used when monitoring a PLC
located beyond multiple networks from GX Developer.
Reserved station When there are no stations set in network common parameters, it is recognized as an error
specification and affects link scan time. Error recognition and affects on the link scan time are not caused
if stations are specified as reserved stations prior to implementation.
Control station If the control station fails to make communication due to a fault, another station automatically
shift function becomes a control station to continue network control, preventing the whole system from
stopping.
Specified control You can select whether the faulty control station that has returned to normal will return as
normal station or control station.
RAS function
station return
mode selection
Automatic return When a station that had suspended communication due to a fault returns to normal,
function communication is restored automatically.
Loopback function If cable breakage occurs in duplex loop type network, communication is continued as long as
a transmission route is established.
Station separation If a station is powered off in simplex bus type network, it does not affect other normal
function stations.
Network duplex One CPU module can each be loaded with two network modules to provide a duplex
(Note) network.
Network Network status and each station status can be monitored using GX Developer.
diagnostics
Note: Unavailable for the Basic model QCPU.
4-22
Item QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21G QJ71LP21G QJ71BR11
Connection form Duplex loop type Simplex bus type
Max. number of LX/LY 8192 points (8k bits)
link points per LB MELSECNET/H mode:16384 points (16k bits), MELSECNET/10 mode:8192 points (8k bits)
network LW MELSECNET/H mode:16384 points (16k words), MELSECNET/10 mode:8192 points (8k words)
Max. number of link points per ((LY+LB)/8+(2 LW)) 2000 bytes [cyclic communication]
station +((LY+LB)/8+(2 LW) 2000 bytes [low-speed cyclic communication] 4
Transient transmission capacity Max. 1920 bytes/frame
Cable type Optical Optical (GI-50/125) Optical (GI-62.5/125) Coaxial 75
(SI/H-PCF/broad-band (3C-2V/5C-2V)
H-CF/QSI)
Transmission speed 25Mbps /10Mbps (Note 1) 10Mbps 10Mbps 10Mbps
(depending on switch
setting)
Communication system Token passing
Synchronous system Flag synchronization (frame synchronization system)
Transmission code NRZI (Non Return to Zero Inverted) Manchester
Transmission frame format HDLC conformance
16 12 5
Error control system CRC (X +X +X +1) and time-out retry
Max. number of networks 239 (Total including remote I/O network)
Max. number of groups 32
Number of stations connected 64 stations (1: control station, 63: normal station) 32 stations (control station:
1, normal station: 31)
Overall distance 30km (98360.67ft.) 3C-2V: 300m (983.61ft.)
5C-2V: 500m (1639.34ft.)
Station to At 25Mbps SI optical cable: 200m — —
station distance (655.74ft.)
H-PCF optical cable: 400m
(131147.54ft.)
Broad-band H-PCF optical
cable: 1km (3278.69 ft.)
QSI optical cable: 1km
(3278.69 ft.)
At 10Mbps SI optical cable: 500m GI-50/125 optical cable: 2km GI-62.5/125 optical cable: 3C-2V: 300m (983.61ft.)
(1639.34ft.) (6557.38ft.) 2km (6557.38ft.) 5C-2V: 500m (1639.34ft.)
H-PCF optical cable: 1km (Note 2)
(3278.69ft.)
Broad-band H-PCF optical
cable: 1km (3278.69ft.)
QSI optical cable: 1km
(3278.69ft.)
Distance extension repeater — Up to 2.5km (8196.92ft.) by
connection of max. four
repeater modules
Loadable station Q series CPU (Q mode)
Number of I/O points occupied 32 points (I/O assignment: Intelligent
Internal current consumption 0.55A 0.75A
(5VDC)
External dimensions 98 (3.86) (H) 27.4 (1.08) (W) 90.5 (3.57) (D) (mm (inch))
Weight 0.11kg
Note 1: 25Mbps for the MELSECNET/H mode only.
Note 2: There are restrictions on the inter-station cable length depending on the number of connected stations. For more information, refer
to the reference manual.
4-23
Cyclic Communications Time
The following calculation expressions are used to find the normal values of cyclic communications time (transmission delay
time) in the MELSECNET/H mode and MELSECNET/10 mode. (These are average values only therefore the time taken
may become longer than the values given depending on the timing.)
MELSECNET/H Mode MELSECNET/10 Mode
Transmission delay time TD1 TD1=ST+ T +(LS×1)+(SR×2)+ R [ms] TD1=ST+ T +(LS×2)+(SR×2)+ R [ms]
ST : Sending side sequence program scan time
SR : Receiving side sequence program scan time
T : Sending side link refresh time
R : Receiving side link refresh time
LS : Link scan time
Max. link refresh time T , T , R =KM1+KM2×{LB+LX+LY+SB+(LW×16)+(SW×16)}÷16+(number of network modules-1) [ms]

R LB : Total number of link relay LB points refreshed by that station
LW: Total number of link register LW points refreshed by that station
LX : Total number of link input LX points refreshed by that station
LY : Total number of link output LY points refreshed by that station
SB : Number of link special relays
SW: Number of link special registers
KM1, KM2: Constants
Network Module Loaded in Main Base Network Module Loaded in Extension Base
KM1 KM2 (X10-3) KM1 KM2 (X10-3)
Q00JCPU 1.30 0.67 1.30 1.50
Q00CPU 1.10 0.66 1.10 1.44
Q01CPU 0.90 0.61 0.90 1.42
Q02CPU 0.30 0.48 0.30 1.20
Q02HCPU
Q06HCPU
Q12HCPU
0.13 0.41 0.13 0.97
Q25HCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
More time will be taken if the data refresh destination is a file register on the memory card or inter-data link transfer
function is to be performed.
Link scan time LS <Transmission speed: 10Mbps> LS=KB+0.75× total number of stations
LS=KB+0.45× total number of stations +(LB+LY+LW×16)÷8×0.001+(T×0.001)+(F×4) [ms]
+(LB+LY+LW×16)÷8×0.001+(T×0.001)+(F×4) [ms]
<Transmission speed: 25Mbps>
LS=KB+0.40× total number of stations
+(LB+LY+LW×16)÷8×0.0004+(T×0.0004)+(F×4) [ms]
LB : Total number of link relay LB points of all stations on the network
LW : Total number of link register LW points of all stations on the network
LY : Total number of link output LY points of all stations on the network
T : Total number of bytes transient-transmitted during one link scan
When transient transmission is made simultaneously from multiple stations during one link scan,
this
value is the total of data lengths of frames to be transferred.
F : Number of returning stations (valid only when faulty stations exist). The number of returning stations
indicates the number of stations which will return to network when faulty stations return to normal
and
reenter data link.
KB : Constant
Total number
1 to 8 9 to 16 17 to 24 25 to 32 33 to 40 41 to 48 49 to 56 57 to 64
of stations
KB 4.0 4.5 4.9 5.3 5.7 6.2 6.6 7.0
4-24
The following expressions are used to calculate the transmission delay time.
(Conditions)
Send and receive CPU modules : Q06HCPU
Position where network module is mounted : Main base unit
Number of stations : Total number of stations = 8
Number of cyclic data points of all stations on network : LB=2048 points, LW=2048 points, LX, LY=0 points
Sending side sequence program scan time ST : 1ms 4
Receiving side sequence program scan time SR : 1ms
Communication speed : 10Mbps, 25Mbps
(when 25Mbps is selected for MELSECNET/H)
On both sending and receiving sides, cyclic data of all stations on network are to be refreshed.
MELSECNET/10H Mode MELSECNET/10 Mode
Sending side link refresh time T =KM1+KM2×{LB+LX+LY+SB+(LW×16)+ T =KM1+KM2×{LB+LX+LY+SB+(LW×16)+
T (SW×16)}÷16+(number of network modules-1) [ms] (SW×16)}÷16+(number of network modules-1) [ms]
=0.13+0.41×10-3×{2048+0+0+512+ =0.13+0.41×10-3×{2048+0+0+512+
(2048×16)+(512×16)}÷16+(1-1) (2048×16)+(512×16)}÷16+(1-1)
=2.36ms =1.25ms
Receiving side link refresh time T =KM1+KM2×{LB+LX+LY+SB+(LW×16)+ T =KM1+KM2×{LB+LX+LY+SB+(LW×16)+
R (SW×16)}÷16+(number of network modules-1) [ms] (SW×16)}÷16+(number of network modules-1) [ms]
=0.13+0.41×10-3×{12048+0+0+512+ =0.13+0.41×10-3×{2048+0+0+512+
(2048×16)+(512×16)}÷16+(1-1) (2048×16)+(512×16)}÷16+(1-1)
=1.25ms =1.25ms
Link scan time LS 10Mbps LS=KB+0.75×total number of stations+
LS=KB+0.45×total number of stations+ (LB+LY+LW×16)÷8×0.001+(T×0.001)+
(LB+LY+LW×16)÷8×0.001+(T×0.001)+ (F×4) [ms] (F×4) [ms]
=4.0+0.45×8+ ((2048+0+2048×16) =4.0+0.75×8+ ((2048+0+2048×16)
÷8×0.001)+(0×0.001)+ (0×4) ÷8×0.001)+(0×0.001)+ (0×4)
=11.95ms =14.35ms
25Mbps
LS=KB+0.40×total number of stations+
(LB+LY+LW×16)÷8×0.0004+(T×0.001)+ (F×4)
=4.0+0.40×8+ ((2048+0+2048×16)
÷8×0.0004)+(0×0.001)+ (0×4)
=8.94ms
Transmission delay time TD1 10Mbps TD1=ST+ T +(LS×2)+(SR×2)+ R [ms]
TD1=ST+ T +(LS×1)+(SR×2)+ R [ms] =1+2.36+(14.35×2)+(1×2)+2.36
=1+2.36+(11.95×1)+(1×2)+2.36 =36.42ms
=19.67ms
25Mbps
TD1=ST+ T+(LS×1)+(SR×2)+ R
=1+2.36+(8.94×1)+(1×2)+2.36
=16.66ms
4-25
System Equipment <QJ71BR11 accessories>
Optical loop system Product Description

Manual QJ71LP21-25/LP21G/BR11 MELSECNET/H
Network Module User's Manual
LP21-25
QJ71
LP21-25
QJ71
Power Power Connector F type BNC connector
Q02CPU
Supply Supply Q02CPU

<Separately obtained products>
The following equipment (manual) must be obtained
separately.
Product Description
Coaxial cable 3C-2V/5C-2V (JISC3501 compliant)
Connector plug Connector plug for 3C-2V/5C-2V
Optical fiber cable Network module QJ71LP21-25
Terminating resistor A6RCON-R75 (75 termination)
Manual MELSECNET/H Reference Manual
<QJ71LP21-25/QJ71LP21G accessories> (PLC to PLC network)
Product Description
Manual QJ71LP21-25/LP21G/BR11 MELSECNET/H <Software>
Product Type Description Remarks
<QJ71LP21GE accessories>
GX Developer SW4D5C-G For sequence *2
Product Description PPW-E or programming
Manual QJ71LP21GE/QJ72LP25GE MELSECNET/H later For MELSECNET/H
Network Module User's Manual parameter setting
<Separately obtained products> *2 This product must be obtained.
separately. Applicable Optical Cables
Product Description
Optical cable SI/H-PCF/broad-band H-PCF/QSI/GI cable
Optical fiber cable specifications
Manual MELSECNET/H Reference Manual
(PLC to PLC network) For information about purchasing of optical fiber cables,
<Software> consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
Product Type Description Remarks Applicable optical cables
GX Developer SW4D5C-GP For sequence *1 Broad-b
PW-E or later programming GI-62.5/
H-PCF and QSI GI-50/12
For MELSECNET/H SI cable 125
cableH-PCF cable 5 cable
parameter setting cable
cable
Core/clad 200/220 200/250 200/250 185/230 50/125 62.5/125
*1 This product must be obtained. diameter m m m m m m
Transmission
Coaxial bus system loss Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max.
(@wavelength 12dB/km 6dB/km 5dB/km 5.5dB/km 3dB/km 3dB/km
F type connector Network module QJ71BR11 830 to 880nm)
Applicable
F06/F08 or equivalent (JIS C5975/5977-compliant)
connector
Jigs for providing the bend radius of the optical fiber cable
Q02CPU
Q02CPU
Q02CPU
BR11
QJ71
BR11
QJ71
BR11
QJ71
Power Power Power

supply supply supply are available for connecting the optical fiber cables to the
network modules. For details, consult your local Mitsubishi
Electric representative.
Coaxial cable Terminating resistor A6RCON-R75

Terminating resistors are fitted to
stations at both ends.
4-26
4.4 MELSECNET/H Remote I/O NETWORK/
QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21G, QJ71LP21GE, PROCESSING
QJ71BR11, QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, MODULES
QJ72LP25GE, QJ72BR15
Overview Also, data of the intelligent function module mounted on

the remote I/O station can be read/write easily.
The MELSECNET/H remote I/O network is a network The intelligent function module parameters, initial setting
system designed to control remote I/O stations installed
and automatic refresh setting are set with GX
in machines at remote locations. CC-Link is also
Configurator and are written to the remote I/O module.
available in addition to the MELSECNET/H as the remote
I/O networks of the Q series PLC. We recommend you to
select MELSECNET/H when there are many control MELSECNET/H network
points per remote I/O station, or CC-Link when there are 4
few control points.
Note 1: The QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21G, QJ71LP21GE or
QJ71BR11 can be used as a master module for remote
I/O network and as a control/normal module for PLC
connected to PLC network. Intelligent function module
Function version B or later may be used as a master parameters
module for remote I/O network. W100
Note 2: The Q00JCPU, Q00CPU and Q01CPU do not have the Intelligent function module K10
K10
remote I/O network function. buffer memory
Remote I/O station
Remote master station
Features
The data link dedicated instructions (REMFR, REMTO)
High-speed network can also be used to read/write data of the intelligent
The MELSECNET/H is a 10Mbps/25Mbps token passing function module mounted on the remote I/O station.
network. (The transmission speed of 25Mbps is available
only for a system configured using the MELSECNET/H network
QJ71LP21-25/QJ72LP25-25.) Since the transmission is
always assigned cyclically in a token passing network,
data transmission is maintained even if the number of
connections or communications with the network
increases. Hence, this network is suitable for facility
control requiring real-time capabilities. REMTO instruction
The MELSECNET/H is identical in transmission speed to Intelligent function module K10
the MELSECNET/10, but the network module has a K10 buffer memory
Remote I/O station
shorter processing time to reduce the link scan time. Remote master station
User-friendly network Note 3: The inputs X, outputs Y, link relays B and link registers
W are the names of data in the CPU. They are called LX,
The MELSECNET/H has a cyclic communication system
LY, LB and LW in the network module, respectively, and
for data communications. The cyclic communication
the data actually shared on the network are LX, LY, LB
system is designed to transfer periodically or
and LW. However, because the CPU cannot handle
automatically the data pre-specified in the network
LX/LY/LB/LW, LX/LY/LB/LW data are changed to
parameters and does not need programming for data
X/Y/B/W.
transfer.
The remote I/O network system is made up of remote Applicable cables
master and remote I/O stations. I/O modules mounted on
remote I/O stations can be used in the cyclic When configuring the MELSECNET/H network system,
communication system as if they were mounted on the optical fiber and coaxial cables can be used.
base unit mounted with the CPU module. They have the following features.
Optical fiber cables
MELSECNET/H network (1) Optical fiber has high noise immunity.
(2) The SI/H-PCF/broad-band H-PCF/QSI cable can be
used for wiring of 500m/1km/1km/1km
station-to-station distance at 10Mbps transmission
speed or 200m/400m/1km/1km station-to-station
distance at 25Mbps transmission speed.
X1000 Y1070 X0 Y70 The GI cable can be used for wiring of 2km
station-to-station distance at 10Mbps transmission
Remote master station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station speed.
4-27
NETWORK/ 4.4 MELSECNET/H Remote I/O
PROCESSING QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21G, QJ71LP21GE,
MODULES QJ71BR11, QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G,
Coaxial cables
Automatic return function
(1) Cables can be fabricated easily by the user.
When the station previously disconnected as a faulty
(2) Cables are low in price.
station is recovered, it returns to the network automatically
High reliability to resume data communication.
Communication error-time remote I/O station
When a problem occurs, network recovery may take a
output-off function
long time since many PLCs are connected over a wide If a communication error occurs, all outputs on the remote
range and cables are run in ducts and ceilings which are I/O station turn off.
difficult to replace, etc. The MELSECNET/10 and However, a parameter setting can be made to hold the
output states right before the error occurs.
MELSECNET/H have functions capable of dealing with Also, the remote master station retains the data
this problem to improve reliability. immediately before occurrence of the communication
Loopback function (Optical duplex loop system error.
only)
With the optical duplexed loop cables, if a fault occurs, Multiplexed remote I/O network (process CPU
such as cable breakage or PLC failure, it is disconnected only)
By providing the multiplexed remote master station and
from the network in order to continue normal transmission
multiplexed remote sub master station on a single network,
with operable stations.
remote I/O stations are controlled by the multiplexed
Remote Forward Station remote sub master station instead if the multiplexed
master
station loop No. 1 remote master station becomes faulty. Also, by setting the
parameters, the multiplexed remote master station can be
Reverse loop
returned to the system as a multiplexed remote sub
master station without control being stopped.
Station Station
No. 3 No. 2 Network monitoring
In both the MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H network
systems, the network status can be diagnosed easily and
Remote Station quickly from GX Developer. If any error occurs on the
master
station No. 1 network, the cause of the error can be found quickly,
resulting in easier troubleshooting.
Diagnosis method that is used for the remote master
Breakage station is shown below.
Station Station (1) Network diagnosis (host station information):
No. 3 No. 2 Checks the network status of the connected host
station.
Station disconnection function (Coaxial bus (2) Other station information: Checks the network
system only) status of the other specified station.
When a station becomes faulty due to power-off, for (3) Network test: starts/stops link to the host station,
example, that station is disconnected from the network to specified station or all stations.
(4) Setting confirmation test: Checks the station
continue normal transmission with operable stations.
number, network number and group number, set for
Remote Station Station each station.
master station No. 1 No. 2
(5) Station sequence confirmation test: For the optical
loop system, checks the station sequence of
Station No.2 faulty faulty forward/reverse loop on the network.
(6) Loop test: Checks the loop status of the optical
Remote Station Station
master station No. 1 No. 2
loop system.
(7) Communications test: Checks whether
communications can be made between the host
station and specified station.
4-28
MELSECNET/H Dedicated Instructions

For the QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21G, QJ71LP21GE or QJ71BR11 remote master station and QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G,
QJ72LP25GE or QJ72BR15 remote I/O stations, the MELSECNET/H dedicated instructions listed below can be used to
create programs for data transfer other than the cyclic communication.
Instruction Description Target Station
READ Reads data from the target station CPU module or remote I/O module. Remote I/O station
Multiplexed remote master station 4
WRITE Writes data to the target station CPU module or remote I/O module. Multiplexed remote sub master station
REMFR Reads data from the buffer memory of the target station intelligent function module. Remote I/O station
REMTO Writes data to the buffer memory of the target station intelligent function module.
SEND Writes data to the target station network module. Multiplexed remote master station
RECV Reads data written by the SEND instruction from the network module. Multiplexed remote sub master station
RECVS (RECVS is executed in interrupt program.)
SREAD Reads data from the target station CPU module.
SWRITE Writes data to the target station CPU module.
REQ Performs remote operation for the target station CPU module.
ZNRD Reads data from the target station CPU module.
ZNWR Writes data to the target station CPU module.
RRUN Performs remote RUN of the target station CPU module.
RSTOP Performs remote STOP of the target station CPU module.
RTMRD Reads clock data from the target station CPU module.
RTMWR Writes clock data to the target station CPU module.
Appearance
For remote master station For remote I/O station
Optical loop module (QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21G, QJ71LP21GE) Optical loop module (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QJ72LP25GE)
QJ71LP21-25 QJ72LP25-25
RUN MNG RUN REM.
T.PASS. D.LINK T.PASS. D.LINK
SD RD SD RD
ERR. L ERR. ERR. L ERR.
RS-232
STATION NO. 78
45 6
90 1
X10 23
78
456
90 1
X1 23
98 (3.89)
98 (3.86)
IN
IN
BCD
RESET
EF 2
89 A
BCD MODE
01
67
8 9A
EF 2
34 5
MODE
01
67
3 45
OUT
OUT
QJ71LP21-25 QJ72LP25-25
90 (3.54) 1 27.4 (1.08) 90 (3.56) 1 27.4 (1.08)
Coaxial bus module (QJ71BR11) Coaxial bus module (QJ72BR15)

QJ71BR11 QJ72BR15
RUN MNG RUN REM.
T.PASS. D.LINK T.PASS. D.LINK
SD RD SD RD
ERR. L ERR. ERR. L ERR.
RS-232
STATION NO. 78
45 6
90 1
X10 23
78
45 6
90 1
X1 23
BCD
8 9A
EF 2
MODE 78
01
67
456
90 1
3 45
X10
98 (3.86)
98 (3.86)
23
78
456
90 1
X1 23
BCD
8 9A
EF 2
MODE RESET
01
67
3 45
QJ71BR11 QJ72BR15
90 (3.56) 55 (2.17) 27.4 (1.08) 90 (3.56) 55 (2.17) 27.4 (1.08)
1:Please contact your nearest Mitsubishi Electric representative for details.

Unit: mm (inch)
4-29
Comparison between MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Remote I/O Networks
MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/10 Remarks

Host station PLC type Q mode QnA/Q2AS A mode, AnU/A2US
MELSECNET/H remote
Applicable remote I/O station PLC type MELSECNET/10 remote I/O module
I/O module
LX/LY (1 Bit) 0 to 1FFF (8192 points) 0 to 1FFF (8192 points)
Number of cyclic
LB (1 Bit) 0 to 3FFF (16384 points) 0 to 1FFF (8192 points)
points per network
LW (1 word) 0 to 3FFF (16384 points) 0 to 1FFF (8192 points)
Remote master station
Max. 1600 bytes Max. 1600 bytes
to remote I/O station
Remote I/O station to
Max. 1600 bytes Max. 1600 bytes
remote master station
Number of cyclic
Multiplexed remote Total of LY, LB
transmission
master to multiplexed Max. 2000 bytes (Note 2) Max. 2000 bytes and LW
points per station
remote sub master
Multiplexed remote sub
master to multiplexed Max. 2000 bytes (Note 2) Max. 2000 bytes
remote master
AJ72QLP25/AJ72QBR15: X + Y
Max. number of I/O points per remote I/O 2048 points
X+Y 4096 points
station A1SJ72QLP25/A1SJ72QBR15: X + Y
1024 points
Transmission speed 10Mbps/25Mbps 10Mbps 10Mbps
Link scan time Short Normal Normal
Optical SI/H-PCF/
broad-band H-PCF/QSI
Cable Optical 50GI (Note 3)
Optical 62.5GI
Coaxial (3C/5C-2V) (simplex bus) (simplex bus, duplex loop)
Max. number of networks 239 239 255
ZCOM
ZNRD, ZNWR (Note 2)
READ, WRITE
Dedicated instructions
Check the
SREAD, SWRITE (Note 2) details of the
SEND, RECV (Note 2) dedicated
ZNFR, ZNTO instructions in
REMFR, REMTO the relevant
REQ (Note 2) programming
RECVS (Note 2) manual.
RRUN, RSTOP (Note 2)
RTMRD, RTMWR (Note 2)
Routing function (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)
Multi-master function Yes (Note 2) Yes No
Parallel master function No Yes No
Note 1: Accessible to the PLC on the network located beyond seven relay (gateway) PLCs which connect two MELSECNET/H,
MELSECNET/10 or Ethernet networks. Note that the A mode does not support relay function to Ethernet.
Note 2: Dedicated for the process CPU (QnPHCPU) only. Supported by the product with first five digits of serial No. "04012" or later, when
the master module is used as the multiplexed remote master station or multiplexed remote sub master station.
Note 3: There are cables that are not compatible with some CPU types. Check details in the corresponding catalog.
4-30
Connection with an Existing Network Connecting the remote I/O module of the
System MELSECNET/H to the remote I/O station of
The Q series PLC (Q mode) cannot be added too, or
the existing MELSECNET/10 (remote I/O
replace the existing MELSECNET network. network)
The remote I/O module of the MELSECNET/H cannot be
Changing the master station of the existing
connected to the existing MELSECNET/10 (remote I/O
MELSECNET/10 (remote I/O network) for network). 4
the Q series PLC (Q mode) The remote I/O module of the MELSECNET/H is
The master station of the existing MELSECNET/10 incompatible with the MELSECNET/10 remote I/O
(remote I/O network) cannot be replaced by Q series PLC network.
(Q mode). The Q series PLC (Q mode) is not compatible
with the MELSECNET/10 remote I/O network. Master
Q series PLC
(Q mode)
Master remote I/O network
Remote Remote Remote

remote I/O network
MELSECNET/H
Remote Remote Remote
Remote I/O network
[Existing MELSECNET/10 modules]

Master station AJ71LP21/A1SJ71LP21/AJ71LP21G/A1SJ71LP21GE/AJ71BR11/A1SJ71BR11 : A/AnS series
AJ71QLP21(S)/A1SJ71QLP21(S)/A1SJ71QLP21GE/AJ71QBR11/A1SJ71QBR11 : QnA/Q2AS series
Remote I/O station AJ72LP25/AJ72LP25G/AJ72BR15 : A/AnS series
AJ72QLP25/A1SJ72QLP25/AJ72QLP25G/AJ72QBR15/A1SJ72QBR15 : QnA/Q2AS series
Function List
Function Outline Usability
Data Cyclic communication Refreshes inputs, outputs, link relays and link registers assigned in common network
communication parameters periodically in the network.
function Transient communication Uses network instructions in sequence program to transfer data to/from stations specified in
the instructions. Several different instructions are available for choice of data transfer methods.
Multiplex transmission function In duplex loop system, data can be transmitted using each loop of duplex loop. This enables
faster communication than 10Mbps/25Mbps.
Network debugging mode When adding PLC to existing network, data transmission from that station is shut off and only
data receiving is performed until its program debugging is completed.
Interrupt program start Allows a remote I/O station to interrupt the CPU module of a remote master station to start a
sequence program.
Routing function When there are multiple networks, data can be transferred to/from station on network where
host station is not connected directly. This function is used when monitoring PLC located
beyond multiple networks from GX Developer.
RAS function Communication error-time If communication error occurs, remote I/O station turns off all outputs.
remote I/O station all output-off However, parameter setting can be made to hold the output states right before the error
occurs. Remote master station retains data immediately before the occurrence of
communication error.
Reserved station specification When there are no stations set in common network parameters, it is recognized as an error
and affects link scan time. Error recognition and affects on the link scan time are not caused if
stations are specified as reserved stations prior to implementation.
Automatic return function When a station that had suspended communication due to a fault returns to normal,
communication is restored automatically.
Loopback function If cable breakage occurs in duplex loop type network, communication is continued as long as
transmission route is established.
Station separation function In simplex bus type network, power-off of a station does not affect other normal stations.
Network diagnostics Network status and each station status can be monitored using GX Developer.
: Usable, : Unusable
4-31
Optical loop system
Item QJ71LP21-25 QJ72LP25-25 QJ71LP21G QJ71LP21GE QJ72LP25G QJ72LP25GE
Connection form Duplex loop type
link points per LB MELSECNET/H mode: 16384 points (16k bits)
network LW MELSECNET/H mode: 16384 points (16k words)
Max. number of link points Remote master station to remote I/O station ((LY+LB)/8 + (2 LW)) 1600 bytes (Note 1)
per station Remote I/O station to remote master station ((LY+LB)/8 + (2 LW)) 1600 bytes
Between multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station
((LX+LB)/8+(2 LW)) 2000 bytes
Maximum number of I/O X+Y 4096 points
points per remote I/O station When the X/Y numbers overlap, only one side is the target of the number of points.
Transient transmission Max. 1920 bytes/frame
capacity
Cable type Optical (SI/H-PCF/broad-band Optical (50GI) Optical (62.5GI) Optical (50GI) Optical (62.5GI)
H-PCF/QSI)
Transmission speed 25Mbps/10Mbps (Selected using 10Mbps
MODE switch)
Communication system Token passing system
Coding method NRZI (Non Return to Zero Inverted)
Transmission frame format HDLC-compliant (frame format)
Error control system CRC (X16+X12+X5+1) and time-out retry
Max. number of networks 239 (Total including inter-PLC network)
Number of stations 65 stations (1: remote master station, 64: remote I/O station) (Note 2)
Overall distance 30km (98360.66ft.)
Inter-station Communication SI optical cable: 200m (655.74ft.) —
distance speed: 25Mbps H-PCF optical cable: 400m
(1311.48ft.)
Broad-band H-PCF optical cable:
1km (3278.69ft.)
QSI optical cable: 1km (3278.69ft.)
Communication SI optical cable: 500m (1639.34ft.) GI-50/125 GI-62.5/125 GI-50/125 GI-62.5/125
speed: 10Mbps H-PCF optical cable: 1km optical cable: optical cable: optical cable: optical cable:
(3278.69ft.) 2km 2km 2km 2km
Broad-band H-PCF optical cable: (6557.38ft.) (6557.38ft.) (6557.38ft.) (6557.38ft.)
1km (3278.69ft.)
QSI optical cable: 1km (3278.69ft.)
Loadable station Q series CPU — Q series CPU —
(Q mode) (Q mode)
Number of occupied I/O 32 points (I/O — 32 points (I/O assignment: —
points assignment: Intelligent)
Intelligent)
5VDC internal current 0.55A 0.89A 0.55A 0.89A
consumption
External dimensions 98 (3.86) (H) 27.4 (1.08) (W) 90 (3.54) (D) (mm (inch))
Weight 0.11kg 0.15kg 0.11kg 0.15kg
Note 1: The remote master stations include the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station.
Note 2: On the multiplexed remote I/O network, one of the 64 remote I/O stations is used as a multiplexed remote sub master station.
4-32
Coaxial bus system

Item QJ71BR11 QJ72BR15
Connection form Simplex bus type
link points per LB MELSECNET/H mode: 16384 points (16k bits)
network LW MELSECNET/H mode: 16384 points (16k words) 4
Max. number of link points Remote master station to remote I/O station ((LY+LB)/8 + (2 LW)) 1600 bytes (Note 1)
per station Remote I/O station to remote master station ((LX+LB)/8 + (2 LW)) 1600 bytes
Between multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station
((LX+LB)/8+(2 LW)) 2000 bytes
Maximum number of I/O X+Y 4096 points
points per remote I/O station When the X/Y numbers overlap, only one side is the target of the number of points.
Transient transmission Max. 1920 bytes/frame
capacity
Cable type Coaxial 75 (3C-2V/5C-2V)
Transmission speed 10Mbps
Communication system Token passing system
Coding method Manchester
Transmission frame format HDLC-compliant (frame format)
Error control system CRC (X16+X12+X5+1) and time-out retry
Max. number of networks 239 (Total including inter-PLC network)
Number of stations 33 stations (1: remote master station, 32: remote I/O station) (Note 2)
Overall 3C-2V 300m (983.61ft.) (Inter-station 300m300m)(Note 3)
distance 5C-2V 500m (1639.34ft.) (Inter-station 300m500m)(Note 3)
Can be increased to up to 2.5km by connection of a maximum of four repeater modules (A6BR10,
A6BR10-DC).
Loadable station Q series CPU(Q mode) —
Number of occupied I/O 32 points (I/O assignment: Intelligent) —
points
5VDC internal current 0.75A 1.10A
consumption
External dimensions 98 (3.86) (H) 27.4 (1.08) (W) 90 (3.54)(D) (mm (inch))
Note 1: The remote master stations include the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub master station.
Note 2: On the multiplexed remote I/O network, one of the 32 remote I/O stations is used as a multiplexed remote sub master station.
Note 3: There are restrictions on the inter-station cable length depending on the number of connected stations. For more information, refer
to the reference manual.
4-33
Cyclic Communications Time
The following calculation expressions are used to find the normal values of cyclic communications time (transmission delay
time) in the MELSECNET/H mode. (These are average values only therefore the time taken may become longer than the
values given depending on the timing.)
Remote I/O Network

Transmission delay time [Remote master station sequence scan time (Sm) > link scan time (LS)]
of input X TDX TDX = (Sm + αm) 2 + Sm + TRIOR [ms]
[Remote master station sequence scan time (Sm) < link scan time (LS)]
TDX = (Sm + αm) round up [LS / (Sm + αm)] 2 + Sm + TRIOR [ms]
Sm : Scan time of sequence program of remote master station
αm : Link refresh time of remote master station
LS : Link scan time
TRIOR : I/O refresh time
round up : Operation [LS/(Sm+αm)] result is rounded up to decimal point.
Transmission delay time [Remote master station sequence scan time (Sm) > link scan time (LS)]
of output Y TDY TDY = (Sm + αm) + LS + TRIOR [ms]
TDY = (Sm + αm) round up [LS / (Sm + αm)] + LS + TRIOR [ms]
LS : Link scan time
TRIOR : I/O refresh time
Input transmission delay [Remote master station sequence scan time (Sm) > link scan time (LS)]
time of W TDB1 TDB1 = (Sm + αm) 2 + Sm + TRBF [ms]
TDB1 = (Sm + αm) round up [LS / (Sm + αm)] 2 + Sm + TRBF [ms]
LS : Link scan time
TRBF : Refresh time to/from buffer memory of intelligent function module
Output transmission [Remote master station sequence scan time (Sm) > link scan time (LS)]
delay time of W TDB2 TDB2 = (Sm + αm) + LS + TRBF [ms]
TDB2 = (Sm + αm) round up [LS / (Sm + αm)] + Sm + TRBF [ms]
LS : Link scan time
TRBF : Refresh time to/from buffer memory of intelligent function module
Transmission delay time TD1 = ST + αT + (LS 1) + (SR 2) + αR[ms]
between multiplexed ST : Send side scan time
remote master station and SR : Receive side scan time
multiplexed remote sub αt : Send side link refresh time
master station TD1 αR : Receive side link refresh time
LS : Link scan time
4-34
Remote I/O Network

Link refresh time of remote αm = KM1 + KM2 {LB + LX + LY + SB + (LW 16) + (SW 16)} /16 + αE + (number of network modules – 1) [ms]
master station αm αE = KM3 {LB + LX + LY + (LW 16)}/16 [ms]
LB : Total number of link relay (LB) points refreshed by that station 1
LW : Total number of link register (LW) points refreshed by that station 1
LX : Total number of link input (LX) points refreshed by that station 1
LY : Total number of link output (LY) points refreshed by that station 1
SB : Number of link special relays (SB)
SW : Number of link special registers (SW) 4
αE : On-memory card file register (R, ZR) data transfer time 2
KM1, KM2, KM3: Constants
Network Module Loaded on Main Base Network Module Loaded on Extension Base
-3 -3 -3 -3
KM1 KM2 ( 10 ) KM3 ( 10 ) KM1 KM2 ( 10 ) KM3 ( 10 )
Q02CPU 0.30 0.48 0.60 0.30 1.20 1.32
Q02HCPU
Q06HCPU
Q12HCPU
0.13 0.41 0.53 0.13 0.97 1.09
Q25HCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
Longer time will be taken if the data refresh destination is the file register on the memory card or inter-data link
transfer function is to be performed.
Link refresh time of remote I/O The link refresh time of the remote I/O station does not influence transmission delay time.
station
Link scan time LS <At 10Mbps transmission speed>
LS = KB + (0.45 total number of remote I/O stations) + {LX + LY + LB + (LW 16)}/8 0.001 + KR
+ {LYM R+ LBM R+ (LW M R 16)}/16 0.0003 + { LXM R+ LBM R+ (LW M R 16)}/16 0.0003 + (T 0.001) [ms]
<At 25Mbps transmission speed>
LS = KB + (0.45 total number of remote I/O stations) + {LX + LY + LB + (LW 16)}/8 0.004 + KR
+ {LYM R+ LBM R+ (LW M R 16)}/16 0.0003 + { LYM R + LBM R + (LW M R 16)}/16 0.0003 + (T 0.004)
[ms]
LX : Total number of link input (LX) points used at all stations 1
LY : Total number of link output (LY) points used at all stations 1
LB : Total number of link relay (LB) points used at all stations 1
LW : Total number of link register (LW) points used at all stations 1
LYM R : Total number of link output (LY) points used at station in M R direction 1
LBM R : Total number of link relay (LB) points used at station in M R direction 1
LW M R : Total number of link register (LW) points used at station in M R direction 1
LXM R : Total number of link input (LX) points used at station in M R direction 1
LBM R : Total number of link relay (LB) points used at station in M R direction 1
LW M R : Total number of link register (LW) points used at station in M R direction 1
KB, KR: Constants
Total number of 1~8 9~16 17~24 25~32 33~40 41~48 49~56 57~64
remote I/O
stations
KB 4.0 4.5 4.9 5.3 5.7 6.2 6.6 7.0
KR 3.9 3.1 2.6 2.3 1.7 1.1 0.6 0.0
T: Max. number of bytes sent by transient transmission during one link scan 2
1: From the first to the last points of the device allocated in the common parameters. (Any free space is
included in the number of points.)
2: If there are simultaneous transient transmissions from multiple stations during one link scan, it totals the
data length of the sending and receiving frames. 0 when not used.
Refresh time to/from I/O TRIOR = XK/16 0.0016 + XZ/16 0.0024 + YK/16 0.0014 + Yz/16 0.0022
modules TRIOR XK: Number of input module points mounted on main base unit (multiple of 16)
XZ: Number of input module points mounted on extension base unit (multiple of 16)
YK: Number of output module points mounted on main base unit (multiple of 16)
YZ: Number of output module points mounted on extension base unit (multiple of 16)
Refresh time to/from intelligent TRBF = (0.45 NBF) + 47.55 [ms]
function module TRBF NBF : Number of buffer memory access words
4-35
An example to calculate the transmission delay time is given below.

(Conditions)
Remote master station CPU module : Q06HCPU
Position where master station is mounted : Main base unit
Number of stations : Total number of remote stations = 8
Number of cyclic data points of all stations on network : LX=LY=1024 points, LB=LW=0 points, SB=SW=512
points
Scan time of CPU module of remote master station ST : 1ms
Communication speed : 10Mbps
File registers are not used.
Transient transmission is not used.
All remote I/O stations use only the I/O modules and the main base unit.
Link devices per remote I/O station are LX=LY=128 points.
Remote I/O Network
Link refresh time αm αm = KM1 + KM2 {LB + LX + LY + SB + (LW 16) + (SW 16)}/16 + αE + (number of network
modules – 1) [ms]
= 0.13 + 0.41 10-3 {0 + 1024 + 1024 + 512 + (0 16) + (512 16)}/16+0 + (1 – 1)
= 0.41ms
Link scan time LS LS = KB + (0.45 total number of remote I/O stations) + {LX + LY + LB + (LW 16)}/8 + 0.001 + KR
+ {LYM R + (LBM R + LWM R 16)}/16 0.0003 + { LXM R + LBM R + (LWM
R 16)}/16 0.0003
+ (T 0.001) [ms]
= 4.0 + (0.45 8) + {1024 + 1024 + 0 + (0 16)}/8 + 0.001 + 3.9
+ {1024 + 0 + (0 16)}/16 0.0003 + {1024 + 0 + (0 16)}/16 0.0003 + (0 0.001)
= 11.8 ms
I/O refresh time TRIOR TRIOR = XK/16 0.0016 + XZ/16 0.0024 + YK/16 0.0014 + YZ/16 0.0022 [ms]
= 128/16 0.0016 + 0 + 128/16 0.0014 + 0 = 0.024ms
Transmission delay time Since Sm=1[ms] and LS=11.8[ms], the calculation expression for Sm<LS is used.
TDX, TDY 1) Transmission delay time of input (TDX)
TDX = (Sm + αm) round up [LS/(Sm + αm)] 2 + Sm + TRIOR [ms]
= (1 + 0.68) [11.8/(1 + 0.68)] 2 + 1 + 0.024
= 24.5ms
2) Transmission delay time of output (TDY)
TDY = (Sm + αm) round up [LS/(Sm + αm)] + LS + TRIOR [ms]
= (1 + 0.68) [11.8/(1 + 0.68)] + 11.8 + 0.024
= 20.5ms
System Equipment <QJ72LP25-25/QJ72LP25G accessories>

Optical loop system Product Description
LP21- 25
QJ71
LP25- 25
QJ72
Q02CPU
Power Power
supply supply <QJ71LP21GE/QJ72LP25GE accessories>
Product Description
Manual QJ71LP21GE/QJ72LP25GE MELSECNET/H

Optical fiber cable separately.
Network module
Product Description
<QJ71LP21-25/QJ71LP21G accessories> Optical cable SI/H-PCF/Broad-band H-PCF/QSI/GI cable
Manual MELSECNET/H Reference Manual (Remote I/O
Product Description
Network)
4-36
<Software> Units and modules that cannot be used as

Product Type Description Remarks remote I/O stations
GX Developer SW6D5C- For sequence programming (note 1)
GPPW-E of MELSECNET/H parameter Product Type
or later setting Extension base unit QA1S6 B, QA6 B
Note 1: Must be obtained (SW7D5C-GPPW Ver. 7.10L or later is Interrupt module QI60
required to use the multiplex remote I/O network.) Network module QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25,
QJ71LP21G, QJ71LP21GE,
4
Coaxial bus system QJ71BR11
Ethernet module QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2
F type connector Network module (Function version A)
AS-i master module QJ71AS92
Modules having restrictions for use as

Power Power Power
Q02CPU
BR11
QJ71
BR15
QJ72
BR15
QJ72
supply supply supply remote I/O stations

Product Type
Main base unit Q3 B
(Maximum number of connectable units: 1)
Extension base unit Q6 B, Q5 B
(Maximum number of connectable units: 7)
Ethernet module QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71-100
(Function version B module)
Coaxial cable Terminating resistor A6RCON-R75 CC-Link mater/local QJ61BT11
module
Terminating resistors are fitted to
Serial communication QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2
stations at both ends.
module
<QJ71BR11 accessories> Intelligent QD51, QD51-R24
Product Description communication module
Manual QJ71LP21-25/LP21G/BR11 MELSECNET/H High-speed counter QD62, QD62D, QD62E
Network Module User's Manual module
Connector F type BNC connector Note: Refer to the user's manuals of the corresponding
units/modules for details of the restrictions for use at
<QJ72BR15 accessories>
remote I/O stations.
Product Description
Applicable Optical Cables
Connector F type BNC connector
Optical fiber cable specifications
The following equipment (manual) must be obtained Please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative
separately.
Applicable optical cables
Product Description Broad-b
Coaxial cable 3C-2V/5C-2V (JISC3501-compliant) H-PCF and QSI 50GI 62.5GI
SI cable
Connector plug Connector plug for 3C-2V/5C-2V cableH-PCF cable cable cable
cable
Terminating resistor A6RCON-R75 (75 terminating resistor)
Core/clad 200/220 200/250 200/250 185/230 50/125 62.5/125
Manual MELSECNET/H Reference Manual (Remote I/O
diameter m m m m m m
Network)
Transmission
loss Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max.
<Software> (@wavelength 12dB/km 6dB/km 5dB/km 5.5dB/km 3dB/km 3dB/km
830 to 880nm)
Applicable
GX Developer SW6D5C- For sequence programming (note2) F06/F08 or equivalent (JIS C5975/5977-compliant)
connector
GPPW-E of MELSECNET/H parameter
or later setting Jigs for providing the bend radius of the optical fiber cable
Note 2: Must be obtained (SW7D5C-GPPW Ver. 7.10L or later is are available to connect the optical fiber cables to the
required to use the multiplex remote I/O network.) network modules. For details, contact your local
Mitsubishi Electric representative.
4-37
NETWORK/
INFORMATION 4.5 MELSECNET/H Repeater
PROCESSING Module for Coaxial Bus:
MODULES A6BR10, A6BR10-DC
Repeater Module for Coaxial Bus (2) Up to four modules can be used in one network. The
overall distance can be increased to 2.5km
The A6BR10 and A6BR10-DC coaxial bus repeater
CPU
BR
CPU
BR
CPU
BR
CPU
BR
modules are designed to increase the overall distance in
the coaxial bus system of the MELSECNET/10 or
MELSECNET/H network system. R R R R
A6BR10
A6BR10
CPU
BR
CPU
BR
Appearance 1) 4)
Four \5 mounting
(M4 mounting holes)
R R R R
A6BR10
A6BR10
MELSEC A6BR10 MITSUBISHI
PW ERR SD RD
A
TEST
B
2) 3)
BUS-A BUS-B
100 (3.94)
91 (3.58)
R R
CPU
BR
161 (6.34)
4 (0.16)
170 (6.69) 8 (0.31) 80 (3.15)
Max. 2.5km (8196.72ft.)
4.5 (0.18) 4.5 (0.18)
Functions (3) When the A6BR10 develops a fault, the network is

broken at the A6BR10, and communication continues
(1) One module can increase the distance by 500m
in respective networks.
(1639.34ft.) (5C-2V) or 300m (983.61ft.) (3C-2V).
In the following example, data link is made between 1)
500m (1639.34ft.) (5C-2V)
Max.
300m (983.61ft.) (3C-2V) and 2) and between 3) and 4) when the A6BR10
develops a fault.
CPU
BR
CPU
BR
CPU
BR
Control
station
1) 2)
CPU
BR
CPU
BR
R R
A6BR10
CPU
BR
CPU
BR
R R
A6BR10
CPU
BR
CPU
BR
3) 4)
BR
QJ71BR11 R R
R Terminating resistor
R R
500m (1639.34ft.) (5C-2V)
Max. Control
300m (983.61ft.) (3C-2V)
station
CPU
BR
CPU
BR
1) 2)
Sub-control
R R station
A6BR10
CPU
BR
CPU
BR
3) 4)
R R
4-38
NETWORK/
4.5 MELSECNET/H Repeater INFORMATION
Module for Coaxial Bus: PROCESSING
A6BR10, A6BR10-DC MODULES
Performance Specifications Equipment

Item A6BR10 A6BR10-DC
<A6BR10, A6BR10-DC accessories>
Transmission speed 10Mbps
Number of units Max. 4 modules Product Description
connectable per
network Manual A6BR10, A6BR10-DC User's Manual
Extension 300m (983.61ft.) (3C-2V) Connector T type BNC connector (2 pcs.)
distance/unit 500m (1639.34ft.) (5C-2V)
Overall distance 300m (983.61ft.)×5=1.5km (4918.03ft.)
4
(3C-2V)
500m (1639.34ft.)×5=2.5km (8196.72ft.)
(5C-2V) The following equipment (manual) must be obtained
Number of stations Max. 32 stations separately.
connectable
Voltage 100 to 240VAC 24VDC Product Description Remarks
(+10%/-15%) (+30%/-35%)
Coaxial cable 3C-2V/5C-2V (JISC3501 (Note 1)
Frequency 50/60Hz±5% —
Max. apparent 21VA — conformance)
Input power supply
power Connector plug Connector plug for

Max. power — 9W 3C-2V/5C-2V
Inrush current 40A, within 8ms 17A, within 1ms Terminating resistor A6RCON-R75 (75
Efficiency 65% or more 65% or more
terminating resistor)
Permissible 20ms 10ms
instantaneous power
failure time Note 1: Must be obtained.
Current 0.2A 0.6A
consumption
Abnormal continuous ERR1: On when A6BR10 becomes faulty
transmission alarm (power off, error occurrence).
output ERR2: On when A6BR10 is normal.
Isolation method Non-isolated
Rated switching 24VDC 2A (resistive load)
voltage 240VAC 2A (COS =1)
/current
Minimum 5VDC 1mA
switching load
Maximum 264VAC 125VDC
switching load
Response time OFF to ON: 10ms or less
ON to OFF: 12ms or less
Life Mechanical 10 million times or more
Electrical Rated switching voltage/current load 100
thousand times or more
200VAC 1.5A, 200VAC 1A (COS =0.7) 100
200VAC 1A, 200VAC 0.5A (COS =0.35) 100
24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 100
Surge suppressor No
External wiring ERR1 External load
RA COM
DC5V
Internal circuit External load

Weight (kg) 0.5
4-39
NETWORK/
INFORMATION 4.6 FL-net (OPCN-2) Interface
PROCESSING Module: QJ71FL71-F01,
MODULES QJ71FL71-B2-F01
Overview Features of QJ71FL71-F01 and

The FL-net (OPCN-2) is an open Factory Automation QJ71FL71-B2-F01
network standardized by the Factory Automation Opening (1) In the data guarantee area (2 word), the two-word
Advance Council (JOP), which can control/ monitor a large (32-bit) data is guaranteed.
number of different manufacturers' PLCs, numerical (2) Modules are available for different communication
control units and other various FA controllers and personal cable used.
computers that are interconnected. QJ71FL71-F01 : 10BASE5, 10BASE-T
Features QJ71FL71-B2-F01 : 10BASE2
(3) An automatic reply is made in response to the PING
System configuration command issued to the QJ71FL71 by the equipment
FL-net (OPCN-2) Ver.2.00
on the other end of communication.
Note: The QJ71FL71(-B2)-F01 is not compatible with the FL-net
PC protocol of the conventional QJ71FL71(-B2). However,
sequence programs can be diverted.
Contact us separately when using it in the conventional
FL-net (OPCN-2) Ver. 1.00 system.
Panel Numerical
Robot
computer control unit
controller Appearance
QJ71FL71
The FL-net (OPCN-2) Ver.2.00 interface module (hereafter QJ71FL71-F01
RUN PER
abbreviated as QJ71FL71) can communicate with FL-net

LINK
TX RX
10BASE-T
(OPCN-2) Ver.2.00-compatible personal computers and

other equipment. The FL-net (OPCN-2) Ver.2.00 uses the
98 (3.86)
same communication cable as Ethernet. However, the line
used should be dedicated to the FL-net (OPCN-2)
Ver.2.00. If Ethernet and FL-net (OPCN-2) Ver.2.00 are 10BASE5
used on the same line, both networks will result in a ( 1)

communication error. R1
Note: FL-net (OPCN-2) Ver. 2.00 is incompatible with
conventional FL-net (OPCN-2) Ver. 1.00. (For connecction EXT.POWER
Since mixed connection is disabled on the same network of of 10BASE5)

90.5 (3.56) 27.4
devices having different versions, configure the system
(1.08)
using only devices compatible with Ver. 2.00.
Features of whole FL-net (OPCN-2) Ver.2.00

(1) Realization of multi-vendor
Factory Automation controllers and personal ( 1)
R1
computers of many different manufacturers can be
(For connecction
interconnected.
of 10BASE-T)
(2) Conformity with standard QJ71FL71-B2-F01
RUN PER
You can use Ethernet network equipment which LINK

TX RX
spread with the progress of Office Automation. 29.2 (1.15)

(3) Large-scale network
Up to 254 devices (nodes) can be connected. 23.65
98 (3.86)
(4) Two communication functions for different applications (0.93)

Both the common memory function based on cyclic
transmission and the message communication function
based on message transmission are supported.
(5) Large-capacity common memory
Large capacity of common memory, 8k bits + 8k QJ71FL71-B2-F01
words. 90.5 (3.56) 27.4

(6) Fast response
(1.08)
Fast response of 61.4ms/32 nodes (for 2k bits + 2k
words) is achievable. 1 The bending radius (R1: guideline) near the connector for
(7) High reliability ensured by master-less system connection of the cable should be (cable outline 4) or more.
Absence of the master allows each node to Unit: mm (inch)
participate/leave freely without affecting the
communications of the other nodes.
4-40
NETWORK/
4.6 FL-net (OPCN-2) Interface INFORMATION
Module: QJ71FL71-F01, PROCESSING
QJ71FL71-B2-F01 MODULES
Function List
Item Function Outline

Cyclic transmission (1) Communication of large-volume data in common memory system
(2) Guarantee of refresh time
Message transmission (1) Transparent type message transmission
(2) Word block-based data read/write
(3) Reply of returned data 4
(4) Parameter read
(5) Log information read/clear
(6) Device profile read
Self-diagnostic function (1) Hardware test mode
(2) Self-loopback test
PING command reply (1) Compatibility with PING command
function
Specifications
Item
QJ71FL71-F01 QJ71FL71-B2-F01
Communication medium 10BASE5 10BASE-T 10BASE2
Data transmission speed 10Mbps
Transmission method Base band
Transmission specifications
Electrical interface IEEE802.3 conformity (CSMA/CD conformity)

Transmission protocol UDP/IP FA link protocol
Inter-node max. distance 2500 (8196.72) [m (ft.)] — 925 (3032.79) [m (ft.)]
Max. segment length 500 (1639.34) [m (ft.)] 100 (327.87) [m (ft.)] 185 (606.56) [m (ft.)]
Max. number of system nodes 254 nodes
Max. number of nodes 100 nodes/segment 254 nodes/all hubs 30 nodes/segment
(12 nodes Note 1)
Minimum node intervals 2.5 (8.2) [m (ft.)] 0.5 (1.64) [m (ft.)]
Cyclic data volume Max. (8k bits + 8k words)/system, max. (8k bits + 8k words)/node
Message data volume Max. 1024 bytes
Common memory area Area 1 (bit area): 8k bits, area 2 (word area): 8k words
Link data specifications
Virtual address space and physical memory —

Error log memory area 512 words
Status memory area Bit area: 2k bits, word area: 2k words
Host node parameter setting area 96 words
Other node parameter setting area 2048 words
Parameter getting area 512 words
Device profile memory area 512 words
Message area (transient area) Max. 1024 bytes 2 (one each for send and receive)
Message transmission 500ms or less (1:1 unidirectional message arrival time)
Transmission
performance
Token starting time New participation: Startup time = 3000 + (remainder of minimum node number/8) 4 +
1200 [ms]
Midway participation: Participation time = refresh cycle 3 + host node number 4 [ms]
Refresh time (Note 2)
Transmission delay time (Note 3)
Loadable station Q series CPU(Q mode)
Number of occupied I/O points 32 points (I/O assignment: Intelligent)
5VDC current consumption 0.5A 0.7A
External dimensions 98 (3.86) (H) 27.4 (1.08) (W) 90.5 (3.57) (D) [mm (inch)]
Weight 0.50 (1.1) [kg (lb)]
Note 1: The center (main) hub accepts up to 12 nodes. Note 2: Transfer time between cyclic data area and device area
The max. number of stages connected is 4. is indicated below.
4-41
NETWORK/
INFORMATION 4.6 FL-net (OPCN-2) Interface
PROCESSING Module:QJ71FL71-F01,
MODULES QJ71FL71-B2-F01
Cyclic transmission delay time

(1) Refresh cycle time
The refresh cycle time from when the host node sends a token until the token is held is as indicated below.
(a) Refresh cycle time (RC)
RC [ms] = Total number of nodes 1.7 + total number of cyclic data words (Note 3) 0.0032
+ (total number of frames (Note 4) – the number of nodes) the minimum frame interval time setting value
(Note 5)/10 + (number of separating nodes token monitoring time (Note 6)) .... Add to separation time
+ (1.35 + number of message data words 0.0016) .... Add to message transmission time
(Note 3) Total number of data words … Total of area 1 (bit area) and area 2 (word area) that have been allocated to each node.
(Note 4) Total number of frames … The total number of frames that have been divided when the size for each node has
exceeded 1024 bytes.
(Note 5) Minimum frame interval time setting value … Maximum setting value for all nodes.
(Note 6) Token monitoring time … The token monitoring time that has been set for each node.
(b) Token hold time
Token hold time [ms] = 1.7 + (number of local node transmission cyclic data word 0.0032)
+ {(number of frames - 1) minimum frame interval time setting value/10}
(2) Refresh time

Transfer time between cyclic data area and device area is indicated below.
(a) Automatic refresh
Refresh time [ms] = KM1 + (KM2 total number of transmitted words)
+ (KM3 set quantity in automatic refresh setting)
1) When mounted onto main base 2) When mounted onto extension base
CPU Type KM1 KM2 KM3 CPU Type KM1 KM2 KM3
Q00JCPU 0.097 0.00099 0.065 Q00JCPU 0.180 0.00175 0.049
Q00CPU 0.082 0.00091 0.063 Q00CPU 0.135 0.00168 0.053
Q01CPU 0.070 0.00086 0.044 Q01CPU 0.103 0.00164 0.042
Q02CPU 0.046 0.00054 0.0105 Q02CPU 0.056 0.00114 0.0095
Q02HCPU,Q06HCPU 0.013 0.00046 0.006 Q02HCPU,Q06HCPU 0.024 0.00106 0.005
Q12HCPU,Q25HCPU Q12HCPU,Q25HCPU
Q12PHCPU,Q25PHCPU Q12PHCPU,Q25PHCPU
For the method to count the number of settings in automatic refresh setting, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.5.
(b) BMOV (FROM/TO)

Number of Transferred Words
CPU Type
1 point 1000 points
Q00JCPU 0.120[ms] 0.734[ms]
Q00CPU 0.101[ms] 0.677[ms]
Q01CPU 0.0917[ms] 0.642[ms]
Q02CPU 0.048[ms] 0.489[ms]
Q02HCPU,Q06HCPU
Q12HCPU,Q25HCPU 0.025[ms] 0.448[ms]
Q12PHCPU,Q25PHCPU
(3) Transmission delay time

The delay time until cyclic data is transmitted from some node is indicated below.
(a) Minimum transmission delay time [ms] = [SM1] (Note 7) + token holding time + [SM2] (Note 8)
(b) Maximum transmission delay time [ms] = [SM1] (Note 7) + (refresh cycle time (RC) 4) + [SM2] (Note 8)
Note 7: SM1: Send side sequence scan (including refresh time)
Note 8: SM2: Receive side sequence scan (including refresh time)
4-42
NETWORK/
4.6 FL-net (OPCN-2) Interface INFORMATION
Module: QJ71FL71-F01, PROCESSING
QJ71FL71-B2-F01 MODULES
System Equipment <Separately obtained products>

The following table shows the separately obtained
10BASE-5:QJ71FL71-F01
products necessary for hub connection.
Terminator Ethernet coaxial cable Transceiver
Product Description
Non-shielded Ethernet standard-compliant
Other end of
twisted pair cable Category 3 (4, 5)
communications
AUI cable Jack Ethernet standard-compliant RJ45
(Transceiver cable) Hub Ethernet standard-compliant for 10BASE-T
(for 10Mbps) 4
Manual FL-net (OPCN-2) interface module User's Manual
QJ71FL71
<Software>
DC power GX Developer SW4D5C-GPP For sequence
supply W-E or later programming
GX Configurator-FL SW0D5C-QFL FL-net (OPCN-2)
<QJ71FL71-F01 accessories> U-E interface module
Product Description setting/monitoring
tool
(Hardware) : Must be obtained, : Obtained at users discretion.
10BASE-2:QJ71FL71-B2-F01
The following products must be obtained separately.
Product Description RG58A/U or RG58C/U
Terminator
coaxial cable
Transceiver Ethernet standard-compliant. Product where
SQETEST (Signal Quality Error TEST) or
heartbeat operates.
T type
Coaxial cable Ethernet standard-compliant Other end of connector
communications Ethernet
AUI cable Ethernet standard-compliant card
QJ71FL71
N type terminator Ethernet standard-compliant
12VDC power supply Transceiver power supply
<Software> <QJ71FL71-B2-F01 accessories>

Product Description
GX Developer SW4D5C-GPP For sequence
W-E or later programming
(Hardware)
GX Configurator-FL SW0D5C-QFLU FL-net (OPCN-2)
-E interface module
setting/monitoring tool <Separately obtained products>
: Must be obtained, : Obtained at users discretion. The following products must be obtained separately.
Product Description
10BASE-T:QJ71FL71-F01 Coaxial cable Ethernet standard-compliant RG-58A/U or
RG58C/U (50 )
BNC type terminator Ethernet standard-compliant (AMP make
221629-4 or equivalent)
Hub Hub T type connector Ethernet standard-compliant (Hirose Electric
Twisted pair cable make UG-274/U(1S) or equivalent)
Other end of Manual FL-net (OPCN-2) interface module User's
Manual
communications
<Software>
QJ71FL71

GX Developer SW4D5C-GPPW For sequence
-E or later programming
GX Configurator-FL SW0D5C-QFLU- FL-net
E (OPCN-2)
<QJ71FL71-F01 accessories> interface module
Product Description setting/monitorin
Manual FL-net (OPCN-2) interface module User's Manual g tool
(Hardware)
: Must be obtained, : Obtained at users discretion.
4-43
NETWORK/
INFORMATION 4.7 FL-Net (OPCN-2) Interface
PROCESSING Module Setting / Monitoring Tool:
MODULES GX Configurator-FL
Overview Automatic Refresh Setting

GX Configurator-FL is a setting/monitoring add-in By performing automatic refresh setting, cyclic
software tool for GX Developer. transmission of data from the FL-net (OPCN-2) interface
It is used to set initial data and automatic read/write of module can be read to the CPU automatically to simplify
CPU device memory data transferred by cyclic programs. In the automatic refresh setting, the read
transmission, which are needed to use the QJ71FL71-F01 destination of each data in the FL-net (OPCN-2) interface
or QJ71FL71-B2-F01 FL-net (OPCN-2) interface module. module is assigned to the CPU device. The following data
Initial value and other settings can be done in sequence can be refreshed automatically.
programs. However, using GX Configurator-FL reduces (1) Status data : bit area
the sequence programs, and it makes checking of setting (2) Status data : word area
and operating status easier. (3) Cyclic data : Area 1
Note: GX Developer Ver.4 or later is required. (4) Cyclic data : Area 2
Initial Data Setting Automatic refresh setting screen sample
The initial values needed for using the FL-net (OPCN-2)

interface module can be set on the screen. The following
initial values can be set.
(1) Node name
(2) Head address of cyclic data area 1
(3) Size of cyclic data area 1
(4) Head address of cyclic data area 2
(5) Size of cyclic data area 2
(6) Token monitoring time-out period
(7) Minimum permissible frame interval
(8) Message data unit
Initial value setting screen sample
Note: The module type is displayed without "-F01".
4-44
NETWORK/
4.7 FL-Net (OPCN-2) Interface INFORMATION
Module Setting / Monitoring Tool: PROCESSING
GX Configurator-FL MODULES
Monitoring and Testing Functions

The monitoring and testing functions are designed to
monitor the data and operating status of the FL-net
(OPCN-2) interface module and change the set values if
required. Since these functions allow you to grasp the
operating status without knowing the addresses in the
FL-net (OPCN-2) interface module, they are effective for
system adjustment and troubleshooting. The following 4
data can be monitored and tested.
(1) X/Y monitoring
(2) Status data (bit area):
Host node information monitoring
(3) Status data (bit area):
Message status monitoring
(4) Status data (word area):
Directive information monitoring
Host node information monitoring
Other node information: Participating node list
monitoring
Other node information: Parameter communication
result monitoring
Other node information: CPU execution status
monitoring
Other node information: CPU status 1 (WARNING)
monitoring
(10) Status Data (Word Area):
Other Node Information: CPU status 2 (ALARM)
Monitor
(11) Status Data (Word Area):
Error Log Information Monitor
(12) Local Node Parameter Information Monitor
(13) Other Node Parameter Information Monitor
Monitoring/testing screen sample
4-45
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING
MODULES 4.8 CC-Link: QJ61BT11
Overview
CC-Link (Control & Communication Link) designed for the integration of both control and communication, is a wire-saving
and information network, which has the industry's latest advanced functions and performance capabilities, e.g. real-time
capability, decentralized control, communication with intelligent equipment and RAS (Note 1) function. Also, it offers
multi-vendor environment compatible with various field equipment manufacturers.
The QJ61BT11 CC-Link modules for Q mode inherit the features of the MELSEC-A/QnA series and other newly adopted
useful functions, such as, remote device station initial setting function.
Note 1: RAS stands for Reliability, Availability, Serviceability.
Features
System configuration
A total of 64 remote I/O, remote device, local, standby master, and intelligent device stations can be connected to one
master station. (64 stations may not all be connected depending on the combination.)
Master station Local/standby master station
Display/operation Intelligent device

terminal module group,
CC-Link such as
Positioning module Interface board for
RS-232C interface personal computer
module
Terminating
resistor
Partner products
such as
Sensor
Solenoid valve
Indicator
Temperature FX PLC
controller
ID controller Remote device module group such as
Bar-code reader Analog to digital conversion module
Digital to analog conversion module
High-speed counter module
Temperature input module Remote I/O module Mitsubishi Factory Automation
ID controller group equipment such as
(I/O modules) Inverter
Servo Terminating resistor
Motion controller
Wiring equipment
CC-Link station types Transmission speed and distance

CC-Link has the following station types. The industry's fastest class of transmission speed
CC-Link Station Type Description (10Mbps) ensures compatibility with a sensor input, which
Master station Controls all stations on CC-Link. One requires fast response when communicating with
station is required in one system.
Local station Has CPU and can communicate with the intelligent equipment with large volumes of data.
master and other local stations.
Standby master station Replaces the master station when it Also you can choose the optimum transmission speed
becomes faulty and continues data link as and overall distance according to your system.
the master station.
Remote I/O station Handles bit data only.
Remote device station Handles bit and word data.
Intelligent device station Handles bit and word data.
Can also make data transfer irregular.
4-46
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING
4.8 CC-Link: QJ61BT11 MODULES
Cyclic communication system

The CC-Link cyclic communication system is shown below. With CC-Link, the cyclic data areas of the master and local
stations are assigned to respective remote I/O, remote device and intelligent device stations, and are refreshed
automatically. Since information from the master station transferred to the remote I/O, remote device and intelligent device
stations are also transmitted to other local stations. The local stations can also acquire the remote stations operating status.
Remote I/O
station Remote Device
PLC CPU Master station (station 1) (station 2) Local station (station 3) Local station (station 4)
4
Buffer memory Buffer memory Buffer memory
Remote input (RX) Remote input (RY) Remote input (RY)

Area for receiving Area for receiving Area for receiving
X data from remote Remote input (RX) data from remote I/O data from remote I/O
I/O station 1 station 1 station 1
Area for receiving data Area for receiving data Area for receiving data
X from remote device Remote input (RX) from remote device from remote device
station 2 station 2 station 2
Area for receiving Host station (station 3)
Area for receiving
X data from local sending area
data from local
station 3 station 3
Area for receiving Area for receiving data Host station (station 4)
X data from local from local station 4 sending area
station 4
Remote output (RY) Remote output (RX) Remote output (RX)
Area for sending Area for receiving Area for receiving
Cyclic communication
Y data to remote I/O Remote output (RY) data from master data from master
station 1 station (station 1) station (station 1)
Y data to remote device Remote output (RY) data from master data from master
station 2 station (station 2) station (station 2)
Y data to local station data from master data from master
3 station (station 3) station (station 3)
Y data to local station data from master data from master
4 station (station 4) station (station 4)
Remote register (RWw) Remote register (RWr) Remote register (RWr)
Unusable (station 1) Unusable (station 1) Unusable (station 1)

Area for sending data Remote register Area for receiving Area for receiving
D to remote device (RWw) data from master data from master
station 2 station station
D data to local data from master data from master
D data to local data from master data from master
Remote register (RWr) Remote register (RWw) Remote register (RWw)
Unusable (station 1) Unusable (station 1) Unusable (station 1)

Area for receiving data Area for receiving data Area for receiving data
D from remote device Remote register from remote device from remote device
station 2 (RWr) station 2 station 2
Area for receiving Host station (station 3)
Area for receiving
D data from local sending area
data from local
station 3 station 3
Area for receiving Area for receiving Host station (station 4)
D data from local data from local sending area
station 4 station 4
communication
Dedicated
Transient buffer Transient buffer
Transient
Instruction
Dedicated
Instruction Transient buffer Transient buffer
CC-Link cyclic communication data

For the partner maker products, remote I/O stations,
Communication Method Description
remote device stations and intelligent device stations that
Cyclic Bit 32 points I/O data communications
communication transmission per station.
can be connected to CC-Link, refer to the product catalog
Word 4-point write/read data published by the CC-Link Partner Association and the
transmission communications per station. Mitsubishi Electric published CC-Link Compatible Product
Catalog.
Open network The CC-Link Partner Association is a non-profit
We have partnerships with many Japanese and foreign organization made up of CC-Link product development
equipment manufacturers, which makes a wide variety of partner vender and established to promote CC-Link
field equipment connected to CC-Link directly and reduce worldwide.
wiring. CC-Link Partner Association home page address is:
We establish an open network where you can use the http://www.cc-link.org
optimum field equipment trouble-free from many choices.
4-47
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING
Standby master function Transient communication

In addition to cyclic communication where data are
By setting a standby master station, data link can be
continued if a fault occurs in the master station. transmitted periodically and automatically, CC-Link can
When the master station returns to normal during use the transient communication system where data are
operation performed by the standby master station, it can transferred irregularly. In other words, data can be
return to data link as a standby station. If the standby transmitted using dedicated instructions. Transient
master station becomes faulty during operation in this communication is supported by the master, local and
status, the standby master station continues data link.
Master station Standby master station intelligent device stations and it can perform the following
processes.
(1) A PLC reads/writes device data, etc. from/to another
PLC.
(2) The master PLC transfers data to/from an intelligent
device station.
(3) GX Developer programming software is used to
read/write or monitor the program of another PLC.
Local/remote Local/remote Local/remote (4) The host personal computer, etc. reads/writes device
station station station
Master station Standby master station data from/to a PLC.
Parameter setting using GX Developer or

dedicated instruction
There are two parameter setting methods. One uses GX
Developer and the other uses the RLPASET instruction to
make setting.
The following indicates differences between the two
Local/remote Local/remote Local/remote setting methods.
station station station
Necessity of Parameter
Number of
Parameter Automatic Change
Link devices Setting Refresh
Loadable
during PLC
Modules
Program CPU RUN
In addition to a total of 4096 points of bit data per CC-Link Parameter setting
system, the cyclic communication of a total of 512 points using GX Unnecessary 4
of word data permits rapid communication with Factory Developer
Automation equipment products such as remote I/O and Parameter setting
using RLPASET Necessary 64
analog modules, indicators and inverters. instruction
Item Specifications Note 5: The RLPASET instruction is available for the product
Max. number of link Remote input (RX) 2048 points whose function version is B and whose upper five digits of
points Remote output (RY) 2048 points serial No. is 03042 or later.
Remote register (RWw) 256 points
Remote register (RWr) 256 points Automatic CC-Link start
Number of link Remote input (RX) 32 points After merely performing the wiring and switch setting,
points per station Remote output (RY) 32 points
simply switching the power on starts CC-Link and all-data
Remote register (RWw) 4 points
Remote register (RWr) 4 points refreshing without the need of network parameter setting.
Note 6: CC-Link is started on the assumption that 64 stations are
Note 1: Remote input (RX) indicates ON/OFF data (bit data) input connected. When the number of connected stations is
from remote station to master station and is represented less than 64, set the network parameters to optimize the
by RX for convenience. link scan time.
Note 2: Remote output (RY) indicates ON/OFF data (bit data) Note 7: This function cannot be used with QJ61BT11 with function
output from master station to remote station and is version is A if there are stations other than the master and
represented by RY for convenience. remote I/O stations (e.g. remote device, intelligent device
Note 3: Remote register (RWw) indicates numerical data (word stations).
data) output from master station to remote station and is Note 8: The automatic CC-Link starting function can be used with
represented by RWw for convenience. only one "QJ61BT11" with the first I/O number is the
Note 4: Remote register (RWr) indicates numerical data (word lowest for the PLC CPU.
data) input from remote station to master station and is Note 9: Refresh devices differ between the Basic model QCPU
represented by RWr for convenience. and High Performance model QCPU.
4-48
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING
High-speed link scan Receive processing

request interrupt
In a system consisting of only the master and the remote Normal Receive
I/O stations, choosing the remote I/O network mode sequence completion
program processing
reduces the link scan time. program
(At transmission speed of 10Mbps)
Remote Network Interrupt sequence
Number of Stations
Remote I/O Network
Mode
Mode 4
(Normal Mode) Interrupt conditions hold
16 1.02ms 1.57ms
QJ61BT11
32 1.77ms 2.32ms Interrupt conditions
64 3.26ms 3.81ms RX :ON/OFF
RWr: Match/mismatch with set value
Remote device station registration function
Communication
Using GX Developer, initial setting can be made for a
remote device station without creating a sequence
program. Interrupt program starting condition devices
The setting example and setting items are shown below.
Set Device Description
RX, RY, SB ON/OFF
RWr, SW Match/mismatch with set value
Note : Unavailable for the Basic model QCPU.
Remote operation
From the GX Developer software linked to a PLC on
CC-Link, remote programming can be performed for
another PLC on the network.
Master station Local station
Terminating
resistor
Setting items for remote device station

registration function Remote device station Remote I/O station
Setting Item Description

Execution flag Setting of whether set data is valid
or invalid.
Terminating
Operating condition/procedure Set write conditions. resistor
execution condition
Execution data Set write devices and write data.
The following functions
can be performed for
Start of interrupt program (event interrupt) the PLC CPU at
master/local station.
Write to PLC Read from PLC Local station
The interrupt program of the CPU module can be started Monitor Test
when data is received from the network and the set RS-232 cable
conditions meet.
This ensures compatibility with the system that requires
faster processing.
GX Developer
You can set up to 16 interrupt program starting conditions.
The concept diagram and execution conditions are shown Personal computer
below.
4-49
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING
Dedicated instructions Part names

Name Description
The following dedicated instructions can be used with the LED RUN ON : Module is normal.
QJ61BT11. indicators OFF : Watchdog timer error
ERR. ON : All stations in communications error
Target Station Instruction Description Lit when any of the following errors.
Reads data from buffer memory or • Switch or control setting is abnormal.
RIRD • There is more than one master station on the
Master station CPU device of target station.
Local station same line.
Writes data to buffer memory or CPU
RIWT • Parameter setting error
device of target station.
• Data link watchdog timer activated.
Reads data from buffer memory of • Cable broken or transmission path affected by
RIRD
target station. noise, etc.
Writes data to buffer memory of Flicker : There is a station with communication
RIWT errors.
target station.
Performs the handshake MST ON : Master station operation
RIRCV automatically to read data from the S MST ON : Standby master station operation
Intelligent device buffer memory of the target station. L RUN ON : Data link during execution (Host
station)
station Performs the handshake
L ERR. ON : Communications error (Host station)
RISEND automatically to write data to the
• Flicker at fixed intervals:
buffer memory of the target station. Switch setting was changed during power-on.
Reads contents of automatic • Flicker at unfixed intervals:
RIFR
updating buffer of target station. Terminating resistor not connected. The
Writes data to automatic updating module or CC-Link dedicated cable is affected
RITO by noise.
buffer of target station.
SD ON : Data being transmitted.
Sets network parameters to master
Master station RLPASET RD ON : Data being received.
station and starts data link. (Note 1)
Station Used to set the station number of the module.
Note 1: Supported by the product whose function version is B and number (Factory setting: 0)
whose first five digits of serial No. is "03042" or later. setting <Settings>
switches Master station :0
Program Compatibility Local stations : 1 to 64
Standby master stations : 1 to 64
"ERR." LED is lit if setting is other than 0 to 64.
The existing program can be utilized by using A to Q or
Transmission Used to set the transmission speed and operating status
QnA to Q program conversion of GX Developer. speed/mode of the module.
Note 1: The RLPA network parameter setting instruction and the setting switch (Factory setting: 0)
RRPA automatic refresh parameter setting instruction are No. Transmission speed Mode
0 Transmission speed 156kbps Online
not supported. After deleting the RLPA/RRPA instruction,
1 Transmission speed 625kbps
set the parameters using GX Developer or RLPASET
Transmission speed
instruction. 2
2.5Mbps
3 Transmission speed 5Mbps
Appearance 4 Transmission speed 10Mbps
5 Transmission speed 156kbps Line test
QJ61BT11
6 Transmission speed 625kbps At station number
LED indicators
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD
ERR.
RD
L ERR. 7 Transmission speed setting of 0: Line test
STATION NO.
7 8 2.5Mbps 1
At station number
4 5 6
9 0 1
X10
2 3
Station number 8 Transmission speed 5Mbps
7 8
setting switches 9 setting of 1 to 64:
4 5 6
9 0 1
98 (3.86)
X1
2 3
Transmission speed 10Mbps Line test 2
BCD
Transmission
E
8 9A
F0 1 2
MODE
A Transmission speed 156kbps Hardware test

67
3 45
speed/mode
setting switch B Transmission speed 625kbps
NC
NC
2
1
C Transmission speed
DA
SLD
4
3
2.5Mbps
DB
(FG)
DG
6
5
D Transmission speed 5Mbps
7
E Transmission speed 10Mbps
F Must not be set (reserved for system)
90 (3.54) 27.4 (1.08)
[Terminal block diagram with the cover open]
NC
NC
DA
SLD
DB
(FG)
DG
Unit: mm (inch)
4-50
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING
Comparison of Q-Compatible CC-Link and AnS/Q2AS-Compatible CC-Link

Remote I/O Network Mode Remote Network Mode Remarks
PLC type Q mode QnA/ A mode, Q mode QnA/ A mode,
Q2AS AnU/A2AS Q2AS AnU/A2AS
CC-Link module type QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11, AJ61BT11, QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11, AJ61BT11,
A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11 A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11
Connectable remote/local station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station, remote device station,
intelligent device station, local station, 4
standby master station
Transmission speed Max. 10Mbps
Number of RX (1Bit) 0 to 7FF (2048 points) 0 to 7FF (2048 points)
cyclic points per RY (1Bit) 0 to 7FF (2048 points) 0 to 7FF (2048 points)
network RWr (1 word) No 0 to FF (256 points)
RWw (1 word) No 0 to FF (256 points)
Number of RX (1Bit) 32 points 32 points
cyclic points per RY (1Bit) 32 points 32 points
remote station RWr (1 word) — 4 points
RWw (1 word) — 4 points
Link scan time Short Normal
CC-Link automatic start function No Yes No
(Note 1)
PLC type Q mode QnA/ A mode, Q mode QnA/Q2AS A mode,
Q2AS AnU/A2AS AnU/A2AS
CC-Link module type QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11, AJ61BT11, QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11, AJ61BT11,
A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11 A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11
Standby master function No Yes Yes When the
When the master station
master station returns to
returns to normal from
normal from failure status,
failure status, it cannot
it can return to return to
network. network.
Remote device station No Yes No
registration function
Interrupt program start Yes No Yes No
Network parameter setting from Yes Yes No Yes Yes No
GX Developer
Network parameter setting using No No No Yes (Note 2) No Yes (Note 3)
dedicated instruction (RLPASET (RLPA
instruction) instruction)
Dedicated RLPA × × × × × (Note 3) Network parameter setting
instructions RRPA × × (Note 3) × × (Note 3) automatic refresh parameter
setting
CCL, CCLEND × × × × × Mail box registration
SPCCLR, × × × × × Suspension of read/write
SPCBUSY to/from intelligent device
station
Remote station status read
RIRD, RIWT × × × (Note 3) Data read/write to/from target
station
RISEND, × × × (Note 3) Read/write to/from RS232
RIRCV module with handshake
RIFR, RITO × × × (Note 3) Read/write to automatic
updating buffer
RLPASET × × × (Note 2) × × Network parameter setting
Note 1: The QJ61BT11 of function version A is connectable to the remote I/O station only.
Note 2: Available for the product with function version is B and with the upper five digits of serial No. 03042 or later.
Note 3: For the compatible CPU or CC-Link master/local module, refer to the user's manual and programming manual.
4-51
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING
Function List
Item Outline
Cyclic communication function Communication function by link device RX/RY/RWr/RWw between master, remote I/O, remote device,
intelligent device and local stations
Transient communication function Communication function for data transfer by CC-Link dedicated instructions or for program read/write by
GX Developer programming software between master, intelligent device and local stations
Parameter setting using GX Developer Sets the network parameters and automatic refresh parameters using GX Developer.
Parameter setting using dedicated instructions Sets the network parameters using the RLPASET instructions.
Automatic CC-Link start (Note 1) Starts the network and refreshes all data by merely performing wiring and switch setting, without the
need of any parameter setting.
Remote device station initial setting function Initial setting data of remote device stations is set in parameters for program deletion.
Scan synchronous function Cyclic communication is synchronized with program scan of the CPU module of the master station.
Standby master function When master station is disconnected due to a fault, standby master station replaces it to continue
communication.
Interrupt program start (Note 2) When specified condition data is received, interrupt program of CPU module is started.
Slave station isolation function Only module that failed to make data link due to power-off, etc. is isolated and data link continues in
normal modules.
Automatic return function When returning to normal, module disconnected from data link due to power-off, etc. automatically
returns in data link.
Reserved station function Remote and local stations to be connected in future can be set as reserved stations.
Therefore, they will not be handled as data link error stations.
Error-invalid station setting function Module that failed to make data link due to power-off, etc. will not be handled as data link error stations.
Temporary error-invalid station setting function Corresponding on-line remote station will not be handled as a data link error station temporarily.
Station number overlap checking function Checks for multiple remote stations of the same station number.
Remote parameter setting using GX Sets the parameters of the remote station using GX Configurator-CC.
Configurator-CC
Note 1: Refreshed devices differ between the Basic model QCPU and High Performance model QCPU.
Note 2: Unavailable for the Basic model QCPU.
Item Specifications
Max. number of link points Remote I/O (RX, RY) : 2048 points each
Remote register (RWw) : 256 points (master remote, local stations)
Remote register (RWr) : 256 points (remote, local stations master)
specifications
Number of link points per station Remote I/O (RX, RY) : 32 points each (30 points for local stations)
Control
Remote register (RWw) : 4 points (master remote, local stations)

Remote register (RWr) : 4 points (remote, local stations master)
Max. number of stations occupied 1 to 4 stations (at setting of 4 stations: 126 I/O points, 32 link register points) (Note 1)
(for local stations)
Transient transmission Max. 480 words/station
Link scan time (at 10Mbps) 3.3ms (remote I/O 2048 points, in remote I/O network mode, normal value)
Performance
6.4ms (remote I/O 2048 points, remote register 512 points, in remote network mode, normal value)
Transmission speed 10M/5M/2.5M/625k/156kbps

Communication system Polling
Synchronous system Frame synchronization system
Encryption system NRZI system
Communication specifications
Transmission path form Bus (RS-485)

Transmission format HDLC conformance
Error control system CRC (X16+X12+X5+1)
Maximum number of modules 64 modules
Note that the following conditions must be satisfied.
(1×a)+(2×b)+(3×c)+(4×d) 64
a : Number of 1 station occupying modules
b : Number of 2 station occupying modules
c : Number of 3 station occupying modules
d : Number of 4 station occupying modules
(16×A)+(54×B)+(88×C) 2304
A : Number of remote I/O stations 64
B : Number of remote device stations 42
C : Number of local, standby master and intelligent device stations 26
Note 1: Supported by the product with function version is B or later for both the master and local stations.
4-52
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING

Item Specifications
Remote station number 1 to 64
Max. overall Same
Master station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Local station Local station
cable length specifications or or or or
and regardless of Remote device Remote device Intelligent device Intelligent device
inter-station system station station station station
cable length configuration
(Ver. 1.10) Inter-station cable length
(Note 1)
Max. overall cable length 4
Ver. 1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cable (terminating resistor 110 used)
Transmission speed Inter-station cable length Max. overall cable length (Note 3)
156kbps 20cm(7.88inch) or more 1200m(3934.43ft.)
625kbps 1200m(3934.43ft.)
2.5Mbps 900m(2950.82ft.)
5Mbps 400m(1311.48ft.)
10Mbps 160m(524.59ft.)
Max. overall System

cable length configuration (1) Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
or Master station or or or
and made up of Remote device Remote device Remote device Remote device
station station station station
inter-station remote I/O and/or
cable length remote device
2 2 1 1
(Ver.1.00) stations only
Max. overall cable length
1 Inter-station cable length between remote I/O or remote device station and remote I/O or remote device station
2 Inter-station cable length between master station and adjacent station
CC-Link dedicated cable CC-Link dedicated high-performance cable

(110 terminating resistor used) (130 terminating resistor used)
Communi Inter-station cable Max. overall Inter-station cable Max. overall
Communication
-cation length cable length length cable length
speed
speed 1 2 (Note 3) 1 2 (Note 3)
156kbps 30cm 1m 1200m 156kbps 30cm 1m 1200m
(11.82inch) or (39.4in (3934.43ft.) (11.82inch) or (39.4in (3934.43ft.)
625kbps more ch) or 600m 625kbps more ch) or 900m
more (1967.21ft.) more (2950.82ft.)
2.5Mbps 200m 2.5Mbps 400m
(655.74ft.) (1311.48ft.)
5Mbps 30cm (11.82 110m 5Mbps 160m
inch) to 59cm (360.66ft.) (524.59ft.)
(23.25 inch)
60cm 150m No. of 100m
(23.64inch) or (491.8ft.) connected (327.87ft.)
more modules: 1
10Mbps 30cm (11.82 50m to 32
inch) to 59cm (163.93ft.)
(23.25inch)
60cm (23.64 80m No. of 30cm (11.82 80m
inch) to 99cm (262.3ft.) connected inch) to 39cm (262.3ft.)
(39.01inch) modules: (15.37inch)
10Mbps
1m (39.4inch) 100m 33 to 48 40cm (15.76 100m

or more (327.87ft.) inch) or more (327.87ft.)
No. of 30cm (11.82 20m
connected inch) to 39cm (65.57ft.)
modules: 49 (15.37inch)
to 64 40cm (15.76 30m
inch) to 69cm (98.36ft.)
(27.19inch)
70cm (27.58 100m
inch) or more (327.87ft.)
If wiring is made at even one location within this range of the inter-station cable length between remote I/O or
remote device station and remote I/O or remote device station, the max. overall cable length is as indicated above.
4-53
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING

Item Specifications
Max. overall System Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Local station Local station
cable length configuration (2) Master station or or or or
Remote device Remote device Intelligent device Intelligent device
and made up of remote station station station station
inter-station I/O, remote device,
cable length local, standby 1 1 2 2
(Ver.1.00) master and Max. overall cable length
intelligent device
1 Inter-station cable length between remote I/O or remote device station and remote I/O or remote device station
stations
2 Inter-station cable length between master station and adjacent station
CC-Link dedicated cable CC-Link dedicated high-performance cable
(110 termination resistor used) (130 termination resistor used)
Communi- Inter-station cable length Max. overall Communi- Inter-station cable length Max. overall
cation cable length cation cable length
1 2 1 2
speed (Note 3) speed (Note 3)

156kbps 30cm (11.82inch) or 2m 1200m 156kbps 30cm (11.82inch) or 2m 1200m
more (6.56ft.) (3934.43ft.) more (6.56ft.) (3934.43ft.)
625kbps or more 600m 625kbps or more 600m
(1967.21ft.) (1967.21ft.)
2.5Mbps 200m 2.5Mbps 200m
(655.74ft.) (655.74ft.)
5Mbps 30cm (11.82inch) to 110m 5Mbps 30cm (11.82inch) to 110m
59cm (23.25inch) (360.66ft.) 59cm (23.25inch) (360.66ft.)
60cm (23.64inch) or 150m 60cm (23.64inch) or 150m
more (491.8ft.) more (491.8ft.)
10Mbps 30cm (11.82inch) to 50m 10Mbps 70cm (27.58inch) to 50m
59cm (23.25inch) (163.93ft.) 99cm (39.01inch) (163.93ft.)
60cm (23.64inch) to 80m 1m (39.4inch) or 80m

99cm (39.01inch) (262.3ft.) more (262.3ft.)
1m (39.4inch) or 100m
more (327.87ft.)
If wiring is made at even one location within this range of the inter-station cable length between remote I/O or
remote device station and remote I/O or remote device station, the max. overall cable length is as indicated above.
Connection cable CC-Link dedicated cable/CC-Link dedicated high-performance cable/Ver. 1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cables
(Note 2)
Loadable station Q series CPU(Q mode), MELSECNET/H remote I/O station (Note 4)
Number of occupied I/O points 32 points (I/O assignment: intelligent)
Others
Internal current consumption 0.46A

(5VDC)
External dimensions 27.4 (1.08) W × 98 (3.86) H × 90 (3.55) D (mm (inch))
Weight 0.12kg
Note 1: The cables with restrictions on the conventional inter-station cable length have been improved and with inter-station cable lengths
are 20cm or more uniformly are defined as Ver. 1.10. In contrast, the conventional products are defined as Ver. 1.00.
Note 2: CC-Link dedicated cables/Ver. 1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cables and CC-Link dedicated high-performance cables cannot
be used together.
Note 3: Using the repeater (T branch) module/optical repeater module/wireless repeater (infrared) module enables extension or T branch.
Note 4: There are restrictions on mounting on the MELSECNET/H remote I/O station.
For details, refer to the CC-Link Master/Local Module User's Manual.
Manual (Hardware)
System Equipment
QJ61BT11 The following equipment (Manual) must be obtained
separately.
Product Description
CC-Link dedicated Choose CC-Link dedicated cable partner
Terminating resistor cable maker product. For details, refer to
Terminating resistor CC-Link catalog.
CC-Link cable Manual CC-Link Master/Local Module User's
Manual (Hardware)
<Software>
Type Description Remarks
<QJ61BT11 accessories> GX Developer SW4D5C-GPPW-E or later
Product Description GX Configurator-CC SW0D5C-J61P-E version
Terminating resistor 110 , 130 , 2 of. Each 1.10L or later
Manual CC-Link Master/Local Module User's
: Must be obtained. : Obtained at users discretion.
4-54
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
4.9 CC-Link/LT Master Module: PROCESSING
QJ61CL12 MODULES
Overview CC-Link/LT station types

CC-Link/LT Station
Description
By inheriting the CC-Link concept, the industry's top-level Type
advanced functions and performance, such as real-time Master station Station that controls all stations on
CC-Link/LT. One station is required
performance, decentralized control and RAS (Note 1) for one system.
functions, working together with a number of field Remote I/O station Station that handles bit data.
equipment makers, CC-Link/LT is a remote I/O network Wire saving/space saving 4
that provides an open field network which is most suitable The dedicated flat cables and dedicated connectors
for wire-saving, and reduced I/O decentralization. improve workability and maintainability, enabling the
The CC-Link/LT does not require network parameter reduction of working and wiring costs. The compact
settings, enables programming similar to normal I/O (industry's smallest) remote I/O modules realize space
modules, and allows up to 1024 points of inputs or outputs saving within devices.
to be controlled per network. Ease of connecting various sensors
Note 1: RAS stands for Reliability, Availability and The open sensor connectors and cable type I/O modules
Serviceability. ensure ease of directly connecting sensors, etc.
Ease of programming
Features Since the link devices (RX/RY) of the QJ61CL12 are
System configuration assigned to the X/Y devices of the PLC CPU,
Up to 64 remote I/O stations can be connected to one programming can be performed similar to normal I/O.
master station. (64 stations may not be connected Also, using the X/Y devices eliminates the need to set the
depending on the CPU's I/O points, etc.) link device refresh parameters and network parameters.
CC-Link/LT (Note 1)
master module
Note 1: Use the switch setting of GX Developer when
Remote I/O Remote I/O setting the last station number for performing data link to
module module
reduce link refresh time or when making input data
QJ61CL12 clear/hold setting (input data clear when setting is not
Terminating resistor
made) for a data link error.
Power supply adaptor

Effective use of I/O points
The point mode (4-point, 8-point, 16-point) enables
CL1PAD1 optimum I/O assignment.
General-purpose Even in the same system configuration, the number of I/O
power supply
Terminating points that can be controlled changes depending on the
24VDC resistor point mode.
Features of point mode
Number of
Point mode Remarks
Controllable Points
4-point mode 256 points Suitable for few-point, few-bit control
512 points Suitable for many-point, many-bit
Remote I/O module 8-point mode
control
1024 points Suitable for many-point, many-bit
16-point mode
CL1Y4-T1B2
control
Number of stations that can be connected depending

on the number of occupied I/O points and point mode
CL2Y8-TP1B2
PW L RUN
L ERR.
Y0
Number of
Y1 Y
Y2 Y
Y
16 32 48 64 128 256 512 1024

Y3
Y
occupied
I/ O points
4-point 4 8 12 16 32 64 — —
mode stations stations stations stations stations stations
Point 8-point 2 4 6 8 16 32 64
mode mode —
stations stations stations stations stations stations stations
16-point 1 2 3 4 8 16 32 64
mode stations stations stations stations stations stations stations stations
4-55
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING 4.9 CC-Link/LT Master Module:
MODULES QJ61CL12
System configuration example Transmission speed automatic tracking

Which point mode to be selected depends on the number function (remote station)
of used remote stations (I/O units). As a rule of thumb, The remote station does not have a transmission speed
select the I/O point mode used by the majority of remote setting switch. At the start of communication, the remote
modules in the system in order to reduce surplus occupied station side transmission speed is automatically set in
I/O points.
accordance with the transmission speed setting of the
An example of point mode setting is given below.
master station.
Unit occupied points are 2 points
Open network
................................. 1 module (station 4))
CC-Link/LT is an open network like CC-Link. It improves
Unit occupied points are 4 points
................................. 4 modules (stations 1), 3), 6), 7)) the freedom of system construction, e.g. enables flexible
Unit occupied points are 8 points selection of optimum devices from multi-vendors.
................................. 1 module (station 2)) For our remote I/O modules that can be connected to
Unit occupied points are 16 points CC-Link/LT, refer to the Mitsubishi Electric published
................................. 1 module (station 5)) CC-Link/LT Compatible Product Catalog.
Since 4-point I/O units are the largest number in this The CC-Link Partner Association is a non-profit
example, selection of the 4-point mode produces no organization made up of CC-Link product development
surplus I/O points. partner vender and established to promote CC-Link
Power Q QJ61 Input/ worldwide.
supply CPU CL12 output
CC-Link Partner Association home page address:
http://www.cc-link.org
Station 1) Station 2) Station 3) Station 5)
4 points 8 points 4 points 16 points Appearance
Station 4) Station 6)
2 points 4 points External dimensions
Station 7)
QJ61CL12
4 points RUN
SD
L RUN
RD
LED
ERR. L ERR.
4-point mode (4 points/station) 8-point mode (8 points/station) 16-point mode (16 points/station)
Number of occupied I/O points: 48 points Number of occupied I/O points: 64 points Number of occupied I/O points: 128 points
Total number of stations: 12 stations Total number of stations: 8 stations Total number of stations: 8 stations ON
SW
1
X/Y0 X/Y0 X/Y0 I/O
2
1) 4 points 1 station 1) 4 points 1 station 1) 4points POINTS
3
Empty, 4 points B RATE

4
5
Transmission
2) 8 points 2 stations 1 station speed/mode
98 (3.86)
6
MODE
Empty, 12 points 7
2) 8 points 1 station TEST 8 setting switches
3) 4 points 1 station
X/Y10 4) 2 points X/Y10 X/Y10
Empty, 2 points 1 station 3) 4 points
1 station 2) 8 points
Empty, 4 points
4) 2 points
1 station
5) 16 points 4 stations Empty, 6 points 1 station Empty, 8 points
X/Y20 X/Y20 X/Y20
3) 4 points
LINK CC-Link/LT
6) 4 points 1 station communication
7) 4 points
5) 16 points 2 stations 1 station connector
1 station Empty, 12 points
Empty, 4 points 1 station
X/Y30 X/Y30 4) 2points QJ61CL12
6) 4 points
1 station
Empty, 4 points
7) 4 points 90 (3.55) 27.4(1.08)
1 station
Empty, 4 points
X/Y40
Unit: mm (inch)
5) 16 points 1 station
X/Y50
6) 4 points
2 stations
Empty, 12 points
X/Y60
7) 4 points
Empty, 12 points
1 station
X /Y70
Note 1: This example assumes that the QJ61CL12 is mounted on

slot 0.
4-56
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
QJ61CL12 MODULES
Part names Name Description

Name Description Transmission MODE 6 OFF ON OFF ON
speed/mode 7 OFF OFF ON ON
LED display RUN ON : Module performing normal operation
setting Test mode OFF: ON LINE (Normal operation)
OFF : Hardware abnormal
switches TEST 8 ON: TEST mode (Self- loopback test)
ERR. ON : Switching setting abnormal
Flicker : Switch position changed during
operation
L RUN <When normal>
Function List
ON : Data link in execution
OFF : Data link at stop Item Function Outline 4
<In test mode> Cyclic This allows communication of up to 16 X/Y
ON : Self- loopback test result normal communication points each per station and up to 64 stations
OFF : Self- loopback test result abnormal function without being conscious of link devices
L ERR. <When normal> between the master and remote stations.
ON : Station in data link error detected, some Parameter-less Enables communication without network
station outside control range
parameters.
Flicker : All stations in data link error
<In test mode> Refresh range Reduces link refresh time, due to data link
ON : Self- loopback test result abnormal specification processing not being performed for the
OFF : Self- loopback test result normal function non-connected stations, by setting the last
SD ON :Sending data station number for data link.
RD ON :Receiving data Point mode Reduces the number of unnecessary empty
Transmission Number of 16- 32- 48- 64- 128- 256- 512- 1024- setting points since the I/O points are used effectively.
speed/mode occupied I/ O point point point point point point point point During-RUN Allows the remote station to participate in data
setting points slave station link at anytime within the I/O point and last
switches I/O 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
addition station number settings.
POINTS 2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
Slave station Separates only the modules disabled for data
3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
separation link, therefore to continue data link with only
Transmission 156kbps 625kbps 2.5Mbps Inhibited
function the normal modules.
rate setting
B RATE 4 OFF ON OFF ON Automatic return When a station previously disabled from the
5 OFF OFF ON ON function system due to a fault, returns to the network
Point mode 8-point 4-point 16-point Inhibited after the fault has been rectified.
setting mode mode mode
Performance specifications
Item Specifications
point mode 4- point mode 8- point mode 16- point mode
Maximum number of link points (The 256 points [512 points] 512 points [1024 points] 1024 points [148 points]
number of points within [ ] assumes that
I/O are used)
Control specifications
Number of link points per station (The 4 points [8 points] 8 points [16 points] 16 points [32 points]
number of points within [ ] assumes that
I/O are used)
Link When 32 Number of points 128 points 256 points 512 points
scan stations are 2.5Mbps 0.7ms 0.8ms 1.0ms
time connected 625kbps 2.2ms 2.7ms 3.8ms
156kbps 8.0ms 10.0ms 14.1ms
When 64 Number of points 256 points 512 points 1024 points
stations are 2.5Mbps 1.2ms 1.5ms 2.0ms
connected 625kbps 4.3ms 5.4ms 7.4ms
156kbps 15.6ms 20.0ms 27.8ms
Transmission rate 2.5M/625k/125kbps
Communication method BITR system (Broadcast polling+Interval Timed Response)

Transmission path T- branch system
Error control system CRC
Number of connected stations 64 stations
Note that the following conditions should be satisfied.
• The total number of remote station link points is within the maximum number of link
points.
• Within the number of I/O points of the CPU.
Remote station numbers 1 to 64
4-57
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING 4.9 CC-Link/LT Master Module:
MODULES QJ61CL12

Item Specifications
T-branch
Main line length (branch line lengths not included)
connection
Master T-branch interval
station
Branch
line
Terminating length Power Remote Remote Remote Remote Remote Terminating
resister adaptor I/O station I/O station I/O station I/O station I/O station resister
1 2
Branch
line length Remote Remote
I/O station I/O station
Inter station
distance
Remote Remote
Network Wiring
I/O station I/O station
Main line
Branch line
Remote
I/O station
1: The branch line also includes the length marked 2.

Transmission rate 2.5Mbps 625kbps 125kbps
Total Maximum main line length 35m 100m 500m
distance Maximum length of the
4m 16m 60m
extension branch line
Overall branch line length 15m 50m 200m
Maximum number of stations
8 stations
connected to branch line (per branch)
Inter station distance No restrictions
T- branch interval No restrictions
Master station connection position Connected at the end of the main line
Connection cable Dedicated flat cable (0.75mm2 4)
Mountable station Q series CPU (Q mode), MELSECNET/H(remote I/O station)
Number of I/ O points occupied 16,32,48,64,128,256,512,1024 point (I/ O assignment: intelligent) (Note1)
(I/ O assignment: intelligent)
Others

External power Voltage 20.4 to 28.8V DC (supplied by power supply adaptor)
supply Current consumption 0.028A
External dimensions 98 (3.86) (H) 27.4 (1.08) (W) 90 (3.55) (D) [mm (inch)]
Weight 0.09kg
Note1: The occupied I/O points are all used as the I/O devices of the slave stations.
System Equipment
QJ61CL12
General-purpose
power supply DC24V Cable type Terminal block type
Master station remote I/O modules remote I/O modules
power supply
adaptor
CC-Link/LT
Communication dedicated
connector flat cable
Terminating resistor Terminating

type resistor
Terminal block type MIL connector tyep

remote I/O modules remote I/O modules
Sensor connector type

remote I/O moduels
4-58
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
QJ61CL12 MODULES
Power supply selection <QJ61CL12 accessories>

Concept of power supply selection Product Description
Manual CC-Link/LT Master Module User's Manual
A CC-Link/LT system always requires one or more power
(Hardware)
supply adaptors.
To construct a system with one power supply adaptor, the <Separately obtained products>
following two conditions must be satisfied, otherwise two The following equipment (manual) must be obtained
power supplies or more has to be considered. separately. 4
Product Description
1. Since the current capacity of Sum of current consumptions Communication CL9-CNF-18: CC-Link/LT dedicated flat cable
the power supply adaptor is 5A 5A connector connector (in packs of 10) (Note 1)
2. Since the minimum operating Voltage drop 3.6V Sensor ECN-_ (type changes depending on the
voltage of each unit is 20.4V (At 24VDC: 24V - 20.4V = 3.6V) connector connector color and cable diameter): Sensor
connector type dedicated I/O connector (in
System power packs of 20) (Note 1)
calculation Cable CL9-FL4-18: CC-Link/LT dedicated flat cable
(Note 1)
Reexamine system
Current consumption using two or more Terminating CL9-RYVK: CC-Link/LT dedicated terminating
calculation power supply
adaptors . resistor resistor (in packs of 2)
(Note 1)
NO
Sum of current
consumptions
5A? Power supply 24VDC power supply (to be prepared by user)
(Note 2)
YES Voltage drop
calculation Power supply CL1PAD1: Power supply adaptor for
Voltage drop calculation (In-depth
(Simple calculation) calculation ) adaptor CC-Link/LT (5A) (Note 3)
Manual CC-Link/LT Master Module User's Manual
NO Supplementary NO Note 1: Manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System Service Co.,
V oltage manual 3.6V
drop 3.6V Ltd.
YES
YES Note 2: At least one power supply is required for the CC-Link/LT
system.
Completion Note 3: Used with the power supply that must be obtained by the
user.
For details of the calculation method for power supply

selection, refer to the Mitsubishi Electric published <Software>
CC-Link/LT Compatible Product Catalog.
GX Developer SW45C-GPPW -E For sequence *1
or later programming
*1 Must be obtained by the user
Note: SW7D5C-GPPW-E Ver. 7.17T or later is required to use the
diagnostic/monitor function of CC-Link/LT.
4-59
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING
MODULES 4.10 AS-i Master Module: QJ71AS92
Overview Appearance
AS-i, which stands for Actuator-Sensor-Interface, is a LED indications
network system established by the IEC Standard: IEC
CODE LED
62026-2. A LED
B LED
Compliant with AS-Interface Specification Version 2.11
MODE Switch
(abbreviated to AS-i Ver. 2.11), the QJ71AS92 can be
98 (3.86)
SET Switch
used as the master module of an AS-i system.
Features Communication
connector
(Packed with
System configuration module)
One AS-i power supply is connected in an AS-i system 90 (3.54) 12 27.4 (1.08)
and can be connected anywhere in the AS-i system. (0.47)
When using a repeater, also connect the AS-i power Unit: mm (inch)
supply after the connection position of the repeater.
Connection method Part names
Name Description
"CODE" LED Displays the slave address or error code.
LED indications RUN On: Module is normal
QJ71AS
92
Off: Module is abnormal

RUN
U ASI
CM
ERR. PRG
ENA.
S ERR
.
CODE
U ASI On: Power is supplied from the AS-i bus.

A
MODE
B
Off: Power is not supplied from the AS-i
SET
bus.
CM On: Configuration mode or parameter
storage in progress.
QJ71A
Off: Protected operation mode.
S92
ERR. On: Fault detected.

Off: Fault not detected.
PRG On: Automatic slave address assignment
ENA. function is ready to be activated.
Off: Automatic slave address assignment
function is not ready to be activated.
AS-i power
supply S ERR. — (for future use)
Slave output Slave address Slave address Slave address Slave address
auxiliary power 1A 31A 1B 31B "A" LED Indicate the type of the slave when any of slave Nos.
supply
"B" LED 0 to 31 is displayed on the "CODE" LED.
AS-i Ver. 2.11 compatibility "A" "B" Description
LED LED
Dividing the slave numbers into Groups A and B enables Off Off AS-i Ver. 2.04 I/O slave, analog
communication with up to 62 I/O slaves. (Note) slave, Ver. 2.11 slave without
Communication can also be made with AS-i analog I/O grouping
slaves. On Off A-slave (AS-i Ver. 2.11)
Note 1: This applies to a system consisting of Ver. Off On B-slave (AS-i Ver. 2.11)
2.11-compatible I/O slaves only. On On — (for future use)
Ease of programming MODE switch Used to switch between the protected operation
GX Configurator-AS (option) allows automatic refresh mode and configuration mode.
setting to be done, resulting in easier creation of sequence SET switch Used to set the slave address to the slave or set
parameters to the master module.
programs.
Communication Connects to the AS-i system using the AS-i cable.
It also enables to set the slave address and monitor the connector
setting/operating status.
Ease of setup
The slave address can also be set and registered from the
module front switches.
4-60
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING
4.10 AS-i Master Module: QJ71AS92 MODULES
Function List
Item Description
Compliant with AS-i Ver. 2.11 and connectable with the following slaves.
• AS-i Ver. 2.11-compatible I/O slave
AS-i slave communication function
• AS-i Ver. 2.04-compatible I/O slave
• AS-i Ver. 2.11-compatible analog slave
Utility-based automatic refresh Automatic refresh function of I/O data for the CPU device memory by means of the utility package.
function
4
Automatic slave address assignment function.
Master module automatically assigns the same slave address as was used for the previous slave
Automatic slave address
station (faulty) prior to being replaced to the new slave station (only when slaves are of same type).
assignment function
The newly added slave station must be set to slave address 0 before being added to the AS-i
network.
Sets the slave number and parameters using the utility package, module front CODE LED and
Parameter setting function
switches, or ladder program.
Item Specifications
Max. number of AS-i slaves (Note 1) 62 (A-slaves: 31, B-slaves: 31)
Max. number of I/O points Input 248 points
(Note 2)
(1 point = 1 bit) Output 248 points
Maximum number of Input 124 points
analog I/O points
(1 point = 16 bits) Output 124 points
I/O refresh time Approx. 5ms (without I/O slave grouping)
Approx. 10ms (with I/O slave grouping)
Approx. 35ms (per analog slave channel)
Transmission distance Max. 100m (max. 300m with two repeaters)
Connection type Bus network type (any of star, line, tree and ring possible)
Internal memory EEPROM (for parameter registration), number of writes: 100,000 times
Cable type AS-i cable used.
Loadable station Q series CPU(Q mode)
External Voltage TYP. 30.5VDC (supplied by AS-I power supply)
supply power Current consumption 46mA(TYP. DC30.5V)
External dimensions 98 (3.86) (H) 27.4 (1.08) (W) 90(3.54) (D) [mm (inch)]
Weight 0.12kg
Slave Type Whether Unit Can Be Grouped or Not

AS-i Ver. 2.11-compatible I/O slave Please confirm with the manufacturer of the I/O slave unit whether the unit can be grouped.
AS-i Ver. 2.04-compatible I/O slave
AS-i Ver. 2.11-compatible analog N/A
slave
Note 1: This is the max. number of Ver. 2.11-compatible I/O slave stations (can be grouped) configured in the same system. If
Ver.2.11-compatible I/O slaves that cannot be grouped, analog slaves, and Ver. 2.04-compatible slaves are used together in the
same system, calculate the max. number of slaves using the following expression.
NIO-A +NIO-B+2 (NIO+NA) 62
NIO-A +NIO+NA 31
NIO-B +NIO+NA 31
NIO-A: Number of Slaves (A-slaves) that are compatible with Ver. 2.11
NIO-B: Number of Slaves (B-slaves) that are compatible with Ver. 2.11
NIO: Number of Slaves that are not compatible with extended addressing
NA: Number of analog slaves
Note 2: One slave uses four inputs and four outputs.
One analog slave also uses four inputs and four outputs.
4-61
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING
MODULES 4.10 AS-i Master Module: QJ71AS92
Transmission delay time System Equipment

AS-i cycle time QJ71AS92
AS-i cycle time (maximum) = {171µs (number of
QJ71AS92
communicating slaves + 2) } n
AS-i
power
(1) When different slave numbers are used with AS-i Ver. supply
2.11-compatible I/O slaves in A-slave or B-slave or Slave
when Ver. 2.04-compatible I/O slaves are used: n = 1 Slave Slave
(2) When the same slave numbers are used with AS-i Ver.
2.11-compatible I/O slaves in A-slave or B-slave: n = 2 <QJ71AS92 accessories>
Product Description
(3) When analog slave is used: n = 7 (number of
Communication Communication connector for AS-i system
channels in the slaves)
connector
Input transmission delay
Manual AS-i Master Module User's Manual
(1) When the MOV/FROM instruction or the automatic (Hardware)
refresh setting from the utility package is used
Normal value = (AS-i cycle time 1) + (sequence
The following equipment must be obtained separately.
scan 0.5) + slave input delay
Product Description
Maximum value = (AS-i cycle time 2) + (sequence
AS-i power Power supply for AS-i (user-prepared)
scan 1) + slave input delay
supply
Output transmission delay AS-i cable Cable for AS-i (obtained by user)
(1) MOV/TO instruction is used for execution AS-i slave Slave station for AS-i
Normal value = (AS-i cycle time 1) + slave Manual AS-i Master Module User's Manual
output delay
Maximum value = (AS-i cycle time 2) + slave <Software>
output delay Product Type Description Remarks
(2) When automatic refresh setting from the utility package GX Developer SW4D5C-GPPW-E For sequence
is used or later programming
Normal value = (AS-i cycle time 1) + (sequence GX SW1D5C-QASU-E For AS-i master
Configurator-AS module setting
scan 0.5) + slave output delay
: Must be obtained. : Obtained at user's discretion.
Maximum value = (AS-i cycle time 2) + (sequence
scan 1) + slave output delay
4-62
NETWORK/
4.11 AS-i Master Module Setting / INFORMATION
Monitoring Tool: PROCESSING
GX Configurator-AS MODULES
Overview Monitoring and Testing Functions

GX Configurator-AS is a tool incorporating automatic The monitoring and testing functions monitor the data
refresh setting and monitor/test. This provides features status and operating status in the AS-i master module and
such as, automatic refresh setting, configuration data settings can be changed as required.
registration, and configuration data save to EEPROM in The operating status can be obtained during monitoring
the QJ71AS92. This is a simple to use add-on for GX without being conscious of the buffer memory addresses
Developer. in the AS-i master module. These functions are effective
4
Although operations other than the automatic refresh for system maintenance and troubleshooting.
setting can be performed with sequence programs, use of The following data, etc. can be monitored and tested.
GX Configurator-AS allows the automatic refresh setting to (1) X/Y monitor/test
be made on-screen, thus reducing sequence programs (2) (A-slaves) List of Detected Slaves (LDS)
and also ensuring ease of setting and checking of (3) (B-slaves) List of Detected Slaves (LDS)
operating status. (4) (A-slaves) List of Active Slaves (LAS)
Note: GX Developer Ver.4 or later is required. (5) (B-slaves) List of Active Slaves (LAS)
(6) (A-slaves) List of Projected Slaves (LPS (For Read))
Automatic Refresh Setting
(7) (B-slaves) List of Projected Slaves (LPS (For Read))
The automatic refresh setting can automatically update (8) (A-slaves) List of slaves that differ from settings
communication data and CPU device memory data on the (9) (B-slaves) List of slaves that differ from settings
basis of the setting, reducing programs. (10) (A-slaves) Error Slave List
From the automatic refresh setting screen, the data can be (11) (B-slaves) Error Slave List
assigned in the AS-i master module to the read/write (12) (A-slaves) List of Peripheral Faults (LPF)
target devices in the CPU. (13) (B-slaves) List of Peripheral Faults (LPF)
The following data, etc. can be automatically refreshed. (14) (A-slaves) Number of I/O Points
(1) Input data from slave (15) (B-slaves) Number of I/O Points
(2) Output data to slave (16) (A-slaves) Input Data of Slave Addr From 1A-31A
(3) Slave lists (17) (B-slaves) Input Data of Slave Addr From 1B-31B
(4) Error code (18) (A-slaves) Output Data of Slave Addr to 1A-31A
(19) (B-slaves) Output Data of Slave Addr to 1B-31B
Automatic refresh setting screen sample (20) Analog Input Data
(21) Analog Output Data
Monitor/Test screen sample
4-63
NETWORK/
INFORMATION 4.11 AS-i Master Module Setting /
PROCESSING Monitoring Tool:
MODULES GX Configurator-AS
Command Request Function Configuration Registration/EEPROM Saving

Function
The command request function sets the request code in
the command Buffer, and makes the specified station The configuration registration/EEPROM storage function is
execute the request command. designed to register the configuration of a slave to the
The command Buffer <result> shows the execution result. QJ71AS92.
The QJ71AS92 registers the slave station configuration
Command <result> screen sample data when in the configuration mode and communicates
with the slave using the configuration data that was
registered in the protected operation mode.
Configuration registration/EEPROM storage screen

sample
4-64
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
4.12 PROFIBUS-DP Interface PROCESSING
Module: QJ71PB92D, QJ71PB93D MODULES
Overview Appearance
(1) QJ71PB92D
PROFIBUS-DP is an open field network for the automation QJ71PB92D
RUN TEST
industry. QJ71PB92D and QJ71PB93D are modules that SD/RD

READY
RPS ERR.
TOKEN
PRM SET
FAULT
are compatible with the PROFIBUS-DP standard. The

MELSEC modules, QJ71PB92D is a PROFIBUS-DP
master module, and the QJ71PB93D is a PROFIBUS-DP BUS TERMINATION
OFF ON 4
slave module. PROFIBUS I/F
Features
QJ71PB92D
Master Station
2(0.08) 91(3.59) 4.3(0.17) 27.4(1.08)
97.3(3.83)
QJ71PB92D
(2) QJ71PB93D
Terminating Terminating
Register Register
QJ71PB93D
RUN TEST
ERR.
DIA SYNC
BF FREEZE
Slave Slave
PROFIBUS I/F
Slave Station
QJ71PB93D
98 (38.6)
Network configuration software
GX Configurator-DP is a software to help you to configure
and monitor QJ71PB92D&QJ71PB93D.
Key feature of GX Configurator-DP
Parameter setting for master (QJ71PB92D)
QJ71PB93D
(1) Auto-refresh 90 (3.55) 4 (0.16) 27.4 (1.08)
(2) Consistency
Unit: mm (inch)
(3) Swap I/O bytes for each slave
Note: QJ71PB92D is required with GX Configurator-DP.
4-65
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING 4.12 PROFIBUS-DP Interface
MODULES Module: QJ71PB92D, QJ71PB93D
Item QJ71PB92D QJ71PB93D
Compatible network PROFIBUS-DP
Function Master (Class 1) Slave
9.6k bps 1,200m (3,937ft) 1,200m (3,937ft)
19.2k bps 1,200m (3,937ft) 1,200m (3,937ft)
45.45k bps — 1,200m (3,937ft)
93.75k bps 1,200m (3,937ft) 1,200m (3,937ft)
Transmission distance
187.5k bps 1,000m (3,280ft) 1,000m (3,280ft)
500k bps 400m (1,312ft) 400m (1,312ft)
1.5M bps 200m (656ft) 200m (656ft)
3M/6M/12M bps 100m (328ft) 100m (328ft)
No. of nodes 32, 62 nodes with 1 repeater, 92 with 2
—
repeaters, 122 nodes with 3 repeaters
No. of repeaters 3 repeaters max. per network —
Max. No. of slave nodes 60 —
Transmission data size Max. 32 bytes/station (normal service mode) Number of I/O data is 192 words in total.
Max. 244 bytes/station (extended service (Number of input or output data is up to 122
mode) words.)
Current consumption (5VDC) 0.57A 0.44A
System Equipment
<QJ71PB92D&QJ71PB93D accessories>
Description
Product
QJ71PB92D QJ71PB93D
Manual PROFIBUS-DP PROFIBUS-DP Slave
Master Module User's Module User's
Manual (Hardware) Manual (Hardware)

Description
Product
QJ71PB92D QJ71PB93D
PROFIBUS-DP Cable for PROFIBUS-DP (obtained by user)
cable
PROFIBUS-DP Slave station for PROFIBUS-DP
slave
Manual PROFIBUS-DP PROFIBUS-DP Slave
Master Module User's Module User's Manual
Manual
<Software>
GX SW5D5C- For PROFIBUS- for QJ71PB92D
Configurator-DP PROFID-E DP module setting f o r QJ71PB93D
: Must be obtained. : Obtained at users discretion.
4-66
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
4.13 DeviceNet Master-Slave PROCESSING
Module:QJ71DN91 MODULES
Overview Appearance
DeviceNet is an open field network for the automation QJ71DN91
RUN MS
industry. DN91 is a module that is compatible with the NS

ERR.
DeviceNet standard. The MELSEC module, QJ71DN91 is

a master, slave, and master/slave-combined module. NODE ADDRESS
QJ71DN91 as the master/slave-combined module works 4 5 6
2 3
7 8
X10
as master module for a logical network and works as slave

9 0 1
4 5 6
4
2 3
7 8
X1
module for other logical network, while there are two MODE/DR
0 : M/125
1 : M/250
9 0 1
98
78 9
logical networks in a physical network.

2 : M/500 M
3 4 56
A
3 : S/125 O
BCDE
4 : S/250 D
5 : S/500 E
2
F 01
6 : D/125
Features
7 : D/250
8 : D/500
Master node
Terminating
Network resistor
Terminating power-supply (121 ,1/4W) QJ71DN91
resistor
(121 ,1/4W) Drop line module (24V DC)
Trunk line
(main line) 90 12 27.4
Tap Power supply Slave node Unit: mm (inch)

tap
Slave node
Drop line
(branch line) Slave node Slave node
Slave node
Network configuration software

GX Configurator-DN is a software to help you to configure
and monitor QJ71DN91.
4-67
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING 4.13 DeviceNet Master-Slave
MODULES Module:QJ71DN91
Item Specifications
Node type DeviceNet master (Group 2 only client)
Node number which can be set 0 to 63
Number of Message connection 63
Master
connections I/O connection 63 (polling, bit-strobe, change of state, cyclic)
Amount of I/O communication Max. 4096 points (512 bytes), max 256 bytes per 1 node
communication data Message communication Max. 240 bytes

Node type DeviceNet slave (Group 2 server)
Setting possible node number 0 to 63
Slave Number of
I/O connection 1 (polling)
connections
Amount of
I/O communication Max. 1024 points (128 bytes)
communication data
Maximum
Communications
Thick cables Thin cables length of drop Total
speed
line
Transmission speed & Maximum cable length 125k bps 500m(1640ft.) 156m(511ft.)
100m
250k bps 250m(820ft.) 6m(20ft.) 78m(256ft.)
(328ft.)
500k bps 100m(328ft.) 39m(128ft.)
Current consumption required on the network 0.03A
Number of times to write flash ROM Max. 100000 times
Number of I/O occupied points 32 points (I/O allocation: Intelligent 32 points)
Weight 0.11kg
The maximum cable length complies with that in the DeviceNet specification (Release 2.0) Volumes 1 and 2.
Combined distance of thick and thin cables
Transmission speed Max. combined distance of thick and thin cables
125k bps Thick cable length + 5 × Thin cable length 500m (1640ft.)
250k bps Thick cable length + 2.5 × Thin cable length 250m (820ft.)
500k bps Thick cable length + Thin cable length 100m (328ft.)
System Equipment <Software>

<QJ71DN91 accessories>
GX Developer SW4D5C- For sequence
Product Description
GPPW-E erogramming
Communication Communication connector for DeviceNet or later
connector system GX SW1D5C- For DeviceNet master
Manual DeviceNet Master/slave Module User's Configurator-DN QDNU-E module setting
Manual (Hardware)

Product Description
DeviceNet Power supply for DeviceNet (obtained by
power supply user)
DeviceNet Cable for DeviceNet (obtained by user)
cable
DeviceNet slave Slave station for DeviceNet
Manual DeviceNet Master/slave Module User's
Manual
4-68
NETWORK/
4.14 Serial Communication INFORMATION
Modules: PROCESSING
QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2 MODULES
Overview Transmission of data from PLC to personal

The serial communication module (hereafter abbreviated
computer
to "QJ71C24") can connect an external device to Q series Communication using MC protocol cannot transmit data at
PLCs by a serial communication line (RS-232, RS-422, the desired timing of the PLC since it transfers all data
RS-485) to achieve the following functions. The under commands from the personal computer (PLC
always performs passive processing).
connection via a dialup line/ISDN line by an external
The on-demand function is designed to interrupt MC 4
modem/terminal adapter with a remote external device is
protocol communications for PLC to actively send data.
also enabled.
(Note 2) Using this function, data can be transmitted to the
(1) An external device (e.g. personal computer, display) external device when a machinery/equipment error occurs
performs the collection/modifying of PLC data, the or when a given condition holds. (Note 3)
monitoring of operation status, and control of the CPU Note 2: The on-demand function is unavailable for a system that
module to manage and monitor the PLC side uses the communication support software package on the
personal computer side.
equipment. Note 3: To use the on-demand function to send data, a sequence
(2) Measurement data, etc. is collected from external program is required.
devices (e.g. temperature controller, bar-code reader).
Communications with measuring
(3) Messages and numerical data, etc. is output to an
instruments such as bar-code reader
external device, e.g. for printing.
(4) Data is transferred to/from external devices and other The data communication function using the no protocol
mode can be used to transfer data between the PLC and
PLCs.
printer/bar-code reader/measuring instrument etc, in the
(5) A personal computer installed with GX Developer is
communication protocol determined by the external device.
connected to perform programming and other
The no protocol mode is a function designed to
operations to the Q series CPU. communicate any data using a sequence program and
can be used in accordance with the protocol of the
Features
external device. Note that data generation, transmission
Fast, large-capacity communication frame generation, receiving frame data extraction,
The communication port of the QJ71C24 permits sending/receiving procedure control and others must all be
performed in sequence programs.
communication at max. speed of 115.2kbps and can
communicate data at max. 960 words by MC protocol Communications with personal computer
communications. and other PLCs
Communications with personal computer The bidirectional protocol can be used to communicate
any data with other PLCs or external device, which can
To monitor or control PLC from a personal computer, the
correspond with the PLC in communication procedure.
MELSEC communication protocol (hereafter abbreviated
to "MC protocol") (Note 1) can be used to perform PLC Notification function from PLC
data reading/writing, etc. Using this protocol, PLC device The PLC CPU monitoring function is available to facilitate
data and program file reading/writing, PLC CPU status the external supervision of PLC equipment. With
control (remote RUN/STOP), etc. can be performed from supervision conditions preset to the QJ71C24, the PLC
an external device (e.g. personal computer, display). CPU monitoring function automatically collects and sends
With this protocol, sequence programs are not needed data within the CPU to external devices when those
conditions (time intervals and CPU data states) hold.
since the PLC transfers all data under commands from the
When an alarm occurs, it can also transmit alarm data to
external device.
external devices without sequence program. If a modem is
Note 1: This protocol is called "dedicated protocol" in the A/QnA
connected, it can notify pagers.
series PLC and abbreviated "MC protocol".
This function can be used when the MC protocol or
MX Component no-protocol is used.
When using MX Component, if the target in the external
device is a personal computer, a communication program
can be created easily, without concern for the
(communication procedure) details of the MC protocol.
4-69
NETWORK/
INFORMATION 4.14 Serial Communication
PROCESSING Modules:
MODULES QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2
Communications using user frame of the line to GX Developer), the access burden is carried
on the PLC equipment side.
A user frame is a frame whose header (head of the
transmitted frame) and footer (end of the transmitted Therefore, access of GX Developer to the Q series can be
frame) are pre-registered to check the send or receive limited by setting GX Developer to enable callback to the
data. These header and footer are added automatically QJ71C24.
when the data is sent, and are automatically removed
when the data is received. This function is applicable to Compatibility with remote password function
the data frames that are communicated in the no-protocol The remote password function prevents illegal access to
mode and those sent by the on-demand function and
the Q series CPU from any remote users using the modem
notification function in the MC protocol. Normally, the
transmission destination and source addresses included in function of the QJ71C24. (Note 4) The remote password
the headers need not be added for each transmission in for access to the QCPU by the user is checked by the
sequence programs. QJ71C24.
Also, checksum can be calculated as required and added Note 4: The Basic model QCPU does not support the remote
when data is sent, and frame check can be made when password function.
data is received.
Instructions Dedicated to Serial
Independent operation of communication Communication Modules
ports
The two communication ports channels (interfaces) of the The following serial communication-dedicated instructions
QJ71C24 allow any of the operation modes (MELSEC can be used to program the QJ71C24.
communication protocol, no protocol, bidirectional
Instruction Description Protocol Remarks
protocol) to be set per port, which is used in separate
ONDEMAND Data transmission using MC Basic
communication applications. on-demand function
Programming via QJ71C24 OUTPUT Transmission of specified data None
INPUT Receipt data None
You can perform PLC programming and monitoring from BIDOUT Send data Interactive
GX Developer on a personal computer through the BIDIN Receipt data Interactive
RS-232 serial communication line. When the RS-232 SPBUSY Monitor sending/receiving status MC/ none
interface of the Q series CPU is already used, using each dedicated instruction /interactive
programming/monitoring can be made from GX Developer BUFRCVS Receipt data in interrupt program None Application
/interactive
via the QJ71C24.
PRR Send data in user frame with None
Communications via multiple networks transmission schedule table
PUTE Registration (writing) of user MC/ none
The communication, both of data communication with host frame to flash ROM /interactive
system in MC protocol and access from GX Developer to GETE Reading user frame registered on MC/ none
the PLC can be done across several networks, i.e. flash ROM /interactive
MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 and Ethernet. CSET Receive data clear in MC/ none Basic
no-procedure protocol /interactive Application
Remote communications using modem Registration/cancel of PLC CPU
function monitoring, setting of
send/receive data unit (word/byte)
The QJ71C24 has the remote communication function, and send/receive area
which initializes the modern, and connects remote device
"Basic" in the Remarks field indicates the instruction explained in
through the telephone line.
the Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Basic) and
After the line has been connected, data communications
can be made by full duplex communication in the MC "Application" indicates the instruction explained in the Serial
protocol, no protocol, and bidirectional protocol. Communication Module User's Manual (Application).
When GX Developer is connected to the QJ71C24 via a Note 1: Not applicable for the Basic model QCPU.
modem, you can use the callback function that reconnects
(automatically) the line from the QJ71C24 to GX
Developer.
Since access from GX Developer to the Q series CPU is
made after the callback function is initiated (reconnection
4-70
NETWORK/
Modules: PROCESSING
Program Compatibility Appearance
The sequence program or program in external device for A QJ71C24

series computer link modules or QnA series serial QJ71C24
RUN ERR.
NEU NEU
communication modules (A1SJ71UC24-R2, CH.1 SD

RD
CH.1
SD
RD
CH.2
A1SJ71QC24N) can be used for QJ71C24 as it is. This
37.1 (1.46)
table shows the compatibility between QJ71C24 and 4
RS-232
98 (3.86)
A1SJC24.
CH.2
Compatibility with
Compatibility with 3
Programs for QnA Series 5
Programs for A Series R1 RDB

6
Serial Communication 7
r1
RS-422
Computer Link Modules /485
Modules
Other-end Compatible. Compatible. 90.5 (3.56) 4.29 (0.17) 27.4
(1.08)
external device Note that only data within (Note 5)
side program PLC is accessible in MC
(Note 1) protocol. (Note 6) QJ71C24-R2
PLC side Incompatible. Compatible.
QJ71C24-R2
program (Note 1) (Note 2, 3, 4)
RUN ERR.
NEU NEU
CH.1 SD SD CH.2
RD RD
Note 1: In any of the above cases, performance capabilities and
34.2 (1.35) 34.2 (1.35)

communication timings are incompatible. Therefore,
98 (3.86)
CH.1
utilization of programs as they are may not permit

communications. When utilizing programs, always confirm R2
their operations. CH.2
Note 2: The following instructions cannot be used with the

QJ71C24.
90.5 (3.56) 4.29 (0.17) 27.4
Instructions not READ, SWRITE, SEND, (1.08)
supported for QJ71C24 RECV, REQ Unit: mm (inch)
Note 3: The QnA series serial communication modules (such as R1 (bend radius near terminal block): Cable diameter 4
2
A1SJ71QC24N) contain E PROM but the QJ71C24 R2 (bend radius near connector): Cable diameter 4
includes flash memory instead of E2PROM. Namely, if r1 (bend radius near crimping terminal): Connectable to the
2
access to E PROM can be executed in the conventional degree with no excessive bending of the cable.
program, access to flash memory can be made. Note that
communications will stop during writing to flash memory.
Note 4: The LED ON states/switch setting read from the buffer
memory of the QJ71C24 are different from those of the
AJ71QC24.
Note 5: Access to a file in the Q series CPU by the MC protocol
uses a new dedicated command and a new program
should be created.
Note 6: The conventional A series computer link
module-compatible dedicated protocol (MC protocol level
1) has an area inaccessible to the internal device memory
of the Q mode CPU expanded from the conventional A
series CPU.
4-71
NETWORK/
PROCESSING Modules:
Function List
Main Function MC Protocol Communications
No Bidirection
Outline ON-demand Protocol al Protocol
Sub Function transmission
Communication User-defined header/footer is added to data for
using user frame transmission. Also header/footer is removed from received
data.
PLC CPU When specified conditions hold, data is sent to external
monitoring function device automatically.
Global transmission Data is broadcasted to multiple QJ71C24's connected in
function RS-422 multi-drop.
Mode changing Communications protocol switching function
Transparent code Additional code is added before the transparent and
setting added code is set for transmission.
ASCII-BIN Sent data is automatically converted into ASCII and
conversion received data is converted into BIN.
Interrupt function When specified data is received, CPU module interrupt
(Note 1) program is started.
Communication Enables access from GX Developer to CPU module.
from GX Developer
Modem function Makes modem initialization and telephone line connection
to enable data communications.
When GX Developer is connected, using the callback
function enables access from GX Developer to the PLC
after reconnection (callback) of the line from the QJ71C24.
Note 1: Not applicable for the Basic model QCPU.
Specifications
Item
QJ71C24 QJ71C24-R2
Interface CH. 1 RS-232 compliant (D-sub 9P) RS-232 compliant (D-sub 9P)
CH. 2 RS-422/485 compliant (two-piece terminal RS-232 compliant (D-sub 9P)
block)
Communication Protocol Line Protocol Line
method MELSEC communication protocol Half duplex Full duplex/half Half duplex Full duplex/half
No protocol Full duplex/half duplex Full duplex/half duplex
duplex duplex
Interactive protocol Full duplex/half Full duplex/half
duplex duplex
Synchronization method Asynchronous method
Transmission speed 50, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600, 115200bps
Usable when the total transmission speed of two interfaces is within 115200bps.
Transmission RS-232 Max. 15 (49.18) (m (feet))
distance (Note 2) RS-422/485 Max. 1200 (3934.43) (m (feet)) (total distance) -
Data format Start bit 1
Data bit 7 or 8
Parity bit 1 (vertical parity) or none
Stop bit 1 or 2
Error detection Parity check (ODD or EVEN), sumcheck
Transmission control RS-232 RS-422/485 DTR/DSR signal control and
DTR/DSR (ER/DR) control Enabled Disabled DC code control are selected.
RS/CS control Enabled Disabled
CD signal control Enabled Disabled
DC1/DC3 (Xon/Xoff) control Enabled
DC2/DC4 control
Line configuration RS-232 1:1
(connection)(Note 1) RS-422/485 1:1, 1:n, n:1, m:n, n,m+n (Total of n and m+n is -
maximum 32.)
4-72
NETWORK/
Modules: PROCESSING

Specifications
Item
QJ71C24 QJ71C24-R2
Line configuration MELSEC communication protocol 1:1, 1:n, m:n 1:1
(data No protocol 1:1, 1:n, n:1 1:1
communications) Bidirectional protocol 1:1 1:1
(Note 1)
Max. number of MC protocol communication Max. 960 words
data per No protocol communication Max. 3839 words (When two interfaces are used simultaneously, each interface cannot 4
communication Bidirectional communication communicate data of 3839 words.)
Loadable station Q series CPU (Q mode), MELSECNET/H remote I/O station (Note 3)
Number of I/O points occupied 32 points (I/O assignment: intelligent)
Internal current consumption (5VDC) 0.31A 0.26A
External dimensions 98 (3.86)(H) 27.4 (1.08)(W) 90.5 (3.55)(D) [mm(inch)]
Weight 0.20kg
Note 1: Indicates the combination for connection of external device and CPU. (External device side: PLC CPU side)
Note 2: Depending on the characteristics of the cable used, the transmission distance may be less than the distance given above.
Note 3: There are restrictions for mounting on the MELSECNET/H remote I/O station. For details, refer to the Serial Communication
Module User's Manual (Details).
Usable modem specifications

Item Specifications
Telephone line Public line/private line/cellular phone ISDN
Connection line Analog 2-wire type ISDN line
Initialization Hayes AT command-compatible product Hayes AT command-compatible product
Communication V.34/V.32bis/V.32/V.22bis/V.22/V.21V.fc, 212A/103 V.110 (B-channel circuit exchange, D-channel packet switching)
standard
Error correction Class 4, class 10 compatible, V.42 compatible
Data compression Class 5 compatible, V.42bis compatible
Others Which turns on only DR (DSR) signal independently. Should be able to exercise flow control (RS/CS control)
When using a cellular phone, it is recommended to use a modem with error correction function supports MNP class 10.
Note that communications may not be made depending on the line status.
4-73
NETWORK/
PROCESSING Modules:
System Equipment QJ71C24-R2

RS232 cable
QJ71C24
Q
J
7
1
C
-
R2
24
RS232 cable
<QJ71C24-R2 accessories>
Product Description
Q Q Manual Serial Communication Module User's
J J
7 7 Manual (Hardware)
1 1
C C
2 2 <Separately obtained products> (Note 2)
4 4
(Recommended cable)
Terminating RS422/485 cable Terminating
resistor resistor Product Description
RS-232 7/0.127 P HRV-SV, 8.5mm (0.33inch) or more in
<QJ71C24 accessories> cable OD(Oki Electric Cable make, specify the number of
pairs in .)
Product Description QJ71C24-R is equipped with D-Sub 9P (female)
Terminating resistor 110 , 130 , 2 of. each connector.( 1)
Manual Serial Communication Module User's 1 Refer to Appearance for the dimensions of the applicable
Manual (Hardware) connector.
<Separately obtained products> (Note 1) manuals separately.
The following equipment must be obtained separately. < Separately obtained manuals>
(Recommended cables) Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Basic)
Product Description Specifications, functions
Pre-operation procedures
RS-232 7/0.127 P HRV-SV, 8.5mm (0.33inch) or more in Maintenance, inspection, troubleshooting
cable OD(Oki Electric Cable make, specify the number of Basic communications method in MC/No protocol/interactive
pairs in .) protocol (Note 3)
QJ71C24 is equipped with D-Sub 9P (female) About GX Configurator-SC setting/monitoring tool
connector.( 1) Dedicated instructions
SPEV(SB)-MPC-0.2 3P, about 6.5mm (0.26inch) Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Application)
RS-422
cable in OD User-registered frame function
SPEV(SB)-0.2 3P, about 7.5mm (0.30inch) in On-demand function
OD(Mitsubishi Cable Industries make) PLC CPU monitoring function
Modem-compatible function
1 Refer to ‘Appearance’ for the dimensions of the applicable ASCII-binary conversion function
connector. Transparent code usage method
Transmission control method, communications mode, data
Note 1: Refer to <Separately obtained manuals> for acquiring communication watchdog timer changing
manuals separately. Half duplex communication
multiple to multiple communications between external device
<Software> and PLC CPU
Data receive function using interrupt program
MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual
GX Developer SW4D5C-GPPW-E or later
Protocol specification manual that describes the
GX Configurator-SC SW0D5C-QSCU-E
communication functions using the MC protocol of the serial
MX Component SW0D5C-ACT or later
communication module/Ethernet interface module, the send
: Must be obtained. : Obtained at users discretion. and receive frames for communications, and the send and
receive procedures. It also explains the remote password
unlocking and locking frames.
Note 3: The description of the MELSEC Communication protocol
is not given. For details, refer to the MELSEC
Communication Protocol Reference Manual.
4-74
NETWORK/
4.15 Serial Communication Module INFORMATION
Setting/Monitoring Tool: PROCESSING
GX Configurator-SC MODULES
Overview Monitoring and Testing Functions

GX Configurator-SC is one of the add-in tools for GX Using the monitoring function, you can display the states
Developer to set the condition data for the following of the values registered in the buffer memory (Note 1) or
modules and automatically load the error codes and other the flash ROM of the module and the operating status of
status data to the Q series CPU as a configurations the module on the screen.
monitoring tool. The testing function can turn off the error LED which is set
at error occurrence, initialize the error information, and 4
1) Serial communication module: QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2
clear the received data in the no protocol mode.
With GX Configurator-SC, you can easily check the initial You can set the data and conditions necessary to change
configuration, operation settings and operating status. the transmission control system and make registration to
Especially of those modules using modem function and the module on the screen.
broadcast function, it is recommended to use GX Items that can be monitored and tested are indicated
Configurator-SC to set various data. below.
Note: GX Developer Ver.4 or later is required.
Main monitoring and testing (data setting) function list

Item Outline Detailed Items
DR control/DC control selection, DC1/DC3 code designation, DC2/DC4 code
designation, half duplex/full duplex selection, CD terminal enable/disable, priority
designation for half-duplex simultaneous communication, transmission method
Performs transmission control
designation for half-duplex transmission resumption, no-receive monitoring time,
Transmission control method setting and status
response monitoring time, transmission monitoring time designation, unit selection
monitoring.
(word/byte), sending and receiving buffer starting address designation, sending and
receiving buffer length designation, sending and receiving transparent code designation,
ASCII-BIN conversion designation
Performs necessary condition and
MC protocol other settings and status monitoring On-demand transmission data storage first address and data length, user-registered
communication when on-demand function is used in frame number designation for on-demand, message waiting time
MC protocol communications.
Performs necessary condition and Number of receiving end data, receiving end code, receiving user-registered frame use
No protocol other settings and status monitoring yes/no designation, receiving user-registered frame number, sending user-registered
communication when No protocol communications frame number, CR/LF output designation, output first pointer designation, output quantity
are used. designation
Performs necessary condition and
Interactive protocol other settings and status monitoring
Data enable/disable designation for simultaneous transmission
communication when interactive protocol
communications are used.
Cyclic time unit designation, cyclic time designation, monitoring function designation,
Performs necessary condition
PLC CPU monitoring sending means designation, cyclic transmission pointer/output quantity/connecting data
settings and status monitoring for
function number designation, registered word block quantity designation, registered bit block
use of PLC CPU monitoring function.
quantity designation, abnormally monitoring designation, monitoring device designation
Connection channel designation, notification execution designation, connection retry
count, connection retry intervals, initialization/connection time-out period, initialization
Performs condition settings and retry count, initializing data number/connection data number designation, GX Developer
status monitoring necessary to make connection designation, no-communication interval time designation, RS-CS control
Modem
communications with remote yes/no selection, DR signal enable/disable selection for modem initialization, notification
equipment using modems. waiting time designation, remote password mismatch notifying count designation,
cumulative number of abnormal unlock processing completion times, automatic modem
initialization designation, callback function designation, callback data No. designation
Note 1: The buffer memory is interfacing volatile memory designed to transfer data between the CPU module and intelligent function
module. At power-off or system reset, all data are erased and the initial values are set from the flash memory built in the module.
To validate the data set with GX Configurator-SC at every power-on, the set data must have been registered to the nonvolatile flash
memory.
4-75
NETWORK/
INFORMATION 4.15 Serial Communication Module
PROCESSING Setting/Monitoring Tool:
MODULES GX Configurator-SC
Data for modem connection screen sample Automatic Refresh Setting
GX Configurator-SC has an automatic refresh setting

function. This function automatically stores the data in the
serial communication module buffer memory (stores the
operating status, error codes and others) to the internal
device memory of the CPU module, without the need of a
sequence program. Automatically refreshed data are
various error codes, LED ON states, modem connection
status, PLC CPU monitoring function, RS-232 signal
status, mode setting status, transmission control setting
states, etc. Automatic refresh cannot be set for the transfer
of data communicated in the no protocol, bidirectional
protocol, etc., which occurs irregularly.
Automatic refresh setting screen sample

PLC CPU monitoring system setting screen sample
4-76
NETWORK/
4.16 Intelligent Communication INFORMATION
Modules: PROCESSING
QD51, QD51-R24 MODULES
Overview
Data communication with external device
The intelligent communication module permits
programming in two different BASIC languages that Data communication can be made with an external device
operate in multitask mode. The QD51 has two RS-232 connected to the RS-232 or RS-422/485 interface with no
ports, while the QD51-R24 has one RS-232 port and one procedure.
RS-422/RS485 port.
(1) Data communication with console/terminal 4
The BASIC language allows you to create the
(2) Printout using printer
communication protocol, which is too complex to create in
a sequence program. File management
Features Using the FD/HD (hard disk) of the console, sequential
and random files (Note 1) can be handled.
Note 1: Sequential file: File of high operating efficiency
Use the RS-232 cable to connect the intelligent
whose data can be read or written sequentially
communication module and console. Random file: File with data can be read to or written from
Programming on DOS/V
personal computer necessary areas.
RS-232 cable
MELSEC Q25HCPU QJ71E71 QD51-R24

QD51
Appearance
RUN ERR.
POWER MOD E INIT. COM .ERR
CH1. CH2.
RU N OPEN
SD RD
ER R
.
10BAS E-T CH1.
US ER
BA T.
BOOT
QD51
RS -2 3 2
User FD
1 0BASE CH. 3
SDA
SG 1
PULL SDB 2
USB (FG) 3
RDA
4
(FG)
5
RS-2 32 + 1 2V RDB
6
1 2G
RS-422
MITSUBISHI /485 7
QD51
RUN ERR
PRG P.RUN
SD SD
CH.1 RD RD CH.2
Cable diameter 4 10.
The following software programs are available as a

console for BASIC programming and for saving created
34.2
CH.1
RS-232
98
programs.
R2
The following software programs are for MS-DOS.
34.2
CH.2
AD51H-BASIC software package RS-232
For IBM-PC/AT: SW IVD-AD51HP-E QD51
90.5 4.29 27.4

Compatibility with both interpreter and
compile BASICs QD51-R24
Interpreter BASIC and compile BASIC are usable. Compile
QD51-R24
RUN ERR
PRG P.RUN
SD SD
CH.1 RD RD CH.3
BASIC is effective for increasing the execution speed. CH.1
Concurrent execution of two BASIC

37.1
RS-232
programs (tasks)
98
CH.3
Up to two BASIC programs can be executed SDA

1
R1 SDB
3
simultaneously. BASIC programs can be executed in a RDA

(F6)
6
5
RDB
7
processing unit to perform distributed processing. r1 RS-422

/485
Data communications with the PLC 90.5 4.29 27.4
Unit: mm (inch)
Data transmission with the PLC CPU mounted with the
R1 (Bending radius near the terminal block): Cable diameter 4.
intelligent communication module or the PLC CPU with
R2 (Bending radius near the connector): Cable diameter 4.
MELSECNET/H is possible, including:
r1 (Bending radius near the compression terminals):
(1) Read/write of device data in PLC CPU (maximum 960
Connectable to the degree with no excessive bending of the
words/once)
cable.
(2) Read/write of buffer memory data in intelligent function
module (maximum 960 words/once)
(3) Remote STOP/RUN of PLC CPU
(4) Interruption to PLC CPU
4-77
NETWORK/
INFORMATION 4.16 Intelligent Communication
PROCESSING Modules:
MODULES QD51,QD51-R24
Function Outline
Item Function Outline
BASIC Sub CPU Complicated numeric calculation and function calculation that will increase the scan time of the PLC CPU can be made
program-based function with BASIC programs.
functions Monitor display Production condition, operation status, fault definition and other operating statuses can be displayed on the connected
function console or terminal.
Key input Production schedule, production quantity, operation, set data, etc. can be input from the keyboard of the connected
function console or terminal.
Printer function Production schedule, track record, fault definition, schedule data, inspection result, test result list, etc. can be printed out
with the connected printer.
Data input Data can be input from the bar-code reader, magnetic card reader, etc.
function
External device Computer, etc. can be connected to the RS-232C or RS-422/485 interface to send/receive data with BASIC programs.
connection
function
Clock function Clock data (year, month, day, hour, minute, second, day of week) of the PLC CPU having the clock function can be
written/read.
Online programming function Console can be connected to create, execute and correct BASIC programs with the system commands.
System commands enable execution programs to be registered to and read from the flash ROM.
Multitask debugging function Console and debugger can be connected to debug BASIC programs being executed by multitasking.
Specifications
Item
QD51 QD51-R24
Programming language AD51H-BASIC (interpreter, compile)
Number of tasks 2
Task activation condition At power-on, activated by PLC CPU (disabled for compile BASIC), activated by other task
Internal memory Program memory: 64k bytes/2 tasks (Capacity of task 1 + capacity of task 2 ≤ 64k bytes)
Common memory: 8k bytes
Buffer memory: 6k bytes
Expanded relay (EM): 1024 points
Expanded register (ED): 1024 points (2k bytes)
General-purpose I/O Input 27 points, output 23 points
(from/to PLC CPU)
Memory protection Unavailable
Interface CH.1 RS-232 compliant (D-Sub9P) RS-232 compliant (D-Sub9P)
CH.2 RS-232 compliant (D-Sub9P) —
CH.3 — RS-422/485 compliant (two-piece terminal block)
Communication system Full-duplex
Synchronization system Synchronous
Transmission speed bps 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400bps
Usable when the total transmission speed of two channels is within 38400bps.
Transmission RS-232 Max. 15m (49.18ft.)
distance (Note 1) RS422 — 1200m (3934.43ft.) (overall distance)
Data format Start bit 1
Data bit 7 or 8
Parity bit Even, odd, none
Stop bit 1 or 2
Transmission RS-232 RS-422/485 DTR/DSR signal control and DC code
control DTR/DSR (ER/DR) Yes No control are selected.
control
RS/CS control Yes No
CD signal control No
DC1/DC3 (Xon/Xoff) Yes
control
DC2/DC4 control No
4-78
NETWORK/
4.16 Intelligent Communication INFORMATION
Modules: PROCESSING
QD51, QD51-R24 MODULES

Specifications
Item
QD51 QD51-R24
Circuit RS-232 1:1
configuration RS-422 — 1:1, 1:n, n:1, m:n (Total of n and m+n is maximum 32.)
(Connection)
(Note 2)
Clock function No
Power failure compensation No
4
Storage of user program onto ROM Only program area data is stored onto flash ROM
Console IBM PC/AT compatible personal computer
Multitask debugging Possible (using debugger)
Loadable station Q series CPU (Q mode), MELSECNET/H remote I/O station (Note 3)
Number of occupied I/O points 32 points (I/O divided: intelligent)
Internal current consumption 0.26A 0.31A
(5VDC)
External dimensions 98 (3.86)(H) 27.4 (1.08)(W) 90.5 (3.55)(D) (mm(inch))
Weight 0.20kg
Note 1: The transmission distance may be less than given in the table depending on the characteristics of the cable used.
Note 2: Indicates the combination when the external device and PLC CPU are connected. (External device side: PLC CPU side)
Note 3: There are restrictions for mounting on the MELSECNET/H remote I/O station. For details, refer to the Intelligent Communication
Module User's Manual (Details).
<Separately obtained products> (Note 1)

System Equipment
QD51 Product Description
RS-232 7/0.127 P HRV-SV, 8.5mm (0.33inch) or more
RS232 cable
cable in OD(Oki Electric Cable make, specify the number
of pairs in .)
QD51 is equipped with D-Sub 9P (female)
Q connector.( 1)
D Cable for For IBM Use the following cables in
5 console/ PC/AT combination.
1 debugger compatible Conversion cable FA-CBL25S9S or
personal conversion adaptor FA-A25S9S
computer (personal computer side) ( 2) +
<QD51 accessories>
RS-232 cable AC30R2 + conversion
Product Description cable FA-CBL25S9S or conversion
Manual Intelligent Communication Modules User’s adaptor FA-A25S9S (QD51 side) ( 2)
Manual (Hardware) User-fabricated cable ( 3)
1 Refer to ‘Appearance’ for the dimensions of the applicable
connector.
2 This product is manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric
Engineering Co., Ltd.
3 Refer to the Intelligent Communication Module User's Manual
for details.
Note 1: Refer to <Separately obtained manuals>.
4-79
NETWORK/
INFORMATION 4.16 Intelligent Communication
PROCESSING Modules:
MODULES QD51,QD51-R24
QD51-R24 <Software>
GX SW4D5C-GPPWFor sequence
Developer or later programming
For parameter setting
AD51H-BA SW1IVD-AD51HP- For IBM PC/AT
compatible personal
RS232 cable SIC E (Selected)
computer
software
package
Q Q Compiling Turbo Assembler Turbo Assembler
D J
5 7 software Ver5.0 (For IBM PC/AT (Selected)
1 1
C package compatible personal (Note 4)
-
R 2
2
4
4 available computer) (Note 3)
on the
Terminating Terminating market
RS422/485 cable
resistor resistor : Must be obtained. : Obtained at users discretion.
Note 3: Purchase the product Borland C++ Suite, which includes
<QD51-R24 accessories>
Turbo Assembler.
Product Description
Terminating 110 , 330 , 2 of. each Note 4: Necessary for compile only.
resistor
Manual Intelligent Communication Modules User’s <Separately obtained manuals>
Manual (Hardware) Intelligent Communication Module User's Manual
Specifications, functions
<Separately obtained products> (Note 2) Pre-operation procedures
Maintenance, inspection, troubleshooting
Dedicated instructions
Product Description AD51H-BASIC Programming Manual (Commands)
RS-232 cable 7/0.127 P HRV-SV, 8.5mm (0.33inch) or AD51H-BASIC programming methods
more in OD(Oki Electric Cable make, specify Data file I/O processing
the number of pairs in .) Multitasking
QD51-R24 is equipped with D-Sub 9P (female) Communication with external device
connector.( 1) Program debugging
RS-422 cable SPEV(SB)-MPC-0.2 3P, about 6.5mm Instructions, functions
(0.26inch) in OD AD51H-BASIC Programming Manual (Programming
SPEV(SB)-0.2 3P, about 7.5mm (0.30inch) in Editing, Compiling)
OD(Mitsubishi Cable Industries make) Communication module startup and mode shift
Cable for For IBM Use the following cables in Online programming operation
console/ PC/AT combination. Multitask debugging operation
debugger compatible Conversion cable: FA-CBL25S9S Creation of BASIC program with general-purpose editor
personal or conversion adaptor: FA-A25S9S Program creation with compiler
computer (personal computer side) ( 2) +
RS-232 cable: AC30R2 +
conversion cable: FA-CBL25S9S
or conversion adaptor: FA-A25S9S
(QD51 side) ( 2)
User-fabricated cable ( 3)
1 Refer to Appearance for the dimensions of the applicable
connector.
2 Introduced product (Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.
make).
3 Refer to the Intelligent Communication Module User's Manual
for details.
manuals separately.
4-80
NETWORK/
4.17 MELSECNET/MINI-S3: INFORMATION
A1SJ71PT32-S3, PROCESSING
A1SJ71T32-S3 MODULES
Overview Connectable remote modules

All conventional MELSECNET/MINI-S3 and A2C series
The MELSECNET/MINI-S3 is a wire-saving remote I/O remote I/O modules that are connectable to
network using plastic fiber or twisted pair cables. The A2C MELSECNET/MINI-S3 are supported for connection. For
series I/O and special modules, FX series PLC, partner full information on the usable modules, refer to the
MELSEC-AnS catalog.
maker solenoid valves and others can be connected to
MELSECNET/MINI-S3 as remote modules. Twisted pair cable specifications
4
The A1SJ71PT32-S3 and A1SJ71T32-S3 are usable with Item Specifications
Cable type Shielded twisted pair cable
the High Performance model QCPU only.
Number of pairs 2P or more
Conductor resistance 88.0 /km max. @20 C
Features Capacitance Average 60nF/km max. @1kHz
Characteristic impedance 110 ± 10
Optical cable specifications
Main base: Q3 B
Item Specifications
A1SJ71PT32-S3/A1SJ71T32-S3 Type Plastic fiber cable
Transmission loss 260dB/km max.
Extension base: QA1S6 B Fiber OD 1000 m
Connector 1-core connector
Permissible flexing radius 25mm (0.99inch)
Optical fiber cables are available from Mitsubishi Electric
Remote I/O Remote I/O Remote I/O
System Service.
MELSECNET/MINI-S3 Restrictions on use with Q mode

Remote I/O Remote I/O Remote I/O The following MELSECNET/MINI-S3 dedicated
instructions compatible with the A/QnA cannot be used
The MELSECNET/MINI-S3 master module can be with the Q mode. Programming must be performed using
mounted on QAS1S6 B. the FROM/TO and similar instructions.
Unusable instructions INPUT, PRN, PR, MINI, MINIERR,
SPBUSY, SPCLR
The Q mode CPU does not have the MELSECNET/MINI

automatic refresh function.
A1SJ71PT32-S3 A1SJ71T32-S3
Compatible cable Optical cable Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable
Number of mountable master modules None restriction
For every Max. number of link stations 64 stations (Note 1)
master
Number of I/O points 512 points
module
I/O refresh time 3.2 to 18ms (when 64 stations are connected) (Note 2)
Transmission speed 1.5Mbps
Max. inter-station distance 1 (3.28ft.) to 50m 1 (3.28ft.) to 100m 1 (3.28ft.) to 100m (327.87ft.) (Note 4)
(163.93ft.) (Note 3) (327.87ft.) (Note 4)
Number of I/O points occupied I/O dedicated mode: 32 points, extension mode: 48 points (I/O assignment: intelligent)
Weight 0.60kg
Note 1: The max. number of link stations indicates the total number of occupied stations assigned to remote modules is up to 64. However,
the max. number of connectable remote terminal modules (number of occupied stations: 4) is 14.
Note 2: The I/O refresh time depends on the number of remote module stations connected, their type, and the operating mode of the
master module.
Note 3: Communications may not be made if the inter-station distance of the optical cable is less than 1m (3.28ft.). When the 2VTPE-1
cable (Manufactured by Mitsubishi Cable Industries) is used, the max. inter-station distance is 35m (114.75ft.).
Note 4: The max. inter-station distance depends on the twisted pair cable diameter used. It is 50m (163.93ft.) for cables of 0.2mm2 to
0.5mm2, and 100m (327.87ft.) for cables of 0.5mm2 or more.
4-81
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING 4.18 MELSEC-I/OLINK:
MODULES A1SJ51T64
Overview Performance Specifications

The MELSEC-I/OLINK is a simple, wire-saving remote I/O Item Specifications
network that does not need network parameter setting and
Max. number of I/O points 128 points (when I/O composite
can be programmed as if you are using ordinary I/O
remote modules are used)
modules.
I/O refresh time Approx. 5.4ms
It can control 64 points of input or output (up to 128 points
Applicable communication Twisted pair cable or cabtyre cable
when 8- or 16-point composite modules are used) per
cable 0.75mm2 or more
network. This network uses a multidrop bus wiring system
Transmission speed 38.4kbps
and also supports T branch connection. In addition, it does
Synchronous system For frame synchronization and bit
not require any terminations.
synchronization
The A1SJ51T64 is applicable to the High Performance
model QCPU only. Error control Parity check
Transmission path form Bus system (T branch possible,
Features terminating resistors not needed)
Transmission distance Overall 200m (Overall 665.74feet)
System configuration Number of I/O points 64 points (I/O assignment: intelligent)
Main base: Q3 B occupied
External rated voltage 24VDC (+15%/-10%)
A1SJ51T64 power (for transmission path)
Extension base: QA1S6 B supply current Typ 90mA
consumption
I/OLINK Internal current 0.115A
consumption (5VDC)
Remote I/O Remote I/O Remote I/O
Weight 0.30kg
The A1SJ51T64 can be used with QA1S6 B.
Connectable remote I/O
All conventional remote I/O modules that are connectable
to MELSEC-I/OLINK are supported for connection.
For full information on the usable modules, refer to the
MELSEC-A [small/mid-scale-compatible types] catalog.
Twisted pair cable specifications
Item Specifications
Cable type Shielded twisted Cabtyre cable
pair cable
Wire diameter, 0.75mm2 1P 0.75mm2 2C
number of pairs
Conductor 29 /km max. @20ºC
resistance
Capacitance 75nf/km max.
—
@1kHz
Characteristic 100
—
impedance
Insulation 500M or more
resistance
Withstand voltage 500VAC 1 minute or longer
OD 8.5 (0.33) max. 9 (0.35) max.
(mm (inch)) (mm (inch))
Restrictions on use with Q mode

No restrictions.
4-82
NETWORK/
4.19 OPCN – 1 Open PLC INFORMATION
Network : PROCESSING
A1SJ71J92-S3, A1SJ72J95 MODULES
Overview The AnS series special, network and I/O composite

modules cannot be loaded.
The OPCN-1 is an open PLC network standardized by the
Japan Electrical Manufacturers' Association and can Twisted pair cable specifications
control OPCN-1-compatible slave stations, such as remote
Item Specifications
I/O, solenoid valves, robots and indicators, from the
Cable type Shielded twisted pair cable
master PLC. Number of pairs 2P or more
The A1SJ71J92-S3 is usable with the High Performance Conductor resistance 88.0 /km max. @20ºC 4
model QCPU only. Capacitance Average 60nF/km max. @1kHz
Characteristic 110 ± 10
Features impedance
System configuration Restrictions on use with Q mode

Main base: Q3 B When device memory data in the master PLC are
Master
A1SJ71J92-S3 accessed by slave stations by the GET-PUT service, the

accessible ranges are limited as indicated below.
Extension base: QA1S6 B
Device Type Range
OPCN X 0 – 7FF
Y 0 – 7FF
M/L/S 0 – 8191
Slave
Main base: Robot, solenoid

A1S3 B valve, indicator, B 0 – FFF
etc. T Contact 0 – 2047
A1SJ72J95 Coil 0 – 2047
The A1SJ71J92-S3 can be mounted with QA1S6 B. Current value 0 – 2047
Set value 0 – 2047
The A1SJ72J95 can be mounted with A1S3 B.
C Contact 0 – 1023
Coil 0 – 1023
Modules connectable to slave stations
Current value 0 – 1023
Set value 0 – 1023
The A1SJ72J95 slave station module can be loaded in the
D 0 – 6143
CPU slot of the A1S3 B to control the AnS series I/O W 0 – FFF
modules (A1SX , A1SY ). F 0 – 2047
Specifications
Item
A1SJ71J92-S3 A1SJ72J95
OPCN-1 -compliant class TYPE-M52I (master station) TYPE-S52I (slave station)
Transmission speed 125k/250k/500k/1M bps
Communication system/modulation system/ Half duplex synchronous communication/NRZI system/EIA RS-485/bus format
electrical characteristic/transmission path
Overall distance Depends on transmission speed.
125kbps: 1000m (3278.69feet),250kbps: 800m (2622.95feet),
500kbps:480m (1573.77feet), 1Mbps: 240m (786.89feet)
Number of stations connectable Up to 31 slave stations to one master station
Transmission right control Polling/selecting
Service type Initial setting Broadcasting Initial setting
I/O Message write I/O
Reset Message read Reset
Data write GET
Data read PUT
Number of link points Input + output 2048 Input + output 2048
Number of I/O points occupied 32 points (I/O assignment: intelligent)
Internal current consumption (5VDC) 0.40A 0.40A
4-83
NETWORK/
INFORMATION
PROCESSING
MODULES 4.20 S-LINK: A1SJ71SL92N
Overview Performance Specifications

The A1SJ71SL92N is a master module connected to Item Specifications
SUNX's S-LINK equipment to control it. S-LINK can Transmission system Interactive time-sharing
control 128 points per master module and be used as a multiplex transmission
wire-saving network. system
Synchronization system Bit synchronization system,
The A1SJ71SL92N is usable with the High Performance
frame synchronization
model QCPU only.
system
Features Transmission protocol S-LINK protocol
Transmission speed 28.5kbps
System configuration Transmission distance Signal trunk: Max. overall
distance 200m (655.74feet)
Main base: Q3 B (400m (1311.48feet)when
A1SJ71SL92N booster is used)
Connection system T-branch multidrop
Extension base: QA1S6 B connection/multidrop
connection[+24V•0V•D•G
S-LINK (with short protection across
D-G)]
Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Number of branches 10 branches max.
Number of control I/O points 128 points
The A1SJ71SL92N can be mounted on QA1S6 B. External 24VDC ±10% 24VDC ±10% /permissible
power /permissible ripple p-p±10% or less
Connectable remote modules supply for ripple p-p±10%
S-LINK or less
The S-LINK equipment of SUNX Ltd. can be connected. system Across D-G: Across D-G: 1.60A, across
1.60A, across +24-0V: 5.00A
Restrictions on use with Q mode
+24-0V: 5.00A
None. Number of I/O points occupied 32 points (I/O assignment:
intelligent)
(5VDC)
Weight 0.27kg
4-84
5. I/O MODULES
5.1 Overview of I/O Modules
Overview Online module change condition
To perform online module change, the following CPU, I/O
The Q series I/O modules are compatible with the
modules, GX Developer and base units are required.
high-function, high-performance Q series CPU module (Q
(1) CPU
mode only) bus. They are also designed for Q series small
The Q12PHCPU or Q25PHCPU is required. However,
size and are compact and power-saving in consideration
online module change is not supported for the
of the environment.
MELSECNET/H remote I/O station. For precautions of
Features multiple CPU system configurations, refer to the
Precautions for Multiple CPU System Configuration in
Ultra compact
Section 3.5 Overview of Multiple CPU System.
A building block type I/O module measures 98mm (3.86 (2) I/O modules 5
inch) in height by 27.4mm (1.08 inch) in width by 90mm
Module Type Restrictions
(3.55 inch) in depth.
Input module No
Note 1: The Q series I/O modules are designed to be used
Output module (There are no restrictions on the product
with Q3 SB, Q3 B, Q5 B or Q6 B. They
I/O mixed module versions, etc.)
cannot be used with QA1S3 B, QA1S6 B or
QA65B. They cannot be used in A-mode, either. The interrupt module cannot be changed online.
For the online module change of the intelligent function
Multi-functional modules, refer to the sections of the corresponding intelligent
(1) The DC input modules have a user variable input function modules.
response time. (3) GX Developer
The response time can be selected from among 1, 5, GX Developer of Version 7.10L or later is required.
10, 20 and 70ms: 1ms for fast response or 70ms for (4) Base units
high-reliability response (in consideration of noise (a) For online module change, use the main base unit
margin, etc.).
and Q6 B extension base unit.
Using the QX40-S1, QX41-S1 or QX42-S1 high-speed
Online module change can be done for the modules
input module allows you to select the input response
mounted on the main base unit and Q6 B
time from among 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.6 and 1ms.
extension base unit.
(2) The lineup of the DC transistor output modules have a
(b) Online module change cannot be done for the
short-circuit protection function, which prevents
transistors from being damaged by a short circuit, etc. modules mounted on the Q5 B extension base unit.
Also, when the Q5 B is used, online module
Wiring capability improvement change cannot be done for the modules mounted
(1) The relay output modules do not require external on the main base unit.
power supply. Energy-saving
Maintainability improvement 5VDC reduced current consumption for transistor output
(1) The modules can be mounted/removed with a single modules.
motion (screwing not needed).
Type Input Current
Screwing may be needed under some operating
QY81P Approx. 95mA
conditions.
A1SY81EP Approx. 500mA
(2) If a CPU error occurs, output hold/clear setting can be
done per output module.
Safety
(3) The mounted module configuration can be confirmed
on the programming software screen making it very (1) The 100/200VAC rated modules are enhanced in
useful for maintenance. insulation between the external hazardous voltage and
internal circuit.
Compatibility
The module that becomes faulty during control can be
changed for the module of the same type without the (1) Since the connector shape and pin layout of the 32-
system being stopped. and 64-point modules are the same as those of the
A/AnS series, the connector terminal block conversion
modules of the A/AnS series and the connectors wired
for the AnS series I/O modules can be used.
5-1
I/O
MODULES
5.1 Overview of I/O Modules
Instructions Input Derating (Temperature-Dependent

Input ON Ratio Restriction)
(1) Note that the screw terminal block layout is different
between the MELSEC-Q series 16-point I/O modules Some input module models may require their input
and MELSEC-AnS series 16-point I/O modules. specifications to be derated. This restriction is provided to
(2) The external wiring connectors of the 32- and 64-point prevent a failure due to excessive heat generated in the
input section, and is influenced by the ambient
modules are optional. Please purchase them after
temperature, input voltage, number of input ON points,
confirming the external wiring applicable connector
and input ON time.
types given in the specifications of the corresponding
The derating diagrams are provided for the modules that
modules. The external wiring terminal blocks of the
require derating for the input specifications.
16-point modules are provided for (fitted to) the
products. Relay Life of Relay Output Module
(3) When using the 16-point modules, use wires of 0.3 to The following chart shows the service life of the output
0.75mm2 core and 2.8mm (0.11inch) OD max. module relay.
It is also recommended to cover the power connections Applicable module ................. QY10, QY18A
of the crimping terminals with insulation or mark tubes.
600
(Select the insulation or mark tubes that are compatible
with the crimping terminals used.) 500
(4) Precautions for use of QY22
We recommend you to fit a fuse to the external
terminal to prevent the external device and module 200
from burnout if a load is shorted.
10000 times)
The fuse conforming to IEC60127, Sheet 1 is 100

recommended.
The following fuses have been confirmed by Mitsubishi 50
Electric to operate properly.

Switching life (
Fuse type 216 02.5 216 002

20
Rated current 2.5A 2A
Manufacturer Littelfuse, Inc
10
(5) Precautions for use of QY68A
30VDC
We recommend you to fit a fuse to the external 5
t=0ms
100V DC
terminal to prevent the external device and module t=7ms
100VAC COS =0.7
from burnout if a load is shorted. 200VAC COS =0.7
24V DC 100VAC COS =0.35
The recommended fuse is a fast-acting type of 3A 2 t=7ms
200VAC COS =0.35
rated current.
The following fuses have been confirmed by Mitsubishi 1
0.1 0.5 1 2 5 10
Electric to operate properly. Switching current (A)
Fuse type 216 3.15 312 003
Rated current 3.15A 3A t: time constant, COS : power factor
Manufacturer Littelfuse, Inc
5-2
I/O
MODULES
5.2 Input Modules
QX10 AC Input Module

Type AC Input Module
Specifications QX10 Appearance
Number of input points 16 points
Isolation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage, frequency 100-120VAC (+10/-15%) 50/60Hz ( 3Hz) (distortion factor within 5%) QX10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Rated input current Approx. 8mA (100VAC, 60Hz), approx. 7mA (100VAC, 50Hz) 8 9 A B CDE F
Input derating Refer to the derating chart.
Inrush current Max. 200mA within 1ms (at 132VAC)
ON voltage/ON current 80VAC or higher/5mA or higher (50Hz, 60Hz)
OFF voltage/OFF current 30VAC or lower/1.7mA or lower (50Hz, 60Hz)
Input impedance Approx. 12k (60Hz), approx. 15k (50Hz) 1
0
0 5
Response time OFF ON 15ms or less (100VAC 50Hz, 60Hz) 2 1
ON OFF 20ms or less (100VAC 50Hz, 60Hz) 3 2
4
Online module change Possible (Refer to Section 5.1 for the condition.) 3
5
Dielectric withstand voltage 1780VAC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000m (6557.38ft.)) 4
6
Insulation resistance 10M or more by insulation resistance tester 7
5
Noise immunity By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width 8 6
and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency 9 7
First transient noise IEC61000-4-4: 1kV A 8
Protection degree IP1X B
9
Common terminal arrangement 16 points/common (common terminal: TB17) C
A
Operation indicator ON indication (LED) D
E
B
External connections 18-point terminal block (M3 6 screws)
F C
Applicable wire size 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11in.) OD max.)
COM D
Applicable crimping terminal R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used.) NC
E
Number of occupied I/O points 16 points (I/O assignment: Input) 100VAC
5VDC internal current consumption 0.05A (TYP. all points ON)

8mA60Hz
7mA50Hz
F
External dimensions 98 (3.86)(H) 27.4 (1.08)(W) 90 (3.54)(D) (mm(inch))
Weight 0.17kg
Derating Chart Terminal Block Number Signal Name

(%) TB1 X00
100 TB2 X01
90
TB3 X02
ON 80 120VAC
ratio 70 TB4 X03
60 132VAC
50 TB5 X04
40 TB6 X05
0 10 20 30 40 50 55( C )
Ambient temperature TB7 X06
External Connections TB8 X07

TB9 X08
LED
TB10 X09
TB 1
R
Internal TB11 X0A
R
R
circuit TB12 X0B

TB13 X0C
TB14 X0D
TB16
TB15 X0E
TB17
TB16 X0F
100VAC
TB17 COM
TB18 Vacant
5-3
I/O
MODULES
5.2 Input Modules
QX28 AC Input Module

Type AC Input Module
Rated input voltage, frequency 100-240VAC (+10/-15%) 50/60Hz ( 3Hz) (distortion factor within 5%) QX28
Rated input current Approx. 17mA (200VAC, 60Hz), approx. 14mA (200VAC, 50Hz) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Approx. 8mA (100VAC, 60Hz), approx. 7mA (100VAC, 50Hz)
Input derating Refer to the derating chart.
Inrush current Max. 500mA within 1ms (at 264VAC)
ON voltage/ON current 80VAC or higher/5mA or higher (50Hz, 60Hz)
0
OFF voltage/OFF current 30VAC or lower/1.7mA or lower (50Hz, 60Hz) 0
1
Input impedance Approx. 12k (60Hz), approx. 15k (50Hz) 2 1
Response time OFF ON 10ms or less (100VAC 50Hz, 60Hz) 3 2
ON OFF 20ms or less (100VAC 50Hz, 60Hz) 4
3
4
5
8 6
Noise immunity By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width
B
Protection degree IP1X 9
C
Common terminal arrangement 8 points/common (common terminal: TB17) A
D
Operation indicator ON indication (LED) E
B
External connections 18-point terminal block (M3 6 screws) F C
Applicable wire size 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11in.) OD max.) COM D
Applicable crimping terminal R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used.) NC
E
100VAC
Number of occupied I/O points 16 points (I/O assignment: Input) 8mA60Hz F
7mA50Hz
Weight 0.20kg
Derating Chart Terminal Block Number Signal Name

(%) TB1 X00
100% 45 C
100 100% 55 C 240V TB2 Vacant
90 264V
87.5% 55 C TB3 X01
ON 80
ratio 70 TB4 Vacant
60
50 TB5 X02
40 TB6 Vacant
0 10 20 30 40 50 55( C )
Ambient temperature TB7 X03
External Connections TB8 Vacant
TB9 X04
LED TB10 Vacant

TB 1
R
R Internal TB11 X05
R
circuit
TB12 Vacant
TB13 X06
TB14 Vacant
TB15
TB15 X07
TB17
TB16 Vacant
100/200AC
TB17 COM
TB18 Vacant
5-4
I/O
MODULES
5.2 Input Modules
QX40 DC Input Module (Positive Common Type)

Type DC Input Module (Positive Common Type)
Rated input voltage 24VDC (+20/-15%, ripple ratio within 5%)
QX40
Rated input current Approx. 4mA 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Input derating No 8 9 A B CDE F
ON voltage/ON current 19V or higher/3mA or higher

OFF voltage/OFF current 11V or lower/1.7mA or lower
Input impedance Approx. 5.6k
0
5
Response time OFF ON 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms or less (CPU parameter setting) 0
1
Initial setting is 10ms.
2 1
ON OFF 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms or less (CPU parameter setting) 3 2
Initial setting is 10ms. 4
3
4
5
8 6
First transient noise IEC61000-4-4: 1kV
A 8
B
C
D

B
- +
Applicable wire size 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11in.) OD max.) COM D
NC
Applicable crimping terminal R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used.) E
Number of occupied I/O points 16 points (I/O assignment: Input)
24VDC F
4mA
Weight 0.16kg
External Connections Terminal Block Number Signal Name

TB1 X00
TB2 X01
TB3 X02
TB4 X03
TB5 X04
TB 1 LED TB6 X05
R
Internal TB7 X06
R
circuit
TB8 X07
TB9 X08
TB10 X09
TB16
TB11 X0A
TB17
TB12 X0B
24VDC
TB13 X0C
TB14 X0D
TB15 X0E
TB16 X0F
TB17 COM
TB18 Vacant
: For the setting method, refer to the Building Block I/O Module User's Manual.
Note that OFF ON and ON OFF response times cannot be set separately.
5-5
I/O
MODULES
5.2 Input Modules
QX40-S1 DC Input Module (Positive Common Type)

Specifications QX40-S1 Appearance
Rated input current Approx. 6mA QX40-S1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ON voltage/ON current 19V or higher/4.0mA or higher
Response Set value 1 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.6 1 0
time OFF ON Typ 0.05ms 0.15ms 0.30ms 0.55ms 1.05ms 1 0
max 0.10ms 0.20ms 0.40ms 0.60ms 1.20ms 2 1
ON OFF Typ 0.15ms 0.20ms 0.35ms 0.60ms 1.10ms
3 2
4
max 0.20ms 0.30ms 0.50ms 0.70ms 1.30ms 3
5
6
5
Insulation resistance 10M or more by insulation resistance tester 8 6
and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency A 8
First transient noise IEC61000-4-4: 1kV B
9
Protection degree IP2X C
A
Common terminal arrangement 16 points/common (common terminal: TB17) D
B
E
Operation indicator ON indication (LED)
F C
External connections 18-point terminal block (M3 6 screws) - +
COM D
Applicable wire size 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11in.) OD max.) NC
E
Applicable crimping terminal R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used.) 24VDC F
Number of occupied I/O points 16 points (I/O assignment: High-speed input) 6mA

Weight 0.20kg

TB1 X00
TB2 X01
TB3 X02
TB4 X03
LED
TB5 X04
TB 1
R
TB6 X05
Internal
TB7 X06
R
circuit
TB8 X07
TB9 X08
TB10 X09
TB16 TB11 X0A
TB17 TB12 X0B
TB13 X0C
24VDC
TB14 X0D
TB15 X0E
TB16 X0F
TB17 COM
TB18 Vacant
1: CPU parameter setting. (Initial setting is 0.2ms)
Response time can be changed on SW5D5C-GPPW or later.
For the setting method, refer to the Building Block I/O Module User's Manual.
5-6
I/O
MODULES
5.2 Input Modules

Rated input current Approx. 4mA
QX41
Input derating Refer to the derating chart. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ON voltage/ON current 19V or higher/3mA or higher 8 9 A B C D E F
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
OFF voltage/OFF current 11V or lower/1.7mA or lower 8 9 A B C D E F
Input impedance Approx. 5.6k 24VDC
QX41 5
Response time OFF ON 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms or less (CPU parameter setting) 1 4mA
ON OFF 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms or less (CPU parameter setting) 1
Online module change Possible (Refer to Section 5.1 for the condition.)
Dielectric withstand voltage 560VAC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000m (6557.38ft.))
Insulation resistance 10M or more by insulation resistance tester
and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency
Protection degree IP2X
Common terminal arrangement 32 points/common (common terminal: B01, B02)
External connections 40-pin connector
Applicable wire size 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less (for A6CON1, A6CON4) 2
External wiring connector (Sold separately) A6CON1, A6CON2, A6CON3, A6CON4
Applicable connector/terminal block A6TBXY36, A6TBXY54, A6TBX70
conversion module
Weight 0.15kg
Derating Chart Pin-Outs Pin No. Signal No. Pin No. Signal No.
(%) B20 X00 A20 X10
100 B19 X01 A19 X11
90 B18 X02 A18 X12
B20 A20
80 B17 X03 A17 X13
ON 28.8VDC B19 A19
ratio 70 B18 A18 B16 X04 A16 X14
60 B17 A17
B16 A16 B15 X05 A15 X15
50
B15 A15 B14 X06 A14 X16
40 B14 A14
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 ( C ) B13 X07 A13 X17
B13 A13
Ambient temperature B12 X08 A12 X18
B12 A12
External Connections B11 A11 B11 X09 A11 X19
B10 A10
B20 LED B9 A9 B10 X0A A10 X1A
R B8 A8 B09 X0B A09 X1B
Internal B7 A7
R
circuit B6 A6 B08 X0C A08 X1C

B5 A5 B07 X0D A07 X1D
B4 A4
B3 A3
B06 X0E A06 X1E
B2 A2 B05 X0F A05 X1F
A05 B1 A1 B04 Vacant A04 Vacant
B03 Vacant A03 Vacant
B02 Module front view
B01 B02 COM A02 Vacant
24VDC
B01 COM A01 Vacant
1: For the setting method, refer to the Building Block I/O Module User's Manual.
3: When using A6CON2 or A6CON3, refer to Section 12.1.
5-7
I/O
MODULES
5.2 Input Modules

Rated input current Approx. 4mA QX41-S1
8 9 A B C D E F
ON voltage/ON current 19V or higher/3mA or higher 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 A B C D E F
OFF voltage/OFF current 9.5V or lower/1.5mA or lower
QX41-S1
4mA
Response time Set value 1 0.1ms 0.2ms 0.4ms 0.6ms 1ms
OFF ON typ 0.05ms 0.15ms 0.30ms 0.55ms 1.05ms
max 0.12ms 0.20ms 0.40ms 0.60ms 1.20ms
ON OFF typ 0.15ms 0.20ms 0.35ms 0.60ms 1.10ms
max 0.20ms 0.30ms 0.50ms 0.70ms 1.30ms
conversion module
Number of occupied I/O points 32 points (I/O assignment: High-speed input)
Weight 0.15kg
(%) B20 X00 A20 X10
100 B19 X01 A19 X11
90 B18 X02 A18 X12
B20 A20
80 B17 X03 A17 X13
Simultaneous 28.8VDC B19 A19
70 B18 A18
B16 X04 A16 X14
ON ratio B17 A17
60
B16 A16 B15 X05 A15 X15
50
B15 A15 B14 X06 A14 X16
40 B14 A14
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 ( C ) B13 A13 B13 X07 A13 X17
Ambient temperature B12 A12 B12 X08 A12 X18
B11 A11
External Connections B10 A10
B11 X09 A11 X19
B20 LED B09 A09 B10 X0A A10 X1A
B08 A08
B09 X0B A09 X1B
Internal B07 A07
circuit B06 A06 B08 X0C A08 X1C
B05 A05 B07 X0D A07 X1D
B04 A04
B03 A03 B06 X0E A06 X1E
B02 A02 B05 X0F A05 X1F
B01 A01
A05 B04 Vacant A04 Vacant
B02 Module front view
B01 B02 COM A02 Vacant
24VDC B01 COM A01 Vacant
5-8
I/O
MODULES
5.2 Input Modules

Rated input voltage 24VDC (+20/-15%, ripple ratio within 5%) QX42
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Rated input current Approx. 4mA 8 9 A B C D E F
8 9 A B C D E F
OFF voltage/OFF current 11V or lower/1.7mA or lower QX42
DISPLAY
4mA F L
Common terminal arrangement 32 points/common (common terminal: 1B01, 1B02, 2B01, 2B02)
Operation indicator ON indication (LED), 32 point switch-over using switch
External wiring connector (Sold separately) A6CON1, A6CON2, A6CON3
conversion module
Weight 0.18kg
Derating Chart Pin-Outs Pin No. Signal No. Pin No. Signal No. Pin No. Signal No. Pin No. Signal No.
(%) 1B20 X00 1A20 X10 2B20 X20 2A20 X30
100
1B19 X01 1A19 X11 2B19 X21 2A19 X31
90
80 B20 A20 1B18 X02 1A18 X12 2B18 X22 2A18 X32
ON 70 B19 A19
1B17 X03 1A17 X13 2B17 X23 2A17 X33
ratio 24VDC B18 A18
60 1B16 X04 1A16 X14 2B16 X24 2A16 X34
B17 A17
50 26.4VDC B16 A16
40 1B15 X05 1A15 X15 2B15 X25 2A15 X35
28.8VDC B15 A15
30 B14 A14 1B14 X06 1A14 X16 2B14 X26 2A14 X36
20 B13 A13 1B13 X07 1A13 X17 2B13 X27 2A13 X37
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 ( C ) B12 A12
Ambient temperature B11 A11 1B12 X08 1A12 X18 2B12 X28 2A12 X38
External Connections B10 A10 1B11 X09 1A11 X19 2B11 X29 2A11 X39
B9 A9
B8 A8 1B10 X0A 1A10 X1A 2B10 X2A 2A10 X3A
1B20 B7 A7
R 1B09 X0B 1A09 X1B 2B09 X2B 2A09 X3B
B6 A6
R Internal B5 A5 1B08 X0C 1A08 X1C 2B08 X2C 2A08 X3C
circuit B4 A4 1B07 X0D 1A07 X1D 2B07 X2D 2A07 X3D
LED B3 A3
Left side B2 A2 1B06 X0E 1A06 X1E 2B06 X2E 2A06 X3E
1A5
(first half) SW Indication B1 A1 1B05 X0F 1A05 X1F 2B05 X2F 2A05 X3F
- +
1B2
Right side selector 1B04 Vacant 1A04 Vacant 2B04 Vacant 2A04 Vacant
3
24VDC 1B1 (latter half) circuit Module front
1B03 Vacant 1A03 Vacant 2B03 Vacant 2A03 Vacant
The above diagram shows the first half of 32 points (F). view
1B02 COM 1A02 Vacant 2B02 COM2 2A02 Vacant
The latter half of 32 points (L) are similar.
1B01 COM 1A01 Vacant 2B01 COM2 2A01 Vacant
2: Pin number of 1 indicates that of the left-hand side connector, and pin number of 2 indicates that of the
right-hand side connector.
3: Selection of left-hand (F) side provides the first half (X00 to X1F) LED indications, and selection of right-hand (L) side provides the
latter half (X20 to X3F) LED indications.
5-9
I/O
MODULES
5.2 Input Modules

Rated input voltage 24VDC (+20/-15%, ripple ratio within 5%) QX42-S1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Rated input current Approx. 4mA 8 9 A B C D E F
8 9 A B C D E F
OFF voltage/OFF current 9.5V or lower/1.5mA or lower QX42-S1
DISPLAY
F L
4mA
Response time Set value 3 0.1ms 0.2ms 0.4ms 0.6ms 1ms
OFF ON typ 0.05ms 0.15ms 0.30ms 0.55ms 1.05ms
max 0.12ms 0.20ms 0.40ms 0.60ms 1.20ms
ON OFF typ 0.15ms 0.20ms 0.35ms 0.60ms 1.10ms
max 0.20ms 0.30ms 0.50ms 0.70ms 1.30ms
Operation indicator ON indication (LED), 32 point switch-over using switch
conversion module
Weight 0.18kg
Derating Chart Pin-Outs Pin No. Signal No. Pin No. Signal No. Pin No. Signal No. Pin No. Signal No.
(%) 1B20 X00 1A20 X10 2B20 X20 2A20 X30
100 1B19 X01 1A19 X11 2B19 X21 2A19 X31
90 B20 A20
1B18 X02 1A18 X12 2B18 X22 2A18 X32
80 B19 A19 1B17 X03 1A17 X13 2B17 X23 2A17 X33
Simultaneous
70 B18 A18 1B16 X04 1A16 X14 2B16 X24 2A16 X34
ON ratio 24VDC
60 B17 A17 1B15 X05 1A15 X15 2B15 X25 2A15 X35
50 26.4VDC B16 A16
B15 A15 1B14 X06 1A14 X16 2B14 X26 2A14 X36
40 28.8VDC
B14 A14 1B13 X07 1A13 X17 2B13 X27 2A13 X37
30
20
B13 A13 1B12 X08 1A12 X18 2B12 X28 2A12 X38
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 ( C ) B12 A12 1B11 X09 1A11 X19 2B11 X29 2A11 X39
B11 A11
Ambient temperature 1B10 X0A 1A10 X1A 2B10 X2A 2A10 X3A
B10 A10
External Connections B09 A09 1B09 X0B 1A09 X1B 2B09 X2B 2A09 X3B
B08 A08 1B08 X0C 1A08 X1C 2B08 X2C 2A08 X3C
1B20 B07 A07
1B07 X0D 1A07 X1D 2B07 X2D 2A07 X3D
B06 A06
Internal 1B06 X0E 1A06 X1E 2B06 X2E 2A06 X3E
B05 A05
circuit B04 A04 1B05 X0F 1A05 X1F 2B05 X2F 2A05 X3F
B03 A03 1B04 Vacant 1A04 Vacant 2B04 Vacant 2A04 Vacant
Left side *2 B02 A02
1A05 LED 1B03 Vacant 1A03 Vacant 2B03 Vacant 2A03 Vacant
(first half) SW Internal B01 A01
1B02
1B02 COM1 1A02 Vacant 2B02 COM2 2A02 Vacant
Right side circuit 1B01 COM1 1A01 Vacant 2B01 COM2 2A01 Vacant
24VDC 1B01 Module front
(latter half)
view
The above diagram shows the first half of 32 points (F).
1: Pin number of 1 indicates that of the left-hand side connector, and pin number of 2 indicates that of the right-hand
side connector.
5-10
I/O
MODULES
5.2 Input Modules
QX70 DC Input Module (Positive Common/Negative Common Shared Type)

Type DC Input Module (Positive Common/Negative Common Shared Type)
Insulation method Photocoupler
Rated input voltage 5VDC 12VDC
(+20/-15%, ripple ratio within 5%) (+20/-15%, ripple ratio within 5%) QX70
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Rated input current Approx. 1.2mA Approx. 3.3mA 8 9 A B CDE F
Input derating None
ON voltage/ON current 3.5V or higher/1mA or higher
OFF voltage/OFF current 1V or lower/0.1mA or lower 5
Input resistance Approx. 3.3k 0
0
Initial setting is 10ms 2 1

Initial setting is 10ms 4
3
5
6
Dielectric maximum voltage 560VAC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000m (6557.38 ff.)) 5
7
Noise immunity By noise simulator of 500Vp-p noise voltage, 9 7
1 s noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency A 8
First transient noise IEC61000-4-4: 0.25kV B
9
Protection degree IP2X C
A
Common terminal arrangement 16 points/common (common terminal: TB17) D

B
External connections 18-point terminal block (M3 6 screw) F C
- +
Applicable wire size Core cable: 0.3 to 0.75mm2 (Outside diameter: 2.8mm or smaller) COM D
NC
Applicable connector terminal R1.25-3 (Terminals with sleeve cannot be used) 5/12VDC
E
1.2mA
3.3mA
F
Weight 0.14kg
External Connections Terminal Block No. Signal Name

For open collector (positive common) connection TB1 X00
TB2 X01
TB 1 LED
R TB3 X02
Internal
R
circuit TB4 X03

TB5 X04
TB6 X05
TB7 X06
TB8 X07
TB9 X08
TB17 TB10 X09
5/12VDC
TB11 X0A
For TTL, LS-TTL, CMOS buffer For sensor (negative common) TB12 X0B
(positive common) connections connections TB13 X0C
TB 1 TB 1
TB14 X0D
TB15 X0E
TB16 X0F
TB17 TB17 TB17 COM
TB18 Vacant
5-11
I/O
MODULES
5.2 Input Modules

Rated input voltage 5VDC (+20/-15%, ripple ratio 12VDC (+20/-15%, ripple ratio
within 5%) within 5%) QX71
Rated input current Approx. 1.2mA Approx. 3.3mA 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 A B C D E F
Input derating None 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 A B C D E F
ON voltage/ON current 3.5V or higher/1mA or higher
QX71
OFF voltage/OFF current 1V or lower/0.1mA or lower 5/12VDC
1.2 / 3.3mA
Input resistance Approx. 3.3k
Initial setting is 10ms
Dielectric maximum voltage 560VAC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000m (65573.38 ff.))
Noise immunity By noise simulator of 500Vp-p noise voltage,
1 s noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency
First transient noise IEC61000-4-4: 0.25kV
Weight 0.12kg
External Connections Pin-Outs Pin No. Signal No. Pin No. Signal No.
B20 X00 A20 X10
For open collector (positive common) connection B19 X01 A19 X11
B20 A20 B18 X02 A18 X12
B20 LED B19 A19
R B18 A18 B17 X03 A17 X13
Internal
B17 A17 B16 X04 A16 X14
R
circuit
B16 A16
B15 A15 B15 X05 A15 X15
B14 A14 B14 X06 A14 X16
B13 A13
B12 A12
B13 X07 A13 X17
B11 A11 B12 X08 A12 X18
B10 A10
B11 X09 A11 X19
B02 B9 A9
B8 A8 B10 X0A A10 X1A
5/12VDC B01 B7 A7 B09 X0B A09 X1B
B6 A6
For TTL, LS-TTL, CMOS buffer For sensor (negative common) B5 A5 B08 X0C A08 X1C
B4 A4 B07 X0D A07 X1D
(positive common) connections connections
B20
B3 A3
B20 B2 A2 B06 X0E A06 X1E
B1 A1 B05 X0F A05 X1F
B02 B02
Module front view B02 COM A02 Vacant
B01 COM A01 Vacant
5-12
I/O
MODULES
5.2 Input Modules

Rated input voltage 5VDC (+20/-15%, ripple ratio 12VDC (+20/-15%, ripple ratio QX72
within 5%) within 5%) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 A B C D E F
Rated input current Approx. 1.2mA Approx. 3.3mA 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Input derating None 8 9 A B C D E F
ON voltage/ON current 3.5V or higher/1mA or higher QX72
DISPLAY
OFF voltage/OFF current 1V or lower/0.1mA or lower 5/12VDC
1.2/3.3mA F L
Dielectric maximum voltage 560VAC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000m (6557.38 ff.))
1 s noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency
First transient noise IEC61000-4-4: 0.25kV
Protection of degree IP2X
Operation indicator ON indication (LED), 32point switch-over using switch
Weight 0.13kg
Signal Signal Signal Signal

External Connections Pin-Outs Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
No. No. No. No.
For open collector (positive common) connection 1B20 X00 1A20
X10 2B20 X20 2A20 X30
1B19 X01 1A19
X11 2B19 X21 2A19 X31
1B20 LED
R
Internal
B20 A20 1B18 X02 1A18
X12 2B18 X22 2A18 X32
B19 A19
R
circuit B18 A18 1B17 X03 1A17

X13 2B17 X23 2A17 X33
B17 A17 1B16 X04 1A16
X14 2B16 X24 2A16 X34
B16 A16
3 LED B15 A15 1B15 X05 1A15
X15 2B15 X25 2A15 X35
Left side SW
(first half)
Indication B14 A14 1B14 X06 1A14
X16 2B14 X26 2A14 X36
selector B13 A13
Right side circuit B12 A12 1B13 X07 1A13
X17 2B13 X27 2A13 X37
(latter half)
1B02
B11 A11 1B12 X08 1A12
X18 2B12 X28 2A12 X38
B10 A10
1B01
B9 A9 1B11 X09 1A11
X19 2B11 X29 2A11 X39
5/12VDC
For sensor B8 A8 1B10 X0A 1A10
X1A 2B10 X2A 2A10 X3A
B7 A7
For TTL, LS-TTL, CMOS buffer (negative common)
B6 A6
1B09 X0B 1A09
X1B 2B09 X2B 2A09 X3B
(positive common) connections connections
B5 A5 1B08 X0C 1A08
X1C 2B08 X2C 2A08 X3C
1B20 1B20 B4 A4
B3 A3
1B07 X0D 1A07
X1D 2B07 X2D 2A07 X3D
B2 A2 1B06 X0E 1A06
X1E 2B06 X2E 2A06 X3E
B1 A1
1B05 X0F 1A05
X1F 2B05 X2F 2A05 X3F
1B02 1B02 1B04 Vacant 1A04 Vacant 2B04 Vacant 2A04 Vacant
Module
The above diagram shows the first half of 32 points (F). 1B03 Vacant 1A03 Vacant 2B03 Vacant 2A03 Vacant
front view 1B02 COM1 1A02 Vacant 2B02 COM2 2A02 Vacant
1B01 COM1 1A01 Vacant 2B01 COM2 2A01 Vacant
2: Pin number of 1 indicates that of the left-hand side connector, and pin number of 2 indicates that of the right-hand
side connector.
5-13
I/O
MODULES
5.2 Input Modules
QX80 DC Input Module (Negative Common Type)

Type DC Input Module (Negative Common Type)
Rated input voltage 24VDC (+20/-15%, ripple ratio within 5%) QX80
8 9 A B CDE F
Input derating No
Input impedance Approx. 5.6k 0
Response OFF ON 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms or less (CPU parameter setting) 1 0
time Initial setting is 10ms. 2 1
3
4
5

B
C
D
B
Applicable wire size 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11in.) OD max.) NC D
Applicable crimping terminal R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used.) COM E
Number of occupied I/O points 16 points (I/O assignment: Input) 24VDC F
5VDC internal current consumption 0.05A (TYP. all points ON) 4mA

Weight 0.16kg

TB1 X00
TB2 X01
TB3 X02
TB4 X03
TB5 X04
TB 1 LED TB6 X05
R
Internal TB7 X06
R
circuit
TB8 X07
TB9 X08
TB10 X09
TB16
TB11 X0A
TB18
TB12 X0B
24VDC
TB13 X0C
TB14 X0D
TB15 X0E
TB16 X0F
TB17 Vacant
TB18 COM
5-14
I/O
MODULES
5.2 Input Modules
QX81 DC Input Module (Negative Common Type)

Type DC Input Module (Negative Common Type)
Rated input current Approx. 4mA QX81
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Input derating Refer to the derating chart. 8 9 A B C D E F
ON voltage/ON current 19V or higher/3mA or higher 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 A B C D E F
QX81
24VDC 5
Response time OFF ON 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms or less (CPU parameter setting) 1 4mA
Common terminal arrangement 32 points/common (common terminal: 17, 18, 36)
External connections 37-pin D-sub connector
Applicable wire size 0.3mm2 (For A6CON1E) 2
External wiring connector (Sold separately) A6CON1E, A6CON2E, A6CON3E
Applicable connector/terminal block A6TBX36-E, A6TBX54-E, A6TBX70-E
conversion module
Weight 0.16kg
(%) 1 X00 9 X10
100 20 X01 28 X11
90 2 X02 10 X12
19
ON 80 28.8VDC 18
37 21 X03 29 X13
ratio 70 17
36
3 X04 11 X14
60 35
16
34 22 X05 30 X15
50 15
33 4 X06 12 X16
40 14
32
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 ( C ) 13 23 X07 31 X17
31
Ambient temperature 12
30 5 X08 13 X18
11
29
External Connections 10 24 X09 32 X19
28
9
18
8
27 6 X0A 14 X1A
24VDC 36
17 26 25 X0B 33 X1B
7
25
6 7 X0C 15 X1C
35 24
5
4
23 26 X0D 34 X1D
22
3 8 X0E 16 X1E
21
2 27 X0F 35 X1F
20
LED 1
17 COM 37 Vacant
Internal 36 COM 19 Vacant
R
1 circuit Module front view

R 18 COM
2: When using A6CON2E or A6CON3E, refer to Section 12.1.
5-15
I/O
MODULES
5.3 Output Modules
QY10 Contact Output Module

Type Contact Output Module
Specifications QY10 Appearance
Number of output points 16 points
Isolation method Relay
Rated switching voltage, current 24VDC 2A (resistive load)
240VAC 2A (cos =1)/point, 8A/common
Minimum switching load 5VDC 1mA
Maximum switching load 264VAC 125VDC
Response time OFF ON 10ms or less QY10
ON OFF 12ms or less 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 A B CDE F
Life Mechanical 20 million times or more
Electrical Rated switching voltage/current load
More than 100 thousand times or more 0
L
200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COS =0.7) 100 thousand times or more 1 0
L
200VAC 0.4A, 240VAC 0.3A (COS =0.7) 300 thousand times or more 2 1
L
200VAC 1A, 240VAC 0.5A (COS =0.35) 100 thousand times or more 3 2
L
200VAC 0.3A, 240VAC 0.15A (COS =0.35) 300 thousand times or more 4
L 3
24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 100 thousand times or more 5
24VDC 0.3A, 100VDC 0.03A (L/R=7ms) 300 thousand times or more
L 4
L 6
Maximum switching frequency 3600 times/hour 7
5
L
Surge suppressor No L 8 6
Fuse No L
9 7
Dielectric withstand voltage 2830VAC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000m (6557.38ft.)) L
A 8
B
Insulation resistance 10M or more by insulation resistance tester L 9
C
Noise immunity By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width L
A
D
and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency L
B
E
First transient noise IEC61000-4-4: 1kV L
C
F
L
Protection degree IP1X COM D
Common terminal arrangement 16 points/common (common terminal: TB17) NC
24VDC E
Operation indicator ON indication (LED) 240VAC F
External connections 18-point terminal block (M3 6 screws) 2A
Applicable wire size 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11in.) OD max.)

Applicable crimping terminal R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used.)
Number of occupied I/O points 16 points (I/O assignment: Output)
Weight 0.22kg

TB1 Y00
TB2 Y01
TB3 Y02
TB4 Y03
LED TB 1 TB5 Y04
L
Internal TB6 Y05
RA
circuit TB7 Y06
TB8 Y07
TB9 Y08
TB10 Y09
TB16 TB11 Y0A
L
TB17 TB12 Y0B
TB13 Y0C
24VDC
240VAC TB14 Y0D
TB15 Y0E
TB16 Y0F
TB17 COM
TB18 Vacant
5-16
I/O
MODULES
5.3 Output Modules
QY18A Contact Output Module (All Independent)

Type Contact Output Module (All points Independent)
Specifications QY18A Appearance
Isolation method Relay isolation
Rated switching 24VDC 2A (resistive load)
voltage/current 240VAC 2A (cos =1) point
Min. switching load 5VDC 1mA
Max. switching load 264VAC 125VDC
Response time OFF ON 10ms or less QY18A
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5
ON OFF 12ms or less 8 9 A B CDE F
Life Mechanical 20 million cycles or more
Electrical Rated switching voltage/current load: 100 thousand cycles or more
0
200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A (COS =0.7) 100 thousand cycles or more L
0
200VAC 0.4A, 240VAC 0.3A (COS =0.7) 300 thousand cycles or more
1 1
200VAC 1A, 240VAC 0.5A (COS =0.35) 100 thousand cycles or more L
2
200VAC 0.3A, 240VAC 0.15A (COS =0.35) 300 thousand cycles or more 2
L 3
24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A (L/R=7ms) 100 thousand cycles or more
24VDC 0.3A, 100VDC 0.03A (L/R=7ms) 300 thousand cycles or more 4
3
L
5
Max. switching frequency 3600 cycles/hour
4 6
Surge killer None L
7
Fuse None
L
5 8
Dielectric maximum voltage 2830VAC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000m (6557.38ft))
9
L
A
7 B
1 s noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency L
C
NC D
Protection degree IP1X NC
24VDC
E
Operation indicator ON indication (LED) 240VAC
2A F
Applicable wire size Core cable: 0.3 to 0.75mm2 (Outside diameter: 2.8mm or smaller)
Applicable connector terminal R1.25-3 (Terminals with sleeve cannot be used)
Weight 0.22kg

TB1
Y00
TB2
LED TB 1 TB3
L Y01
TB4
Internal TB5
RA
circuit Y02
TB 2 TB6
TB7
24VDC Y03
TB8
240VAC
TB9
Y04
TB10
LED TB 15 TB11
L Y05
Internal TB12
RA TB13
circuit Y06
TB 16
TB14
24VDC TB15
Y07
240VAC TB16
TB17 Vacant
TB18 Vacant
5-17
I/O
MODULES
5.3 Output Modules
QY22 TRIAC Output Module

Type TRIAC Output Module
Rated load voltage 100-240VDC (+20/-15%)
Maximum load current 0.6A/point, 4.8A/common
QY22
Minimum load voltage/current 24VAC 100mA, 100VAC 25mA, 240VAC 25mA 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Maximum inrush current 20A/cycle or less 8 9 A B CDE F
Leakage current at OFF 3mA or lower (for 240V, 60Hz), 1.5mA or lower (for 120V, 60Hz)
Maximum voltage drop at ON 1.5V or lower
Response time OFF ON 1ms + 0.5Hz or less
L 0
ON OFF 1ms + 0.5Hz or less (rated load, resistance load) 1 0
L
Online module change Possible (Refer to Section 5.1 for the condition.) L 2 1
Surge killer CR absorber L
3 2
4
Fuse None (Attaching a fuse to external wiring is recommended. Refer to the L 3
5
precautions in Section 5.1.) L 4
L 6
Dielectric maximum voltage 2830VAC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000m (6557.38 ft)) 7
5
L
Insulation resistance 10M or higher by insulation resistance meter L 8 6
Noise immunity By noise simulator of 1.5kVp-p noise voltage, L
9 7
A 8
B
First transient noise IEC61000-4-4: 1kV L 9
C
Protection degree IP1X L
A
D
L
Common terminal arrangement 16 points/common (common terminal: TB11) E
B
L
Operation indicator ON indication (LED) L
F C
External connections 18-point terminal block (M3 6 screws) COM D
Applicable wire size Core cable: 0.3 to 0.75mm2 (Outside diameter: 2.8mm or smaller) 100VAC
E
Applicable connector terminal R1.25-3 (Terminals with sleeve cannot be used)
240VAC F
0.6A

5VDC internal current consumption 0.25A (Max. all points ON)
External dimensions 98 (3.86)(H) 27.4 (1.08)(W) 112.3 (4.42)(D) (mm(inch))
Weight 0.40kg

TB1 Y00
TB2 Y01
TB 1 L TB3 Y02
LED
TB4 Y03
internal TB5 Y04
circuit TB6 Y05
TB7 Y06
TB8 Y07
TB9 Y08
TB10 Y09
TB11 Y0A
TB12 Y0B
TB13 Y0C
TB16 L TB14 Y0D
TB17 TB15 Y0E
TB16 Y0F
100 to 240VAC TB17 COM
TB18 Vacant
1: Wire the module taking care so that the wiring does not interfere with the left-side module.
5-18
I/O
MODULES
5.3 Output Modules
QY40P Transistor Output Module (Sink Type)

Type Transistor Output Module (Sink Type)
Specifications QY40P Appearance
Maximum load current 0.1A/point, 1.6A/common
Maximum inrush current 0.7A, 10ms or less
QY40P
Leakage current at OFF 0.1mA or less 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.1VDC (TYP.) 0.1A, 0.2VDC (MAX.) 0.1A 8 9 A B CDE F
Response time OFF ON 1ms or less 5

ON OFF 1ms or less (rated load, resistive load)
L 0
Surge suppressor Zener diode 1 0
L
Fuse No 2 1
L
External supply Voltage 12-24VDC (+20/-15%) (ripple ratio within 5%) L
3 2
power Current 0.01A (at 24VDC) (Max. all points ON) 4
L 3
5
4
6
Insulation resistance 10M or more by insulation resistance tester L
5
7
L
Noise immunity By noise simulator of 500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width 6
8
L
L
9 7
L
A 8
L 9
L
A
Protection function Yes (thermal protection, short circuit protection) L
D
B
• Thermal protection is activated in increments of 1 point. L
E
• Short circuit protection is activated in increments of 1 point. L

F C
COM
E
12VDC
Applicable wire size 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11in.) OD max.) 24VDC F
0.1A
Weight 0.16kg

TB1 Y00
TB2 Y01
TB3 Y02
TB4 Y03
LED TB 1 TB5 Y04
L
Internal TB6 Y05
circuit TB7 Y06
R
TB8 Y07
TB9 Y08
TB10 Y09
TB16
L TB11 Y0A
TB17
TB12 Y0B
TB18
TB13 Y0C
12/24VDC
TB14 Y0D
TB15 Y0E
TB16 Y0F
TB17 12/24VDC
TB18 COM
5-19
I/O
MODULES
5.3 Output Modules

Maximum load current 0.1A/point, 2A/common
Leakage current at OFF 0.1mA or less QY41P
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.1VDC (TYP.) 0.1A, 0.2VDC (MAX.) 0.1A 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 A B C D E F
Response time OFF ON 1ms or less 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 A B C D E F
QY41P
Online module change Possible (Refer to Section 5.1 for the condition.) 12/24VDC
0.1A
Surge suppressor Zener diode
Fuse No
External supply Voltage 12-24VDC (+20/-15%) (ripple ratio within 5%)
power Current 0.02A (at 24VDC)
Common terminal arrangement 32 points/common (common terminal: A01, A02)
Protection function Yes (thermal protection, short circuit protection)
• Thermal protection is activated in increments of 1 point.
• Short circuit protection is activated in increments of 1 point.
Applicable wire size 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less (for A6CON1, A6CON4)
Applicable connector/terminal block A6TBXY36, A6TBXY54
conversion module
Weight 0.15kg
B20 Y00 A20 Y10
B19 Y01 A19 Y11
B20 A20 B18 Y02 A18 Y12
B19 A19
B18 A18 B17 Y03 A17 Y13
B17 A17 B16 Y04 A16 Y14
LED B20
B16 A16 B15 Y05 A15 Y15
L B15 A15
Internal B14 A14 B14 Y06 A14 Y16
circuit B13 A13 B13 Y07 A13 Y17
R B12 A12 B12 Y08 A12 Y18
B11 A11
B10 A10 B11 Y09 A11 Y19
B9 A9 B10 Y0A A10 Y1A
A05 B8 A8 B09 Y0B A09 Y1B
L B7 A7
B01,B02
B6 A6 B08 Y0C A08 Y1C
A01,A02 B5 A5 B07 Y0D A07 Y1D
12/24VDC B4 A4 B06 Y0E A06 Y1E
B3 A3
B2 A2 B05 Y0F A05 Y1F
B1 A1 B04 Vacant A04 Vacant
Module front view B02 12/24VDC A02 COM
B01 12/24VDC A01 COM
: When using A6CON2 or A6CON3, refer to Section 12.1.
5-20
I/O
MODULES
5.3 Output Modules

QY42P
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.1VDC (TYP.) 0.1A, 0.2VDC (MAX.) 0.1A 8 9 A B C D E F
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Response time OFF ON 1ms or less 8 9 A B C D E F
ON OFF 1ms or less (rated load, resistive load) QY42P
DISPLAY
5
Online module change Possible (Refer to Section 5.1 for the condition.) 12/24VDC
0.1A F L
Surge suppressor Zener diode
Fuse No
power Current 0.02A (at 24VDC)/common
Common terminal arrangement 32 points/common (common terminal: 1A01, 1A02, 2A01, 2A02)
• Thermal protection is activated in increments of 1 point.
Operation indicator ON indication (LED), 32 point switch-over using switch 2
Applicable wire size 0.3mm2(AWG#22) or less (for A6CON1, A6CON4) 3
Applicable connector/terminal block A6TBXY36, A6TBXY54
conversion module
Weight 0.17kg
External Connections Pin-Outs Pin No. Signal No.Pin No. Signal No. Pin No. Signal No.Pin No. Signal No.
1B20 Y00 1A20 Y10 2B20 Y20 2A20 Y30
B20 A20 1B19 Y01 1A19 Y11 2B19 Y21 2A19 Y31
B19 A19 1B18 Y02 1A18 Y12 2B18 Y22 2A18 Y32
B20 B18 A18
L 1B17 Y03 1A17 Y13 2B17 Y23 2A17 Y33
Internal B17 A17
B16 A16 1B16 Y04 1A16 Y14 2B16 Y24 2A16 Y34
circuit
R B15 A15 1B15 Y05 1A15 Y15 2B15 Y25 2A15 Y35
B14 A14 1B14 Y06 1A14 Y16 2B14 Y26 2A14 Y36
B13 A13
LED 1B13 Y07 1A13 Y17 2B13 Y27 2A13 Y37
Left side B12 A12
(first half) B11 A11 1B12 Y08 1A12 Y18 2B12 Y28 2A12 Y38
Indication A05
L B10 A10 1B11 Y09 1A11 Y19 2B11 Y29 2A11 Y39
selector SW B01,B02
circuit B9 A9 1B10 Y0A 1A10 Y1A 2B10 Y2A 2A10 Y3A
Right side A01,A02 B8 A8
(latter half) 1B09 Y0B 1A09 Y1B 2B09 Y2B 2A09 Y3B
12/24VDC B7 A7
2
B6 A6 1B08 Y0C 1A08 Y1C 2B08 Y2C 2A08 Y3C
B5 A5 1B07 Y0D 1A07 Y1D 2B07 Y2D 2A07 Y3D
B4 A4
The above diagram shows the first half of 32 1B06 Y0E 1A06 Y1E 2B06 Y2E 2A06 Y3E
B3 A3
B2 A2 1B05 Y0F 1A05 Y1F 2B05 Y2F 2A05 Y3F
points (F).
B1 A1 1B04 Vacant 1A04 Vacant 2B04 Vacant 2A04 Vacant
The latter half of 32 points (L) are similar. 1B03 Vacant 1A03 Vacant 2B03 Vacant 2A03 Vacant
Module front 1B02 12/24VDC 1A02 COM1 2B02 12/24VDC 2A02 COM2
view
1B01 12/24VDC 1A01 COM1 2B01 12/24VDC 2A01 COM2
5-21
I/O
MODULES
5.3 Output Modules
QY50 Transistor Output Module (Sink Type)

Maximum inrush current 4A, 10ms or less QY50
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Leakage current at OFF 0.1mA or less 8 9 A B CDE F
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.2VDC (TYP.) 0.5A, 0.3VDC (MAX.) 0.5A FUSE
Response time OFF ON 1ms or less

Online module change Possible (Refer to Section 5.1 for the condition.) L 0
1 0
Surge suppressor Zener diode L
L 2 1
Fuse 6.7A (unchangeable) (fuse blow capacity: 50A)
L
3 2
Fuse blow indication Yes (When fuse blows, LED indicates it and signal is output to CPU) 1 4
L 3
External supply Voltage 12-24VDC (+20/-15%) (ripple ratio within 5%) 5
L 4
power Current 0.02A (at 24VDC) L 6
7
5
6
L 8
L
A 8
and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency L
B
9
C
A
D
B
E
L
Common terminal arrangement 16 points/common (common terminal: TB18) F C
L
External connections 18-point terminal block (M3 6 screws) COM
E
12VDC
0.5A
Weight 0.17kg

TB1 Y00
TB2 Y01
TB3 Y02
TB4 Y03
TB 1 TB5 Y04
L
LED TB6 Y05
R
Internal TB7 Y06
circuit TB8 Y07
TB9 Y08
TB10 Y09
TB16 TB11 Y0A
L
TB17
Fuse TB12 Y0B
TB18
TB13 Y0C
R 12/24VDC
TB14 Y0D
TB15 Y0E
TB16 Y0F
TB17 12/24VDC
TB18 COM
1: When external supply power is off, fuse blown is not detected.
5-22
I/O
MODULES
5.3 Output Modules
QY68A Transistor Output Module (All Points Independent, Sink/Source Type)

Type Transistor Output Module (All Points Independent, Sink/Source Type)
Specifications QY68A Appearance
Maximum load current 2A/point, 8A/unit
QY68A
Maximum inrush current 8A, 10ms or less 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Leakage current at OFF 0.1mA or less
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.3VDC (MAX.) 2A
5
ON OFF 10ms or less (resistive load) 0
L
1
Surge suppressor Zener diode L 1
Fuse None (Attaching a fuse to external wiring is recommended. Refer to the 2
2
precautions in Section 5.1.) L 3
External supply power Unnecessary 3 4
L
L
Noise immunity By noise simulator of 500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width 7
L
First transient noise IEC61000-4-4: 1kV 9
6
Protection degree IP2X L A
Common terminal arrangement All points Independent B
7
L C
External connections 18-point terminal block (M3 6 screws) NC
D
E
5/12/
F
Applicable crimping terminal R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used.) 24VDC
2A
Weight 0.14kg

TB1
Y00
TB2
TB3
Y01
TB4
TB 1 Sink
L TB5
LED Y02
TB6
Internal
circuit
R TB7
TB 2 Y03
TB8
TB9
Y04
TB15 Source TB10
TB11
Y05
R
TB12
TB16
L TB13
Y06
TB14
TB15
Y07
TB16
TB17 Vacant
TB18 Vacant
5-23
I/O
MODULES
5.3 Output Modules

Maximum load current 16mA/point, 256mA/common
Maximum inrush current 40mA, 10ms or less QY70
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Output voltage at OFF VOH: 3.5VDC (VCC=5VDC, IOH=0.4mA) 8 9 A B CDE F
Maximum voltage drop at ON VOL: 0.3VDC FUSE
Response time OFF ON 0.5ms or less

ON OFF 0.5ms or less (resistive load)
0
Surge suppressor None L
1
2 1
Fuse 1.6A (unchangeable) (fuse blow capacity: 50A) L
L
3 2
L 3
External supply Voltage 5/12VDC (+20/-10%) (ripple ratio within 5%) 5
L 4
power Current 0.09A (at 24VDC) (Max. all points ON) L 6
7
5
L 8 6
L
9 7
Noise immunity By noise simulator of 500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width A 8
L
and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency B
L 9
First transient noise IEC61000-4-4: 1kV C
L
A
D
B
E
Common terminal arrangement 16 points/common (common terminal: TB18) L
C
F
L
External connections 18-point terminal block (M3 6 screws) COM
E
Applicable wire size 0.3 to 0.75mm2 core (2.8mm (0.11in.) OD max.) 5VDC
12VDC F
16mA
Weight 0.14kg

TB1 Y00
TB2 Y01
TB3 Y02
TB4 Y03
3.3k TB5 Y04
LED R TB1
L TB6 Y05
R TB7 Y06
Internal TB8 Y07
cricuit TB9 Y08
TB10 Y09
TB16
TB17
L TB11 Y0A
FUSE TB18 TB12 Y0B
5/12VDC TB13 Y0C
R
TB14 Y0D
TB15 Y0E
TB16 Y0F
TB17 5/12VDC
TB18 COM
5-24
I/O
MODULES
5.3 Output Modules

Maximum load current 16mA/point, 512mA/common
Maximum inrush current 40mA, 10ms or less QY71
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Output voltage at OFF VOH: 3.5VDC (VCC=5VDC, IOH=0.4mA) 8 9 A B C D E F
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Maximum voltage drop at ON VOL: 0.3VDC 8 9 A B C D E F
Response time OFF ON 0.5ms or less QY71
5
5/12VDC FUSE
ON OFF 0.5ms or less (resistive load) 16mA
Surge suppressor None
Fuse blow indication Yes (When fuse blows, LED indicates it and signal is output to CPU)
External supply Voltage 5/12VDC (+25/-10%) (ripple ratio within 5%)
Common terminal arrangement 32 points/common (common terminal: A01, A02)
2
Applicable wire size 0.3mm (AWG#22) or less (for A6CON1, A6CON4) 2
Weight 0.14kg
B20 Y00 A20 Y10
B19 Y01 A19 Y11
B20 A20 B18 Y02 A18 Y12
B19 A19 B17 Y03 A17 Y13
B18 A18
B17 A17 B16 Y04 A16 Y14
3.3k B16 A16 B15 Y05 A15 Y15
LED R B20 B15 A15
L
B14 A14
B14 Y06 A14 Y16
R B13 A13 B13 Y07 A13 Y17
B12 A12 B12 Y08 A12 Y18
Internal B11 A11
cricuit B10 A10 B11 Y09 A11 Y19
B9 A9 B10 Y0A A10 Y1A
A05 B8 A8
L
B7 A7
B09 Y0B A09 Y1B
B01,B02
FUSE A01,A02 B6 A6 B08 Y0C A08 Y1C
B5 A5 B07 Y0D A07 Y1D
5/12VDC B4 A4
R
B3 A3 B06 Y0E A06 Y1E
B2 A2 B05 Y0F A05 Y1F
B1 A1
Module front view
B02 5/12VDC A02 COM
B01 5/12VDC A01 COM
5-25
I/O
MODULES
5.3 Output Modules
QY80 Transistor Output Module (Source Type)

Type Transistor Output Module (Source Type)
Maximum inrush current 4A, 10ms or less QY80
8 9 A B CDE F
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.2VDC (TYP.) 0.5A, 0.3VDC (MAX.) 0.5A FUSE

1 0
Surge suppressor Zener diode L
L 2 1
L
3 2
L 3
External supply Voltage 12-24VDC (+20/-15%) (ripple ratio within 5%) 5
L 4
power Current 0.02A (at 24VDC) L 6
7
5
6
L 8
L
A 8
and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency B
L 9
C
A
D
B
E
L
Common terminal arrangement 16 points/common (common terminal: TB17) F C
L
Operation indicator ON indication (LED) - +
COM D
External connections 18-point terminal block (M3 6 screws) E
12VDC
0.5A
Weight 0.17kg

TB1 Y00
TB2 Y01
TB3 Y02
TB4 Y03
TB5 Y04
LED TB6 Y05
R
Internal TB 1 TB7 Y06
L
circuit TB8 Y07
TB9 Y08
TB10 Y09
TB16 TB11 Y0A
Fuse L
TB17
TB12 Y0B
12/24VDC
TB13 Y0C
R TB18
TB14 Y0D
TB15 Y0E
TB16 Y0F
TB17 COM
TB18 0V
5-26
I/O
MODULES
5.3 Output Modules
QY81P Transistor Output Module (Source Type)

Type Transistor Output Module (Source Type)
Leakage current at OFF 0.1mA or less QY81P
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Maximum voltage drop at ON 0.1VDC (TYP.) 0.1A, 0.2VDC (MAX.) 0.1A 8 9 A B C D E F
Response time OFF ON 1ms or less 0 1 2
8 9 A
3
B
4
C
5
D
6
E
7
F
5
QY81P
12/24VDC
Surge suppressor Zener diode 0.1A
Fuse No
Common terminal arrangement 32 points/common (common terminal: 17, 18, 36)
• Thermal protection is activated in increments of 2 points.
External connections 37-pin D-sub connector
Applicable wire size 0.3mm2 (For A6CON1E)
External wiring connector (Sold separately) A6CON1E, A6CON2E, A6CON3E
Applicable connector/terminal block A6TBY36-E, A6TBY54-E
conversion module
Weight 0.15kg
1 Y00 9 Y10
19 20 Y01 28 Y11
37
18 2 Y02 10 Y12
36
17 21 Y03 29 Y13
35
16
15
34 3 Y04 11 Y14
1
L 33 22 Y05 30 Y15
14
32
LED R 13
31
4 Y06 12 Y16
12 23 Y07 31 Y17
30
Internal 11
circuit 10
29 5 Y08 13 Y18
35 28 24 Y09 32 Y19
L 9
27
17,18,36 8 6 Y0A 14 Y1A
26
7
25 25 Y0B 33 Y1B
12/24VDC 6
19,37
24 7 Y0C 15 Y1C
5
23
4 26 Y0D 34 Y1D
22
3 8 Y0E 16 Y1E
21
2
1
20 27 Y0F 35 Y1F
17 COM 37 0V
36 COM 19 0V
Module front view
18 COM
: When using A6CON2E or A6CON3E, refer to Section 12.1.
5-27
I/O
MODULES
5.4 I/O Composite Modules
QH42P I/O Module

(1) DC Input Specification (Positive Common Type)
Type
QH42P I/O Module (Input Specification)
Specifications
Rated input current Approx. 4mA
Input derating See the derating chart.
Input resistance Approx. 5.6k
Dielectric maximum voltage 560VAC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000m (6557.38 ft.))
Noise immunity By noise simulator of 500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise
frequency
Common terminal arrangement 32 points/common (common terminal: 1B01, 1B02)
Operation indicator ON indication (LED), 32point switch-over using switch 2
Applicable wire size 0.3mm2(AWG#22) or less (for A6CON1, A6CON4) 4
Mixed connector/terminal block conversion module A6TBXY36, A6TBXY54, A6TBX70
Number of occupied I/O points 32 points (I/O assignment: I/O mixed)
5VDC internal current consumption 0.13A (TYP, all points ON)
Weight 0.20kg
External Connections Derating Chart

1B20
R
Internal
R
circuit
LED
1A05 Left side
(first half) SW Indication (%)
- + 1B02 selector
Right side
circuit 100
12/24VDC 1B01 (latter half)
90
ON Ratio
80
2B20 28.8VDC
L 70
Internal
circuit 60
R 50
40
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 ( C)
2A05
Ambient temperature
L
2B02
2B01
2A02
2A01 - +
12/24VDC
3: Use this module in the following makeup.
• Use the CPU module of product information "011120000000000-A" or later. Any other CPU module cannot be used.
• Use GX Developer Version 5 (SW5D5C-GPPW) or later.
• When GX Developer Version 4 (SW4D5C-GPPW) or earlier is used, the response time cannot be set.
(Fixed to 10ms) Set the I/O allocation as "output".
5-28
I/O
MODULES
(2) Transistor Output Specification (Sink Type)

Type
QH42P I/O Module (Output Specification) Appearance
Specifications
Number of output points 32 points QH42P
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Insulation method Photocoupler 8 9 A B C D E F
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Rated load voltage 12-24VDC (+20/-15%) 8 9 A B C D E F
24VDC4mA QY42P
Max. load current 0.1A/point, 2A/common 12/24VDC DISPLAY
0.1A F L
Max. inrush current 0.7A/10ms or less
Leakage current at OFF 0.1mA or lower
5
Max. voltage drop at ON 0.1VDC (TYP.) 0.1A, 0.2VDC (MAX.) 0.1A
ON OFF 1ms or less (rated load, resistance load)
Surge killer Zener diode
Fuse None
External power Voltage 12-24VDC (+20/-15%) (ripple ratio within 5%)
supply Current 0.015A (at 24VDC)/common (Max. all points ON)
Common terminal arrangement 32 points/common (common terminal: 2A01, 2A02)
Protection function Provided (thermal protector, protector against short circuit)
• Thermal protectors operate independently of each other.
• Protectors against short circuit operate independently of each other.
Pin-Outs Pin No. Signal No. Pin No. Signal No. Pin No. Signal No. Pin No. Signal No.
1B20 X00 1A20 X10 2B20 Y00 2A20 Y10
1B19 X01 1A19 X11 2B19 Y01 2A19 Y11
1B18 X02 1A18 X12 2B18 Y02 2A18 Y12
B20 A20 1B17 X03 1A17 X13 2B17 Y03 2A17 Y13
B19 A19
B18 A18 1B16 X04 1A16 X14 2B16 Y04 2A16 Y14
B17 A17
B16 A16 1B15 X05 1A15 X15 2B15 Y05 2A15 Y15
B15 A15 1B14 X06 1A14 X16 2B14 Y06 2A14 Y16
B14 A14
B13 A13 1B13 X07 1A13 X17 2B13 Y07 2A13 Y17
B12 A12
B11 A11 1B12 X08 1A12 X18 2B12 Y08 2A12 Y18
B10 A10
1B11 X09 1A11 X19 2B11 Y09 2A11 Y19
B9 A9
B8 A8 1B10 X0A 1A10 X1A 2B10 Y0A 2A10 Y1A
B7 A7
B6 A6 1B09 X0B 1A09 X1B 2B09 Y0B 2A09 Y1B
B5 A5
B4 A4 1B08 X0C 1A08 X1C 2B08 Y0C 2A08 Y1C
B3 A3 1B07 X0D 1A07 X1D 2B07 Y0D 2A07 Y1D
B2 A2
B1 A1 1B06 X0E 1A06 X1E 2B06 Y0E 2A06 Y1E
1B05 X0F 1A05 X1F 2B05 Y0F 2A05 Y1F
Module front view
1B02 COM1 1A02 Vacant 2B02 12/24VDC 2A02 COM2
1B01 COM1 1A01 Vacant 2B01 12/24VDC 2A01 COM2
5-29
I/O
MODULES
QX48Y57 I/O Module

(1) DC Input Specification (Positive Common Type)
Type
QX48Y57 I/O Module (Input Specification) Appearance
Specifications
Rated input voltage 24VDC (+20/-15%, ripple ratio within 5%) QX48Y57
8 9 A B CDE F
Input derating None FUSE
Response time OFF ON 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms or less (CPU parameter setting) 1 1 0
Initial setting is 10ms 2 1
ON OFF 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms or less (CPU parameter setting) 1 3 2
Initial setting is 10ms 4
3
4
Dielectric maximum voltage 560VAC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000m (6657.38ft.)) 6
5

- +
COM 6
8 7
9 8
A
Protection degree IP2X L 9
B
Common terminal arrangement 8 points/common (common terminal: TB9) L
A
C
L
B
L
External connections 18-point terminal block (M3 6 screw) E C
L
Applicable wire size Core cable: 0.3 to 0.75mm2 (Outside diameter: 2.8mm or smaller) D
- +
Applicable connector terminal R1.25-3 (Terminals with sleeve cannot be used) COM
E
24VDC4mA
Number of occupied I/O points 16 points (I/O assignment: I/O mixed) 12/24VDC F
0.5A
Weight 0.20kg

TB1 X00
TB2 X01
TB3 X02
TB4 X03
TB 1 LED
R TB5 X04
TB6 X05
R
TB10
Internal L TB7 X06
circuit R
TB8 X07
TB9 COM1
TB 8 TB10 Y08
TB 9
TB11 Y09
TB16 TB12 Y0A
L
24VDC TB17
Fuse TB18
TB13 Y0B
TB14 Y0C
12/24VDC
R TB15 Y0D
TB16 Y0E
TB17 12/24VDC
TB18 COM2
2: Use this module in the following makeup.
• Use the CPU module of product information "011120000000000-A" or later. Any other CPU module cannot be used.
• Use GX Developer Version 5 (SW5D5C-GPPW) or later.
• When GX Developer Version 4 (SW4D5C-GPPW) or earlier is used, the response time cannot be set.
(Fixed to 10ms) Set the I/O allocation as "output".
5-30
I/O
MODULES
(2) Transistor Output Specifications (Sink Type)

Type
QX48Y57 I/O Module (Output Specification)
Specifications
Max. load current 0.5A/point, 2A/common
Max. inrush current 4A/10ms or less
Leakage current at OFF 0.1mA or lower
Max. voltage drop at ON 0.2VDC (TYP.) 0.5A, 0.3VDC (MAX.) 0.5A 5
ON OFF 1ms or less (rated load, resistance load)
Surge killer Zener diode
Fuse 4A (Not replaceable) (Fuse breakage capacity: 50A)
Fuse breakage indication Provided (When fuse is broken, LED lights and a signal is output to CPU) 3
External power Voltage 12-24VDC (+20/-15%) (ripple ratio within 5%)
supply Current 0.01A (at 24VDC)
Common terminal arrangement 7 points/common (common terminal: TB18)
5-31
I/O
MODULES
5.5 Interrupt Module: QI60
QI60 Interrupt Module

Type Interrupt Module
Specifications QI60 Appearance
Rated input current Approx. 6mA QI60
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ON voltage/ON current 19V or higher/4.0mA or higher
Response Set value 2 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.6 1 0
time OFF ON Typ 0.05ms 0.15ms 0.30ms 0.55ms 1.05ms 1 0
max 0.10ms 0.20ms 0.40ms 0.60ms 1.20ms 2 1
ON OFF Typ 0.15ms 0.20ms 0.35ms 0.60ms 1.10ms 3 2
4
max 0.20ms 0.30ms 0.50ms 0.70ms 1.30ms 3
5
6
5
9
A
Interrupt processing condition Set by setting the CPU parameter switch. 3 D
E
B
F C
External connections 18-point terminal block (M3 6 screws) - +
COM D
E
Number of occupied I/O points 16 points (I/O assignment: Interrupt)
24VDC F
4 6mA
Weight 0.20kg

TB1 X00
TB2 X01
TB3 X02
TB4 X03
TB 1 LED TB5 X04
R
Internal TB6 X05
R
circuit TB7 X06

TB8 X07
TB9 X08
TB10 X09
TB16 TB11 X0A
TB17
TB12 X0B
TB13 X0C
24VDC TB14 X0D
TB15 X0E
TB16 X0F
TB17 COM
TB18 Vacant
1: For information of the main module, refer to the QCPU (Q-mode) User's Manual (Function Explanation/Program Basics Version).
2: CPU parameter setting. (Initial setting is 0.2ms) For the setting method, refer to the Building Block I/O Module User's Manual.
When setting the response time, use the following configuration.
In other than the following configuration, the response time cannot be set. (Fixed at 0.2ms)
• The CPU module is the one of product information "021120000000000-B" or later.
• GX Developer is GX Developer Version 6 (SW6D5C-GPPW) or later.
4: When setting I/O assignment with GX Developer Version 5 (SW5D5C-GPPW) or earlier, select "16-point intelligent module".
5-32
I/O
MODULES
5.6 Blank Cover Module: QG60
QG60 Blank Cover Module

Type Blank Cover Module
Specifications QG60 Appearance
Used for protection against dust on the slot not mounted with the I/O module
Application
(especially an empty slot between modules). QG60
Number of occupied I/O points 16 points (I/O assignment: Intelligent: Vacant)

QG60
Weight 0.07kg
: Mount the blank cover module with the connector cover of the base unit fitted.
5-33
6. ANALOG MODULES
6.1 Analog to Digital Converter Modules:
Q64AD, Q68ADV, Q68ADI
Overview (8) Easy settings with the utility package
The GX Configurator-AD utility package is sold
The analog signals of external voltages or currents are
separately.
converted into digital values and imported into the CPU
module. Then the analog data, e.g. voltage, pressure, The utility package is not a required item. However, it
temperature, current and speed, from external devices such can be used to set initial settings and automatic refresh
as sensors can be processed by the CPU module. settings on screen, reduce sequence programs, and
check settings and operating status quickly.
Features
Functions
(1) Model selection according to applications
1) Q64AD ...... 4 channels, voltage or (current) input Item Function
2) Q68ADV.... 8 channels, voltage input A/D conversion (1) Specifies whether to enable or disable the
3) Q68ADI ..... 8 channels, current input enable/disable A/D conversion for each channel. 6
setting (2) By disabling the conversion for the
(2) Fast conversion processing
channels that are not used, the sampling
Conversion speed is as high as 80 s/channel. time can be shortened.
Also, the temperature drift compensation is achieved in A/D conversion (1) Sampling processing
the processing time of all-channel conversion time + method The A/D conversion for analog input values
160 s. is performed successively for each channel,
(3) High accuracy and the digital output value is output after
each conversion.
Conversion accuracy is as high as ±0.1% (operating
(2) Averaging processing
ambient temperature 25±5ºC). For each channel, A/D conversion values are
(4) Resolution mode switching averaged for the set number of times or set
According to your application, you can change the amount of time, and the average value is
resolution mode. These are 1/4000, 1/12000, and output as a digital value
Maximum and (1) The maximum and minimum values of the
1/16000 as the digital value resolution.
minimum digital output values are retained in the
(5) Input range switch(s)
values hold module.
Input range (Note 1) switch(s) can be set easily from function
GX Developer (SW4D5C-GPPW-E or later, hereafter Temperature (1) Errors arising from changes in the
abbreviated to GX Developer). drift ambient temperature of the module are
Note 1: The input range indicates the offset/gain setting type. compensation automatically compensated for, to improve
The popular offset/gain setting types are set function the accuracy of conversion.
previously in default, and the user can modify to (2) The temperature drift compensation
requirement. function can be performed at (A/D
conversion time for all channels) + 160
(6) ONLINE MODULE CHANGE s.
The module can be changed without the system being Resolution (1) The resolution mode can be switched
stopped. mode according to the application, and digital-value
Also, by using the dedicated instruction (G.OGLOAD, resolution settings of 1/4000, 1/12000 or
1/16000 can be selected.
G.OGSTOR) or writing to the buffer and turning on the
(2) The resolution mode setting is applicable
corresponding Y signal, this enables reading of A/D to all channels.
converter module (changed online) offset/gain settings to (3) See Performance Specifications for the
the QCPU, and transfer of offset/gain settings to another digital output values and maximum
A/D converter module mounted on a different slot position. resolution in normal resolution mode and
high resolution mode.
(Only between the modules of the same model.)
Online module (1) Module can be changed without the
(7) Offset/gain setting change system being stopped.
GX Configurator-AD, dedicated instruction (G.OFFGAN)
or mode switching setting allows easy switching of the
offset/gain setting mode.
6-1
ANALOG 6.1 Analog to Digital Converter
MODULES Modules:
Appearance Equipment
(1) Q64AD <Q64AD, Q68ADV, Q68ADI accessories>

Q64AD Product Description
RUN
ERROR Manual Q64AD, Q68ADV, Q68ADI User's Manual

(Hardware)
V+ 1
2
<Separately obtainable products>
C V-
H
1
I+ 3
SLD 4
V+ 5 The following manual must be obtained separately.
98 (3.86)
C V- 6
H
2 I+ 7
SLD
V+
8 Product Description
9
Manual Q64AD, Q68ADV, Q68ADI User's Manual

C V-
H 10
3 I+
11
SLD
12
V+
13
<Software packages supported>

C V-
H
4 I+
14
SLD 15
A.G.
16
17 Compatibility between the systems which use A/D
(FG)
18
converter modules and software packages are as shown

A/D
0-±10V
0-20mA
below.
90 (3.55) 27.4 (1.08)
GX Developer is necessary when using an A/D converter
module.
(2) Q68ADV Software Version
Q68ADV
RUN GX Developer GX Configurator-AD
ERROR
If mounted with Version 7 or Version 1.10L or later

V+ 1
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU later (cannot be used with the
SW0D5C-QADU-E 50F
C
H V- 2
1
V+ 3
C
H
2
V-
V+
4
5
or earlier versions).
C
If mounted with Version 4 or SW0D5C-QADU-E 00A

98 (3.86)
H
3
V- 6
V+ 7
C
Q02/Q02H/Q06H/ later or later

H V-
4 8
V+
C 9
H V-
5
C
V+
10
11
Q12H/Q25HCPU
H V-
If mounted with Version 7.10L Version 1.13P or later

6
12
V+
C
H
13
V-
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU or later (cannot be used with the

7
V+
14
C
H V-
15
8
A.G.
16
17
SW0D5C-QADU-E 50F
or earlier versions).
(FG)
18
A/D
0-±10V
If mounted in a Version 6 or SW0D5C-QADU-E 20C

90 (3.55) 27.4 (1.08) multiple PLC later or later
system
If mounted in a Version 6 or SW0D5C-QADU-E 50F
(3) Q68ADI MELSECNET/H later or later
Q68ADI remote I/O station
RUN
ERROR
It is not compatible with the high resolution mode in
SW0D5C-QADU-E 10B or earlier versions.
I+
1
C
H I- 2
1
I+ 3
C
H
2
I- 4
I+ 5
C
98 (3.86)
H
3
I- 6
I+ 7
C
H I-
4 8
I+
C 9
H I-
5 10
I+
C 11
H I-
6
12
I+
C
H I-
13
7
I+
14
C
H I- 15
8
A.G.
16
17
(FG)
18
A/D
0-20mA
90 (3.55) 27.4 (1.08)
Unit: mm (inch)
6-2
6.1 Analog to Digital Converter ANALOG
Modules: MODULES
Model name
Q64AD Q68ADV Q68ADI
Item
Analog input points 4 points (4 channels) 8 points (8 channels) 8 points (8 channels)
Voltage –10 to 10 V DC (Input resistance value 1M ) ———
Analog
input 0 to 20 mA DC 0 to 20 mA DC
Current ———
(input resistance value 250 ) (input resistance value 250 )
16-bit signed binary
Digital output
(normal resolution mode: –4096 to 4095, high resolution mode: –12288 to 12287, –16384 to 16383)
Normal resolution mode High resolution mode
Analog input range Maximum Maximum
Digital output value Digital output value
resolution resolution
Voltage 0 to 10 V 0 to 4000 2.5 mV 0 to 16000 0.625 mV
0 to 5 V 1.25 mV 0 to 12000 0.416 mV
I/O characteristics,
Maximum resolution
1 to 5 V 1.0 mV 0.333 mV 6
–10 to 10 V –4000 to 4000 2.5 mV –16000 to 16000 0.625 mV
Users range setting 0.375 m V –12000 to 12000 0.333 mV
Current 0 to 20 mA 0 to 4000 5 A 0 to 12000 1.66 A
4 to 20 mA 4 A 1.33 A
Users range setting –4000 to 4000 1.37 A –12000 to 12000 1.33 A
Accuracy Normal resolution mode High resolution mode
(Accuracy in respect Ambient temperature 0 to Ambient Ambient temperature 0 to Ambient
to maximum digital Analog 55 °C temperature 55 °C temperature
output value) input range With Without 25 ± 5 °C With Without 25 ± 5 °C
temperature temperature temperature temperature
drift correction drift correction drift correction drift correction
0 to 10 V ± 0.3 % ± 0.4 % ± 0.1 % ± 0.3 % ± 0.4 % ± 0.1 %
–10 to 10 V (± 12 digit ) (± 16 digit ) (± 48 digit ) (± 48 digit ) (± 64 digit ) (± 16 digit )
Voltage
0 to 5 V ± 0.3 % ± 0.4 % ± 0.1 %

1 to 5 V (± 36 digit ) (± 48 digit ) (± 12 digit )
Users range
setting
0 to 20 mA
Curren
4 to 20 mA
t
Users range
setting
Digit indicates a digital value.
80 s/channel (When there is temperature drift, the time calculated by adding 160 s will be used regardless
Conversion speed
of the number of channels used)
Online module Possible (Note 1)
change
Absolute maximum
Voltage : ± 15 V Current : ± 30 mA
input
2
E PROM write count Max. 100 thousand times
Between the I/O terminal and PLC power supply : Photocoupler insulation
Insulation method
Between channels : Non-insulated
Dielectric withstand
Between the I/O terminal and PLC power supply: 500VAC for 1 minute
voltage
Insulation resistance Between the I/O terminal and PLC power supply: 500VDC 20M or more
Connection
18-point terminal block
terminals
Applicable wire size 0.3 to 0.75 mm2
Applicable
R1.25-3 (A solderless terminal with sleeve cannot be used)
solderless terminal
Number of occupied
16 points (I/O assignment: intelligent)
I/O points
5VDC Internal
0.63 A 0.64 A 0.64 A
current consumption
Weight 0.18 kg 0.19 kg 0.19 kg
6-3
ANALOG 6.1 Analog to Digital Converter
MODULES Modules:
Note1: Online Module Change Conditions

The CPU, A/D converter module, GX Developer, and base unit given below are needed for online module change.
(1) CPU
The Q12PHCPU or Q25PHCPU is needed. Online module change cannot be used on a MELSECNET/H remote I/O station.
For the precautions for multiple CPU system configurations, refer to the Precautions for Multiple CPU System Configuration in
(2) A/D converter module
The module function version C or later is necessary.
(3) GX Developer
GX Developer Version 7.10L or later is necessary.
(4) Base unit
1) For an online module change, use the main base unit and Q6 B extension base unit.
The module mounted on the main base unit or Q6 B extension base unit can be changed online.
2) The module mounted on the Q5 B extension base unit cannot be changed online. Also, when the Q5 B is used, the
module mounted on the main base unit cannot be changed online.
External Wiring
(1) Q64AD (2) Q68ADV

(a) For voltage input
Signal source 0 to ± 10 V 2 2 + 15 V
+ 15 V
500 k 500 k
V+
V+
V–
I+
500 k
V– A.G.
500 k GND – 15 V
GND SLD – 15 V FG
1 Shielded ANALOG GND
3
1 Shielded
4
(b) For current input 1 Use a twisted two core shielded wire for the power wire.
Signal source 0 to ± 20 mA 2 + 15 V 2 Shows input resistance of Q68ADV.
3 500 k 3 "A.G." terminal does not normally require wiring.
V+ However, it can be used as a GND terminal for compatible
I+
250 equipment under the following conditions.
V–
500 k (1) When there is a difference in polarity between "A.G"
SLD – 15 V
GND and "GND for compatible equipment".
A.G.
1 Shielded (2) As an alternative for 0 V input when only the + side is
FG
4 ANALOG GND open on a ± wire.
4 Always use a ground. In addition, ground the FB of the
5
power supply module.
1 Use a twisted two core shielded wire for the power wire.
2 Shows input resistance of Q64AD.
3 If using as current input, connect to (V +) and (I +) terminals.
4 "A.G." terminal does not normally require wiring. However, it
can be used as a GND terminal for compatible equipment
under the following conditions.
(1) When there is a difference in polarity between "A.G" and
"GND for compatible equipment".
(2) As an alternative for 0 V input when only the + side is open
on a ± wire.
5 Always use a ground. In addition, ground the FB of the power
supply module.
6-4
Modules: MODULES
(3) Q68ADI
Terminal Signal Name
2 250 + 15 V Number Q64AD Q68ADV Q68ADI
500 k 1 V+ V+ I+
I+ CH1 CH1
2 V- V- I-
I– CH1
500 k 3 I+ V+ I+
A.G. CH2 CH2
GND – 15 V 4 SLD V- I-
FG
1 Shielded 3
ANALOG GND 5 V+ V+ I+
CH3 CH3
6 V- V- I-
CH2
4 7 I+ V+ I+
CH4 CH4
1 Use a twisted two core shielded wire for the power wire. 8 SLD V- I-
2 Shows input resistance of Q68ADI. 9 V+ V+ I+
CH5 CH5
3 "A.G." terminal does not normally require wiring. 10 V- V- I-
However, it can be used as a GND terminal for 11
CH3
I+ V+ I+
6
CH6 CH6
compatible equipment under the following conditions. 12 SLD V- I-
(1) When there is a difference in polarity between "A.G" 13 V+ V+ I+
CH7 CH7
and "GND for compatible equipment". 14 V- V- I-
CH4
4 Always use a ground. In addition, ground the FB of the 15 I+ V+ I+
CH8 CH8
power supply module. 16 SLD V- I-
17 A.G. (ANALOG GND)
18 FG
I/O Signals for the PLC CPU

List of I/O signals
Note that I/O numbers (X/Y) shown below are the values when the A/D converter module Head I/O address is set to 0.
Signal direction CPU A/D converter module Signal direction CPU A/D converter module
Device No. (Input) Signal name Device No. (Output) Signal name
X0 Module READY Y0
X1 Temperature drift compensation flag Y1
X2 Y2
X3 Y3
X4 Y4 Use prohibited 1
X5 Use prohibited 1 Y5
X6 Y6
X7 Y7
X8 Y8
X9 High resolution mode status flag Y9 Operating condition setting request
XA Offset/gain setting mode flag YA User range write request
XB Channel change completed flag YB Channel change request
XC Use prohibited 1 YC Use prohibited 1
Maximum value/minimum value reset completed
XD YD Maximum value/minimum value reset request
flag
XE A/D conversion completed flag YE Use prohibited 1
XF Error flag YF Error clear request
POINT
1 These signals are for system use only. Therefore, they cannot be changed by the user. If they (signals) are turned
ON/OFF from within the sequence program, the functioning of the A/D converter module cannot be guaranteed.
6-5
6.2 Channel-Isolated High-Resolution Analog to
ANALOG Digital Converter Modules:
MODULES Q64AD-GH
Q62AD-DGH (with Signal Conditioning function)
Overview (8) A/D conversion method

The following are the five A/D conversion methods.
These particular A/D converter modules have realized (a) Sampling processing
channel isolation, high accuracy, high resolution, warning The A/D conversion for analog input values is
output function, input signal error detection function, and performed successively for each channel, and the
online module change. digital output value is output after each conversion.
When used with the process CPU, these modules can (b) Averaging processing
support process control. 1) Time averaging
A/D conversion is averaged in terms of time for
Features each channel and a digital average value is
output.
(1) Channel isolated
2) Count averaging
The channels are isolated. A/D conversion is averaged in terms of count for
With the Q62AD-DGH there is also isolation between each channel and a digital average value is
the external power supply and channels. output.
(2) High resolution 3) Move averaging
The resolution is as high as 32-bit signed binary (16 bit The specified number of digital output values
signed binary for data). (17 bits for when -10V to +10V measured per sampling time are averaged.
range is selected) (c) Primary delay filter
(3) Power supply for 2-wire transmitter (Q62AD-DGH only) The digital output value is smoothed out according
Does not require a separate power supply for the to the preset time constant.
2-wire transmitter, as the Q62AD-DGH provides its (9) Input signal error detection function
own. The voltage/current outside the setting range is
Also, the Q62AD-DGH supply power can be switched detected.
ON/OFF channel-by-channel from the A/D conversion (10) Warning output
enable/disable setting. These are the following two warning outputs.
(4) Module short-circuit protection (Q62AD-DGH only) (a) Process alarm
If an excessive current flows into the module due to a A warning is output when the digital output value
wiring short circuit, the built-in short-circuit protection falls outside the setting range.
circuit limits the current to within 25 to 35mA, (b) Rate alarm
A warning is output when the digital output value
protecting the module.
rate of change falls outside the preset range.
(5) Verify analog input by dedicated check terminal
(11) Online module change
(Q62AD-DGH only)
The module can be changed without the system being
When verifying the output current for the 2-wire
stopped.
transmitter, calculating the value obtained from the
Also, by using the dedicated instruction (G.OGLOAD,
measured voltage via the check terminal eliminates the G.OGSTOR) or writing to the buffer and turning on the
need to removing the wires. corresponding Y signal, this enables reading of A/D
(6) High accuracy converter module (changed online) offset/gain settings
The reference accuracy 1 is as high as ±0.05% and to the QCPU, and transfer of offset/gain settings to
the temperature coefficient 2 is as high as another A/D converter module mounted on a different
±71.4ppm/°C. slot position. (Only between the modules of the same
1 Accuracy of offset/gain setting at ambient temperature model.)
2 Accuracy per temperature change of 1°C (12) Offset/gain setting
Example) Accuracy when the temperature varies from GX Configurator-AD, dedicated instruction (G.OFFGAN)
25°C to 30°C or mode switching setting allows easy switching of the
0.05% (reference accuracy) + 0.00714%/°C offset/gain setting mode.
(temperature coefficient) 5°C (temperature (13) Easy settings with the utility package
variation difference) = 0.0857% The GX Configurator-AD utility package is sold
(7) Changing the input range separately.
The input range 3 can easily be set from GX The utility package is not a required item. However, it
Developer. can be used to set initial settings and automatic
3 Input range refers to the type of offset/gain settings. The refresh settings on screen, reduce sequence
most frequently used range is set as the default but the programs, and check settings and operating status
user can also set the offset/gain. quickly.
6-6
6.2 Channel-Isolated, High-Resolution Analog to
Digital Converter Modules: ANALOG
Q64AD-GH MODULES
Functions Appearance
Item Function
(1) Q64AD-GH
A/D conversion (1) Specifies whether to enable or disable the
enable/disable A/D conversion for each channel. Q64AD-GH
RUN ALM
setting (2) The conversion speed is 10ms regardless of ERR.
how many channels are enabled for

conversion. 1
V+ 2
A/D conversion (1) Sampling processing C V-
H
3
1 I+
method The A/D conversion for analog input values is SLD
4
5
98(3.86)
V+
performed successively for each channel, and C V-
H
6
7
I+
the digital output value is output after each
2
8
SLD
9
conversion.
V+
C V- 10
H
(2) Averaging processing 3 I+ 11

SLD 12
(a) Time averaging V+ 13
6
C V-
H 14
A/D conversion is averaged in terms of 4

SLD
I+
15
16
time for each channel and a digital A/D 17
-10 10V 18
average value is output. 0 20mA
(b) Count averaging

A/D conversion is averaged in terms of 90(3.54) 22(0.87) 27.4(1.08)
count for each channel and a digital

average value is output.
(c) Move averaging (2) Q62AD-DGH
The specified number of digital output
Q62AD-DGH
values measured per sampling time are RUN ALM
averaged.
ERR.
(3) Primary delay filter CH1

P
The digital output value is smoothed out I/CHK+
2
1
CHK-
according to the preset time constant. 3
4
Maximum and (1) The digital output maximum and minimum 5
98(3.86)
6
minimum values is retained in the module. 7
values hold CH2

P
8
9
function
I/CHK+
10
CHK-
11
Input signal (1) The voltage/current value outside the set 12

13
error detection range is detected. 14
15
function
IN
24VDC
16
Warning output (1) Process alarm FG

17
18
4~20mA
function A warning is output if a digital output value

falls outside the setting range.
90(3.54) 22(0.87) 27.4(1.08)
(2) Rate alarm
Unit(mm(in.))
A warning is output when the digital output
value rate of change falls outside the preset Unit: mm (inch)
range.
A/D conversion (1) Setting the A/D conversion starting time
Equipment
starting time allows A/D conversion to be started at the
setting function point when the output of the 2-wire
(Q62AD-DGH transmitter stabilizes. <Q64AD-GH accessories>
only) Product Description
Supply power (1) The power supply to the 2-wire transmitter Manual Q64AD-GH User's Manual (Hardware)
ON/OFF can be switched ON/OFF for each channel
function separately.
<Q62AD-DGH accessories>
(Q62AD-DGH (2) Power is supplied to the channel set for
only) "Conversion enable" from the A/D Product Description
conversion enable/disable setting (buffer Manual Q62AD-DGH User's Manual (Hardware)
memory address 0: Un\G0).
Online module (1) The module can be changed without the
change system being stopped.
Product Description
Manual Q64AD-GH, Q62AD-DGH User's Manual
6-7
MODULES Q64AD-GH
<Software packages supported> (2) Q62AD-DGH compatible software packages

(1) Q64AD-GH compatible software packages The following table shows the compatibility between
The following table shows the compatibility between the systems using the Q62AD-DGH with the software
the systems using the Q64AD-GH with the software packages.
packages. GX Developer is necessary when using a Q62AD-DGH
GX Developer is necessary when using a Q64AD-GH module.
module.
Software Version Software Version
GX Developer GX Configurator-AD GX Developer GX Configurator-AD
If mounted with Version 7 or If mounted with Q00J/Q00/ Version 7 or
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU later Q01CPU later
If mounted with Q02/Q02H/ Version 4 or If mounted with Q02/Q02H/ Version 4 or
Q06H/Q12H/Q25HCPU later Q06H/Q12H/Q25HCPU later
If mounted with Q12PH/ Version 7.10L If mounted in the Q12PH/ Version 7.10L
Version 1.14Q or Version 1.14Q or
Q25PHCPU or later Q25PHCPU or later
later later
If mounted in a multiple PLC Version 6 or If mounted in a multiple PLC Version 6 or
system later system later
If mounted in a If mounted in a
Version 6 or Version 6 or
MELSECNET/H remote I/O MELSECNET/H remote I/O
later later
station station
(1)Q64AD-GH
Model name
Q64AD-GH
Item
Number of analog input
4 points (4 channels)
points
Analog Voltage -10 to 10VDC (Input resistance 1 M )
input Current 0 to 20mADC (Input resistance 250 )
16-bit signed binary (-32768 to 32767)
Digital output
Maximum resolution Digital output value Digital output value
Input Analog input range
32-bit 16-bit (32-bit) (16-bit)
0 to 10V 156.3µV 312.6µV 0 to 64000 0 to 32000
0 to 5V 78.2µV 156.4µV
1 to 5V 62.5µV 125.0µV
I/O characteristics, Voltage
Users input range (Uni-polar) 47.4µV 94.8µV
maximum resolution
-10 to 10V 156.3µV 312.6µV -64000 to 64000 -32000 to 32000
Users input range (Bi-polar) 47.4µV 94.8µV
0 to 20mA 312.5nA 625.0nA 0 to 64000 0 to 32000
Current 4 to 20mA 250.0nA 500.0nA
Users input range (Uni-polar) 151.6nA 303.2nA
±0.05%
Accuracy Reference
Digital output value (32-bit) : ±32digit 2
(Accuracy accuracy 1
Digital output value (16-bit) : ±16digit 2
relative to
full-scale) Temperature ±71.4ppm/°C (0.00714%/°C)
coefficient 3
Common mode Common mode voltage Input-Common ground (input voltage 0V): 1780VAC
characteristic Common mode voltage rejection ratio (VCM < 1780V): 60Hz 105dB, 50Hz 107dB
Conversion speed 10ms/4 channels
Online module change Possible (Note 1)
Absolute maximum input Voltage: ± 15V Current: ± 30mA
Specific isolated area Isolation method Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance
Between I/O terminal and
Photocoupler isolation
Isolation specifications PLC power supply 1780VAC rms/3 cycles
500VDC 10M or more
Between analog input (elevation 2000m)
Transformer isolation
channels
6-8
Q64AD-GH MODULES

Model name
Q64AD-GH
Item
Maximum number of writes
2 100,000
for E PROM
Connected terminal 18 points terminal block
Applicable wire size 0.3 to 0.75mm2
Applicable solderless
R1.25-3 (Solderless terminals with sleeves are not applicable)
terminals
Number of occupied I/O
points
5VDC Internal current
0.89A
consumption
6
Weight 0.20kg
1: Accuracy of offset/gain setting at ambient temperature
2: "digit" indicates a digital output value.
3: Accuracy per temperature change of 1°C
Example) Accuracy when temperature changes from 25 to 30°C
0.05% (reference accuracy) + 0.00714 %/°C (temperature coefficient) 5°C (temperature change difference) = 0.0857%
Note 1: Online Module Change Conditions
The CPU, A/D converter module, GX Developer and base unit given below are needed for online module change.
(1) CPU
The Q12PHCPU or Q25PHCPU is needed. Online module change cannot be used on a MELSECNET/H remote I/O station. For
the precautions for multiple CPU system configuration, refer to the Precautions for Multiple CPU System Configuration in
(3) GX Developer
(4) Base unit
(2) Q62AD-DGH
Model name
Q62AD-DGH
Item
Number of
Input analog input 2 points (2 channels)
specification points
Analog input 4 to 20mADC 4(Input resistance 250 )
Connecting
Supply voltage 26±2VDC
with 2-wire
Supply Maximum
transmitter 24mADC
power supply current
specification Short-circuit Available
protection Limit current: 25 to 35mA
Check terminals Available
Digital output
6-9
MODULES Q64AD-GH

Model name
Q62AD-DGH
Item
Maximum resolution Digital output value Digital output value
Analog input range
32-bit 16-bit (32-bit) (16-bit)
I/O characteristics, Maximum resolution
4 to 20mA 250.0nA 500.0nA
0 to 64000 0 to 32000
Users range setting 151.6nA 303.2nA
Accuracy ±0.05%
(Accuracy Reference accuracy 1 Digital output value (32-bit): ±32digit 2
relative to Digital output value (16-bit): ±16digit 2
full-scale) Temperature coefficient 3 ±71.4ppm/°C (0.00714 %/°C)
Specific isolated area Isolation method Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance
Between I/O terminal and Photocoupler
PLC power supply isolation
Isolation specifications Between analog input Transformer 1780VAC rms/3 cycles 500VDC
channels isolation (elevation 2000m) 10M or more
Between external supply Transformer
power and analog input isolation
Maximum number of writes for
100,000
E2PROM
Applicable solderless terminals R1.25-3 (Solderless terminals with sleeves are not applicable)
5VDC Internal current consumption 0.22A
24VDC +20%, -15%
Voltage
External supply Ripple, spike within 500mVP-P
power Inrush current : 5.5A, within 200µs
Current
0.36A
Weight 0.19kg
1: User range setting is 2 to 24mA.
The module must be powered up (energized) for 30 minutes prior to operation in order to achieve full accuracy.
3: "digit" indicates a digital output value.
4: Accuracy per temperature change of 1°C
Example) Accuracy when temperature changes from 25 to 30°C
0.05% (reference accuracy) + 0.00714 %/°C (temperature coefficient) 5°C (temperature change difference) = 0.0857%
The CPU, A/D converter module, GX Developer and base unit given below are needed for online module change.
(1) CPU
the precautions for multiple CPU system configuration, refer to the Precautions for Multiple CPU System Configuration in
(The Q64AD-GH modules are all function version C or later.)
(3) GX Developer
(4) Base unit
The module mounted on the main base unit or Q6 B extension base unit can be change online.
(5) Warm-up
The module must be powered up (energized) for 30 minutes after the module has been replaced during online module change.
6-10
Q64AD-GH MODULES
External Wiring
(1) Q64AD-GH (2) Q62AD-DGH

(a) For voltage input
Signal source 0 to 10V *2 *3 *2
*1 500k +
V+ (4 to 20mA) + Current Transmitter 24V
P limiting circuit power supply
2-wire 24G
I+ transmitter - I/CHK+
V+ Insulating
V 250 circuit
GND V- CHK-
V-
Shielded 500k - *1 Shielded
SLD
*5
*4 DC24V 24V
24V
(b) For current input
*2 24G Filter
Signal source 0 to 20V +
*3 500k
*1 V+ FG
24G
I+
250k *4
V-
GND *1 Use a 2-core twisted shielded wire for the power wire.
Shielded 500k -
SLD *2 Shows input resistance.
*3 To connect with the 2-wire transmitter, be sure to connect to P and I/CHK+.
*4 Always use a ground. In addition, ground the FG of the power supply module.
*5 The check terminals (I/CHK+, CHK-) are used to check the amount of input
6
*4
in mA in relation to the 2-wire transmitter output.
*1 Use a 2-core twisted shielded wire for the power wire.
This can be checked since analog inputs of 4 to 20mA are converted to analog outputs of 1 to 5V.
*2 Shows input resistance.
The relationship of this conversion can be expressed by the following formula:
*3 For current input, be sure to connect to (V+) and (I+) terminals.
*4 Be sure to ground the shield wire of each channel. Analog input (mA)
Analog output (V) = 250
The SLD terminal can be used when grounding, however it has not been wired inside the board. 1000
Ground it as shown in the diagram shown above or below.
In addition, ground the FG of the power supply module.
V+
I+
V-
Shielded
SLD
Terminal Signal name

number Q64AD-GH Q64AD-GH
1 Empty P
2 Empty CH1 I/CHK+
3 V+ CHK-
4 V- Empty
CH1
5 I+ Empty
6 SLD Empty
7 V+ Empty
8 V- Empty
CH2
9 I+ P
10 SLD CH2 I/CHK+
11 V+ CHK-
12 V- Empty
CH3
13 I+ Empty
14 SLD Empty
15 V+ Empty
16 V- 24V
CH4
17 I+ 24G
18 SLD FG
P : Power supply for 2-wire transmitter
I/CHK + : 2-wire transmitter current input/check (+) terminal
CHK – : Check (–) terminal
6-11
MODULES Q64AD-GH

List of I/O signals
Note that I/O numbers (X/Y) shown below are the values when the A/D converter module Head I/O address is set to 0.
(1) Q64AD-GH
Signal direction CPU Module Q64AD-GH Signal direction CPU Module Q64AD-GH
X0 Module ready Y0
X1 Y1
X2 Y2
X3 Y3
1 1
X4 Use prohibited Y4 Use prohibited
X5 Y5
X6 Y6
X7 Y7
X8 Warning output signal Y8
X9 Operating condition setting completed flag Y9 Operating condition setting request
XA Offset/gain setting mode flag YA User range writing request
1
XC Input signal error detection signal YC Use prohibited
Maximum value/minimum value reset
completed flag
1
XE A/D conversion enable/disable setting YE Use prohibited
POINT
1 These signals are for system use only, therefore they cannot be changed by the user. If they (signals) are turned
(2) Q62AD-DGH
Signal direction CPU Module Q62AD-DGH Signal direction CPU Module Q62AD-DGH
X0 Module ready Y0
X1 Y1
X2 Y2
X3 Y3
1 1
X4 Use prohibited Y4 Use prohibited
X5 Y5
X6 Y6
X7 Y7
X8 Warning output signal Y8
Input signal error detection signal
XC YC Offset/gain change request
Offset/gain change completed flag
Maximum value/minimum value reset
completed flag
1
XE A/D conversion enable/disable setting YE Use prohibited
POINT
6-12
Modules Setting/Monitoring MODULES
Tool: GX Configurator-AD
Overview Auto Refresh Setting
GX Configurator-AD is one of the add-in tools for GX Auto refresh function is a function that automatically read
Developer (SW4D5C-GPPW-E or later). This is used to analog to digital converted data, etc. from the analog to
set initial data for the Q64AD, Q68ADV, Q68ADI, digital converter module and send them to dedicated (set
Q64AD-GH and Q62AD-DGH analog to digital converter in GX Configurator-AD) CPU devices. The following data
module and automatically load converted analog to digital can be refreshed automatically.
data to the CPU device memory. Analog to digital converted value of each channel.
Although initial value setting and others can be made in Error code detected by the analog to digital converter module
sequence programs, use of GX Configurator-AD allows Maximum and minimum values of the analog to digital
converted value of each channel
such operations to be done on-screen, thus reducing
sequence programs and also ensuring ease of setting and Auto refresh setting screen sample 6
checking of operating status.
Initial Data Setting
The following initial data can be previously set in GX

Configurator-AD.
Item Description
Analog to digital Specifies the channel which analog to
conversion digital conversion will be enabled.
enable/disable
Sampling/ Chooses sampling or averaging.
averaging
Time average/ Chooses time average or count average for
count average averaging selection.
selection
Time/count Specifies average count or average time.
Monitoring and Testing Function
Initial data setting screen sample The monitoring and testing function is designed to monitor
the data and operation status in the analog to digital
converter module, and to change the set values as
required. Since you can monitor the operating status
without needing to know the specific buffer address in the
analog to digital converter module, this function is effective
for system maintenance and troubleshooting. The
following data can be monitored and tested.
Target Item
Analog to Module ready
digital High resolution mode status flag
converted Analog to digital conversion completion flag
value Analog to digital converted value of each channel
Temperature drift compensation status flag
Maximum/minimum value of each channel
Maximum/minimum value reset request/completion
Error Error code
Error occurrence flag
Error clear request
Operating Analog to digital conversion enable/disable setting
condition Sampling/averaging setting
Averaging condition
Input Input range setting status
range Offset/gain setting
6-13
ANALOG 6.4 Digital to Analog Converter
MODULES Modules: Q62DA, Q64DA,
Q68DAV, Q68DAI
Overview the QCPU, and transfer of offset/gain settings to another

D/A converter module mounted on a different slot position.
Digital data from CPU module are converted into analog (Only between the modules of the same model.)
signals and output to an external device. By converting the (9) Offset/gain setting
CPU module-processed data into analog data, information
GX Configurator-DA, dedicated instruction (G.OFFGAN)
can be sent to equipment which handles analog data, e.g. an
inverter.
offset/gain setting mode.
Features (10) Easy settings using the utility package
The GX Configurator-DA utility package is sold
(1) Available models
separately.
• Q62DA .... 2 channels: Voltage or current output can
The utility package is not a required item. However, it
be selected for each channel.
can be used to set initial settings and automatic refresh
• Q64DA .... 4 channels: Voltage or current output can
be selected for each channel. settings on screen, reduce sequence programs, and
• Q68DAV .. 8 channels: All of which are voltage output. check settings and operating status quickly.
• Q68DAI ....8 channels: All of which are current output.
Functions
(2) High-speed conversion processing
80 s/channel conversion processing speed Item Function
(3) High degree of accuracy (1) Specifies whether to enable or disable the
The conversion accuracy is ± 0.1% (When the ambient D/A conversion D/A conversion for each channel.
temperature is 25 ± 5 °C). enable/disable (2) By disabling the D/A conversion for the
(4) Changing the resolution mode function channels that are not used, the conversion
The resolution mode can be changed according to the speed can be shortened.
application, and digital-value resolution settings of (1) Specifies whether to output the D/A
1/4000, 1/12000 or 1/16000 can be selected. converted value or the offset value for each
D/A output
(5) Changing the output range channel.
enable/disable
(2) The conversion speed stays constant
The output range 1 can easily be changed using GX function
regardless if the D/A output is enabled or
Developer.
disabled.
1 The output range refers to the type of offset/gain settings.
Synchronous (1) An analog output synchronized with the
The most frequently used range is set as the default but
output function PLC CPU can be obtained.
the user can also specify their own offset/gain settings.
Analog output (1) The output analog value can be retained
(6) Synchronous output function HOLD/CLEAR when the PLC CPU module is stopped or
This function sets a constant time (120 s) until the function when an error occurs.
analog value is output after the digital value is written Analog output (1) When the CH. output enable/disable flag
from the PLC CPU. Highly accurate analog control can test during PLC is forced ON during PLC CPU STOP, the
be achieved by combining this function with a constant CPU STOP D/A converted analog value is output.
scan execution type program for the PLC CPU or the (1) The resolution mode can be changed
constant scan function 2. according to the application, and the
2 The constant scan function executes the sequence resolution setting range is selectable from
program within a fixed time interval. 1/4000, 1/12000, and 1/16000.
(7) Analog output HOLD/CLEAR function Resolution (2) The resolution mode setting is applicable to
mode all channels.
This function is set to either retain or clear the analog
(3) See Performance Specifications for the
output value when an error that causes the CPU to
digital input values and maximum resolution
stop occurs. in normal resolution mode and high
(8) ONLINE MODULE CHANGE resolution mode.
The module can be changed without the system being Online module (1) Module can be changed without the system
stopped. change being stopped.
corresponding Y signal, this enables reading of D/A
converter module (changed online) offset/gain settings to
6-14
6.4 Digital to Analog Converter ANALOG
Modules: Q62DA, Q64DA, MODULES
Q68DAV, Q68DAI
Appearance (4) Q68DAI

Q68DAI
(1) Q62DA RUN
ERROR
Q62DA
RUN
ERROR
I+
C
H COM 1
1
I+
2
1
C
H COM 3
V+ 2
I+
4
C COM 2 C
H H COM 5
1 I+
3 3 6
I+
98 (3.86)
4 C 7
H COM
V+ 5 4 8
I+
C 6 C 9
98 (3.86)
COM H COM
H
2 + 7 5 10
I I+
8
C
H COM
11
6 12
9 I+
C 13
10 H COM
7 14
11 I+
C
H COM
15
12 8 16
IN 24VDC
13 17
14 18
D/A
0-20mA
15 FG
6
IN 24VDC
16
17
(0.15)
(FG)
18
3.7
D/A
0-±10V 90 (3.55) 27.4
0-20mA (1.08)
(0.08)
90 (3.55) 27.4 (1.08) 10.5 7.4
2
(0.41) (0.29)
(2) Q64DA
(0.33)
FG terminal
8.5
L-shaped metal
Q64DA
fitting
(0.26)
RUN
6.7
ERROR
FG terminal screw
1 (M3 screw)
V+
C COM 2
H
1 I+
3
4
Unit: mm (inch)
C COM
V+ 5
6 Equipment
98 (3.86)
H
2 I+
7
V+
8
9
<Q62DA, Q64DA, Q68DAV, Q68DAI accessories>
C COM
H
3 I+
10 Product Description
11
V+
12 Manual Q62DA, Q64DA, Q68DAV, Q68DAI User's Manual
C
H
COM
13 (Hardware)
14
4 I +
15
IN 24VDC
16 <Separately obtainable products>
(FG)
D/A
17
18
The following manual must be obtained separately.
0-±10V
0-20mA Product Description
Manual Q62DA, Q64DA, Q68DAV, Q68DAI User's Manual
90 (3.55) 27.4 (1.08)
Compatibility between the systems which use D/A
(3) Q68DAV converter modules and software packages are as shown
Q68DAV
RUN below.
ERROR
GX Developer is necessary when using a D/A converter
module.
V+
C
H COM
1
V+
1
2 Software Version
C
H COM
2
V+
3
4
GX Developer GX Configurator-DA 4
C
H COM
3
5
6
98 (3.86)
C
H COM
V+
7 Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU later (cannot be used with the
4
C
V+
8
9
SW0D5C-QDAU-E
60G or earlier versions).
H COM
5 10
V+
C 11
H COM
6
V+
12 If mounted with Version 4 or SW0D5C-QDAU-E 00A
C
H COM
7
13
14
C
H COM
V+
15 Q12H/Q25HCPU
16
If mounted with Version 7.10L Version 1.13P or later
8
IN 24VDC
17
D/A
10V
18 Q12PH/Q25PHCPU or later (cannot be used with the
SW0D5C-QDAU-E
0-±
FG
60G or earlier versions).

(0.15)
If mounted in a Version 6 or SW0D5C-QDAU-E 20C

3.7
90 (3.55) 27.4
(1.08) multiple PLC system later or later
If mounted in a Version 6 or SW0D5C-QDAU-E 50F
MELSECNET/H later or later
(0.08)
10.5 7.4
2
(0.41) (0.29) remote I/O station

4 It is not compatible with the high resolution mode in
(0.33)
FG terminal
8.5
L-shaped metal SW0D5C-QDAU-E 10B or earlier versions. See Appendix 1.2

fitting
for details.
(0.26)
6.7
FG terminal screw When using the Q68DAV or Q68DAI, use SW0D5C-QDAU-E

(M3 screw) 60G or later.
6-15
Q68DAV, Q68DAI
Model name
Q62DA Q64DA Q68DAV Q68DAI
Item
Number of analog output points 2 points (2 channels) 4 points (4 channels) 8 points (8 channels)
16-bit signed binary
Digital input
(normal resolution mode: -4096 to 4095, high resolution mode: -12288 to 12287, -16384 to 16383)
Voltage –10 to 10 V DC (External load resistance value: 1 k to 1M ) —
Analog 0 to 20 mA DC
0 to 20 mA DC
output Current — (External load resistance
(External load resistance value: 0 to 600 )
value: 0 to 600 )
Normal resolution mode High resolution mode
Analog output range Digital input Maximum Digital input Maximum
value resolution value resolution
0 to 5V 1.25 mV 0.416 mV
0 to 4000 0 to 12000
I/O characteristics, Maximum 1 to 5V 1.0 mV 0.333 mV
Voltage
resolution -10 to 10V 2.5 mV -16000 to 16000 0.625 mV
-4000 to 4000
User range setting 0.75 mV -12000 to 12000 0.333 mV
0 to 20 mA 5 A 1.66 A
0 to 4000 0 to 12000
Current 4 to 20 mA 4 A 1.33 A
User range setting -4000 to 4000 1.5 A -12000 to 12000 0.83 A
Ambient
Accuracy (Accuracytemperature Within ± 0.1 % (Voltage: ±10 mV, Current: ± 20 A)
in respect to 25 ± 5 °C
maximum analog Ambient
output value) temperature 0 Within ± 0.3 % (Voltage: ± 30 mV, Current: ± 60 A)
to 55 °C
Conversion speed 80 s/channel
Voltage ± 12 V —
Absolute maximum
output
Current 21 mA — 21 mA
2
Output short circuit protection Available
Between the I/O terminal and PLC power supply : Photo coupler insulation
Insulation method Between output channels : No insulation
Between external supply power and analog output : No insulation
Dielectric withstand voltage Between the I/O terminal and PLC power supply: 500VAC for 1 minute
Insulation resistance Between the I/O terminal and PLC power supply: 500VDC 20M or more
Connected terminals 18-points terminal block
Applicable wire size 0.3 to 0.75 mm2
FG terminal: R1.25-3, 1.25-YS3, RAV1.25-3,
R 1.25-3 V1.25-YS3A
Applicable solderless terminal
(A solderless terminal with sleeve cannot be used) Other terminals than FG: R1.25-3 (A solderless
terminal with sleeve cannot be used)
Number of occupied I/O points 16 points (I/O assignment: intelligent 16 points)
5 V DC Internal current
0.33 A 0.34 A 0.39 A 0.38 A
consumption
24 V DC + 20 %, – 15 %
Voltage
Ripple, spike 500 mV P-P or less
External supply
Inrush current: 1.9 A, Inrush current: 3.1 A, Inrush current: 3.3 A, Inrush current: 3.1 A,
power
Current within 300 s within 300 s within 70 s within 75 s
0.12 A 0.18 A 0.19 A 0.28 A
Weight 0.19 kg 0.18 kg
6-16
Modules: Q62DA, Q64DA, MODULES
Q68DAV, Q68DAI

The CPU, D/A converter module, GX Developer, and base unit given below are needed to perform an online module change.
(1) CPU
the precautions for multiple CPU system configurations, refer to the Precautions for Multiple CPU System Configuration in
(2) D/A converter module
(3) GX Developer
(4) Base unit
The module mounted on the main base unit or Q6 B extension base unit can be change online. 6
External Wiring
(1) For Q62DA and Q64DA (2) For Q68DAV

(a) For voltage output
1 2 1 2
Motor drive module, etc. Motor drive module, etc.
D/A 1k D/A 1k
conversion V+ conversion V+
to to
COM 1M COM 1M
+15 V GND +15 V GND
+24 V +24 V
24 V DC 24 V DC
24V 24V
DC/DC 24G DC/DC 24G
converter Filter converter Filter
FG FG
A.G –15 V A.G –15 V

A.G A.G
1 Use a twisted two core shielded wire for the power wire. 1 Use a twisted two core shielded wire for the power wire.
2 If there is noise or ripples in the external wiring, connect a 0.1 2 If there is noise or ripples in the external wiring, connect a 0.1
to 0.47 m F25V capacitor between the V+/I+ terminal and to 0.47 m F25V capacitor between the V+/I+ terminal and
COM. COM.
(b) For current output (3) For Q68DAI

1 2 1 2
Motor drive module, etc. Motor drive module, etc.
D/A 0 D/A 0
conversion I+ conversion I+
to to
COM 600 COM 600
+15 V GND +15 V GND
+24 V +24 V
24 V DC 24 V DC
24V 24V
DC/DC 24G DC/DC 24G
Filter Filter
converter converter
FG FG
A.G –15 V A.G –15 V

A.G A.G
1 Use a twisted two core shielded wire for the power wire. 1 Use a twisted two core shielded wire for the power wire.
2 If there is noise or ripples in the external wiring, connect a 0.1 2 If there is noise or ripples in the external wiring, connect a 0.1
to 0.47 m F25V capacitor between the V+/I+ terminal and to 0.47 m F25V capacitor between the V+/I+ terminal and
COM. COM.
6-17
Q68DAV, Q68DAI
Terminal Signal name

number Q62DA Q64DA Q68DAV Q68DAI
1 CH1 V+ CH1 V+ CH1 V+ CH1 I+
2 COM COM COM COM
3 I+ I+ CH2 V+ CH2 I+
4 Vacant Vacant COM COM
5 CH2 V+ CH2 V+ CH3 V+ CH3 I+
6 COM COM COM COM
7 I+ I+ CH4 V+ CH4 I+
9 Vacant CH3 V+ CH5 V+ CH5 I+
10 Vacant COM COM COM
11 Vacant I+ CH6 V+ CH6 I+
13 Vacant CH4 V+ CH7 V+ CH7 I+
14 Vacant COM COM COM
15 Vacant I+ CH8 V+ CH8 I+
16 24V COM COM
17 24G 24V
18 FG 24G

List of I/O signals
The following table is based on the Q68DAV and Q68DAI with 8-channel analog output (CH.1 to CH.8).
Note that I/O numbers (X/Y) shown below are the values when the D/A converter module Head I/O address is set to 0.
Signal direction D/A converter module CPU module Signal direction CPU module D/A converter module
Device No Signal name Device No. Signal name
X0 Module READY Y0 Use prohibited 1
X1 Y1 CH1 Output enable/disable flag
X3 Y3 2 CH3 Output enable/disable flag
X4 Use prohibited 1 Y4 2 CH4 Output enable/disable flag
X8 High resolution mode status flag Y8 2 CH8 Output enable/disable flag
XC Set value change completed flag YC Set value change request
XD Synchronous output mode flag YD Synchronous output request
XE Use prohibited 1 YE Use prohibited 1
POINT
ON/OFF from within the sequence program, the functioning of the D/A converter module cannot be guaranteed.
2 For Q62DA, Y3 to Y8 cannot be used.
For Q64DA, Y5 to Y8 cannot be used.
6-18
6.5 Channel-Isolated Digital to ANALOG
Analog Converter Module: MODULES
Q62DA-FG
Overview (9) Online module change

This D/A converter module has realized channel isolation,
stopped.
high accuracy, output monitor function, warning output
function, disconnection detection function, and online
module change.
corresponding Y signal, this enables reading of
When used with the process CPU, this module can
Q62DA-FG converter module (changed online) offset/gain
support process control.
settings to the QCPU, and transfer of offset/gain settings
Features to another Q62DA-FG converter module mounted on a
(1) Channel isolated different slot position. (Only between the modules of the
Isolated between the channels, and also between the same model.)
external power supply and channels. (10) Offset/gain setting
(2) High accuracy GX Configurator-DA, dedicated instruction (G.OFFGAN)
6
The reference accuracy 1 is as high as ±0.1% and the
temperature coefficient 2 is as high as ±80ppm/°C. offset/gain setting mode.
1 Accuracy of offset/gain setting at ambient temperature. (11) Easy settings using the utility package
2 Accuracy per temperature change of 1°C The GX Configurator-DA utility package is sold
Example) Accuracy when the ambient temperature varies separately.
from 25°C to 30°C The utility package is not a required item. However, it
0.1% (reference accuracy) + 0.008%/°C (temperature can be used to set initial settings and automatic refresh
coefficient) 5°C (temperature variation difference) = settings on screen, reduce sequence programs, and
0.14% check settings and operating status quickly.
(3) Changing the output range
The output range 1 can be easily set from GX Functions
Developer.
1 The output range refers to the type of offset/gain settings. Item Function
The most frequently used range is set as the default but D/A conversion (1) Specifies whether to enable or disable the
the user can also set the offset/gain. enable/disable D/A conversion for each channel.
function (2) The conversion speed is 10ms regardless
(4) Analog output hold/clear function
of channels are enabled for conversion.
This function is used to set whether the analog output D/A output (1) Specifies whether to output the D/A
value will be held or cleared when the CPU module is enable/disable converted value or the offset value for each
stopped or when an error that causes the CPU to stop function channel.
occurs. (2) The conversion speed is 10ms constant
independently of whether the output is
(5) Output monitor function
enabled or disabled.
The analog output value output by D/A conversion is Analog output (1) The output analog value can be retained
reconverted into a digital value within the Q62DA-FG HOLD/CLEAR when the PLC CPU module is stopped or
and the result is stored into the buffer memory as an function when an error occurs.
output monitor value. Analog output (1) When the CH output enable/disable flag
(6) Warning output function test during PLC is forced ON during PLC CPU STOP, the
CPU STOP D/A converted analog value is output.
A warning is output if a digital input value falls outside
Output monitor (1) The analog output value output by D/A
the setting range. function conversion is reconverted into a digital
(7) Rate control function value within the Q62DA-FG and the result
The increment and decrement of the analog output is stored into the buffer memory as an
value per conversion cycle can be restricted, to prevent output monitor value.
sudden changes in output value. Warning output (1) A warning is output if a digital input value
function falls outside the setting range.
(8) Disconnection detection function
Rate control (1) The increment and decrement of the analog
Monitors the output value to detect a disconnection function output value per conversion cycle can be
when analog output range is 4 to 20mA, or the restricted.
user-defined range is 1. Disconnection (1) Monitors the output value to detect a
detection disconnection when analog output range is
function 4 to 20mA, or the user-defined range is 1.
Online module (1) The module can be changed without the
6-19
ANALOG 6.5 Channel-Isolated Digital to
MODULES Analog Converter Module:
Q62DA-FG
<Q62DA-FG accessories>
Q62DA-FG
RUN ALM Product Description
ERR.
Manual Q62DA-FG User's Manual (Hardware)
C
H
V+
COM1
1
2
1

I+
3
4
5
Product Description
98 (3.86)
6
7
8
Manual Q62DA-FG User's Manual
V+
C
9
COM2
H 10
2 I+
11
12
13
14
Compatibility between systems which use Q62DA-FG
IN
24VDC
15
16 module and software packages are as shown below.
17
(FG)
D/A
18 GX Developer is necessary when using a Q62DA-FG.
-12~12V
0~22mA
Software Version
GX Developer GX Configurator-DA
90 (3.55) 22 (0.87) 27.4 (1.08)
If mounted with Version 7 or
Unit: mm (inch) Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU later
Q02/Q02H/Q06H/ later
Q12H/Q25HCPU
If mounted with Version 7.10L Version 1.14Q or later
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU or later
If mounted in a Version 6 or
multiple PLC system later
MELSECNET/H later
remote I/O station
Type
Q62DA-FG
Item
Number of analog outputs 2 points (2 channels)
Digital input 16-bit signed binary (-12288 to 12287, -16384 to 16383)
Voltage -12 to 12VDC (External load resistance: 1k to 1M )
Analog output 0 to 20mADC (External load resistance: 0 to 600 )
Current
0 to 22mADC (Please refer to Note 3)
I/ O characteristics Analog output range Digital input value Maximum resolution
maximum resolution Voltage 0 to 5V 0.416mV
0 to 12000
1 to 5V 0.333mV
-10 to 10V -16000 to 16000 0.625mV
User range setting 2 0.366mV
-12000 to 12000
User range setting 3 0.183mV
Current 0 to 20mA 1.66 A
0 to 12000
4 to 20mA 1.33 A
User range setting 1 -12000 to 12000 0.671 A
Reference
Accuracy (Accuracy Within 0.1% (Voltage: 10mV, Current: 20 A)
accuracy 1
relative to maximum
Temperature
analog output value) 80ppm/ °C (0.008%/ °C)
coefficient 2
Absolute maximum Voltage 13V
output Current 23mA
6-20
6.5 Channel-Isolated Digital to ANALOG
Analog Converter Module: MODULES
Q62DA-FG

Type
Q62DA-FG
Item
Resolution 12bit
Reference
Output monitor accuracy 1 0.2%
Temperature
160ppm/ °C (0.016%/ °C)
coefficient 2
Maximum number of writes for
100,000
E2PROM
Output short-circuit protection Available
Isolation specifications Specific isolated area Isolation method Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance
Between the I/O terminal and Photocoupler
PLC power supply isolation
Between analog output Transformer 1780VAC rms/3 cycles 500VDC
channels isolation (elevation 2000m) 10M or more 6
Between external supply power Transformer
and analog output cannel isolation
Applicable solderless terminals R 1.25-3 (Solderless terminals with sleeves are not applicable)
5 VDC Internal current
0.37A
consumption
24VDC, +20%, -15%
Voltage
External supply Ripple, spike within 500 mV p-p
power Inrush current: 5.2A, within 300 s
Current
0.3A
Weight 0.20kg
The module must be powered up (energized) for 30 minutes prior to operation in order to achieve full accuracy.
2: Accuracy per temperature change of 1 °C
Example: Accuracy when temperature changes from 25 to 30 °C
0.1% (Reference accuracy) + 0.008%/ °C (temperature coefficient) 5 °C (temperature change difference) = 0.14%
3: The following shows the external load resistance when output current is 20mA or more.
22mA
Output 20mA
current
500 600
External load resistance

The CPU, Q62DA-FG, GX Developer, and base unit given below are needed to perform an online module change.
(1) CPU
For the precautions for multiple CPU system configuration, refer to the Precautions for Multiple CPU System Configuration in
(2) GX Developer
(3) Base unit
(4) Warm-up
To achieve full accuracy, the module must be powered up (energized) for 30 minutes after online module change.
6-21
ANALOG 6.5 Channel-Isolated Digital to
MODULES Analog Converter Module:
Q62DA-FG
External Wiring
(1) For voltage output Terminal

1 Signal name
Control valve etc. number
1k
D/A
conversion
V+
to
1 V+
COM
I+ GND
1M 2 CH1 COM1
+20V +15V A/D
conversion
Amplifier 3 I+
DC24V
4 Vacant
24V
DC/DC Filter 24G
5 Vacant
converter
FG
6 Vacant
A.G
-15V 7 Vacant
1 Use a twisted two core shielded wire for the power wire. 8 Vacant
9 V+
(2) For current output
1 10 CH2 COM2
Control valve etc.
D/A
V+
0 11 I+
COM
conversion to
I+ 12 Vacant
600
GND
A/D
13 Vacant
+20V +15V Amplifier
conversion
14 Vacant
DC24V
24V 15 Vacant
DC/DC Filter 24G
converter
FG
16 24V
A.G 17 24G
-15V
18 FG
1 Use a twisted two core shielded wire for the power wire.

List of I/O signals
Note that I/O numbers (X/Y) shown below are the values when the Q62DA-FG module Head I/O address is set to 0.
Signal direction Q62DA-FG CPU module Signal direction CPU module Q62DA-FG
Device No Signal name Device No. Signal name
X0 Module ready Y0 Use prohibited 1
X3 Y3
X4 Use prohibited 1 Y4
X5 Y5
Use prohibited 1
X6 Y6
X7 Y7
X8 Monitor start flag Y8
XC Set value change completed flag YC Set value change request
XD Disconnection detection signal YD Disconnection detection clear request
XE Warning output signal YE Warning output clear request
POINT
ON/OFF from within the sequence program, the functioning of the Q62DA-FG module cannot be guaranteed.
6-22
Modules Setting/Monitoring MODULES
Tool: GX Configurator-DA
Overview Auto refresh setting screen sample

GX Configurator-DA is one of the add-in tools for GX
Developer (SW4D5C-GPPW-E or later). This is used to
set initial data for the Q62DA, Q64DA, Q68DAV, Q68DAI,
and Q62DA-FG digital to analog converter module and
automatic load of converted digital to analog data from the
CPU device memory to the digital to analog converter
module.
Although, initial value setting and others can be made in
sequence programs, use of GX Configurator-DA allows
sequence programs and also ensuring ease of setting and 6
checking of operating status.

The following initial data can be previously set in GX Monitoring and Testing Function
Configurator-AD. The monitoring and testing function is designed to monitor
Item Description the data and operation status in the digital to analog
Digital to analog Specifies the channel where digital to
conversion enable/disable analog conversion will be made.
converter module, and to change the set values as
required. Since you can monitor the operating status
Initial data setting screen sample
without needing to know the specific buffer address in the
digital to analog converter module, this function is effective
following data can be monitored and tested.
Target Item
Digital to analog Module ready
conversion High resolution mode status flag
Synchronous output mode status flag
Synchronous output request
Digital to analog converted value of each channel
Each channel output enable/disable flag
Error Digital value check code
Error code
Error occurrence flag
Error clear request
Operating Digital to analog conversion enable/disable setting
condition
Output range Output range setting status
Offset/gain setting
Auto Refresh Setting Monitoring/testing screen sample

Auto refresh function is a function that automatically writes
digital to analog converted data, etc. from the CPU to the
digital to analog converter module, which can reduce
programs. In auto refresh setting, assignment is made to
set the CPU device data which will be written to the digital
to analog converter module and the CPU devices to which
the digital to analog converter module data will be read.
The following data can be refreshed automatically.
Digital to analog converted value of each channel
Range check code for digital to analog converted digital value
Error code detected by the digital to analog converter module
6-23
6.7 Thermocouple Input Module,
ANALOG Channel-Isolated Thermocouple/
MODULES Micro Voltage Input Module:
Q64TD, Q64TDV-GH
Overview (9) Setting of Pt100 cold junction temperature
The Q64TD is a module designed to convert thermocouple compensation enable/disable

input values externally from the PLC into 16-bit signed Disabling cold junction temperature compensation with
binary temperature measurement values and into 16-bit Pt100 temperature-measuring resistor enables cold
signed binary scaling values (ratios). junction temperature compensation to be made
The Q64TDV-GH has the function to convert micro voltage externally from the module.
signals into 16-bit signed binary data, in addition to the
If the ±1 °C cold junction temperature compensation
temperature measurement function of the Q64TD.
accuracy of the Pt100 temperature-measuring resistor
Features cannot be ignored, use of an external precision ice
bath improves the cold junction temperature
(1) Channels isolated
Both the Q64TD and Q64TDV-GH are isolated compensation accuracy.
between channels. (10) Error compensation by offset/gain value setting
(2) 4 temperature measurement input channels in one Error compensation can be made by setting offset
module and gain values on each channel. The offset and gain
One Q64TD module can measure temperatures using
values, can be selected from user settings or factory
four channels.
settings.
It can also convert the detected temperature
measurement values into scaling values (ratios (%)). (11) Warning output
(3) 4 Micro voltage input channels on one module If the temperature detected is outside the preset
(Q64TDV-GH only) measurement range, a warning is output on each
One Q64TDV-GH module convert micro voltage input channel.
using four channels.
It can also convert the detected micro voltage
The module can be changed without the system
conversion values into scaling values (ratio values
(%)). being stopped.
(4) Setting of conversion enable/disable Also, by using the dedicated instruction (G.OGLOAD,
The conversion enable/disable setting for each channel G.OGSTOR) or writing to the buffer and turning on the
can be done. Disabling unused channels for corresponding Y signal, this enables reading of
conversion reduces the sampling time.
Q64TDV-GH module (changed online) offset/gain
It also prevents unnecessary disconnection detection
settings to the QCPU, and transfer of offset/gain settings
of unused channels.
(5) Compatible with thermocouples conforming to JIS to another Q64TDV-GH module mounted on a different
Standards slot position. (Only between the modules of the same
You can use eight different thermocouples (K, E, J, T, model.)
B, R, S, N) conforming to the JIS Standards. You can (13) Utility package for ease of setting
also select the thermocouple type for each channel
The GX Configurator-TI utility package is sold
using GX Developer.
separately.
(6) Disconnection detection
The disconnection of a thermocouple or compensation The utility package is not a required item. However, it
conductor can be detected on each channel. can be used to set initial settings and automatic
(7) Selection of sampling processing/time averaging refresh settings on screen, reduce sequence
processing/count averaging processing programs, and check settings and operating status
As a conversion processing method, you can choose
quickly.
sampling processing, time averaging processing or
count averaging processing on each channel.
(8) Pt100 temperature-measuring resistor for cold junction
temperature compensation
The connected Pt100 temperature-measuring resistor
provides cold junction temperature compensation
automatically.
6-24
Channel-Isolated Thermocouple/ ANALOG
Micro Voltage Input Module: MODULES
Q64TD, Q64TDV-GH
Item Function
Temperature This function allows temperature data to be (1) Q64TD
conversion imported by connecting a thermocouple.
2(0.08)
function Temperature data is converted into 16-bit signed
binary (-2700 to 18200) and stored into buffer Q64TD
RUN
memory. ERROR
Micro voltage This function converts a -100mV to +100mV micro

1
conversion voltage into a 16-bit signed binary (-25000 to R
T
D
2
function 25000) and stores it into the buffer memory. 3

4
(Q64TDV-GH SLD
5
6
105(4.14)
98 (3.86)
only) CH1+
SLD
7
8
Conversion This function specifies whether temperature/micro

CH2+
9
1-
10
enable/disable voltage conversion is enabled or disabled on each CH3+
2-
11
12
function channel. CH4+
3-
13
14
Setting temperature/micro voltage conversion 15
6
4-
SLD
16
enable/disable reduces the processing time of SLD
17
18
unused channels. In addition, it prevents
(FG)
Q64TD
unnecessary disconnection detection of unused

2(0.08) 112(4.41)
channels.
5(0.20)
27.4(1.08)
Disconnection This function detects the disconnection of the

detection connected thermocouple/micro voltage signal cable
function on each channel. (2) Q64TDV-GH
Input type This function sets the input type per channel.
2(0.08)
selection
function Q64TDV-GH
Warning This function outputs a warning if a

RUN
ERROR
output function temperature/micro voltage falls outside the user-set

temperature/micro voltage input range. R
1
T 2
Temperature (1) Sampling processing
D
3
4
conversion A temperature input value is converted into a SLD
5
6
system temperature successively on each channel and
105(4.14)
98 (3.86)
SLD
7
CH1+
8
(Q64TD) a digital output value is output after every CH2+
1-
9
conversion. 2-
10
11
(2) Averaging processing CH3+
CH4+
12
13
A temperature conversion value is averaged in 3-
4-
14
15
terms of count or time on each channel and a SLD
SLD
16
17
digital average value is output. (FG)
Q64TDV
18
Temperature/ (1) Sampling processing

-GH
micro voltage A temperature/micro voltage input value is 2(0.08) 112(4.41)

5(0.20)
27.4(1.08)
conversion converted successively on each channel and a
system digital output value is output after every
(Q64TDV-GH conversion. Unit: mm (inch)
only) (2) Averaging processing
A temperature input value/micro voltage Equipment
conversion value is averaged in terms of count
or time on each channel and a digital average
value is output. <Q64TD,Q64TDV-GH accessories>
Scaling This function converts a temperature measurement Product Description
function value/micro voltage conversion value into a preset
range ratio (%) and imports it into buffer memory. Manual Q64TD,Q64TDV-GH User's Manual
Pt100 cold This function specifies whether cold junction (Hardware)
junction temperature compensation is enabled or disabled
temperature when the Pt100 is connected to the terminals.
compensation This function is used when high accuracy <Separately obtainable products>
enable/disable measurement is required when the cold junction
function temperature compensation accuracy ( 1 ) of the The following manual must be obtained separately.
Pt100 cannot be ignored as an error. Product Description
Disabling the cold junction temperature
compensation of the Pt100 and providing a Manual Q64TD, Q64TDV-GH User's Manual
precision ice bath externally can improve the cold
junction temperature compensation accuracy.
Offset/gain This function compensates for the error of a
setting function temperature measurement value or changes the
conversion characteristic of a micro voltage
conversion value.
Online module The module can be changed without the system
change being stopped.
6-25
Q64TD, Q64TDV-GH
<Software packages supported> (2) Q64TDV-GH-compatible software packages

(1) Q64TD-compatible software packages Compatibility between systems which use Q64TDV-GH
Compatible between systems which use Q64TD and and software packages are as shown below.
software packages are as shown below. GX Developer is necessary when using a Q64TDV-GH.
GX Developer is necessary when using a Q64TD. Software Version
Software Version GX Developer GX Configurator-TI
GX Developer GX Configurator-TI If mounted with Version 7 or
If mounted with Version 7 or Version 1.10L or Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU later
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU later later If mounted with Q02/Q02H/ Version 4 or
If mounted with Q02/Q02H/ Version 4 or Version 1.00A or Q06H/Q12H/Q25HCPU later
Q06H/Q12H/Q25HCPU later later If mounted with Version 7.10L
Version 1.13P or
If mounted with Version 7.10L Version 1.13P or Q12PH/Q25PHCPU or later
later
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU or later later If mounted in a multiple PLC Version 6 or
If mounted in a multiple PLC Version 6 or Version 1.00A or system later
system later later If mounted in a Version 6 or
If mounted in a MELSECNET/H remote I/O later
Version 6 or Version 1.00A or
MELSECNET/H remote I/O station
later later
station
Specifications of Q64TD
(1) Performance Specifications
Type
Q64TD
Item
Number of channels 4 channels
16-bit, signed binary
Out Temperature conversion value
(-2700 to 18200: Value to the first decimal place 10 times)
put
Scaling value 16-bit, signed binary
Standard with which thermocouple
JIS C1602-1995
conforms
Usable thermocouples and measured
Refer to the table of usable thermocouples and measured temperature range accuracies.
temperature range accuracies
Cold junction temperature
1.0
compensation accuracy
Accuracy As per calculation expression marked 1
Resolution B,R,S,N : 0.3 K,E,J,T : 0.1
Conversion speed 40ms/channel 2
Number of analog input points 4 channels + Pt100 connection channel/module
Across thermocouple input and earth : Transformer insulation
Isolation specifications Across thermocouple input channels : Transformer insulation
Across cold junction temperature compensation input (Pt100) and earth : No insulation
Dielectric withstand voltage 1780VrmsAC/3 cycles (altitude 2000m)
Across thermocouple input and earth : 500VDC 100MΩ or more using insulation resistance tester
Insulation resistance
Across thermocouple input channels : 500VDC 10MΩ or more using insulation resistance tester
Wire break detection Yes (Each channel independent) 3
2
Connection terminals 18-point terminal block
Applicable crimping terminals 1.25-3 R1.25-3(Sleeved crimping terminals are unusable)
Weight 0.25kg
1: Calculate the accuracy using the following method.
(Accuracy) = (conversion accuracy) + (temperature characteristic) (operating ambient temperature variation) + (cold junction
temperature compensation accuracy)
An operating ambient temperature variation indicates a deviation of the operating ambient temperature from the 25 5 range.
Example: When the thermocouple used is B, the operating ambient temperature is 35 , and the measured temperature is
1000 , the accuracy is: (25 5 ) + ( 0.4 ) (5 ) + ( 1 ) = 5.5
2: The conversion speed is a period from when a temperature is input and converted into a corresponding digital value until the value
is stored into the buffer memory. When two or more channels are used, the conversion speed is "40ms number of channels
enabled for conversion ".
3: At wire break detection, the temperature conversion value just before the wire break occurs is held.
6-26
Q64TD, Q64TDV-GH

The CPU, Q64TD/Q64TDV-GH, GX Developer, and base unit given below are needed to perform an online module change.
(1) CPU
The Q12PHCPU or Q25PHCPU is needed. Online module change cannot be used on a MELSECNET/H remote I/O station. For the
precautions for multiple CPU system configurations, refer to the Precautions for Multiple CPU System Configuration in Section 3.5
Overview of Multiple CPU System.
(2) Q64TD
(3) GX Developer
(4) Base unit
2) The module mounted on the Q5 B extension base unit cannot be changed online. Also, when the Q5 B is used, the module
mounted on the main base unit cannot be changed online.
(2) Usable thermocouples and measured temperature range accuracies

Usable Measured Conversion Accuracy Temperature Characteristic Max. Temperature Error 6
Thermocouple Temperature (At operating ambient (Per operating ambient temperature at Ambient Temperature
Type Range 1 temperature 25 5 ) variation of 1 ) 55
0 to 600 — 3 — 3 — 3
600 to 800 2 3.0 13.0
B 0.4
800 to 1700 2 2.5 12.5
1700 to 1820 — 3 — 3 — 3
-50 to 0 — 3 — 3 — 3
0 to 300 2 2.5 0.4 12.5
R
300 to 1600 2 2.0 0.3 9.5
1600 to 1760 — 3 — 3 — 3
-50 to 0 — 3 — 3 — 3
0 to 300 2 2.5 0.4 12.5
S
300 to 1600 2 2.0 0.3 9.5
1600 to 1760 — 3 — 3 — 3
-270 to -200 — 3 — 3 — 3
Larger value of 0.5 and Larger value of 0.06 and
-200 to 0 2 11.0
0.5% of measured temperature 0.2% of measured temperature
K
0 to 1200 2 9.0
1200 to 1370 — 3 — 3 — 3
-270 to –200 — 3 — 3 — 3
-200 to 0 2 8.5
E
0 to 900 2 6.75
900 to 1000 — 3 — 3 — 3
-210 to -40 — 3 — 3 — 3
J -40 to 750 2 5.625
750 to 1200 — 3 — 3 — 3
-270 to -200 — 3 — 3 — 3
-200 to 0 2 6.0
T
0 to 350 2 2.625
350 to 400 — 3 — 3 — 3
-270 to -200 — 3 — 3 — 3
-200 to 0 2 11.0
N
0 to 1250 2 9.375
1250 to 1300 — 3 — 3 — 3
1: If a value entered from the thermocouple is outside the measured temperature range given in the table, it is handled as the
maximum/minimum value of the measured temperature range.
2: The accuracy only in the temperature ranges of Class 1 to 3 (shaded areas) in JIS C1602-1995 apply.
3: Temperature measurement can be made, but accuracy is not guaranteed.
6-27
Q64TD, Q64TDV-GH
Specifications of Q64TDV-GH
Type
Q64TDV-GH
Item
Temperature conversion value 16-bit, signed binary (-2700 to 18200: Value to the first decimal place 10 times)
Out
Micro voltage conversion value 16-bit signed binary (-25000 to 25000)
put
Standard with which thermocouple
JIS C1602-1995
conforms
Usable thermocouples and measured
Refer to the table of usable thermocouples and measured temperature range accuracies.
temperature range accuracies
Cold junction temperature
1.0
compensation accuracy
Thermocouple input accuracy As per calculation expression marked 1
Micro voltage input range -100mV to +100mV (input resistance 2MΩ or more)
Micro voltage input accuracy Refer to the table of micro voltage input accuracies.
Resolutio Thermocouple input B:0.7 R,S:0.8 K,T:0.3 E:0.2 J:0.1 N:0.4
n Micro voltage input 4 V
Sampling time 20ms/channel 2
Conversion speed Sampling time 3 3
Number of analog input points 4 channels + Pt100 connection channel/module
Absolute maximum input 5V
Across thermocouple input/micro voltage input and earth : Transformer insulation
Insulation system Across thermocouple input/micro voltage input channels : Transformer insulation
Across cold junction temperature compensation input (Pt100) and earth : No insulation
Across thermocouple input/micro voltage input and earth : 500VDC 100MΩ or more using
insulation resistance tester
Isolation specifications
Across thermocouple input/micro voltage input channels : 500VDC 10MΩ or more using
insulation resistance tester
E2PROM write count Max. 100 thousand times
Number of occupied points 16 points
Applicable crimping terminals 1.25-3 R1.25-3(Sleeved crimping terminals are unusable)
Weight 0.25kg
Outline dimensions 98 (3.86)(H) 27.4 (1.08)(W) 112 (4.41)(D) (mm(inch))
1: Calculate the accuracy using the following method.
(Accuracy) = (conversion accuracy) + (temperature characteristic) (operating ambient temperature variation) + (cold junction
temperature compensation accuracy)
An operating ambient temperature variation indicates a deviation of the operating ambient temperature from the 25 5 range.
Example: When the thermocouple used is B, the operating ambient temperature is 35 , and the measured temperature is 1000 ,
the accuracy is: ( 3.5 ) + ( 0.4 ) (5 ) + ( 1 ) = 6.5
2: The time until a thermocouple input value/micro voltage input value is converted into a temperature measurement value/micro
voltage conversion value.
3: The time until a thermocouple input value/micro voltage input value is converted into a temperature measurement value/micro
voltage conversion value and the resultant value is stored into the buffer memory.
The conversion speed is a delay time that occurs during sampling processing. It is independent of averaging processing.
Example: When two channels are enabled for conversion
(Conversion speed) = (sampling period) 3
= (20ms 2 channels) 3
= 120ms
Input 1) Input 2)
Conversion processing CH.1 CH.2 CH.1 CH.2 CH.1 CH.2 CH.1 CH.2 CH.1 CH.2
Buffer memory Input 1) Input 2)

Conversion speed
Conversion speed
4: At wire break detection, the temperature measurement value/micro voltage conversion value right before wire break occurrence is held.
6-28
Q64TD, Q64TDV-GH

The CPU, Q64TD/Q64TDV-GH, GX Developer, and base unit given below are needed to perform an online module change.
(1) CPU
(2) GX Developer
(3) Base unit
(2)Usable Thermocouples and Measured Temperature Range Accuracies

Usable Measured Conversion Accuracy Temperature Characteristic Max. Temperature Error 6
Thermocouple Temperature (At operating ambient (Per operating ambient temperature at Ambient Temperature
Type Range 1 temperature 25 5 ) variation of 1 ) 55
0 to 600 — 3 — 3 — 3
600 to 800 2 4.0 14.0
B 0.4
800 to 1700 2 3.5 13.5
1700 to 1820 — 3 — 3 — 3
-50 to 0 — 3 — 3 — 3
0 to 300 2 4.0 14.0
R 0.4
300 to 1600 2 3.5 13.5
1600 to 1760 — 3 — 3 — 3
-50 to 0 — 3 — 3 — 3
0 to 300 2 4.0 14.0
S 0.4
300 to 1600 2 3.5 13.5
1600 to 1760 — 3 — 3 — 3
-270 to -200 — 3 — 3 — 3
-200 to 0 2 2.0 8.25
K 0 to 200 2 1.5 0.25 7.75
0 to 1200 2 2.0 8.25
1200 to 1370 — 3 — 3 — 3
-270 to -200 — 3 — 3 — 3
-200 to 200 2 1.5 5.25
E 0.15
200 to 900 2 2.0 5.75
900 to 1000 — 3 — 3 — 3
-210 to -40 — 3 — 3 — 3
-40 to 200 2 1.5 5.25
J 0.15
200 to 750 2 2.0 5.75
750 to 1200 — 3 — 3 — 3
-270 to -200 — 3 — 3 — 3
-200 to 0 2 2.0v 4.5
T 0.1
0 to 350 2 1.5 4.0
350 to 400 — 3 — 3 — 3
-270 to -200 — 3 — 3 — 3
-200 to 0 2 2.5 8.75
N 0 to 200 2 2.0 0.25 8.25
0 to 1250 2 2.5 8.75
1250 to 1300 — 3 — 3 — 3
1: If a value entered from the thermocouple is outside the measured temperature range given in the table, it is handled as the
maximum/minimum value of the measured temperature range.
2: The accuracy only in the temperature ranges of Class 1 to 3 (shaded areas) in JIS C1602-1995 apply.
3: Temperature measurement can be made, but accuracy is not guaranteed.
6-29
Q64TD, Q64TDV-GH
(3) Micro voltage input range and accuracy External Wiring

The micro voltage input range and accuracy is shown
(1) Thermocouple
below.
Conversion Accuracy RTD
amplifier
Measurable +
Input
(At 25 5 (At 25 5 Pt100
Input Type Voltage -
operating operating
Range ambient ambient
temperature) temperature)
Micro voltage -100 to
0.2mV 0.8mV
Transformer
input 100mV CH1
amplifier
+
Filter
Input
-
SLD
Transformer
CH4
amplifier
+
Input
Filter
-
SLD
FG
*1
*2
*1:As cables, always use shielded compensation conductors.

Also, wire the shielded cables as short as possible.
*2:Always connect to the earth terminal of the control box.
(2) Micro voltage signal
RTD
amplifier
+
Input
Pt100
-
Load cell or like

CH1
Transformer
amplifier
+
Input
Filter
-
SLD
Load cell or like

Transformer
CH4
amplifier
+
Input
Filter
-
SLD
FG
*1
*2
*1:As cables, always use shielded conductors.

Also, wire the shielded cables as short as possible.
*2:Always connect to the earth terminal of the control box.
6-30
Q64TD, Q64TDV-GH
Signal name Signal name

Terminal number Terminal number
Q64TD/Q64TDV-GH Q64TD/Q64TDV-GH
1 RTD+ 10 CH1-
2 Vacant 11 CH2-
3 RTD- 12 CH3+
4 Vacant 13 CH4+
5 Vacant 14 CH3-
6 CH1 SLD 15 CH4-
7 CH2 SLD 16 CH3 SLD
8 CH1+ 17 CH4 SLD
9 CH2+ 18 FG
6
I/O Signals Transferred to/from PLC CPU
I/O signal list
The I/O numbers (X/Y) given below are the values when the Q64TD/Q64TDV-GH module Head I/O address is set to 0.
Input Signal Output Signal
(Signal Direction: PLC CPU Q64TD/Q64TDV-GH) (Signal Direction: PLC CPU Q64TD/Q64TDV-GH)
Device No. Signal name Device No. Signal name
X0 Module Ready Y0 Use prohibited
X1 CH.1 Offset/Gain Setting Status Signal Y1 CH.1 Offset Setting Request
X2 CH.2 Offset/Gain Setting Status Signal Y2 CH.1 Gain Setting Request
X5 Y5 CH.3 Offset Setting Request
X6 Y6 CH.3 Gain Setting Request
Reserved (always OFF)
X9 Operation Condition Setting Completed Signal Y9 Operation Condition Setting Request
XA Offset/Gain Setting Mode Flag YA User Range Write Request
XB Reserved (always OFF) YB
XC Disconnection Detection Flag YC
XD Warning Output Signal YD Use prohibited
Q64TD T/D Conversion Completed Flag
XE YE
Q64TDV-GH Conversion Completed Flag
XF Error Occurred Flag YF Error Clear Request
POINT
ON/OFF from within the sequence program, the functioning of the Q64TD/Q64TDV-GH module cannot be guaranteed.
6-31
ANALOG
MODULES 6.8 Temperature Input Module:
Q64RD
Overview (8) ONLINE MODULE CHANGE

The Q64RD is a module for connection of platinum stopped.
temperature-measuring resistors and designed to convert Also, by using the dedicated instruction (G.OGLOAD,
the temperature data [ ] input from platinum G.OGSTOR) or writing to the buffer and turning on the
temperature-measuring resistors Pt100 or JPt100 corresponding Y signal, this enables reading of Q64RD
(hereafter abbreviated to Pt100 or JPt100) into module (changed online) offset/gain settings to the QCPU,
temperature measurement values and scaling values and transfer of offset/gain settings to another Q64RD
(ratios). module mounted on a different slot position. (Only
• 16-bit signed binary data (stored as a value to the first between the modules of the same model.)
decimal place 10) (9) The GX Configurator-TI utility package is sold
• 32-bit signed binary data (stored as a value to the third separately.
decimal place 1000) The utility package is not a required item. However, it
can be used to set initial settings and automatic refresh
(Refer to the specifications for connection of platinum
settings on screen, reduce sequence programs, and
temperature-measuring resistor)
check settings and operating status quickly.
Features Functions
(1) 4 temperature measurement input channels in one Item Function
module Temperature This function allows temperature data to be
One Q64RD module can measure temperatures using conversion imported by connecting a platinum
function temperature-measuring resistor.
four channels. Temperature data is converted into 16-bit
It can also convert the detected temperature signed binary (-2000 to 8500), 32-bit signed
measurement values into scaling values (ratios (%)). binary (-200000 to 850000) and stored into
buffer memory.
(2) Setting of conversion enable/disable
Conversion This function specifies whether temperature
The conversion enable/disable setting for each channel enable/disable conversion is enabled or disabled on each
can be done. Disabling unused channels for function channel.
conversion reduces the sampling time. Setting temperature conversion
enable/disable reduces the processing time of
It also prevents unnecessary disconnection detection of
unused channels. In addition, it prevents
unused channels. unnecessary disconnection detection of
(3) Compatible with platinum temperature-measuring unused channels.
resistors conforming to JIS Standards Disconnection This function detects the disconnection of the
detection connected platinum temperature-measuring
You can use two different platinum function resistor on each channel.
temperature-measuring resistors (Pt100, JPt100) Range
This function changes the measured
conforming to the JIS Standards. changing
temperature range.
You can also select the platinum function
Platinum
temperature-measuring resistor type for each channel
temperature-me
using GX Developer. This function sets the type of the platinum
asuring resistor
temperature-measuring resistor per channel.
(4) Disconnection detection selection
The disconnection of a platinum function
Warning output This function outputs a warning if a
temperature-measuring resistor or cable can be
function temperature falls outside the user-set
detected on each channel. temperature range.
(5) Selection of sampling processing/time averaging Temperature (1) Sampling processing
processing/count averaging processing conversion A temperature input value is converted
system into a temperature successively on each
As a conversion processing method, you can choose channel and a digital output value is output
sampling processing, time averaging processing or after every conversion.
count averaging processing on each channel. (2) Averaging processing
(6) Error compensation by offset/gain value setting A temperature conversion value is
averaged in terms of count or time on
Error compensation can be made by setting offset and each channel and a digital average value
gain values on each channel. The offset and gain is output.
values, can be selected from user settings or factory Scaling function This function converts a temperature
settings. conversion value into a preset range ratio (%)
and imports it into buffer memory.
(7) Warning output Offset/gain This function compensates for an error of a
If the temperature detected is outside the preset setting function temperature conversion value.
measurement range, a warning is output on each Online module The module can be changed without the
channel. change system being stopped.
6-32
ANALOG
6.8 Temperature Input Module: MODULES
Q64RD
Q64RD
RUN <64RD accessories>
ERROR
Product Description
CH1 a1 1 Manual Q64RD User's Manual (Hardware)
A1 2
B1 3
b1 4
CH2 a2 5
98 (3.86)
A2 6
B2 7
CH3
b2
a3
8
9
A3
10
B3 11 Product Description
b3 12
CH4 a4
A4
13
14
Manual Q64RD User's Manual
B4
15
b4 16
(FG)
SLD
17
18 <Software packages supported> 6
Q64RD
Compatibility between systems which use Q64RD and

90 (3.55) 27.4 (1.08)
software packages are as shown below.
Unit: mm (inch) GX Developer is necessary when using a Q64RD.
Software Version
GX Developer GX Configurator-TI
If mounted with Version 1.10L or
Version 7 or later
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU later
If mounted with
Version 1.00A or
Q02/Q02H/Q06H/ Version 4 or later
later
Q12H/Q25HCPU
If mounted with Version 7.10L Version 1.13P
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU or later Version or later
If mounted in a Version 1.00A or
Version 6 or later
multiple PLC system later
If mounted in a
Version 1.00A or
MELSECNET/H Version 6 or later
later
remote I/O station
6-33
ANALOG
Q64RD
Type
Q64RD
Item
Temperature 16-bit, signed binary data (-2000 to 8500: Value to the first decimal place 10 times)
Output conversion value 32-bit, signed binary data (-200000 to 850000: Value to the third decimal place 1000 times)
Usable platinum
Pt100(JIS C1604-1997,IEC 751 1983), JPt100(JIS C1604-1981)
temperature-measuring resistors
Measured Pt100 -200 to 850
temperature
JPt100 -180 to 600
range
Range Pt100 -20 to 120 / -200 to 850
changing JPt100 -20 to 120 / -180 to 600
Ambient temperature
Accuracy 0 to 55 0.25% (accuracy relative to full-scale value)
1 Ambient temperature
25 5 0.08% (accuracy relative to full-scale value)
Resolution 0.025
Conversion speed 40ms/channel 2
Number of analog input points 4 channels/module
Temperature detecting output current 1Ma
Across platinum temperature-measuring resistor input and PLC power supply : Transformer insulation
Isolation specifications
Across platinum temperature-measuring resistor input channels : No insulation
Across thermocouple input and earth : 500VDC 100MΩ or more using insulation resistance tester
Across thermocouple input channels : 500VDC 10MΩ or more using insulation resistance tester
Applicable crimping terminals 1.25-3 R1.25-3 (Sleeved crimping terminals are unusable)
Cables between Q64RD and platinum Total resistance not more than 2kΩ (Refer to the specifications for connection of platinum
temperature-measuring resistor temperature-measuring resistor)
External dimensions 98 (3.86) (H) 27.4 (1.08) (W) 90 (3.54) (D) (mm (inch))
Weight 0.17kg
1: The selection ranges and accuracies have the following relationships.
Selection Range Pt100 and JPt100 : Pt100 : JPt100 :
Ambient Temperature -20 to 120 -200 to 850 -180 to 600
0 to 55 0.3 2.125 1.5
25 5 0.096 0.68 0.48
2: The conversion speed is the time from when a temperature is input and converted into a corresponding digital value until the value is
stored into the buffer memory.
When two or more channels are used, the conversion speed is "40ms number of conversion enabled channels".
3: At wire break detection, the temperature conversion value right before wire break occurrence is held.
The CPU, Q64RD, GX Developer, and base unit given below are needed to perform an online module change.
(1) CPU
The Q12PHCPU or Q25PHCPU is needed. Online module change cannot be used on a MELSECNET/H remote I/O station. For the
precautions for multiple CPU system configurations, refer to the Precautions for Multiple CPU System Configuration in Section 3.5
Overview of Multiple CPU System.
(2) Q64RD
(3) GX Developer
(4) Base unit
2) The module mounted on the Q5 B extension base unit cannot be changed online. Also, when the Q5 B is used, the module
mounted on the main base unit cannot be changed online.
6-34
ANALOG
6.8 Temperature Input Module: MODULES
Q64RD
(2) Specifications for Connection of Platinum Temperature-Measuring Resistor

This section explains the specifications for connection of the Q64RD and platinum temperature-measuring resistors.
(a) For 3 conductor type (b) For 4 conductor type
The conductor resistance value should satisfy the The conductor resistance value should satisfy the
condition of 1) + 2) 2k max. condition of 1) + 2) 2k max.
In addition, the difference of the conductor resistance
value between 1) and 2) should be 10 max.
Q64RD
Q64RD Conductor
a1
Conductor
a1 2)
A1
2) Pt100
A1
B1
6
Pt100
B1
b1
1)
b1
1) SLD
SLD
POINT
When making offset/gain adjustment, set the conductor resistance value actually used.
External Wiring For use of Q64RD (For 3 conductor type)
For use of Q64RD (For 4 conductor type) a1
CH1 A1
a1
B1
A1
B1 b1
b1
CH2
a2 For use of Q64RD (For 2 conductor type)
A2 When 4 conductor type is selected in switch 3
B2 of intelligent function module switch setting
b2
CH3 a1
a3
A1
A3
B3 B1
b3
Bare crimping sleeve for copper wire b1
CH4
a4
A4
B4
b4
When 3 conductor type is selected in switch 3
of intelligent function module switch setting
SLD Connected inside module

To "SLD" Detail a1
terminal
FG A1
B1
To earth terminal of enclosure b1
6-35
ANALOG
Q64RD
External I/O terminals

Terminal
Signal name
number
1 a1
2 A1
CH1
3 B1
4 b1
5 a2
6 A2
CH2
7 B2
8 b2
9 a3
10 A3
CH3
11 B3
12 b3
13 a4
14 A4
CH4
15 B4
16 b4
17 SLD
18 FG

I/O signal list
The I/O numbers (X/Y) given below are the values when the Q64RD module Head I/O address is set to 0.
Input Signal (Signal Direction: PLC CPU Q64RD) Output Signal (Signal Direction: PLC CPU Q64RD)
X0 Module Ready Signal Y0 Use prohibited
Reserved (always OFF)
X9 Operation Condition Setting Completed Signal Y9 Operation Condition Setting Request
XA Offset/Gain Setting Mode Flag YA User Range Write Request
XB Reserved (always OFF) YB
XC Disconnection Detection Flag YC
Use prohibited
XD Warning Output Signal YD
XE R/D Conversion Completed Flag YE
XF Error Occurred Flag YF Error Clear Request
POINT
ON/OFF from within the sequence program, the functioning of the Q64RD module cannot be guaranteed.
6-36
6.9 Thermocouple Input Module ANALOG
Setting/Monitoring Tool: MODULES
GX Configurator-TI
Overview (5) Contents of alarm occurrence
GX Configurator-TI is one of the add-in tools for GX (6) Scaling value

Developer (SW4D5C-GPPW-E or later). This is used to Automatic refresh setting screen sample
set initial data for the Q64TD, Q64TD V-GH, or Q64RD
temperature input module and to automatically load of
measured temperature values to the CPU device memory.
sequence programs, use of GX Configurator-TI allows
sequence programs also ensure the checking of the
setting status and operating status quickly.
6
The initial values needed for the temperature input module
can be set on the screen. The following initial values can
be set.
Monitoring and Testing Functions
(1) Conversion Enable/Disable setting
(2) Conversion process setting The monitoring and testing function is designed to monitor
(3) Temperature sensor type setting the data and operating status in the temperature input
(4) Alert function setting module, and to change the set values as required. Since
you can monitor the operating status without needing to
(5) Scaling setting
know the specific buffer addresses in the temperature
Initial value setting screen sample
input module, this function is effective for system
maintenance and troubleshooting. The following data can
be monitored and tested.
(1) Conversion Enable/Disable setting
(2) Measured temperature value
(3) Error code
(4) Temperature sensor type
(5) Alarm output status
(6) Offset/gain setting
Auto Refresh Setting
By setting auto refresh, measured temperature and other

values can be read from the temperature input module to
the CPU automatically, which can reduce programs. The
following data can be refreshed automatically.
(1) Conversion completion flag
(2) Measured temperature value
(3) Error code
(4) Setting range
6-37
ANALOG 6.10 Temperature Control Module:
MODULES Q64TCTT, Q64TCTTBW,
Q64TCRT, Q64TCRTBW
Overview (5) Connection of thermocouples compatible with JIS, IEC,

(1) What are Q64TCTT and Q64TCRT? NBS, ASTM and DIN Standards
(a) The Q64TCTT and Q64TCRT are modules (a) The Q64TCTT(BW) accepts the following
designed to convert input values from external thermocouples compatible with the JIS, IEC, NBS,
temperature sensors into 16-bit signed BIN (binary) ASTM and DIN Standards.
data. It also, includes a PID function to attain • JIS Standards : R, K, J, S, B, E, T
target temperatures, and provides transistor • IEC Standards : R, K, J, S, B, E, T, N
outputs for temperature control. • NBS Standards : PL II
(b) The Q64TCTT and Q64TCRT have an auto tuning • ASTM Standards : W5re, W23re
function that automatically sets the proportional • DIN Standards : U, L
band (P), integral time (I) and derivative time (D)
(b) The Q64TCTT(BW) allows you to set the
for PID operations.
temperature measurement ranges that meet the
(c) The Q64TCTT accepts K, J, T, B, S, E, R, N, U, L,
PL II and W5Re/W26Re type thermocouples. The operating temperatures of the above
Q64TCRT accepts Pt100 and JPt100 type thermocouples.
platinum temperature-measuring resistors. (6) Connection of Pt100 and JPt100 platinum
(2) What are Q64TCTTBW and Q64TCRTBW? temperature-measuring resistors
The Q64TCTTBW and Q64TCRTBW are Q64TCTT The Q64TCRT(BW) allows you to set the temperature
and Q64TCRT-based modules that include an measurement ranges which meet the operating
additional function that detects heater wire temperatures of the Pt100 and JPt100.
disconnection using inputs from external current (7) Choice of fine temperature measurement units and
sensors. various control temperature ranges
Item Q64TCTT Q64TCTTBW Q64TCRT Q64TCRTBW
The temperature measurement unit of each loop can
Platinum Platinum
Input sensor temperature- temperature- be set to 1°C or 0.1°C in Centigrade or to 1°F or 0.1°F
Thermocouple Thermocouple
type measuring measuring in Fahrenheit, enabling you to choose the appropriate
resistor resistor resolution for control. Also, the controllable temperature
Heater
disconnection range can be selected from 0.0 to 400.0°C (when K
No Yes No Yes
detection type thermocouple is used), 0.0 to 3000.0°C (when R
function type thermocouple is used) and others, enabling you to
make adequate setting for the object to be controlled.
Features 2
(8) E PROM for backing up set values
(1) Optimum temperature adjustment control (PID control) The set values in buffer memory can be stored into
(a) The Q64TC provides temperature adjustment E2PROM for data backup.
control automatically by merely setting the PID Using the test function of GX Developer to write data
constants (proportional band (P), integral time (I), directly to the buffer memory, what is required in a
derivative time (D)) and temperature set value (set
sequence program is "LD " + "OUT Yn1" at the
value: SV) necessary for PID operations.
minimum.
Therefore, no special instructions are needed to
perform PID control. (9) Disconnection detection
(b) Using the auto tuning function enables the PID The Q64TCTTBW and Q64TCRTBW can detect the
constants to be set automatically by the Q64TC. disconnection of a heater.
Hence, you can use the equipment without being (10) ONLINE MODULE CHANGE
conscious of difficult PID operation expressions to The module can be changed without the system being
find the PID constants. stopped.
(2) 4 loops on 1 module (11) Utility package for ease of setting
The module provides a maximum of four simultaneous The GX Configurator-TC utility package is sold
loops for temperature adjustment control. separately.
(3) RFB limiter function
Though you are not required to use the utility package,
The RFB (Reset Feed Back) limiter suppresses
it allows initial and automatic refresh settings to be
overshooting which is liable to occur at startup or when
the temperature set value (SV) is increased. made on the screen, reducing sequence programs
(4) Sensor compensation function and also enabling you to check the setting and
By setting a sensor compensation value, the sensor operating states and execute auto tuning easily.
compensation function eliminates the difference
between a temperature process value (PV) and the
actual temperature.
6-38
6.10 Temperature Control Module: ANALOG
Q64TCTT, Q64TCTTBW, MODULES
Q64TCRT, Q64TCRTBW
Functions (2) Q64TCTTBW
2 (0.08)
Item Function
Auto-tuning • The temperature control module
function automatically sets the optimal PID constants.
Forward
action/reverse • Either heat control (reverse action) or cooling
action selection control (forward action) can be selected.
function
98 (3.86)
105 (4.14)
RFB limiter • Limit the manipulation value overshoot that
function frequently occurs when the set value (SV) is
changed or control target is changed.
Sensor • Reduces the difference between the
compensation measured value and actual temperature to
function zero when these two are different due to
measurement conditions, etc.
Unused channel • Disables the PID operation for channels that 2 (0.08) 112 (4.41) 55.2 (2.17)
6
5 (0.20)
setting do not perform temperature adjustment Unit: mm (in.)
therefore alarm error will not activate.
PID control • Stops the PID operation for channels that is
forced stop performing temperature adjustment.
Heater
(3) Q64TCRT
• Measures the current that flows in the heater
2 (0.08)
disconnection
main circuit and detects disconnection when
detection
Q64TCTTBW or the Q64TCRTBW is used.
function
Current error • When the Q64TCTTBW or the Q64TCRTBW
detection is used, this function measures the current in
function when the heater's main circuit while the transistor's
output is off output is off, and checks if there is a current
error when output is off.
98 (3.86)
105 (4.14)
Loop • A function to detect errors in the control
disconnection system (control loop) caused by a load
detection (heater) disconnection, abnormal operation
function from external device (such as magnet relay),
or a thermocouple disconnection.
Data
2
storage in • By backing up the buffer memory contents to
E PROM E2PROM, the amount of sequence program
is reduced. 2 (0.08) 112 (4.41) 27.4 (10.80)
5 (0.20)
Alert alarm • Monitors the process value (PV) and alerts Unit: mm (in.)
the user.
Control output
• This function continues/stops temperature
setting for CPU
stop error
adjustment control output at CPU stop error (4) Q64TCRTBW
occurrence.
2 (0.08)
occurrence
Q64TC control • The Q64TC can be controlled by the output
status signal of Q64TC and the settings in the
buffer memory.
Online module • A module change is made without the
Appearance
98 (3.86)
105 (4.14)
(1) Q64TCTT
2 (0.08)
2 (0.08) 112 (4.41) 55.2 (2.17)

5 (0.20)
Unit: mm (in.)
Unit: mm (inch)
98 (3.86)
105 (4.14)
2 (0.08) 112 (4.41) 27.4 (10.80)

5 (0.20)
Unit: mm (in.)
6-39
Q64TCRT, Q64TCRTBW
External I/O Terminals
Q64TCTT, Q64TCTTBW external I/O terminals

Number Q64TCTT Q64TCTTBW
1 L1 Unused L1
2 L2 CH1+ L2
3 L3 CH1- L3
4 L4 CH2+ L4
5 COM- CH2- COM-
6 Unused CH3+ Unused
7 CH1+ CH3- CH1+
8 CH2+ CH4+ CH2+
9 CH1- CH4- CH1-
10 CH2- CH5+ CH2-
11 Unused CH5- Unused
12 CJ CH6+ CJ
13 Unused CH6- Unused
14 CJ CH7+ CJ
15 CH3+ CH7- CH3+
16 CH4+ CH8+ CH4+
17 CH3- CH8- CH3-
18 CH4- Unused CH4-
Q64TCRT, Q64TCRTBW external I/O terminals

Number Q64TCRT Q64TCRTBW
1 L1 Unused L1
2 L2 CH1+ L2
3 L3 CH1- L3
4 L4 CH2+ L4
5 COM- CH2- COM-
6 Unused CH3+ Unused
7 A1 CH3- A1
8 A2 CH4+ A2
9 B1 CH4- B1
10 B2 CH5+ B2
11 b1 CH5- b1
12 b2 CH6+ b2
13 A3 CH6- A3
14 A4 CH7+ A4
15 B3 CH7- B3
16 B4 CH8+ B4
17 b3 CH8- b3
18 b4 Unused b4
6-40
Q64TCRT, Q64TCRTBW
External Wiring (3) For use of Q64TCRT

Q64TCRT
(1) For use of Q64TCTT
L1
R
Q64TCTT
Internal circuit
L2
L1
R
Internal circuit L4
L2
COM-
L4 24VDC
Controlled
COM-
Filter
A1
object
24VDC B B1
b b1
Internal circuit
6
Controlled
CH1+
Filter
A2
object
Filter
CH1-
B2
Internal circuit
b2
CH2+
Filter
CH2- A4
Filter
B4
b4
CH4+
Filter
CH4-
(2) For use of Q64TCTTBW (4) For use of Q64TCRTBW

Q64TCTTBW
Q64TCRTBW
L1 L1
R R
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
L2 L2
L4 L4
Current sensor COM- COM-

(CT) 24VDC Current sensor
24VDC
(CT)
Controlled
CH1+ A
Filter
Controlled
Filter
A1
object
object
CH1- B B1
Internal circuit
b b1
Internal circuit
CH2+
Filter
A2
Filter
CH2- B2
b2
CH4+
Filter
A4
Filter
CH4- B4
b4
Connector
Connector
Connector
Connector
CT1+
CT1-
CT1+
CT1-
CT2+
CT input circuit
CT2- CT2+
CT2- CT input circuit
CT8+
CT8+
CT8- CT8-
Always use shielded cables.
6-41
Q64TCRT, Q64TCRTBW
Type
Q64TCTT Q64TCRT Q64TCTTBW Q64TCRTBW
Item
Control output Transistor output
Number of temperature input points 4 channels/module
Usable thermocouples/platinum
Refer to the "usable temperature sensor type, measured temperature range and data resolution".
temperature-measuring resistors
Ambient temperature:
Input range width (±0.3%)
25°C 5°C
Accuracy
Ambient temperature:
Input range width (±0.7%)
0°C to 55°C
Input temperature:
Cold junction Within 1.0°C Within 1.0°C
-100°C or more
temperature
Input temperature:
compensation Within 2.0°C — Within 2.0°C —
accuracy
-150°C to -100°C
(0°C to 55°C) Input temperature:
Within 3.0°C Within 3.0°C
-200°C to -150°C
Sampling period 0.5s/4 channels (constant independently of the number of channels used)
Control output period 1 to 100s
Input impedance 1M
Input filter 0 to 100s (0: Input filter off)
Sensor compensation value setting -50.00 to 50.00%
Operation at sensor input
Upscale processing
disconnection
Temperature control system PID ON/OFF pulse or 2-position control
PID constant setting Setting can be made by auto tuning
PID constant Proportional band (P) 0.0 to 1000.0% (0: 2-position control)
range Integral time (I) 1 to 3600s
Derivative time (D) 0 to 3600s (set 0 for PI control.)
Set value setting range Within temperature range set to the used thermocouple/platinum temperature-measuring resistor
Dead band setting range 0.1 to 10.0%
Output signal ON/OFF pulse
Rated load voltage 10 to 30VDC
Max. load current 0.1A/point, 0.4A/common
Transistor
Max. inrush current 0.4A 10ms
output
Leakage current at OFF 0.1mA or less
Max. voltage drop at ON 1.0VDC (TYP) 0.1A 2.5VDC (MAX) 0.1A
Response time OFF ON: 2ms or less, ON OFF: 2ms or less
Between input and grounding : Transformer insulation
Insulation method
Between input and channel : Transformer insulation
Between input and grounding : 500VAC for 1 minute
Dielectric strength
Between input and channel : 500VAC for 1 minute
Between input and grounding : 500VDC 20M or more
Between input and channel : 500VDC 20M or more
The following current sensors of URD, Ltd.
Heater Current sensor 1 • CTL-12-S36-8(0.0 to 100.0A)
disconnectio • CTL-6-P-H(0.00 to 20.00A)
—
n detection
Input accuracy Input range width x (±1.0%)
specifications
Number of alert delays 3 to 255
Connection terminal 18-point terminal block Two 18-point terminal blocks
Applicable wire size 0.3 to 0.75mm
Applicable crimping terminal R1.25-3,1.25-YS3,RAV1.25-3,V1.25-YS3A
16 points/slot 32 points/2 slots (Default I/O assignment :
Number of occupied I/O points 2
(I/O assignment: 16 intelligent points) 16 free points + 16 intelligent points)
5V DC Internal current consumption 0.55A 0.64A
27.4(1.08)(W) 98(3.86)(H) 112(4.41)(D) 55.2(2.17)(W) 98(3.86)(H) 112(4.41)(D)
Outline dimensions
(mm(inch)) (mm(inch))
6-42
Q64TCRT, Q64TCRTBW
1: Only the current sensors manufactured by URD, Ltd. may be used. Refer to Chapter 2 for more information. Also this product needs to
be obtained separately.
2: When the Q64TCTTBW or Q64TCRTBW is used, the device numbers of the I/O signals increase to 32 I/O points depending on how
many free points the left-hand side slots have.
Hence, as I/O signals are given as indicated below in this manual, read them according to the module used.
Example) When a signal is given as Yn1
When Q64TCTT or Q64TCRT is used: Y1 When Q64TCTTBW or Q64TCRTBW is used: Y11
3: For the noise immunity, dielectric withstand voltage, insulation resistance and others of the PLC system which uses this module, refer
to the power supply module specifications given in the user's manual of the CPU module used.
The PLC CPU, Q64TC, GX Developer, and base unit given below are needed to perform an online module change.
(1) PLC CPU
(2) Q64TC 6
(3) GX Developer
(4) Base unit
Usable Temperature Sensor Types, Measurement Temperature Ranges and Data Resolutions
(1) For use of Q64TCTT and Q64TCTTBW
Thermocouple °C °F
Type Measurement temperature range Data resolution Measurement temperature range Data resolution
R 0 to 1700 1 0 to 3000 1
0 to 500
0 to 1000
0 to 800 1 1
0 to 2400
0 to 1300
K -200.0 to 400.0
0.0 to 400.0
0.1 0.0 to 1000.0 0.1
0.0 to 500.0
0.0 to 800.0
0 to 500 0 to 1000
0 to 800 1 0 to 1600 1
0 to 1200 0 to 2100
J
0.0 to 400.0
0.0 to 500.0 0.1 0.0 to 1000.0 0.1
0.0 to 800.0
-200 to 400
-200 to 200 0 to 700
1 1
0 to 200 -300 to 400
T
0 to 400
-200.0 to 400.0
0.1 0.0 to 700.0 0.1
0.0 to 400.0
S 0 to 1700 1 0 to 3000 1
B 0 to 1800 1 0 to 3000 1
0 to 400
1 0 to 1800 1
E 0 to 1000
0.0 to 700.0 0.1 — —
N 0 to 1300 1 0 to 2300 1
0 to 400 0 to 700
1 1
U -200 to 200 -300 to 400
0.0 to 600.0 0.1 — —
0 to 400 0 to 800
1 1
0 to 900 0 to 1600
L
0.0 to 400.0
0.1 — —
0.0 to 900.0
PL II 0 to 1200 1 0 to 2300 1
W5Re/W26Re 0 to 2300 1 0 to 3000 1
6-43
Q64TCRT, Q64TCRTBW
(2) For use of Q64TCRT and Q64TCRTBW

°C °F
Platinum Temperature-Measuring
Measurement Measurement
Resistor Data resolution Data resolution
temperature range temperature range
-200.0 to 600.0 -300 to 1100 1
Pt100 0.1
-200.0 to 200.0 -300.0 to 300.0 0.1
-200.0 to 500.0 -300 to 900 1
JPt100 0.1
-200.0 to 200.0 -300.0 to 300.0 0.1

Input signal Output signal
(Signal direction: Temperature control module CPU) (Signal direction: CPU Temperature control module)
X00 Module ready flag Y00 Reserved
X01 Setting/operation mode status Y01 Setting/operation mode command
X02 Write error flag Y02 Error reset command
X03 Hardware error flag Y03 Reserved
X04 CH1 auto tuning status Y04 CH1 auto tuning command
2
X08 E PROM write completion flag Y08 E2PROM backup command
X09 Default value write completion flag Y09 Default setting registration command
2
X0A E PROM write failure flag Y0A Reserved
X0B Setting change completion flag Y0B Setting change command
X0C CH1 alert occurrence flag Y0C CH1 forced PID control stop command
X0D CH2 alert occurrence flag Y0D CH2 forced PID control stop command
X0E CH3 alert occurrence flag Y0E CH3 forced PID control stop command
X0F CH4 alert occurrence flag Y0F CH4 forced PID control stop command
The I/O signals (X/Y) and I/O addresses indicated in the above table are the values when the Q64TCTT/Q64TCRT module
Head I/O address is set to 0.
When the Q64TCTTBW or Q64TCRTBW is used, the device numbers of the I/O signals increase by 16 points depending
on how many free points the left-hand side slots have.
6-44
Q64TCRT, Q64TCRTBW
Usable Temperature Sensor Types, Measurement Temperature Ranges and Input Range
Settings
(1) For use of Q64TCTT and Q64TCTTBW

°C °F
Thermocouple Type Measurement Measurement
Input range setting Input range setting
temperature range temperature range
R 0 to 1700 1 0 to 3000 105
0 to 500 11 0 to 1000 100
0 to 800 12 0 to 2400 101
0 to 1300 2 0.0 to 1000.0 130
K -200.0 to 400.0 38
0.0 to 400.0 36 6
— —
0.0 to 500.0 40
0.0 to 800.0 41
0 to 500 13 0 to 1000 102
0 to 800 14 0 to 1600 103
0 to 1200 3 0 to 2100 104
J
0.0 to 400.0 37 0.0 to 1000.0 131
0.0 to 500.0 42
— —
0.0 to 800.0 43
-200 to 400 4 0 to 700 109
-200 to 200 21 -300 to 400 110
T 0 to 200 19 0.0 to 700.0 132

0 to 400 20
-200.0 to 400.0 39 — —
0.0 to 400.0 45
S 0 to 1700 15 0 to 3000 106
B 0 to 1800 16 0 to 3000 107
0 to 400 17 0 to 1800 108
E 0 to 1000 18
— —
0.0 to 700.0 44
N 0 to 1300 22 0 to 2300 111
0 to 400 25 0 to 700 114
U -200 to 200 26 -300 to 400 115
0.0 to 600.0 46 — —
0 to 400 27 0 to 800 116
0 to 900 28 0 to 1600 117
L
0.0 to 400.0 47
— —
0.0 to 900.0 48
PL II 0 to 1200 23 0 to 2300 112
W5Re/W26Re 0 to 2300 24 0 to 3000 113
6-45
Q64TCRT, Q64TCRTBW
(2) For use of Q64TCRT and Q64TCRTBW <Software packages supported>

Platinum °C °F Correspondence between systems which use Q64TC and
Temperature- Measurement Measurement software packages are as shown below.
Data Data
Measuring temperature temperature
resolution resolution The GX Developer is necessary when using a Q64TC.
Resistor range range
Software Version
Pt100 -200.0 to 7 -300 to 1100 141
GX Developer GX Configurator-TC
600.0
-200.0 to 8 -300.0 to 143
Q00J/Q00/ Q01CPU later (cannot be used with the
200.0 300.0
SW0D5C-QTCU-E
JPt100 -200.0 to 5 -300 to 900 140
30D or earlier versions).
500.0
If mounted with Version 4 or SW0D5C-QTCU-E 00A
-200.0 to 6 -300.0 to 142
200.0 300.0
Q12H/Q25HCPU
Equipment If mounted with Version 7.10L Version 1.13P or later
Q12PHCPU/ or later (cannot be used with the
< Q64TCTT, Q64TCTTBW accessories > Q25PHCPU SW0D5C-QTCU-E
Product Description 30D or earlier versions).
Manual Q64TCTT, Q64TCTTBW User's Manual If mounted in a Version 6 or SW0D5C-QTCU-E 30D

(Hardware) multiple PLC system later or later
If mounted in a Version 6 or SW0D5C-QTCU-E 30D
MELSECNET/H later or later
< Q64TCRT, Q64TCRTBW accessories >
remote I/O station
Product Description
Manual Q64TCRT, Q64TCRTBW User's Manual <Current sensors>
(Hardware) Only the following current sensors manufactured by URD,
Ltd. are usable with the Q64TCTTBW and Q64TCRTBW.
Product Description • CTL-12-S36-8(0.0 to 100.0A)
Manual Q64TCTT, Q64TCTTBW, Q64TCRT, • CTL-6-P(-H)(0.0 to 20.00A)
Q64TCRTBW, GX Configurator-TC
(SW0D5C-QTCU-E) User's Manual
6-46
6.11 Temperature Control Module ANALOG
Setting/Monitoring Tool: MODULES
GX Configurator-TC
Overview (1) Error code to write data
GX Configurator-TC is a setting/monitoring add-in tool for (2) Temperature process value

GX Developer (SW4D5C-GPPW-E or later). This is used (3) Manipulated value
to set initial data for the Q64TCTT, Q64TCTTBW, (4) Set value setting
Q64TCRT or Q64TCRTBW temperature control module (5) Transistor output flag
and to automatically load of measured temperature values (6) Alarm occurrence definition
to the CPU device memory. Automatic refresh setting screen sample
sequence programs, use of GX Configurator-TC allows
sequence programs and also ensuring ease of setting and
checking of operating status. 6

The initial values needed for the temperature control
module can be set on the screen. The following initial
values can be set.
(1) Input range Monitoring and Testing Functions
(2) Control parameter setting
The monitoring and testing function is designed to monitor
(3) Alarm function setting
the data states and operating status in the temperature
(4) CT setting
control module, and to change the set values as required.
(5) Other settings (such as upper limiter setting)
Since you can monitor the operating status without
Initial value setting screen sample needing to know the specific buffer addresses in the
temperature control module, this function is effective for
system maintenance and troubleshooting. The following
data, functions etc can be monitored and tested.
(1) Error code to write data
(2) Temperature process value
(3) Manipulated value
(4) Set value setting
(5) Transistor output flag
(6) Auto tuning
By setting auto refresh, measured temperature and other

values can be read from the temperature control module to
the CPU automatically, which can reduce programs. The
following data can be refreshed automatically.
6-47
7. HIGH-SPEED COUNTER,
POSITIONING MODULES
7.1 High-Speed Counter Modules: QD62, QD62E, QD62D
Overview Easy setting by GX Configurator-CT
Optional GX Configurator-CT (SW0D5C-QCTU-E) is
The QD62, QD62E and QD62D are high-speed counter
available. Using GX Configurator-CT allows initial setting
modules designed to count high-speed pulse values. They
and auto refresh setting to be done on the screen to
can be used with external encoders to execute control
reduce sequence programs and check settings and
such as positioning. These three modules differ as
operating status quickly.
indicated below and are selected according to your
applications. Functions
Item QD62 QD62E QD62D Name Function
I/O type DC input DC input Differential input Linear counter function • Can count in the range
Sink output Source output Sink output -2147483648 to 2147483647.
Max. counting 200kPPS 500kPPS Detects overflow if this range is
speed exceeded.
Ring counter function • Counting alternates between the
Features maximum and minimum values of
the ring counter. 7
32-bit counting range Coincidence output • Outputs an ON/OFF signal after
function comparing the preset coincidence
There are two input channels that are independent and detection point of any channel
can count 32-bit binary values (-2147483648 to with the present value of the
counter.
2147483647), respectively.
• On detection of coincidence,
Counting speed switching function produces a PLC CPU interrupt
The max. counting speed can be changed to count a wide signal to start an interrupt
program. (Note 1)
range of pulses from high-speed pulses to low-frequency Preset function • Rewrites the present value of the
pulses of slow rise/fall edge. counter to any value.
Input system selection • Preset operation can be done
either by a sequence program or
The input system can be selected from 1-phase (1x), by an external preset input.
1-phase (2x), 2-phase (1x), 2-phase (2x), 2-phase (4x), Counter Count • Stops count operation while the
selection disable counter function selection start
and CW/CCW. e.g. 1-phase (1x) = 1-phase multiplied by 1
function command is ON.
Counter format selection Latch • Stores the present value of the
You can choose either linear counter or ring counter types. counter counter when the signal of the
counter function selection start
CPU module interrupt function command is input.
When the preset count value is reached, an interrupt Sampling • After the counter function
signal is output to the CPU module to start an interrupt counter selection start command is input,
input pulses are counted during a
program. preset sampling period and
Counter selection function stored in the buffer memory.
Periodic • While the signal of the counter
One function can be chosen for use from four different
pulse function selection start command
counter functions. counter is input, the present value is
Function control from external terminal stored in the buffer memory at
preset intervals.
The preset or counter function can be selected by applying
These functions can be used together. However, you can choose
a voltage to the external preset terminal or function start
only one of the linear counter and ring counter functions. Also, you
terminal.
can choose and use only one of the four counter function
Maintainability improvement
selection functions.
The X input signal and module indicator LED indicate that
Note 1: Not supported for the Basic model QCPU.
a fuse blown in the external output section is detected.
7-1
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER, 7.1 HIGH-SPEED COUNTER
POSITIONING MODULES: QD62, QD62E,
MODULES QD62D
Appearance External I/O Terminals
QD62
QD62 external I/O terminals
φA
Terminal
φB
DEC.
FUNC. FUSE
CH1 CH2
Internal Circuit Numbers Signal Name

(Connector terminal
numbers) CH1 CH2
B20 A20
A-phase pulse
(3.86)
A20 A13
98
input 24V
A-phase pulse
B20 B13
input 12V
B01 A01
A-phase pulse
QD62
A19 A12
input 5V
90 (45) 27.4
(3.54) (1.77) (1.08)
Unit: mm (in.) B19 B12 ABCOM
A value in parentheses shows the reference measurement when
B-phase pulse
the A6CON1 is installed. A18 A11
input 24V
Unit: mm (inch) B-phase pulse
B18 B11
input 12V
B-phase pulse
A17 A10
input 5V
— — —
B17 B10 Preset input 24V
A16 A09 Preset input 12V
B16 B09 Preset input 5V
A15 A08 CTRLCOM
Function start
B15 B08
input 24V
Function start
A14 A07
input 12V
Function start
B14 B07
input 5V
— — —
EQU1
A06 A05 Coincidence
output point No. 1
EQU2
B06 B05 Coincidence
output point No. 2
To fuse blow B02, B01 12/24V
detection Fuse
circuit
A02, A01 0V
Terminal numbers A03, A04, B03 and B04 are not used.
7-2
HIGH-SPEED
7.1 HIGH-SPEED COUNTER COUNTER,
MODULES: QD62, QD62E, POSITIONING
QD62D MODULES
QD62E external I/O terminals QD62D external I/O terminals

Terminal Terminal
Internal Circuit Numbers Signal Name Internal Circuit Numbers Signal Name
CH1 CH2 CH1 CH2
A-phase pulse +5V
A20 A13 (DC/ DC converter)
input 24V A-phase pulse
A-phase pulse A20 A14
B20 B13 input
input 12V
A-phase pulse Line
A19 A12 receiver A-phase pulse
input 5V B20 B14
input
B19 B12 ABCOM
+5V
(DC/ DC converter)
B-phase pulse B-phase pulse
A18 A11 A19 A13
input 24V input
B-phase pulse
B18 B11
input 12V Line
7
B-phase pulse
receiver B-phase pulse
A17 A10 B19 B13
input 5V input
— — — A18 A12 Preset input 24V
B17 B10 Preset input 24V B18 B12 Preset input 12V
A16 A09 Preset input 12V A17 A11 Preset input 5V
B16 B09 Preset input 5V B17 B11 PRSTCOM
Function start
A15 A08 CTRLCOM A16 A10
input 24V
Function start Function start
B15 B08 B16 B10
input 24V input 12V
Function start Function start
A14 A07 A15 A09
input 12V input 5V
Function start B15 B09 FUNCCOM
B14 B07
input 5V
EQU1
— — — A06 A05 Coincidence
EQU1 output point No. 1
A06 A05 Coincidence EQU2
output point No. 1 B06 B05 Coincidence
EQU2 output point No. 2
To fuse blow
B06 B05 Coincidence detection Fuse B02, B01 12/24V
circuit
output point No. 2
Fuse A02, A01 0V
To the fuse
B02, B01 12/24V
blow detection Terminal numbers A08, A07, A04, A03, B08, B04 and B03 are not
circuit
A02, A01 0V used.
Terminal numbers A03, A04, B03 and B04 are not used.
7-3
HIGH-SPEED
MODULES QD62D
Item QD62 QD62E QD62D
Counting speed switch setting 200k (100k to 200kPPS) 500k (200k to 500kPPS)
100k (10k to 100kPPS) 200k (100k to 200kPPS)
10k (10kPPS max.) 100k (10k to 100kPPS)
10k (10kPPS max.)
Count input Phase 1-phase (1x), 1-phase (2x), 2-phase (1x), 2-phase (2x), 2-phase (4x), and CW/CCW.
signal e.g. 1-phase (1x) = 1-phase multiplied by 1
Rated input voltage 5/12/24VDC (positive or negative common) EIA Standard RS-422-A
ON/OFF 5V ON: 4.5 to 5.5V/2 to 5mA, OFF: 2V max./0.1mA max. Differential line driver (Note 1) level
characteristics 12V ON: 10.8 to 13.2V/2 to 5mA, OFF: 4V max./0.1mA max.
24V ON: 21.6 to 26.4V/2 to 5mA, OFF: 5V max./0.1mA max.
Counting range 32-bit designated binary (-2147483648 to 2147483647)
Type UP/DOWN preset counter + ring counter functions
Counting speed Refer to the separate list: counting speeds.
External Rated input voltage 5/12/24VDC (positive or negative common) 5/12/24V (Note 2)
input ON/OFF 5V ON: 4.5 to 5.5V/2 to 5mA, OFF: 2V max./0.1mA max. ON: 2.5 to 5.5V/2 to 5mA,
characteristics OFF: 1V max./0.1mA max.
Response time OFF ON: 0.5ms max., ON OFF: 1ms max.
Coincidence Comparison range 32-bit designated binary (-2147483648 to 2147483647)
output Comparison system Set value<count value, set value=count value, set value>count value
Number of points 2 points/channel 2 points/channel 2 points/channel
Output rating Transistor (sink) Transistor (source) Transistor (sink)
12/24VDC 0.5A/point 2A/common 12/24VDC 0.1A/point 0.4A/common 12/24VDC 0.5A/point 2A/common
Max. voltage drop 1.5V
Response OFF ON 0.1ms max. 0.3ms max. 0.1ms max.
time ON OFF 0.1ms max. 0.3ms max. 0.1ms max.
(rated load, resistive load) (rated load, resistive load) (rated load, resistive load)
External supply power Voltage range: 10.2 to 30V, current consumption: 8mA (typ @24VDC)
External wiring protection Fuse protection
External dimensions 27.4 (1.08) (W) 98 (3.86) (H) 90 (3.55) (D) (mm (inch))
Note 1: Manufactured by Japan Texas Instruments, model Am26LS31 or equivalent
Note 2: EIA Standard RS-422-A differential line driver may also be used.
Separate list: counting speeds

<QD62>
Counting Speed Switch Setting 200kPPS 100kPPS 10kPPS tH tL
Rise/fall time Both phases 1 and 2
t=1.25 s or less 200kPPS 100kPPS 10kPPS
t=25 s or less — 10kPPS 10kPPS
t=500 s — — 500PPS tLH tHL
<QD62E>
Counting Speed Switch Setting 200kPPS 100kPPS 10kPPS
t=25 s or less — 10kPPS 10kPPS
t=500 s — — 500PPS
7-4
HIGH-SPEED
7.1 HIGH-SPEED COUNTER COUNTER,
MODULES: QD62, QD62E, POSITIONING
QD62D MODULES
Separate list: counting speeds (continued)

<QD62D>
Counting Speed Switch Setting 500kPPS 200kPPS 100kPPS 10kPPS
t=0.5 s or less 500kPPS 200kPPS 100kPPS 10kPPS
t=1.25 s or less 200kPPS 200kPPS 100kPPS 10kPPS
t=2.5 s or less — 100kPPS 100kPPS 10kPPS
t=25 s or less — — 10kPPS 10kPPS
t=500 s — — — 500PPS
Note 3: Inputting a waveform of long rise/fall time may cause false input. Enter a waveform within permissible rise/fall time.
I/O Signals and Buffer memory list

I/O list
7
Input Signals (Signal Direction QD62(E/D) CPU) Output Signals (Signal Direction CPU QD62(E/D))
X00 Module ready Y00 Coincidence signal No. 1 reset command
X01 Counter value more (point No. 1) Y01 Preset command
X02 Counter value coincidence (point No. 1) Y02 Coincidence signal enable command
X03 Counter value less (point No. 1) Y03 Down count command
CH1
X04 CH1 External preset request detection Y04 Count enable command
X05 Counter value more (point No. 2) Y05 External preset detection reset command
X06 Counter value coincidence (point No. 2) Y06 Counter function selection start command
X07 Counter value less (point No. 2) Y07 Coincidence signal No. 2 reset command
X08 Counter value more (point No. 1) Y08 Coincidence signal No. 1 reset command
X09 Counter value coincidence (point No. 1) Y09 Preset command
X0A Counter value less (point No. 1) Y0A Coincidence signal enable command
X0B CH2 External preset request detection Y0B Down count command
CH2
X0C Counter value more (point No. 2) Y0C Count enable command
X0D Counter value coincidence (point No. 2) Y0D External preset detection reset command
X0E Counter value less (point No. 2) Y0E Counter function selection start command
X0F Fuse blown detection flag Y0F Coincidence signal No. 2 reset command
The I/O numbers (X/Y) and I/O addresses listed above are the values when the QD62(E/D) module Head I/O address is set to 0.
Buffer memory list

Address Setting Range and Read Value Initial Value Access
Setting
CH1 CH2 Range 1 from CPU
0H 20H Preset value setting (L) -2147483648 to 2147483647 0 Read/write
1H 21H (H)
2H 22H Present value (L) -2147483648 to 2147483647 0 Read only
3H 23H (H)
4H 24H Coincidence output point No. 1 setting (L) -2147483648 to 2147483647 0 Read/write
5H 25H (H)
6H 26H Coincidence output point No. 2 setting (L) -2147483648 to 2147483647
7H 27H (H)
8H 28H Overflow detection 0: no detection, 1: during detection 0 Read only
7-5
HIGH-SPEED
MODULES QD62D

Address Setting Range and Read Value Initial Value Access
Setting
CH1 CH2 Range 1 from CPU
9H 29H Counter function selection setting 0: count disable function 0 Read/write
1: latch counter function
2: sampling counter function
3: periodic pulse counter function
AH 2AH Sampling/periodic time setting 1 to 65535, increments: 10ms
BH 2BH Sampling/periodic counter flag 0: during stop, 1: during operation 0 Read only
CH 2CH Latch count value (L) -2147483648 to 2147483647 0 Read only
DH 2DH (H)
EH 2EH Sampling count value (L) -2147483648 to 2147483647
FH 2FH (H)
10H 30H Periodic pulse count last value (L) -2147483648 to 2147483647
11H 31H (H)
12H 32H Periodic pulse count present value (L) -2147483648 to 2147483647
13H 33H (H)
14H 34H Ring counter lower limit value setting (L) -2147483648 to 2147483647 0 Read/write
15H 35H (H)
16H 36H Ring counter upper limit value setting (L) -2147483648 to 2147483647
17H 37H (H)
18H 38H Reserved
to to — — —
1FH 3FH

Equipment Compatible between systems which use high-speed
counter modules and software packages are as shown
<QD62, QD62E, QD62D accessories> below.
Product Description GX Developer is necessary when using a high-speed
Manual QD62, QD62E, QD62D User's Manual counter module.
(Hardware)
Software Version
GX Developer GX Configurator-CT
If mounted with Version 7 or Version 1.10L or
Product Description Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU later later (cannot be used
Manual QD62, QD62E, QD62D, GX Configurator-CT with the
SW0D5C-QCTU-E
(SW0D5C-QCTU-E) User's Manual 50F or earlier
Connector External wiring connector versions).
A6CON1, A6CON2, A6CON3, A6CON4 If mounted with Version 4 or SW0D5C-QCTU-E
Q02/Q02H/Q06H/ later 00A
Note 1: As the external wiring connector is not packed with the Q12H/Q25HCPU or later
module, always obtain it separately. If mounted with Version 7.10L Version 1.13P or
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU or later later (cannot be used
with the
SW0D5C-QCTU-E
50F or earlier
versions).
If mounted in a Version 6 or SW0D5C-QCTU-E
multiple PLC system later 50F
or later
If mounted in a Version 6 or SW0D5C-QCTU-E
MELSECNET/H later 50F
remote I/O station or later
7-6
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,
7.2 Channel-Isolated Pulse Input POSITIONING
MODULES
Module: QD60P8-G
Overview 7) Input pulse value indication
The pulse number actually input is displayed
The QD60P8-G counts the input pulse number (speed, every 10ms. Since the input pulse number is
rotation speed, instant flux or similar) and measures the displayed every 10ms, the module can be used
quantity, the length, accumulating flux, etc. The input pulse as a counter. (The input pulse value is updated
value is updated every 10ms. The QD60P8-G updates the every 10ms. Note this when using the module as
accumulating count value and the pulse number after a counter.)
moving averaging processing or similar (sampling pulse The count range is 0 to 2147483647.
number) at intervals of the count cycle setting value. 8) Alarm output
It is allowed to set four setting values, i.e.
Features
upper/upper limit value, upper/lower limit value,
(1) Wide range of functions lower/upper limit value and lower/lower limit
Pulse generator
value, for the sampling pulse number to output
alarms.
Input voltage
selection 1) 9) Accumulating counter overflow detection
Pulse edge
selection 2) If the accumulating count value overflows 7
Input pulse number
(exceeds 99999999) in the linear counter mode,
Pre-scale processing 3) Updated in Updated
Movement averaging count cycle 1) every 10ms 2) the accumulating counter overflow detection flag
processing 4)
turns ON to indicate that an overflow error has
Counter Sampling pulse number 5) Accumulating count value 6) Input pulse value 7)
reset 11) occurred.
Alarm Overflow
10) Accumulating counter comparison output
Accumulating
output 8) detection 9) counter comparison
flag 10)
If the accumulating count value reaches or
exceeds the comparison output setting value, the
1) Pulse input voltage
accumulating counter comparison flag turns ON.
A single module accepts the pulse inputs of
5VDC/12 to 24VDC. 11) Counter reset
2) Pulse edge selection The sampling pulse number, accumulating count
It is allowed to select the rise or fall of the input value and input pulse value can be reset at any
pulses to be counted. timing.
3) Pre-scale function (2) Counting speed range of the input pulse can be
The input pulse number is multiplied by any
changed
value to convert the pulse number.
By changing the input filter, the input pulse speed is
4) Moving averaging function
The values of the sampling pulse number are available within the range 0 to 30kpps.
averaged by the specified number of times to (3) 8 channels of pulse inputs in one module
calculate the average value. One module has 8 channels of pulse inputs allowing
5) Sampling pulse number indication configuration of a low cost system.
The value obtained by performing pre-scale (4) Channel isolated
conversion on the pulse number entered in the The channels are isolated from each other. (Dielectric
count cycle set to the count cycle setting value is
withstand voltage: 1780VAC for 1 minute)
displayed. If the input pulse number is not
uniform, moving averaging processing can be
performed to average the input pulse number. The module can be changed without the system being
The count range is 0 to 32767. stopped.
6) Accumulating count value indication (6) Easy setting by utility package
The accumulating value of the sampling pulse The GX Configurator-CT Utility package is sold
number is displayed in the set count cycle. The separately.
count range is 0 to 99999999, and you can select The utility package enables the initial setting and auto
whether to use the accumulating counter as the
refresh setting to be made on the screen, reducing the
linear counter or ring counter.
sequence programs as well as resulting in easy
monitoring of the setting and operating status.
7-7
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,
POSITIONING 7.2 Channel-Isolated Pulse Input
MODULES Module: QD60P8-G
The following table indicates the QD60P8-G functions. QD60P8-G
RUN CH1 CH5
CH2 CH6
Name Details ERR.
CH3
CH4
CH7
CH8
This function counts from 0 to 99999999

Linear counter
and detects an overflow when the count C V+
function H
1 V-
1
range is exceeded. 2
Accumulating counter
C V+
H
3
Ring counter This function repeats counting between 0 2 V-

C V+
4
5
H
function and 99999999. 3 V- 6
98(3.86)
C V+
7
This function turns ON the accumulating H
4 V-
V+
8
C 9
counter comparison flag when the H
5 V- 10
V+
accumulating count value reaches or 11
C
H
Comparison 6 V- 12
exceeds the comparison output setting C

H
V+
13
output function 7 V- 14
value. (The accumulating counter C
H
V-
V+
15
8 16
comparison flag turns OFF by setting the (FG) 17
18
comparison signal reset flag.) 5/12-
24VDC
Count cycle This function changes the count cycle of

change the sampling pulse number or
90(3.54) 27.4(1.08)
function accumulating count value.
This function performs movement Unit: mm (inch)
Movement
averaging processing by the specified
Sampling counter
averaging Equipment
number of times if there are variations in
function
the sampling pulse number.
This function converts the input pulse <QD60P8-G accessories>
Pre-scale
number into the unit pulse number when Product Description
function
its weight per pulse is a fraction.
Manual QD60P8-G User's Manual (Hardware)
This function sets the upper/upper limit
value, upper/lower limit value, lower/upper
Alarm output
limit value and lower/lower limit value for <Separately obtained products>
function
the sampling pulse number converted by
Product Description
the pre-scale function to output alarms.
This function resets the sampling pulse Manual QD60P8-G User's Manual
Counter reset number, accumulating count value or input
function pulse value. A reset can be made during <Software packages supported>
any time.
This function selects whether the rising
Compatibility between systems which use QD60P8-G and
edge or falling edge of the input pulse will software packages are as shown below.
Pulse edge selection
be used for counting. (This setting can be GX Developer is necessary when using a QD60P8-G.
function
made for each channel using the intelligent
Software Version
function module switch.)
This function starts input pulse count GX GX
Count enable
operation when the count enable signal is Developer Configurator-CT
function
turned ON. If mounted with Version 7 or
The module can be changed without the Q00J/Q00/ Q01CPU later
Online module system being stopped.
change function The message of GX Developer shows a
method for online module change. Q02/Q02H/Q06H/ later
This function uses the utility package (GX Q12H/Q25HCPU
Configurator-CT) to perform initial setting, If mounted with Version 7.10L
Version 1.14Q or
Utility function auto refresh setting, monitor/test or similar Q12PHCPU/ or later
from within the software without using later
Q25PHCPU
sequence programs.
If mounted in a multiple Version 6 or
POINT PLC system later
The above functions can be used in combination. If mounted in a Version 6 or
However, the linear counter function and ring counter MELSECNET/H remote later
function cannot be used together. I/O station
Please select either of them.
7-8
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,
MODULES
Module: QD60P8-G
Model name
QD60P8-G
Item
Counting speed switch settings
30kpps 10kpps 1kpps 100pps 50pps 10pps 1pps 0.1pps
1
Count Phase 1-phase input
input
Signal level 5VDC/12 to 24VDC
signal
Input derating Refer to the derating chart (Next page)
Counting speed
(Max.) 2
Sampling pulse number : 16-bits binary values (0 to 32767)
Counting range Accumulating count value : 32-bits binary values (0 to 99999999)
Input pulse value : 32-bits binary values (0 to 2147483647) 7
Counter Count type Linear counter method, ring counter method
33.4 s 100 s 1ms 10ms 20ms 100ms 1s 10s

Minimum count
pulse width
16.7 16.7 50 50 0.5 0.5 5 5 10 10 50 50 0.5 0.5
(Duty ratio 50%) s s s s ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms s s 5s 5s

For 1 min at 1500VAC between AC external connecting terminals and general grounding
Dielectric withstand voltage For 1 min at 500VAC between DC external connecting terminals and general grounding
For 1 min at 1780VAC between channels
Insulation resistance 5MΩ or more at 500VDC between AC external connecting terminals and general grounding
2
Applicable wire size 0.3 to 0.75mm
Applicable solderless terminals R1.25-3 (A solderless terminals with sleeves cannot be used.)
5VDC Internal current
0.58A
consumption
External dimensions 27.4 (1.08) (W) 98 (3.86) (H) 90 (3.54) (D) [mm (in.)]
Weight 0.17kg
1: To change the counting speed, use the intelligent function module switch settings.
2: The counting speed is affected by the rise/fall time of pulses. The countable counting speeds are indicated in the table on the next
page. Note that counting the pulses of long rise/fall time may result in incorrect values.
Note 1: Online module change conditions
The PLC CPU, GX Developer, and base unit given below are needed to perform an online module change.
(1) PLC CPU
(2) GX Developer
(3) Base unit
7-9
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,
<Rise/Fall time and the corresponding counting speed switch settings>

Counting speed switch settings
Rise/Fall Time
t = 8.4 s or less 30kpps 10kpps 1kpps 100pps 50pps 10pps 1pps 0.1pps
t = 25 s or less 10kpps 10kpps 1kpps 100pps 50pps 10pps 1pps 0.1pps
t = 250 s or less — 1kpps 1kpps 100pps 50pps 10pps 1pps 0.1pps
t = 2.5ms or less — — 100pps 100pps 50pps 10pps 1pps 0.1pps
t = 5ms or less — — — 50pps 50pps 10pps 1pps 0.1pps
t = 25ms or less — — — — 10pps 10pps 1pps 0.1pps
t = 250ms or less — — — — — 1pps 1pps 0.1pps
t = 2.5s or less — — — — — — 0.1pps 0.1pps
t = 5s — — — — — — — 0.05pps
t t
<Derating Chart>
( )
100
90
80
3 30VDC
ON
ratio 70
60
50
40
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 ( )
Ambient temparature
3: "ON" indicates the status where voltage is applied

to the pulse input terminals.
7-10
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,
MODULES
Module: QD60P8-G
Interface with external devices
The internal circuit of the QD60P8-G for connection to external devices is shown in the following schematic diagram.
Operating
Input voltage
Input/ Terminal current
Internal circuit Signal name Operation (guaranteed
Output number (guaranteed
value)
value)
5VDC 3.5V to 5.5V 4mA or more

1, 3, 5, 7, 9,
CH1 to 8 V+ At ON 12 to
11, 13, 15
24VDC 10.2 to 30V 4mA or more
Input
5VDC 1.0V or less 0.5mA or less
2, 4, 6, 8,
10, 12, 14, CH1 to 8 V- At OFF 12 to
16 24VDC 2.0V or less 0.5mA or less 7
17
— — FG — — —
18
: Use the intelligent function module switch to change between 5VDC and 12 to 24VDC.
Signal layout of each channel

Terminal number Signal name Terminal number Signal name
1 CH1 V+ 9 CH5 V+
CH1 CH5
2 CH1 V- 10 CH5 V-
3 CH2 V+ 11 CH6 V+
CH2 CH6
4 CH2 V- 12 CH6 V-
5 CH3 V+ 13 CH7 V+
CH3 CH7
6 CH3 V- 14 CH7 V-
7 CH4 V+ 15 CH8 V+
CH4 CH8
8 CH4 V- 16 CH8 V-
7-11
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,
Wiring example I/O signals for PLC CPU
This section shows an example of wiring the QD60P8-G List of I/O signals
and pulse generator.
The I/O numbers (X/Y) and I/O addresses indicated below
In the wiring example, only CH1 is wired. Also, in this
are the values when the QD60P8-G module Head I/O
example, the voltage of the external power supply is
address is set to 0.
24VDC as the electrical specifications of the pulse
Input signal (Signal direction: Output signal (Signal direction:
generator.
QD60P8-G PLC CPU) PLC CPU QD60P8-G)
(1) Wiring example with a sink logic type pulse generator Device Device
(a) For transistor output Signal name Signal name
No. No.
QD60P8-G
Pulse generator
X0 Module READY Y0 Reserved (N/A)
+24V
Shielded cable Operating condition Operating condition
CH1 V+ OUT X1 Y1
setting complete flag setting request flag
CH1 V- X2 Y2
FG
to Reserved (N/A) to Reserved (N/A)
X7 Y7
24VDC +
power supply - X8 CH1 Y8 CH1
X9 CH2 Y9 CH2
(b) For contact output XA CH3 YA CH3
QD60P8-G
Pulse generator
XB CH4 Error YB CH4 Error reset
+24V
Shielded cable XC CH5 occurrence YC CH5 request
CH1 V+ OUT
XD CH6 YD CH6
CH1 V-
XE CH7 YE CH7
FG
XF CH8 YF CH8
24VDC + X10 CH1 Y10 CH1

power supply -
X11 CH2 Y11 CH2
X12 CH3 Accumulating Y12 CH3
(2) Wiring example with a source logic type pulse Comparison
X13 CH4 counter Y13 CH4
generator signal reset
X14 CH5 comparison Y14 CH5
(a) For transistor output request
X15 CH6 flag Y15 CH6
QD60P8-G
Pulse generator
X16 CH7 Y16 CH7
OUT
OUT
Shielded cable X17 CH8 Y17 CH8
CH1 V+ GND Y18 CH1
CH1 V- Y19 CH2
FG X18 Y1A CH3
to Y1B CH4
Reserved (N/A) Count enable
24VDC + X1F Y1C CH5
power supply -
Y1D CH6
Y1E CH7
(b) For contact output
QD60P8-G Y1F CH8
Pulse generator
OUT
: Write is prohibited to the I/O (X/Y) reserved for the system.
OUT
Shielded cable
CH1 V+ GND
CH1 V-
FG
24VDC +
power supply -
7-12
HIGH-SPEED
7.3 Counter Modules COUNTER,
Setting/Monitoring Tool: POSITIONING
GX Configurator-CT MODULES
Overview (5) Periodic pulse count last value

(6) Sampling/periodic counter flag
GX Configurator-CT is a setting/monitoring add-in tool for
(7) Overflow detection
GX Developer (SW4D5C-GPPW or later). This is used
to set initial data for the high-speed counter module QD62, Automatic refresh setting screen sample
QD62E, QD62D or the pulse input module QD60P8-G and
to automatically load of count values to the CPU device
memory.
Initial value setting and others can be set in sequence
programs, but using GX Configurator-CT can reduce such
programs, and also ensure the checking of the setting
status and operating status quickly.
Note: GX Developer Ver.4 or later is required.
The initial values needed for the high-speed counter 7

module can be set on the screen. The following table lists
the types of initial values that may be set.
(1) Preset value
(2) Coincidence output point No. 1 setting Monitoring and Testing Functions
(3) Coincidence output point No. 2 setting
(4) Counter function selection setting The monitoring and testing functions are designed to
(5) Sampling/periodic time setting monitor the data and operating status in the high-speed
(6) Ring counter upper limit value counter module, and to change the set values as required.
(7) Ring counter lower limit value Since you can monitor the operating status without
Initial value setting screen sample needing to know the specific buffer addresses in the
high-speed counter module, these functions are effective
following data and functions can be monitored and tested.
(1) X/Y device (5) Ring counter function
(2) Preset function (6) Present value
(3) Coincidence output (7) Overflow detection
function (8) Down count command
(4) Counter function (9) Count enable command
selection function
By setting auto refresh, you can automatically read count

values, etc. from the high-speed counter module into the
CPU, which can reduce programs. The following data can
be refreshed automatically.
(1) Present value
(2) Latch count value
(3) Sampling count value
(4) Periodic pulse count present value
7-13
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,
POSITIONING 7.4 Type QD70 Positioning Module:
MODULES QD70P4,QD70P8
Overview Functions
The QD70P4 and QD70P8 (hereafter referred generically Function name Function
to as the "QD70") are positioning modules used in a Machine OPR Sets up a positioning start point mechanically
OPR control
control using a near-point dog, stopper or similar.
multi-axis system that does not need complicated control.
Performs positioning to OP address stored in
However, please note they are not compatible in I/O Fast OPR control
QD70 by machine OPR.
signals, functions and others with the MELSEC-A series Performs positioning in linear path to a
A1SD70 positioning modules. Position control position specified by address or movement
Positioning control
amount.
Features First execute speed control and then turns on
Speed-position "speed-position switching signal" to perform
switching control position control (positioning of specified
Selection of 4- and 8-axis products
movement amount) consecutively.
4- and 8-axis models are available in terms of the number Current value Changes current feed value into address set
changing in positioning data.
of axes per module.
Outputs pulses only while JOG start signal is
JOG operation
QD70P4: 4 axes on.
Executes only specified positioning data and
QD70P8: 8 axes Positioning end
ends positioning.
Operation pattern
Also, since there are no restrictions on the number of After executing specified positioning data,
Continuous
modules mounted, multiple modules can be mounted and positioning control
makes a stop, and then executes next
continuous positioning data.
used if more than 8 control axes are required.
Executes specified positioning data, and
Fast start Continuous path
without deceleration to stop, executes next
control
The QD70 can be started as fast as about 0.1ms per axis continuous positioning data.
after the CPU module has given it a start command, Limits command speed to within setting range
Speed limit function
of "speed limit value".
reducing the machine tact time. Speed change
Changes speed during positioning operation.
function
In addition, up to 8 axes can be started simultaneously
Sub function
Does not execute positioning to outside the

Software stroke limit
without a starting delay between the axes. function
setting range of upper and lower stroke limits
set in parameters.
Wide selection of control systems Acceleration/decelerat
Adjusts acceleration/deceleration of control.
You have a choice of control systems such as PTP (Point ion process function
Resumes positioning control during an axis
To Point) control and speed-position switching control. Restart function
stop from where the axis stopped.
Easy setting by GX Configurator-PT I/O logic switching Switches signal logic according to externally
The GX Configurator-PT (SW1D5C-QPTU-E) utility function connected device.
Monitors the external I/O signal monitor
package is sold separately. Using GX Configurator-PT information in the module’s detailed
External I/O signal
information, which can be displayed on the GX
allows initial setting and auto refresh setting to be done on monitor function
Developer system monitor screen.
the screen to reduce sequence programs and also ensure (SW7D5C-GPPW-E or later).
ease of setting and checking of operating status.
7-14
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,
7.4 Type QD70 Positioning Module: POSITIONING
QD70P4,QD70P8 MODULES
Appearance External I/O Terminals
(1) QD70P4 I/O

Signal name Internal circuit Wiring
class
QD70P4
RUN AX1
AX2
AX3
AX4
Near-point dog signal DOG
ERR.
CON1
Speed-position
CHG
switching signal
98(3.86)
Common COM
Input Zero signal PGO
Zero signal common PGO COM

QD70P4
7
90(3.55) 27.4(1.08) External power input
24G
(0V) D/D
Unit : mm (inch) converter
circuit
External power input
+24V
(24VDC)
(2) QD70P8
QD70P8
Pulse output F
RUN AX5
AX6
AX1
AX2 PULSE F
AX7 AX3 (CW/PULSE)
ERR. AX8 AX4
QD70P8
CON2 CON1
Pulse output R
PULSE R
(CCW/SIGN)
98(3.86)
PULSE
Output Pulse output common
COM
Deviation counter clear CLEAR

common COM
Wiring: : wiring required, : wiring as required

90(3.55) 27.4(1.08) CON1 side only
Unit : mm (inch)
7-15
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,
Signal Arrangement of Eternal Device Connectors
CON2 (for Axes 5 to 8) CON1 (for Axes 1 to 4)

Pin-Outs
Pin No. Signal No. Pin No. Signal No. Pin No. Signal No. Pin No. Signal No.
B20 PG06 COM 1 A20 PG08 COM 1 B20 PG02 COM 1 A20 PG04 COM 1
B19 PG06 A19 PG08 B19 PG02 A19 PG04
B18 PG05 COM 1 A18 PG07 COM 1 B18 PG01 COM 1 A18 PG03 COM 1
B20 A20
B19 A19 B17 PG05 A17 PG07 B17 PG01 A17 PG03
B18 A18 B16 CLEAR6 COM 2 A16 CLEAR8 COM 2 B16 CLEAR2 COM 2 A16 CLEAR4 COM 2
B17 A17
B16 A16 B15 CLEAR6 A15 CLEAR8 B15 CLEAR2 A15 CLEAR4
B15 A15
B14 A14 B14 CLEAR5 COM 2 A14 CLEAR7 COM 2 B14 CLEAR1 COM 2 A14 CLEAR3 COM 2
B13 A13 B13 CLEAR5 A13 CLEAR7 B13 CLEAR1 A13 CLEAR3
B12 A12
B11 A11 B12 CHG6 A12 CHG8 B12 CHG2 A12 CHG4
B10 A10
B9 A9
B11 CHG5 A11 CHG7 B11 CHG1 A11 CHG3
B8 A8 B10 DOG6 A10 DOG8 B10 DOG2 A10 DOG4
B7 A7
B6 A6 B9 DOG5 A9 DOG7 B9 DOG1 A9 DOG3
B5 A5 B8 COM 5-6 3 A8 COM 7-8 3 B8 COM 1-2 3 A8 COM 3-4 3
B4 A4
B3 A3 B7 PULSE F6 A7 PULSE F8 B7 PULSE F2 A7 PULSE F4
B2 A2
B1 A1 B6 PULSE COM6 4 A6 PULSE COM8 4 B6 PULSE COM2 4 A6 PULSE COM4 4
B5 PULSE R6 A5 PULSE R8 B5 PULSE R2 A5 PULSE R4
Module front B4 PULSE F5 A4 PULSE F7 B4 PULSE F1 A4 PULSE F3
view B3 PULSE COM5 4 A3 PULSE COM7 4 B3 PULSE COM1 4 A3 PULSE COM3 4
B2 PULSE R5 A2 PULSE R7 B2 PULSE R1 A2 PULSE R3
B1 Vacant A1 Vacant B1 +24V 5 A1 24G 5
1 Common for PG0 . (Any of Axis No. 1 to 8 enters .)

2 Common for CLEAR . (Any of Axis No. 1 to 8 enters .)
3 Common for DOG , CHG . (Any of Axis No. 1 to 8 enters .)
4 Common for PULSE F , PULSE R . (Any of Axis No. 1 to 8 enters .)
5 To output command pulses, always connect an external power supply (24VDC). (When outputting the command pulses of Axes 5 to
8, also connect to A1 and B1 of connector CON1 for Axes 1 to 4.)
7-16
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,
Model
QD70P4 QD70P8
Item
No. of control axes 4 axes 8 axes
Interpolation function No
Control method PTP (Point To Point) control, path control (linear only), speed-position switching control
Control unit pulse
10 pieces of data (positioning data No. 1 to 10)/axis
Positioning data 1
(can be set using GX Configurator-PT or sequence program)
Peripheral device/utility package GX Configurator-PT (option)
Data backup No
PTP control : Incremental system/absolute system
Positioning
Speed-position switching control : Incremental system
control method
Path control : Incremental system/absolute system
[Absolute system] 7
-2147483648 to 2147483647pulse
Positioning [Incremental system]
control range -2147483648 to 2147483647pulse
Positioning
[Speed-position switching control]
control
0 to 2147483647pulse
Speed command 0 to 200000pulse/s
Acceleration/
deceleration Trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration
processing
Acceleration/
0 to 32767ms
deceleration time
1-axis start 0.1ms
Starting time 2 Position control 4-axes simultaneous start 0.2ms
8-axes simultaneous start 0.4ms
External wiring connection system 40-pin connector
2
Applicable wire size 0.3mm (AWG#22) or less (for A6CON1, A6CON4), AWG#24 (for A6 CON2)
External device connection
A6CON1, A6CON2, A6CON4
connector (option)
Pulse output method Open collector output
Max. output pulse 200kpps
Max. connection distance between
2m
QD70 and drive unit
Number of occupied I/O points 32 points (I/O assignment: Intelligent)
5VDC Internal current consumption 0.55A 0.74A
Voltage 24VDC
External supply
power Current
0.065A 0.12A
consumption
1 Positioning data can be started from only No. 1. (Cannot be started from any of No. 2 to No. 10.)
2 When the bias speed is 0, a delay may occur depending on the operating conditions of the other axes and the setting of positioning
data.
7-17
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,
External I/O Specifications
Input specifications
Rated input Working voltage ON voltage/ OFF voltage/
Signal name Input resistance Response time
voltage/current range current current
2.7VDC or more/ 1.0VDC or less/
5VDC/18mA 4.5 to 5.5VDC Approx. 270Ω 0.1ms or less
5.5mA or more 0.5mA or less
Zero signal (PG0) 3µs or less 3µs or less

1ms or more
Near-point dog signal

17.5VDC or
(DOG) 7VDC or less/
24VDC/5mA 19.2 to 26.4VDC more/3mA or Approx. 6.8kΩ 1ms or less
Speed-position switching 0.9mA or less
more
signal (CHG)
Output specifications
Max. load
Rated load Working load Max. voltage Leakage current
Signal name current/rush Response time
voltage voltage range drop at ON at OFF
current
• Set the pulse output mode and pulse output logic selection in "intelligent function module switch
setting".
• The following are the relationships between pulse outputs depending on the "pulse output mode" and
"pulse output logic selection".
Pulse output logic selection

Pulse output
Positive logic Negative logic
mode
Forward run Reverse run Forward run Reverse run
CW
CCW
Pulse output
(CW/PULSE/A phase)
Pulse sign
PULSE
(CCW/SIGN/B phase) High Low
SIGN Low High
The table next page shows the rising/falling edge time and duty ratio.
ON
OFF
tr tf
50mA/1 point/
5 to 24VDC 4.75 to 30VDC 200mA 10ms or 0.5VDC (TYP) 0.1mA or less —
less
0.1A/1
Deviation counter clear 1VDC (TYP) 2ms or less
5 to 24VDC 4.75 to 30VDC point/0.4A 10ms 0.1mA or less
(CLEAR) 2.5VDC (MAX) (resistance load)
or less
7-18
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,
: Pulse rising/falling edge time (Unit for "tr" and "tf": s, unit for "Duty": %)... When ambient temperature is room temperature.
Load voltage (V) 26.4
Cable length (m) 1 2
Load current Pulse speed tr tf tr tf
Duty Duty
(mA) (kpps) (Rising edge) (Falling edge) (Rising edge) (Falling edge)
200 1.902 0.3178 28.20 2.129 0.2724 28.09
2 100 2.869 0.3388 38.44 3.691 0.3549 40.12
10 3.710 0.3616 50.22 5.187 0.3613 49.63
200 1.776 0.3036 35.45 1.763 0.3395 36.48
5 100 2.134 0.3285 43.90 2.394 0.3445 41.11
10 2.357 0.3982 50.88 3.105 0.3899 50.50
200 1.336 0.3174 40.92 1.429 0.3228 40.44
10 100 1.644 0.3814 48.05 1.812 0.3793 46.40
10 2.028 0.4197 51.31 1.996 0.4200 51.22
200 1.236 0.3807 45.64 1.269 0.3949 45.14
7
20 100 1.772 0.4453 49.90 1.734 0.4660 49.73
10 1.957 0.4776 51.63 1.727 0.4749 51.55
200 1.122 0.6809 51.78 1.019 0.6684 51.42
50 100 1.359 0.7407 53.09 1.544 0.7897 52.90
10 1.750 0.9833 52.05 1.819 0.9130 52.03
Load voltage (V) 4.75

Cable length (m) 1 2
Load current Pulse speed tr tf tr tf
Duty Duty
(mA) (kpps) (Rising edge) (Falling edge) (Rising edge) (Falling edge)
200 0.8352 0.2093 45.21 1.484 0.1924 36.94
2 100 1.880 0.2679 44.44 1.848 0.2536 45.03
10 1.942 0.2765 51.03 2.039 0.2873 51.13
200 1.220 0.1726 39.35 1.191 0.2345 41.56
5 100 1.422 0.2652 48.15 1.589 0.2631 47.89
10 1.705 0.2893 51.35 1.604 0.3116 51.40
200 0.8736 0.2739 46.99 1.167 0.2519 44.97
10 100 1.041 0.3075 49.87 1.371 0.3028 50.02
10 1.576 0.3295 51.49 1.672 0.3212 51.41
200 1.021 0.3479 49.65 0.7345 0.3452 48.94
20 100 1.277 0.3671 51.67 1.222 0.3780 52.12
10 1.473 0.4207 51.84 1.287 0.3999 51.73
200 0.8312 0.6302 55.37 0.7978 0.5752 55.34
50 100 0.9714 0.6290 55.38 1.025 0.6218 55.64
10 0.9884 0.7037 52.09 1.105 0.6799 52.05
External power source (For driving the pulse output circuit)

Signal name Rated input voltage Current consumption
24VDC
External power source input (+24V/24G) QD70P4:0.065A, QD70P8:0.12A
(+20%/-15) (Ripple rate within 5%)
7-19
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,
I/O Signals to/from PLC CPU Equipment

QD70 PLC CPU PLC CPU QD70
X0 Module READY Y0 PLC READY <Accessories>
X1 Axis error occurrence Y1 Product Description
X2 Axis warning occurrence Y2 Manual QD70 User's Manual
X3 Y3
(Hardware)
X4 Y4 Use prohibited
X5 Use prohibited Y5
X6 Y6 <Separately obtained products>
X7 Y7 Product Description
X8 Axis 1 Y8 Axis 1 Manual QD70 User's Manual
X9 Axis 2 Y9 Axis 2
Connector External device connector
XA Axis 3 YA Axis 3
A6CON1, A6CON2
XB Axis 4 YB Axis 4
BUSY Positioning start External device
XC Axis 5 YC Axis 5 —
XD Axis 6 YD Axis 6 connection cable
XE Axis 7 YE Axis 7 Note 1: The external device connector is not packed with the
XF Axis 8 YF Axis 8 product. Always obtain it separately.
X10 Axis 1 Y10 Axis 1
X12 Axis 3 Y12 Axis 3 <Software packages supported>
X13 Axis 4 Y13 Axis 4 Compatible between systems which use a QD70 and
Start complete Axis stop
X14 Axis 5 Y14 Axis 5 software packages are as shown below.
GX Developer is necessary when using a QD70.
X17 Axis 8 Y17 Axis 8 Software version
X18 Axis 1 Y18 Axis 1 GX
X19 Axis 2 Y19 Axis 2 GX Developer
Configurator-PT
X1A Axis 3 Y1A Axis 3
If mounted with Version 1.10L or
X1B Axis 4 Positioning Y1B Axis 4 Version 7 or later
JOG start Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU later
X1C Axis 5 complete Y1C Axis 5
X1D Axis 6 Y1D Axis 6 If mounted with
Version 1.00A or
X1E Axis 7 Y1E Axis 7 Q02/Q02H/Q06H/Q Version 4 or later
later
X1F Axis 8 Y1F Axis 8 12H/ Q25HCPU
The I/O numbers (X/Y) and I/O addresses indicated in the above If mounted with Version 7.10L or Version 1.13P or
table assume that the QD70P4 or QD70P8 is loaded on I/O slot 0 Q12PH/Q25PHCPU later later
of the main base unit. If mounted in a
Version 1.10L or
multiple PLC Version 6 or later
later
system
If mounted in a
Version 1.00A or
MELSECNET/H Version 6 or later
later
remote I/O station
Note 2: GX Developer Version 7 (SW7D5C-GPPW-E) or later is
required to monitor the external I/O signals of the QD70
on the GX Developer system monitor screen.
7-20
HIGH-SPEED
7.5 Positioning Module COUNTER,
Setting/Monitoring Tool: POSITIONING
GX Configurator-PT MODULES
Overview (5) Axis operating status

GX Configurator-PT is a setting/monitoring add-in tool for (6) Axis error code
GX Developer (SW4D5C-GPPW-E or later). This is used (7) Axis warning code
to set initial data for the QD70P4 or QD70P8 positioning (8) Executing positioning data No.
module and to automatically load of the operating status to Auto refresh setting screen sample
the PLC CPU device memory.
Although, initial value setting and others can be set in
sequence programs, use of GX Configurator-PT allows
programs and also ensure the checking of the setting
status and operating status quickly.

The initial data needed for the QD70 positioning module
can be set on the screen. The following initial values can 7
be set.
(1) Parameter
(2) OPR data
(3) Positioning data
Monitor/Test Functions
Initial setting screen sample
The monitor/test functions are designed to monitor the
data and operating status in the QD70 positioning module,
and to make an axis error reset at when an axis error
occurs. Since you can monitor the operating status without
needing to know the specific buffer addresses in the QD70
positioning module, these functions are effective for
system maintenance and troubleshooting. The following
data and functions can be monitored and tested.
(1) Axis monitor/axis error reset
(2) OPR monitor
(3) X/Y monitor
Monitor/test screen sample

By setting auto refresh, you can automatically read current
feed values, etc. from the QD70 positioning module into
the PLC CPU, which can reduce programs. The following
data can be refreshed automatically.
(1) Error status
(2) Warning status
(3) Current feed value
(4) Current speed
7-21
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER, 7.6 Type QD75P/QD75D Positioning
POSITIONING Module: QD75P1,QD75P2, QD75P4,
MODULES QD75D1, QD75D2, QD75D4
Overview Functions
The QD75P1, QD75P2, QD75P4, QD75D1, QD75D2 and Main Function Function
Machine OPR control Sets up a positioning start point
QD75D4 (hereafter referred to as the "QD75") are mechanically using a near-point dog,
OPR control
stopper or similar.
modules used with stepping motors or servo amplifiers to Fast OPR control Performs positioning to OP address
execute machine position or speed control. stored in QD75 by machine OPR.
Features Linear control Performs positioning in linear path to

Linear a position specified by address or
interpolation movement amount.
Two different output systems control
Position control
Fixed-feed Performs positioning of specified
Two different output systems, open collector and control movement amount. In 2-, 3- or
differential driver systems, are available as command (interpolation) 4-axis, fixed-feed control, fixed-feed
is performed in linear path by
signals to a stepping motor or servo amplifier. interpolation.
QD75P1, QD75P2, QD75P4 : Open collector system 2-axis circular Performs positioning in circular path
interpolation to position specified by address,
QD75D1, QD75D2, QD75D4 : Differential driver system control movement amount, sub point, center
point, etc.
The differential driver system can increase the distance control Linear control Outputs continuous pulses according
Speed
from the QD75 to the servo amplifier and execute fast Linear to command speed.
interpolation
precision control.
Major positioning control
control
Differential driver system : Max. 10m Speed-position switching First executes speed control, and
control then turns on "speed-position
Open collector system : Max. 2m switching signal" to perform position
Max. 1Mpps high-speed command control (positioning of specified
address (ABS mode) or movement
The differential driver system can give a max. 1Mpps amount (INC mode)).
Position-speed switching First executes position control, and
high-speed command, achieving fast, precision control. control then turns on "position-speed
The command pulse for the open collector system is max. switching signal" to perform speed
control (output of continuous pulses
200kpps. according to specified command
Assortment of 1-, 2- and 4-axis products speed).
Current value Changes current feed value into
1-, 2- and 4-axis models are available in terms of the changing address set in positioning data
(mechanical feed value
number of axes per module. unchangeable).
Other control
QD75P1, QD75D1: 1 axis NOP instruction No-execution control mode. Shifts to

operation of next data when this
QD75P2, QD75D2: 2 axes instruction has been set.
QD75P4, QD75D4: 4 axes JUMP Makes an unconditional or
instruction conditional jump to specified
Also, since there are no restrictions on the number of positioning data No.
mountable modules, multiple modules can be mounted LOOP-LEND Repeats LOOP-LEND loop control.
Block start Performs multiple positioning
and used if more than four control axes are needed. (Normal start) processing by a single start.
Fast start Condition start Judges conditions of "condition data"
and executes "block start data". If
The QD75 can be started as fast as about 6-7ms after the conditions do not hold, executes
"block start data" of next point.
CPU module has given it a start command, reducing the
High-level positioning control
Wait start Waits until conditions of "condition

machine tact time. (3ms for a pre-reading start) data" hold to execute "block start
data".
4-axis linear interpolation, 2-axis circular Simultaneous start Simultaneously starts positioning the
interpolation axes specified in "condition data"
(starts outputting the pulses at the
You can execute 2-, 3- or 4-axis linear interpolation control same time).
and 2-axis circular interpolation control. Repeated start Repeats positioning processing of
(FOR loop) block start data across "FOR-NEXT"
Note : Interpolation control can be performed when multiple axes by the preset number of times.
Repeated start Repeats positioning processing of
are used on the same QD75 module. start block data across "FOR~
(FOR condition)
Wide selection of control systems NEXT" until "condition data" hold.
Multiple axes Starts multiple axes simultaneously.
You have a choice of control systems such as PTP (Point (Equivalent to simultaneous start
simultaneous start
To Point) control, fixed-feed control, speed control, among special starts)
control
speed-position switching control and position-speed (Continued on next page)
switching control.
7-22
HIGH-SPEED
7.6 Type QD75P/QD75D Positioning COUNTER,
Module: QD75P1,QD75P2, QD75P4, POSITIONING
QD75D1, QD75D2, QD75D4 MODULES

Main Function Description Sub Function Description
JOG operation Outputs pulses only while JOG Step function Can make a stop per "automatic
start signal is on.
deceleration" or "positioning data".
Inching operation Outputs pulses for slight
Manual control
movement amount in manual Skip function Suspends (decelerates to stop)

operation. currently executed positioning at
(Makes fine adjustment with JOG entry of skip signal and starts next
start signal.)
positioning.
Manual pulse generator Outputs to servo amplifier the
operation pulses commanded by manual M code output function Can set number between 0 and
pulse generator. (Makes fine 65535 per positioning data as M
adjustment, etc. on pulse level.) code.
Independent positioning Executes only specified
Teaching function Registers address positioned by
control positioning data and ends
(Positioning end) positioning. manual control as address of
Operation pattern
Continuous positioning After executing specified positioning data.

control positioning data, makes a stop, Target position change Changes target position during
and then executes next
function positioning. Can also change
Continuous path control Executes specified positioning speed.
data, and without deceleration to Command in-position Sets "command in-position flag"
7
Other function
stop, executes next continuous function when remaining distance up to

positioning data.
positioning address has become
less than preset distance at end of
Sub Function Description positioning.
OPR retry function Makes OPR possible if axis is not Acceleration/deceleration Adjusts acceleration/deceleration
returned to position before process function of control.
near-point dog by JOG operation,
etc. Continuous operation Interrupts processing after
OPR
OP shift function After machine OPR, moves interrupt function completion of processing the
position over specified distance positioning data being processed
from machine OP position to use when interrupt command is given
that position as OP address.
during continuous positioning
Backlash compensation Compensates for mechanical
function system backlash amount. processing.
Compensation
Pre-reading start Reduces virtual starting time.

function
function
Electronic gear function Sets movement amount per pulse.
Turns on the flag when constant
speed or acceleration switches to
Deceleration start flag deceleration in the operation
Speed limit function Limits command speed to within function pattern of "end" position control
setting range of "speed limit (except circular interpolation) to
value".
know the stop timing.
Torque limit function Limits servo motor-generated
Limit function
torque to within setting range of

"torque limit value".
Common Function Description
Software stroke limit Does not execute positioning to
Parameter initialization function Returns the "parameters",
function outside the setting range of upper
"positioning data" and "block start
and lower stroke limits set in
parameters. data" stored in the buffer memory
and flash ROM of the QD75 to the
Hardware stroke limit Makes deceleration to stop using
factory-set initial values.
function limit switch connected to external
The following two methods are
input connector of QD75.
available.
Speed change function Changes speed during positioning 1) Using sequence program
function
Change
operation. 2) Using GX Configurator-QP

Override function Varies speed during positioning Execution data backup function Stores (backs up) currently
operation at the ratio of 1 to 300%. executed "set data" into flash
Acceleration/deceleratio Changes acceleration/deceleration ROM.
The following two methods are
Change
function
n time change function time at speed change. available.

Torque change function Changes "torque limit value" 1) Using sequence program
during control. 2) Using GX Configurator-QP
I/O logic switching function Switches signal logic according to
Absolute position restoration Restores absolute position of
externally connected device.
function specified axis.
External I/O signal monitor Monitors the external I/O signal
function monitor information in the
module’s detailed information,
which can be displayed on the GX
(SW6D5C-GPPW-E or later).
7-23
HIGH-SPEED
Combination of QD75 main functions and sub functions

Sub functions
Functions characteristic
to machine OPR
OPR retry function
OP shift function
Combination with operation
Main functions
pattern. 1
Machine OPR control

OPR control
Fast OPR control
1-axis linear control
2-, 3-, or 4-axis linear
interpolation control
1-axis fixed-feed (Continuous path control
Position control cannot be set)
control
2-, 3-, or 4-axis
(Continuous path control
fixed-feed control
cannot be set)
(interpolation)
2-axis circular
Major positioning
control (Only independent positioning
Speed control (1- to 4-axis)
control can be set)
Speed-position switching control
cannot be set)
(Only independent positioning
Position-speed switching control
control can be set)
Current value (Continuous path control
changing cannot be set)
Other control NOP instruction
JUMP instruction
LOOP to LEND
JOG operation, inching operation
Manual control
Manual pulse generator operation
: Always combine, : Combination possible, : Combination limited, : Combination not possible
1 The operation pattern is one of the "positioning data" setting items.
2 The near pass function is featured as standard and is valid only for setting continuous path control for position control.
3 Invalid during creep speed.
4 Invalid during continuous path control
5 Inching operation does not perform acceleration/deceleration processing.
6 Valid for only the reference axis.
7 Valid for only a deceleration start made during position control.
7-24
Backlash compensation
function
Electronic gear function
control
compensate
Functions that
Near pass function
2
Torque limit function
control
function
Functions that limit
Hardware stroke limit

function
Speed change function
3
Override function
3
Acceleration/ deceleration
time change function
QD75D1, QD75D2, QD75D4
control details
Torque change function

Functions that change
Step function
Skip function
Module: QD75P1,QD75P2, QD75P4,
7.6 Type QD75P/QD75D Positioning
M code output function
Teaching function
Target position change

4
function
Command in-position
Other functions
function
Acceleration/deceleration
5
process function
Pre-reading start function

MODULES
COUNTER,
Deceleration start flag

HIGH-SPEED
POSITIONING
7
6
6
function
7-25
7
HIGH-SPEED
QD75 Dedicated Instructions (2) QD75D1/QD75D2/QD75D4

QD75D1 QD75D2 QD75D4
RUN AX1
The following QD75 dedicated instructions can be used to

RUN AX1 RUN AX1
AX2 AX2
AX3
ERR ERR ERR AX4
create sequence programs for the QD75. AX1

AX1
AX2
AX3
AX4
AX1
AX2
Dedicated Instruction Name Instruction Specifications

ABRST1, ABRST2, Used to restore the absolute position of
ABRST3, ABRST4 the specified axis.
PSTRT1, PSTRT2, Used to start positioning of the specified
PSTRT3, PSTRT4 axis.
TEACH1, TEACH2, Used to teach the specified axis.
TEACH3, TEACH4
PFWRT Writes the parameters, positioning data 27.4
and block start data in the QD75 buffer (1.08)
memory to the flash ROM built in the

QD75.
PINIT Initializes the parameters, positioning
data and block start data in the buffer
memory and flash ROM of the QD75.
98(3.86)
Appearance
(1) QD75P1/QD75P2/QD75P4
QD75P1 QD75P2 QD75P4
RUN AX1 RUN AX1 RUN AX1
AX2 AX2
AX3
ERR ERR ERR AX4
AX1 AX3 AX1

AX1 AX2 AX4 AX2
90(3.54) 46(1.81)
136(5.35)
Unit : mm (inch)
External I/O Terminals

Input terminals
Signal Name Internal Circuit Wiring
27.4 Near-point dog signal DOG

(1.08)
Upper limit switch

FLS
signal
Lower limit switch

RLS
signal
98(3.86)
Stop signal STOP
External command
CHG
signal
90(3.54) 46(1.81)
136(5.35) Common COM
Unit : mm (inch)
PULSER A +
Manual pulse
generator A phase
PULSER A –
PULSER B +
Manual pulse
generator B phase
PULSER B –
Wiring: : wiring required, : wiring as required
7-26
HIGH-SPEED
Signal Name Internal Circuit Wiring Output terminals (QD75D1, QD75D2, QD75D4)
Signal Name Internal Circuit Wiring
Drive unit ready READY
Drive unit ready
RDY COM
common
PG024 common COM
Zero signal
PG05
PULSE F+
Zero signal common PG0 COM CW/A-phase/pulse
PULSE F-
Wiring: : wiring required, : wiring as required.
Output terminals (QD75P1, QD75P2, QD75P4)
Signal Name Internal Circuit Wiring PULSE R+
CCW/B-phase/sign
PULSE R- 7
common COM
–
Differential driver
PULSE F
common terminal
CW/A-phase/pulse –
PULSE
COM
PULSE R
CCW/B-phase/sign
PULSE
COM
Signal layout for external device connection connector

Axis 4(AX4) Axis 3(AX3) Axis 2(AX2) Axis 1(AX1)
Pin layout
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
2B20 Vacant 2A20 Vacant 1B20 PULSER B– 1A20 PULSER B+
2B19 Vacant 2A19 Vacant 1B19 PULSER A– 1A19 PULSER A+
B20 A20 2B18 PULSE COM 2A18 PULSE COM 1B18 PULSE COM 1A18 PULSE COM
B19 A19 3 PULSE R– 3 PULSE R– 3 PULSE R– 3 PULSE R–
B18 A18 2B17 PULSE R 2A17 PULSE R 1B17 PULSE R 1A17 PULSE R
B17 A17 3 PULSE R+ 3 PULSE R+ 3 PULSE R+ 3 PULSE R+
B16 A16 2B16 PULSE COM 2A16 PULSE COM 1B16 PULSE COM 1A16 PULSE COM
B15 A15 3 PULSE F– 3 PULSE F– 3 PULSE F– 3 PULSE F–
B14 A14
B13 A13 2B15 PULSE F 2A15 PULSE F 1B15 PULSE F 1A15 PULSE F
B12 A12 3 PULSE F+ 3 PULSE F+ 3 PULSE F+ 3 PULSE F+
B11 A11 2B14 CLRCOM 2A14 CLRCOM 1B14 CLRCOM 1A14 CLRCOM
B10 A10 2B13 CLEAR 2A13 CLEAR 1B13 CLEAR 1A13 CLEAR
B9 A9 2B12 RDYCOM 2A12 RDYCOM 1B12 RDYCOM 1A12 RDYCOM
B8 A8 2B11 READY 2A11 READY 1B11 READY 1A11 READY
B7 A7 2B10 PGOCOM 2A10 PGOCOM 1B10 PGOCOM 1A10 PGOCOM
B6 A6
B5 A5 2B9 PG05 2A9 PG05 1B9 PG05 1A9 PG05
B4 A4 2B8 PG024 2A8 PG024 1B8 PG024 1A8 PG024
B3 A3 2B7 COM 2A7 COM 1B7 COM 1A7 COM
B1 A1 2B5 CHG 2A5 CHG 1B5 CHG 1A5 CHG
2B4 STOP 2A4 STOP 1B4 STOP 1A4 STOP
Front view of
2B3 DOG 2A3 DOG 1B3 DOG 1A3 DOG
the module 2B2 RLS 2A2 RLS 1B2 RLS 1A2 RLS
2B1 FLS 2A1 FLS 1B1 FLS 1A1 FLS
1: Pin No. "1 " indicates the pin No. for the right connector. Pin No. "2 " indicates the pin No. for the left connector.
2: When a 1-axis module is used, pin Nos. 1B1 to 1B18 are "vacant".
3: The upper line indicates the signal name for the QD75P1/QD75P2/QD75P4, and the lower line indicates the signal name for the
QD75D1/QD75D2/QD75D4.
7-27
HIGH-SPEED
Model QD75P1 1 QD75P2 1 QD75P4 1
Item QD75D1 QD75D2 QD75D4
No. of control axes 1 axis 2 axes 4 axes
2-axis linear interpolation
Interpolation function None interpolation
2-axis circular interpolation
PTP (Point To Point) control, path control (both linear and arc can be set), speed control,
Control system
speed-position switching control, position-speed switching control
Control unit mm, inch, degree, pulse
600 data (positioning data Nos. 1 to 600)/axis
Positioning data
(Can be set with peripheral device or sequence program.)
Parameters, positioning data, and block start data can be saved on flash ROM
Backup
(battery-less backup)
PTP control: Incremental system/absolute system
Speed-position switching control: Incremental system/absolute system 2
Positioning system
Position-speed switching control: Incremental system
Path control: Incremental system/absolute system
In absolute system
• –214748364.8 to 214748364.7 ( m)
• –21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (inch)
• 0 to 359.99999 (degree)
• –2147483648 to 2147483647 (pulse)
In incremental system
• –214748364.8 to 214748364.7 ( m)
• –21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (inch)
Positioning range
• –21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (degree)
• –2147483648 to 2147483647 (pulse)
In speed-position switching control (INC mode) / position-speed switching control
Positioning
• 0 to 214748364.7 ( m)
• 0 to 21474.83647 (inch)
• 0 to 21474.83647 (degree)
• 0 to 2147483647 (pulse)
In speed-position switching control (ABS mode)
• 0 to 359.99999 (degree)
0.01 to 20000000.00 (mm/min)
0.001 to 2000000.000 (inch/min)
Speed command
0.001 to 2000000.000 (degree/min)
1 to 1000000 (pulse/s)
Acceleration/
Automatic trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration
deceleration process
Acceleration/ 1 to 8388608 (ms)
deceleration time Four patterns can be set for each of acceleration time and deceleration time
Sudden stop
1 to 8388608 (ms)
deceleration time
1-axis linear control 6 Factors in starting time extension
1-axis speed control 6 The following times will be added to
2-axis linear interpolation control (Composite speed) 7 the starting time in the described
2-axis linear interpolation control (Reference axis speed) 7 conditions:
2-axis circular interpolation control 7 • S-pattern acceleration/
2-axis speed control 6 deceleration is selected: 0.5
Starting time (ms) 3
• Other axis is in
3-axis linear interpolation control (Composite speed) 7
operation: 1.5
3-axis linear interpolation control (Reference axis speed) 7
• During continuous
3-axis speed control 6
positioning control: 0.2
4-axis linear interpolation control 7 • During continuous path
4-axis speed control 7 control: 1.0
Applicable wire size 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less (for A6CON1, A6CON4), AWG #24 (for A6CON2)
Applicable connector for external
A6CON1, A6CON2, A6CON4
device (Sold separately)
7-28
HIGH-SPEED

Model QD75P1 1 QD75P2 1 QD75P4 1
Item QD75D1 QD75D2 QD75D4
QD75P1, QD75P2, QD75P4 : 200kpps
Max. output pulse
QD75D1, QD75D2, QD75D4 : 1Mpps
Max. connection distance QD75P1, QD75P2, QD75P4 : 2m
between servos QD75D1, QD75D2, QD75D4 : 10m
Number of occupied I/O
points
Flash ROM write count Max. 100000 times
5VDC Internal current QD75P1 : 0.40A QD75P2 : 0.46A QD75P4 : 0.58A
consumption QD75D1 : 0.52A QD75D2 : 0.56A QD75D4 : 0.82A
1: QD75P represents the open-collector output system, and QD75D represents the differential driver output system.
2: In speed-position switching control (ABS mode), the control unit available is "degree" only.
7
3: Using the "Pre-reading start function", the virtual start time can be shortened.
Differential driver common terminal

specifications (QD75D1, QD75D2, QD75D4 only)
Applicable wire size 12AWG
2
Rated multiple-wire Solid wire: 0.2 to 0.8mm 2 pcs.
connection size 2
Twisted wire: 0.2 to 0.8mm 2 pcs.
Screw tightening torque 50N cm
7-29
HIGH-SPEED
Rated input Working voltage OFF
Signal name ON voltage/current Input resistance Response time
voltage/current range voltage/current
Drive unit READY
(READY)
17.5VDC or more/ 7VDC or less/
Stop signal (STOP) 24VDC/5mA 19.2 to 26.4VDC Approx. 4.7kΩ 4ms or less
3.5mA or more 1.7mA or less
Upper limit signal (FLS)
Lower limit signal (RLS)
2VDC or more/ 0.5VDC or less/
5VDC/5mA 4.5 to 6.1VDC Approx. 0.3kΩ 1ms or less
2mA or more 0.5mA or less
10VDC or more/ 3VDC or less/
24VDC/5mA 12 to 26.4VDC Approx. 4.7kΩ 1ms or less
Zero signal 3mA or more 0.2mA or less
(PG05/PG024)
3 s or less 3 s or less
1ms or more
Zero signal differential Differential receiver equivalent to Am26LS32

input (ON/OFF level ON: 1.8V or more, OFF: 0.6V or less)
1 Pulse width
2ms or more
Manual pulse
generator A phase
1ms
(PULSE or more
GENERATOR A) 1ms or more
Manual pulse generator (Duty ratio: 50%)
B phase (PULSE 2 Phase difference
GENERATOR B)
When the A phase leads the B phase, the positioning
A phase
address (current value) increases.
B phase
0.5ms or more
Near-point dog signal

(DOG) 17.5VDC or more/ 7VDC or less/
External command 3.5mA or more 1.7mA or less
signal (CHG)
7-30
HIGH-SPEED
Output specifications
Max. load
Rated load Working load Max. voltage Leakage current
Signal name current/rush Response time
voltage voltage range drop at ON at OFF
current
• Differential driver equivalent to Am26C31 (For QD75D )
• The types of CW/CCW, PULSE/SIGN and A phase/B phase are selected with the parameters ( Pr.5 Pulse
output mode) of the QD75 and drive unit.
• The relation of the pulse output with the " Pr.5 Pulse output mode" and " Pr.23 Output signal logic
selection" is shown below:
Pr.23 Output signal logic selection (bit 0)
Pr.5 Pulse
Positive logic Negative logic
output mode
Forward run Reverse run Forward run Reverse run
CW
CCW
Pulse output
(CW/PULSE/A phase)
Pulse sign
PULSE 7
SIGN High Low Low High
(CCW/SIGN/B phase)
Aφ
Bφ
The table below shows the rising/falling edge time and duty ratio when the QD75P is used.
ON
OFF
tr tf
50mA/1 point/
5 to 24VDC 4.75 to 30VDC 200mA 10ms or 0.5VDC (TYP) 0.1mA or less —
less
Deviation counter clear 0.1A/1 point/0.4A 1VDC (TYP) 2ms or less
5 to 24VDC 4.75 to 30VDC 0.1mA or less
(CLEAR) 10ms or less 2.5VDC (MAX) (resistance load)
Pulse rise/fall time on QD75P (unit tr, tf: s Duty: %) ... When ambient temperature is normal temperature
Load voltage(V) 26.4 4.75

Cable length
1 (3.28) 2 (6.56) 1 (3.28) 2 (6.56)
(m (feet))
Load Pulse
tr tf tr tf tr tf tr tf
current speed Duty Duty Duty Duty
(Rise) (Fall) (Rise) (Fall) (Rise) (Fall) (Rise) (Fall)
(mA) (kpps)
200 0.08 2.33 6.6 0.08 2.20 14.6 0.07 0.57 44.8 0.07 0.95 39.0
2 100 0.09 2.42 34.7 0.10 4.44 12.6 0.07 0.57 47.5 0.08 1.01 45.3
10 0.09 2.44 48.7 0.10 4.52 47.7 0.07 0.60 49.7 0.08 1.04 49.5
200 0.09 1.00 39.8 0.11 1.77 24.5 0.07 0.32 48.4 0.08 0.45 45.8
5 100 0.09 1.01 45.3 0.10 1.76 40.3 0.07 0.31 49.2 0.08 0.45 48.7
10 0.10 1.00 49.6 0.10 1.72 49.2 0.08 0.33 49.9 0.08 0.49 49.8
200 0.10 0.27 50.1 0.11 0.44 48.0 0.08 0.15 50.7 0.08 0.15 51.3
20 100 0.10 0.29 49.8 0.11 0.48 49.1 0.08 0.15 50.4 0.08 0.18 50.4
10 0.10 0.30 49.9 0.12 0.48 49.9 0.08 0.17 50.1 0.08 0.18 49.9
200 0.11 0.19 50.5 0.12 0.24 50.6 0.10 0.15 51.8 0.11 0.14 51.7
50 100 0.11 0.19 50.4 0.12 0.24 50.4 0.10 0.14 50.7 0.10 0.15 50.8
10 0.12 0.18 50.0 0.13 0.22 50.1 0.10 0.14 50.1 0.12 0.15 50.1
The time for H/L width of differential output waveform with the QD75D . (Cable length: 2m, Ambient temperature: room
temperature)
Pulse speed H width L width
1Mpps 410ns 456ns
500kpps 936ns 1 s
7-31
HIGH-SPEED

QD75 PLC CPU PLC CPU QD75
<Accessories>
X0 QD75 READY Y0 PLC READY
Product Description
X1 Synchronization flag Y1
X2 Y2 Use prohibited Manual Type QD75P/QD75D Positioning Module
Use prohibited
X3 Y3 User's Manual (Hardware)
X4 Axis 1 Y4 Axis 1 Differential driver Packed with the QD75D1, QD75D2,
X5 Axis 2 M code Y5 Axis 2 common terminal QD75D4
Axis stop
X6 Axis 3 ON Y6 Axis 3
X7 Axis 4 Y7 Axis 4
Forward
X8 Axis 1 Y8 Axis 1 run JOG Product Description
start
Reverse Manual Type QD75P/QD75D Positioning Module
X9 Axis 2 Y9 Axis 1 run JOG User's Manual
Error start
detection Forward Connector External wiring connector
XA Axis 3 YA Axis 2 run JOG A6CON1, A6CON2, A6CON4
start
Reverse External wiring Cables having external wiring connectors
XB Axis 4 YB Axis 2 run JOG cable (A6CON1, A6CON2, A6CON4) with wiring
start
Forward for specific servo amplifiers and stepping
XC Axis 1 YC Axis 3 run JOG motors are also available.
start
Reverse
Refer to the FA goods in Section 14.1.
XD Axis 2 YD Axis 3 run JOG Note 1: As the external wiring connector is not packed with the
start
BUSY module, always obtain it separately.
Forward
XE Axis 3 YE Axis 4 run JOG
start
Reverse <Supported software packages>
XF Axis 4 YF Axis 4 run JOG
start The following table lists the compatibility between the
X10 Axis 1 Y10 Axis 1 systems using the QD75 and the software packages. GX
X11 Axis 2 Start Y11 Axis 2 Positioning
complete Start
Developer is required for use of the QD75.
Software version
X14 Axis 1 Y14 Axis 1 GX Developer GX Configurator-QP
Execution
X15 Axis 2 Positioning Y15 Axis 2 If mounted with
prohibition Version 4 or Version 2.00A or
X16 Axis 3 complete Y16 Axis 3 flag Q02/Q02H/Q06H/Q12
more more
H/Q25HCPU
X18 Y18
If mounted with Version 7 or Version 2.10L or
X19 Y19
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU more more
X1A Y1A
If mounted with Version 7.10L Version 2.13P or
X1B Y1B
Use prohibited Use prohibited Q12PH/Q25PHCPU or more more
X1C Y1C
X1D Y1D If mounted in a multiple Version 6 or
X1E Y1E PLC system more
Version 2.00A or
X1F Y1F If mounted in a
Version 6 or more
MELSECNET/H
The I/O numbers (X/Y) and I/O addresses indicated in the more
remote I/O station
above table assume that the QD75P1/P2/P4 or
QD75D1/D2/D4 is mounted on I/O slot 0 of the main base
unit. on the GX Developer system monitor screen.
7-32
MEMO
7-33
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,
MODULES QD75M1,QD75M2,QD75M4
Overview Function List

The QD75M1, QD75M2 and QD75M4 (hereafter referred Main Function Function
generically to as the "QD75") are modules used with Machine OPR control Sets up a positioning start point
mechanically using a near-point dog,
OPR control
SSCNET-compatible servo amplifiers to execute machine
zero signal or similar.
position or speed control.
Fast OPR control Performs positioning to "Machine
feed value" stored in QD75 by
Features machine OPR.
Linear control Using a designated specified axes,
Connection of servo amplifiers using SSCNET Linear linear interpolation control is carried
(a) The QD75M can be directly connected to the servo interpolation out from the start address (current
amplifier using the MELSERVO (Mitsubishi's servo control stop position) to the designated
position.
amplifier: MR-H-BN, MR-H-BN4, MR-J2-B, MR-J2S-B,
Fixed-feed Using a designated specified, axes,
MR-J2-03B5, MR-J2M-B) and SSCNET. control linear interpolation control is carried
Position control
(b) Because the SSCNET cable is used to connect the (interpolation) out from the start address (current
QD75M and the servo amplifier, or servo amplifier, stop position).
2-axis circular The axis in which the interpolation
saving wiring can be realized. The cable between the interpolation control system is set is regarded as
QD75M and servo amplifier or servo amplifiers can be control the reference axis. Positioning is
extended up to 30m. carried out in an arc path to a
(c) The servo parameters can be set on the QD75M side designated specified position, while
controlling the other axis
to write or read them to/from the servo amplifier using (interpolation axis) to match the
the SSCNET. positioning data set in the reference
axis.
Major positioning control
(d) The actual current value and error description contained

The speed control of the designated
in the servo can be checked by the buffer memory of the Speed control
specified axes is carried out.
QD75. Speed-position switching The control is continued as speed
Easy application to the absolute position system control control by turning ON the "position-
(a) The absolute position-corresponding servo amplifier is speed switching signal" after first
carrying out position control.
connected to have an application to the absolute Position-speed switching The control is continued as position
position system. control control (positioning for the
(b) Once the OP have been established, the OPR designated specified address or
movement amount) by turning ON
operation can also be made unnecessary when the the "speed-position switching signal"
power is supplied. after first carrying out speed control.
(c) With the absolute position system, the data set method Current value Changes current feed value into
OPR is used to establish the OP. changing address set in positioning data
(mechanical feed value
(d) When the setting unit is "degree", the absolute position unchangeable).
system with unlimited length feed can be configured. NOP instruction A non-executable control system.
Other control
Assortment of 1-, 2- and 4-axis products When this instruction is set, the
operation is transferred to the next
1-, 2- and 4-axis models are available in terms of the
data operation, and the instruction is
number of axes per module. not executed.
QD75M1: 1 axis, QD75M2: 2 axes, QD75M4: 4 axes JUMP Makes an unconditional or
Also, since there are no restrictions on the number of instruction conditional jump to specified
positioning data No.
loadable modules, multiple modules can be loaded and LOOP-LEND Repeats LOOP-LEND loop control.
used if more than four control axes are needed. Block start Performs multiple positioning
Quick startup (Normal start) processing by a single start.
A positioning operation starts up quickly taking as little as 6 Condition start Judges conditions of "condition data"
and executes "block start data". If
ms to 7 ms: linear control (3ms: when pre-reading start). conditions do not hold, executes
Even when two or more axes are instructed to start up "block start data" of next point.
High-level positioning control
simultaneously (either by independent control or by Wait start Waits until conditions of "condition
coordinated control using interpolation), there will be no data" hold to execute "block start
data".
irregularity of startup timings between different axes. Simultaneous start Simultaneously starts positioning the
4-axis linear interpolation, 2-axis circular axes specified in "condition data"
interpolation (starts outputting the pulses at the
same time).
You can execute 2-, 3- or 4-axis linear interpolation control
Repeated start Repeats positioning processing of
and 2-axis circular interpolation control. (FOR loop) block start data across "FOR-NEXT"
Note : Interpolation control can be performed when multiple axes by the preset number of times.
are used on the same QD75 module. Repeated start Repeats positioning processing of
(FOR condition) start block data across "FOR~
Wide selection of positioning control functions NEXT" until "condition data" hold.
You have a choice of positioning control functions such as Multiple axes Starts multiple axes simultaneously.
PTP (Point To Point) control, fixed-feed control, speed simultaneous start (Equivalent to simultaneous start
control, speed-position switching control and control among special starts)
position-speed switching control. (Continued on next page)
7-34
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,
QD75M1,QD75M2,QD75M4 MODULES
(Continued from preceding page) Sub Function Description

Acceleration/deceleration Changes
Main Function Description
acceleration/deceleration time at
Change
function
JOG operation Outputs pulses only while JOG speed change.
start signal is on.
Torque change function Changes "torque limit value"
Inching operation Outputs pulses for slight during control.
Manual control
movement amount in manual

Restores absolute position of
operation. Absolute position system function
specified axis.
(Makes fine adjustment with JOG
start signal.) Step function Can make a stop per "automatic
deceleration" or "positioning data".
Manual pulse generator Outputs to servo amplifier the
Skip function Suspends (decelerates to stop)
operation pulses commanded by manual
currently executed positioning at
pulse generator. (Makes fine
entry of skip signal and starts next
adjustment, etc. on pulse level.)
positioning.
Individual positioning Executes only specified
control positioning data and ends M code output function Can set number between 0 and
(End of positioning) positioning. 65535 per positioning data as M
Operation pattern
code.
Continuous positioning After executing specified
Teaching function Registers address positioned by
control positioning data, makes a stop,
manual control as address of
(Continues positioning) and then executes next
positioning data.
Continuous path control Executes specified positioning Target position change Changes target position during
(Continues positioning) data, and without deceleration to function positioning. Can also change
stop, executes next continuous speed. 7
Other function
positioning data. Command in-position Sets "command in-position flag"

function when remaining distance up to
positioning address has become
Sub Function Description less than preset distance at end of
OPR retry function Makes OPR possible if axis is not positioning.
returned to position before Acceleration/deceleration Adjusts acceleration/deceleration
near-point dog by JOG operation, process function of control.
etc.
OPR
Continuous operation This function interrupts continuous

OP shift function After machine OPR, moves interrupt function operation. When this request is
position over specified distance accepted, the operation stops
from machine OP position to use when the execution of the current
that position as OP address. positioning data is completed.
Backlash compensation Compensates for mechanical
function system backlash amount.
Pre-reading start This function shortens the virtual
Compensation function
function start time.

Follow-up function Monitors the number of motor
Electronic gear function By setting the movement amount
revolutions in the servo off status
per pulse, this function can freely
and feedback to the current feed
change the machine movement
value.
amount per commanded pulse.
When the movement amount per
pulse is set, a flexible positioning Common Function Description
system that matches the machine Parameter initialization function Returns the "parameters",
system can be structured.
"positioning data" and "block start
Speed limit function Limits command speed to within
setting range of "speed limit data" stored in the buffer memory
value". and flash ROM of the QD75 to the
Torque limit function Limits servo motor-generated factory-set initial values.
torque to within setting range of The following two methods are
"torque limit value".
Limit function
Software stroke limit If a command outside of the available.

function upper/lower limit stroke limit 1) Using sequence program
setting range, set in the 2) Using GX Configurator-QP
parameters, is issued, this Execution data backup function Stores (backs up) currently
function will not execute
positioning for that command. executed "set data" into flash
Hardware stroke limit This function carries out ROM.
function deceleration stop with the limit The following two methods are
switch connected to the QD75 available.
external device connector.
1) Using sequence program
Speed change function Changes speed during positioning
2) Using GX Configurator-QP
Change
function
operation.
Override function Varies speed during positioning External I/O signal logic switching Switches signal logic according to
operation at the ratio of 1 to 300%. function externally connected device.
External I/O signal monitor Monitors the external I/O signal
function monitor information in the
module’s detailed information,
which can be displayed on the GX
(SW6D5C-GPPW-E or later).
7-35
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,
Main-sub function combination list

Sub functions
Functions characteristic
to machine OPR
OPR retry function
OP shift function
Combination with operation
Main functions
pattern. 1
Machine OPR control

OPR control
Fast OPR control
1-axis linear control
1-axis fixed-feed (Continuous path control
Position control cannot be set)
control
2-, 3-, or 4-axis
fixed-feed control
cannot be set)
(interpolation)
2-axis circular
Major positioning
control (Only independent positioning
Speed control (1- to 4-axis)
control can be set)
Speed-position switching control
cannot be set)
(Only independent positioning
Position-speed switching control
control can be set)
Current value (Continuous path control
changing cannot be set)
Other control NOP instruction
JUMP instruction
LOOP to LEND
JOG operation, inching operation
Manual control
Manual pulse generator operation
: Always combine, : Combination possible, : Combination limited, : Combination not possible
1 The operation pattern is one of the "positioning data" setting items.
2 The near pass function is featured as standard and is valid only for setting continuous path control for position control.
3 Invalid during creep speed.
4 Invalid during continuous path control.
5 Inching operation does not perform acceleration/deceleration processing.
7-36
Backlash compensation
function
Electronic gear function
control
compensate
Functions that
Near pass function
2
Torque limit function

control
function
Functions that limit
Hardware stroke limit

function
Speed change function
3
Override function
3
Acceleration/ deceleration
control details
Torque change function

Functions that change
QD75M1,QD75M2,QD75M4
Step function
7.7 Type QD75 Positioning Module:
Skip function
M code output function
Teaching function
Target position change

4
function
Other functions
Command in-position
function
Acceleration/deceleration
5
process function
MODULES
COUNTER,
HIGH-SPEED
Pre-reading start function

POSITIONING
7-37
7
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,
QD75 Dedicated Instructions External I/O Terminals
The following QD75 dedicated instructions can be used to Input terminals

create sequence programs for the QD75. Signal Name Internal Circuit Wiring
Dedicated
Instruction Specifications
Instruction Name Near-point dog signal DOG
PSTRT1
PSTRT2 This function starts the positioning control of the
PSTRT3 designated axis of the QD75. Upper limit LS signal FLS
PSTRT4
TEACH1
Lower limit LS signal RLS
TEACH2 This function carries out teaching the designated
TEACH3 axis of the QD75.
TEACH4
Stop signal STOP
This function writes the buffer memory parameters,
PFWRT positioning data and block start data to the flash
ROM. External command
CHG
This function initializes the buffer memory and flash signal/switching signal
PINIT ROM setting data to the factory-set data (initial
values)
Common COM
Appearance
QD75M1 QD75M2 QD75M4 PULSER A +
QD75M1 QD75M2 QD75M4

Manual pulse generator
A phase
RUN AX1 RUN AX1 RUN AX1
AX2 AX2
AX3
ERR ERR ERR AX4
QD75M4
AX1
AX1
AX2
AX3
AX4
AX1
AX2
PULSER A –
PULSER B +
Manual pulse generator
B phase
PULSER B –
QD75M1 QD75M2

27.4
(1.08)
98(3.86)
70(2.76)
90(3.54) 46(1.81)
136(5.35)
Unit: mm (inch)
To give allowance for SSCNET cable wiring, leave a 70mm (2.76
inch) clearance under the QD75.
7-38
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,
Signal layout for external device connection connector
Axis 4(AX4) Axis 3(AX3) Axis 2(AX2) Axis 1(AX1)

Pin layout
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
2B20 No connect 2A20 No connect 1B20 PULSER B- 1A20 PULSER B+
2B19 No connect 2A19 No connect 1B19 PULSER A- 1A19 PULSER A+
2B18 No connect 2A18 No connect 1B18 No connect 1A18 No connect
B20 A20
B19 A19 2B17 No connect 2A17 No connect 1B17 No connect 1A17 No connect
B17 A17
B15 A15
B14 A14
B12 A12
B9 A9
B7 A7
7
B6 A6
B4 A4
B2 A2
B1 A1
2B6 COM 2A6 COM 1B6 COM 1A6 COM
2B5 CHG 2A5 CHG 1B5 CHG 1A5 CHG
Front view of 2B4 STOP 2A4 STOP 1B4 STOP 1A4 STOP
the module 2B3 DOG 2A3 DOG 1B3 DOG 1A3 DOG
2B2 RLS 2A2 RLS 1B2 RLS 1A2 RLS
2B1 FLS 2A1 FLS 1B1 FLS 1A1 FLS
1: Pin No. "1 " indicates the pin No. for the right connector. Pin No. "2 " indicates the pin No. for the left connector.
2: When a 1-axis module is used, pin Nos. 1B1 to 1B18 are "No connect".
3: For 1- and 2-axis modules do not have the AX3 and AX4 connectors on the left side.
7-39
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,
Model
Item
No. of control axes 1 axis 2 axes 4 axes
2-axis linear interpolation
Interpolation function None interpolation
PTP (Point To Point) control, path control (both linear and arc can be set), speed control,
Control system
speed-position switching control, position-speed switching control
Control unit mm, inch, degree, PLS
600 data (positioning data Nos. 1 to 600)/axis
Positioning data
(Can be set with peripheral device or sequence program.)
Parameters, positioning data, and block start data can be saved on flash ROM
Backup
(battery-less backup)
PTP control: Incremental system/absolute system
Speed-position switching control: Incremental system/absolute system 1
Positioning system
Position-speed switching control: Incremental system
Path control: Incremental system/absolute system
In absolute system
• –214748364.8 to 214748364.7 ( m)
• –21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (inch)
• 0 to 359.99999 (degree)
• –2147483648 to 2147483647 (PLS)
In incremental system
• –214748364.8 to 214748364.7 ( m)
• –21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (inch)
Positioning range • –21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (degree)
• –2147483648 to 2147483647 (PLS)
In speed-position switching control (INC mode) / position-speed switching control
Positioning • 0 to 214748364.7 ( m)
• 0 to 21474.83647 (inch)
• 0 to 21474.83647 (degree)
• 0 to 2147483647 (PLS)
In speed-position switching control (ABS mode) 1
• 0 to 359.99999 (degree)
0.01 to 20000000.00 (mm/min)
0.001 to 2000000.000 (inch/min)
Speed command
0.001 to 2000000.000 (degree/min)
1 to 10000000 (PLS/s)
Acceleration/
Automatic trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration
deceleration process
Acceleration/ 1 to 8388608 (ms)
deceleration time Four patterns can be set for each of acceleration time and deceleration time
Sudden stop
1 to 8388608 (ms)
deceleration time
1-axis linear control 6 Factors in starting time extension
1-axis speed control 6 The following times will be added to
2-axis linear interpolation control (Composite speed) 7 the starting time in the described
2-axis linear interpolation control (Reference axis speed) 7 conditions:
2-axis circular interpolation control 7 • S-pattern acceleration/
2-axis speed control 6 deceleration is selected: 0.5
Starting time (ms) 2
• Other axis is in
3-axis linear interpolation control (Composite speed) 7
operation: 1.5
3-axis linear interpolation control (Reference axis speed) 7 • During continuous
3-axis speed control 6 positioning control: 0.2
4-axis linear interpolation control 7 • During continuous path
4-axis speed control 7 control: 1.0
0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less (for A6CON1, A6CON4), AWG #24 to 28 (for A6CON2)
Applicable wire size
AWG #28 (Twisted wire)/ AWG #30 (Solid wire) (for A6CON3)
Applicable connector for external A6CON1, A6CON2, A6CON3, A6CON4
device (sold separately)
1: In speed-position switching control (ABS mode), the control unit available is "degree" only.
2: Using the "Pre-reading start function", the virtual start time can be shortened.
7-40
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,
Model
Item
• Connection between MR--H-BN/MR-H-BN4 and MR-H-BN/MR-H-BN4
MR-HBUS M (0.5m (1.64ft.), 1m (3.28ft.), 5m (16.4ft.))
• MR-HBCNS: connector set (sold separately)
• Connection between QD75M and
(MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/MR-J2-03B5/MR-J2M-B)
• Connection between (MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/MR-J2-03B5/MR-J2M-B) and
MR-J2HBUS M
SSCNET cable (MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/MR-J2-03B5/MR-J2M-B).
(0.5m (1.64ft.), 1m (3.28ft.), 5m (16.4ft.))
• MR-J2CN1: connector set (sold separately)
• Connection between QD75M /MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/MR-J2-03B5/MR-J2M-B
and MR-H-BN/MR-H-BN4.
MR-J2HBUS M-A
(0.5m (1.64ft.), 1m (3.28ft.), 5m (16.4ft.))
• MR-J2CN1-A: connector set (sold separately)
SSCNET cable over all length (m) 30 7
Internal current consumption
QD75M1: 0.40A QD75M2: 0.40A QD75M4: 0.40A
(5VDC)
Flash ROM write count Max. 100000 times
No. of occupied I/O points
32 (I/O assignment: 32 points for intelligent function module)
(points)
Outline dimensions
98 (3.86)(H) 27.4 (1.08)(W) 90 (3.54)(D)
(mm(inch))
Weight (kg) 0.15 0.15 0.16
3 Provide a 70mm clearance under the QD75 to give room for wiring the SCNET cable.

Rated input Working voltage ON OFF Response
Signal name Input resistance
voltage/current range voltage/current voltage/current time
Upper limit signal (FLS) 17.5VDC or
19.2 to 7VDC or less/
Lower limit signal (RLS) 24VDC/5mA more/ Approx. 6.8kΩ 4ms or less
26.4VDC 1.0mA or less
Stop signal (STOP) 3.5mA or more
1 Pulse width
2ms or more
Manual pulse generator A
phase (PULSE 1ms
GENERATOR A) or more
Manual pulse generator B 1ms or more
phase (Duty ratio: 50%)
(PULSE GENERATOR B) 2 Phase difference
A phase When the A phase leads the B phase, the

positioning address (current value) increases.
B phase
0.5ms or more
Near-point dog signal (DOG) 17.5VDC or
19.2 to 7VDC or less/
External command signal 24VDC/5mA more/ Approx. 6.8kΩ 1ms or less
26.4VDC 1.0mA or less
(CHG) 3.5mA or more
7-41
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER,

QD75 PLC CPU PLC CPU QD75 <Accessories>
X0 QD75 READY Y0 PLC READY Product Description
X1 Synchronization flag Y1 All axis servo ON Manual Type QD75M Positioning Module User's Manual
(Hardware)
X2 Y2
Use prohibited Use prohibited
X3 Y3 <Separately obtained products>
X4 Axis 1 Y4 Axis 1
Product Description
X5 Axis 2 M code Y5 Axis 2 Manual Type QD75M Positioning Module User's Manual (Details)
Axis stop
X6 Axis 3 ON Y6 Axis 3 Connector External wiring connector
X7 Axis 4 Y7 Axis 4 A6CON1, A6CON2, A6CON3, A6CON4
Forward SSCNET Cable For connection of
X8 Axis 1 Y8 Axis 1 run JOG QD75M /MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/M
start R-J2-03B5/MR-J2M-B and
Reverse MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/MR-J2-03B5/
X9 Axis 2 Y9 Axis 1 run JOG MR-J2HBUS M MR-J2M-B
Error start (cable length 0.5m (1.64ft.), 1m
detection Forward (3.28ft.), 5m (16.4ft.))
XA Axis 3 YA Axis 2 run JOG
MR-J2CN1: Connector set
start
(sold separately)
Reverse
XB Axis 4 YB Axis 2 run JOG For connection of
start QD75M /MR-J2-B/MR-J2S-B/M
Forward R-J2-03B5/MR-J2M-B and
XC Axis 1 YC Axis 3 run JOG MR-H-BN/MR-H-BN4
MR-J2HBUS M-A
start (cable length 0.5m (1.64ft.), 1m
Reverse (3.28ft.), 5m (16.4ft.))
XD Axis 2 YD Axis 3 run JOG MR-J2CN1-A: Connector set
start (sold separately)
BUSY
Forward
For connection of
XE Axis 3 YE Axis 4 run JOG
start MR-H-BN/MR-H-BN4 and
Reverse MR-H-BN/MR-H-BN4
XF Axis 4 YF Axis 4 run JOG MR-HBUS M (cable length 0.5m (1.64ft.), 1m
start (3.28ft.), 5m (16.4ft.))
X10 Axis 1 Y10 Axis 1 MR-HBCNS: Connector set
(sold separately)
X11 Axis 2 Start Y11 Axis 2 Positioning
Compatible MR-H-BN, MR-H BN, MR-J2S- B, MR-J2- B,
X12 Axis 3 complete Y12 Axis 3 Start
servo amplifier MR-J2-03B5, MR-J2M-B
Note 1: The external wiring connector and SSCNET cable are not
X14 Axis 1 Y14 Axis 1 packed with the product. Therefore, they need to be
X15 Axis 2 Y15 Axis 2 Execution
Positioning
prohibition obtained separately.
X16 Axis 3 complete Y16 Axis 3 flag <Supported software packages>
The following table lists the compatibility between the
X18 Y18
systems using the QD75 and the software packages. GX
X19 Y19
Developer is required for use of the QD75.
X1A Y1A
X1B Y1B Software version
Use prohibited Use prohibited
X1C Y1C GX Developer GX Configurator-QP
X1D Y1D If mounted with
Version 4 or Version 2.00A or
X1E Y1E Q02/Q02H/Q06H/Q
more more
X1F Y1F 12H/Q25HCPU
The I/O numbers (X/Y) and I/O addresses indicated in the above If mounted with Version 7 or Version 2.10L or
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU more more
table assume that the QD75M1/M2/M4 is mounted on I/O slot 0 of
If mounted with Version 7.10L or Version 2.13P or
the main base unit. Q12PH/Q25PHCPU more more
multiple PLC system more
Version 2.00A or
If mounted in a more
Version 6 or
MELSECNET/H
more
remote I/O station
on the system monitor of GX Developer.
7-42
HIGH-SPEED
7.8 Positioning Module COUNTER,
Setting/Monitoring Tool for QD75: POSITIONING
GX Configurator-QP MODULES
Overview Compatibility with QD75M SSCNET-connection

positioning module
Setting of various parameters and positioning data,
The software is compatible with the QD75M1, QD75M2
monitoring the control status, and conducting operational
tests for the QD75, can be done. and QD75M4 positioning modules in the SSCNET
connection system using high-speed serial
Features communication.
Windows compatibility ensures outstanding SSCNET : Servo System Controller Network
operability <Sampling monitoring examples>

You can cut, copy, and paste positioning data and
simultaneously start data efficiently. Also data created for
MicrosoftExcel for use as positioning data can be copied.
Ease of checking wiring connections
In this software, you can check the status of I/O wiring
connected to the QD75. You can also start the system
efficiently by initializing the QD75 or performing JOG
operation.
Full line of functions assists debugging and 8
maintenance
The module has a full line up of functions, e.g. to perform
(offline) simulation based on the preset positioning data,
and monitoring functions useful for debugging and
maintenance i.e. sampling monitoring which shows the
positioning module I/O signals, external I/O signals and
buffer memory status in the form of a timing chart.
<Simulation example>
Simultaneous monitoring of sequence programs

Combined with GX Developer, GX Configurator enables
efficient debugging.
<Example of simultaneously starting GX Configurator-QP
and GX Developer>
7-43
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER, 7.8 Positioning Module
POSITIONING Setting/Monitoring Tool for QD75:
MODULES GX Configurator-QP
Functions Operating Environment

Function Description Item Description
Parameter setting Sets parameters of each axis. Personal computer Pentium 133MHz or higher IBM-PC/AT
Servo parameter Set the parameters of the servo compatible personal computer installed with
setting 1 amplifier on each axis. applicable OS
Positioning data setting Sets positioning data. Operating system Microsoft Windows2000 Professional
software Operating System,
Positioning data monitor Monitors the positioning data
Microsoft WindowsMillennium Edition
online.
Operating System
Positioning data test Tests operation of positioning
Microsoft Windows95 Operating System,
control.
Microsoft Windows98 Operating System
Teaching Sets axis to address of positioning
Microsoft Windows NT workstation 4.0
data by teaching operation.
Edit
Operating System
M code comment setting Sets comment to M code.
Required memory Recommended 32MB or more
Simulation Performs offline/real-time
Hard disk 40Mbyte or more free space needed
simulation.
Disk drive CD-ROM drive required
Block start data setting Sets block start data.
Display Resolution 800 600 pixels or more
Block start data monitor Monitors point under positioning
control. 3 Pentium150MHz or more is recommended when using
Block start data test Tests operation of positioning Microsoft Windows Me Operating System.
control from block start point.
Condition data setting Sets start conditions of Connection with QD75
simultaneous start data.
Operation monitor Monitors operating states such as
When set data is downloaded to the QD75 or the
feed current value, axis feed-rate
and axis status. operating status is monitored, GX Configurator-QP is not
History monitor Monitors error, warning, start and directly connected to the QD75. Since GX
error-time start history.
Configurator-QP and QD75 make data communications
Signal monitor Monitors X/Y devices, external
signals and status signals. via the Q mode CPU module, the personal computer
Axis operation monitor Monitors control status, preset installed with GX Configurator-QP is connected to the Q
parameters, etc.
Monitoring
mode CPU module by RS-232 or USB.

Servo monitor 1 Monitor the states of the servo
amplifiers and servo motors on all For the RS-232 and USB cables, refer to the explanation
axes. section of "Programming"-"Peripheral Devices".
Operation test Tests positioning data
number-specified start, current Separately Obtained Product
value changing, speed changing,
OPR, JOG operation and manual Product Description
pulse generator operation.
Manual GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual
Sampling monitor Simultaneously samples and
monitors specified signals and Note 1: The PDF format data of the same contents as those of the
buffer memory.
above manual are included in the CD-ROM of GX
Checking connect 2 Initializes QD75 and displays
Configurator-QP.
Connection
diagnostics
signals from external devices.

Also performs initial operation test
by JOG operation.
1 QD75M1, QD75M2 and QD75M4 only.

2 Not applicable for QD75M1, QD75M2 and QD75M4.
7-44
8.1 Current Consumption Calculation
Overview 5VDC Current
CPU Module Type
Consumption
The PLC system operates on 5VDC supplied from the
Process CPU Q12PHCPU 0.64A
power supply module.
Q25PHCPU
The sum of 5VDC current consumption values of the CPU, Motion CPU Q172CPUN 1.14A
I/O, intelligent function and network modules mounted on (without fan)
one base unit should not exceed the rated output current Q173CPUN 1.25A
of the power supply module. If so, the number of modules (without fan)
to be mounted on the base unit must be reduced. Q172CPU(with fan) 1.62A
Q173CPU(with fan) 1.75A
The Q52B or Q55B extension bases take their 5VDC
PC CPU PPC-CPU686(MS)-64 3.00A
power supply from the main base unit power supply
module PPC-CPU686(MS)-128 3.00A
module through an extension cable. Therefore, take care
It does not include current consumption from peripherals:
that the sum of the current consumption values of the
(PC card, USB equipments, keyboard, mouse, connector
modules mounted on the main base unit and Q52B/Q55B terminal, etc.)
and the current consumption values of the base units does
not exceed the rated output current of the power supply Calculation Method
module on the main base unit. If the rated output current of
Make sure that the current consumption is within the limits
8
the power supply module is exceeded, use the Q6 B
as shown in the following expression.
extension base unit, which includes its own power supply
(Rated output current of power supply module) (sum
module. When a multi PLC system is configured, the
of 5VDC current consumption values of modules)
number of I/O and intelligent function modules that can be
mounted on the main base decreases since modules Power supply module, Base unit, e.g. Q35B, Q55B,
e.g. Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2 Q65B
consuming large currents, e.g. the CPU module, Process
CPU, motion CPU and PC CPU module, are used CPU module,
e.g. Q02CPU, Q06HCPU
together.
I/O module, e.g. QX10, QY10
Intelligent function module,

e.g. Q64AD, Q62DA
Peripheral device
e.g. EPU01 1
1 The EPU01 is the product of
Mitsubishi Electric Engineering
Co., Ltd.
Refer to "Applicable Equipment List" for the current

consumption value of each module.
(Calculation example)
System configuration Base unit: Q312B
Output module
Output module
Output module
Output module
Output module
module
module
QY10
QY10
QY10
QY10
QY10
Q64AD
Q62DA
Power supply module
Input module
Input module
Input module
Input module
Input module
Q61P-A1
CPU module
QX10
QX10
QX10
QX10
QX10
Q02CPU
8-1
CURRENT
CONSUMPTION
8.1 Current Consumption Calculation
Rated output current of power supply module As the CPU module and motion CPU can be mounted on
Type 5VDC Rated Output Current the main base only, mount the QX10, QY10, Q64AD and
Q61P-A1 6.0A Q62DA on the extension base(s).
When the Q64P (5VDC rated output current: 8.5A) is
5VDC current consumption of each module
used, all the above modules can be mounted on the main
5VDC Current
Type Module Type
Consumption base (Q38B).
Q02CPU CPU module 0.600A
Q312B Base unit 0.121A
Rated output current of power supply module
QX10 Input module 0.050A
Type 5VDC Rated Output Current
QY10 Output module 0.430A
Q61P-A1 6.0A
Analog to digital
Q64AD 0.630A
conversion module
Q62DA
Digital to analog
0.330A 5VDC current consumption of each module
conversion module
5VDC Current
Sum of 5VDC current consumption values Type Module Type
Consumption
=0.60+0.121+(0.050 5)+(0.430 5)+0.63+0.33 Q25HCPU CPU module 0.640A
4.08(A) Q173CPU CPU module 1.750A
Rated output current of Q61P-A1 [6(A)] Q33B Base unit 0.105A
> sum of 5VDC current consumption values [4.08(A)] Q65B Base unit 0.110A
Hence, this system has no problem with current
consumption.
Analog to digital
Q64AD 0.630A
(Calculation example for multi PLC system) conversion module
Digital to analog
Q62DA 0.330A
System configuration Base unit : Q38B conversion module
Sum of 5VDC current consumption values of main base

Q25HCPU
CPU module
Q173CPU
Motion CPU
Q173CPU
Motion CPU
Q173CPU
Motion CPU
QX10
Input module
QX10
Input module
QY10
Output module
Q64AD
module
Q62DA
module
Q61P-A1
Power supply module
=0.64+(1.75 3)+0.105
6.00(A)
Rated output current of Q61P-A1 [6(A)]
sum of 5VDC current consumption values [6.00(A)]
Rated output current of power supply module
Sum of 5VDC current consumption values of extension
Type 5VDC Rated Output Current base
Q61P-A1 6.0A
=0.110+(0.050 2)+0.430+0.63+0.33
5VDC current consumption of each module =1.60(A)
5VDC Current Rated output current of Q61P-A1 [6(A)]
Type Module Type
Consumption
Q25HCPU CPU module 0.640A > sum of 5VDC current consumption values [1.60(A)]
Q173CPU CPU module 1.750A Hence, this system has no problem with current
Q38B Base unit 0.114A consumption.
Analog to digital
Q64AD 0.630A
conversion module
Digital to analog
Q62DA 0.330A
conversion module
Sum of 5VDC current consumption values

=0.64+(1.75 3)+0.114+(0.050 2)+0.430+0.63
+0.33
7.49(A)
Rated output current of Q61P-A1 [6(A)]
< sum of 5VDC current consumption values [7.49(A)]
From the example above, the system current consumption
exceeds the rated output for Q61P-A1 of 6A. Therefore
all the modules cannot be mounted on the main base.
8-2
9.1 Power Supply Modules: Q61SP, Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2,
Q62P, Q63P, Q64P, A1S61PN, A1S62PN, A1S63P
Overview
The power supply module is designed to supply 5VDC to each PLC module mounted on the base unit.
Note that the power supply module type that can be mounted depends on the base unit.
For the Q Series modules, only the Q61SP slim type power supply module is applicable with the Q3 SB slim type main
base unit. Select the Q61P-A , Q62P, Q63P or Q64P power supply modules for the Q3 B or Q6 B base unit.
The QA1S6 B base unit should be used together with the A1S61PN, A1S62PN or A1S63P power supply module, since it
is applicable with AnS Series modules only.
Item Q61SP Q61P-A1 Q61P-A2 Q62P Q64P Q63P
Base loading Power supply module loading slot
position
Applicable base unit Q3 SB Q3 B, Q6 B
Input power supply AC power supply DC power supply
100 to 240VAC 100 to 120VAC 200 to 240VAC 100 to 240VAC 100 to 120VAC /200 24V DC
+10%/-15% +10%/-15% +10%/-15% +10%/-15% to 240VAC +30%/-35%
(85 to 264VAC) (85 to 132VAC) (170 to 264VAC) (85 to 264VAC) +10%/-15% (15.6 to 31.2VDC)
(85 to 132VAC/170 to
264VAC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz 5% ——
Input voltage Within 5% ——
distortion factor 1 9
Max. input apparent 40VA 105VA 160VA ——
power
Max. input power —— 45W
Inrush current 20A within 8ms 100A within 1ms
Rated 5VDC 2A 6A 3A 8.5A 6A
output 24VDC —— 0.6A ——
current
External output —— 24VDC 10% ——
voltage
Overcurrent 5VDC 2.2A or more 6.6A or more 3.3A or more 9.9A or more 6.6A or more
protection 24VDC —— 0.66A or more ——
2
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
protection 24VDC ——
3
Efficiency 70% or more 65% or more 70% or more
Permissible Within 20ms Within 20ms Within 10ms
instantaneous power (at 100VAC input) (at 24VDC input)
failure time 4
Dielectric withstand Across inputs/LG and outputs/FG 500VAC across
voltage 2,830VAC rms/3 cycles (2000 m (6562 ft.)) primary and 5VDC
Insulation resistance Inputs-outputs (LG/FG separated), inputs-LG/FG, outputs-LG/FG 10M or more by
10M or more by 500VDC insulation resistance tester insulation resistance
tester
Noise immunity By noise simulator of 1,500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency By noise simulator
Noise voltage IEC61000-4-4, 2kV of 500Vp-p noise
voltage, 1 s noise
width and 25 to
60Hz noise
frequency
Operation indication LED indication (lit at 5VDC output)
Fuse Built-in (Unchangeable by user)
Application ERR contact (contact switched off (opened: b contact) at an error stop of CPU module), for CPU module operating status output
Contact output
Rated 24VDC, 0.5A

switching
section
voltage/current
Minimum 5VDC, 1mA
switching load
Response time OFF to ON: 10ms max. ON to OFF: 12ms max.
9-1
POWER
SUPPLY 9.1 Power Supply Modules: Q61SP,
MODULES Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q62P, Q63P,
Q64P,A1S61PN, A1S62PN, A1S63P

Item Q61SP Q61P-A1 Q61P-A2 Q62P Q64P Q63P
Life Mechanical : More than 2 million times
Electrical : More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage/current
Contact
section
output
Surge No
suppressor
Fuse No
Terminal screw size M3.5 screw
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable crimping RAV1.25 to 3.5, RAV2 to 3.5
terminal
Applicable tightening 66 to 89N cm 59 to 88N cm
torque
External H 98mm (3.86inch)
dimensions W 27.4mm (1.08inch) 55.2mm (2.17inch)
D 104mm (4.09inch) 90mm (3.54inch) 115mm (4.53inch) 90mm (3.54inch)
Weight 0.18kg 0.31kg 0.39kg 0.40kg 0.33kg
Item A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P

Base loading Power supply module loading slot
position
Applicable base unit QA1S6 B
Input power supply AC power supply DC power supply
100 to 240VAC 24VDC
+10%/-15% +30%/-35%
(85 to 264VAC) (15.6 to 31.2VDC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz 5% ——
Input voltage Within 5%
distortion factor 1
Max. input apparent 105VA ——
power
Max. input power —— 41W
Inrush current 20A within 8ms 81A within 1ms
Rated 5VDC 5A 3A 5A
output 24VDC —— 0.6A ——
current
Overcurrent 5VDC 5.5A 3.3A or more 5.5A or more
protection 24VDC —— 0.66A or more ——
2
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
protection 24VDC ——
3
Efficiency 65% or more
Permissible Within 20ms Within 10ms
instantaneous power (at 24VDC input)
failure time 4
Dielectric withstand Across inputs/LG and outputs/FG 500VAC across primary and 5VDC
voltage 2,830VAC rms/3 cycles (2000 m (6562 ft.))
Insulation resistance Inputs-outputs (LG/FG separated), inputs-LG/FG, outputs-LG/FG 5M or more by insulation resistance
10M or more by 500VDC insulation resistance tester tester
Noise immunity By noise simulator of 1,500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise By noise simulator of 500Vp-p noise
frequency voltage, 1 s noise width and 25 to 60Hz
Noise voltage IEC61000-4-4, 2kV noise frequency
Operation indication LED indication (lit at 5VDC output)
Fuse Built-in (Unchangeable by user)
Contact output No
section
Terminal screw size M3.5 screw
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable crimping RAV1.25 to 3.5, RAV2 to 3.5
terminal
Applicable tightening 59 to 78N cm
torque
External H 130mm (5.12inch)
dimensions W 55mm (2.17inch)
D 93.6mm (3.69inch)
9-2
POWER
9.1 Power Supply Modules: Q61SP, SUPPLY
Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q62P, Q63P, MODULES
POINTS
1: Input voltage distortion rate
When connecting the QCPU system with an uninterruptible power supply (UPS), use an on-line system (UPS) with
a voltage distortion rate of 5% or less.
Do not use an off-line system UPS.
2: Overcurrent protection
If the current flowing in the circuit exceeds the specified value, the overcurrent protection device disables off the
5 V, 24 VDC circuit, which stops the system. When this device is activated, the power supply module LED is
either switched OFF or dimly lit. If this occurs, eliminate the cause of the overcurrent and then restart the system.
.
3: Overvoltage protection
If the voltage in the circuit exceeds 5.5 to 6.5 V, the overvoltage protection device disables the 5 VDC
circuit, which stops the system. When this device is activated, the power supply module LED is switched
OFF. If this occurs, switch the input power OFF, then ON to restart the system. However, if the system
does not restart and the LED remains OFF, the power supply module must be changed.
4: Permissible instantaneous power failure time
(1) For AC input power supply
! An instantaneous power failure lasting less than 20ms will cause detection of AC down, however operation will 9
still continue.
! An instantaneous power failure lasting more than 20ms may cause the operation to continue or restart
depending on the amount of load on the power supply.
Also, by using the same AC power supply for the AC input module and the power supply module,
the input to the AC input module might still be ON even though the power supply module is OFF.
This is due to the capacitor inside the power supply module still providing current to the external
input sensor.
If only the AC input module is connected to the AC power supply, the AC down detection circuit may be
delayed, due to the capacitor inside the AC input module still providing current to this circuit even
when the AC power supply is OFF. Therefore, connect a load of approx. 30mA per QX10 unit to the AC
line.
(2) For DC input power supply
! An instantaneous power failure lasting less than 10ms ( 1) will cause detection of 24VDC down, however
operation will still continue.
! An instantaneous power failure lasting more than 10ms ( 1) may cause the operation to continue or restart
depending on the power supply load.
( 1: This is for a 24VDC input. Therefore, will be less than 10ms if less than 24VDC.)
9-3
POWER
Appearance and Wiring/Q61SP

Appearance Wiring
(See CHAPTER 13 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS.)
External wiring
Terminal Q61SP Description
Q61SP POWER Output that turns the
contact (opens:
INPUT Q61SP
ERR ERR
100-240VAC
normally closed
50/60Hz 40VA ERR
OUTPUT 5VDC 2A
Load contact) OFF when the
ERR. terminal
24VDC
0.5A 24VDC 0.5A CPU detects an error.
ERR ERR
The contact is normally
common common ON.
Ground terminals
(FG) FG FG
(LG)
LG LG
100 to Power input terminal

INPUT N
100-
240V 240VAC
AC MITSUBISHI
INPUT
100 to
L
AC power supply 240VAC
9-4
POWER
Appearance and Wiring/Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q62P, Q63P, Q64P

Appearance
MELSEC
Q61P-A1 POWER
PULL
MITSUBISHI
Wiring
External wiring
Terminal Q61P-A1 Q61P-A2 Q62P Q63P Q64P Description
Output that turns
ERR ERR the contact
Load ERR (opens: normally
24DVC 0.5A terminal

closed contact)
OFF when the
9
ERR
ERR common CPU detects an
common
error.
Ground terminals
FG FG
LG LG
200 to 100 to 24VDC 100 to 120VAC Power input

N/ +24V 100 to 120VAC
240VAC 240VAC (+24V) /200 to 240VAC terminal
INPUT
200 to 100 to 24VDC 100 to 120VAC
L/ 24G 100 to 120VAC
AC power supply or 240VAC 240VAC (24G) /200 to 240VAC
DC power supply 24VDC 0.6A
+24V +24V
24G terminal of Q62P output terminal.
is used to supply required Provided for
power to the module that 24G 24G
Q62P only.
needs 24VDC. (Supplied
to the module through
external wiring)
9-5
POWER
Appearance and Wiring/A1S61PN, A1S62PN, A1S63P

Appearance
MELSEC A1S62PN
POWER
MITSUBISHI
INPUT OUTPUT
100-240VAC 5VDC 3A
105VA
50/60Hz 24VDC 0.6A
Wiring
External wiring
Terminal A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P Description
For the A1S62PN, they
24G terminal of Q62P +24V/NC NC +24V NC are 24VDC 0.6A output
is used to supply required terminal.
power to the module that For the A1S61PN or
needs 24V DC. (Supplied 24G/NC NC 24G NC A1S63P, NC is an empty
to the module through terminal.
external wiring)
FG and LG are ground
FG FG
terminals.
NC is an empty
FG/NC FG NC
terminal.
LG/NC LG NC
LG LG
100 to 240VAC/ 100 to 100 to 24VDC Power input terminal

+24V 240VAC 240VAC (+24V)
INPUT
100 to 240VAC/ 100 to 100 to 24VDC
AC power supply or 24G 240VAC 240VAC (24G)
DC power supply
9-6
POWER
Wiring Instructions
(1) Wire the power supply module correctly after checking the rated voltage and terminal layout of the product.
(2) The Q61P-A1 is only for 100VAC input. Note that it will become faulty if an input of 200VAC is applied.
(3) The Q64P switches the input range between 100VAC and 200VAC automatically. Therefore, it cannot work on
intermediate voltage (133 to 169VAC). If the intermediate voltage is applied, the CPU module may not work correctly.
(4) Do not wire the empty terminals printed as "NC" on the terminal block.
(5) When grounding the LG and FG ground terminals to the protective earth conductor, be sure to carryout at least D type
(class 3) grounding with the protective ground conductor exclusive to PLC.
(6) Tighten the terminal screws to the specified torque.
(7) The customer cannot replace the fuse. Please consult your local Mitsubishi service or representative for replacing the
fuse.
(8) Take care so that the sum of the 5VDC current consumption values of the modules mounted on the base units and the
current consumption values of the base units, do not exceed the rated output current of the power supply module.
When using the Q52B or Q55B, take care so that the sum of the current consumption values of the modules mounted
on the main base unit and Q52B/Q55B and the current consumption values of the base units does not exceed the
rated output current of the power supply module on the main base.
(9) Use the ERR contact as required. It need not be wired if the ERR external output is unnecessary.
(10)The ERR contact is valid for only the power supply module on the main base unit. The ERR contact of the power
9
supply module on the extension base is always OFF.
9-7
MEMO
10. BASE UNITS
10.1 Base Units: Q3 SB, Q3 B, Q5 B. Q6 B,
QA1S6 B, QA65B
Overview Extension base unit
(Requiring power supply module)
The base unit is used to supply the CPU, I/O and Type Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B
intelligent function modules with 5VDC from the power Number of I/O modules 3 5 8 12
supply module. It’s also used to exchange control data mounted
among the CPU, I/O and intelligent function modules via Extension possibilities. Extendable.
Applicable power Q61P-A ,Q62P,Q63P,Q64P
the BUS. supply module
Applicable module Q Series module
Product List 5VDC Internal current 0.105A 0.110A 0.114A 0.121A
consumption
Mounting hole size M4 screw type or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)
Slim type main base unit External H 98mm(3.86inch)
Type Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB dimensions W 189mm 245mm 328mm 439mm
Number of I/O modules 2 3 5 (7.44inch) (9.65inch) (12.91inch) (17.28inch)
D 44.1mm(1.74inch)
mounted
Extension possibilities. Not extendable. Accessories 4-M4 14 base unit mounting screws
Applicable power Q61SP (DIN rail mounting adaptor is sold separately)
supply module DIN rail mounting Q6DIN3 Q6DIN2 Q6DIN1
adaptor type
Applicable module Q Series module
5VDC Internal current 0.086A 0.086A 0.091A Extension base unit
consumption (Not requiring power supply module)
Mounting hole size M4 screw type or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw) Type Q52B Q55B
External H 98mm(3.86inch) Number of I/O modules 2 5
dimensions W 114mm 142mm 198mm mounted
Extension possibilities. Extendable.
(4.49inch) (5.59inch) (7.80inch)
Applicable power Q Series module
D 18.5mm(0.73inch) supply module
Weight 0.12kg 0.15kg 0.21kg 5VDC Internal current 0.080A 0.100A
Accessories QCPU(Q mode) User's Manual (Hardware) consumption
Mounting hole size M4 screw type or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)
Slim type main base unit mounting screw
(black) M4 12, 4 of.)
External H 98mm(3.86inch) 10
dimensions W 106mm(4.17inch) 189mm(7.44inch)
(DIN rail mounting adaptor is sold separately) D 44.1mm(1.74inch)
DIN rail mounting Q6DIN3 Weight 0.14kg 0.23kg
adaptor type Accessories 4-M4 14 base unit mounting screws
(DIN rail mounting adaptor is sold separately)
DIN rail mounting Q6DIN3
Main base unit adaptor type
Type Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B
Extension base unit
Number of I/O modules 3 5 8 12
(For A, AnS modules, requiring power supply
mounted
module)
Extension possibilities. Extendable.
Type QA1S65B QA1S68B QA65B
Applicable power Q61P-A ,Q62P,Q63P,Q64P Number of I/O modules 5 8 5
supply module mounted
Applicable module Q Series module Extension possibilities. Extendable.
Applicable power A1S61PN,A1S62PN, A61P,A62P,A63P,
5VDC Internal current 0.105A 0.110A 0.114A 0.121A supply module A1S63PN A65P,A67P,
consumption A61PEU,A62PEU
Mounting hole size M4 screw type or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw) Applicable module AnS Series module (Note 1) A Series module
(Note 1)
External H 98mm(3.86inch) 5VDC Internal current 0.117A 0.118A 0.117A
dimensions W 189mm 245mm 328mm 439mm consumption
(7.44inch) (9.65inch) (12.91inch) (17.28inch) Mounting hole size M4 screw type or 5.5 hole (for M4 screw)
External H 130mm(5.12inch) 250mm(9.84inch)
D 44.1mm(1.74inch) dimensions W 315mm 420mm 352mm
Weight 0.21kg 0.25kg 0.35kg 0.45kg (12.40inch) (16.54inch) (13.86inch)
Accessories QCPU(Q mode) User's Manual (Hardware) D 51.2mm(2.02inch) 46.6mm(1.83inch)
4- M4 14 base unit mounting screws
Accessories 4-M5 25 base unit QA65B Extension
(DIN rail mounting adaptor is sold separately) mounting screws Base Unit User's
DIN rail mounting Q6DIN3 Q6DIN2 Q6DIN1 Manual
4-M5 25 base
adaptor type unit mounting
screws
DIN rail mounting DIN rail hooks are included Cannot be
adaptor type as standard equipment. mounted to DIN
(DIN rail mounting adaptor rail.
unnecessary)
Note 1: Some modules are not compatible with the base unit.
See the applicable model list of the corresponding CPU in
Chapter 3.
10-1
v
BASE
UNITS 10.1 Base Units: Q3 SB, Q3 B,
Q5 B. Q6 B, QA1S6 B, QA65B
Handling instructions The Q52B or Q55B can be used when the calculated
sum of the current consumption values is equal to or
(1) The mounting screws on the right-hand side of the
less than the rated output current of the power supply
base unit cannot be removed when an I/O module is
module mounted on the main base unit.
mounted in its right-most slot. Remove the mounting
Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.1 for details of calculating
screws after removing the I/O module.
the current consumption values.
(2) When installing the base unit into a control panel, etc.,
(2) Receiving port voltage
leave a 30mm (1.18inch) or more clearance between
Voltage drops occur at extension cables since the
its top and the structure or parts to ensure easy
Q52B or Q55B is supplied with 5VDC by the power
replacement of the module and reduce the influence of
supply module of the main base unit.
radiated noise or heat. (When the wiring duct is not
The Q52B or Q55B can be used when the receiving
more than 50mm (1.97inch) in height. 40mm (1.58inch)
port voltage (IN connector of Q52B or Q55B) is 4.75V
or more clearance for other cases.)
or more.
Also, leave 5mm (0.20inch) or more clearance in the
If the receiving port voltage supplied is less than 4.75V,
left to right direction, (20mm (0.79inch) or more
improper input/output will occur.
clearance on the left-hand side when an extension
Output current (I1+I2)
cable is plugged without removal of an adjacent unit. Main base unit
Voltage drops
When installing the slim type main base unit Q3 SB,
Power supply
at extension Current consumption I1 of main base

module
CPU
cables unit
ensure wiring space of 17mm or more, since the wiring (including current consumption
of main base unit)
of the power supply module comes out of the left hand
side of the unit. Extension base unit (Q65B)
Insulate the cable outer insulation layer with spiral tube

Power supply
module
for protection against damage caused by the structure,

equipment, or similar on the left-hand side.
(3) Mount the base unit on a flat surface to prevent Extension base unit (Q55B)
Current consumption I2 of extension base
possible bending of the printed circuit boards. unit
IN (including current consumption of extention
base unit)
Power Supply for Slim Type Main Base Unit
The Q3 SB slim type main base unit is applicable with the IN connector (4.75VDC or more)
Q61SP slim type power supply module only.

If the receiving port voltage is lower than 4.75V or the sum
It cannot work with the other power supply.
of the current consumption values of the main and
Extension Base Unit (Q52B, Q55B) extension base units exceed the output current of the power
Selection Standard supply module used, change the extension base unit to the
Q6 B equipped with a power supply module slot.
The Q52B or Q55B extension base unit supplies 5VDC
power to them from the power supply module on the main
base unit through an extension cable.
The following explains what to check when using the
Q52B or Q55B.
(1) Current consumption values of main base and
extension base unit (Q52B, Q55B)
Calculate the sum of the current consumption values of
the base units and the current consumption values of
the I/O and intelligent function modules mounted on the
main and extension base unit.
10-2
BASE
10.1 Base Units: Q3 SB, Q3 B, UNITS
Q5 B. Q6 B, QA1S6 B, QA65B
How to calculate receiving port voltage 5VDC current consumption values of the modules
Type Current Consumption
Selection standard Q25CPU 0.64A
The output voltage of the power supply module is preset to Q38B 0.114A
4.9V or higher. Q55B 0.100A
You can use the Q52B or Q55B if a voltage drop is not QX10 0.050A
higher than 0.15V (4.9V - 4.75V). QY10 0.430A
Voltage drop factors Q64AD 0.63A
Voltage drops include a voltage drop (VC) across Q62DA 0.33A
extension cable. (1) Sum of 5VDC current consumption values
Calculate the voltage drop across the extension cable
using the following expression: =0.64+0.050 4+0.430 4+0.63 2+0.33 3+0.114+
0.100
(resistance value of extension cable) (current value
5.02(A)
flowing in extension cable).
Since the sum of 5VDC current consumption values does
The following table indicates the resistance values of the not exceed 6A, the current consumption of this system has
extension cables.
no problems.
Type QC05B QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B
(2) Calculation of voltage drop (VC)
Resistance
0.044 0.051 0.082 0.172 0.273 0.530 Current consumption (I) of extension base
value
I=0.63+0.63+0.33+0.33+0.33+0.100
Checking the voltage drop =2.35(A)
You can use the Q52B or Q55B if the sum of voltage
drops of extension cables is not more than 0.15V. Voltage drop of extension cable
<Calculation example> VC= (current consumption of extension base) 10
System configuration (resistance value of extension cable)
Main base (Q38B) =2.35 0.051
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Slot number 0.120V
Since the voltage drop is not more than 1.5V, use of the
Q25HCPU
QX10
QX10
QX10
QX10
QY10
QY10
QY10
QY10
Q55B in this system has no problems.
Extension cable (QC06B)

Accessories
Extension base (Q55B)
8 9 10 11 12
The QCPU (Q Mode) User's Manual (Hardware) is
Q62DA
Q62DA
Q62DA
Q64AD
Q64AD
included with the Q3 SB slim type main base unit and

I Q3 B main base unit.
DIN Rail Mounting Adaptors

When mounting the Q3 SB, Q3 B, Q6 B or Q00JCPU
onto a DIN rail, the optional DIN rail mounting adaptor is
needed.
Type Applicable Base
Q6DIN1 Q38B, Q312B, Q68B, Q612B
Q6DIN2 Q35B, Q65B, Q00JCPU
Q6DIN3 Q3 SB, Q33B, Q52B, Q55B,
Q63B
Note that the QA1S6 B can be mounted onto a DIN rail as it is.
The QA65B is not compatible with the DIN rail.
10-3
11. ACCESSORIES
11.1 Accessories: Batteries, Cables, Connectors
and Terminal Blocks
Batteries Instructions
Overview (1) When these extension cables are used together, the
overall distance of the extension cables should be less
The Q6BAT battery should be installed into the CPU
than 13.2m (43.28ft.).
module or similar device to back up the built-in RAM
memory at power failure. (2) The QC05B extension cannot be used with the QA65B.
The Q2MEM-BAT battery is used to back-up the External Wiring Connectors for I/O Modules
Q2MEM-1MBS, Q2MEM-2MBS memory card, in the case
of a power failure. Overview
Mounted onto a connector type I/O module and used for
Appearance
wiring an external device. These connectors are classified
Q6BAT Q2MEM-BAT
into six different types according to the actual connectors
and I/O module types used.
Appearance
(See CHAPTER 13 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS for the
external dimensions.)
A6CON1, A6CON2, A6CON3, A6CON4
Specifications
Type Q6BAT Q2MEM-BAT
Nominal voltage 3VDC 3VDC
Battery type Manganese dioxide lithium Graphite fluoride
battery lithium battery
Current capacity 1800mAh 48mAh
Storage life 10 years (Note 1) 5 years (Note 1)
Applicable Q00J/Q00/Q01/Q02/Q02H/ Q2MEM-1MBS/
model Q06H/Q12H/Q25HCPU/ Q2MEM-2MBS
Q12PHCPU/Q25PHCPU
Note 1: The storage life indicates the life during which the battery
can be used independently of how much battery current is A6CON1E, A6CON2E, A6CON3E 11
consumed.
Extension Base Cables

Overview
An extension cable is used for connection between the
main and extension base, or only between the extension
bases.
Model list
Appearance
(See CHAPTER 13 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS for the A6CON1,
Type A6CON2 A6CON3
A6CON4
Connector type Soldering type Crimp-contact Pressure-displ
type acement type
(IDC)
Applicable Positive common (sink) type input module, sink
module type output module
Applicable wire 0.3mm2 AWG#24 to 28 AWG#28,
size (AWG#22) or (twisted wire),
less AWG#30
(single wire)
Model list
• Crimp-contact tool for A6CON2
Type QC05B QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B
Cable 0.45 0.6 1.2 3.0 5.0 10.0 FCN-363T-T005/H
length (1.48) (1.97) (3.93) (9.84) (16.39) (32.79) • Pressure-displacement (IDC) tool for A6CON3
(m (ft.)) (m (ft.)) (m (ft.)) (m (ft.)) (m (ft.)) (m (ft.))
Usable Main base unit (Q33B. Q35B, Q38B, Q312B) FCN-367T-T012/H (locator plate)
base Extension base unit (Q63B. Q65B, Q68B, Q612B, FCN-707T-T001/H (cable cutter)
unit Q52B, Q55B, QA1S65B, QA1S68B, QA65B)
Weight 0.15kg 0.16kg 0.22kg 0.40kg 0.60kg 1.11kg FCN-707T-T101/H (hand press)
11-1
ACCESSORIES
11.1 Accessories: Batteries, Cables,
Connectors and Terminal Blocks
Type A6CON1E A6CON2E A6CON3E Connector/Terminal Block Converter

Connector type Soldering type Crimp-contact Pressure-displ
Modules, Cables
type acement type
(IDC) Overview
Applicable Negative common (source) type input module,
The connector/terminal block converter module is
module source type output module
Applicable wire 0.3mm2 AWG#20 to 24 AWG#28, designed to convert the connector of the connector type
size (AWG#22) (twisted wire), I/O module into a terminal block to make external wiring
AWG#30 easier.
(single wire)
Simply plug one end of the dedicated cable to the
• Crimp-contact tool for A6CON2E connector of an I/O module, and plug the opposite side of
90312-1 the cable to the connector/terminal block module. Then
• Pressure-displacement (IDC) tool for A6CON3E use the connector/terminal block converter module for
91257-1 (die set) external wiring.
91220-1 (cable cutter) Appearance
91085-2 (hand mini-press) (See CHAPTER 13 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS for the
Model list
(1) Connector/terminal block converter modules
Type Description Weight (kg) Applicable Model
A6TBXY36 36 points, for sink type 0.4 Q series : QX41, QX41-S1, QX42, QX42-S1, QY41P, QY42P, QH42P
input/output modules. AnS series : A1SX41, A1SX41-S1, A1SX41-S2, A1SX42, A1SX42-S1,
(Standard type) A1SX42-S2, A1SX82, A1SX82-S1, A1SY41, A1SY42, A1SY82,
A6TBXY54 54 points, for sink type 0.5 A1SH42, A1SH42-S1
input/output modules. A series : AX42, AX42-S1, AY42, AY42-S1, AY42-S2, AY42-S3, AY42-S4,
(2-wire type) AH42
CC-Link : AJ65SBTCF1-32D, AJ65SBTCF1-32T, AJ65SBC1-32D,
AJ65SBC1-32T
MELSECNET-MINI : AJ35TC1-32D, AJ35TC1-32T
A6TBX70 70 points, for sink type 0.6 Q series : QX41, QX41-S1, QX42, QX42-S1, QH42P
input modules. AnS series : A1SX41, A1SX41-S1, A1SX41-S2, A1SX42, A1SX42-S1,
(3-wire type) A1SX42-S2, A1SX82, A1SX82-S1, A1SH42, A1SH42-S1
A series : AX42, AX42-S1, AH42
CC-Link : AJ65SBTCF1-32D, AJ65SBC1-32D
MELSECNET-MINI : AJ35TC1-32D
A6TBX36-E 36 points, for source 0.4 Q series : QX81
type input modules. AnS series : A1SX81, A1SX81-S1, A1SX81-S2
(Standard type) A series : AX82
A6TBX54-E 54 points, for source 0.4
type input modules.
(2-wire type)
A6TBX70-E 70 points, for source 0.5
type input modules.
(3-wire type)
A6TBY36-E 36 points, for source 0.5 Q series : QY81P
type output modules. AnS series : A1SY81
(Standard type) A series : AY82EP
A6TBY54-E 54 points, for source 0.6
type output modules.
(2-wire type)
11-2
ACCESSORIES
POINT Connector/terminal block converter module

connection diagrams
(1) The connection I/O points of the connector/terminal
block converter modules are all 32 points. (1) A6TBXY36
A 64-point I/O module requires two <When connecting an input module>
connector/terminal block converter modules and 24VDC
cables.
(2) Though the A1SX81 (S1/S2) is a combined sink/source
type module, only use the A6TBX36-E, A6TBX54-E or
A6TBX70-E.
The A6TBXY36, A6TBXY54 and A6TBX70 are
unusable.
(3) Though the A1SX82-S1 is a combined sink/source
type module, the A6TBXY36/XY54/X70 is applicable
only when it is used as a sink type configuration.
When it is used as a source type, the A6TBXY36/
XY54/X70 cannot be used.
(4) Though the A1SY82 is a source type output module,
use the A6TBXY36 or A6TBXY54.
The A6TBXY36-E or A6TBXY54-E is unusable.
(5) In the A series, a positive common input module is
described as a sink type input module and a
negative common input module as a source type
input module.
(6) When using the A6TBXY70 with an I/O mixed
module, use it on the input side.
<When connecting an output module>

(2) Cables
(a) Sink type
Type Description Weight (kg) Applicable Model 24VDC
AC05TB 0.5m (1.64ft.) for sink 0.17 A6TBXY36 11

type modules A6TBXY54
AC10TB 1m (3.28ft.) for sink 0.23 A6TBX70
type modules
AC20TB 2m (6.56ft.) for sink 0.37
type modules
(b) Source type
type modules Load
type modules
type modules
(common current not
exceeding 0.5 A)
AC100TB 10m (32.79ft.) for 1.5
sink type modules
(common current not
exceeding 0.5 A)
AC05TB-E 0.5m (1.64ft.) for 0.17 A6TBX36-E
source type modules A6TBY36-E
AC10TB-E 1m (3.28ft.) for 0.23 A6TBX54-E
source type modules A6TBY54-E
AC20TB-E 2m (6.56ft.) for 0.37 A6TBX70-E
source type modules
AC30TB-E 3m (9.84ft.) for 0.51
source type modules
AC50TB-E 5m (16.39ft.) for 0.76
source type modules
11-3
ACCESSORIES
(2) A6TBXY54 (4) A6TBX36-E

24VDC
<When connecting an input module>
24VDC
<When connecting an output module>

(a) Sink type
24VDC
(5) A6TBY36-E
24VDC
(b) Source type

Load
6
(3) A6TBXY70
24VDC
11-4
ACCESSORIES
(6) A6TBX54-E (8) A6TBX70-E

24VDC
24VDC
Instructions
The tightening torque of the terminal block screws (M3.5
(7) A6TBY54-E screws) is 78.4N • cm.
24VDC
11
11-5
ACCESSORIES 11.2 Spring Clamp Terminal Block:
Q6TE-18S
Spring Clamp Terminal Block Features

Overview (1) Reduction of wiring steps
The Spring Clamp Terminal Block Q6TE-18S is attachable It requires only two steps. (wire stripping and wire
to a Q-Series terminal block-type I/O module or an insertion).
intelligent function module. (2) High reliability
Since the Q6TE-18S uses a spring clamp it does not
The spring force of the metal fixture firmly secures the
require tightening of terminal screws, which greatly reduces
wire. This prevents loosening of the wire due to
the number of wiring steps.
varying manual installation, or wire damage and
The spring clamp terminal block prevents poor contact and momentary disconnection due to vibration.
wire loosening due to vibration by securing the wire
(3) Less maintenance work required
conductor with the constant spring force of the metal fixture
inside it. This offers high constant reliability. The Q6TE does not use screws to secure the wire.
Therefore no retightening is required, eliminating the
risk of screws being loosened due to vibration.
Specifications
Item Specifications
2
Applicable wire size 0.3 to 1.5 mm (AWG22 to 16)
Wire strip length 8 to 11 mm
Mounting screw tightening 66 to 89 N!cm
torque range
Appearance
Weight 0.07kg
Module
Q6TE-18S
Q6TE-18S mounted to module
Compatible Models
The Q6TE-18S should be attached to the Q Series 16-point terminal block type I/O module or intelligent function module.
The following models are compatible with the Q6TE-18S.
Model type Model name
QX10 QX28 QX40 QX40-S1 QX70 QX80
I/O module QY10 QY18A QY22 QY40P QY50 QY68A
QY70 QY80 QX48Y57 QI60
Q62DA Q64DA Q68DAV Q68DAI
Intelligent function module Q64AD Q68ADV Q68ADI
Q64TCRT Q64TCRTBW Q64RD
POINT
The terminal numbers of the Q6TE-18S are equivalent to those of the compatible modules.
Refer to the User's Manual of the module for information on the signal names corresponding to the terminal numbers,
when connecting with an external device.
11-6
ACCESSORIES
11.2 Spring Clamp Terminal Block:
Q6TE-18S
How to use (3) Cable Installation

(1) Removal of terminal block Insert the tool into the square shaped hole, which
! Unscrew the two terminal block mounting screws corresponds to the terminal you wish to use.
situated at the top and bottom of the terminal block. While the tool is inside the hole, insert the wire into the
! Gently remove the terminal block. circular shaped hole (as shown below).
Module Remove the tool from the square shaped hole, taking
care not to remove the wire.
After the wire has been clamped, gently pull the wire to
confirm that it is secure.
Tool
Square shaped hole
Terminal Circular shaped hole
block mounting
screw
Terminal block Wire
(2) Installation of Q6TE-18S

! Attach the Q6TE-18S to the module. Wire strip length:
8mm to 11mm *
! Tighten the terminal block mounting screws within the
specified torque range.
Module
Q6TE-18S [Caution]
1 Take care that the wire strip length is between 8mm to 11mm.
If the wire strip length is too long, this will expose the bare wire,
which increases the risk of electric shock or short circuit.
If the wire strip length is too short, this will result in the wire not
being securely attached. 11
Terminal block
mounting screw
(4) Cable removal
Insert the tool into the corresponding square shaped
hole until it stops, which releases the clamp.
Gently pull the wire out of the hall completely,
remembering to keep the tool firmly inside the hole
whilst doing this procedure.
11-7
11.3 IDC (Insulation Displacement
Connector) Terminal Block
ACCESSORIES Adapter, Dedicated Tool:
Q6TA32, Q6TA32-TOL
IDC Terminal Block Adaptor Specifications

Item Specifications
Overview Applicable model QX41, QX41-S1, QX71, QY41P, QY71
The Q6TA32 IDC (Insulation Displacement Connector) Applicable wire 2 Polyvinyl chloride wire (twisted wire)
terminal block adaptor is attachable to the Q Series Nominal 0.5 mm2 (AWG20) max.
32-point I/O module (40-pin connector type). insulation diameter:
1.9 mm (0.07 inch)
Using the Q6TA32 eliminates the need for stripping the
Number of connectable 1
wire, soldering and crimping terminals, resulting in reduced wire
number of wiring steps. Tensile To the left 35N
Appearance strength Forward 22N
(See CHAPTER 13 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS.) of wire Upward or 60N
1 downward
Module
Number of wire insertion/ 30
disconnection times
Q6TA32 Max. allowable voltage 250VAC
Max. allowable current 3ADC
Contact resistance 100m
Q6TA32-TOL Weight 0.08 kg (0.18 lb.)
(Dedicated Tool)
(Sold separately) 1: Direction of tensile strength of wire
Upward A
20 20
19 19
B
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
Q6TA32 mounted to module 12 12
Forward Left 11 11
10 10
Features 9
8
9
8
(1) Increased efficiency of wiring work 7
6
7
6
5
No need for stripping the wire(s). Also, soldering and 5
crimping terminals are no longer required, resulting in 2 2

1
1
reduced number of steps for wiring when using the
Q6TA32. Downward
(2) Less maintenance work required 2: Recommended cable list
The Q6TA32 does not use terminal screws to secure Manufacturer Conductor Vinyl Isolation
the wire. Therefore no retightening is required, Size Structure Outside Average Outer
reducing the number of steps for maintenance. (AWG) (pcs./mm) diameter thickness insulation
(mm) (mm) layer
(3) Less space required for wiring diameter
The wiring can be done even while modules are (mm)
mounted, which allows you to run the wires according Showa 20 21/ 0.95 0.39 1.80
to the space available without using excessive wires or Electric Wire 0.18
making the wiring duct crowded. & Cable Co.,
Ltd.
(4) No need for an extra terminal block
Sumitomo 20 21/ 0.95 0.41 1.77
As wire termination i.e. soldering is no longer required, Wiring 0.16
wires can be directly connected between I/O module Systems, Ltd.
(via Q6TA32) and devices outside the control panel Fujikura Ltd. 20 7/ 0.95 0.41 1.78
without the need for extra distribution terminal blocks. 0.32
(5) Checking the wiring The "UL STYLE 1007, CSA TYPE TR-64" type cable is
recommended.
On the Q6TA32 cover a range of tester lead inlets are
included that allows the wiring to be checked, whereas
with the older connector type adapters it could not be
checked.
11-8
11.3 IDC (Insulation Displacement
Connector) Terminal Block ACCESSORIES
Adapter, Dedicated Tool:
Q6TA32, Q6TA32-TOL
Schematic Wiring Diagram (c) Install the covers to the Q6TA32 and tighten the
cover fixing screws.
Covers
Cover fixing screws
Cover fixing screw
Insertion tool (Q6TA32-TOL) (Sold separately)
Wire
Wire
IDC Terminal Block Adapter (Q6TA32)
Wire Wire
Wire
Covers
Q6TA32 Q6TA32
I/O module I/O module
(d) Using a continuity tester, check the wiring.

Tester lead-in port
<After Wiring>
Wiring Procedure Wire

(1) Wire connection
Tester lead
(a) Install the Q6TA32 to the I/O module using the IDC
terminal block fixing screws provided. Loosen the
cover fixing screws and remove the covers.
Covers (2) Disconnecting the wire
Cover fixing screw
Loosen the cover fixing screws, remove the covers,
and pull the wire out of the gap.
Cover fixing screw
Covers
Wire
11
Q6TA32 Q6TA32
Wire
I/O module
Wire Wire
(b) Insert the wire along the guide inside the Q6TA32
and then push it in gently with your finger to Q6TA32 Q6TA32
temporarily hold it. Push it completely using the

specific insertion tool (Q6TA32-TOL).
Front view
Wiring tool
Wiring tool
20
19
B
18
Wire 17
Wire
16
15 Wire
14
13 Wire Wire
Q6TA32 Q6TA32
When wiring Line A (right side), check the numbers

of Line B (left side) to confirm the correct terminal
number to be wired.
11-9
11.4 Relay Terminal Module,
ACCESSORIES Connection Cable:
A6TE2-16SRN, AC TE
Relay Terminal Module (9) Can only be installed on a DIN rail.

(10) 2-wire type load is connectable.
Overview
By using the A6TE2-16SRN relay terminal module with the Specifications
40-pin connector (manufactured by Fujitsu) type 24VDC Item Specifications
transistor output module (sink type) reduces wiring steps Number of output 16 points
between the relay terminal block within control panel and Isolation method Relay insulation
the relays within the module. Rated switching 24VDC 2A (resistive load) per point, 8A per
voltage/current common 240VAC 2A (COS =1) per point
Appearance
Minimum switching 5VDC 1mA
(See CHAPTER 13 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS.) load
Maximum switching 264VAC 125VDC
load
Response OFF 10ms or below (excluding delay of the PC
time ON output module)
ON 12ms or below (excluding delay of the PC
OFF output module)
Life Mechanical Over 20 million times
Electrical 1 Rated switching voltage/current load: Over
100 thousand times
200VAC 1.5A, 240VAC 1A(COS =0.7)
Over 100 thousand times
Features 200VAC 1A, 240VAC 0.5A(COS =0.35):
(1) The A6TE2-16SRN can be used in together with the Over 100 thousand times
24VDC 1A, 100VDC 0.1A(L/R =7ms):
sink type output modules having the following
Over 100 thousand times
connectors (only Fujitsu 40-pin). Maximum switching 3,600 times per hour
Q series : QY41P, QY42P, QH42P frequency 2
AnS series : A1SY41, A1SY42, A1SH42, Noise suppression None
A1SH42-S1 Fuse None
A series : AY42, AY42-S1, AY42-S2, Common wiring 8 points 1 common (common terminals:
AY42-S3, AY42-S4, AH42 system TB19, TB21)
Operation indication ON display (LED)
CC-Link : AJ65SBTCF1-32T,
External wiring 38-point terminal block connector (M3
AJ65BTC1-32T system screw)
MELSECNET-MINI : AJ35TC1-32T Applicable wire size 0.75 to 1.25 mm2, max. 2 wires per point
(2) One cable (separately obtained; see Figure 4.2) and (Applicable tightening torque 60 to
two relay terminal modules can share 32 points (one 100N⋅cm)
connector). Applicable solderless 1.25-3 1.25-MS3 1.25-B3A 1.25-C3A
terminal V1.25-3 V1.25-MS3 V1.25-B3A max. 2
(3) By using the dedicated cable, it is possible to install the
wires per point
relay terminal module at a distance of maximum 10 m
Applicable DIN rail TH35-7.5Fe. TH35-7.5AI
(32.8 feet). Accessory item Relay removal tool (RV9Z-T01)
(4) There are five types of dedicated cables, each having External Voltage 24VDC 10% ripple voltage, 4VP-P or
different cable length. supply less
(5) Because it is a socket-type relay, each relay can be power Current 350mA (TYP. 24VDC, all points OFF)
replaced individually as necessary. 5VDC Internal —
current consumption
! The relay is designed that allows secure installation
Weight 0.35 kg
and prevents the relay from falling off due to vibration,
Relays for RV3T-3G24 (made by Izumi Electric, Inc. user
etc. replacement arranged item) Izumi Electric, Inc.
! It is supplied with a relay removal tool. Remark 24VDC, connector (40-pin, made by
(6) Because it can be replaced by a relay output, it can be Fujitsu)
used either for AC or DC with larger current capacity. For a sink tank type output, use 2-wire
(7) Spring-loaded screw are adopted so that the terminal terminal block.
1: See the electrical life curve of a relay on the next page for
screws do not fall off.
details.
(8) Wiring work has been simplified by showing the relay 2: For the maximum switching frequency when load L is driven,
terminal module symbol sheet on the outside of the set ON for 1 second or longer and OFF for 1 second or
module. longer.
11-10
ACCESSORIES
Connection Cable:
A6TE2-16SRN, AC TE
Relay life Connection Cable

The following chart shows the life of the relay RV3T-3G24 The following shows the connection cables that can be
used for wiring of A6TE2-16SRN.
for the relay terminal module A6TE2-16SRN.
Type Cable length L
500 AC06TE 0.6m (2ft)
AC10TE 1m (3.2ft)
AC30TE 3m (9.8ft)
AC50TE 5m (16.4ft)
AC100TE 10m (32.8ft)
100
B side: last 16 points
0
L 35 .8) (Y10 to Y1F)
70 (13
Life (10 thousand times)
B
50
A
40
120VAC COSø=1 3
30 24VDC AC TE (13 50
30VDC T=0ms .8)
240VAC COSø=-1 A side: first 16 points
20 (Y0 to YF)
120VAC COSø=0.4
100V to 120VDC (Unit : mm (inch))
10
T=7 to 40ms 220VAC COSø=0.4 Connection Cable
30VDC 240VAC
T=40ms Installation Orientation
30VDC T=7ms
5
The installation direction is as shown below.
38
F
37
36
E
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 5
35
1
2
34
D
3
MITSUBISHI
33
0
4
32
C
5
31
Contact current (A)
1
6
30
7
29
2
8
28
9
27
10
26
Electrical Life Curve of a Relay
POWER
11
25
12
24
13
23
14
22
15
21
16
20
17
19
18
18
7
Wiring
19
17
20
11
16
6
21
15
22
14
5
23
13
8
POWER
24
12
4
Be sure to use the relay terminal module connection cable
25
11
9
26
10
3
27
9
28
8
29
MITSUBISHI
B
7
30
and install the wiring in accordance with the wiring 1
6
31
5
32
4
33
3
34
2
35
1
E
36
diagram.
37
F
38
(a) Vertical orientation: (b) Vertical orientation:

Correct Correct
Connector line
38 36 34 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
37 35 33 31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
MITSUBISHI POWER
F E D C B A 8 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F MITSUBISHI
POWER
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38
(c) Vertical orientation: (d) Vertical orientation:

block area
Terminal
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 COM1 COM3 Y8 Y9 YA YB YC YD YE YF
+24V
C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 COM2 COM4 C4 C4 C4 C4 C4 C4 C4 C4
Correct Incorrect
24G
+24V 24G Y0 C2 COM1 COM 2 COM 3 COM 4 YF C4

(e) Horizontal orientation: (f) Horizontal orientation:
24VDC
Load Load
Correct Incorrect
Power supply Power supply
Power supply for load for load Installation Orientation (Horizontal view)
for relay
Wiring Diagram POINT

Confirm that the relay is securely installed before turning
on the power supply for the first time after shipment.
11-11
ACCESSORIES Connection Cable:
A6TE2-16SRN, AC TE
Replacing the Relay

The relay is replaced in the following procedure.
(1) Open the top cover of the module.
(2) Pull out the red relay removal tool at the left hand side.
(3) Insert the relay removal tool into the top of the relay
and then pull out the relay.
Relay removal direction
Relay removal tool
Relay
Relay Removal Procedure
(4) Mount the new relay starting from the upper most part
of the relay, whilst paying attention to the orientation of
the relay.
(5) After confirming that the relay is firmly connected and
the lead is not bent, turn on the power supply.
11-12
12.1 External Dimensions
External Dimensions Note 1: The size of depth (D) changes depending on the
modules mounted. See the external dimensions of
Q3 SB, Q3 B, Q5 B, Q6 B, QA1S6 B,
the corresponding module.
QA65B structural dimensions
Note 2: Based on when the Q Series modules of 90mm
The following are the outline dimensions and mounting depth are mounted.
hole dimensions of the Q3 SB, Q3 B, Q5 B, Q6 B, Note 3: Based on when the AnS Series modules of 90mm
QA1S6 B and QA65B base units. depth are mounted.
The depth (D) is the dimension when modules are Note 4: Based on when the A Series modules of 90mm
mounted on the base unit. depth are mounted.
CPU module
D
Q02HCPU
MODE
RUN
ERR.
USER
BAT.
BOOT
H1 H
98 (3.56)
W2 W1 H2
W (Unit: mm (inch)) PULL
USB
Dimensions between mounting

Dimensions
Base unit holes
RS-232
H W D(Note 1) H1 H2 W1 W2
Q32SB 98 114 98 80 7 101 8.5
(3.86) (4.49) (3.86) (3.15) (0.28) (3.98) (0.33)
89.3 (3.51) 27.4 (1.08)
Q33SB 142 (Note 2) 129
(5.59) (5.08) Unit: mm (inch)
Q35SB 197.5 184.5
(7.78) (7.26)
Q33B 189 169 15.5 12
(7.44) (6.65) (0.61)
Q35B 245 224.5
(9.65) (8.85)
Q38B 328 308
(12.92) (12.14)
Q312B 439 419
(17.30) (16.51)
Q52B 106 83.5
(4.17) (3.29)
Q55B 189 167
(7.44) (6.57)
Q63B 189 167
(7.44) (6.57)
Q65B 245 222.5
(9.65) (8.77)
Q68B 328 306
(12.92) (12.06)
Q612B 439 417
(17.30) (16.43)
QA1S65B 130 315 110 110 10 295 10
(5.12) (12.41) (4.33) (4.33) (0.39) (11.62) (0.39)
QA1S68B 420 (Note3) 400
(16.55) (15.76)
QA65B 250 352 130(5.12) 200 25 332
(9.84) (13.86) (Note4) (7.87) (0.98) (13.07)
12-1
EXTERNAL
DIMENSIONS
Power Supply Modules

(1) Q61SP slim type power supply module
(3) Q64P power supply module
Q61SP
Q61SP POWER
POWER
Q64P
POWER
INPUT
INPUT Q61SP
Q61SP
100-240VAC
100-240VAC
@50/60Hz
50/60Hz 40VA
40VA
OUTPUT
OUTPUT 5VDC
5VDC 2A 2A
ERR.
ERR.
24VDC
24VDC
0.5A
0.5A
98 (3.86)
98 (3.86)
(F G) j
i‚e‚f
(L G)j
i‚k‚f PULL
‚m
N
‚kL
INPUT
INPUT
100-
100-
240V
240V
AC
AC MITSUBISHI
MITSUBISHI
90 (3.55) 14(0.55) 27.4 115 (4.53) 55.2 (2.17)

(1.08)
(2) Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q62P, Q63P power supply (4) A1S61PN, A1S62PN, A1S63P power supply module
A1S61PN
module POWER
Q61P-A1
POWER
INPUT OUTPUT
100-240VAC DC 5V 5A
105VA
50 / 60Hz
130 (5.12)
98 (3.86)
NP
PULL
90 (3.55) 55.2 (2.17)
6.5 93.6 (3.69) 54.5 (2.15)

(0.26)
Unit: mm (inch)
12-2
EXTERNAL
DIMENSIONS
Base Units
Slim type main base unit
(1) Q32SB slim type main base unit (2) Q33SB slim type main base unit
18.5 M4 mounting screw 18.5 M4 mounting screw
(0.73) (M4 12: self-binding screw) (0.73) (M4 12: self-binding screw)
7 (0.28) 80 0.3 (3.15 0.01)
0.01)
0.3 (3.15
5V 5V
98 (3.86)
98 (3.86)
SG SG
CPU I/O0 I/O1 CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2

POWER POWER
7 (0.28) 80
7.5 7.5
8.5 101 0.3 (3.98 0.01) 8.5 129 0.3 (5.08 0.01)
(0.3) (0.3)
(0.33) 114 (4.49) (4.5(0.18)) (0.33) 142 (5.59) (4.5(0.18))
(3) Q35SB slim type main base unit

M4 mounting screw
18.5
(0.73) (M4 12: self-binding screw)
(3.15 0.01)
80 0.3
5V
98 (3.86)
SG
CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4

POWER
7 (0.28)
12
7.5
(0.3) 8.3 184.5 0.3 (7.27 0.01)
(0.33) 197.5 (7.78) (4.5(0.18))
Unit: mm (inch)
12-3
EXTERNAL
DIMENSIONS
Main base unit

(1) Q33B main base unit
M4 mounting screw (M4 14)
(3.15 0.01)
5V
98 (3.86)
7 (0.28) 80 0.3
SG
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2

F6
7.5 15.5 169 0.3 (6.66 0.01)

(0.3) 44.1 (0.61) 189 (7.45)
(1.74)

(3.15 0.01)
5V
98 (3.86)
7 (0.28) 80 0.3
SG
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4

F6
7.5 15.5 224.5 0.3 (8.85 0.01)

(0.3) 44.1 (0.61) 245 (9.65)
(1.74)

(3.15 0.01)
5V
98 (3.86)
7 (0.28) 80 0.3
SG
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7

CPU
F6
7.5 15.5 308 0.3 (12.14 0.01)

(0.3) 44.1 (0.61) 328 (12.92)
(1.74)

(3.15 0.01)
5V
7 (0.28) 80 0.3
98 (3.86)
SG
POWER CPU I/00 I/01 I/02 I/03 I/04 I/05 I/06 I/07 I/08 I/09 I/10 I/11
F6
7.5 15.5 419 0.3 (16.5 0.01)

(0.3) 44.1 (0.61) 439 (17.3)
(1.74)
Unit: mm (inch)
12-4
EXTERNAL
DIMENSIONS
Extension base unit

(1) Q52B extension base unit
IN OUT
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
7 (0.28) 80 0.3
I/O0 I/O1
7.5 15.5 83.5 0.3 (3.29 0.01)

(0.3) 44.1 (0.61) 106 (4.18)
(1.74)

IN OUT
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
7 (0.28) 80 0.3
I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
7.5 15.5 167 0.3 (6.58 0.01)

(0.3) 44.1 (0.61) 189 (7.45)
(1.74)

IN OUT
12
(3.15 0.01)
5V
98 (3.86)
7 (0.28) 80 0.3
SG
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2

F6
7.5 15.5 167 0.3 (6.58 0.01)

(0.3) 44.1 (0.61) 189 (7.45)
(1.74)

IN OUT
(3.15 0.01)
5V
7 (0.28) 80 0.3
SG
98 (3.86)
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4

F6
7.5 15.5 222.5 0.3 (8.77 0.01)

(0.3) 44.1 (0.61) 245 (9.65)
(1.74)
Unit: mm (inch)
12-5
EXTERNAL
DIMENSIONS

IN OUT
(3.15 0.01)
5V
98 (3.86)
SG
7 (0.28) 80 0.3

F6
7.5 15.5 306 0.3 (12.06 0.01)

(0.3) 44.1 (0.61) 328 (12.92)
(1.74)

IN OUT
(3.15 0.01)
5V
98 (3.86)
7 (0.28) 80 0.3
SG
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9 I/O10 I/O11
F6
7.5 15.5 417 0.3 (16.43 0.01)

(0.3) 44.1 (0.61)
439 (17.3)
(1.74)
(7) QA1S65B extension base unit

110 0.3 (4.33 0.01)
IN OUT
130 (5.12)
5V
SG
FG
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4

QA1S65B
10 (0.39) 295 0.3 (11.62 0.01)

(0.39)
10
16.4
(0.65) 315 (12.41)
51.2 (2.02)
(8) QA1S68B extension base unit

110 0.3 (4.33 0.01)
IN OUT
130 (5.12)
5V
SG
FG

QA1S68B
10 (0.39) 400 0.3 (15.76 0.01)

10
(0.39)
16.4
(0.65) 420 (16.55)
51.2
(2.02)
Unit: mm (inch)
12-6
EXTERNAL
DIMENSIONS
(9) QA65B extension base unit

2 6-M4 screw 4- 6 mounting hole
(For module mounting) (M5 mounting screw)
Base cover
0.01)
250 (9.85)
Grip
0.3 (7.88
QA65B
25 200
(0.99)
10 332 0.3 (13.08 0.01) 46.6

(0.39) (1.84)
352 (13.87)
10 (0.39)
I/O Modules and Blank Cover Module

Terminal block connector type 40-pin connector type
(1) Other than QY22 (1) 32-point I/O modules
(0.08)
(0.08)
2
2
QX10 QX41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
89ABCDEF 89 ABCD EF
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
89 ABCD EF
QX41
24VDC
4mA
0
1 0
2 1
3 2
4
3
98 (3.86)
105 (4.14)
5
105 (4.14)
98 (3.86)
4
6
7 5
8 6
9 7
A 8
B
9
C
D
A
E
B
F C
COM D
100VAC
8mA60Hz
7mA50Hz
NC
E
F 12
(0.2)
(0.2)
5
5
2 90 (3.55) 27.4 (1.08) 2 90 (3.55) 45 (1.77) 27.4 (1.08)

(0.08) (0.08)
(2) QY22 TRIAC Output Module (2) 64-point I/O modules

(0.08)
(0.08)
2
2
QX42
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
QY22
89A BC D E F
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 A B CDEF
89A BC D E F
QX42
24VDC DISPLAY
4mA F L
L 0
1 0
L
L 2 1
3 2
105 (4.14)
98 (3.86)
L
4
L 3
98 (3.86)
105 (4.14)
5
L
4
L 6
7
5
L
L 8 6
L
9 7
L
A 8
B
L 9
C
L
A
D
L
E
B
L
L
F C
COM D
E
(0.2)
100VAC
5
240VAC F
(0.2)
0.6A
2 90 (3.55) 45 (1.77) 27.4 (1.08)
5
(0.08)
2 112.3 (4.42) 27.4 (1.08)
(0.08)
Unit: mm (inch)
12-7
EXTERNAL
DIMENSIONS
37-pin D sub connector type 32-point I/O modules Blank Cover Module
(0.08)
(0.08)
2
2
QX81 QG60
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
89ABC D E F
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
89ABC D E F
QX81
24VDC QG60
4mA
105 (4.14)
98 (3.86)
100 (4.14)
98 (3.86)
(0.2)
5
2 90 (3.55) 46 (1.81) 27.4 (1.08)

(0.08)
2 90 (3.55) 27.4 (1.08)
(0.08)
Extension base cable
42 (1.65)
10
34.2 (1.35) 6 (0.24) (0.39)
Connectors/A6CON1, A6CON2, A6CON3, A6CON4, A6CON1E, A6CON2E, A6CON3E

A6CON1/A6CON2 A6CON3 A6CON4
72.72 (2.87) 14 (0.55) or less 69.48 (2.74) 14 (0.55) or less
(0.33)
8.25
46 (1.81)
71.8 (0.70)
(0.39) 22.5 (0.89)
10
47 (1.85)
50.8 (2.00)
A6CON1E/A6CON2E A6CON3E
96.5 (3.80) 20.3 (0.80) 69.4 (2.73)
(0.50)
12.6
(46 (1.81))
(0.13)
3.4
(0.23)
5.9
Unit: mm (inch)
12-8
EXTERNAL
DIMENSIONS
Connector/terminal block converter modules

A6TB 36 A6TB 54 A6TBX70
2- 4.5 mounting hole 2- 4.5 mounting hole 2- 4.5 mounting hole
(M4 25) (M4 25) (M4 25)
120 (4.73)
89.6 (3.53)
155 (6.11)
124.6 (4.91)
190 (7.49)
156.6 (6.17)
(0.22)
17.3 (0.68) 44 (1.73)

5.5
78.5 (3.09)
(0.22)
17.3 (0.68) 44 (1.73)

48 (1.89)
52 (2.05)
5.5
78.5 (3.09)
44 (1.73)
(0.22)
17.3 (0.68)
48 (1.89)
52 (2.05)
5.5
78.5 (3.09)
48 (1.89)
52 (2.05)
Spring Clamp Terminal Block
Q6TE-18S Installed on module (Example: QX10)
Q6TE
-18S
1
2
3
4
5
6
82.5 (3.25)
7
8
9
10
11
12
7.62 (0.30)
14
13
12
15
16
17
18
27 23
(1.06) (0.91) 90*
(3.54)
: The depth of the module installed with a Q6TE-18S is equivalent with the factory default dimensions for that module.
Unit: mm(inch)
12-9
EXTERNAL
DIMENSIONS
IDC Terminal Block Adapter

Q6TA32(when mounted to I/O module) Q6TA32-TOL
QX41 9.5 (0.37)
01234567
8 9 A B C D EF
50 (1.97)
01234567
8 9 A B C D EF
A
20 20
19 19
B
18 18
17
98 (3.86)
17
93.5 (3.68)
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
93 (3.66)
12 12
11 11
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
2
(0.35)
2
1
9
25 (0.99)
90 (3.55) 37 (1.46) 27.4 (1.08)
Relay Terminal module

A6TE2-16SRN
67 (2.64)
A
MITSUBISHI POWER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38
153 (6.03)
(0.10)
2.5
180 (7.09)
When terminal cover is open

(30.1) 52.6 (2.07)
(1.19) 40 (1.58)
(0.97)
(24.5)
DIN rail
MITSUBISHI
(56.3)
(2.22)
When mounted to DIN rail
View A
Unit: mm (inch)
12-10
EXTERNAL
DIMENSIONS
CC-Link remote I/O dimensions

AJ65BTB1-16 AJ65BTB2-16 AJ65BTC1-32
1
MITSUBISHI MELSEC A J65BTC1-32D

MITSUBISHI MELSEC A J65BTB1-16D
MITSUBISHI MELSEC AJ65BTB2-16D

DA
DA
2
2
DB
DB
1
3
3
DA
DG
DG
2
4
DB
SLD
SLD
3
+ +
5
DG
A
24V
24V
PW L RUN SD
PW L RUN SD
PW L RUN SD RD L ERR.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
SLD
6
6
(FG)
(FG)
+
5
7
24V
24G
24G
6
(FG)
8
7
9
24G
165 (6.50)
156 (6.15)
RD L ERR.
RD L ERR.
151.9 (5.98)
10
10
142.9 (5.63)
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
197.4 (7.78)
188.4 (7.42)
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
B RATE
B RATE
STATION NO.
STATION NO.
24
6 5 4
24
6 5 4
0 1
0 1
0 1
0 1
4
25
4
25
X10
3 7
2 8
3
2
X10
3 7
2 8
3
2
6
9 0 1
26
9 0 1
26
B RATE
STATION NO.
4
4
27
6 5 4
27
X1
3
2
X1
3
2
0 1
0 1
4
28
X10
3 7
2 8
3
2
6
9 0 1
29
4
30
X1
3
2
56 (2.21) 9.5 (0.37)
31
32
65 (2.56) 46 (1.81)
56 (2.21) 9.5 (0.37)
33
34
2- 4.5 mounting hole 65 (2.56) 46 (1.81)

35
36
37
2- 4.5 mounting hole

56 (2.21) 9.5 (0.37)
65 (2.56) 46 (1.81)
AJ65SBTB1-8 AJ65SBTB1-16
(1.57)
(1.57)
40
40
118 (46.5)
87.3 (3.44)
+1
109 (4.29 0.040 ) (mounting pitch)
78.3 (3.09 0
+0.04
0 ) (mounting pitch)
2-4.5 5.1 mounting hole
2-4.5 5.1 mounting hole (M4 mounting screw)
(M4 mounting screw)
(0.65)
(0.3)
PW L RUN L ERR X0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X8 9 A B C D E F
(1.97) 16.5
STATION NO. B RATE
7.5
40 20 10 8 4 2 1 4 2 1
(0.65)
Ab
X0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 STATION NO. B RATE

(0.3)
16.5
40 20 10 8 4 2 1 4 2 1 ON
7.5
ou
ON MITSUBISHI AJ65SBTB1-16D
t
(A
10
DA DG +24V 24G X0 X2 X4 X6 X8 XA XC XE COM

AJ65SBTB1-8D
bo )
50
DB SLD (FG) X1 X3 X5 X7 X9 XB XD XF COM

10
DA DG +24V 24G X0 X2 X4 X6 COM

ut
(1.97)
7.9
5
12
DB SLD (FG) X1 X3 X5 X7 COM
DIN ra
50
7.9 (0.31)
DIN rail
(0.31)
(0.16)
4
(0.16)
4
AJ65SBTB1-32 AJ65SBTB2-8
AJ65SBTB3-8
(1.57)
40
AJ65SBTB32-8
179 (7.05)
(1.57)
40
0.04
170 (6.70 0 ) (mounting pitch)
(0.3)
(0.65)
7.5
(1.97) 16.5
PW L RUN L E RR X0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X8 9 A B C D E F X1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 X1819 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F STA TION NO . B RATE

40 20 10 8 4 2 1 4 2 1
118 (4.65)
ON
Ab
MITSUBISHI AJ6 5S BTB1-32D

ou
DA DG +24V 24G X0 X2 X4 X6 X8 XA XC XE X10 X12 X14 X16 X18 X1A X1C X1E CO M
109 (4.29 0.040 ) (mounting pitch)

t
50
DB SLD (FG) X1 X3 X5 X7 X9 XB XD XF X11 X13 X15 X17 X19 X1B X1D X1F CO M
10
7.9 DIN ra 2-4.5 5.1 mounting hole

5
(0.31) (M4 mounting screw)

(0.16)
(0.65)
MITSUBISHI PW L RUN L ERR X0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

(1.97) 16.5
STATION NO. B RATE

4
AJ65 SBTB2-8A 40 20 10 8 4 2 1 4 2 1
Ab
89 (3.51) ON
o ut
DA DG +24V 24G
10
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 NC
50
DB SLD (FG)
5
COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM NC
7.9
DIN rail
(0.31)
(0.16)
4
Unit: mm (inch)
12-11
EXTERNAL
DIMENSIONS
AJ65SBTB2-16 AJ65SBTB2N-8
AJ65SBTB3-16
AJ65SBTB32-16
(1.57)
40
(1.57)
40
118 (4.65)
109 (4.29 0.040 ) (mounting pitch)
179 (7.05) 2-4.5 5.1 mounting hole
170 (6.70 0.04
0 ) (mounting pitch) (M4 mounting screw)
(0.65)
MITSUBISHI
PW L RUN L ERR X0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(1.97) 16.5
STATION NO. B RATE
AJ65SBTB2N-8A 40 20 10 8 4 2 1 4 2 1
Ab
ON
ou
(0.65)
MITSUBISHI PW L RUN L ERR X0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

(1.97) 16.5
STATION NO. B RATE
t1
AJ65SBTB2-16A 40 20 10 8 4 2 1 4 2 1
DA DG +24V 24G
ON
05
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 COM A
Ab 05
50
DB SLD (FG)
COM B COM B COM B COM B COM B COM B COM B COM B COM B
ou
DA DG +24V 24G
1
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 XA XB XC XD XE XF NC
7.9
t
DB SLD (FG)
DIN rail
COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM
50
COM COM COM COM COM COM COM NC
7.9 (0.31)
DIN ra
(0.31)
(0.16)
(0.16)
4
4
89 (3.51)
AJ65SBTB2N-16 AJ65SBTB3-8
AJ65SBTB32-8
(1.57)
40
(1.57)
40
179 (7.05)
0.04
170 (4.29 0 ) (mounting pitch)
2-4.5 5.1 mounting hole (M4 mounting screw) 118 (4.65)
(0.65)
0.04
MITSUBISHI
109 (4.29 ) (mounting pitch)
STATION NO. B RATE PW L RUN L ERR X0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
(1.97) 16.5
AJ65SBTB2N-16A 40 20 10 8 4 2 1 4 2 1
0
ON
Ab 05
2-4.5 5.1 mounting hole

ou
1
DA DG +24V 24G
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 XA XB XC XD XE XF COM A
(M4 mounting screw)
t
DB SLD (FG) COM B COM B COM B COM B COM B COM B COM B COM B COM B COM B COM B COM B COM B COM B COM B COM B COM B
50
7.9 DIN ra
(0.65)
16.5
PW L RUN L ERR X0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(0.31)
STATION NO. B RATE
40 20 10 8 4 2 1 4 2 1
Ab
ON
ou
(0.16)
t
4
MITSUBISHI
AJ65SBTB3-8D
10
(1.97)
DA DG +24V 24G X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 DC24A

50
5
DB SLD (FG) COMA COMB COMA COMB COMA COMB COMA COMB DC24B
89 (3.51)
7.9 DIN rail
(0.31)
(0.16)
4
AJ65SBTB3-16 AJ65SBTCF1-32
AJ65SBTB32-16
(1.57)
40
(1.57)
40
118 (4.65)
20
179 (7.05) 109 (4.29 0.040 ) (mounting pitch) (0.79)
(0.43)
0.04
170 (6.70 ) (mounting pitch) 0 2-4.5 5.1 mounting hole
11

(M4 mounting screw)
(0.65)
STATION NO. B RATE

Ab
(1.97) 16.5
X0-XF
40 20 10 8 4 2 1 4 2 1
o
(0.65)
(1.97) 16.5
ut
STATION NO. B RATE
ON
40 20 10 8 4 2 1 4 2 1
ON MITSUBISHI AJ65SBTCF1-3 2D X10-X1F
11
Ab 05
MITSUBISHI A J65SBTB3-16D
X10X11X12X13X14X15X16X17X18X19X1AX1BX1CX1DX1EX1FNC NC NC NC
0
ou
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 XA XB XC XD XE XF NC NCCOMCOM
1
DA DG +24V 24G
50
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 Y9 YA XB XC XD XE XF DC24A
t
DB SLD (FG)
7.9
COMA COMB COMA COMB COMA COMB COMA COMB COMA COMB COMA COMB COMA COMB COMA COMB DC24B
50
7.9 DIN ra DIN rail

(0.31)
(0.31)
(0.16)
(0.16)
4
89 (3.51)
Unit: mm (inch)
12-12
EXTERNAL
DIMENSIONS
AJ65SBTC4-16 AJ65VBTCU -8
AJ65SBTC1-32 40
20
S
T
A
10 T
I
8 O
4 N
2 N
1 O
(1.57)
4 B
B
40
2 A
T
1 E
118 (4.65)
20
0.04
109 (4.29 0 ) (mounting pitch) (0.79)
2-4.5 5.1 mounting hole (0.43)
11
(M4 mounting screw) 3.5

41 31 62
(0.3)
(0.65)
(1.22) (2.44) (0.14)
7.5
STATION NO. B RATE
(1.97) 16.5
X0-XF
40 20 10 8 4 2 1 4 2 1 (1.62) 16.5
Ab
ON
X1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 X1819 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F
ou
MITSUBISHI AJ65SBTC1-32D1 X10-X1F

(0.65)
t1
X0 X4 X8 XC X10 X14 X18 X1C

DA DG +24V 24G COM
AJ65VBTCU3-8D1
X1 X5 X9 XD X11 X15 X19 X1D
10
X2 X6 XA XE X12 X16 X1A X1E

50
DB SLD (FG) X3 X7 XB XF X13 X17 X1B X1F

COM
CON
D A
LINK
7.9
(0.31) CON
57.5 (2.27)
(0.16)
B
4
X0 PW
L RUN
X1
L ERR
X2
0
1 DIN
115 (4.53)
X3 2 rail
3
4
X4 5
6
X5 7
X6
57.5 (2.27)
X7
CON P
C W
/
A
U
CON X
D
AJ65VBTCU -16 AJ65VBTCF1-32

40 40
S S
20 T 20 T
A A
10 T 10 T
8 I I
O 8 O
4 N
4 N
2 N
O 2 N
1 1 O
4 B 4 B
B B
2 A 2 A
T T
1 E 1 E
12
60 (2.36) 31 (1.22) 62 (2.44) 3.5 41 (1.62) 67 (2.64) 3.5

16.5 (0.14) (0.14)
46 (1.81)
(0.65)
A J65VBTCU3-16D1
AJ65VBTCF1-32DT1
CON L
A
I
N
K X0 Y10
CON LINK
57.5 (2.27)
B
XF Y1F
57.5 (2.27)
CON.A CON.B
PW PW
L RUN L RUN
L ERR L ERR
0
0
115 (4.53)
1
1 DIN 2
115 (4.53)
2 DIN
rail 3
3
4 4 rail
5 5
6 6
7
7
8 8
9 9
A
B A
57.5 (2.27)
C B
PW/AUX.
57.5 (2.27)
D C
E CON.C CON.D D
X0 to X7 X8 to XF F
E
F
CON
C L
I
N
K
CON
D
16.5
(0.65)
31
(1.22)
14.5mm when the online connector is not fitted.

Unit: mm (inch)
12-13
EXTERNAL
DIMENSIONS
AJ65SBTW4-16 AJ65FBTA -16

184.7 (7.28) 2-4.5 6 mounting hole
0.04
60 +10 (2.36 +0.04 ) (M4 mounting screw)
2.1 180 (7.09 0 ) (mounting pitch) 2.6 0
48 (1.89)
(0.08) (0.1) 50 1(1.97 0.04)
2-4.5 5.1 mounting hole 34 0.5
(0.17)
4.3
(M4 mounting screw) 18.3 26.5
(0.72) (1.04) 6
(0.24)
(0.84)
(2.36)
21.3
60
(1.18)
30
68 (2.68)
(0.47)
12
0.04)
(1.0)
25.5
(7.88 +0.04 )
1 (7.56
0
0.04
2.1 180 (7.09 0 ) (mounting pitch) 2.6
(0.08) 2-4.5 5.1 mounting hole (M4 mounting screw) (0.1)
+1
0
(0.95)
192
200
24
(0.18)
LINK CABL IN POWER C ABL PW L RUN

L ERR.
33 (1.3)
4.5
X0 Y8
57.9 (2.28)
X1 Y9
X2 YA
X3 YB
(0.99)
CON1 CON3 CON5 CON7 X4 YC
LINK CABL OUT POWER C ABL X5 YD
25
CON2 CON4 CON6 CON8
X6 YE
X7 YF
STATION NO.
MITSUBISHI AJ65SBTW4-16DT
(0.99)
25
(0.99)
Storage
25
sheet
6
4.1 (0.24)
(0.16) 21.7
M4 mounting screw (0.85)
35 (1.38) 32 (1.26)
AJ65SBT-64AD AJ65SBT-62DA
(1.57)
(1.57)
40
40
NP NP
118 (4.65)
118 (4.65)
4.5 109 (4.29) 4.5
4.5 109 (4.29) 4.5 (0.18) (0.18)
(0.18) (0.18)
2-4.5 5.1 mounting hole 2-4.5 5.1 mounting hole
(M4 mounting screw) (M4 mounting screw)
STATION NO. B RATE
(0.65)
STATION NO. B RATE

(0.65)
PW RUN L RUN L ERR. CH1 2 3 4 OFFSET GAIN PW RUN L RUN L ERR. CH1 2 OFFSET GAIN
16.5
16.5
SELECT 40 20 10 8 4 2 1 4 2 1 ON SELECT UP 40 20 10 8 4 2 1 4 2 1
ON
SET SET DOWN

MITSUBISHI AJ65SBT-64AD MITSUBISHI AJ65SBT-62DA
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH1 CH2
DA DG +24V 24G DA DG +24V 24G
(1.97)
(1.97)
TEST V+ I+ V+ I+ COM SLD COM AG TEST NC V+ I+ NC V+ I+ NC NC

DB SLD (FG) TEST COM SLD COM V+ I+ V+ I+ DB SLD (FG) TEST NC COM NC NC COM NC NC NC
50
(FG1)
50
(0.16)
4
4
AJ65BT-D62 AJ65BT-68TD
(0.37)
AJ65BT-D62D
9.5
AJ65BT-D62D-S1
(0.37)
9.5
(2.48)
5
V
63
CH.1 CH.2
B
A
F ST.
PRE
B
A
F ST.
PRE
NP
24V
12V
5V
24V
12V
5V
24V
12V
5V
24V
12V
5V
(2.48)
63

NP
B RATE STATION NO.

MITSUBISHI MELSEC AJ65BT-68TD 0 1 0 1
10
9 0 1
1
PW 2 2 8 2
2- 4.5 mounting hole RUN

L RUN
4
3
6 5 4
3 7
6 5 4
3
SD MODE OFFSET UP RESET

RD
56 (2.21)
65 (2.56)
SW MODE 9 0 1 SET
0 NORMAL L ERR. 8 2
1-8 TEST CH. 7 3
6 5 4
9 TEST GAIN DOWN
B RATE STATION NO.
MITSUBISHI MELSEC AJ65BT-D62 10 1
CH.1 CH.2 01 01 90 1
A A PW 2 2 8 2
3 3 7 3
B B RUN 4 654 654
DEC DEC L RUN RING PLS RESET
PRE PRE SD CH. 1 2 CH. 1 2
56 (2.21)
65 (2.56)
F ST. F ST. RD ON LOW

EQU1 EQU1 L ERR.
EQU2 EQU2 HIGH
142.9 (5.63)
151.9 (5.98)
142.9 (5.63)
151.9 (5.98)
Unit: mm (inch)
12-14
EXTERNAL
DIMENSIONS
AJ65BT-D75P2-S3 AJ65BT-R2
(0.37)
(0.37)
9.5
9.5
(2.48)
(2.48)
63
63
NP

(0.18)
4.5
80 (3.15)
71 (2.8)
80 (3.15)
71 (2.8)
161 (6.34)
170 (6.7)
4.5 161 (6.34)
(0.18)
170 (6.7)
AJ65VBTCU-68AD AJ65VBTCU-68DAV
41 (1.61) 31 (1.22)* 67 (2.44) 3.5 (0.14) 41 (1.61) 31 (1.22)* 67 (2.44) 3.5
16.5 16.5 (0.14)
(0.65) (0.65)
AJ65VBTCU-68AD AJ65VBTCU-68DAV
CON CON
A L A L
I
I
N
K
N
CON
CON K
57.5 (2.26)
57.5 (2.26)
B
B
SEL
C SEL
H C
1 POWER H POWER
SET 1
RUN SET
2 RUN
2 UP
L RUN
L RUN
3
L ERR 3 DOWN
SW1 L ERR
115 (4.53)
SW1
DIN rail
TEST
115 (4.53)
DIN rail
4 TEST
1 4
2 1
5 4 2
8 5 4
OFFSET
8
6
OFFSET
6
GAIN
7
GAIN
57.5 (2.26)
57.5 (2.26)
8
12
MODE 8
MODE
CON
C P
O CON
W C P
E O
CON R W
D E
CON R
D
: This dimension should be 14.5mm (0.57inch) when an online : This dimension should be 14.5mm (0.57inch) when an online
connector is not installed. connector is not installed.
AJ65BT-64DA AJ65BT-64AD
(0.4)
9.5
9.5 (0.4)
63 (2.5)
63 (2.5)
NP
NP
2- 4.5 (0.18) 2- 4.5 (0.18)

Installation hole installation hole
B RATE STATION NO.

MITSUBISHI MELSEC AJ65BT-64DAV
B RATE STATION NO. MITSUBISHI MELSEC AJ65BT-64AD X10 X1
X10 X1 01 01 901
01 01 901 2 2 8 2
PW 2 2 8 2 PW 3 3 7 3
3 3 7 3 4 654 654
RUN 4 654 654 RUN
L RUN L RUN CH. OFFSET GAIN. RESET
SD CH. OFFSET UP RESET
SD
56 (2.2)
65 (2.6)
RD 1 SET
56 (2.2)
RD 1
65 (2.6)
2 2
L ERR. 3
4 L ERR. 3
GAIN. DOWN 4
142.9 (5.6)
151.9 (5.98)
143 (5.6)
151.9 (5.98)
Unit: mm (inch)
12-15
EXTERNAL
DIMENSIONS
AJ65BT-64RD AJ65BT-G4-S3
(0.37)
(0.37)
9.5
9.5
JPt100 Pt100
63.5 (2.50)
63 (2.48)
NP
2- 4.5 mounting hole 2- 4.5 mounting hole
(0.18)
4.5
B RATE STATION NO.
MITSUBISHI MELSEC AJ65BT-64RD3 E 0 1 E 0 1
~ 10 ~ 1
9 0 1 B RATE STATION NO.
PW E 2E 2 8 2 MITSUBISHI AJ65BT-D35ID2 10 1
RUN E 3E 3 7 3 0 1 0 1 9 0 1
EE 4 6 5 4 6 5 4 2 2 8 2
L RUN PW SD 3
3 3 7
SD MODE OFFSET UP RESET RUN RD CH1 4 6 5 4 6 5 4
RD L RUN ID-ERR.
56 (2.21)
65 (2.56)
SW MODE 9 0 1 SET SW
L ERR. E 2 SD SD 12345678 RESET
0 NORMAL
71 (2.80)
ON
80 (3.15)
E 3 RD RD CH2
1` 4 TEST CH. EE 4 L ERR. ID-ERR.
9 TEST GAIN DOWN
READER WRITER
CH1 CH2
142.9 (5.63)
151.9 (5.98)
4.5 161 (6.34)
(0.18)
170 (6.70)
AJ65BT-D35ID2 AJ65SBT-RPT
(0.37)
9.5
JPt100 Pt100
40 (1.58)
63 (2.48)
NP
20 (0.79)
118 (4.65)
2- 4.5 mounting hole 109 +10 (Mounting pitch)
(0.43)
2-4.5 5.1 Mounting hole (M4 mounting screw)
11
B RATE STATION NO.
MITSUBISHI MELSEC AJ65BT-64RD3 E 0 1 E 0 1
~ 10 ~ 1
9 0 1
PW PW TEST ERR. SD RD SD RD B RATE
(0.65)
E 2E 2 8 2
TEST4 2 1
16.5
RUN E 3E 3 7 3
EE 4 6 5 4 6 5 4
L RUN ON
SD TWI. OPT.
MODE OFFSET UP RESET
(0.30)
50 (1.97)
RD AJ65SBT-RPS
56 (2.21)
65 (2.56)
9 0 1
7.5
SW MODE SET
L ERR. E 2
0 NORMAL DA DG +24V 24G
E 3
1` 4 TEST CH. EE 4
DB SLD (FG)
7.9 (0.31)
9 TEST GAIN DOWN
DIN rail
OUT IN
4 (0.16)
142.9 (5.63)
151.9 (5.98)
AJ65SBT-RPS/RPG AJ65BT-RPI-10A/10B
7 mounting hole (M6 mounting screw) 3- 7 16 mounting hole (M6 mounting screw)
44.0 (1.73)
40 (1.57)
B RA TE
78
100.0 (3.94)
45.0 (1.77)
84.0 (3.31)
40.0 (1.58)
2 3
ST NO.X 10
78
5
2 3
ST NO.X 1
78
87.3 (3.44)
5
2 3
+1
78.3 0 (3.09 +0.04
0 ) (Mounting pitch)
2-4.5 5.1 Mounting hole
(M4 mounting screw)
7.5 (0.30)
16.5 0.65)
PW TEST ERR. SD1 RD1 SD2 RD2 B RATE

RESET
TEST
4 2 1 35.5 (1.40) 130.0 (5.12)
57.5 (2.27) 8.0 (0.32) 145.0 (5.71)
IN OUT ON
161.0 (6.34)
AJ65SBT-RPT
12.0 (0.47) 128.0 (5.04)
50 (1.97)
DA1 DG1 +24V 24G DA2 DG2 NC NC

DB1 SLD (FG) DB2 SLD (FG)
IN OUT
Optical axis adjusting
7.9 (0.31) angle 4 up/down
42
and side-to-side
DIN rail
35.5 (1.40)
2.0 (0.08)
4 (0.16)
Unit: mm (inch)
12-16
13.1 Partner Products
PC CPU Modules Appearance
This PC CPU module is mountable on the Q series PLC
PPC-CPU686
base (2 slots occupied) to provide PC/AT compatible
KB/MOUSE PC CARD
CONTEC 2 1
RDY B.
functions.
RUN
ERR. USER
BAT.
EXIT
B.STOP
B.RST B.
Features
RUN
SERIAL
RESET
USB
(1) The module realizes personal computer functions on EX.I/F
a PLC base, therefore downsizing the device/control

RGB
box. 100
(2) Environmental resistance and noise resistance are on FD UTP

IDE
Factory Automation levels. The use of an ATA flash

card and silicon disk drive has resolved the problems Specifications
of HDD life and vibration resistance. Therefore, the
Type PPC-CPU686(MS)-64 PPC-CPU686(MS)-128
industrial personal computer or personal computer
MPU Mobile Celeron Processor_LP 400MHz
can be replaced worry free.
Memory 64MB 128MB
(3) The PLC CPU can execute the Sequence control
Video memory 2MB
system, and the PC CPU can execute the information
USB 2 channels (1 channel as extra connector)
processing side, therefore achieving integration of Serial 2 channels (D-SUB 9P) (1 channel as extra
control and information processing, configuring an connector)
optimum system. Parallel 1 channel (extra connector)
(4) The introduction of MX Component, GT Soft GOT, PS2 Mini DIN 6P
Windows compatible commercially available I mouse/ Can be used simultaneously by conversion
/ keyboard cable.
software and user application software allows
F LAN 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
configuration of a highly flexible system.
Display Analog RGB H-Dsub 15P
(5) The built-in Ethernet communication port helps you
FDD 26P half connector (for connection to FDD
configure a system that utilizes the Internet/intranet manufactured by Contec Ltd )
technology such as E-mail and Web access. PC card PCMCIA, CardBus
(6) A PC card available on the market can be used for Type I, II 2 or Type III 1 13
flexible system expansion. Silicon disk Separate module (PCC-SDD(MS)-32/64/128/
(7) The built-in USB port allows you to connect a module 192/320/500/1000)
1 slot occupied
commercially available USB device easily.
Hard disk Separate module (PCC-HDD(MS)-5) 5GB
(8) Using the bus interface driver software enables
module 1 slot occupied
access to almost all I/O and intelligent function
OS Windows® NT4.0, Windows® 2000,
modules from a Microsoft Visual C++ application Windows® NT4.0Embedded
program. (However, some modules may have
(9) restrictions.)
The PC CPU module can operate in a multiple CPU
configuration with PLC CPU and motion CPU, and as
a stand-alone personal computer.
(10) Due to no built-in fans, the module has improved in
maintenance performance. Therefore, the module
can be used in a clean room environment, without
having to worry about air circulated dust particles
contaminating the production line.
13-1
PARTNER
PRODUCTS
51O i f I/O M d l
13.1 Partner Products
GP-IB Module PLC peripheral devices
The GP-IB module is mounted on the Q series PLC base to Peripheral device designed for on-site
communicate with measuring devices through GP-IB line. The EHGP10 handy graphic programmer is a Peripheral
device designed for on-site applications for the
Features
MELSEC-QCPU as well as the QnA and A PLC CPUs. It
(1) The maximum text length that can be communicated at also has high resistance to environment, and can be
one time for send /receive combined is as large as operated easily with the touch panel. (For the QCPU, this
63422 bytes. peripheral device is usable with the high-performance
(2) This module has a master/slave function. model only.)
When the master function is selected, the module Programming unit
operates as a system controller and can send address, The EPU01 programming unit is compatible with the
universal and other commands. When the slave MELSEC-QCPU as well as the QnA and A PLC CPUs, and
function is selected, the module communicates data can edit programs in the CPU, test devices, and monitor
under the command of the system controller. devices. (For the QCPU, this programming unit is usable
with the high-performance model only.)
Specifications
Type EQGPIB
Number of Max. 15 units (including this module)
connectable units
Connection cable Between module and device, between
length devices: Within 2m
(Within a total of 20m in a single EHGP10
system) handy graphic programmer
Max. text length 63422 bytes for send and receive
combined
Data transfer Transfer speed of the slowest device Factory Automation Goods
speed among the connected devices
Access from Intelligent function module direct device
The Q series has a wide assortment of useful goods to
program (or FROM/TO instruction) and I/O further expand PLC applications.
instruction
Interface terminal units
Number of 16 points per slot
occupied Available in various output module types, i.e. relay, triac
I/O points
and transistor, and in various connection systems, i.e.
one-wire, two-wire and independent common types, to
support a wide range of output applications.
Interface
terminal units
13-2
PARTNER
PRODUCTS
13.1 Partner Products 51O i f I/O M d l
Product list
Class Product Type Outline
CPU module-compatible Connection cable FA-CBLQC R2 RS-232C cable for connection of personal computer and
communication module, CPU (Mini-DIN 6P male)-(D-Sub 9P female) (3, 5, 15m)
intelligent module USB cable for connection of personal computer and CPU
FA-CBL30USB
compatible (3m)
FA-CBL25P6P RS-232C cable for connection of personal computer,
display or like and CPU (Mini-DIN 6P male)-(D-Sub 25P
male) (3, 5, 14m)
FA-CBL9S9P RS-232C cable for connection of personal computer and
intelligent module (D-Sub 9P male)-(D-Sub 9P female)
(3, 5, 15m)
Optical converter FA-OPT232 Optical converter for connection of RS-232 device
Conversion cable FA-CBL25S Conversion cable for connection of optical converter
(0.2m)
Conversion adaptor FA-A25S Conversion adaptor for connection of optical converter
Fiber-optic cable FA-FB M Fiber-optic cable for connection of optical converter
(within enclosure, indoors, portable, outdoors)
DC: Input, output module Quick connector type FA-CB XY Quick connector type 8- or 16-point distributed module
(connector type) distributed module for DC
compatible Connector/terminal block FA-TB XY Terminal block type 8- or 16-point distributed module or 32-point
conversion module terminal block module for DC
Connection cable FA-CBL FMV Cable for connection of input or output module and quick
connector type distributed module or connector/terminal
block conversion module
FA-(F)CBL MMH Cable for connection of quick connector type distributed
modules or terminal block type distributed modules
AC/DC: Input, output PLC/terminal block FA-TB161AC Terminal block conversion module for AC/DC, 16
module (terminal conversion module points/common, 1- or 2-wire type
block type) Connection cable FA-CBL TD Cable for connection of input or output module and
compatible PLC/terminal block conversion module
DC: Output module Interface terminal unit FA-TH16Y Relay, triac or transistor output terminal unit (16 points) 13
(connector type) Connection cable FA-CBL FM2V Cable for connection of interface terminal unit, 40 cores
compatible FA-CBL MMH20 Cable for connection of interface terminal unit, 42 cores
Positioning module Connection cable FA-CBLQ75 Cable for connection of positioning module and servo
compatible amplifier (for QD75)
FA-CBLQ70 Cable for connection of positioning module and servo
amplifier (for QD70)
Thermocouple input Converter module FA-TB20TD Terminal block module for Q64TD
module compatible Connection cable FA-CBLQ64TD Cable for connection of Q64TD terminal block module
13-3
14. PROGRAMMING
14.1 Sequence Programs
14.1.1 Basic model QCPU: Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
Programming Software/GX Developer Operating Environment

Version 7 or later The recommended operating environment is as follows.
Basic model QCPU sequence programs use GX Operating System Windows95, Windows98,
WindowsMe, Windows2000,
Developer Version 7 or later (hereafter referred to as "GX WindowsNT Workstation 4.0
Developer"). (Note 1) GX Developer functions include, CPU Pentium133MHz or higher
recommended (Note 1)
sequence programming in ladder and list modes, network Memory 32MB or more recommended (Note 2)
parameter setting, sequence program and network Hard disk At installation 150MB or more
free space At execution 150MB or more
operating status monitoring, forced data value changes, Display Resolution of 800 600 pixels or more
and I/O signal ON/OFF. Note 1: Pentium 150MHz or higher is recommended when used
Note 1: The product mentioned above is a single-license product with WindowsMe.
Note 2: 64MB or more memory is recommended when used with
that can be used on a single personal computer. Windows 2000.
Also, multi-license products are available that allow the Programming Languages
number of licenses to be selected by the user. Please
The Basic model QCPU can be programmed in both
confirm their types in the model list given at the end of
ladder and list mode.
this manual.
GX Simulator is used to simulate sequence programs, i.e. Ladder mode
for debugging etc. GX Configurator is used for setting data The ladder mode is a programming method based on the
of various intelligent function modules such as analog to concept of a relay control circuit and allows programming in
digital and digital to analog conversion modules, also other representations close to relay control sequence circuit.
software programs can be added to (additionally installed Programming is done by placing contacts, coils and other
in) GX Developer. GX Developer is an easy-to-understand, symbols/used device numbers on the screen. The ladder
programmed on the screen is converted into a sequence
easy-to-operate software environment, since various
program executable in the Q mode by conversion
software programs can be used in the same operating
operation.
environment with similar operability.
Left to right Device number
Function List 1) 2) 7) 8) 9)
10)
X0 X1 X5 X6 X7
0 Y10
The following table shows the main functions of GX 3) 4)
X2 X3 5)
Developer applicable to the Basic model QCPU. Top to bottom Contact symbol
6)
X4 Coil symbol
Connection method RS232, MELSECNET/H, CC-Link, Ethernet,
serial communication module (including via
modem) 11)
Programming language Ladder, list 10 END
Program editing Ladder, list 1) to 11) indicate the order of sequence program operations.
Program conversion A/Q conversion, Q/QnA conversion 14
Comment editing Device comment, note, statement editing List mode
Network setting MELSECNET/H, CC-Link, Ethernet The list mode is a programming method of representing Q
parameter settings
Monitoring Ladder monitoring, program monitoring, mode instructions in execution order in a list format.
network monitoring, CPU module internal Contacts, coils and other symbols are replaced by Q mode
device data monitoring
Test Timer/counter set value changing, CPU programming instructions.
module internal device data changing The sequence program created in the list mode can be
Help CPU module error, special relay/ register,
key operation displayed in the ladder mode for confirmation.
0 LD X0 1)
1 AND X1 2)
2 LD X2 3)
3 AND X3 4)
Execution of step 4 ORB 5)
0 to END instruction 5 OR X4 6)
6 AND X5 7)
in order
7 AND X6 8)
8 AND X7 9)
9 OUT Y10 10)
10 END 11)
Step number
14-1
PROGRAMMING 14.1 Sequence Programs
14.1.1 Basic model QCPU:
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
Main Routine Program Interrupt Program
A main routine program is a program that starts at its An interrupt program starts at an interrupt pointer (I ) and
beginning (step 0) and ends at END/FEND. ends at the IRET instruction. It is run after a temporary
(FEND is used when creating a subroutine program or suspension of a main or sub routine program when an
interrupt program after a main program.) interrupt condition is true. (The interrupt program is
executed when an interrupt is enabled by the EI
When the execution condition of a program becomes true,
instruction.)
operation is performed from step 0 to END/FEND.
This program can respond quickly without being
0 step influenced by the scan time of a sequence program.
Indicates program run.
Main routine Create an interrupt program after a main routine program
program (after FEND).
An interrupt program can be run by
(1) Interrupt request from interrupt module (QI60)
Return to step 0. (2) Interrupt request by internal timer
Interrupt from QI60 interrupt module
END/FEND END/FEND
An interrupt program is run under an external interrupt
END processing condition.
Only one QI60 module may be used with one CPU module
and one module can run 16 different interrupt programs (I0
Subroutine Program
to I15).
A subroutine program is run when it is called by CALL P , Interrupt request by internal timer
An interrupt program can be run at intervals of 10ms,
and starts at a pointer (P ) and ends at the RET
20ms, 40ms or 100ms (these are default values and can
instruction.
be changed in increments of 1.0ms, between 2ms and
The number of steps can be reduced if a program
1000ms).
executed several times during one scan or a program
executed only when a condition holds is written as a Macro Instructions
subroutine program. Create a subroutine program after a
The macro instruction function is designed to register a
main routine program (after FEND).
ladder pattern often used by the user as a single
CPU module
Program A
instruction to utilize it any number of times (macro
Standard RAM
Main routine program
Write File of
utilization), i.e. The user can create an original instruction.
program A
Using the macro instruction allows a ladder pattern made
FEND
up of multiple instructions to be represented as a
P0 Y10
single-line instruction, therefore improving the program
RET layout and program standardization.
Subroutine
program
P8 Y11 In macro registration, registering the devices that are to be
changed for utilization (variables) as VD0 to VD9 results in
RET
easier changing of devices.

P1 Y12
By setting actual devices to variables VD0 to VD9 for
RET
macro instruction, these preset devices are used for
END
conversion into a sequence program.
14-2
14.1 Sequence Programs PROGRAMMING
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
Device Type List

Device type list
The following table lists the device names and points (default value) that can be used in the Basic model QCPU range.
Note that the device can be changed according to the number of points and user application.
Default Value Parameter Setting
Class Type Device Name
Number of points Range of use Range
Input 2048 points X0 to X7FF
Output 2048 points Y0 to Y7FF
Link special relay 1024 points SB0 to SB3FF
Internal relay 8192 points M0 to M8191
Bit device
Latch relay 2048 points L0 to L2047
Annunciator 1024 points F0 to F1023
Edge relay 1024 points V0 to V1023
Internal user device
Link relay 2048 points B0 to B7FF Changeable within
Timer 512 points T0 to T511 16.4k words
Retentive timer 0 points (ST0 to ST511)
Counter 512 points C0 to C511
Word device
Data register 11136 points D0 to D11135
Link register 2048 points W0 to W7FF
Link special register 1024 points SW0 to SW3FF
Function input 16 points FX0 to FXF
Bit device Function output 16 points FY0 to FYF
Special relay 1024 points SM0 to SM1023 Fixed
Internal system device Function register 5 points FD0 to FD4
Word device
Special register 1024 points SD0 to SD1023
Macro instruction
Other 10 points VD0 to VD9
argument
Index register Word device Index register 10 points Z0 to Z9
0 point — Q00JCPU fixed
File register Word device File register R0 to R32767
32k points Q00/Q01CPU fixed
(ZR0 to ZR32767)
Nesting — Nesting 15 points N0 to N14
Pointer 300 points P0 to P299
Pointer —
Interrupt pointer 128 points I0 to I127
Fixed
Network No. setting — J1 to J255
Others — Q00J : U0 to U0F
I/O No. setting —
Q00/Q01 : U0 to U3F
14
Decimal constant K-2147483648 to K2147483647
Hexadecimal constant H0 to HFFFFFFFF
Constant —
Character string
"ABC", "123" (Note 3)
constant
Note 1: The contacts and coils of the timers, retentive timers and counters are bit devices and their current values are word devices.
Note 2: The inputs, outputs, step relays, link special relays and link special registers cannot be changed from their default values.
Note 3: The character string constants may be used with the $MOV instruction (character string data transfer) only.
14-3
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
Device explanations Latch relays (L)

Latch relays are auxiliary relays used in a CPU module
Inputs (X)
and latched (backed up at power failure).
Inputs are designed to give commands and data from
external devices, e.g. pushbuttons, select switches, limit (Operation results are held at power-on or CPU module
switches and digital switches, etc., to the PLC. reset.)
Inputs are available as "refresh inputs" and "direct access They turn off when the latch clear operation is done, or
inputs". when remote latch clear operation is done using GX
(1) Refresh inputs
Developer.
Input signals that are inputted all at once from all input
Outputs (Y) are used to export the control results of a
modules at the refresh of END processing.
These inputs are specified as X in a sequence program.
program. Annunciators (F)
(2) Direct access inputs Annunciators are internal relays designed for detection of
Input signal imported from an input module every time equipment fault/failure.
a contact instruction is executed.
When annunciators are turned on, the special relay
These inputs are specified as DX in a sequence
(SM62) turns on and the actual quantity of annunciators
program.
(They cannot be used with instructions for digit turned on and their numbers are stored in the special
specification or as inputs specified for MELSECNET/H registers (SD62 to SD79). Therefore, using annunciators
refresh when a bit device is used as in the MOV in a failure detection program allows you to check for
instruction.) equipment faults/failures and their status by monitoring the
Outputs (Y)
special registers (SD62 to SD79) after the special relay
Outputs are used to provide the control results of a
(SM62) has turned on.
program from the PLC to external devices, e.g. solenoids,
signal lamps, digital displays, etc. Note that turning on any annunciator lights up the ERR.
Outputs are available as "refresh outputs" and "direct LED of the Basic model QCPU.
access outputs". SET F50 SET F25 SET F1023
(1) Refresh outputs
Output signals are exported all at once from all output SD62 0 50 50 50
modules at the refresh of END processing. SD63 0 1 2 3
These outputs are specified as Y in a sequence SD64 0 50 50 50
program. SD65 0 0 25 25
(2) Direct access outputs SD66 0 0 0 1023 Up to 16 annunciator
Output signals are exported from an output module SD67 0 0 0 0 numbers can be stored.
every time a coil instruction is executed.

These outputs are specified as DY in a sequence SD79 0 0 0 0
program.
(They cannot be used with instructions for digit
specification or as outputs specified for Edge relays (V)
MELSECNET/H refresh when a bit device is used as in Edge relays are devices that record operation results,
the MOV instruction.) starting at the beginning of a ladder block, and can be
Internal relays (M) used as contacts only.
Internal relays are auxiliary relays used in a CPU module
An edge relay is used to perform operation on its leading
and not latched (not backed up at power failure).
edge (OFF ON) in an index-qualified structured
(They turn off at power-on, CPU module reset and latch
clear operation.) program.
Outputs (Y) are used to export the control results of a X0 X1 X10 V1
program.
Edge relay
Stores operation results of X0, X1 and X10.
14-4
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
Link relays (B) Counters (C)

Link relays are CPU module devices (relays) used to Counters are of the up-counting type. They count out and
refresh link relays (LB) in a MELSECNET/H network the contact turns on when its current value reaches its set
module to the CPU module or to refresh the CPU module value.
data to the link relays (LB) in the network module. A counter turns on/off its coil, updates its current value,
Use the refresh parameters of the network parameters to
and turns on its contact when the OUT C instruction is
set the refresh ranges of LB and B.
executed.
CPU module MELSECNET/H network module
Link relays Link relays (At END processing, present value update and contact
B0 LB0
Link refresh ON/OFF are not executed.)
Link refresh setting range
Use RST C to reset the count value of a counter.
Interrupt counters
An interrupt counter is designed to count the number of
Link special relays (SB)
interrupts that occurred, and updates its current value
Link special relays are internal relays that indicate the
when an interrupt factor is generated.
communication states/fault detections of MELSECNET/H
network modules. Set in the parameters the first counter number used with
interrupt counters. (256 points are occupied, starting with
Step relays (S)
the first counter number.)
Step relays are provided for future expansion and cannot
An interrupt counter does not count up. Therefore, when
be used.
using it for control, read the current value of the interrupt
Timers (T)
counter using the MOV or similar instruction, compare it
Timers are of the up-timing type. They start timing when its
with the set value using comparison instructions (=, <=,
coil turns on, and times out with its corresponding contact
etc.), and turn on/off the internal relay (M), etc.
turned on when its current value reaches or exceeds its
Use RST C to reset the count value of an interrupt
set value.
counter.
There are low-speed, high-speed, low-speed retentive and
Data registers (D)
high-speed timers, which are different in specifying
Data registers are devices designed to handle numerical
method.
data.
A retentive timer is designed to hold its current value if its
One data register can store 16-bit data (-32768 to 32767
coil turns off, and resumes timing from the held current
or 0H to FFFFH) and two consecutive points (e.g. D0 and
value when the coil turns on again.
D1) can store 32-bit data (-2147483648 to 2147483647 or
A timer turns on/off its coil, updates its current value, and
0H to FFFFFFFFH).
turns on/off its contact when the OUT T or OUTH T
instruction is executed. Link registers (W)
(Current value updating and contact on/off are not CPU module side devices for refreshing the data of link 14
executed in END processing.) registers (LW) in an MELSECNET/H network module
Precaution for using timers similar. One point of link register can store 16-bit data
(1) Do not describe the same timer in multiple OUT T or (-32768 to 32767 or 0H to FFFFH) and two consecutive
OUTH T instructions during one scan. points (e.g. W0 and W1) can store 32-bit data
(2) Do not use a CJ instruction or similar to jump the coil (-2147483648 to 21473647 or 0H to FFFFFFFFH).
processing of a timer while the coil of the timer is on. CPU module MELSECNET/H network module
Link registers Link registers

Specifying methods and timing ranges of timers W0 LW0
Link refresh
Specifying Timing Range Timing Link refresh setting range
Method Default Setting range Range

Low-speed OUT T 100ms 1ms to 1000ms
timer (1ms increments)
High-speed OUTH T 10ms 0.1ms to 100ms Setting Link special registers (SW)
timer (0.1ms increments) increments
Link special registers are designed to store the
Low-speed OUT ST 100ms 1ms to 1000ms on the left
retentive timer (1ms increments) 32767 communication states and fault definitions of an
High-speed OUTH ST 10ms 0.1ms to 100ms MELSECNET/H network module.
retentive timer (0.1ms increments)
14-5
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
Function devices (FX, FY, FD) Index registers (Z)

Function devices are used in a subroutine program An index register is used for index qualification (indirect
provided with arguments. specification) of a device used in a sequence program.
As the devices from subroutine call arguments are Index qualification uses one index register and is specified
substituted to the Function devices, you can use the same by 16-bit data (-32768 to 32767 or 0H to FFFFH).
subroutine program without being conscious of the other X0
subroutine program call sources. MOV K-1 Z0 -1 is stored in Z0.
(1) Function inputs (FX)
X0 Data of D10Z0=
Used to transfer ON/OFF data to a subroutine
MOV D10Z0 D0 D{(10+(-1)}=
program. D9 is stored in D0.
(2) Function output (FY) Index qualification
Used to transfer the operation result (ON/OFF data) of
File registers (R/ZR) (Unavailable for Q00JCPU)
a subroutine program to a subroutine program call
File registers are devices for constant data storage and
source.
data register expansion applications. Unlike those of the
(3) Function register (FD)
data registers (D), the stored values of the file registers in
Used to transfer data between a subroutine call source
the built-in standard RAM (drive 3) of the CPU module are
and subroutine program.
Example
not cleared at power-on/CPU module reset.
When FX0 and FD1 are used in a subroutine program, specifying the subroutine program call instructions
M0 and D0 passes ON/OFF data of M0 to FD0 and data of D0 to FD1.
The file register capacity is 32k points (R0 to 32767/ZR0 to
[Subroutine program call source] [Subroutine program]
ZR32767).
X0
CALL P0 M0 D0 P0
FX0
MOV FD1 R0 Nesting (N)
Nesting are devices used with master control (MC, MCR)
RET instructions.
Pointers
Pointers are devices used with branch instructions and
Special relays (SM)
300 points are available for a program run by a CPU
Special relays store the states (failure diagnoses, system
module.
information, etc.) of a CPU module.
The pointers are used in the following applications.
Special registers (SD) (1) Specify the destination of jump instruction (CJ, SCJ,
Special registers store the states (failure diagnoses, JMP)
system information, etc.) of a CPU module.
(2) Pointer for specifying the call destination of the
Link direct devices (J \ ) subroutine call instruction (CALL, CALLP)
Link direct devices are a way to specify direct access to The pointer can be used to call a jump or subroutine
link devices in a MELSECNET/H network module. program within a program.
Intelligent function module devices (U \G )
Intelligent function module devices are a way to specify CALL P0
direct access from a CPU module to the buffer memory of

FEND
an intelligent function module mounted on a main or
extension base unit. P0
RET
END
Pointer
14-6
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
Interrupt pointers (I) Instructions Usable with the Basic Model

An interrupt pointer is a device used as a label at the QCPU
beginning of an interrupt program. 128 points (0 to I127)
Refer to Chapter 15, Section 15.1.4 for the instructions
are available. (The same interrupt pointer number cannot
usable with the Basic model QCPU.
be used.) Usable interrupt pointer numbers and interrupt
factors are as shown in the following table.
I No. Interrupt Factor Priority
I0 First point 1
I1 Second point 2
I2 Third point 3
I3 Fourth point 4
I4 Fifth point 5
I5 Sixth point 6
I6 Seventh point 7
I7 Eighth point 8
Interrupt by QI60
I8 Ninth point 9
I9 Tenth point 10
I10 Eleventh point 11
I11 Twelfth point 12
I12 Thirteenth point 13
I13 Fourteenth point 14
I14 Fifteenth point 15
I15 Sixteenth point 16
I16 to I27 Not used —
I28 100ms 20
Interrupt by
I29 40ms 19
internal timer
I30 20ms 18
(Note 1)
I31 10ms 17
I32 to Not used —
I127
Note 1: The internal timer limits indicate the default time values.
They can be changed using the parameters, between
2ms and 1000ms in 1ms increments.
14
14-7
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
Comparison between Basic model QCPU Differences in timer and counter processing
and A/AnS systems
Since the timer and counter processing systems are
As compared to the A/AnS series instructions, the
different between the A/AnS and Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU,
following instructions and others have been changed.
note the following when utilizing them in a program.
Common instructions Instruction Processing
Timer Current value updating and contact ON/OFF,
Added instructions
which were performed at END processing, are
As compared to the A/AnS series, a large number of
executed when OUT T instruction is
instructions have been added to the Basic model QCPU. executed.
Use the most appropriate instructions from among the When the setting is 0, the timer times up the
range of instructions available for programming. instant the OUT T instruction is executed.
Instructions to be corrected for utilization Counter Current value updating and contact ON/OFF,
which were performed at END processing, are
The following instructions must be corrected when a
executed when OUT C instruction is
program is utilized because they are different in usage
executed.
method from those of the A/AnS.
Class Instruction Name
Failure check CHK
Instructions for intelligent function
Carry reset CLC modules/special function modules
LED indication instruction LEDA, LEDB
When using an AnS series program after conversion into a
Display reset LEDR
Local station data read LRDP Q mode program, the following should be noted if the
Local station data write LWTP conversion source A series program includes special
Remote I/O station data read RFRP function module-dedicated instructions.
Remote I/O station data write RTOP
When changing A/AnS series special function
Carry set STC
Microcomputer program call SUB modules/network modules for Q series intelligent
Retentive timer OUT T function modules/network modules
Rotation RCL, RCR, ROL, ROR, DRCL, Dedicated instructions can be used with some of the Q
DRCR, DROL, DROR
Bit check SUM, DSUM
series intelligent function modules/network modules.
ASCII character string conversion ASC Usable dedicated instructions are given in the explanation
Search SER sections of the corresponding intelligent function
Other AnA/AnU dedicated instructions LEAD/LEDB
modules/network modules.
14-8
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
Comparison between Basic model QCPU Class Instruction Name

File set QDRSET,QCDSET
and QnA/Q2AS
Output to peripheral devices MSG,PKEY
As compared to the QnA/Q2AS series instructions, the Program instructions PSTOP,POFF,PSCAN,
following instructions and others have been changed. PLOW
Numerical key input from keyboard KEY
Common instructions Write to EEPROM EROMWR
Deleted instructions Sampling trace set (Note 1) STRA
The following instructions have been deleted from Basic Sampling trace reset (Note 1) STRAR
model QCPU. Status latch set SLT
Class Instruction Name Status latch reset SLTR

Real number data comparisons E=,E< >,E> Program trace trigger PTRA
E<=,E<,E>= Program trace reset PTRAR
Character string data comparisons $=,$< >,$> LED indication of ASCII code LED
$<=,$<,$>=
LED indication of comment LEDC
Addition, subtraction, multiplication and E+,E-,E*,E/
Resets annunciator and display unit display LEDR
division of real number data
Floating decimal point data transfer EMOV PID control Data setting PIDINT
Conversion from floating decimal INT,DINT,FLT PID control PIDCONT
point to BIN DFLT The above instructions have been deleted since the Basic model
Complement to 2 ENEG
QCPU does not have the corresponding functions.
Up/Down Counter UDCNT1,UDCNT2
Teaching timer TTMR
Instructions to be noted for utilization
Special timer STMR
Nearest path control ROTC The following instructions must be noted when utilized in a
Ramp signal RAMP program because there methods of usage are different
Pulse density SPD from those of QnA/Q2AS.
Pulse output PLSY
Pulse width modulation PWM
Annunciator output, set, reset OUT, SET, RST
Matrix input MTR
BCD 4 digit to BIN data conversion BIN
Subroutine program calls ECALL,FECALL
BCD 8 digit to BIN data conversion DBIN
ASCII print PR,PRC
Clock data read DATERD
Check CHKST,CHK,CHKCIR
Clock data registration DATEWR
From BIN to decimal ASCII BINDA,DBINDA
Interrupt mask IMASK
Conversion between BIN and hexadecimal BINHA,DBINHA,
ASCII HABIN,DHABIN Refresh COM
Conversion between BCD and decimal BCDDA,DBCDDA Network refresh ZCOM
ASCII DABCD,DDABCD
From decimal ASCII to BIN DABIN,DDABIN Instructions for intelligent function
Character string length detection LEN
modules/special function modules 14
BIN to decimal character string STR,DSTR
VAL,DVAL
Character string to floating decimal point ESTR,EVAL
When using a QnA series program after conversion into a
Conversion between ASCII and ASC,HEX Q mode program, the following should be noted if the
hexadecimal BIN
conversion source QnA series program includes special
Character string processing RIGHT,LEFT
MIDR,MIDW function module-dedicated instructions.
INSTR
When changing QnA/Q2AS/A/AnS series special
Floating decimal point to BCD EMOD,EREXP
Trigonometric functions SIN,COS,TAN function modules/network modules for Q series
ASIN,ACOS,ATAN intelligent function modules/network modules
BSIN,BCOS,BTAN
BASIN,BACOS,BATAN Dedicated instructions can be used with some of the Q
Conversion between angles and RAD,DEG series intelligent function modules/network modules.
radians
Square root SQR,BSQR,BDSQR Usable dedicated instructions are given in the explanation
Exponent operations EXP sections of the corresponding intelligent function
Natural logarithms LOG modules/network modules.
Random number generation RND
Random number series update SRND
14-9
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
Online Write, Online File Write Remote Operation
The online write function is designed to make partial Remote operation is executed from GX Developer to the
correction to a program that is being executed by the CPU CPU module to perform RUN, STOP, PAUSE, reset or
module (during RUN). As this function allows a program to latch clear of the CPU module, without operating the
be corrected without stopping the operation, it is RUN-STOP switch of the CPU module. Remote operation
convenient to use for adjustment. can be done to the CPU module connected with GX
When partial correction is made to a program, up to 512 Developer or to the CPU module connected by
steps can be corrected by online write at one time. Online MELSECNET/H, Ethernet, CC-Link or serial
write can be used if the program size after correction is communication.
within the program memory size of that CPU module.
Remote run
Performing remote run causes the CPU module put in the
STOP/PAUSE mode by remote stop/pause to go into the
RUN mode.
Remote stop
Performing remote stop causes the CPU module in the
RUN/PAUSE mode to go into the STOP mode (output (Y)
is switched off and operation stopped).
Remote pause
Performing remote pause causes the CPU module in the
RUN mode to go into the PAUSE mode (output (Y) is held
and operation stopped).
Remote reset
Performing remote reset causes the CPU module in the
STOP mode or being stopped by the self-diagnostic
function to be reset (initialized). Device data other than the
specified latched data are cleared.
When making a remote reset, set the corresponding
parameter to "enable", in order to use this feature.
Remote latch clear

Performing remote latch clear causes the CPU module in
the STOP mode to clear the latch-specified/non-latched
device data.
Note that you cannot execute latch clear of the device that
has been set to "disable" clear with the "latch clear key".
14-10
14.1.2 High Performance model QCPU:
Programming Software/GX Developer Operating Environment

Version 4 or later
The recommended operating environment is as follows.
High Performance model QCPU sequence programs use Operating System Windows95, Windows98,
WindowsMe, Windows2000,
GX Developer (Version 4 or later) (hereafter abbreviated WindowsNT Workstation 4.0
to GX Developer) (Note 1). The following can be done by CPU Pentium 133MHz or more
recommended(Note 1)
GX Developer; Sequence programming in ladder, list and Memory 32MB or more recommended (Note 2)
SFC (sequential function chart) languages, entry of Hard disk At installation 150MB or more
comments to the I/O/CPU module internal relays, registers free space At execution 150MB or more
and others, network parameter setting, sequence program Display 800 600 dots or more
operating status monitoring, network operating status Note 1: Pentium 150MHz or higher is recommended when used
monitoring, forced data changes, I/O signal ON/OFF. with WindowsMe.
Pentium 300MHz or higher is recommended for label
Note 1: The product mentioned above is a single-license product programming.
that can be used on a single personal computer. Note 2: 64MB or more memory is recommended when used with
Windows 2000.
Also, multi-license products are available that allow the
64MB or more memory is recommended for label
number of licenses to be selected by the user. Please programming.
confirm their types in the model list given at the end of this
manual.
Programming Languages
GX Simulator is used to simulate sequence programs, i.e. The High Performance model QCPU can be programmed
for debugging etc. GX Configurator is used for setting data
in the ladder, list, SFC (MELSAP3) and MELSAP-L
of various intelligent function modules such as analog to
languages.
digital conversion and digital to analog conversion
modules, also other software programs can be added to Ladder mode
(additionally installed in) GX Developer. GX Developer is
The ladder mode is a programming method based on the
an easy-to-understand, easy-to-operate software
concept of a relay control circuit and allows programming
environment since various software programs can be used
in representations close to relay control sequence circuit.
in the same operating environment with similar operability.
Programming is done by placing contacts, coils and other
Function List symbols/used device numbers on the screen. The ladder
programmed on the screen is converted into a sequence
The following table indicates the major functions of GX
Developer applicable to the High Performance model program executable in the Q mode by conversion
QCPU. operation.
Connection method USB, RS232, MELSECNET/H, CC-Link, Ethernet,
Left to right Device number 14
1) 2) 7) 8) 9)
modem) X0 X1 X5 X6 X7 10)
Programming Ladder, list, SFC, MELSAP-L 0 Y10
language 3) 4)
Program Function block, label X2 X3 5)
standardization Top to bottom Contact symbol
6)
Program editing Editing of ladder, list, SFC, MELSAP-L X4 Coil symbol
Program conversion A/Q conversion, Q/QnA conversion

11)
Comment editing Device comment, note, statement editing END
10
Network setting MELSECNET/H, CC-Link, Ethernet parameter
settings 1) to 11) indicate the order of sequence program operations.
Monitoring Ladder/SFC monitoring, MELSAP-L, function block,
program monitoring, network monitoring, CPU
module internal device data monitoring
Test Timer/counter set value changing, CPU module
internal device data changing
Help CPU module error, special relay/ register, key
operation
Function block is supported by Version 7 or later.
Label is supported by Version 6 or later.
MELSAP-L is supported by Version 5.
14-11
List mode Operation sequence cannot be represented by

ladder
The list mode is a programming method of describing Q
A ladder is represented by combinations of contacts and
mode instructions in execution order in a list format.
Contacts, coils and other symbols are replaced by Q mode coils and its program does not have representations
instructions for programming. corresponding to the operation sequence of the equipment.
The sequence program created in the list mode can be For example, if the equipment has stopped due to some
displayed in the ladder mode for confirmation. fault, the whole program must be examined to find where
0 LD X0 1) the step corresponding to the process at a stop is
1 AND X1 2)
2 LD X2 3) described.
3 AND X3 4)
Execution of step 4 ORB 5) In contrast, an SFC chart is represented in a flowchart
6 AND X5 7)
format, which matches the operation processes of the
in order
7 AND X6 8)
8 AND X7 9)
equipment. Hence, if the fault mentioned above has
9 OUT Y10 10) occurred, once the process that has stopped is found, you
10 END 11)
will know where in the program the corresponding step is
Step number described.
High freedom of design in the ladder
SFC Programming
A ladder is designed in accordance with the rule that a
In addition to programming in the ladder and list languages, closed contact turns on a coil. In other words, it is
the High Performance model QCPU allows programming extremely high in program design freedom and a single
in the SFC (Sequential Function Chart) language. SFC is a operation process of equipment may be programmed in
language suitable to structure and standardize programs, various different ways. This enables different programs to
and enhances ease of understanding since the operation
be written by different engineers, making it difficult to
sequence of the object to be controlled is represented in
standardize programs. It also hinders other persons other
program form. The features of the SFC compared to those
than the designer from understanding the program.
of the ladder are described below.
Compared to this, SFC creates an SFC chart that matches
Features of SFC the operation processes of equipment. Hence, the
freedom of program design is limited, but it is limited to
Complicated interlocks in the ladder
match the operation processes, therefore, persons other
Processing in ladder programs uses the cyclic scan
system, which repeats all steps from the first to the last in than the designer can understand the program easily,
a program corresponding to all operation processes of producing a more standardized program.
equipment to be controlled. Whichever process the Non-sequential control for ladder program
equipment is operating in, this system controls the steps of Within the ladder diagram, program operation is not
all the processes simultaneously. Hence, a program is sequential. Therefore, this feature allows, for example,
designed to include many interlock signals to prevent all
interrupt commands and continuous monitoring to be used.
the process steps from being manipulated. To define
In comparison, with a SFC the program is executed
interlocks, you must fully understand what devices are
sequentially, thus not allowing program interrupts to be
used in all the processes. If you do not understand or
included.
examine them sufficiently, meaningless or duplex interlock
signals may be defined, causing a program to be more However, the High Performance model QCPU, can use
difficult to understand. both types of programs, giving the option of using each
As opposed to this, SFC processes only the program step program as necessary.
corresponding to the present operation process of the
equipment and does not execute the entire steps process
at once. Therefore, only interlock signals in the current
executed process are needed, enabling creation of a
simpler program.
14-12
Basics of SFC time a transition condition is true with a series of

operations ends at an end step, the program is restarted at
An SFC chart consists of a "step" which shows the
the initial step (Note 1).
operation of each process in a series of machine operation Note 1: Only the SFC program in block 0 is restarted at the initial
processes, and a "transition condition" is included, which step, and the SFC programs in and after block 1
shows the transition condition from one process to another. terminate processing at the end step and wait to be
Details of each step and each transition condition are restarted from another block.
described in ladders. The operation of an SFC program
starts at an initial step, the next step is executed every
Machine operation [Operation output and transition condition diagram for each step]
flowchart [SFCdiagram] Workpiece
START switch detection
X0 X1 Conveyor START
Process START
1 operation unit Initial step Y20
operation
Pallet detection
X2
Transition
Tran
condition 1
Pallet clamp
Pallet confirmation,
1 operation unit Step 1 Y21
clamp operation
Clamp confirmation
Transition X3
Tran
condition 2
Drill rotation
Y22
Y22
PLS M0
M0 Drill DOWN
SET Y23
Series of machine Step 2
Drilling operation 1 operation unit X4 Drill DOWN endpoint
operations RST Y23
K20
TO
TO Drill UP
SET Y24
Drill UP endpoint
Transition X5 14
condition 3 Tran
Pallet unclamp
Y25
Unclamp operation,
1 operation unit Step 3 PLS M1
workpiece unloading
M1
RST Y24
X6 Unclamp confirmation Conveyor START
Y20
Transition X7 Workpiece unloaded confirmation

Tran
condition 4
Machining completed 1 operation unit END step
SFC Program
14-13
Performance Specifications of SFC Name Symbol Function

Optional functions
Item Specifications Operation The ST option holds the current step
Number of files 1 file (Note 1) holding active to continue program processing if
Number of blocks Max. 320 blocks (0 to 319) (With the transition condition holds and the
Max. 8192 steps in all blocks ST
Number of SFC steps transition next step is activated. Note that if the
Max. 512 steps in one block check) transition condition holds again, the next
Number of branches Max. 32 step is activated again.
Number of simultaneously Max. 1280 steps in all blocks
Reset The R step allows the coil held by the
activated steps Max. 256 steps in one block
SC/SE/ST option to be reset or the step
Number of operation output Max. 2K steps in one block
R kept activated by the SE or ST option to
sequence steps No restrictions per step
be deactivated, in addition to the
Max. 2K steps in one block
Number of transition condition operation in an ordinary step.
No restrictions per transition
sequence steps
condition
Note 1: You can create one more "SFC program to manage Name SFC Symbol Function
Series Executes the next step
program execution.” which is used to control the start/stop
transition a when the transition
of a necessary program file according to the operation condition is true.
processes of the equipment. Selective Executes only the step
branch whose condition occurs
Operations in SFC Chart a b n
first among multiple
transition conditions
Name Symbol Function arranged in parallel.
Main functions Parallel Simultaneously executes
Step A step is an equipment process unit, branch a all of multiple steps
and is processed until the transition arranged in parallel.
condition described next to that step is
true. Note that when a transition to the
Jump Causes a jump to the step
next step is made, the current step is j
specified within the same
deactivated and the coil described in the
a block.
OUT instruction automatically turns off. j
Initial step A step at the beginning of each block is
called an initial step. Its operation is the
same as that of a step. Memory Capacity
Dummy step As the name indicates, this step is a
dummy and does not include a ladder How to calculate the memory capacity of an SFC program
program. is shown below.
Block start Starts another block and waits for the
step started block to reach its end step. SFC program capacity = 2 + 8 (largest block number + 1) +
(With end
(Step) capacity of block 0 + capacity of block 1
+ ..... + capacity of block n
check)
Capacity of one block = 2 + number of SFC chart steps (refer to
Block start Starts another block. Moves to the next
the following table) + number of ladder
step step when the transition condition is program steps within one SFC step +
(Without true, independently of whether the number of ladder program steps within
end check) started block has reached its end step one transition condition
or not.
End step Terminates the series of processes in Number of SFC chart steps
that block.
Symbol Number of Steps
Optional functions Step (initial, dummy), block start 3
Coil holding The SC option holds the coil ON when
SC Series transition, selective branch, 4 number of transition
moving to next step.
selective coupling conditions
Operation Providing the SE option holds the
Parallel branch 2 + 2 number of branches
holding current step active to continue program
(Without processing if the transition condition Parallel coupling 2 + 2 (number of coupling
transition SE holds and the next step is activated. branches - 1) + 2 number of
check) Note that if the transition condition holds re-branches after coupling
End step, jump 0
again, the next step is not activated
again.
14-14
MELSAP-L Programming MELSAP-L screen makeup

Column number
MELSAP-L is a description format designed to support the Line number
efficiency and component making of GX Developer
(Version 5 or later) sequence program development.
The machine operation order can be programmed by

MELSAP-L and the control including individual machine System start
interlocks can be programmed by a sequence program
Power lamp ON
(ladder/list). Sensor 1
Obstacle detection
Therefore, the control sections of a machine can be
converted into components by programming an operation
sequence and machine control separately.
In addition, you can solve rapidly such problems that the SFC SFC
Step No. Start destination comment comment Reset
output of an active step cannot be provided, since output Transition block No. (step) (transition) destination
step No.
condition No. Jump
Equipment Operation Transition
conditions like interlocks cannot be represented on name output condition
destination
step No.
MELSAP-L steps.
MELSAP-L performance specifications
Example of programming using MELSAP-L
+ sequence program Item Specifications
Number of files 1 (Note 1)
Step
Describe complex Number of blocks Max. 320 blocks (0 to 319)
interlock condition
in ladder. Max. 8192 steps in all blocks
aX0 Number of SFC steps
Start Max. 512 steps in one block
oM70
Up Upper Emergency (Can be
Number of branches Max. 32
Up Down end stop Up
aX1 Y10 converted into Number of simultaneously Max. 1280 steps in all blocks
Upper end components)
Lower Emergency
Down Up end stop Down Number of operation output Max. 2k steps in one block
oM80 Y11
Down sequence steps Max. 512 steps per step
aX2 Max. 2k steps in one block
Lower end Number of transition condition
Machine operation Max. 512 steps per transition
order Machine control sequence steps
condition
Note 1: You can create one more "SFC program to manage
Description format program execution", which is used to control the start/stop 14
Step of a necessary program file according to the operation
oT0 K30 K30 processes of the equipment.
T0
DMOV K10 W0 DM0V K10 W0 Number of SFC chart steps
oMO M0
Transition condition Step (initial, dummy), block 3
X0
aX0 start
X1 Series transition, selective 4 number of transition
bX1 branch, selective coupling conditions
C0 X1 Parallel branch 2+2 number of branches
aC0 & bX1
Parallel coupling 2 + 2 (number of coupling
M0 C0
branches - 1) + 2 number of
(aM0 bT0) & aC0
re-branches after coupling
T0
End step, jump 0
14-15
Label Programming Function List

Label programming is a programming method for The following table describes the restrictions
standardizing programs. on/specifications of label programming using GX
Developer (Version 6 or later).
It has the following advantages.
Program editing Ladder, list (SFC and MELSAP-L unusable)
(1) Label programming allows you to create a general
Program conversion Q/QnA conversion
program and assign devices according to the device Monitoring Monitoring is enabled using label names.
makeup. Therefore, you can easily transfer that Debugging Debugging is enabled using label names.
program to other programs.
(2) Even if the outline of the equipment is not yet Global Variables/Local Variables
determined, a program can be created using labels Global device area setting can be made for D, W, ZR, B,
and can be used as a standard program. When the M, T, ST, C and P.
criteria have been determined, relating the labels and
actual devices enables creation of an actual program
Global variables
easily. Mean the devices that can be used commonly in all
(3) By merely setting the devices and device ranges to be programs when there are multiple label programs.
assigned automatically, you can make device
Local variables
assignment automatically by performing only compile
operation, without being conscious of the device Local variables are devices that can be used in the set
label program only.
names/device numbers. Set local variables per single label program.
As described above, label programming increases design In local variable assignment setting, actual device
efficiency and standardizes programs. addresses can be automatically assigned to label names.
Label program Global/local/automatically assigned device setting screen
Compile
Actual program
Write to PLC
Performing compiling generates the above program,
where label names are displayed in the ladder.
Debugging Label names can be used for monitoring/debugging.
14-16
Function Block function (FB) Features
The FB is a function designed to convert a ladder block, Conversion of program into component (FB)
which is used in a sequence program repeatedly, into a Making a standard program as a single block improves the
component (FB) to utilize it in the sequence program. reusability and readability of the program, therefore
This not only increases the efficiency of program making editing and debugging easier. This ensures ease
development but also reduces programming mistakes to of configuring a large-scale program.
improve program quality. Uniform program quality
Use GX Developer Version 7 or later to convert ladder Reusing the components of a standard program provides
blocks into a FB component. uniform program quality, which does not depend on the
program developer’s technological level. It also prevents
programming mistakes while reusing the components.
Creation of programs process-by-process
The FB can be utilized easily in a sequence program by
drag and drop operation.
Sequence of programming using FB

Definition of FB
Definition of FB definition program and FB variables FB
FB variables
FB definition program
Utilization of FB
Pasting of FB to sequence program Creation of sequence program
14
Debugging
Compile Write to PLC
14-17
Multiple Programs Specifying "which program will be run"

In a PLC, control is generally executed with a single In the High Performance model QCPU, every program is
program. Hence, initialization, automatic operation, managed under a program name.
manual operation, data collection, communication-related
Use a program name to specify "which program will be
processing etc, are described in one program. This results
executed".
in a large program for a complex system thus making it
Set a program name with 8 characters.
difficult to create, debug and maintain the program.
Since the program name and registration time are written
Also, maintenance staff members other than the engineer
who created the program will find it hard to understand the when registering the program in the CPU module, you will
operations of that program. know the program contents and correction time, improving
The High Performance model QCPU allows a program to maintainability.
be divided into multiple programs and processed by
Specifying "how program will be executed."
function or by process. It has such advantages that
program division by purpose makes individual programs Program execution types available for High Performance
smaller and the clear purposes make programs easy to model QCPU are initial execution type, scan execution
understand. In addition, purpose-based program division type, low-speed execution type, fixed scan execution type,
will increase program utilization efficiency, standardizing and wait type.
the programs.
To determine "how program will be executed", specify any
Creation of programs process-by-process of the above execution types in the parameters.
CPU module
Standard RAM/standard ROM
loading process Program A
Division into Machining process Program B

by process
processings Assembling process Program C
unloading process Program D
Creation of programs function-by-function

CPU module
Initial processing Program A
Division into Main processing Program B

by function
Communication
processings processing Program C
Fault processing Program D
For programs to be controlled by High Performance model

QCPU specify, "which program will be run" and "how it will
be run" in the parameters.
14-18
Program Execution Types When running multiple programs on the CPU module, any
of these execution types must be set for each program. It
The following five different execution types can be
should be noted that at least one scan execution type
specified for the High Performance model QCPU.
program must be set. When there is only one program, it
(1) Initial execution type
need not be set. (A program written to the CPU module is
(2) Scan execution type
run as the "scan execution type".)
(3) Low-speed execution type
(4) Fixed scan execution type
(5) Wait type
Power ON/STOP RUN
Initial execution type Executed only once at power ON or STOP

program to RUN
Low-speed execution Run only when "constant scan" or

type program "low-speed program execution time"
has been set
END processing Fixed scan execution Program run at specified cyclic time intervals
type program
14
Run only when execution request is given

Scan type program Wait type program
14-19
Initial execution type When multiple programs have been set as "initial
execution type", they are run in order of lower to higher
An initial execution type program is run only once when program numbers, and END processing is performed
the PLC is powered on or switched from STOP to RUN. when all initial execution type programs are run.
A program that may be run only once to fulfill its purpose, In initial execution type programs, you cannot use
e.g. the initial processing for an intelligent function module, instructions that specify completion devices (instructions
can be set as an initial execution type. Removal of a which need several scans until completion of program run,
program to be run only once from scan execution e.g. network-dedicated instructions).
programs reduces the processing time of the scan
execution programs.
Control with one program Using initial execution type program

Program A
Initial execution type

Initial program
program
Division into initial execution
type program and scan
Program B execution type program
Program run Scan execution type
every scan program
Scan execution type When multiple programs have been set to the "scan
This program is executed cyclically every scan after the
program numbers.
scan where the initial execution type program has been
END processing is performed when all scan execution
run, and execute actual control.
type programs are run.
When the initial execution type program is not present, the
scan execution type program is run when the PLC is
powered on or switched from STOP to RUN.
STOP RUN
Power ON RUN
First scan Second scan Third scan Forth scan
END processing
Initial execution type program
0 END 0 END 0 END

Scan execution type program A
0 END 0 END 0
Scan execution type program B
Scan execution type program C 0 END 0 END
Scan time
14-20
Low-speed execution type Fixed scan execution type

A low-speed execution type program is run only during A fixed scan execution type program is run at every
"constant scan remaining time" or preset "low-speed user-set time (execution cycle).
program execution time". The execution cycle can be set to each fixed scan
If it cannot be completed in the "constant scan remaining execution type program within the range 0.5ms to 60s.
time" or "low-speed program execution time", the program When multiple fixed scan execution type programs have
is suspended once and the remainder of that program is reached their execution cycles at the same time, they are
run at the next scan. This type can be used as a run in order of lower to higher program numbers until all of
processing program which need not be run every scan, e.g.
them are run.
output to printer and data transmission to host personal
computer or similar. Program Execution Control Instructions
When multiple programs have been set to the "low-speed
execution type", they are run in order of lower to higher Program execution control instructions are used to change
program numbers, and low-speed END processing is the program execution type when the CPU module is
performed when all low-speed execution type programs during RUN (during program execution).
are run. These instructions cannot change the execution types of
Note 1: The constant scan function is designed to keep the the programs stored in the standard ROM and memory
program operation processing time (i.e. scan time) card, which are not read to the program memory.
constant so that the signal input - program operation There are four different program execution control
processing - signal output delay time is constant to instructions.
increase the control accuracy of a device. When the
(1) PSCAN instruction
constant scan function is used, the scan time, which
(2) PLOW instruction
normally varies per scan, is fixed to a given period. When
(3) PSTOP instruction
the scan time is shorter than that fixed period, its excess
(4) POFF instruction
time can be used for processing a low-speed execution
program.
PSCAN instruction
Wait type Changes an initial execution type program, low-speed
A wait type program is run only when an execution request execution type program, wait type program or fixed scan
is given. execution type program into a scan execution type
A subroutine program can be described in each scan program at END processing.
program, but can be independent of the scan program and
be used as a wait type program. When used as a wait type PLOW instruction 14
program, that subroutine can be called not only from that Changes an initial execution type program, scan execution
scan program but also from other scan programs. type program, wait type program or fixed scan execution
An interrupt may take place during execution of any scan
type program into a low-speed execution type program at
program. An interrupt program will be visible for users
END processing.
when it is managed as a wait program.
Scan execution type program Scan execution type program
PSTOP instruction
Main routine Main routine
program program
Changes an initial execution type program, scan execution
P100 Sub routine

type program, low-speed execution type program or fixed
program Standby program scan execution type program into a wait type program at
I0
Interrupt program P100 Sub routine END processing.
program
When any program is changed into the wait type program,
I0
Interrupt program the external output (Y) is held. Use the POFF instruction to
ensure that the external output (Y) is switched off when
changed to wait type program.
14-21
POFF instruction that program into a wait type program at the END
processing of the next scan.
This instruction turns off the output of an initial execution
This instruction is used to ensure that the external output
type program, scan execution type program or low-speed
(Y) is switched off at a change to wait type program.
execution type program at END processing and change
PLOW
PSCAN PSCAN
Initial execution type Scan execution type Low-speed execution
program program type program
PSTOP PSTOP PSTOP

POFF POFF POFF
PSCAN PLOW PLOW
PSCAN
PSTOP 1
POFF Fixed scan execution

Wait type program
type program
Main Routine Program Subroutine Program
A main routine program is any of the initial execution, scan A subroutine program is run when it is called by CALL P ,
execution, wait, fixed scan execution and other programs and starts at a pointer (P ) and ends at the RET
which start at its beginning (step 0) and ends at instruction.
END/FEND. The number of the steps can be reduced if a program is
(FEND is used when creating a subroutine program or executed several times during one scan or a program is
interrupting the program after a main program.) executed only when a condition is true to be written as a
When the execution condition of a program is true, subroutine program. Create a subroutine program after
operation is performed from step 0 to END/FEND. any of the main routine programs such as initial execution,
If multiple programs have been set to the same execution scan, wait and cyclic programs (after FEND) or create
type, END processing is performed when the END/FEND them together as wait type programs.
instruction of the last run program is executed. Pointers used in subroutine programs are local and
0 step common pointers. For using in a wait program, the
Main routine common pointers must be assigned. When creating a
program subroutine in any of the initial execution, scan, wait, fixed
scan, assign the common or local pointers to each
program. The subroutine program having local pointers
Returns to step 0 when
only one program is run.
described in any of the initial execution, scan, wait, fixed
END/FEND END/FEND scan cannot be called from the other initial execution, scan
execution, wait and fixed scan execution type programs.
END processing
14-22
Program A CPU module

Number of Modules Number of Mountable
Type
Memory card / Standard RAM Loadable per System Modules per CPU
Main routine program
Write File of A1SI61
Up to a total of one module
program A
AI61 Up to a total of one
FEND
QI60 Up to four modules module
P0 Y10
(Up to three modules when
A1SI61 or AI61 is used)
Subroutine
RET
Interrupt from intelligent function or network
program
P8 Y11 module
The Q series intelligent function and network modules
RET
have predetermined interrupt channels (SI), and the
P1 Y12 parameters assign them to interrupt pointers (I50 to I255).
For example, SI0 is assigned to CH1 count value
RET
coincidence interrupt and SI1 to CH2 count value
END
coincidence interrupt on the QD61, and setting I50 and I51
to the QD61 assigns I50 to SI0 and I51 to SI1, allowing the
Interrupt Program I50 or I51 interrupt program to be run on count value
match.
An interrupt program executes after a temporary
Interrupt requested by internal timer
suspension of the main or sub routine program when an
interrupt condition is true, it starts from interrupt pointer (I An interrupt program can be run at intervals of 10ms,
) and ends at the IRET instruction. (The interrupt 20ms, 40ms or 100ms (these are default values and can
program can be executed when an interrupt enable status be changed in the increments of 0.5ms between 0.5ms
is established by the EI instruction.) and 100ms).
This program can respond quickly without being influenced Interrupt requested due to error occurrence
by the scan time of a sequence program. An interrupt program can be run when an error is detected
Create an interrupt program after any of the main routine by the self-diagnosis of the CPU module.
programs such as initial execution, scan execution, wait The interrupt request made at error occurrence is made
type and fixed scan execution type programs (after FEND)
valid when an execution enable status is established by
or create them together as wait type programs.
the IMASK instruction.
For interrupt pointers used in interrupt programs, the same
interrupt pointer cannot be specified in any of the initial
Macro Instructions
execution, scan, wait, cyclic and other programs.
An interrupt program can be run by The macro instruction function is designed to register a
(1) Interrupt requested from interrupt module ladder pattern often used by the user as a single
(QI60/A1SI61/AI61) instruction to utilize it any number of times (macro
(2) Interrupt requested from intelligent function or network
utilization), i.e. the user can create an original instruction.
module
(3) Interrupt requested by internal timer Using a macro instruction allows a ladder pattern made up
(4) Interrupt requested due to error occurrence of multiple instructions to be represented as a single-line 14
Interrupt from QI60/A1SI61/AI61 interrupt module instruction, therefore improving the program layout and
program standardization.
An interrupt program is run under an external interrupt
In macro registration, registering the devices as VD0 to
condition. VD9 ensures easier changing of devices.
Only one QI60/A1SI61/AI61 module can be used with one By setting actual devices to variables VD0 to VD9 for
CPU module and one module can run 16 different interrupt macro utilization, these preset devices are used for
programs (I0 to I15). conversion into a sequence program.
Note 1: In the QnA PLC, reading a program created using a
The following table indicates the number of QI60, A1S61 macro instruction will cause that macro instruction to be
or AI61 modules that can be used with the High displayed as individual instructions, making the program
seem confusing to readers. In the High Performance
Performance model QCPU. model QCPU, this disadvantage has been corrected so
that reading a program from the PLC will display a macro
instruction in its original form.
Note 2: Use a macro instruction for programming in the ladder/list
mode. Use a function block for label programming.
14-23
Device Type List

Device type list
The following table lists the device names and points (default value) that can be used in the High Performance model
QCPU.
Input 8192 points X0 to X1FFF
Output 8192 points Y0 to Y1FFF
Step relay 8192 points S0 to S511/block
Bit device Internal relay 8192 points M0 to M8191
Internal user device Edge relay 2048 points V0 to V2047
Link relay 8192 points B0 to B1FFF Changeable within
Word device
Link register 8192 points W0 to W1FFF
Function input 5 points FX0 to FX4
Bit device Function output 5 points FY0 to FY4
Word device
Macro instruction
argument
0 to 1018k points
File register Word device File register 0 points —
(1k point increments)
Pointer —
SFC block 320 points BL0 to BL319 Fixed
Bit device
SFC transition device 512 points TR0 to TR511
Others
—
I/O No. setting — U0 to UFF
Constant — Real constant E 1.17549-38 to E 3.40282+38
Character string
"ABC", "123"
constant
14-24
Device explanations Annunciators (F)

Annunciators are internal relays designed for equipment
Inputs (X) fault/failure detection.
Inputs are designed to give commands and data from When annunciators are turned on, the special relay
external devices, e.g. pushbuttons, select switches, limit (SM62) turns on and the actual quantity of annunciators
switches and digital switches etc., to the PLC.
turned on and their number are stored in the special
Inputs are available as "refresh inputs" and "direct access registers (SD62 to SD79). Therefore, using annunciators
inputs". in a failure detection program allows you to check for
(1) Refresh inputs
equipment faults/failures and their status by monitoring the
Input signals that are inputted all at once from all input special registers (SD62 to SD79) after the special relay
modules at the refresh of END processing. (SM62) has turned on.
These inputs are specified as X in a sequence
Note that turning on any annunciator lights up the USER
program. LED of the Q mode CPU module.
(2) Direct access inputs
SET F50 SET F25 SET F2047
Input signal imported from an input module every time
SD62 0 50 50 50
SD63 0 1 2 3
program.
SD64 0 50 50 50
(They cannot be used with the instructions used for the
digit specification or as inputs specified for SD65 0 0 25 25
MELSECNET/H refresh when a bit device is used as in SD66 0 0 0 2047 Up to 16 annunciator

numbers can be stored.
the MOV instruction.) SD67 0 0 0 0
Outputs (Y)
Outputs are used to provide the control results of a SD79 0 0 0 0
program from the PLC to external devices, e.g. solenoids,

signal lamps, digital displays, etc. Edge relays (V)
Outputs are available as "refresh outputs" and "direct Edge relays are devices, which record operation results,
access outputs". starting at the beginning of a ladder block, and can be
(1) Refresh outputs used as contacts only.
Output signals batch-exported from all output modules An edge relay is used to perform operation on its leading
at the refresh of END processing. edge (OFF ON) in an index-qualified structured
These outputs are specified as Y in a sequence program.
program. X0 X1 X10 V1
(2) Direct access outputs
Output signal exported from an output module every
Edge relay
time a coil instruction is executed. Stores operation results of X0, X1 and X10.
These outputs are specified as DY in a sequence
program. Link relays (B)
(They cannot be used with instructions used for digit Link relays are CPU module devices (relays) used to
refresh link relays (LB) in a MELSECNET/H network 14
specification or as outputs specified for
MELSECNET/H refresh when a bit device is used in module to the CPU module or to refresh the CPU module
the MOV instruction.) data to the link relays (LB) in the network module.
Use the refresh parameters of the network parameters to
Internal relays (M) set the refresh ranges of LB and B.
Internal relays are auxiliary relays used in a CPU module CPU module MELSECNET/H network module
and latched (not backed up at power failure). Link relays Link relays
B0 LB0
(They turn off at power-on, CPU module reset and latch Link refresh
Link refresh
setting range
clear operation.)
Outputs (Y) are used to export the control resulting of a
program.
Latch relays (L) Link special relays (SB)
Latch relays are auxiliary relays used in a CPU module Link special relays are internal relays that indicate the
and latched (backed up at power failure). communication states/fault detections of MELSECNET/H
(Operation results are held at power-on or CPU module network modules.
reset.) Step relays (S)
They turn off when latch clear operation is done. Step relays are devices for SFC.
program.
14-25
Timers (T) Data registers (D)

Timers are of the up-timing type. They start timing when its Data registers are devices designed to handle numerical
turned on when its current value reaches or exceeds its data in a CPU module.
set value. One data register can store 16-bit data (-32768 to 32767
high-speed timers, which are different in specifying or 0H to FFFFH) and two consecutive points (e.g. D0 and
method. D1) can store 32-bit data (-2147483648 to 2147483647 or
A retentive timer is designed to hold its current value if its 0H to FFFFFFFFH).
value when the coil turns on again. Link registers (W)
A timer turns on/off its coil, updates its current value, and CPU module devices for refreshing the data of link
instruction is executed. registers (LW) in an MELSECNET/H network module or
(Current value updating and contact on/off are not similar. One point of link register can store 16-bit data
executed in END processing.) (-32768 to 32767 or 0H to FFFFH) and two consecutive
Precaution for using timers
(1) Do not describe the same timer in multiple OUT T or points (e.g. W0 and W1) can store 32-bit data
OUTH T instructions during one scan. (-2147483648 to 21473647 or 0H to FFFFFFFFH).
(2) Do not use a CJ instruction or similar to jump the coil CPU module MELSECNET/H network module
processing of a timer while the coil of the timer is on. Link registers Link registers
(3) Do not use timers in an initial execution, wait, fixed W0 LW0

Link refresh
Link refresh
scan execution and interrupt programs. setting range
Specifying methods and timing ranges of timers

Specifying Timing Range Timing
Method Default Setting range Range Link special registers (SW)
Low-speed 100ms 1ms to 1000ms Setting
OUT T
timer (1ms increments) increments Link special registers are designed to store the
High-speed 10ms 0.1ms to 100ms on the left
timer
OUTH T
(0.1ms increments) 32767 communication states and fault definitions of an
Low-speed 100ms 1ms to 1000ms MELSECNET/H network module.
retentive OUT ST (1ms increments)
timer Function devices (FX, FY, FD)
High-speed 10ms 0.1ms to 100ms
retentive OUTH ST (0.1ms increments) Function devices are used in a subroutine program
timer provided with arguments.
Counters (C) As the devices from subroutine call arguments are
Counters are of the up-counting type. They count out and
substituted to the Function devices, you can use the same
the contact turns on when its current value reaches its set
value. subroutine program without being conscious of the other
A counter turns on/off its coil, updates its current value, subroutine program call arguments.
and turns on its contact when the OUT C instruction is (1) Function inputs (FX)
executed.
Used to transfer ON/OFF data to a subroutine
(In END processing, present value update and contact
ON/OFF are not performed.) program.
Use RST C to reset the count value of a counter. (2) Function output (FY)
Interrupt counters Used to transfer the operation result (ON/OFF data) of
An interrupt counter is designed to count the number of a subroutine program to a subroutine program call
interrupts that occurred, and updates its current value
when an interrupt factor is generated. source.
Set in the parameters the first counter number used with (3) Function register (FD)
interrupt counters. (256 points are occupied, starting with Used to transfer data between a subroutine call source
the first counter number.)
and subroutine program.
An interrupt counter does not count up. Therefore, when Example
using it for control, read the current value of the interrupt When FX0 and FD1 are used in a subroutine program, specifying the subroutine program call instructions
M0 and D0 passes ON/OFF data of M0 to FD0 and data of D0 to FD1.
counter using the MOV or similar instruction, compare it
[Subroutine program call source] [Subroutine program]
with the set value using comparison instructions (=, <=, X0 FX0
P0 MOV FD1 R0
etc.), and turn on/off the internal relay (M), etc. CALL P0 M0 D0

counter. RET
14-26
Special relays (SM) (1) Specified by block changing

Special relays store the states (failure diagnoses, system The file registers used are specified by separating
information, etc.) of a CPU module. them in increments of 32k points (R0 to R32767).
Special registers (SD) When more than 32k points are used, use the RSET
Special registers store the states (failure diagnoses, instruction to select the block used. (Specify file
system information, etc.) of a CPU module. registers with R0 to R32767 in any block.)
Link direct devices (J \ ) RSET K1 R0 designation Memory card
R0
Link direct devices are a way to specify direct access to for block 1
link devices in a MELSECNET/H network module. MOV D0 R0 Block 0
R32767
Link direct devices can access only one network module RSET K2 R0 designation
R0
with a single network number. When multiple network for block 2

Block 1
modules are mounted with the same network number, the MOV D0 R0 R32767
R0
network module with the lowest first I/O number is the Block 2
target of access.
Intelligent function module devices (U \G ) (2) Consecutive specification
Intelligent function module devices are a way to specify The device symbol ZR is used to specify file registers
direct access from a CPU module to the buffer memory of beyond 32k points without changing blocks.
an intelligent function module mounted on a main or File registers in multiple blocks can be managed as a
extension base unit. Intelligent function modules mounted single series of file registers.
on remote I/O stations of an MELSECNET/H network Memory card
MOV D0 ZR32768 ZR0
system cannot be accessed using this instruction.
Block 0
Index registers (Z) ZR32767
An index register is used for index qualification (indirect MOV D0 ZR65536 ZR32768
specification) of a device used in a sequence program. Block 1
Index qualification uses one index register and is specified ZR65535

ZR65536
by 16-bit data (-32768 to 32767 or 0H to FFFFH). Block 2
X0
MOV K-1 Z0 -1 is stored in Z0.
The file register capacity is not fixed. For the register
X0 Data of D10Z0=
capacity that can be secured, please refer to the
MOV D10Z0 D0 D{(10+(-1)}= explanation section of "MODEL SELECTION",
D9 is stored in D0. "MEMORY".
Index qualification
Nesting (N)
File registers (R) Nesting are devices used with master control (MC, MCR 14
File registers are devices used for constant data storage instructions).
or data register expansion applications. They are stored in Pointers
the CPU module built-in standard RAM (drive 3), memory Pointers are devices used with branch instructions.
card (RAM) (drive 1) or memory card (ROM) (drive 2). 4096 points can be used in all programs run by a CPU
Note that the file registers stored in the memory card module.
(ROM) are read-only. When the ATA card is used as a The pointers are used in the following applications.
memory card (ROM), file registers cannot be stored in the (1) Specify the destination of jump instruction (CJ, SCJ,
memory card (ROM). Unlike those of the data registers (D), JMP)
the stored values of the file registers are not cleared at (2) "Local pointers" and "common pointers" are available
power-on or CPU module reset. for specifying the call destination of the subroutine call
File registers can be "specified by block changing" or instruction (CALL, CALLP).
"specified consecutively". Local pointers
Local pointers are used for a jump and subroutine program
call in each program. A call can only be made from within
the same program file where the pointer is expressed.
14-27
Program B Program B Program A Program C

The same
pointer can
CALL P0 CALL P0 be used. CALL P204 P204 CALL P0
FEND FEND FEND RET
P0 P0 P205
Program B
RET RET RET

CALL P205
END END END

FEND
Local pointer Local pointer Common pointer
Common pointers Interrupt pointers (I)

Common pointers are used in a subroutine program called An interrupt pointer is a device used as a label at the
from multiple programs. beginning of an interrupt program and 256 points (I0 to
Common pointers cannot be used together with jump I255) can be used in all programs. (The same interrupt
instruction to other programs (CJ, SCJ, JMP). pointer number cannot be used.) The interrupt pointer
numbers and interrupt factors are as follows.
I No. Interrupt Factor Priority I No. Interrupt Factor Priority

I0 First point 237 I32 (Note 2) General stop error 1
I1 Second point 238 I33 Vacant —
I2 Third point 239 I34 UNIT VERIFY ERR. 2
I3 Fourth point 240 FUSE BREAK OFF
I4 Fifth point 241 SP. UNIT ERROR
I5 Sixth point 242 I35 OPERATION ERROR 3
Error occurrence
I6 Seventh point 243 SFCP OPE. ERROR
Interrupt by interrupt
I7 Eighth point 244 SFCP EXE. ERROR
QI60/A1SI61 (Note 3)
I8 Ninth point 245 I36 ICM. OPE ERROR 4
/AI61
I9 Tenth point 246 FILE OPE. ERROR
I10 Eleventh point 247 I37 WXTEND INS. ERROR 5
I11 Twelfth point 248 I38 PRG. TIME OVER 6
I12 Thirteenth point 249 I39 CNK instruction execution 7
I13 Fourteenth point 250 Annunciator detection
I14 Fifteenth point 251 I40 to I48
— Vacant —
I16 First module 224 149 High-speed 253
0.2ms to 1.0ms
I17 Second module 225 interrupt by internal
(in 0.1ms unit)
timer (Note 4)
I18 Third module 226 I50 to I255
I19 Fourth module 227
I20 Interrupt by Fifth module 228
I21 sequence start Sixth module 229
I22 generating module Seventh module 230
I23 Eighth module 231
I24 Ninth module 232 Intelligent function Using parameter, set which
18 to 223
I25 Tenth module 234 module interrupt intelligent function module will use.
I26 Eleventh module 235
I27 Twelfth module 236
I28 100ms 257
Interrupt by
I29 40ms 256
internal timer (Note
I30 20ms 255
1)
I31 10ms 254
Note 1: The internal timer time limits indicate the default time values. They can be changed using the parameters between 0.5ms and
1000ms in 0.5ms increments.
Note 2: When a stop error occurs, the CPU module stops after executing I32.
Note 3: Error occurrence interrupt is disabled at power-on or reset. When using I32 to 139, enable interrupt with the IMASK instruction.
Note 4: Interrupt factor can be set in 0.1ms unit within the range of 0.2ms to 1.0ms by using the parameter . (Except the Q02CPU.
Supported by function version "B" or later with the first five digits of serial No. "0412" or later.)
14-28
SFC block devices (BL) Local devices

An SFC block device is used to check whether the
Local devices can be used exclusively in each of multiple
specified block of an SFC program is activated or not.
programs, and local devices in a certain program cannot
SFC transition devices (TR)
be accessed by other programs. Hence, using local
An SFC transition device is used to check whether the
devices allows you to do programming without being
specified transition condition of an SFC program is
conscious of other programs.
specified for forced transition or not. CPU module
Network number specified devices (J) When M7000 or later have been set as local devices,
they can be used independently in programs where M7000 or later are executed.
Program A Memory card
A network number specified device is a symbol used to
For program A
specify a network number in a data link instruction. M7000 Internal relay
Y12 ON/OFF data of M7000 ON/OFF
Macro instruction argument devices (VD) M7000
Macro instruction argument devices are used for macro

registration.
Program B
Global Devices and Local Devices For program B
M7000 Internal relay
Y11 M7000 ON/OFF
Among the CPU module devices, the range of "local ON/OFF data of
M7000
device" that can be assigned include internal relays M,

edge relays V, timers T, retentive timers ST, counters C
Local device data is stored into the CPU module built-in
and data registers D. Note that the ranges and devices
standard RAM (drive 3) or memory card (RAM) (drive 1).
where local device assignment is not made are global
The devices usable as local devices are the internal relays
devices.
(M), edge relays (V), timers (T, ST), counters (C) and data
Global devices registers (D) and their ranges are set in parameters.
Using local devices exchanges the local device data of the
Global devices mean devices that can be shared by all
memory card (RAM) or standard RAM and the device data
programs when there are multiple programs. Normally, the
of the CPU module after program runs, increasing the
ranges where local device assignment has not been made
scan time by the exchange time.
and the devices where local device assignment cannot be
The program without local devices, does not affect program
made are all global devices and they can be used from
switching time.
any program.
Exchange time
(when the number of local device points is 1k word)
CPU module
14
Global devices can be shared by running programs. Exchange Time (ms)
Program A Device memory
CPU Type Memory card
Internal relay Standard RAM
M0 M0 ON/OFF (RAM)
Y12
Q02CPU 0.94 + 0.40 n 0.94 + 1.38 n
ON/OFF data of M0
Q02HCPU,Q06HCPU, 0.39 + 0.17 n 0.39 + 0.95 n

Q12HCPU,Q25HCPU
Program B n: Number of program files
Note 1: Exchange time differs from the above when both the
M0
Y11 memory card (RAM) and standard RAM are selected as
ON/OFF data of M0 the save areas of local devices.
14-29
Comparison between High Performance Instructions to be noted for utilization

model QCPU and QnA/Q2AS The following instructions must be noted when a program
is utilized because the usage methods are different from
As compared to the QnA/Q2AS series instructions, the
those of QnA/Q2AS.
following instructions and others have been changed.
Refer to Chapter 2, Section 3.1.3 for the instructions that
Annunciator output, set, reset OUT, SET, RST
can be used with the High Performance model QCPU. Device comment data read COMRD
ASCII code print PRC
Common instructions Error/annunciator display reset LEDR
BCD 4 digit to BIN data conversion BIN
Added instructions
BCD 8 digit to BIN data conversion DBIN
The following instructions have been added to the High Clock data read DATERD
Performance model QCPU. Clock data registration DATEWR
Interrupt mask IMASK
Refresh COM
Module data read UNIRD
Network refresh ZCOM
Trace set TRACE
Routing data read RTREAD
Trace reset TRACER
Routing data write RTWITE
Binary data write S.FWRITE
PID control data setting PIDINIT
Binary data read S.FREAD
PID control PIDCONT
Program loading from RAM card PLOAD
1/2-phase input up/down counter UDCNT1, UDCNT2
Program unloading from SPM PUNLOAD
Pulse density measurement SPD
Loading and unloading PSWAP
Cyclic pulse output PLSY
High-speed file register block transfer PBMOV
Deleted instructions
The following instructions have been deleted from the High Instructions for intelligent function
Performance model QCPU. modules/special function modules
Class Instruction Name When using a QnA series program after conversion into a
Write to EEPROM EROMWR
Q mode program, the following should be noted if the
Sampling trace set (Note 1) STRA
Sampling trace reset (Note 1) STRAR
conversion source QnA series program includes special
Status latch set SLT function module-dedicated instructions.
Status latch reset SLTR When continuously using Q2AS/AnS series
Program trace trigger PTRA
special function modules/network modules with Q
Program trace reset PTRAR
Program trace execution PTRAEXE,
mode
PTRAEXEP The High Performance model QCPU is not compatible
LED indication of ASCII code LED with the A/AnS series special function module/network
LED indication of comment LEDC
module-dedicated instructions. Rewrite all corresponding
The above instructions have been deleted since the High
instructions using the FROM/TO instruction.
Performance model QCPU does not have the corresponding
When changing QnA/Q2AS/A/AnS series special
functions, LEDs, etc.
Note 1: Can be replaced by the TRACE and TRACER
function modules/network modules for Q series
instructions. intelligent function modules/network modules
Dedicated instructions can be used with some of the Q
series intelligent function modules/network modules.
Usable dedicated instructions are given in the explanation
sections of the corresponding intelligent function
14-30
Comparison between Q Mode and A/AnS Differences in timer and counter processing
systems
As compared to the A/AnS series instructions, the
Since the timer and counter processing systems are
following instructions have been changed.
different between the A/AnS and High Performance model
Common instructions QCPU, note the following when utilizing a program.
Instruction Processing
Added instructions
Timer Current value updating and contact
As compared to the A/AnS series, a large number of ON/OFF, which were performed at END
instructions have been added to the Q mode. Use the processing, are executed when OUT T
instruction is executed.
most appropriate instructions from among the range of Counter Current value updating and contact
instructions available for programming. ON/OFF, which were performed at END
processing, are executed when OUT C
Instructions to be corrected for utilization
instruction is executed.
The following instructions must be corrected when a
program is utilized because they are different in usage Instructions for intelligent function
method from those of the A/AnS. modules/special function modules
When using an AnS series program after conversion into a
Main/subprogram switching CHG
Failure check CHK Q mode program, the following should be noted if the
Carry reset CLC conversion source A series program includes special
Index qualification circuit IX function module-dedicated instructions.
LED indication instruction LEDA, LEDB
When continuously using AnS series special
Local station data read LRDP
Local station data write LWTP
function modules/network modules with Q mode
Remote I/O station data read RFRP The High Performance model QCPU is not compatible
Remote I/O station data write RTOP with the A/AnS series special function module/network
Partial refresh RFS
module-dedicated instructions. Rewrite all corresponding
Carry set STC
Microcomputer program call SUB instructions using the FROM/TO instruction.
Extended file register 1-word increment read ZRRD When changing A/AnS series special function
Extended file register 1-word increment write ZRWR modules/network modules for Q series intelligent
Extended file register 1-byte increment read ZRRDB
function modules/network modules
Extended file register 1-byte increment write ZRWRB
Extended file register block transfer BMOVR
Dedicated instructions can be used with some of the Q
Extended file register block change BXCHR series intelligent function modules/network modules.
16-bit integer=>real number conversion FLOAT Usable dedicated instructions are given in the explanation 14
32-bit integer=>real number conversion DFLOAT
sections of the corresponding intelligent function
Direct output, set, reset DOUT, DSET, DRST
Retentive timer OUT T
Rotation RCL, RCR, ROL, ROR,
DRCL, DRCR, DROL,
DROR
Direct reset DRST
Bit check SUM, DSUM
Character string data coupling SADD
Character string data transfer SMOV
ASCII character string conversion ASC
Character string data comparison SCMP
Search SER
Other AnA/AnU dedicated instructions LEAD/LEDB
14-31
Online Change, Online File Change Remote Operation

When partial correction is made to a program, up to 512 Remote operation is executed from GX Developer to the
steps can be corrected by online change at one time. CPU module to perform RUN, STOP, PAUSE, reset or
Online change is a function to make partial correction or latch clear of the CPU module, without operating the
entire change to a program that is being executed by the RUN-STOP switch of the CPU module. Remote operation
CPU module (during RUN). As this function allows a can be done to the CPU module connected with GX
program to be corrected without stopping the operation, it Developer or to the CPU module connected by
is convenient to use for adjustment. MELSECNET/H, Ethernet, CC-Link or serial
communication.
Online change
Remote run
When partial correction is made to a program, up to 512
steps can be corrected by online change at one time. Performing remote run causes the CPU module put in the
Online change can be performed if the program size after STOP/PAUSE mode by remote stop/pause to go into the
correction is within the program memory size of that CPU RUN mode.
module
Remote stop
Online file change
Performing remote stop causes the CPU module in the
This function is not used to make partial correction but
RUN/PAUSE mode to go into the STOP mode (output (Y)
allows a program to be exchanged on a file basis. When
is switched off and operation stopped).
performing this function, the CPU module continues the
processing of the original program file and simultaneously Remote pause
writes a new program file to the free area (Note 1) of the
memory. On completion of new program write, the CPU Performing remote pause causes the CPU module in the
suspends the processing of the original program and starts RUN mode to go into the PAUSE mode (output (Y) is held
the processing of the new program. To perform the above and operation stopped).
processing, the memory must have the free space where
Remote reset
the new program file can be written.
Note 1: You can use the free area of the program memory (drive Performing remote reset causes the CPU module in the
0), RAM card (drive 1) or ROM card (drive 2) (only the STOP mode or being stopped by the self-diagnostic
ATA card can be used as a ROM card).
function to be reset (initialized). Device data other than the
Memory Memory
latch-specified data are cleared.
Running program Deleted When making a remote reset, set the corresponding
On completion of new
New program file is written
to free area of memory.
program write, parameter to "enable", in order to use this feature.
new program processing
New program is starts.
New program
run.
Remote latch clear
In this system, you can exchange not only program files
device data.
but also device comment files or file register files.
Note that you cannot perform latch clear of the device that
Note 2: When a device comment file or file register file is stored in
has been set to "disable" clear with the "latch clear key".
the RAM card (drive 1) or ROM card (drive 2), it must not
be accessed by a program to perform online file change.
Note 3: Performing online change or online file change causes a
delay in program scan time. Depending on the program
file size to be changed online, a significant delay may
take place, so fully ensure safety when performing this
operation.
14-32
14.1.3 Process CPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Programming Software Operating Environment

GX Developer Version 7.12N or later
The recommended operating environment is as follows.
Create the sequence programs of the process CPU using Operating System Windows98,
GX Developer Version 7.12N or later (hereafter WindowsMe, Windows2000,
WindowsNT Workstation 4.0
abbreviated to GX Developer). You can operate the
CPU Pentium 200MHz or more
following by using by GX Developer, sequence recommended
programming in ladder, list and SFC (sequential function Memory 64MB or more recommended
Hard disk At installation 150MB or more
chart) languages, entry of comments to the I/O, CPU free space At execution 150MB or more
module internal relays, registers and others, network Display 800 600 dots or more
parameter setting, sequence program operating status
monitoring, network operating status monitoring, forced Programming Languages
data changes, I/O signal ON/OFF. The process CPU is compatible with ladder, list, SFC
Function List (MELSAP3), and MELSAP-L language for programming
sequence control.
The following table indicates the major functions of GX
Developer applicable with the High Performance model Ladder mode
QCPU. The ladder mode is a programming method based on the
Connection method USB, RS232, MELSECNET/H, CC-Link, Ethernet,
concept of a relay control circuit and allows programming
modem) in representations close to relay control sequence circuit.
Programming Ladder, list, SFC, MELSAP-L
language Programming is done by placing contacts, coils and other
Program Function block, label
standardization
symbols/used device numbers on the screen. The ladder
Program editing Editing of ladder, list, SFC, MELSAP-L programmed on the screen is converted into a sequence
Program conversion A/Q conversion, Q/QnA conversion
program executable in the Q mode by conversion
Comment editing Device comment, note, statement editing
Network setting MELSECNET/H, CC-Link, Ethernet parameter
operation.
settings Left to right Device number
Monitoring Ladder/SFC monitoring, MELSAP-L, function block, 1) 7) 8) 9)
2)
program monitoring, network monitoring, CPU X0 X1 X5 X6 X7 10)
module internal device data monitoring 0 Y10
Test Timer/counter set value changing, CPU module 3) 4)
internal device data changing X2 X3 5)
Help CPU module error, special relay/ register, key Top to bottom Contact symbol
6)
operation X4 Coil symbol
11) 14
10 END
1) to 11) indicate the order of sequence program operations.
14-33
14.1.3 Process CPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
List mode Operation sequence cannot be represented by

The list mode is a programming method of describing Q
ladder
mode instructions in execution order in a list format. A ladder is represented by combinations of contacts and
Contacts, coils and other symbols are replaced by Q mode coils and its program does not have representations
programming instructions. corresponding to the operation sequence of the equipment.
The sequence program created in the list mode can be For example, if the equipment has stopped due to some
displayed in the ladder mode for confirmation. fault, the whole program must be examined to find where
0 LD X0 1) the step corresponding to the process at a stop is
1 AND X1 2)
2 LD X2 3) described.
3 AND X3 4)
Execution of step 4 ORB 5) In contrast, an SFC chart is represented in a flowchart
6 AND X5 7)
format and basically matches the operation processes of
in order
7 AND X6 8)
8 AND X7 9)
the equipment. Hence, if the fault mentioned above has
9 OUT Y10 10) occurred, once the process that has stopped is found, you
10 END 11)
will know where in the program the corresponding step is
Step number described.
High freedom of design in the ladder
SFC Programming A ladder is designed in accordance with the rule that a
In addition to programming in the ladder and list languages, closed contact turns on a coil. In other words, it is
the process CPU allows programming in the SFC extremely high in program design freedom and a single
(Sequential Function Chart) language. SFC is a language operation process of equipment may be programmed in
suitable to structure and standardize programs, and various different ways. This enables different programs to
enhances ease of understanding since the operation be written by different engineers, making it difficult to
sequence of the object to be controlled is represented in standardize programs. It also hinders other persons other
program form. The features of the SFC compared to those
than the designer from understanding the program.
of the ladder are described below.
Compared to this, SFC creates an SFC chart that matches
Features of SFC the operation processes of equipment. Hence, the
freedom of program design is limited, but it is limited to
Complicated interlocks in the ladder match the operation processes, therefore, persons other
Processing in ladder programs uses the cyclic scan
than the designer can understand the program easily,
system, which repeats all steps from the first to the last in
producing a more standardized program.
a program corresponding to all operation processes of
equipment to be controlled. Whichever process the Non-sequential control for ladder program
equipment is operating in, this system controls the steps of Within the ladder diagram, program operation is not
all the processes simultaneously. Hence, a program is sequential. Therefore, this feature allows, for example,
designed to include many interlock signals to prevent all interrupt commands and continuous monitoring to be used.
the process steps from being manipulated. To define In comparison, with a SFC the program is executed
interlocks, you must fully understand what devices are sequentially, thus not allowing program interrupts to be
used in all the processes. If you do not understand or included.
examine them sufficiently, meaningless or duplex interlock However, the process CPU can use both types of
signals may be defined, causing a program to be more programs, giving the option of using each program as
difficult to understand.
necessary.
As opposed to this, SFC processes only the program step
corresponding to the present operation process of the
equipment and does not execute the entire steps process
at once. Therefore, only interlock signals in the current
executed process are needed, enabling creation of a
simpler program.
14-34
14.1.3 Process CPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Basics of SFC time a transition condition is true with a series of

operations ends at an end step, the program is restarted at
An SFC chart consists of a "step" which shows the
the initial step (Note 1).
operation of each process in a series of machine operation Note 1: Only the SFC program in block 0 is restarted at the initial
processes, and a "transition condition" is included, which step, and the SFC programs in and after block 1
shows the transition condition from one process to another. terminate processing at the end step and wait to be
Also, details of each step and each transition condition are restarted from another block.
described in ladders. The operation of an SFC program
starts at an initial step, the next step is executed every
Machine operation [Operation output and transition condition diagram for each step]
flowchart [SFCdiagram] Workpiece
START switch detection
X0 X1 Conveyor START
Process START
1 operation unit Initial step Y20
operation
Pallet detection
X2
Transition
Tran
condition 1
Pallet clamp
Pallet confirmation,
1 operation unit Step 1 Y21
clamp operation
Clamp confirmation
Transition X3
Tran
condition 2
Drill rotation
Y22
Y22
PLS M0
M0 Drill DOWN
SET Y23
Series of machine Step 2
Drilling operation 1 operation unit X4 Drill DOWN endpoint
operations RST Y23
K20
TO
TO Drill UP
SET Y24
Drill UP endpoint 14
Transition X5
condition 3 Tran
Pallet unclamp
Y25
Unclamp operation,
1 operation unit Step 3 PLS M1
workpiece unloading
M1
RST Y24
X6 Unclamp confirmation Conveyor START
Y20
Transition X7 Workpiece unloaded confirmation

Tran
condition 4
Machining completed 1 operation unit END step
SFC Program
14-35
14.1.3 Process CPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Performance Specifications of SFC Name Symbol Function

Optional functions
Item Specifications Operation The ST option holds the current step
Number of files 1 file (Note 1) holding active to continue program processing if
Number of blocks Max. 320 blocks (0 to 319) (With the transition condition holds and the
ST
Max. 8192 steps in all blocks transition next step is activated. Note that if the
Number of SFC steps
Max. 512 steps in one block check) transition condition holds again, the next
Number of branches Max. 32 step is activated again.
Number of simultaneously Max. 1280 steps in all blocks Reset The R step allows the coil held by the
SC/SE/ST option to be reset or the step
Number of operation output Max. 2K steps in one block R kept activated by the SE or ST option to
sequence steps No restrictions per step
be deactivated, in addition to the
Max. 2K steps in one block
Number of transition condition operation in an ordinary step.
No restrictions per transition
sequence steps
condition
Name SFC Symbol Function
Series Executes the next step
program execution." which is used to control the start/stop
transition a when the transition
of a necessary program file according to the operation condition is true.
processes of the equipment. Selective Executes only the step
branch whose condition occurs
Operations in SFC Chart a b n
first among multiple
transition conditions
Name Symbol Function arranged in parallel.
Main functions Parallel Simultaneously executes
Step A step is an equipment process unit, branch a all of multiple steps
and is processed until the transition arranged in parallel.
condition described next to that step is
true. Note that when a transition to the
Jump Causes a jump to the step
next step is made, the current step is j
specified within the same
deactivated and the coil described in the a block.
OUT instruction automatically turns off. j
Initial step A step at the beginning of each block is
called an initial step. Its operation is the
same as that of a step.
Memory Capacity
Dummy step As the name indicates, this step is a
dummy and does not include a ladder
How to calculate the memory capacity of an SFC program
program. is shown below.
Block start Starts another block and waits for the
SFC program capacity = 2 + 8 (largest block number + 1) +
step started block to reach its end step.
(Step) capacity of block 0 + capacity of block 1
(With end
+ ..... + capacity of block n
check)
Capacity of one block = 2 + number of SFC chart steps (refer to
Block start Starts another block. Moves to the next the following table) + number of ladder
step step when the transition condition is program steps within one SFC step +
(Without true, independently of whether the number of ladder program steps within
end check) started block has reached its end step one transition condition
or not.
End step Terminates a series of processes in that Number of SFC chart steps
block.
Step (initial, dummy), block start 3
Optional functions
Coil holding The SC option holds the coil ON when Series transition, selective branch, 4 number of transition
SC selective coupling
moving to next step. conditions
Operation Providing the SE option holds the Parallel branch 2 + 2 number of branches
holding current step active to continue program Parallel coupling 2+2 (number of coupling
(Without processing if the transition condition branches - 1) + 2 number of
transition SE holds and the next step is activated. re-branches after coupling
check) Note that if the transition condition holds End step, jump 0
again, the next step is not activated
again.
14-36
14.1.3 Process CPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
MELSAP-L Programming MELSAP-L screen makeup

Column number
MELSAP-L is a description format designed to support the Line number
efficiency and component making of GX Developer
(Version 5 or later) sequence program development.
The machine operation order can be programmed by

MELSAP-L and the control including individual machine System start
interlocks can be programmed by a sequence program
Power lamp ON
(ladder/list). Sensor 1
Obstacle detection
Therefore the control sections of a machine can be
converted into components by programming an operation
sequence and machine control separately.
In addition, you can solve rapidly such problems that the SFC SFC
Step No. Start destination comment comment Reset
output of an active step cannot be provided, since output Transition block No. (step) (transition) destination
step No.
condition No. Jump
Equipment Operation Transition
conditions like interlocks cannot be described at name output condition
destination
step No.
MELSAP-L steps.
MELSAP-L performance specifications
Example of programming using MELSAP-L
+ sequence program Item Specifications
Number of files 1 (Note 1)
Step
Describe complex Number of blocks Max. 320 blocks (0 to 319)
interlock condition
in ladder. Max. 8192 steps in all blocks
aX0 Number of SFC steps
Start Max. 512 steps in one block
oM70
Up Upper Emergency (Can be
Number of branches Max. 32
Up Down end stop Up
aX1 Y10 converted into Number of simultaneously Max. 1280 steps in all blocks
Upper end components)
Lower Emergency
Down Up end stop Down Number of operation output Max. 2k steps in one block
oM80 Y11
Down sequence steps Max. 512 steps per step
aX2 Max. 2k steps in one block
Lower end Number of transition condition
Machine operation Max. 512 steps per transition
order Machine control sequence steps
condition

Description format 14
program execution", which is used to control the start/stop
Step of a necessary program file according to the operation
oT0 K30 K30
processes of the equipment.
T0
DMOV K10 W0 DM0V K10 W0
Number of SFC chart steps
oMO M0
Transition condition
X0 Step (initial, dummy), block 3
aX0 start
X1 Series transition, selective 4 number of transition
bX1
branch, selective coupling conditions
C0 X1
Parallel branch 2+2 number of branches
aC0 & bX1
M0 C0 Parallel coupling 2 + 2 (number of coupling
(aM0 bT0) & aC0 branches - 1) + 2 number of
T0 re-branches after coupling
End step, jump 0
14-37
14.1.3 Process CPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Label Programming Function List

Label programming is a programming method for The following table describes the restrictions
standardizing programs. on/specifications of label programming using GX
Developer.
It has the following advantages.
Program editing Ladder, list (SFC and MELSAP-L unusable)
(1) Since label programming allows you to create a
Program conversion Q/QnA conversion
general program and assign devices according to the Monitoring Monitoring is enabled using label names.
device makeup, you can easily transfer that program to Debugging Debugging is enabled using label names.
other programs.
Global Variables/Local Variables
(2) Even if equipment makeup is not yet determined, a
program can be created using labels and can be used Global device area setting can be made for D, W, ZR, B,
as a standard program. When the equipment makeup M, T, ST, C and P.
has been determined, relating the labels and actual
devices enables creation of an actual program easily. Global variables
(3) By merely setting the devices and device ranges to be Mean the devices that can be used commonly in all
assigned automatically, you can make device programs when there are multiple label programs.
assignment automatically by performing only compile
operation, without being conscious of the device Local variables
names/device numbers.
Local variables are devices that can be used in the set
As described above, label programming increases design label program only.
efficiency and standardizes programs. Set local variables per single label program.
In local variable assignment setting, actual device
addresses can be automatically assigned to label names.
Label program Global/local/automatically assigned device setting screen
Compile
Actual program
Write to PLC
Performing compile generates the above program,
where label names are displayed in the ladder.
Debugging Label names can be used for monitoring/debugging.
14-38
14.1.3 Process CPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Function Block function (FB) Features
The FB is a function designed to convert a ladder block, Conversion of program into component (FB)
which is used in a sequence program repeatedly, into a Making a standard program as a single block improves the
component (FB) to utilize it in the sequence program. reusability and readability of the program, therefore
This not only increases the efficiency of program making editing and debugging easier. This ensures ease
development but also reduces programming mistakes to of configuring a large-scale program.
improve program quality. Uniform program quality
Reusing the components of a standard program provides
uniform program quality, which does not depend on the
program developer’s technological level. It also prevents
programming mistakes while reusing components.
The FB can be utilized easily in a sequence program by
drag and drop operation.
Sequence of programming using FB

Definition of FB
Definition of FB definition program and FB variables FB
FB variables
FB definition program
Utilization of FB
Pasting of FB to sequence program Creation of sequence program
14
Debugging
Compile Write to PLC
14-39
14.1.3 Process CPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Multiple Programs Specifying "which program will be run"

In a PLC, control is generally executed with a single In the process CPU, every program is managed under a
program. Hence, initialization, automatic operation, program name.
manual operation, data collection, communication-related Use a program name to specify "which program will be
processing etc, are described in one program. This results executed".
in a large program for a complex system thus making it Set a program name with 8 characters.
difficult to create, debug and maintain the program. Since the program name and registration time are written
Also, maintenance staff members other than the engineer when registering the program in the CPU module, you will
who created the program will find it hard to understand the know the program contents and correction time, improving
operations of that program. maintainability.
The process CPU allows a program to be divided into
Specifying "how program will be executed."
multiple programs and processed by function or by
process. It has such advantages that program division by Program execution types available for process CPU are
purpose makes individual programs smaller and the clear initial execution type, scan execution type, low-speed
purposes make programs easy to understand. In addition, execution type, fixed scan execution type, and wait type.
purpose-based program division will increase program To determine "how program will be executed", specify any
utilization efficiency, standardizing the programs. of the above execution types in the parameters.
CPU module
loading process Program A
Division into Machining process Program B

by process
processings Assembling process Program C
unloading process Program D
Creation of programs function-by-function

CPU module
Initial processing Program A
Division into Main processing Program B

by function
Communication
processings processing Program C
Fault processing Program D
For programs to be controlled by process CPU specify

"which program will be run" and "how it will be run" in the
parameters.
14-40
14.1.3 Process CPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Program Execution Types When running multiple programs on the CPU module, any
of these execution types must be set for each program. It
The following five different execution types can be
should be noted that at least one scan execution type
specified for the process CPU.
program must be set. When there is only one program, it
(1) Initial execution type
need not be set. (A program written to the CPU module is
(2) Scan execution type
run as the "scan execution type".)
(3) Low-speed execution type
(4) Fixed scan execution type
(5) Wait type
Power ON/STOP RUN
Initial execution type Executed only once at power ON or STOP

program to RUN
Low-speed execution Run only when "constant scan" or

type program "low-speed program execution time"
has been set
END processing Fixed scan execution Program run at specified cyclic time intervals
type program
14
Run only when execution request is given

Scan type program Wait type program
14-41
14.1.3 Process CPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Initial execution type When multiple programs have been set as "initial execution
An initial execution type program is run only once when the type", they are run in order of lower to higher program
PLC is powered on or switched from STOP to RUN. numbers, and END processing is performed when all initial
A program that may be run only once to fulfill its purpose, execution type programs are run.
e.g. the initial processing for an intelligent function module, In initial execution type programs, you cannot use
can be set as an initial execution type. Removal of a instructions that specify completion devices (instructions
program to be run only once from scan execution programs which need several scans until completion of program run,
reduces the processing time of the scan execution e.g. network-dedicated instructions).
programs.
Control with one program Using initial execution type program

Program A
Initial execution type

Initial program
program
Division into initial execution
type program and scan
Program B execution type program
Program run Scan execution type
every scan program
Scan execution type When multiple programs have been set to the "scan
This program is executed cyclically every scan after the
program numbers.
scan where the initial execution type program has been run,
END processing is performed when all scan execution type
and execute actual control.
programs are run.
When the initial execution type program is not present, the
scan execution type program is run when the PLC is
powered on or switched from STOP to RUN.
STOP RUN
Power ON RUN
First scan Second scan Third scan Forth scan
END processing
Initial execution type program
0 END 0 END 0 END

Scan execution type program A
0 END 0 END 0
Scan execution type program B
Scan execution type program C 0 END 0 END
Scan time
14-42
14.1.3 Process CPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Low-speed execution type Fixed scan execution type

A low-speed execution type program is run only during A fixed scan execution type program is run at every
"constant scan remaining time" or preset "low-speed user-set time (execution cycle).
program execution time". The execution cycle can be set to each fixed scan
If it cannot be completed in the "constant scan remaining
execution type program within the range 0.5ms to 60s.
time" or "low-speed program execution time", the program
When multiple fixed scan execution type programs have
is suspended once and the remainder of that program is
reached their execution cycles at the same time, they are
run at the next scan. This type can be used as a
run in order of lower to higher program numbers until all of
processing program which need not be run every scan,
e.g. output to printer and data transmission to host them are run.
personal computer or similar. Program Execution Control Instructions
When multiple programs have been set to the "low-speed
execution type", they are run in order of lower to higher Program execution control instructions are used to change
program numbers, and low-speed END processing is the program execution type when the CPU module is
performed when all low-speed execution type programs during RUN (during program execution).
are run. These instructions cannot change the execution types of
Note 1: The constant scan function is designed to keep the
the programs stored in the standard ROM and memory
program operation processing time (i.e. scan time)
card, which are not read to the program memory.
constant so that the signal input - program operation
There are four different program execution control
processing - signal output delay time is constant to
instructions.
increase the control accuracy of a device. When the
(1) PSCAN instruction
constant scan function is used, the scan time, which
normally varies per scan is fixed to a given period. If the (2) PLOW instruction
scan time is shorter than that fixed period, surplus time is (3) PSTOP instruction
produced and can be used to process a low-speed (4) POFF instruction
execution program.
PSCAN instruction
Wait type Changes an initial execution type program, low-speed
A wait type program is run only when an execution request execution type program, wait type program or fixed scan
is given. execution type program into a scan execution type
A subroutine program can be described in each scan program at END processing.
program, but can be independent of the scan program and
PLOW instruction
be used as a wait type program. When used as a wait type 14
program, that subroutine can be called not only from that Changes an initial execution type program, scan execution
scan program but also from other scan programs. type program, wait type program or fixed scan execution
An interrupt may take place during execution of any scan type program into a low-speed execution type program at
program. An interrupt program will be visible when it is END processing.
managed as a wait program.
PSTOP instruction
Scan execution type program Scan execution type program
Change an initial execution type program, scan execution
Main routine Main routine
program program type program, low-speed execution type program or fixed
P100 Sub routine scan execution type program into a wait type program at
Standby program
program END processing.
I0
Interrupt program P100 Sub routine When any program is changed into the wait type program,
program
the external output (Y) is held. Use the POFF instruction to
I0
Interrupt program ensure that the external output (Y) is switched off when
changed to wait type program.
14-43
14.1.3 Process CPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
POFF instruction that program into a wait type program at the END
processing of the next scan.
The instruction turns off the output of an initial execution This instruction is used to ensure that the external output
type program, scan execution type program or low-speed (Y) is switched off at a change to wait type program.
execution type program at END processing and change
PLOW
PSCAN PSCAN
Initial execution type Scan execution type Low-speed execution
program program type program
PSTOP PSTOP PSTOP

POFF POFF POFF
PSCAN PLOW PLOW
PSCAN
PSTOP 1
POFF Fixed scan execution

Wait type program
type program
Main Routine Program Subroutine Program
A main routine program is any of the initial execution, scan A subroutine program is run when it is called by CALL P ,
execution, wait, fixed scan execution and other programs and starts at a pointer (P ) and ends at the RET
which start at its beginning (step 0) and ends at instruction.
END/FEND. The number of the steps can be reduced if a program
(FEND is used when creating a subroutine program or execute several times during one scan or a program
interrupting program after a main program.) execute only when a condition is true to be written as a
When the execution condition of a program is true, subroutine program. Create a subroutine program after
operation is performed from step 0 to END/FEND. any of the main routine programs such as initial execution,
If multiple programs have been set to the same execution scan, wait and cyclic programs (after FEND) or create
type, END processing is performed when the END/FEND them together as wait type programs.
instruction of the last run program is executed. Pointers used in subroutine programs are local and
0 step common pointers. For using in a wait program, the
Main routine common pointers must be assigned. When creating a
program subroutine in any of the initial execution, scan, wait, fixed
scan, assign the common or local pointers to each
program. The subroutine program having local pointers
Returns to step 0 when
only one program is run.
described in any of the initial execution, scan, wait, fixed
END/FEND END/FEND scan cannot be called from the other initial execution, scan
execution, wait and fixed scan execution type programs.
END processing
14-44
14.1.3 Process CPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Interrupt from intelligent function or network

Program A CPU module
module
Memory card / Standard RAM
Main routine program The Q series intelligent function and network modules
Write File of
program A have predetermined interrupt channels (SI), and the
FEND
parameters assign them to interrupt pointers (I50 to I255).
P0 Y10 For example, SI0 is assigned to CH1 count value
coincidence interrupt and SI1 to CH2 count value
RET
Subroutine coincidence interrupt on the QD61, and setting I50 and I51
program
P8 Y11
to the QD61 assigns I50 to SI0 and I51 to SI1, allowing the
RET I50 or I51 interrupt program to be run on count value
Y12
match.
P1
Interrupt requested by internal timer

RET
An interrupt program can be run at intervals of 10ms,
END
20ms, 40ms or 100ms (these are default values and can
be changed in the increments of 0.5ms between 0.5ms
Interrupt Program and 100ms).
An interrupt program executes after a temporary Interrupt requested due to error occurrence
suspension of the main or sub routine program when an An interrupt program can be run when an error is detected
interrupt condition is true, it starts from interrupt pointer (I by the self-diagnosis of the CPU module.
) and ends at the IRET instruction. (The interrupt The interrupt request made at error occurrence is made
program can be executed when an interrupt enable status valid when an execution enable status is established by
is established by the EI instruction.) the IMASK instruction.
This program can respond quickly without being influenced
Macro Instructions
by the scan time of a sequence program.
Create an interrupt program after any of the main routine The macro instruction function is designed to register a
programs such as initial execution, scan execution, wait ladder pattern often used by the user as a single
type and fixed scan execution type programs (after FEND) instruction to utilize it any number of times (macro
utilization), i.e. the user can create an original instruction.
or create them together as wait type programs.
Using a macro instruction allows a ladder pattern made up
For interrupt pointers used in interrupt programs, the same
of multiple instructions to be represented as a single-line
interrupt pointer cannot be specified in any of the initial
instruction, therefore improving the program layout and
execution, scan, wait, cyclic and other programs.
program standardization. (Note 1)
An interrupt program can be run by In macro registration, registering the devices as VD0 to 14
(1) Interrupt requested from interrupt module (QI60) VD9 ensures easier changing of devices.
(2) Interrupt requested from intelligent function or network By setting actual devices to variables VD0 to VD9 for
module macro utilization, the preset devices are used for
(3) Interrupt requested by internal timer conversion into a sequence program.
(4) Interrupt requested due to error occurrence Note 1: In the QnA PLC, reading a program created using a
macro instruction will cause that macro instruction to be
Interrupt from QI60 interrupt module disassembled into and displayed as individual instructions,
An interrupt program is run under an external interrupt making the program seem confusing to readers. In the
condition. High Performance model QCPU, this disadvantage has
been corrected so that reading a program from the PLC
Only one QI60 module can be used with one CPU module
will display a macro instruction in its original form.
and one module can run 16 different interrupt programs (I0
Note 2: Use a macro instruction for programming in the ladder/list
to I15). mode. Use a function block for label programming.
Note that only one QI60 module can be mounted per
system.
14-45
14.1.3 Process CPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Device Type List

Device type list
The following table lists the device names and points (default value) that can be used in the process CPU.
Input 8192 points X0 to X1FFF
Output 8192 points Y0 to Y1FFF
Step relay 8192 points S0 to S511/block
Bit device Internal relay 8192 points M0 to M8191
Internal user device Edge relay 2048 points V0 to V2047
Link relay 8192 points B0 to B1FFF Changeable within
Word device
Link register 8192 points W0 to W1FFF
Function input 5 points FX0 to FX4
Bit device Function output 5 points FY0 to FY4
Word device
Macro instruction
argument
0 to 1018k points
File register Word device File register 0 points —
(1k point increments)
Pointer —
SFC block 320 points BL0 to BL319 Fixed
Bit device
SFC transition device 512 points TR0 to TR511
Others
—
I/O No. setting — U0 to UFF
Constant — Real constant E 1.17549-38 to E 3.40282+38
Character string
"ABC", "123"
constant
14-46
14.1.3 Process CPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Device explanations Annunciators (F)

Annunciators are internal relays designed for equipment
Inputs (X) fault/failure detection.
Inputs are designed to give commands and data from When annunciators are turned on, the special relay
external devices, such as pushbuttons, select switches, (SM62) turns on and the actual quantity of annunciators
limit switches and digital switches, to the PLC.
turned on and their number are stored in the special
Inputs are available as "refresh inputs" and "direct access registers (SD62 to SD79). Therefore, using annunciators
inputs". in a failure detection program allows you to check for
(1) Refresh inputs
equipment faults/failures and their status by monitoring the
Input signals batch-imported from all input modules at special registers (SD62 to SD79) after the special relay
the refresh of END processing. (SM62) has turned on.
These inputs are specified as X in a sequence
Note that turning on any annunciator lights up the USER
program. LED of the Q mode CPU module.
(2) Direct access inputs
SET F50 SET F25 SET F2047
Input signal imported from an input module every time
SD62 0 50 50 50
SD63 0 1 2 3
program.
SD64 0 50 50 50
(They cannot be used with the instructions used for the
digit specification or as inputs specified for SD65 0 0 25 25
MELSECNET/H refresh when a bit device is used as in SD66 0 0 0 2047 Up to 16 annunciator

numbers can be stored.
the MOV instruction.) SD67 0 0 0 0
Outputs (Y)
Outputs are used to provide the control results of a SD79 0 0 0 0
program to external solenoids, signal lamps, digital

displays, etc. Edge relays (V)
Outputs are available as "refresh outputs" and "direct Edge relays are devices that record operation results,
access outputs". starting at the beginning of a ladder block, and can be
(1) Refresh outputs used as contacts only.
Output signals batch-exported from all output modules An edge relay is used to perform operation on its leading
at the refresh of END processing. edge (OFF ON) in an index-qualified structured
These outputs are specified as Y in a sequence program.
program. X0 X1 X10 V1
(2) Direct access outputs
Output signal exported from an output module every
Edge relay
time a coil instruction is executed. Stores operation results of X0, X1 and X10.
These outputs are specified as DY in a sequence
program. Link relays (B)
(They cannot be used with instructions used for digit Link relays are CPU module devices (relays) used to
14
specification or as outputs specified for refresh link relays (LB) in a MELSECNET/H network
MELSECNET/H refresh when a bit device is used in module to the CPU module or to refresh the CPU module
the MOV instruction.) data to the link relays (LB) in the network module.
Internal relays (M) Use the refresh parameters of the network parameters to
Internal relays are auxiliary relays used in a CPU module set the refresh ranges of LB and B.
and latched (not backed up at power failure). CPU module MELSECNET/H network module
(They turn off at power-on, CPU module reset and latch Link relays Link relays
B0 LB0
clear operation.) Link refresh
Link refresh
Outputs (Y) are used to export the control resulting of a setting range
program.
Latch relays (L)
Latch relays are auxiliary relays used in a CPU module Link special relays (SB)
and latched (backed up at power failure). Link special relays are internal relays that indicate the
(Operation results are held at power-on or CPU module communication states/fault detections of MELSECNET/H
reset.) network modules.
They turn off when latch clear operation is done.
Step relays (S)
Step relays are devices for SFC.
program.
14-47
14.1.3 Process CPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Timers (T) Data registers (D)

Timers are of the up-timing type. They start timing when its Data registers are devices designed to handle numerical
turned on when its current value reaches or exceeds its data in a CPU module.
set value. One data register can store 16-bit data (-32768 to 32767
high-speed timers, which are different in specifying or 0H to FFFFH) and two consecutive points (e.g. D0 and
method. D1) can store 32-bit data (-2147483648 to 2147483647 or
A retentive timer is designed to hold its current value if its 0H to FFFFFFFFH).
value when the coil turns on again. Link registers (W)
A timer turns on/off its coil, updates its current value, and CPU module devices for refreshing the data of link
instruction is executed. registers (LW) in an MELSECNET/H network module or
(Current value updating and contact on/off are not similar. One point of link register can store 16-bit data
executed in END processing.) (-32768 to 32767 or 0H to FFFFH) and two consecutive
Precaution for using timers
(1) Do not describe the same timer in multiple OUT T or points (e.g. W0 and W1) can store 32-bit data
OUTH T instructions during one scan. (-2147483648 to 21473647 or 0H to FFFFFFFFH).
(2) Do not use a CJ instruction or the like to jump the coil
CPU module MELSECNET/H network module
processing of a timer while the coil of the timer is on. Link registers Link registers
(3) Do not use timers in an initial execution, wait, fixed W0 LW0
Link refresh
scan execution and interrupt programs. Link refresh setting range
Specifying methods and timing ranges of timers

Specifying Timing Range Timing
Method Default Setting range Range
Low-speed 100ms 1ms to 1000ms Setting Link special registers (SW)
OUT T
timer (1ms increments) increments Link special registers are designed to store the
High-speed 10ms 0.1ms to 100ms on the left
timer OUTH T (0.1ms 32767 communication states and fault definitions of an
increments)
Low-speed 100ms 1ms to 1000ms MELSECNET/H network module.
retentive OUT ST (1ms increments) Function devices (FX, FY, FD)
timer
High-speed 10ms 0.1ms to 100ms Function devices are used in a subroutine program
retentive OUTH ST (0.1ms
timer increments) provided with arguments.
Counters (C) As the devices from subroutine call arguments are
Counters are of the up-counting type. They count out and substituted to the Function devices, you can use the same
the contact turns on when its current value reaches its set
subroutine program without being conscious of the other
value.
A counter turns on/off its coil, updates its current value, subroutine program call sources.
and turns on its contact when the OUT C instruction is (1) Function inputs (FX)
executed. Used to pass ON/OFF data to a subroutine program.
(In END processing, present value update and contact
(2) Function output (FY)
ON/OFF are not performed.)
Use RST C to reset the count value of a counter. Used to pass the operation result (ON/OFF data) of a
Interrupt counters subroutine program to a subroutine program call
An interrupt counter is designed to count the number of source.
interrupts that occurred, and updates its current value (3) Function register (FD)
when an interrupt factor is generated.
Set in the parameters the first counter number used with Used to transfer data between a subroutine call source
interrupt counters. (256 points are occupied, starting with and subroutine program.
the first counter number.) Example
When FX0 and FD1 are used in a subroutine program, specifying the subroutine program call instructions
An interrupt counter does not count up. Therefore, when M0 and D0 passes ON/OFF data of M0 to FD0 and data of D0 to FD1.
using it for control, read the current value of the interrupt [Subroutine program call source] [Subroutine program]
counter using the MOV or similar instruction, compare it X0
P0
FX0
CALL P0 M0 D0 MOV FD1 R0
with the set value using comparison instructions (=, <=,
etc.), and turn on/off the internal relay (M), etc.
RET
counter.
14-48
14.1.3 Process CPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Special relays (SM) (1) Specified by block changing

Special relays store the states (failure diagnoses, system The file registers used are specified by separating
information, etc.) of a CPU module. them in increments of 32k points (R0 to R32767).
Special registers (SD) When more than 32k points are used, use the RSET
Special registers store the states (failure diagnoses, instruction to select the block used. (Specify file
system information, etc.) of a CPU module. registers with R0 to R32767 in any block.)
Link direct devices (J \ ) RSET K1 R0 designation Memory card
for block 1 R0
Link direct devices are a way to specify direct access to
MOV D0 R0 Block 0
link devices in a MELSECNET/H network module.
R32767
Link direct devices can access only one network module RSET K2 R0 designation
R0
with a single network number. When multiple network for block 2

Block 1
modules are mounted with the same network number, the MOV D0 R0 R32767
R0
network module with the lowest first I/O number is the Block 2
target of access.
Intelligent function module devices (U \G ) (2) Consecutive designation
Intelligent function module devices are a way to specify The device symbol ZR is used to specify file registers
direct access from a CPU module to the buffer memory of beyond 32k points without changing blocks.
an intelligent function module mounted on a main or File registers in multiple blocks can be managed as a
extension base unit. Intelligent function modules mounted single series of file registers.
on remote I/O stations of an MELSECNET/H network Memory card
MOV D0 ZR32768 ZR0
system cannot be accessed using this instruction.
Block 0
Index registers (Z) ZR32767
An index register is used for index qualification (indirect MOV D0 ZR65536 ZR32768
specification) of a device used in a sequence program. Block 1
ZR65535
Index qualification uses one index register and is specified ZR65536
by 16-bit data (-32768 to 32767 or 0H to FFFFH). Block 2
X0
MOV K-1 Z0 -1 is stored in Z0. The file register capacity is not fixed. For the register
capacity that can be secured, please refer to the
X0 Data of D10Z0=
explanation section of "MODEL SELECTION",
MOV D10Z0 D0 D{(10+(-1)}=
D9 is stored in D0. "MEMORY".
Index qualification Nesting (N)
File registers (R)
Nesting are devices used with master control (MC, MCR 14
instructions).
File registers are devices for constant data storage or data
register expansion applications. They are stored in the Pointers
CPU module built-in standard RAM (drive 3), memory card Pointers are devices used with branch instructions.
(RAM) (drive 1) or memory card (ROM) (drive 2). Note that 4096 points can be used in all programs run by a CPU
the file registers stored in the memory card (ROM) are module.
read-only. When the ATA card is used as a memory card The pointers are used in the following applications.
(ROM), file registers cannot be stored in the memory card (1) Specify the destination of jump instruction (CJ, SCJ,
(ROM). Unlike those of the data registers (D), the stored JMP)
values of the file registers are not cleared at power-on or (2) "Local pointers" and "common pointers" are available
CPU module reset. for specifying the call destination of the subroutine call
File registers can be "specified by block changing" or instruction (CALL, CALLP).
"specified consecutively". Local pointers
Local pointers are used for a jump and subroutine program
call in each program. A call can only be made from within
the same program file where the pointer is expressed.
14-49
14.1.3 Process CPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Program B Program B Program A Program C

The same
pointer can
CALL P0 CALL P0 be used. CALL P204 P204 CALL P0
FEND FEND FEND RET
P0 P0 P205
Program B
RET RET RET

CALL P205
END END END

FEND
Local pointer Local pointer Common pointer
Common pointers Interrupt pointers (I)

Common pointers are used in a subroutine program called An interrupt pointer is a device used as a label at the
from multiple programs. beginning of an interrupt program and 256 points (I0 to
Common pointers cannot be used with jump instruction to I255) can be used in all programs. (The same interrupt
other programs (CJ, SCJ, JMP). pointer number cannot be used.) The interrupt pointer
numbers and interrupt factors are as follows.
I No. Interrupt Factor Priority I No. Interrupt Factor Priority

I0 First point 237 I32 (Note 2) General stop error 1
I1 Second point 238 I33 Vacant —
I2 Third point 239 I34 UNIT VERIFY ERR. 2
I3 Fourth point 240 FUSE BREAK OFF
I4 Fifth point 241 SP. UNIT ERROR
I5 Sixth point 242 I35 OPERATION ERROR 3
Error occurrence
I6 Seventh point 243 SFCP OPE. ERROR
interrupt
I7 Eighth point 244 SFCP EXE. ERROR
Interrupt by QI60 (Note 3)
I8 Ninth point 245 I36 ICM. OPE ERROR 4
I9 Tenth point 246 FILE OPE. ERROR
I10 Eleventh point 247 I37 Vacant —
I11 Twelfth point 248 I38 PRG. TIME OVER 5
I12 Thirteenth point 249 I39 CNK instruction execution 6
I13 Fourteenth point 250 Annunciator detection
I14 Fifteenth point 251 I40 to I49
— Vacant —
I16
I17
I18
I19
I20
I21
— Vacant —
I22
I23 Intelligent function Using parameter, set which
I50 to I255 18 to 223
I24 module interrupt intelligent function module will use.
I25
I26
I27
I28 100ms 256
Interrupt by
I29 40ms 255
internal timer
I30 20ms 254
(Note 1)
I31 10ms 253
Note 1: The internal timer time limits indicate default time values. They can be changed using the parameters between 0.5ms and 1000ms
in 0.5ms increments.
Note 2: When a stop error occurs, the CPU module stops after performing I32 processing.
Note 3: Error occurrence interrupt is disabled at power-on or reset. When using I32 to 139, enable interrupt with the IMASK instruction.
14-50
14.1.3 Process CPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
SFC block devices (BL) Local devices

An SFC block device is used to check whether the
Local devices can be used exclusively in each of multiple
specified block of an SFC program is activated or not.
programs, and local devices in a certain program cannot
SFC transition devices (TR)
be accessed by other programs. Hence, using local
An SFC transition device is used to check whether the
devices allows you to do programming without being
specified transition condition of an SFC program is
conscious of other programs.
specified for forced transition or not.
CPU module
Network number specified devices (J) When M7000 or later have been set as local devices,
they can be used independently in programs where M7000 or later are executed.
A network number specified device is a symbol used to Program A Memory card
For program A
specify a network number in a data link instruction. M7000 Internal relay
Macro instruction argument devices (VD) Y12 ON/OFF data of M7000 ON/OFF
M7000
Macro instruction argument devices are used for macro
registration.
Program B
Global Devices and Local Devices For program B
M7000 Internal relay
Among the CPU module devices, the range of "local Y11 ON/OFF data of M7000 ON/OFF
M7000
device" that can be assigned include internal relays M,
edge relays V, timers T, retentive timers ST, counters C
and data registers D. Note that the ranges and devices Local device data is stored into the CPU module built-in
where local device assignment is not made are global standard RAM (drive 3) or memory card (RAM) (drive 1).
devices. The devices usable as local devices are the internal relays
(M), edge relays (V), timers (T, ST), counters (C) and data
Global devices registers (D) and their ranges are set in parameters.
Global devices mean devices that can be shared by all Using local devices exchanges the local device data of the
programs when there are multiple programs. Normally, the memory card (RAM) or standard RAM and the device data
ranges where local device assignment has not been made of the CPU module after program runs, increasing the
and the devices where local device assignment cannot be scan time by the exchange time.
made are all global devices and they can be used from The program without local devices, does not affect program
any program. switching time.
CPU module
Global devices can be shared by running programs. Exchange time 14

Program A Device memory
Internal relay
(when the number of local device points is 1k word)
M0 M0 ON/OFF
Exchange Time (ms)
Y12 CPU Type
ON/OFF data of M0 Standard RAM Memory card (RAM)
Q12PH, Q25PH 0.39 + 0.17 n 0.39 + 0.95 n
n: Number of program files
Program B Note 1: Exchange time differs from the above when both the
M0 memory card (RAM) and standard RAM are selected as
Y11 the save areas of local devices.
ON/OFF data of M0
14-51
14.1.3 Process CPU:
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Online Change, Online File Change Remote Operation

When partial correction is made to a program, up to 512 Remote operation is executed from GX Developer to the
steps can be corrected by performing online change once. CPU module to perform RUN, STOP, PAUSE, reset or
Online change is a function to make partial correction or latch clear of the CPU module, without operating the
entire change to a program that is being executed by the RUN-STOP switch of the CPU module. Remote operation
CPU module (during RUN). As a program can be can be done to the CPU module connected with GX
corrected without stopping equipment operation, this Developer or to the CPU module connected by
function is convenient for use during equipment MELSECNET/H, Ethernet, CC-Link or serial
adjustment. communication.
Online change Remote run

When partial correction is made to a program, up to 512
Performing remote run causes the CPU module put in the
steps can be corrected by performing online change once.
STOP/PAUSE mode by remote stop/pause to go into the
Online change can be performed if the program size after
RUN mode.
correction is within the program memory size that can be
secured by the CPU module. Remote stop
Online file change Performing remote stop causes the CPU module in the
This function is not used to make partial correction but RUN/PAUSE mode to go into the STOP mode (output (Y)
allows a program to be exchanged on a file basis. When is switched off and operation stopped).
performing this function, the CPU module continues the
processing of the original program file and simultaneously Remote pause
writes a new program file to the free area (Note 1) of the
Performing remote pause causes the CPU module in the
memory. On completion of new program write, the CPU
RUN mode to go into the PAUSE mode (output (Y) is held
suspends the processing of the original program and starts
and operation stopped).
the processing of the new program. To perform the above
processing, the memory must have the free space where Remote reset
the new program file can be written.
Note 1: You can use the free area of the program memory (drive Performing remote reset causes the CPU module in the
0), RAM card (drive 1) or ROM card (drive 2) (only the STOP mode or being stopped by the self-diagnostic
ATA card can be used as a ROM card). function to be reset (initialized). Device data other than the
Memory Memory latch-specified data are cleared.
When making a remote reset, set the corresponding
Running program Deleted
New program file is written

On completion of new
program write,
parameter to "enable", in order to use this feature.
to free area of memory. new program processing
New program is
New program
run.
starts.
Remote latch clear
In this system, you can exchange not only program files device data.
but also device comment files or file register files. Note that you cannot perform latch clear of the device that
Note 2: When a device comment file or file register file is stored in has been set to "disable" clear with the "latch clear key".
the RAM card (drive 1) or ROM card (drive 2), it must not
be accessed by a program to perform online file change.
Note 3: Performing online change or online file change causes a
delay in program scan time. Depending on the program
file size to be online-written, a significant delay may take
place, so fully ensure safety when performing this
operation.
14-52
PROGRAMMING
14.1.4 MELSEC-Q Series Instructions
39 User-friendly, Practical Sequence Instructions

PLC CPU
High Process
Instruction Symbol (Designation) Function Drawing Indication Basic model
Performance CPU
QCPU
model QCPU
Contact
Starts N.O. contact logic
LD Load
operation
Starts N.C. contact logic
LDI Load inverse
operation
AND And N.O. contact series connection
ANI And inverse N.C. contact series connection
N.O. contact parallel

OR Or
connection
N.C. contact parallel

ORI Or inverse
connection
Starts leading edge pulse

LDP Load pulse
operation
Starts trailing edge pulse
LDF Load pulse F
operation
Leading edge pulse series
ANDP And pulse
connection
Trailing edge pulse series
ANDF And pulse F
connection
Leading edge pulse parallel

ORP Or pulse
connection
Trailing edge pulse parallel

ORF Or pulse F
connection
14
14-53
PROGRAMMING
PLC CPU
High Process
Performance CPU
QCPU
model QCPU
Connection
Ladder block series
ANB And block
connection
Ladder block parallel

ORB Or block
connection
MPS Push Branch start (push)
MRD Read Branch (read)
MPP Pop Branch end (pop)
INV Inverse Inversion of operation result
Conversion of operation result

MEP Edge pulse
to leading edge pulse
MEF Edge pulse F
to trailing edge pulse
Conversion of operation result Vn
EGP Edge relay pulse
to leading edge pulse (Stored
Vn
EGF Edge relay pulse F
to trailing edge pulse (Stored
Output
OUT Out Device output
SET Set Set device SET D
RST Reset Reset device RST D
PLS Pulse Leading edge output PLS D
PLF Pulse F Trailing edge output PLF D
FF Flip-flop Reversal of bit device output FF D
DELTA Delta Pulse output (every scan) DELTA D
DELTA Delta P Pulse output (one scan only) DELTAP D
Shift
SFT Shift 1-bit shift of bit device SFT D
1-bit shift of bit device

SFTP Shift P SFTP D
(Pulse ON/OFF)
Master control
MC MC n D
Master control Master control set n D
MCR Master control reset Master control reset MCR n
14-54
PROGRAMMING
PLC CPU
High Process
Performance CPU
QCPU
model QCPU
Program end
Termination of main routine
FEND F end FEND
program
Termination of sequence
END End END
program
Stop
Sequence program stop
STOP Stop STOP
(All outputs OFF)
No operation
NOP NOP No operation NOP
Page feed
NOPLE NOP LF Page feed of printer output NOPLF
Page changing of printer

PAGE Page PAGE
output
14
14-55
PROGRAMMING
Basic Instructions for Increasing Programming Efficiency

PLC CPU
Function Instruction Symbols High Process CPU

Basic model
Performance
QCPU
model QCPU
Comparison operation instructions

BIN 16 bit data comparisons =, <>, >, >=, <, <=
BIN 32 bit data comparisons D=, D<>, D>, D>=, D<, D<=
Floating-point data comparison E=, E<>, E>, E>=, E<, E<=
Character string data comparisons $=, $<>, $>, $>=, $<, $<=
Block data comparisons BKCMP
Arithmetic function instructions

BIN 16 bit data addition and subtraction operations +, +P, -, -P
BIN 32 bit data addition and subtraction operations D+, D+P, D-, D-P
BIN 16 bit data multiplication and division operations *, *P, / , /P
BIN 32 bit data multiplication and division operations D*, D*P ,D /, D/P
BIN 16 bit data +1, -1 INC, INCP, DEC, DECP
BIN 32 bit data +1, -1 DINC, DINCP, DDEC, DDECP
BIN block bit data addition and subtraction operations BK+, BK+P, BK-, BK-P
BCD 4-digit data addition and subtraction operations B+, B+P, B-, B-P
BCD 8-digit data addition and subtraction operations DB+, DB+P, DB-, DB-P
BCD 4-digit data multiplication and division operations B*, B*P, B/, B/P
BCD 8-digit data multiplication and division operations DB*, DB*P, DB/DB/P
Floating decimal point data addition and subtraction operations E+, E+P, E-, E-P
Floating decimal point data multiplication and division
E*, E*P, E/, E/P
operations
Addition of character string data $+, $+P
Data conversion instructions

Conversion of BIN 16/32-bit data into BCD 4/8-digit data BCD, BCDP, DBCD, DBCDP
Conversion of BCD 4/8-digit data into BIN 16/32-bit data BIN, BINP, DBIN, DBINP
Conversion of BIN 16/32-bit data into floating-point data FLT, FLTP, DFLT, DFLTP
Conversion of floating-point data into BIN 16/32-bit data INT, INTP, DINT, DINTP
Conversion of BIN 16-bit data into BIN 32-bit data DBL, DBLP
Conversion of BIN 32-bit data into BIN 16-bit data WORD, WORDP
Conversion of BIN 16/32-bit data into gray code GRY, GRYP, DGRY, DGRYP
Conversion of gray code into BIN 16/32-bit data GBIN, GBINP, DGBIN, DGBINP
2's complement of BIN 16/32-bit data NEG, NEGP, DENG, DENGP
Sign inversion of floating-point data ENEG, ENEGP
Block conversion of BIN data into BCD data BKBCD, BKBCDP
Block conversion of BCD data into BIN data BKBIN, BKBINP
Data transfer instructions

16/32-bit data MOV, MOVP, DMOV, DMOVP
Floating-point data transfer EMOV, EMOVP
Character string data transfer $MOV, $MOVP
16/32-bit data negative transfer CML, CMLP, DCML, DCMLP
Block data transfer BMOV, BMOVP
Same data block transfer FMOV, FMOVP
16/32-bit data exchange XCH, XCHP, DXCH, DXCHP
Block data exchange BXCH, BXCHP
Upper/lower byte exchange SWAP, SWAPP
14-56
PROGRAMMING
PLC CPU

Basic model
Performance
QCPU
model QCPU
Program branch instructions

Pointer branch CJ, SCJ, JMP
Jump to END GOEND
Program execution control instructions

Interrupt enable/disable DI, EI
Interrupt program mask IMASK
Return from interrupt program IRET
I/O refresh instructions

I/O refresh instructions RFS
F series compatible instructions

Up, down counters UDCNT1, UDCNT2
Teaching timer TTMR
Special function timer STMR
Random access control of rotary table in nearest path ROTC
Ramp signal RAMP
Pulse density measurement SPD
Cyclic pulse output PLSY
Matrix input MTR
321 Application Instructions for Easily Achieving High-level Control

PLC CPU

Basic model
Performance
QCPU
model QCPU
Character string processing instructions

Conversion of BIN 16/32-bit data into decimal 5/10-digit ASCII
BINDA, BINDAP, DBINDA, DBINDAP
data
Conversion of BIN 16/32-bit data into hexadecimal 4/8-digit
BINHA, BINHAP, DBINHA, DBINHAP
ASCII data
Conversion of BCD 4/8-bit data into decimal 4/8-digit ASCII BCDDA, BCDDAP, DBCDDA,
data DBCDDAP
Conversion of decimal 5/10-digit ASCII data into BIN 16/32-bit 14
DABIN, DABINP, DDABIN, DDABINP
data
Conversion of hexadecimal 4/8-digit ASCII data into BIN
HABIN, HABINP, DHABIN, DHABINP
16/32-bit data
Conversion of decimal 4/8-digit ASCII data into BCD 4/8-bit DABCD, DABCDP, DDABCD,
data DDABCDP
Device comment data read COMRD, COMRDP
Character string length detection LEN, LENP
Conversion of BIN 16/32-bit data into character string data STR, STRP, DSTR, DSTRP
Conversion of character string data into BIN 16/32-bit data VAL, VALP, DVAL, DVALP
Conversion of floating-point data into character string data ESTR, ESTRP
Conversion of character string data into floating-point data EVAL, EVALP
Conversion of hexadecimal BIN data into ASCII data ASC, ASCP
Conversion of ASCII data into hexadecimal BIN data HEX, HEXP
Fetch of right, left-hand side data in character string RIGHT, RIGHTP, LEFT, LEFTP
Fetch, replacement of any data in character string MIDR, MIDRP, MIDW, MIDWP
Character string search INSTR, INSTRP
Analysis of floating-point data into BCD data EMOD, EMODP
Analysis of BCD data into floating-point data EREXP, EREXPP
14-57
PROGRAMMING
PLC CPU

Basic model
Performance
QCPU
model QCPU
Special function instructions

SIN operation of floating-point data SIN, SINP
COS operation of floating-point data COS, COSP
TAN operation of floating-point data TAN, TANP
SIN-1 operation of floating-point data ASIN, ASINP
COS-1 operation of floating-point data ACOS, ACOSP
TAN-1 operation of floating-point data ATAN, ATANP
Conversion of angle data of floating-point data into radian data RAD, RADP
Conversion of radian data of floating-point data into angle data DEG, DEGP
Square root operation of floating-point data SQR, SQRP
Exponent operation of floating-point data EXP, EXPP
Natural logarithm operation of floating-point data LOG, LOGP
Floating-point data random number generation RND, SRND
BCD type SIN operation BSIN, BSINP
BCD type COS operation BCOS, BCOSP
BCD type TAN operation BTAN, BTANP
BCD type SIN-1 operation BASIN, BASINP
BCD type COS-1 operation BACOS, BACOSP
BCD type TAN-1 operation BATAN, BATANP
BCD 4-digit/8-digit square root operation BSQR, BSQRP, BDSQR, BDSQRP
Data control instructions

16/32 bit upper and lower limit controls LIMIT, LIMITP, DLIMIT, DLIMITP
16/32 bit dead band controls BAND, BANDP, DBAND, DBANDP
16/32 bit zone controls ZONE, ZONEP, DZONE, DZONEP
File register instructions

File register block No. changing RSET, RSETP (Note1)
File register 1 byte read ZRRDB, ZRRDBP (Note1)
File register 1 byte write ZRWRB, ZRWRBP (Note1)
File changing instructions

Setting of file register file QDRSET, QDRSETP
Setting of comment file QCDSET, QCDSETP
Clock instructions
Read clock data DATERD, DATERDP
Write clock data DATEWR, DATEWRP
Clock data addition/subtraction DATE+, DATE+P, DATE-, DATE-P
Clock data format conversion SECOND, SECONDP, HOUR, HOURP
Peripheral device instructions

Message display to peripheral device MSG
Key input from peripheral device PKEY
Note1: Unavailable for the Q00JCPU.
14-58
PROGRAMMING
PLC CPU

Basic model
Performance
QCPU
model QCPU
Logical operation instructions

16/32-bit data logical product WAND, WANDP, DAND, DANDP
16/32-bit data logical add WOR, WORP, DOR, DORP
16/32-bit data exclusive logical add WXOR, WXORP, DXOR, DXORP
16/32-bit data negative exclusive logical add WXNR, WXNRP, DXNR, DXNRP
Block data logical product BKAND, BKANDP
Block data logical add BKOR, BKORP
Block data exclusive logical add BKXOR, BKXORP
Block data negative exclusive logical add (match) BKXNR, BKXNRP
Rotation instructions
Right rotation of 16-bit data ROR, RORP, RCR, RCRP
Left rotation of 16-bit data ROL, ROLP, RCL, RCLP
Right rotation of 32-bit data DROR, DRORP, DRCR, DRCRP
Left rotation of 32-bit data DROL, DROLP, DRCL, DRCLP
Shift instructions
n-bit right shift, left shift of 16-bit data SFR, SFRP, SFL, SFLP
1-bit right shift, left shift of n-bit data BSFR, BSFRP, BSFL, BSFLP
1-word right shift, left shift of n-word data DSFR, DSFRP, DSFL, DSFLP
Bit processing instructions

Bit set/reset of word device BSET, BSETP, BRST, BRSTP
Bit test TEST, TESTP, DTEST, DTESTP
Bit device batch reset BKRST, BKRSTP
Data processing instructions

16/32-bit data search SER, SERP, DSER, DSERP
16/32-bit data check SUM, SUMP, DSUM, DSUMP
8 to 256 bit decode, 256 to 8 bit encode DECO, DECOP, ENCO, ENCOP
7 segment decode SEG, SEGP
4-bit dissociation, association of 16-bit data DIS, DISP, UNI, UNIP
Any-bit dissociation, association of 16-bit data NDIS, NDISP, NUNI, NUNIP
Byte unit dissociation, association WTOB, WTOBP, BTOW, BTOWP
16/32-bit data maximum value search MAX, MAXP, DMAX, DMAXP
16/32-bit data minimum value search MIN, MINP, DMIN, DMINP
16/32-bit data sort SORT, DSORT 14
16/32-bit data total value calculation WSUM, DWSUM
Structure creation instructions

FOR to NEXT (repeat) FOR, NEXT
FOR to NEXT forced end BRAKE
Subroutine call, return CALL, CALLP, RST
Output OFF subroutine call FCALL, FCALLP
Inter-program subroutine call ECALL, ECALLP
Inter-program output OFF subroutine call EFCALL, EFCALLP
Index qualification of whole ladder IX, IXEND
Index qualification value designation of whole ladder IXDEV, IXSET
Table operation instructions

Table data write FIFW, FIFWP
First-in data (oldest data) read from table FIFR, FIFRP
Last-in data (newest data) read from table FPOP, FPOPP
Table data insert, delete FITS, FINSP, FDEL, FDELP
14-59
PROGRAMMING
PLC CPU

Basic model
Performance
QCPU
model QCPU
Special function module access instructions

1-word/2-word data read from buffer memory FROM, FROMP, DFRO, DFROP
1-word/2-word data write to buffer memory TO, TOP, DTO, DTOP
Display instructions
ASCII code print PR, PRC
Error display, annunciator reset LEDR
Debugging and failure diagnosis instructions

Specific format fault check, check start CHK, CHKST
Fault check pattern change CHKCIR, CHKEND
For program control

Program stop PSTOP, PSTOPP
Program output OFF stop POFF, POFFP
Program scan execution registration PSCAN, PSCANP
Program low-speed execution registration PLOW, PLOWP
Miscellaneous
WDT reset WDT, WDTP
Timing pulse generation DUTY
Indirect address setting ADRSET, ADRSETP
Numeric key input from keyboard KEY, KEYP
Link refresh COM, COMP
Network refresh S.ZCOM
Routing parameter read, write S.RTRDAD, S.RTWRITE
Index register batch save, batch return ZPUSH, ZPOP
QCPU instructions
Module information read UNIRD
Trace TRACE, TRACER
Binary data write, read S.FWRITE, S.FREAD
Program load, unload PLOAD, PUNLOAD, PSWAP
High-speed file register transfer RBMOV
PID control instructions

PID control data setting PIDINIT
PID control PIDCONT
Specified loop operation stop PIDSTOP
Specified loop operation start PIDRUN
Specified loop parameter change PIDPRMW
14-60
PROGRAMMING
14.1.5 Process CPU Instructions
Process Instructions for Process Control

Function Instruction Symbol Function Instruction Symbol
I/O instructions Arithmetic operation instructions

Analog Input Processing S.IN Addition S.ADD
Output Processing with Mode Switching1 S.OUT1 Subtraction S.SUB
Output Processing with Mode Switching2 S.OUT2 Multiplication S.MUL
Manual Output S.MOUT Division S.DIV
Time Rate Example S.DUTY Extraction S.SQR
Batch Counter S.BC Absolute Value S.ABS
Pulse Integrator S.PSUM
Comparison operation instructions
Control operation instructions Comparison (S.>) S.>
Basic PID S.PID Comparison (S.<) S.<
2-degree-of-freedom PID S.2PID Comparison (S.=) S. =
Position Type PID S.PIDP Comparison (S.>=) S.>=
Comparison (S.<=) S.<=
Control operation instructions
Sample PI S.SPI Auto tuning
I-PD Control S.IPD Auto Tuning Instruction S.AT1
Blend PI Control S.BPI
Rate S.R
High/Low Limit alarm S.PHPL
Lead/lag S.LLAG
Integration S.I
Derivative S.D
Dead Time S.DED
High Selector S.HS
Low Selector S.LS
Intermediate Value Selection S.MID
Average Value S.AVE
High/Low Limiter S.LIMT
Rate of change Limiter 1 S.VLMT1
Rate of change Limiter 2 S.VLMT2
2-position ON/OFF S.ONF2
3-position ON/OFF S.ONF3
Dead Band S.DBND
Program Setting Device S.PGS
Loop Selector S.SEL
Bump-less Transfer S.BUMP 14
Analog Memory S.AMR
Compensation operation instructions

Polygon S.FG
Inverted Polygon S.IFG
Standard Filter S.FLT
Retentive S.SUM
Temperature/Pressure Compensation S.TPC
Engineering Value Conversion S.ENG
Engineering Value Reverse Conversion S.IENG
14-61
PROGRAMMING
14.2 Network Setting: GX Developer
Overview Ethernet
Parameter Name Function
With MELSECNET/H, Ethernet and CC-Link positioned as
Initial setting Set watchdog timer values of TCP and IP address
the main networks in the Q mode/process CPU system. of DNS server.
GX Developer Version 7 software package (hereafter Open setting Set TCP/UDP protocol selection, open system,
connection target IP address/port number, etc.
abbreviated to GX Developer) includes the network
Operation setting Set host station IP address, communication data
supporting functions to improve their functions and ASCII/BIN selection, etc.
performance, also to make them easy to use/set-up. E-mail setting Set host station e-mail address, mail server, etc.
Transmission mail Set mail address for sending e-mail.
Network Parameter Setting address
Notice setting Set notice condition, etc. for use of notice function.
GX Developer allows you to set the parameters for MNET/10 routing Set communication path to access CPU module
connected to MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H
MELSECNET/H, Ethernet, CC-Link without extra
via Ethernet.
parameter programming needed. FTP parameter Set parameters to use FTP (file transfer) function.
Routing data Set sub-net mask and router IP address for
MELSECNET/H communication via Ethernet router.
Parameter Name Function Event interrupt Set condition for generating interrupt signal to
CPU module to start interrupt program.
Type Choose operation mode of MELSECNET/H.
Refresh parameter Assign the data destination in CPU module
from the network module, and the data
CC-Link
destination in the network module from CPU Parameter Name Function
module.
Operation setting Select CC-Link between high-speed remote
Common parameter Allocate LB/LW/LX/LY link device range to I/O network mode consisting of remote I/O
each station. only and ordinary mode.
Station specific Needed to assign different parameters from Network parameter Set the number of modules to connect with
parameter common parameters to specific station. CC-Link, refresh devices, etc.
Normally not needed. Station data Set type of each remote station.
Inter-link transfer Apply exchange communication data
Initial processing setting Set initial processing performed for remote
parameter partially between two or more networks on a
device stations.
CPU module connected to two or more
Event interrupt Set condition for generating interrupt signal
networks.
to CPU module to start interrupt program.
Routing parameter Specify message sending path over the
networks.
Event interrupt Set condition for generating interrupt signal
Network Monitoring
to CPU module to start interrupt program.
• GX Developer can monitor the network operating status
of MELSECNET/H, Ethernet and CC-Link (/LT).
• For MELSECNET/H, you can monitor the network line
status, operating/communication status of each station,
link scan time indicating communication frequencies, and
other data.
• For Ethernet, you can monitor the parameter status, error
history, connection-by-connection status,
protocol-by-protocol communication status and others.
• For CC-Link (/LT), you can monitor the link scan time,
communications status of each station, and error status.
Note: CC-Link/LT monitoring is applicable to GX Developer Ver.
7.17T or later.
14-62
PROGRAMMING
14.3 Data Conversion Software:
GX Converter
Overview Operating environment
GX Converter data conversion software package for Since GX Converter is an add-in software to GX
Windows is a software designed to convert other format Developer (SW3D5F/C-GPPW-E or later), GX Developer
data (text format data, CSV format data) to GX Developer must be installed in advance.
format data (instruction list, device comment). It allows
Data conversion function
CAD data to be utilized on GX Developer for equipment
design or GX Developer data to be utilized for design on The following data can be converted by GX Converter.
CAD, increasing design efficiency. Conversion Factor Conversion Data
CSV format data GX Instruction list
Developer format data Device comment
Text format data GX Instruction list
Developer format data Device comment
GX Developer format data Instruction list
text format data Device comment
GX Developer format data Instruction list
CSV format data Device comment
14-63
PROGRAMMING
14.4 Peripheral Device
Overview performance of the personal computer connected. In

this case, choose either of 57.6k, 38.4k, 19.2k, and
The Q mode/ Process CPU PLC is programmed on a
9.6kbps transmission speeds.
Windows® personal computer and connected to the CPU
(2) When using the QC30R2 (3m (9.84ft.) cable),
module via the COM port (RS-232) or USB port of the
115.2kbps transmission speed can be achieved.
personal computer.
The Q mode CPU module is equipped with an RS-232 USB Connection
interface operable at up to 115.2kbps and a USB interface Connection configuration diagram
operating at 12MBps.
Note: The USB interface is not provided for the The following diagram shows a configuration for
Q02,Q00J,Q00,and Q01CPU. connection with a personal computer by a USB interface.
RS-232 Connection
Q06HCPU
Connection configuration diagram
The following diagram shows a configuration for
USB
connection with a personal computer by an RS-232 RS-232
interface.
USB interface
Q06HCPU
USB cable
USB
RS-232
Usable USB cables
RS-232
Interface Please choose a cable that complies with USB Standard
Rev.1.1.
RS-232 cable
(QC30R2) Instructions
(1) The longest usable distance of USB is 5m (16.39ft.).
(2) USB can be used with Windows® 98/Me/2000 only.
RS-232 cable
Type QC30R2 Other Connection Systems
Length 3m (9.84ft.)
Connector shape Personal computer side: 9-pin D-Sub When using SW7D5C-GPPW-E, you can use the following
PLC side: 6-pin Mini-DIN
connection systems in addition to the RS-232 port and
Note 1: The disconnection prevention holder (Q6HLD-R2) is used USB connection of the CPU module.
to secure the QC30R2 cable to the CPU module. Communication Q Mode PLC
Personal Computer Side Port
System Side Module
Q6HLD-R2 (cable tensile strength: 22(N))
RS-232 QJ71C24
COM
QCPU side holder (telephone line) QJ71C24-R2
QJ71E71
Ethernet board Ethernet
RS-232 connector QJ71E71-B2
Q80BD-J71LP21G QJ71LP21G
Q80BD-J71LP21-25 (Note 1) MELSECNET/H QJ71LP21-25
Q80BD-J71BR11 (Note 1) QJ71BR11
A70BDE-J71QLP23 (Note 2) QJ71LP21-25
MELSECNET/10
A70BDE-J71QBR13 (Note 2) QJ71BR11
A80BDE-J61BT11 (Note 3)
CC-Link QJ61BT11
Screwed to QCPU A80BDE-J61BT13 (Note 3)
side holder Cable side holder Note 1: SW0DNC-MNETH-B driver is necessary.
SW6D5C-GPPW-E or later is supported.
Instructions Note 2: SW3DNF-MNET10 driver is necessary.
Note 3: SW4DNF-CCLINK-B driver is necessary.
(1) The High Performance model QCPU can communicate
at up to 115.2kbps. However, this speed may
sometimes not be achieved, depending on the
14-64
PROGRAMMING
14.5 Peripheral Device Connection
Module: AJ65BT-G4-S3
Overview Connectable peripheral devices

Connectable Peripheral
The AJ65BT-G4-S3 peripheral device connection module Available Software
Device
(hereafter abbreviated to the AJ65BT-G4-S3) is designed Personal Windows GX Developer
computer compatible (SW2D5C/F-GPPW-E or later)
to incorporate a peripheral device (GX DOS/V personal SW IVD-GPPA, SW IVD-GPPQ
computer
Developer/GPPQ/GPPA) in a CC-Link system to write, A7PHP, LM7000 SWORX-GPPA, SWOSRX-GPPA,
read, monitor, test, and other operations for the PLC CPUs SW SRXV-GPPA, SW S-GPPA
A7HGP SW HX-GPPA
of the master and local stations. A6GPP, A6HGP, A6PHP SW3GP-GPPA, SW4GP -GPPA,
SW GP-GPPAU,
The AJ65BT-G4-S3 in a CC-Link system allows you to SW3-GPPA, SW3-HGPA
perform various online operations using GX Developer
from a remote location without having to move the Instructions
peripheral device to the PLC CPUs.
(1) The AJ65BT-G4-S3 can be used with the A/QnA series
System Configuration master/local module that is version B or later, and the
date of manufacture is "9801" or later.
Overall configuration diagram (2) To access the non-control CPU of the master/local
The following overall configuration diagram shows how to module (QJ61BT11) in a multiple PLC system,
install a peripheral device in a CC-Link system with QJ61BT11 of function version B or later is required.
AJ65BT-G4-S3. (3) To access the A/QnA series PLC in another network
Master station system via the CC-Link system, set the station number
Local station of the AJ65BT-G4-S3 from 1 to 63.
(4) While CC-Link data link is normal, online operation is
available from the peripheral device to the PLC CPU.
Terminating resistor Performance Specifications

Remote device station
Item Specifications
CC-Link RS-422 interface For peripheral device connection, 1
dedicated cable channel
CC-Link station type Intelligent device station
Number of occupied stations 1 station (32 RX/RY points each, 4
RWr/RWw points each) /H
Terminating resistor
Permissible instantaneous 1ms
power failure period
AJ65BT-G4-S3 Maximum number of Max. 26
Peripheral device
RS-422 connectable stations
interface Applicable DIN rail TH35-7.5Fe, TH35-7. 5AI,
Peripheral device TH35-15Fe (Conforming to JIS-C2812)
GX Developer
connection cable 24VDC internal current 0.19A
consumption
External power supply 24VDC (15.6 - 28.8V)
(for module drive)
Peripheral device connection cable Dimensions 80(3.15) 170(6.70) 63.5(2.50)
(mm(inch))
The connection cable for the AJ65BT-G4-S3 and
Weight 0.36kg
peripheral device, is the same cable to connect the
peripheral device and A/QnA series PLC CPU. The
connection cable is specified in the manual of the
peripheral device.
AJ65BT-G4-S3 side 25 pin D-Sub (female)

connector shape
14-65
15. SIMULATION/OFFLINE
DEBUGGING FUNCTIONS
15.1 Sequence Simulation
Software Operating Environment

GX Simulator is a software tool designed for debugging a Recommended operating environment.
® ®
sequence program within a virtual PLC on a personal Operating system Microsoft Windows 95
computer. Without any actual PLC CPU, I/O modules, etc.,
® ®
Microsoft Windows 98
® ®
15
Microsoft Windows Me (Note 1)
you can debug the program on the personal computer ® ®
Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0
immediately after designing it, and debug sequence (Note 2)
® ®
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
programs and user applications used together with the
Computer Pentium® 133MHz or more recommended
following applications. Required memory 32MB or more recommended (Note 3)
GX Developer MX series GT Simulator (Note 1) Hard disk free 70MB
space
You can see the operation of the sequence program on
Required software GX Developer or GT Simulator
the personal computer, which allows you to simultaneously package
discuss specifications and fully conduct tests before Note 1: Pentium® 150MHz or more is recommended when used
implementing the system. This reduces specification with Windows® Me.
Note 2: Service Pack 3 or more is recommended when used with
changes and pre-system startup time significantly, Windows NT® Workstation 4.0.
ensuring a smooth transition to the next process. Note 3: 64MB or more memory is recommended when used with
Windows® 2000.
15-1
SIMULATION
/OFFLINE
DEBUGGING
FUNCTIONS 15.1 Sequence Simulation
Debugging using GX Developer Monitor test Function
The Program execution can be checked on a personal The monitor test function is used to monitor the status of
computer, making debugging more efficient. the device memory and buffer memory in a virtual CPU.
(1) Without a PLC, the program execution can be checked Also it can force ON/OFF and change current value as
on the personal computer where the program was well as monitoring the device ON/OFF state and value,
created. Compatible with the MELSEC-A/QnA/FX/Q similar to the GX Developer device batch-monitoring and
and motion SCPU of A17x, A27x. buffer memory batch-monitoring functions. The monitor
(2) Simple setting provides the simulation of the machine test function of the ladder logic test tool includes a function
side I/O. (Example: X0 turns on five seconds after Y10 to display ON/OFF states and values in a timing chart
has turned on.) format, which enables real-time monitoring of the device
(3) Step operation is available for all PLCs and ladder status timing.
device monitor. Also changing the device value is
enabled during step operation.
I/O System Setting Function
The I/O system setting function simulates the operation of

external devices. Therefore, a specific debugging
sequence program does not have to be created,
eliminating the need to re-write the devices, as the inputs
can be directly turned ON/OFF from GX Developer.
Devices need not be rewritten.
X0 X1
Tool Function
Y0
Start Stop Run The tool function is to temporarily save the data of the
Y0 virtual CPU device memory and special function module
To debug the above program buffer memory and then read the saved data once
debugging is resumed.
GX Simulator: Simple screen setting only
Error Detail Display Function
When an operation error occurs during simulation of GX
Simulator, an explanation of the error details is shown.
This function saves time to refer to the manuals, in order to
Conventional debugging: Debugging program is required.
find the cause of the error.
Y0 5s timer
SET X1
5s timer setting
15-2
SIMULATION
/OFFLINE
DEBUGGING
15.1 Sequence Simulation FUNCTIONS
MX Series (7) GX Simulator always executes low-speed execution

program after a scan execution program is completed,
Testing applications can be done without needing other
without concern for the constant scan and low-speed
equipment apart from PC where simulation software is
execution program time settings.
installed. This is because GX Simulator is used as a virtual
(8) A cyclic execution program is executed after its cyclic
PLC in the user application development, to read/write
time interval has reached its set value, when scan
PLC data without having to use a physical PLC.
execution programs and cyclic programs are set.
GT Series (9) GX Simulator can use all device memories of the Q
mode CPU. However it cannot use the link direct
GX Simulator and GT Simulator display changes in device devices JnXn, Jn\Yn, Jn\Bn, Jn\Wn, Jn\SBn and
value by simulation.
Jn\SWn.
The device value changing function of GX Simulator (10)"OPERATION ERROR" occurs if a device range is
allows you to change a device value forcibly to confirm a exceeded in indirect indexing by the index register.
change displayed on the screen.
(11)GX Simulator checks the real number range, when
This enables all operations, from screen drawing without a executing the real number instruction. “OPERATION
sequence program to the debugging of the screen drawing ERROR” occurs if an entered value cannot be used as
with a sequence program, on a desktop.
a real number.
Differences and Restrictions
GX Simulator has the following restrictions, when

compared to the Q mode CPU operation.
(1) GX Simulator cannot simulate SFC programs.
(2) GX Simulator does not support interrupt programs
therefore this operation will not work.
(3) The operation result from floating point operation is not
equal to the actual operation result of the CPU
because of a rounding error.
(4) GX Simulator cannot simulate the functions of
intelligent function/network modules. However, there
are buffer memory area of 64k points × 64 modules for
intelligent function/network modules. Data write/read is
available.
(5) GX Simulator calculates processing time for one scan
at 100ms (default value). The scan time can be 15
changed, by changing the constant scan time setting.
(6) The actual timing of the timer depends on the scan
time (= constant scan setting) of the logic test function.
When the scan time is at 100ms, the current value of
the 100ms timer increases by 1 every scan, and the
current value of the 10ms timer increases by 10 every
scan. When the scan time is 10ms, the current value of
the 100ms timer increases by 10 every scan and the
current value of the 10ms timer increases by 1 every
scan.
15-3
SIMULATION
/OFFLINE
DEBUGGING
(12)The following parameter items are not available.

Parameter Setting Item
PLC name setting All invalid.
PLC system "Timer time limit setting", "STOP-RUN/output mode" and "common pointer No." are valid.
setting
PLC file setting • "Target memory" of "file register" is invalid.
• "Comment file used for instructions" is invalid.
• "Target memory" of "device initial value" is invalid.
• "Target memory" of "file for local devices" is invalid.
PLC RAS setting • "Error check" is invalid.
• "Operation error" and "special function module access error" in "error-time operation mode" are valid.
• "Fault history" and "low-speed program running time" are invalid.
I/O assignment "Type", "switch setting" and "detail setting" of "I/O assignment" are invalid.
"Basic setting" (base, power supply module, extension cable) is invalid.
Device setting "Latch range" is invalid.
Program setting "Comment" of "file using method setting" is invalid.
"I/O refresh setting" is invalid.
Boot file setting All invalid.
SFC setting All invalid.
Network All invalid.
parameters
Multi PLC setting Settings of other than "number of CPUs" are invalid.
(13) Multiple PLC system

(a) GX Simulator does not support a multiple PLC System
This is because GX Simulator does not support multiple program starts (more than one program) and it does not
support recognition of host PLC-CPU (distinguish of the host PLC number from multiple PLCs) required for multiple
PLC-CPU operations.
Multiple PLC-CPU compatibility is limited to the simulation of the minimum required specification (which operates as
a single PLC-CPU sequence program) to operate the multiple PLC-compatible sequence program (project) created
on GX Developer.
(b) The I/O assignment parameters of GX Developer specify the control PLC for the corresponding I/O and intelligent
function modules.
Though GX Simulator can read the control information, it is incompatible with this function because it does not
support recognition of the host PLC-CPU number.
(When multiple PLC parameters are used, GX Simulator's original I/O assignment is valid and no error will occur.)
(c) It is able to read multiple PLC-shared memory data of each PLC using FROM Instruction.
15-4
SIMULATION
/OFFLINE
DEBUGGING
(14)The following SM devices are supported by GX Simulator.

Any other SM devices that are not listed below are not supported.
GX Simulator supports read/write to other SM devices. (Error will not occur.) The initial value for the unsupported SM
devices is OFF.
Device Device Device Device
Remarks Remarks Remarks Remarks
Name Name Name Name
SM409 SM434
SM0 Diagnostic error 0.01 sec. clock User clock No. 9 SM1021 User clock No. 1
( 1) ( 2)
SM410 SM510 Low-speed program
SM1 Self-diagnostic error 0.1 sec. clock SM1022 User clock No. 2
( 1) ( 2) run
Error common SM411 Card B use flag
SM5 0.2 sec. clock SM620 SM1023 User clock No. 3
information ( 1) normally OFF
Error individual SM412 Card B protect flag
SM16 1 sec. clock SM621 SM1024 User clock No. 4
information ( 1) normally OFF
SM413 Drive 3 flag normally
SM50 Error reset 2 sec. clock SM622 SM1030 0.1 sec. clock
( 1) ON
SM414 Drive 4 flag normally
SM56 Operation error 2n sec. clock SM623 SM1031 0.2 sec. clock
( 1) ON
SM415
SM62 Annunciator detection 2n msec. clock SM640 File register use SM1032 1 sec. clock
( 1)
SM203 STOP contact SM420 User clock No. 0 SM700 Carry flag SM1033 2 sec. clock
SM205 STEP-RUN contact SM421 User clock No. 1 SM703 Sort order SM1034 2n sec. clock
Clock data read
SM213 SM422 User clock No. 2 SM704 Block comparison SM1036 Normally ON
request
SM400 Normally ON SM423 User clock No. 3 SM715 EI flag SM1037 Normally OFF
BIN/DBIN error
ON only 1 scan after
SM401 Normally OFF SM424 User clock No. 4 SM722 processing SM1038
RUN
switch-over
ON only 1 scan after SM430 OFF only 1 scan after
SM402 User clock No. 5 SM1008 Self-diagnostic error SM1039
RUN ( 2) RUN
OFF only 1 scan after SM431
SM403 User clock No. 6 SM1009 Annunciator detection SM1042 STOP contact
RUN ( 2)
SM404 ON only 1 scan after SM432
User clock No. 7 SM1010 Operation error SM1054 STEP-RUN contact
( 2) RUN ( 2)
SM405 OFF only 1 scan after SM433
User clock No. 8 SM1020 User clock No. 0
( 2) RUN ( 2)
1: It is calculated from the constant scan setting and number of scan. The constant scan time set is the time of 1 scan. Therefore, 1 scan
time = constant scan time.
2: Not supported for the actual Basic model QCPU.
15
15-5
SIMULATION
/OFFLINE
DEBUGGING
(15)The following SD devices are supported by GX Simulator.

Any other SD devices that are not listed below are not supported. GX Simulator supports read/write to other SD devices.
(Error will not occur.) The initial value for the unsupported SD devices is 0 (zero).
Device Name Remarks Device Name Remarks Device Name Remarks Device Name Remarks
SD0 Diagnostic error SD67 Detection table SD295 Device assignment
SD1 Error occurrence time SD68 Detection table SD296 Device assignment
Error information
SD4 SD71 Detection table SD299 Device assignment SD647 File register capacity
segment
Error common
SD5 SD72 Detection table SD300 Device assignment SD648 R block No.
information
Error common
SD6 SD73 Detection table SD301 Device assignment
information
Error common
information
Error common
information
Error common
information
Error common
SD10 SD77 Detection table SD412 ( 2) 1 sec. counter
information
Error common
SD11 SD78 Detection table SD414 ( 2) 2n sec. clock setting
information
Error common
SD12 SD79 Detection table SD415 ( 2) 2n msec. clock setting
information
Error common
SD13 SD200 CPU switch status SD420 Scan counter
information
Low-speed scan
SD14 Annunciator number SD201 LED status SD430 ( 3) counter
Error common
SD15 SD203 CPU operation status SD500 ( 3) Run program No. SD1008 Diagnostic error
information
Error individual Low-speed program
SD16 SD210 Clock year, month SD510 ( 3) SD1009 Annunciator detection
information No.
Error individual
SD17 SD211 Clock day, hour SD520 ( 1) Current scan time SD1015 CPU operation status
information
Error individual
SD18 SD212 Clock minute, second SD521 ( 1) Current scan time SD1017 ( 1) Minimum scan time
information
Error individual
SD19 SD213 Year, day of the week SD522 ( 3) Initial scan time SD1018 ( 1) Current scan time
information
Error individual
SD20 SD220 Display data SD523 ( 3) Initial scan time SD1019 ( 1) Maximum scan time
information
Error individual
SD21 SD221 Display data SD524 ( 1) Minimum scan time SD1021 ( 1) Current scan time
information
Error individual
SD22 SD222 Display data SD525 ( 1) Minimum scan time SD1022 ( 2) 1 sec. counter
information
Error individual
SD23 SD223 Display data SD526 ( 1) Maximum scan time SD1035 R block No.
information
Error individual
SD24 SD224 Display data SD527 ( 1) Maximum scan time SD1124 Annunciator quantity
information
Error individual
SD25 SD225 Display data SD528 ( 3) Current scan time SD1125 Annunciator number
information
Error individual
SD26 SD226 Display data SD529 ( 3) Current scan time SD1126 Annunciator number
information
SD50 Error reset SD227 Display data SD532 ( 3) Minimum scan time SD1127 Annunciator number
SD62 Annunciator No. SD290 Device assignment SD533 ( 3) Minimum scan time SD1128 Annunciator number
SD63 Annunciator quantity SD291 Device assignment SD534 ( 3) Maximum scan time SD1129 Annunciator number
SD64 Detection table SD292 Device assignment SD535 ( 3) Maximum scan time SD1130 Annunciator number
SD65 Detection table SD293 Device assignment SD1131 Annunciator number
SD66 Detection table SD294 Device assignment SD1132 Annunciator number
1: Same as all constant scan settings. Default is 100ms.
2: Calculated from the constant scan setting and number of scan. The constant scan time set is the time of 1 scan.
3: Unavailable for the actual Basic model QCPU.
(16)GX Simulator supports the instructions of the QCPU. However, some instructions have restrictions or are not supported.
They are shown below.
When a non-functional instruction is executed, the logic test function screen lamp is lit, and the non-functional instruction
and its step number can be displayed.
15-6
SIMULATION
/OFFLINE
DEBUGGING
Non-functional instructions and restrictions in Instruction

Class Processing
Symbol
processing list Multi CPU instructions S(P).SFCS No Operation (NOP)
S(P).SVST No Operation (NOP)
Instruction
Class Processing S(P).CHGV No Operation (NOP)
Symbol
S(P).CHGT No Operation (NOP)
Output instruction OUT T/C operate on the basis of
time on Simulator. S(P).CHGA No Operation (NOP)
OUTH T/C operate on the basis of S(P).TO No Operation (NOP)
time on Simulator. S(P).DDWR No Operation (NOP)
DELTA (P) No Operation (NOP) S(P).DDRD No Operation (NOP)
Program run control DI No Operation (NOP) S(P).GINT No Operation (NOP)
instruction EI No Operation (NOP) Other instructions NOPLF No Operation (NOP)
IMASK No Operation (NOP) PAGE No Operation (NOP)
IRET No Operation (NOP) UDCNT1 No Operation (NOP)
Refresh instruction RFS No Operation (NOP) UDCNT2 No Operation (NOP)
RFRDB No Operation (NOP) TTMR ON time on GX Simulator
RFRDW No Operation (NOP) measured
RFRDDB No Operation (NOP) STMR Operation based on time on
GX Simulator
RFRDDW No Operation (NOP)
ROTC No Operation (NOP)
COM No link refresh
SPD No Operation (NOP)
Display instruction PR No Operation (NOP)
PLSY No Operation (NOP)
PRC
PWM No Operation (NOP)
Debugging, fault CHKST No Operation (NOP)
diagnosis instruction UNIRD No Operation (NOP)
CHK No Operation (NOP)
S.FWRITE No Operation (NOP)
CHKCIR No Operation (NOP)
S.FREAD No Operation (NOP)
CHKEND No Operation (NOP)
PLOAD No Operation (NOP)
TRACE No Operation (NOP)
PUNLOAD No Operation (NOP)
TRACER No Operation (NOP)
PSWAP No Operation (NOP)
Clock instruction DATERD (P) Personal computer clock data
used RBMOV Processed as BMOV
instruction
DATEWR (P) No Operation (NOP)
WDT (P) No Operation (NOP)
Peripheral device MSG No Operation (NOP)
instruction KEY No Operation (NOP)
PKEY No Operation (NOP)
PID control instruction PIDINIT No Operation (NOP) All special module-specific instructions are No Operation (NOP).
PIDINITP No Operation (NOP)
PIDCONT No Operation (NOP)
PIDCONTP No Operation (NOP)
PIDSTOP No Operation (NOP)
PIDSTOPP No Operation (NOP)
PIDRUN No Operation (NOP)
PIDRUNP No Operation (NOP)
PIDRMW No Operation (NOP)
PIDPRMWP No Operation (NOP)
Structure creation IX No Operation (NOP)
instructions IXEND No Operation (NOP)
IXDEV No Operation (NOP)
IXSET No Operation (NOP)
Character String COMRD(P) No Operation (NOP)
Processing Instructions
Switching instructions QCDSET(P) No Operation (NOP)
QCPU instructions FWRITE No Operation (NOP)
SP.FREAD No Operation (NOP)
S.TO(P) No Operation (NOP) 15
15-7
16. PROJECT MANAGEMENT
FUNCTIONS
16.1 Project Management Tool
GX Explorer Easy read/write PLC
By drag and drop from the personal computer side project
GX Explorer is a software package to list the project data
data to PLC CPU data or visa versa, you can read/write
of GX Developer in a personal computer and the data of
PLC data easily without starting GX Developer.
the PLC CPU in a tree format. It is easy to read/write PLC
data with drag and drop similar to Windows Explorer. Many useful diagnostic functions
You can execute PLC diagnostics, network diagnostics,
Features CC-Link diagnostics, Ethernet diagnostics and system
Centralized management of project data monitoring from GX Explorer, without starting GX
The project data (parameters, programs, comments, Developer.
device data, etc.) of GX Developer in a personal computer Operating Environment
appear on one list.
Item Description
Display network configuration Operating System Microsoft Windows 95
It can display the list of MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 Microsoft Windows 98
or CC-Link network configuration data and the data Microsoft Windows Me
(programs, parameters, comments, device data) of all the Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
PLCs connected to the network. Computer Pentium 200MHz or more recommended
Necessary memory 64MB or more recommended
Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.1 for the access range.
Hard disk 100MB or more
Easy editing of PLC CPU data Display 800 × 600 dots or more
Double-clicking the icon opens the GX Developer edit Required software GX Developer (SW7D5C-GPPW-E)
screen corresponding to the data.
No.1
Q12H
MELSECNET/H
Q25H Q12H
Personal computer
Double-clicking the data name starts the

corresponding GX Developer edit screen.
PLC read
PLC write
Drag & drop

16
16-1
17. REMOTE MAINTENANCE
FUNCTIONS
17.1 Remote Maintenance Tool: GX RemoteService-I
Overview Easy setup
GX RemoteService-I Version 1 enables the remote Complicated programming is not required to setup the
diagnosis of system error using a mobile computer. software. Just enter the required data as instructed in
The software has two operation modes: the wizard.
(Tag setting)
! Automatic operation mode (Automatically sends the
required information to a remote site, i.e. maintenance
personnel, by e-mail if a system error occurs.
! Manual operation mode (An operator sends an e-mail to
a remote site, i.e. maintenance personnel.
With this tool, the system can be easily diagnosed from a

remote site, to reduce the recovery time from the error.
In addition, the tool provides preventive maintenance
services such as diagnosing system life, performance
deterioration and determine the time for parts replacement.
System error notification

Required information i.e. system errors can be transmitted
to any place anytime using a web server or similar device. (Tag detail setting)
Serviceman
Displays the PLC's device value

and comment/tag by a single click Internet
Belt conveyor
stopped on line A!
System diagnosis is
enabled by using the
device with comments.
Serviceman
Unauthorized access prevention

Security dialup connection provides a non-fixed IP address.
Therefore, the IP address is changed every time a new
access is initiated, which prevents any unauthorized users
from accessing and modifying the system. 17
17-1
REMOTE
MAINTENANCE
FUNCTIONS 17.1 Remote Maintenance Tool:
GX RemoteService-I
Required applications for the server (personal computer)

! GX RemoteService-I Version 1 (this product)
! Web server software (supplied by Microsoft )
! Personal Web Server 4.0(PWS) : for Windows 98/NT 4.0
! Internet Information Server (IIS5.0): for Windows 2000
Operating environment
(1) Operating environment for server (personal computer)
English version
OS Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System
Operating System
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System
CPU Pentium 200MHz or higher
Memory 64MB or higher
For installation 100MB or higher
For operation (temporary 100MB or higher
capacity)
Disk drive CD-ROM disk drive is required
Display Resolution 800x600 dots or more
256 colors or more
Web server software Personal Web Server 4.0(PWS4.0) : for Windows 98/NT 4.0
Internet Information Server 5.0(IIS5.0) : for Windows 2000
! Contract with ISP (Internet Service Provider) is required.
! This product does not work with Windows Me, because Windows Me is not compatible with the PWS server.
(2) Operating environment for the client device
Device Description
Personal computer. Personal computer installed with a Web browser
(Microsoft Corporation's Internet Explorer 4.0 or later or Netscape Communication
Corporation's Netscape Communicator 4.0 or later)
17-2
18.1 MX Series
18.1.1 Overview
Overview
The MX series enables simple system configuration without having to consider complicated protocols for Ethernet
communication, serial communication, etc.
The MX series has a wide lineup of software, from collecting onsite data using Excel without any programming needed,
to abilities for designing sophisticated user applications.
For monitoring/collecting on-site and data without a
For developing user applications with a program.
program.
User application
Increased Efficiency for Developing User Data Collection without programming

Applications MX Sheet
MX Component
By simply setting using Microsoft Excel , you can realize
Since MX Component smoothes out differences in protocol the monitoring/logging of field PLC data without the need
between communication paths, it can achieve for programming.
communication between the PLC and personal computer
in the same method.
This substantially improves efficiency for system
development.
MX Parts
Utilizing the MX Parts graphics provides realistic
monitoring of field systems.
18
18-1
PC-RELATED
PRODUCTS 18.1 MX Series
18.1.1 Overview
Wide Choice of Communication Paths
The MX series supports a wide selection of communication paths between the personal computer and PLC, therefore
realizing easy system design that meets the customer's requirements.
MELSECNET/ H, 10, II
Ethernet
CC-Link
Serial communication
(Computer link connection, CPU direct connection,
CC-Link G4 connection)
Bus connection
(AF board, CPU board)
Powerful Debugging Environment Development Environment

MX Component
In combination with GX Developer, GX Simulator and GT
Simulator, the MX series can perform system simulation Language Compatible OS
and debugging by a single personal computer without Visual C++ 6.0 Windows 95/98/Me
actual devices. This remarkably improves system Visual Basic 6.0 NT 4.0/2000 Professional
development efficiency. VBA(Excel 2000/2002/Access XP Professional/Home Edition
2000/2002)
VB Script
MX series
MX Sheet
Language Compatible OS
Excel 2000/2002 Windows 98/Me
GX Simulator NT 4.0/2000 Professional
XP Professional/Home Edition
MX Parts
GX Developer GX Simulator Language Compatible OS

Language independent OS independent
18-2
18.1 MX Series PC-RELATED
18.1.2 Active X Communication Support PRODUCTS
Tool: MX Component
Overview (3) Confirm the program for reading the device.
MX Component is an Active X control library that supports

all communication paths, from the personal computer to
the PLC, and enables communication via simple
processing without being aware of the different protocols
used by various communications.
MX Component provides efficient development of
applications by reducing the man-hour needed for
designing a communication program. This feature is Completed!
ideal when fast system implementation/maintenance for
onsite applications is required.
MX Component also enables the development of a wide Versatile application design using VBA
variety of applications by supporting various languages,
such as Visual C++ , Visual Basic , VBA/VBScript for Using VBA for Microsoft Excel /Access , applications
Microsoft Access and Excel . that require PLC data collection, production
Simple programming instructions/results and display of alarm history can be
created easily.
How to use MX Component (Program example for reading
PLC device values in Visual Basic )
(1) Set the communication path as instructed by the
Wizard.
(Options for setting the program without using the
Wizard are also available.)
(2) Paste the MX Component control icon into the form, Remote monitoring/operation via
and set the logical station number set in (1) as the Internet/intranet
property for that control.
Simple access to the Web Page written in VB Script (ASP
function) via the Internet/intranet from IE (Internet
Explorer) provides remote monitoring/operation of the PLC
system situated at the application location.
18
18-3
PC-RELATED 18.1 MX Series
PRODUCTS 18.1.2 Active X Communication Support
Tool: MX Component
Features
(1) Wide range of communication paths for PLC are supported

A wide range of communication paths to the PLC are supported, enabling design of a system according to the users
requirements.
IBM-PC/AT compatible
You can make communication with

the specified PLC easily without
being aware of the communication
protocol.
MX Component
Computer link communication RS-232C Computer link module
(Serial communication) (Serial communication module)
Ethernet Ethernet
Ethernet communication Ethernet module
board
RS-232C/RS-422 conversion, RS-232C ACPU, QnACPU, QCPU(Q mode),

CPU COM communication
QCPU(A mode), FXCPU, motion controller CPU
USB
CPU USB communication QCPU (Q mode)
MELSECNET/10
MELSECNET/10 communication MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/10 module
board
MELSECNET/H
MELSECNET/H communication MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/H module
board
CC-Link module
CC-Link
CC-Link communication CC-Link
board (Software version "N" or later)
RS-232C/RS-422
conversion CC-Link G4 CC-Link module
CC-Link G4 communication CC-Link
module (Software version "N" or later)
(Software version "D" or later)
CPU board equivalent
CPU board communication
to A2USHCPU-S1
GX Developer + GX Simulator
GX Simulator communication
(offline debugging)
GX Developer Version5 (SW5D5C-GPPW-E) or later
GX Simulator (SW5D5C-LLT-E 10B) or later
Must be purchased separately.
Telephone line A6TEL,Q6TEL,FXCPU,QC24N,

Modem communication Modem Modem
Q series-compatible C24
Ethernet Ethernet
Gateway function communication GOT
board
On the same base

Q series bus communication PC CPU module (Q mode)
18-4
Tool: MX Component
(2) Substantial improvement in user's development

Buffer memory data of connected intelligent
efficiency or special function module can be read/written!
MX Component includes a communication setup
wizard utility. MX
Component
By simply following/interacting with the instructions Access to buffer memory

within the wizard utility, the user can setup the
communication path for access to the PLC easily.
(6) Read/write of PLC CPU clock data
Once the communication settings have been
You can read and write the clock data of the PLC CPU,
made, just the logical station number of the PLC
which is connected to the IBM-PC/AT compatible PC.
stored in the communication setup utility needs to
be specified, to gain access to the PLC. Clock data of connected PLC CPU can
be read/written!
(3) Save and read of communication settings
MX Component includes the function to save and read
MX
the communication settings that were previously set in Component
Access to clock data

the communication setup utility. The set data can be
easily utilized from PC to PC, i.e. Transfer from PC
(IBM-PC/AT compatible) used for development of the (7) Multi-thread communication
system to the PC (IBM-PC/AT compatible) actually Access to the same communication path can be made
used for the application. from multiple threads at the same time.
Note: MX Component needs to be installed in both the PCs
(IBM-PC/AT compatible) mentioned in the above example.
Access to the same communication
User program 1
path can be made simultaneously.
Communication
IBM-PC/AT compatible setup data are Actually used
used for development moved. IBM-PC/AT compatible
User program 2
MX MX
Component Component
Enter and save communication Read communication setup data and

setup data. establish communication path.
Reduction of on-site working time
(4) Device monitor function

Utilizing the PLC monitor utility enables you to monitor (8) GX Simulator for offline debugging
the status of the specified device and change its data. By using together GX Developer and GX Simulator,
you can perform debugging on a single IBM-PC/AT
X39 is ON.
X39 is ON! compatible PC without having to connect a PLC.
You can debug by accessing
MX GX Simulator on the same
Component
IBM-PC/AT compatible!
Device status is checked.
MX
Component
Set and connect communication

path on MX Component.
(5) Access to special function module buffer memory IBM-PC/AT compatible PC PLC
Access can be made to not only the PLC CPU devices PLC CPU need not be 18
connected.
but also the intelligent function or special function
module buffer memory area. POINT
GX Developer is required to use the GX Simulator.
18-5
Tool: MX Component
(9) A wide variety of programming languages supported

MX Component supports VB Script and VBA as well as Visual Basic and Visual C++ .
R R
(a) Creating a monitoring page using VBScript

1) A page used for monitoring can be created in HTML format
By using a text editor, you can create a graphical home page for monitoring (HTML format).
You need not purchase Visual Basic , Visual C++ or similar.
R R
Monitoring using Internet Explorer
MX Component
Web browser
Internet Explorer 5.0 or later
HTML for PLC monitoring
MELSECNET/H or like
2) Using ASP function for monitoring via Internet/intranet

The status of the PLC devices or time of when a fault occurs can be accessed remotely just by entering the
remote location URL on Microsoft Internet Explorer. This aspect is achieved by using the VBScript ASP function
when creating the application side Web pages.
Internet
<Factory side> Intranet
MX Component Web server *1

PLC accessing ASP *1: Web server supported by OS
(Internet Information Server,
Personal Web Server, etc.)
<Office side>
Web browser
MELSECNET/H or like
Internet Explorer 5.0 or later
18-6
Tool: MX Component
(b) VBA-driven data collection and monitoring function (12) Access to GOT gateway devices
Programming with VBA allows Microsoft Excel or R
The MX Component gateway communication function

Access functions to be utilized, to create an
R
enables to read/write the GOT gateway device data.

application for providing a real-time graph display.
Reading/writing the gateway device data of the GOT
You can log the PLC device data and collect/save
can read/write the device data of the PLC CPU
the device data in real time.
<Excel>
monitored by the GOT.
MX
Component
Gateway device data of GOT can be

read/written using MX Component
(gateway functions).
Ethernet
<Access>
GOT GOT GOT
PLC CPU data are

read/written with GOT.
Mitsubishi PLC Company A PLC Company B PLC
(13) Reduce search time for defining errors

(10) Compatibility with QCPU (Q mode) multi-CPU system The ActSupport control for the troubleshooting function
Setting the communication setting utility or ACT control is supported.
properties enables access to the multi-CPU system. The error definition and corrective action are displayed
(11) Operability on PC CPU module within the user application by only specifying the error
Q series bus communication from the PC CPU module code.
enables access to the QCPU (Q mode) on the same This eliminates the need to referring to the
base. programming manual in order to find the definition or
Using the MELSECNET/H communication control or corrective action of the error, if an error occurs in the
CC-Link communication control enables access to
ACT control.
other stations via the MELSECNET/H module or
<Example of displaying error definition in message box>
CC-Link module controlled by the PC CPU module.
QCPU (Q mode) QCPU (Q mode) or like Error definition and corrective
action are displayed.
PC CPU
module
CC-Link
MELSECNET/H
18
QCPU (Q mode) or like
18-7
Tool: MX Component
Compatible OS List
The following table shows the Operating Systems compatible with the various MX Component communication paths.
(For details, refer to the MX Component Operating Manual.)
Operating System
Windows NT Windows XP
Item Windows 2000
Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Workstation Professional/
Professional
Version4.0 Home Edition
Computer link communication
Ethernet communication
CPU USB communication
MELSECNET/10 communication
MELSECNET/ H communication
CC-Link communication
CC-Link G4 communication
CPU board communication
Q series bus communication
(PC CPU)
GX Simulator communication
Modem communication
Gateway function communication
: Applicable :N/A
POINT
(1) The following communications through the COM port might cause a memory leak.
Continuous communication is prohibted in Windows95.
Computer link communication
CC-Link G4 communication
Modem communication
(2) When using GX Simulator communication, use the following GX Developer and GX Simulator versions or later.
OS GX Developer Version GX Simulator Version
Windows 95, 98, Version5 (SW5D5C-GPPW) SW5D5C-LLT 10B
NT 4.0
Windows 2000, Me Version7 (SW7D5C-GPPW) Version6 (SW6D5C-LLT)
(3) The VB Script ASP function is not supported for Windows Me or XP Home Edition.
18-8
Tool: MX Component
Connection Configuration List
The following table lists the connection configuration and required interface devices.
(For details, refer to the MX Component Operating Manual.)
Personal
Connection PLC /GOT Type
Computer Side PLC /GOT Side Interface Cable Type Remarks
System (Note 1)
Interface
Basic model QCPU QJ71E71-100 100BASE-TX
High Performance model
QCPU, Process CPU QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2
AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5,
QnA AJ71QE71N-B2,
AJ71QE71N-B5T
A1SJ71QE71-B2,
1SJ71QE71-B5,
General-purpose Q2AS
® A1SJ71QE71N-B2,
Windows -compa
Ethernet A1SJ71QE71N-B5T
tible Ethernet 10BASE-2/5/T
board/card A1SJ71E71-B2,
A1SJ71E71-B5,
QCPU (A mode) AnSH, A1SJ71E71B2-S3,
A2AS (H) A1SJ71E71B5-S3,
A1SJ71E71N-B2,
A1SJ71E71N-B5T
AJ71E71, AJ71E71-S3,
AnN/AnA/AnU AJ71E71N-B2,
AJ71E71N-B5T
Basic model QCPU QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21,
High Performance model QJ71LP21G, QJ71LP21GE,
QCPU, Process CPU QJ71BR11
AJ71QLP21(S), AJ71QLP21GE,
QnA
Q80BD-J71LP21-25 AJ71QLP21G, AJ71QBR11
Q80BD-J71LP21G A1SJ71QLP21 (S), Fiber-optic cable,
MELSECNET/H
Q80BD-J71LP21GE Q2AS A1SJ71QLP21GE, coaxial cable Connectable in the
Q80BD-J71BR11 A1SJ71QBR11 MELSECNET /10
QCPU (A mode) AnSH, A1SJ71LP21, A1SJ71LP21GE, mode.
A2US (H) A1SJ71BR11
AJ71LP21, AJ71LP21G,
AnN/AnA/AnU
AJ71LP21GE, AJ71BR11
Basic model QCPU
QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21,
QCPU, Process CPU
AJ71QLP21 (S), AJ71QLP21G,
QnA
A70BDE-J71QLP23 AJ71QLP21GE, AJ71QBR11
A70BDE-J71QLP2 A1SJ71QLP21 (S), Incompatible with
Optical fiber cable,
MELSECNET/10 3GE A1SJ71QBR11, MELSECNET/H
Q2AS coaxial cable
A70BDE-J71QBR13 A1SJ71QLP21GE, mode.
A70BDE-J71QLR23 A1SJ71QLR21
QCPU (A mode) AnSH, A1SJ71LP21, A1SJ71LP21GE,
A2AS (H) A1SJ71BR11
AJ71LP21, AJ71LP21GE,
AnN/AnA/AnU
AJ71BR11, AJ71LR21
Basic model QCPU
High Performance model QJ61BT11
QCPU, Process CPU
A80BDE-J61BT11 QnA AJ61QBT11
18
CC-Link Twisted pair
A80BDE-J61BT13 Q2AS A1SJ61QBT11
QCPU (A mode)
A1SJ61BT11
/AnSH/A2AS(H)
AnN/AnA/AnU AJ61BT11
18-9
Tool: MX Component

Personal
Connection PLC /GOT Type
Computer Side PLC /GOT Side Interface Cable Type Remarks
System (Note 1)
Interface
Basic model QCPU
High Performance model QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2
QCPU, Process CPU
QnA AJ71QC24N, AJ71QC24N-R2
For RS-422 connection,
A1SJ71QC24N,
Q2AS RS-232/422 converter
A1SJ71QC24N-R2
is required.
QCPU (A mode) A1SJ71UC24-R2,
Basic model QCPU,
/AnSH/A2AS(H) A1SJ71UC24-PRF
RS-232/422 High Performance
Personal computer AnN/AnA/AnU AJ71UC24
RS-232/422 cable model QCPU and
COM port Basic model QCPU
Process CPU does not
CPU module RS-232C need RS-232/422
QCPU, Process CPU/QCPU
converter because they
(A mode)
have RS-232 interface.
QnA/Q2AS/AnN/AnA /AnU/
CPU module RS-422
AnSH/A2AS(H)
QCPU (A MODE) /QnA/Q2AS
CC-Link via AJ65BT-G4 (-S3)
/AnN/AnA/AnU/AnSH /A2AS(H)
FX CPU module RS-422
Personal computer High Performance model Q02CPU is
USB CPU module USB USB cable
USB port QCPU, Process CPU incompatible.
PLC board for personal computer A80BDE-A2USH-S1
Simulation GX Simulator
The PC CPU module
(Note 2) can access
the High Performance
Q series bus communication Q series bus model QCPU and
QCPU, Process CPU
Process CPU in the
same multi PLC
system.
Basic model QCPU
QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2,
QJ71CMO
QCPU, Process CPU
AJ71QC24N, AJ71QC24N-R2, With the exception of
QnA RS232 cable
Q6TEL the QJ71CMO, a
between PLC
Modem Modem A1SJ71QC24N, modem is also
Q2AS side interface
A1SJ71QC24N-R2, Q6TEL required on the PLC
and modem
QCPU (A mode), AnSH, side.
A6TEL, Q6TEL
A2US(H), AnN, AnA, AnU
RS-232 communication device
FX
(Note 3)
General-purpose
®
Windows -compa
Gateway A900GOT A9GT-J71E71-T 10BASE-T
tible Ethernet
board/card
Note 1: "AnU" includes motion controller "A173UH(S1), A273UH(S3)". "AnSH" includes motion controller "A171SH/172SH".
Note 2: MELSEC-Q series is compatible with PC CPU module (manufactured by CONTEC CO., LTD.)
Note 3: Refer to the FX series manual for the RS-232 communication device.
18-10
Tool: MX Component
Operating Environment
The following table summarizes the recommended operating environment for MX Component.
Item Description
IBM PC/AT
Pentium 133MHz or higher (Note 1) IBM PC/AT compatible personal computer installed with applicable
R
Personal compatible personal

OS. (Note 2)
computer computer
PC CPU module MELSEC-Q series corresponding PC CPU module (CONTEC CO., LTD. make)
Any of Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System (English version),
R R
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System (English version),

R R
Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System (English version),

R R
Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System (English version),

R R
Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4.0 (English version) (Note 3),
R R
Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System (English version) (Note 4) and

R R
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition (English version) (Note 4)

R R
Required memory 32MB or more (Note 5)

Hard disk free space 100MB or more
Disk drive CD-ROM disk drive
Display 800 600 dot or more resolution
Programming language Development software

Visual Basic Microsoft Visual Basic 6.0 (English version)
R R R
Visual C++ Microsoft Visual C++ 6.0 (English version)

R R R
Programming language (Note 6) VBScript (Note 7), (Note 8) Text editor and commercially available HTML tool
Microsoft Excel 2000 (English version), Microsoft Excel 2002
R R
VBA (English version), Microsoft Access 2000 (English version) or

R
Microsoft Access 2002 (English version)

R
Note 1: Pentium 150MHz or higher is recommended when using Windows Me, and Pentium 300MHz or higher when using
R R R
Windows XP Professional or Windows XP Home Edition.

R R
Note 2: This product does not work with a multiprocessor IBM-PC/AT-compatible personal computer, because the driver is not compatible
with it.
Note 3: Service Pack 3 or higher is required when using Windows NT Workstation 4.0.
R
Note 4: MX Component does not work in XP compatibility mode.

Note 5: 64MB or more is recommended when using Windows 2000 Professional, or 128MB or more when using Windows XP
R R
Professional or Windows XP Home Edition.

R
Note 6: User programs created in the English environment work only in the English environment only. They cannot be used in the
Japanese environment.
Note 7: Internet Explorer (version 5.00.2919.6307 or later) is required for VBScript.
Note 8: ASP function is not available when using Windows Me or Windows XP Home Edition.
R R
Usable PLC CPUs

The usable PLC CPUs are given below.
PLC CPU Types
A0J2HCPU, A1SCPU, A1SCPU-S1, A1SCPUC24-R2, A1SHCPU, A1SJCPU, A1SJHCPU, A1NCPU, A2CCPU,
A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF, A2CJCPU, A2NCPU, A2NCPU-S1, A2SCPU, A2SCPU-S1, A2SHCPU,
ACPU A2SHCPU-S1, A3NCPU, A1FXCPU, A2ACPU, A2ACPU-S1, A2ACPUP21/R21, A2ACPUP21/R21-S1, A3ACPU,
A3ACPUP21/R21, A2UCPU, A2UCPU-S1, A2USCPU, A2USCPU-S1, A2ASCPU, A2ASCPU-S1,
A2ASCPU-S30, A2USHCPU-S1, A3UCPU, A4UCPU
Q2ACPU, Q2ACPU-S1, Q2ASCPU, Q2ASCPU-S1, Q2ASHCPU, Q2ASHCPU-S1,
QnACPU
Q3ACPU, Q4ACPU, Q4ARCPU
QCPU (A mode) Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A, Q06HCPU-A
Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, Q12PHCPU,
QCPU (Q mode)
Q25PHCPU 18
FXCPU FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FX1N, FX1NC, FX1S, FX2, FX2C, FX2N, FX2NC series
Motion controller CPU A171SHCPU, A172SHCPU, A173UHCPU, A173UHCPU-S1, A273UHCPU, A273UHCPU-S3
Accessible CPU Device Ranges

Refer to the MX Component Operating Manual for accessible devices.
18-11
PRODUCTS 18.1.3 Excel communication support
tool: MX Sheet
Overview (4) Alarm summary

This function logs the PLC bit information corresponding
MX Sheet is a software package that provides monitoring, to its associated alarm on Excel . This is useful for
logging, alarm data collection, setting changes, etc. for the analyzing the operation rate of the production line, for
PLC system by only simple setting without the need for example.
programming.
(MX Component Ver. 3.01B or later is required to use MX
Sheet.)
(1) Monitor
This function displays the status of each PLC device on
Excel in real time.
(2) Write
This function writes the equipment recipe data from
Excel to a PLC. The recipe data can be automatically
written at a specified time or triggered from the
(5) Comment
condition of a PLC device.
This function converts the values of device data into the
comments, and then displays them on Excel .
These comments are useful to check the operating
status of a remote field at a glance.
Monitor Write
(3) Logging
This function logs the PLC device data on Excel .
The onsite quality/temperature/test result data, etc. can
be collected and analyzed easily. (6) Automatic save/Automatic print
This function automatically saves and prints the data
displayed on Excel at a specified time or triggered
from the condition of a PLC device.
It can automatically print and save daily reports and test
results.
MX Sheet
Automatic print Excel sheets/books
(Easily creates daily/weekly/monthly reports)
M0 turns on.
Automatic save data in an Excel book file,
HTML file or CSV file
18-12
18.1.3 Excel communication support PRODUCTS
tool: MX Sheet
Features
(1) Easy settings without programming

The user can easily set all required settings for MX Sheet, i.e., cell and communication data from Excel menu bar.
This enables communication between the PLC and Excel without the need for programming.
[Step1] [Step2]
Simple and
easy settings!
Start the Setup utility, and select a function and the conditions of the target device.
Arrange windows as desired, and then start communication from the MX Sheet menu bar, which executes the data
collection.
(2) Support for various communication paths

MX Sheet can flexibly work in the existing or new system, since it can communicate with the same CPUs and devices
through the same communication paths as MX Component.
(3) Collecting and handling remote field data easily

1) Data collection/Production instructions via a general public line
The user can collect daily production results from domestic and/or overseas factories, and then send back
production instruction data via a general public line.
Headquarters
Distributes productin plans to each

factory every 0:00. MX Sheet
Collects production results from

each factory every 20:00.
Subscriber line/PBX, etc.
18
Factory A Factory A Factory A
18-13
tool: MX Sheet
2) Monitoring field status using a Web browser

The onsite personal computer Web server that is installed with MX Sheet, can automatically save the data as
HTML format using the automatic save function. Therefore, the user can monitor or take a snapshot of the field
production status during a business trip or at their desk via the Internet or Intranet, for example.
Plant
Takes snapshot of the factory

Creates HTML files using the automatic Internet MX Sheet is status during business trip or
save function of MX Sheet Intranet not required. from a desk
(4) Accessing the devices in the third party PLC that is connected with a GOT
MX Sheet can communicate with a third party PLC that is connected to a GOT, because it can communicate with the
actual GOT itself. Therefore, MX Sheet is applicable to equipment where third party PLCs are used as well as MELSEC
PLCs.
MX Sheet can communicate with third party

PLCs as well as MELSEC PLCs!
GOT Q, QnA, A series FX series
62P 4 CPU X10 X10 X10 X10 Y11 Y11 7 1BR11

J 7 1BR11
J
Third party PLC
18-14
tool: MX Sheet
(5) Save/print functions

1) Saving/printing data at a specified time or triggered from the condition of a PLC device
MX Sheet
Automatic print of Excel sheet/book
(Ease of creating daily/weekly/monthly reports)
M0 turns on.
Automatic save into

Excel book file,
HTML file or CSV file
2) Saving/printing logging data continuously

MX Sheet automatically saves the logging/alarm summary data displayed on Excel and/or prints them when the
display area is full.
History display direction
Automatically saves/prints data when the

history data display area is full.
3) Logging directly into a CSV file

MX Sheet can save monitor/logging data in a CSV file while displaying them on Excel . It is convenient to collect
data continuously for an extended period.
The CSV format data can be easily utilized into a database.
Excel
Normally displays monitor/logging

data on Excel.
MX Sheet
CSV file
Logs monitor/logging data on Excel as history

data into a CSV file at the same time. 18
(6) MX Chart (SW3D5F-OLEX) compatibility

MX Sheet includes a data conversion function, i.e., convert Excel sheets, communication setup and tag files of MX
Chart (SW3D5F-OLEX) to MX Sheet.
18-15
tool: MX Sheet
Compatible OS List
Since this list is the same as the one for MX Component, refer to the list for MX Component in Section 19.1.2.
Connection Configuration List
The following table shows the recommended operating environment of MX Sheet.

Item Description
Model IBM PC/AT Pentium 200MHz or higher IBM PC/AT compatible personal computer (Note 2) installed with
compatible personal applicable OS (Pentium 300MHz or higher for Windows XP).
computer
PC CPU Windows NT4.0
Windows 2000
Operating System Windows 98 (English version)
Windows ME (English version)
Windows NT4.0 Workstation (English version) ( Note 1)
Windows 2000 Professional (English version)
Windows XP Professional/Home Edition (English version)
Excel Excel 2000 (English version), Excel 2002 (English version)
MX Component MX Component Ver. 3.01B or later (required) (Note 3)
Display Resolution 1024 768 dots or higher (required)
Memory 64MB or more (128MB or more for Windows XP)
At installation: 80MB or more (recommended)
HD free space
At execution: Virtual memory free space 100MB or more
Note 1: SP3 or higher is required for use of Excel 2000, SP6a or higher for use of Excel 2002.
Note 2: Incompatible since some network drivers are not supported.
Note 3: MX Component Ver. 3.01B or later is required to use MX Sheet.
Usable PLC CPUs
Accessible CPU Device Ranges
Refer to the MX Component Operating Manual for accessible devices.
18-16
tool: MX Sheet
Comparison between MX Sheet and MX Chart
Item MX Sheet MX Chart Remarks

Monitor Number of device points/cell range 1000 points
Communication interval 0.5s or more
Number of CSV logging save points 1000 points None Same as the number of points monitored on Excel
Number of CSV logging save rows 9999999 rows None
Logging Number of device points/cell range 256 points Maximum columns in Excel specifications
Number of logging rows 65536 rows 2000 rows Maximum columns in Excel specifications
Communication interval 1s or more
Save/print when cell range is full Yes None
Number of CSV logging save points 256 points None Same as the number of points logged on Excel
Number of CSV logging save rows 9999999 rows None
Write Number of device points/cell range 1000 points
Alarm summary Number of device points/cell range 300 points
Number of history rows/cell range 65536 rows 300 rows Maximum columns in Excel specifications
Comment Number of device points/cell range 1 points
Number of comments/cell range 1000 pcs.
Number of comment monitoring 500 points
points/Book
Automatic Time specified Yes
save/print Device trigger specified Yes None
Automatic save format Excel Book Excel Book
format format
HTML format
1-shot Monitor Yes Read test (MX Chart)
communication Logging Yes Read test (MX Chart)
Write Yes Write test (MX Chart)
Comment Yes None
Alarm No
Macro Read function No Provided Not available for MX Sheet
Write function No Provided
"Number of points" is indicated in units of one, for each word device (single precision).
18
18-17
18
PC-RELATED
PRODUCTS 18.1 MX Series
18.1.4 Graphic Data Package: MX Parts
Overview Graphic Data

MX Parts is a collection of graphic parts (bitmap data), The following table lists the number of figures per type.
which can be utilized for developing monitor screens for
Type Number of Figures
Automation system applications. They can be used in
ISO figure (Note 1) 348
Visual®Basic®, Excel®and other software, reducing the
Box 4
time for creating separate graphical parts. Automobile 16
Conveyor 21
Features
Crane 20
Variety of parts Fan 8
There is a wide choice of different graphic data (1351 Display frame 6

Keyboard 15
parts) such as buttons, tanks, valves, pipes and ISO
Lamp and pushbutton 361
figures.
MELSEC 313
Bitmap format data
Meter 2
Graphic data are available in bitmap format so that you Motor 10
can use them in various application programs, e.g. Visual Pipe 41
®
Basic®and Excel®. Pump 8
No need to install Robot 114
The graphic data is supplied on CD-ROM. You can read Speaker 11
the necessary data directly from CD-ROM without Tank 18
installation into the hard disk. Valve 18

Others 17
Supporting two color modes, True Color and 256
colors Note 1: Figures of the following numbers are stipulated in
The package is compatible with two different color modes ISO7000 (1989)
1 to 100, 110, 111, 114, 130, 131, 134, 135, 137, 138,
to correspond to various personal computer
151, 157, 159 to 200, 201 to 400 (except 263, 265, 281,
environments.
298, 396)
About the Copyright and Right to Use
Item Description
WWW browser Internet Explorer 4.01 or later or Netscape
The copyright of the figures contained in MX Parts
4.06 or later belongs to Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
®
CPU Pentium 100MHz or more The figures contained in MX Parts can only be used by
(multiprocessor incompatible) those who purchased the software duly and returned the
Display Resolution 800 600 dots or more software agreement. Those who have not purchased it
(recommended 1024 768 dots) duly or those who have not returned the software
Required 32MB or more
agreement cannot use the data package.
memory
You cannot distribute or sell the figures contained in the
Hard disk free 5MB or more
space
MX Parts as-is or altered. You can distribute or sell the
figures after incorporating them on monitor screens, etc.
18-18
PC-RELATED
18.1 MX Series PRODUCTS
18.1.4 Graphic Data Package: MX Parts
Graphic Data Samples
Pipe
ISO figure
Pump
Conveyor
Robot
Fan
Speaker
Display frame
Tank
Keyboard
Valve
Lamp and
pushbutton
Automobile
MELSEC
Others
Meter
18
Motor
18-19
PC-RELATED 18.218.2.1
Network Boards
MELSECNET/H Boards:
PRODUCTS Q80BD-J71LP21-25, Q80BD-J71LP21G,
Q80BD-J71BR11
Overview
Personal computer
Personal computer
MELSECNET/H board
MELSECNET/H board High Performance
High Performance (Q80BD-J71BR11)
(Q80BD-J71LP21-25) NET/10 model QCPU
model QCPU
mode
MELSECNET/H(10Mbps)
MELSECNET/10
M E LS E C N E T /H (10 M bp s)
High High
Performance Performance
High Performance High Performance High Performance model QCPU model QCPU
model QCPU model QCPU model QCPU QnA AnU
High Performance model QCPU
MELSECNET/H(25Mbps)
High Performance Personal computer

model QCPU MELSECNET/H board
(Q80BD-J71LP21-25)
When the MELSECNET/H board is used on the PCI bus as the optional board, the personal computer is a control or normal
station of MELSECNET/H network system (Note 1) or MELSECNET/10 network system (Note 1).
Note 1: The MELSECNET/H board is compatible with an inter-PLC network, and incompatible with a remote I/O network.
Features The MELSECNET/H board can work by merely putting

it into the personal computer and installing the software
(1) A personal computer can connect with a
MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 network system. package.
You can put the MELSECNET/H board into a personal You can set the channel number, station numbers and
computer to use the personal computer as a control or others from the MELSECNET/H utility software.
normal station in the corresponding network. (4) Availability of user programming functions
The functions compatible with Microsoft® Visual C++®
Board Type Compatible Network
Q80BD-J71LP21-25 MELSECNET/H (25Mbps) (optical loop system), and Microsoft® Visual Basic® allow you to easily create
MELSECNET/H (10Mbps) (optical loop system), user applications, e.g. those for remote control of PLC
MELSECNET/10 (optical loop system)
Q80BD-J71LP21G MELSECNET/H (10Mbps) (optical loop system),
and read/write of data from/to devices.
Q80BD-J71LP21GE MELSECNET/10 (optical loop system) (5) Drivers for various operating systems
Q80BD-J71BR11 MELSECNET/H (10Mbps) (coaxial bus system), You can configure a system according to your PCs
MELSECNET/10 (coaxial bus system)
operating environment with the various drivers
(2) Compatibility with multiple PLC system of High
provided.
Performance model QCPU and Process CPU.
® ®
Specifying the logical station number on the Compatible Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System
OS ® ®
Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System
MELSECNET/H utility enables the personal computer
® ®
to access the corresponding High Performance model Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System
Version 4.0
QCPU or Process CPU in a multi PLC system. ® ®
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating
(3) Compatibility with PCI Bus System
(6) They have compatible operation with MELSECNET/10.
18-20
18.2 Network Boards PC-RELATED
18.2.1 MELSECNET/H Boards:
Q80BD-J71LP21-25, Q80BD-J71LP21G, PRODUCTS
Q80BD-J71BR11
(a) User applications with the MELSECNET/10 boards Function List

are also compatible with the MELSECNET/H Name Description
boards, due to some specifications being the same. Data Cyclic transmission function, transient
For example, Max. No. of loadable boards and communications transmission function
Loopback function, automatic return function,
channel number are the same for both boards. RAS function loop monitoring function, self-diagnosis function,
etc.
Specifications
Q80BD-J71LP21-25 Q80BD-J71LP21G Q80BD-J71LP21GE Q80BD-J71BR11
Item MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/H
MELSECNET/H
(10Mbps) optical loop (25Mbps) optical loop (10Mbps) optical loop (10Mbps) optical loop
coaxial bus system
system system system system
Transmission speed 10Mbps 25Mbps 10Mbps 10Mbps
Cable type Optical (SI, H-PCF, broad-band H-PCF, QSI) Optical (GI) Optical (62.5GI) Coaxial (3C-2V,
5C-2V)
Communication system Token ring system Token bus system
Transmission path format Duplex loop Simplex bus
Stations connectable in one network 64 stations (control station: 1, normal stations: 63) 32 stations
(control station: 1,
normal station: 31)
Other network specifications Other specifications conform to those of MELSECNET/H.
Max. number of loadable boards 4 boards (total number of MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 boards)
Loading slot PCI bus slot (half size) board size, refer to Section 19.2.4
Number of occupied slots 1 slot/board
Item Description
Pentium® 133MHz or higher IBM-PC/AT-compatible personal computer and PCI bus slot (half size) installed with
Personal computer
applicable OS (Note 1)
PCI bus specifications 5VDC, 32-bit bus, system clock: 33MHz
Any of the following:
® ®
Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System
® ®
Operating system (OS) Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System
® ®
Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4.0 (Note 2)
® ®
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System
Display Resolution SVGA or higher (recommended: 1024 768 dots)
Required memory capacity 32MB or more
Disk drive
CD-ROM disk drive
(Needed for driver installation)
® ®
Microsoft Visual Basic 5.0 (Note 3)
® ®
Microsoft Visual Basic 6.0
Programming language ® ®
Microsoft Visual C++ 5.0 (Note 3)
® ®
Microsoft Visual C++ 6.0
with it.
®
Note 2: Service Pack 3 or higher is needed for use of Windows NT Workstation 4.0.
® ® ®
Note 3: When the OS is Windows 2000 Professional, Visual Basic 5.0 and Visual C++ 5.0 are unusable.
Accessories 18
Product Description
Software SWnDNC-MNETH-B software (driver)
Connector BNC F connector 1 pc. (attached to Q80BD-J71BR11 only)
Manual MELSECNET/H Interface Board User's Manual (Hardware)
18-21
PC-RELATED 18.2 Network Boards
18.2.2 MELSECNET/10 Boards:
PRODUCTS A70BD-J71QLP23, A70BD-J71QLP23G,
A70BD-J71QBR13, A70BD-J71QLR23
Overview
Station 3 Station 1
Station 1 Station 2 Station 2 Station 3 Station 1 Station 2 Station 3 Station 32
(normal station) (normal station)
(control station) (normal station) (normal station) (control station) (control station) (normal station) (normal station) (normal station)
A A A
A A Q A
computer
PC/AT personal
model QCPU
High Performance
model QCPU
High Performance
model QCPU
High Performance
A A A A
computer
PC/AT personal
70
(NET/10 mode)
QJ71LP21
(NET/10 mode)
QJ71BR11
70 70
(NET/10 mode)
QJ71LP21
n J B B
n J n J B n J
D D D
E E U 71 E A 71
U 71 I I U 71 I C Q
C L J J C L C B J
P B
71 71 71
P P Q Q P P P R Q U R
L L B
U 21 P P U 21 U 11 R 11
23 23 13
Network No. 1 Network No. 2 Terminating resistor MELSECNET/10 Terminating resistor
A
A A A A
computer
PC/AT personal
70 A A A A A A
n J B n J
D n J n J n J
U 71 E U 71 U 71 U 71 U 71
I
C L J C L C L C L C L
71
P P Q P P P P P P P P
L
U 21 P U 21 U 21 U 21 U 21
23
Station 6 Station 5 Station 4 Station 6 Station 5 Station 4
(normal station) (normal station) (normal station) (normal station) (normal station) (normal station)
Multi-level system Coaxial bus system
The MELSECNET/10 board can be installed into an ISA bus slot as the personal computer optional board to connect the
personal computer to the MELSECNET/10 (Note 1) network system.
Note 1: Not compatible with MELSECNET/H mode.
Features Availability of user programming functions

The functions designed for Microsoft® Visual C++® and
Personal computer connected to Microsoft® Visual Basic® allow you to easily create user
MELSECNET/10 network system
applications, e.g. for remote control of PLC and
You can install the MELSECNET/10 board into a
read/write of data from/to devices.
personal computer to use the personal computer as a
Availability of drivers according to various
normal station on the MELSECNET/10 network.
operating systems
Monitoring/testing utility
You can configure a system according to your PCs
To check the status of connection of the network, you
operating environment with the various drivers provided.
can confirm the network status and perform the test ® ®
Compatible OS Microsoft Windows 95
function from the personal computer screen.
® ®
Microsoft Windows 98
Cyclic communication and transient
® ®
communication
® ®
Microsoft MS-DOS 6.2 (Note 1)
The board has two communication functions: cyclic
®
communication in which data is refreshed in accordance Note 1: The driver for MS-DOS 6.2 cannot access the High
with the network parameters set in the control station; Performance model QCPU system.
and transient communication in which the PLC can be

accessed at any time initiated from dedicated instructions
in the PLC program.
18-22
18.2.2 MELSECNET/10 Boards:
A70BD-J71QLP23, A70BD-J71QLP23G, PRODUCTS
A70BD-J71QBR13, A70BD-J71QLR23
Function List
Name Description
Cyclic communication function, transient communication function
Data communications
Multiple transmission function (for duplex loop system)
RAS function Loopback function, automatic return function, loop monitoring function, self-diagnosis function
Specifications
Item Optical loop system Coaxial loop system Coaxial bus system
A70BDE-J71QLP23 A70BDE-J71QLP23GE A70BDE-J71QLR23 A70BDE-J71QBR13
Connection cable SI, H-PCF, broad-band GI 3C-2V, 5C-2V or equivalent
H-PCF, QSI
MELSECNET/10 mode MELSECNET/10 mode (incompatible with MELSECNET/H mode)
Transmission speed 10MBPS (equivalent to 20MBPS in multiple transmission) 10MBPS
Communication system Token ring system Token bus system
Transmission path format Duplex loop Simplex bus
Stations connected in one network 64 stations (control station: 1, ordinary stations: 63) 32 stations (control station: 1, normal station: 1)
Control station/normal station Normal station (does not operate as control station)
Other network specifications Other specifications conform to those of MELSECNET/10.
Loading slot ISA bus slot (MELSECNET/10 board for IBM-PC/AT compatible personal computer)
Number of loadable boards Max. 4 (Total number of MELSECNET/H boards and MELSECNET/10 boards)
Number of occupied slots 1 slot/board
5VDC internal current consumption 0.53A 0.52A 1.3A 0.74A
Item Description
Pentium® 133MHz or higher IBM-PC/AT-compatible personal computer and PCI bus slot (half size) installed
Personal computer (Note 1)
with applicable OS (Note 1).
® ®
• Microsoft Windows 95
® ®
• Microsoft Windows 98
Operating system (OS) ® ®
• Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0
® ®
• Microsoft MS-DOS Ver 6.2 (Note 2)
Disk drive
3.5 inch (1.44MB) floppy disk drive
(Needed for driver installation)
® ®
Microsoft Visual Basic 4.0/5.0/6.0
Programming language ® ®
Microsoft Visual C++ 4.2/5.0/6.0
with it.
®
Note 2: The driver for MS-DOS 6.2 cannot access the High Performance model QCPU system.
Accessories
Product Description
Software SWnDNF-MNET10 software (driver)
Connector BNC F connector 1 pc. (attached to A70BDE-J71QBR13 only)
Manual MELSECNET/10 Interface Board User's Manual
18
18-23
PC-RELATED 18.2 Network Boards
PRODUCTS 18.2.3 CC-Link Boards:
A80BDE-J61BT11, A80BDE-J61BT13
Overview Features
Personal computer connected to CC-Link system

You can load the CC-Link board into a personal computer
and connect the personal computer to CC-Link as a local
station.
Adoption of PCI bus
Because of compatibility with the PCI bus, troublesome
switch setting is not needed. By merely installing the board
into the PCI bus, initial setting is automatically made.
Monitoring/testing utility
To check the network connection status, you can confirm
Type: A80BDE-J61BT11, A80BDE-J61BT13 the network status and perform the test function from the
personal computer screen.
Availability of user programming functions
Windows
The functions compatible with Microsoft® Visual C++® and
Personal computer Microsoft® Visual Basic® allow you to easily create user
applications, e.g. those for remote control of PLC and
PLC read/write of data from/to devices.
Availability of drivers according to various
operating systems
You can configure a system according to your PCs
operating environment with the various drivers provided.
CC-Link ® ®
Compatible OS Microsoft Windows 95 operating system
The CC-Link board can be installed into a PCI bus slot as ® ®
Microsoft Windows 98 operating system
an optional board of a personal computer to connect the ® ®
Microsoft Windows NT
personal computer to the CC-Link system. (Note 1) Workstation operating system version 4.0
® ®
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional operating
Two kinds of CC-Link boards are available.
system
A80BDE-J61BT11 supports both master function and local
function of CC-Link while A80BDE-J61BT13 only supports
Direct control of CC-Link remote I/O from
local function of CC-Link.
Note 1: The CC-Link board is compatible with the master or local
personal computer
station of a CC-Link system. The A80BDE-J61BT11 has the master station functions
(Note 1) of CC-Link to directly control CC-Link remote I/O,
remote device and intelligent device stations without a
PLC.
Note 1: The master station functions are available only when the
®
OS used is Windows NT Workstation 4.0 or
®
Windows 2000 professional.
Compatibility with multi PLC system of High

Performance model QCPU and Process CPU
Specifying the logical station number on the CC-Link utility
enables the personal computer to access the
corresponding High Performance model QCPU or Process
CPU in a multiple CPU system.
18-24
18.2.3 CC-Link Boards: PRODUCTS
A80BDE-J61BT11, A80BDE-J61BT13
Function List
Name Description
Data communications Cyclic communication function, transient communication function
RAS function Offline test function, automatic return function, self-diagnostic function
Item Specifications
Type A80BDE-J61BT11 A80BDE-J61BT13
Transmission speed Can be selected from among 156kbps, 625bps, 2.5Mbps, 5Mbps and 10Mbps.
Max. transmission distance • Max. 1.2km (3934.43feet) (depending on transmission speed). • Ver. 1.10 compatible
Master: None
Number of occupied stations 1 or 4 stations selectable
Local: 1 or 4 station selectable
Compatible station Master (Note 1) /Local station Local station
Number of loadable boards Max. 4
Loading slot PCI bus slot Refer to Section 19.2.4 for the board size.
Number of occupied slots 1 slot
Weight 0.16kg
®
Note 1: The master station functions are available only when the OS used is Windows NT Workstation 4.0 or Windows®2000 professional.
Item Description
Pentium® 133MHz or higher IBM-PC/AT-compatible personal computer and PCI bus slot (half
Personal computer
size) installed with applicable OS (Note 1)
PCI bus specifications 5VDC, 32-bit bus, system clock: 33MHz
Microsoft® Windows® 95 operating system
Microsoft® Windows® 98 operating system
Operating system (OS)
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation operating system Version 4.0 (Note 2)
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional operating system
Disk drive 3.5 inch (1.44MB) floppy disk drive (needed for driver installation)
® ® ® ®
Microsoft Visual Basic 5.0 (Note 3), Microsoft Visual Basic 6.0,
Programming language ® ® ® ®
Microsoft Visual C++ 5.0 (Note 3), Microsoft Visual C++ 6.0
with it.
®
Note 2: Service Pack 3 or more is required when using Windows NT Workstation 4.0.
® ® ®
Note 3: When the OS is Windows 2000 Professional, Visual Basic 5.0 and Visual C++ 5.0 are unusable.
Accessories
Product Description
Software SWnDNF-CCLINK-B software (driver)
18
Manual CC-Link Interface Board User's Manual
Terminating resistor 110 and 130 , 2 pcs. each (attached to A80BDE-J61BT11 only)
18-25
PC-RELATED
PRODUCTS 18.2 Network Boards
18.2.4 External Dimensions
Q80BD-J71LP21-25, Q80BD-J71LP21G, A80BDE-J61BT11, A80BDE- J61BT13

Q80BD-J71LP21GE, Q80BD-J71BR11
(1) A80BDE-J61BT11
(1) Q80BD-J71LP21-25, Q80BD-J71LP21G, 188(7.41)
Q80BD-J71LP21GE 6(0.24)
147(5.79)
RUN ERR HIGH
LOW
SD RD
98(3.86)
107(4.22)
153(6.03)
126(4.96)
122(4.81)
L
RUN ERR.
BDNO.
DA
DB
SD RD DG
SLD
IN BD
NO.
A80B D-J61BT11
99(3.90)
BD808C083G51
121(4.77)
176(6.93)
OUT
18 192(7.56)
(0.71)
(2) A80BDE-J61BT13
188(7.41)
6(0.24)
19 141(5.56)
(0.75)
RUN ERR HIGH
LOW
(2) Q80BD-J71BR11
SD RD
98(3.86)
107(4.22)
126(4.96)
122(4.81)
147(5.79)
BDNO.
DA
DB
DG
153(6.03)
SLD
BD
NO.
A80B D-J61BT11
BD808C083G51
L
RUN ERR.
176(6.93)
192(7.56)
SD RD
18
(0.71)
99(3.90)
121(4.77)
19 141(5.56)
(0.75)
Unit: mm (inch)
18-26
PC-RELATED
18.2 Network Boards PRODUCTS
18.2.4 External Dimensions
(3) A70BDE-J71QLR23
A70BDE-J71QLP23, A70BDE-J71QLP23GE,
A70BDE-J71QBR13, A70BDE-J71QLR23 456 456 456 4 56 45 6 4 56 456 7 89
23 4 6
AB
5
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
CDE
901 9 01 901 90 1 901 901 901 F01
168(6.62)
(1) A70BDE-J71QLP23, A70BDE-J71QLP23GE
175(6.90)
163(6.42)
169(6.66) R.SD F.SD
R.SD
IN
107(4.22)
F.RD
101(3.98)
122(4.81)
F.SD
OUT
R.RD
122(4.81)
142(5.59)
122(4.81)
BD808C114G51
162(6.38)
175(6.90)
(2) A70BDE-J71QBR13
169(6.66)
122(4.81)
142(5.59)
122(4.81)
162(6.38)
175(6.90)
Unit: mm (inch)
18
18-27
APPENDICES
App.1 Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions (Always read these precautions) IMPORTANT: Whether outputs are turned off or
not depends on the Hold/Clear
When using the Q series products, thoroughly read the selection preset per output module.
manuals packed with the individual products and the When Hold is selected, outputs are
associated manuals introduced in the manuals packed not turned off if a faulty condition is
with the products, and also pay careful attention to safety detected. Therefore, always make up
a necessary external safety circuit.
and handle the equipment properly. (3) Outputs could be left on or off when there is a
The precautions given in this section are concerned with failure in the output module relay or transistor.
all Q series products and describe only the items to be Build an external monitoring circuit that will monitor
noted in the design stage. For the precautions for any output signal that could cause serious
individual products and the precautions for installation, accidents.
wiring, starting, maintenance, usage and disposal of the Either long-period overcurrent beyond the rating or
products, always refer to the QCPU (Q Mode)/ Process that caused by short-circuited load flows in the output
CPU User's Manual (Hardware Design/Maintenance and module may lead to smoke or fire. To prevent this,
Inspection) and the user's manuals of the individual configure an external safety circuit, such as a fuse.
products. Build a circuit that turns on the external power supply
These [Safety Precautions] classify the safety precautions after the PLC power supply is turned on. If the external
into two categories: "DANGER" and "CAUTION". power supply is turned on first, it could result in false
output or malfunction.
When a communication fault occurs in the data link,
DANGER Procedures which may lead to a the faulty station is placed in the following states.
dangerous condition and cause
Using communications status information, configure an
death or serious injury if not carried interlock circuit in the sequence program so that the
out properly. system operates safely. Not doing so could result in
false output or malfunction.
(1) The data link data prior to the communication fault
CAUTION Procedures which may lead to a is held intact.
dangerous condition and cause
superficial to medium injury, or (2) All outputs turn off in the remote I/O stations of
physical damage only, if not carried MELSECNET(II, /B, /10) and CC-Link.
(3) In the remote I/O stations of
out properly.
MELSECNET/MINI-S3, outputs are held or all
Depending on circumstances, procedures indicated by outputs turn off in accordance with E.C. mode
CAUTION may also be linked to serious consequences. setting.
For checking a faulty communication station or the
In any case, it is important to follow the instructions. operating status at a communication fault, refer to the
corresponding data link manual.
DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
DANGER CAUTION
Do not bundle the control and communication cables
Install a safety circuit external to the PLC that keeps with the main circuit and power cables, or install them
the entire system safe if an external power supply fault close to each other. They should be installed 100 mm
or PLC failure occurs. Otherwise, accidents could (3.94inch) or more away from each other. Not doing so
result from false output or malfunction. could result in noise that would cause malfunction.
(1) Outside the PLC, construct mechanical damage MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS
preventing interlock circuits such as emergency
stop, protective circuits, forward/reverse or other CAUTION
opposed-motion interlocking circuits, and Use the PLC in the environment that meets the
positioning upper and lower limits switches. general specifications given in this manual. Using this
(2) When the PLC detects either of the following faulty PLC in any environment outside the range of the
conditions, it may stop operation and turn off all general specifications could result in electric shock,
outputs. fire, malfunction, or damage to or deterioration of the
• The overcurrent protection or overvoltage product.
protection of the power supply module is WIRING PRECAUTIONS
activated.
• The PLC CPU detected a fault, such as the CAUTION
watchdog timer error, with its self-diagnostic In grounding the LG and FG ground terminals, be sure
function. to carry out at least D type (Class 3) grounding with the
In addition, all outputs may be turned on when protective ground conductor exclusive to PLC. Not
there is a fault that the PLC CPU cannot detect, doing so could result in electric shock or malfunction.
such as in the I/O controller. Build a fail safe circuit Use the PLC at the rated voltage of each module.
or provide a proper mechanism outside the PLC Using it at any different voltage can cause a fire or
failure.
that will make sure the machine will operate safely
Do not connect the outputs of multiple power supply
at such times. modules in parallel. Doing so can heat the power
For fail safe circuit examples, refer to "Loading and supply modules, causing a fire or failure.
Installation" on the next page.
App
App-1
Appendices
App.2 Mounting and Installation
Fail safe - Considerations Therefore, it is necessary to make a circuit which can

switch on the PLC power supply first.
When the PLC power supply is switched ON OFF, Also, an abnormal operation may be performed if an
proper process output may not be provided temporarily external power supply fault or PLC failure takes place.
due to differences in delay time or starting time between To prevent any of these abnormal operations from leading
the PLC power supply and PLC output load power supply to the abnormal operation of the whole system, areas
(especially DC). which can result in machine breakdown and accidents
For example, if the output load power supply is switched due to abnormal operations (e.g. emergency stop,
on in a DC output module and the PLC power supply is protective and interlock circuits) should be constructed
then switched on, the DC output module may provide outside the PLC to achieve fail safe.
false output instantaneously at power-on of the PLC. Examples of system design circuits in the above viewpoint
are given below.
System design circuit example 1 (when not using ERR contact of power supply module)
For AC only POWER SUPPLY For AC DC
POWER
SUPPLY Input switched
when power
supply TRANSFORMER
TRANSFORMER
established.
FUSE FUSE
FUSE
CPU DC
CPU POWER
SM52
SM52 Ym SUPPLY
Ym (-) (+)
SM403
SM403 RUN/STOP circuit Yn
Yn interlocked with RA1 FUSE
XM
TM Set time for
PROGRAM DC input signal
START TM
MC1 N0 M10 to be established.
SW N0
RA1
MC M10
MC STOP SW
START PROGRAM
INPUT MODULE SW RA1
MC
MC STOP SW
OUTPUT MODULE
Low battery alarm RA2
Ym RA2 Voltage relay is
L (Lamp or buzzer) XM
recommended
RA1 switched ON by
Yn SM403
RA1
OUTPUT MODULE Low battery alarm

OUTPUT MODULE MC
(Lamp or buzzer)
Power to output Ym
L ON when run by
MC equipment switched SM403
OFF when the STOP Yn
RA1
signal is given.
MC2 In the case of a stop
MC1
caused by an emergency OUTPUT MODULE
MC MC
MC1 stop limit switch.
MC2
Power to output
Interlock circuits as necessary. equipment
Provide external interlock switched OFF
circuits for conflicting MC2 when the STOP
MC1
operations, such as forward signal is given.
rotation and reverse rotation, MC1
MC2 In the case of a
and for parts that could
stop caused by
damage the machine or
an emergency
cause accidents if no interlock
stop limit switch.
were used.
Switch power on using the following procedure. (3) When DC power is established, RA2 goes ON.
When PLC power supply and output power (4) Timer (TM) times on after the DC power reaches 100%.
supply are both AC (The TM set value should be the period of time from
(1) Switch power ON. when RA2 goes ON to the establishment of 100% DC
(2) Set CPU to RUN. voltage. Set this value to approximately 0.5 seconds.)
(3) Turn ON the start switch. (5) Turn ON the start switch.
(4) When the magnetic contactor (MC) comes on, the (6) When the magnetic contactor (MC) comes on, the
output equipment is powered and driven by the output equipment is powered and driven by the
program. program. (If a voltage relay is used at RA2, no timer
When PLC power supply is AC and output power (TM) is required in the program.)
supply is DC
(1) Switch power ON.
(2) Set CPU to RUN.
App-2
Appendices
System design circuit example 2 (when using ERRcontact of Q61P-A1/Q61P-A2 power supply module)
POWER SUPPLY
For AC DC
TRANSFORMER
DC power
establishment FUSE FUSE
signal input
CPU DC
POWER
SM52
Ym SUPPLY
RUN/STOP circuit (-) (+)
SM403
interlocked with Ym FUSE
RA1
XM Set time for
TM
DC input
TM signal to be
MC1 N0 M10
N0 established.
M10
START PROGRAM
SW
MC
MC STOP RA1 RA3
SW
INPUT MODULE
RA2
RA2 XM Voltage relay
is recommended
OUTPUT MODULE
Ym Low battery alarm
L (Lamp or buzzer)
Yn
RA1
POWER SUPPLY MODULE ON when run

RA3
by ERR
Interlock circuits as
ERR
necessary.
Provide external OUTPUT MODULE
MC MC
interlock circuits for
conflicting operations, Power to output
such as forward equipment
switched OFF
rotation and reverse
MC2 when ERR
rotation, and for parts contact turns OFF.
MC1
that could damage In the case of a
the machine or cause MC1 stop caused by
MC2 an emergency
accidents if no
stop limit switch.
interlock were used.
Switch power on in the following procedure. (5) Turn ON the start switch.
When PLC power supply is AC and output power (6) When the magnetic contactor (MC) comes on, the
supply is DC output equipment is powered and may be driven by
(1) Switch power ON. the program. (If a voltage relay is used at RA2, no
(2) Set CPU to RUN. ERR contact turns ON. timer (TM) is required in the program.)
(3) When DC power is established, RA2 goes ON. The power-ON procedure is as follows:
Note: Only the ERR contact of the power supply module
(4) Timer (TM) times on after the DC power reaches
mounted in the main base is valid. The ERR contact of
100%. (The TM set value should be the period of time
from when RA2 goes ON to the establishment of 100% the power supply module mounted in the extension base App
cannot be used.
DC voltage. Set this value to approximately 0.5
seconds.)
App-3
Appendices
Fail safe measures against failure of the Calculation of average power consumption
PLC
Power is consumed by the following PLC areas.
Failure of the PLC CPU or memory can be detected by
the self diagnosis function. However, failure of the I/O Power I5V
AC power
control area may not be detected by the CPU. supply
supply 5VDC
module
In such a case, all I/O points turn ON or OFF depending line
on the condition of the failure, and normal operation and
safety may not be maintained. CPU
module
Though Mitsubishi PLCs are manufactured under strict
quality control, configure an external fail safe circuit so
that a PLC failure occurring for some reason would not
Intelligent
lead to machine damage or accidents. Output Input
function
module module
module
ON delay timer
Internal program 24VDC line Relay Input current
Y00 T1 Current
1s I 24V Transistor (I IN ) E
SM412 OFF delay timer Output current
Y00 Input
T2 External (I OUT) Vdrop current
1s 24VDC
(A mode M9032) Output (I IN )
External load MC power
current
Y01 L supply (I OUT)
AC LOAD AC E AC
Y00 Y0F L DC DC DC
0.5s 0.5s 24V

Power consumption of power supply module
Approximately 70% of the power supply module current is
converted into power, with the remaining 30% dissipated
0V
24VDC as heat, i.e. 3/7 of the output current is used by the power
supply module. Therefore, the calculation expression is as
CPU module Output module T1 T2
1 follows.
MC
1: Y00 toggles between ON and OFF at 0.5 second intervals. Wpw = 3 (I5V 5) (W)
7
Use a no-contact output module (transistor in the example
I5V: 5VDC current consumption of each module
shown above).
Total 5VDC circuit power consumption of
PLC Heat Output Calculation modules
The 5VDC output circuit power of the power supply
The temperature inside an enclosure containing the PLC module is the total power consumption of the modules.
must be kept below the operating ambient temperature W 5V = I5V 5
given in the general specifications. Hence, heat in the
Total 24VDC average power consumption of
panel must be calculated from the average power
output module (power consumption of points
consumption (heat output) of the equipment contained switched on simultaneously)
inside. This section explains how to find the average The average power of the external 24VDC power supply
power consumption of the Q series system. Calculate an is the total current consumption of the modules.
in-panel temperature rise from the power consumption. W 24V = I24V 24(W)
App-4
Appendices
Average current consumption due to output Base Mounting

section drop voltage of output module (power
Mounting instructions
consumption of points switched on
simultaneously) Note the following when mounting the PLC in an
W OUT = IOUT Vdrop number of output points enclosure, etc.
simultaneous ON ratio (W)
(1) Leave a minimum of 30mm(1.18inch) clearance above
IOUT : Output current (actual operating current) (A)
the PLC to ensure proper ventilation and ease of
Vdrop : Drop voltage of each output module (V)
module replacement.
Input section average power consumption of
(2) The PLC must not be installed vertically, horizontally or
input module (power consumption of points
to a ceiling to ensure proper ventilation.
switched on simultaneously)
W IN = IIN E number of input points (3) Ensure that the surface on which the base is to be
simultaneous ON ratio (W) mounted is flat to prevent possible flexing of the
IIN : Input current (effective value for AC) (A) printed circuit boards.
E : Input voltage (actual operating voltage) (V) (4) Do not mount the PLC close to sources of vibration
Power consumption of intelligent function module like large magnetic contactors or no-fuse breakers.
power supply section when Q mode is used (5) Use wiring conduits if necessary.
W S = I5V 5 I24V 24 I100V 100 (W) For installations with conduit running closer to the PLC
than the clearances shown on the next page, note the
Power consumption of whole PLC system
The sum of the above values is the power consumption of following.
the entire PLC system. 1) When used above the PLC, the conduit should be
less than 50mm(1.97inch) deep to allow proper
W = Wpw + W5V + W24V + WOUT + WIN + WS (W) ventilation.
Leave an adequate clearance above the PLC to
Further calculations are necessary to work out the heat
tighten or remove the mounting screws in the
output and a temperature rise in the panel.
Generally a temperature rise in the panel is expressed as module top. Module replacement cannot be made if
follows. the mounting screws cannot be accessed.
2) When used below the PLC, ensure that there is an
T= W[ C]
UA adequate clearance for the 100/200VAC input cable
of the power supply module and the I/O and
W : Power consumption of the entire PLC system
(obtained as above) 12/24VDC cables of the I/O modules.
A : Panel inside surface area [m ]
2 (6) Equipment fitted before the PLC (fitted at the back of
U : If the panel temperature is uniform….6 the panel door) should be installed at least 100mm
If the panel air is not circulated………4 (3.94 inch) away from the PLC to protect it from
radiated noise and heat.
POINT Also, any equipment on either side of the base should
If the temperature rise in the enclosure exceeds the be at least 50mm (1.97 inch) away from the base.
specified range, it is recommended to install a heat
exchanger to lower the temperature in the panel.
If an ordinary fan is used, it will suck in, not only external
air but also dust, etc. Note that conductive dust, etc. may
affect the PLC.
App
App-5
Appendices
Mounting
(1) When using Q5 B/Q6 B extension base (2) When using QA1S6 B/QA65B extension
base
Indicates the position of the panel top,

wiring duct or any assembly.
Main base (Q3 B) 30mm(1.18inch) Main base (Q3 B) 30mm(1.18inch)

or more or more
30mm(1.18inch) 30mm(1.18inch)
or more or more
Extension base (Q6 B) 30mm(1.18inch) Extension base (QA1S6 B) 30mm(1.18inch)
Duct or more or more
(Height 50mm
(1.97inch) max.)
30mm(1.18inch)
or more 30mm(1.18inch)
Series mounting or more
80mm(3.15inch)
or more
Extension base (QA65B)
50mm(1.97inch)
or more
Panel, etc.
PLC
Door
Contactor,
relay, etc.
100mm
(3.94inch) or more
PLC front clearance Vertical mounting Horizontal mounting
from equipment (Not allowed) (Not allowed)
App-6
Appendices
Wiring I/O equipment wiring

(1) Run the input and output lines separately.
Wiring instructions
(2) When the I/O signal cables cannot be separated from
This section gives the instructions for wiring the power the main circuit and power lines, ground at the PLC
supply and I/O cables. end with a batch-shielded cable, or in some cases, at
Power supply wiring the opposite end.
(1) Wire the PLC power supply, I/O equipment and other PLC Shielded cable
power equipment in separate lines as shown below.
Input
Connect an insulating transformer if there is noise.
Main PLC
power power Insulating
Shield RA
supply supply transformer
Output
200VAC PLC
T1 DC
I/O power
supply
I/O devices (3) Where wiring runs through piping, ground the piping
Main circuit securely.
supply
Main circuit (4) Run the 24VDC I/O cables separately from 100VAC
devices
and 200VAC cables.
(2) The 100VAC, 200VAC and 24VDC cables should be
(5) Wiring over 200m (656.17ft.) or longer may give rise to
twisted as tightly as possible in the shortest possible
leakage currents due to the line capacity, causing false
length.
2 inputs. This must be corrected by taking proper
Use the largest possible gauge (max. 2mm ) to
measures.
minimize any voltage drop.
Grounding
(3) As a measure against surges due to lightning, use a
The way of grounding is indicated below ((1), (2) and (3)).
lightning surge absorber as shown below.
(1) Where possible, ground the PLC to the protective
PLC earth conductor independently. (Grounding resistance
AC
I/O equipment
100 max.)
(2) When independent grounding is impossible, use the
E1 Lightning surge shared grounding method shown in 2).
absorber
POINTS
Protective Protective
(1) Ground the lightning surge absorber (E1) and PLC
earth earth
(E2) separately.
(2) Select the lightning surge absorber that will not 1) Independent 2) Shared 3) Shared grounding
exceed the maximum allowable circuit voltage even grounding ... Best grounding ... Good ... Not allowed
when line voltage is maximum.
2
(3) Use 2mm or larger grounding wire. The grounding
points should be as near as possible to the PLC to
minimize the grounding cable length.
App
App-7
Appendices
App.3 MELFANSweb
MELFANSweb: Information retrieval and In-site search

communication on the Internet Equipped with an engine that searches for information in
MELFANSweb.
Note 1: FA Land search is not included.
Related sights
Links page for related sights useful for Factory Equipment
users and the "global network".
Inquiry contact
Introduces the overseas business locations (such as sales
branches), service locations, and the models handled by
these locations.
Product lineup
Introduces the outlines of our products per series. This is
useful to get the entire picture, e.g. product types.
Provides detailed information on individual products such
as specifications, functions, features, wiring examples and
outline dimensional drawings. These can be exported as
images.
New products
Introduces products released recently or to be released
soon.
Standard-compliant products
Lists products that comply with various international
standards. I.e. explosion-proof and ship-borne, and with
foreign standards, such as UL and EN.
Manual list
Offers such information as the latest versions of the
product related manuals and whether manuals are packed
with the products or not.
Event information
Introduces training schools, exhibits and technological
seminars held for our products.
Topics
Notice of system expansion plans, etc. from
MELFANSweb. View this periodically.
Update history
Information on recently added and changed items, etc.
Use when you want to view only new information.
App-8
App.4 A Mode Appendices
App.4.1 Comparison between Q Mode
and A Mode of PLC CPU
Overview of A Mode
The A mode improves the CPU processing capabilities of existing AnS series systems. You can utilize the AnS series
programs and the AnS series hardware products, such as I/O modules, without having to change them. (Note that the
CPU modules, base units and extension base cables must be changed.)
This mode is recommended for those who want to use the current models and improve performance with minimum
modifications.
Note: As described above, the A mode is designed to improve the CPU processing capabilities of the AnS series systems that are
already in use. Namely, it should be noted that the functions and capabilities other than the CPU processing capabilities (refer to
the section of the CPU module) and memory card specifications are the same as those of the conventional AnS series and the
functions and capabilities expanded and developed inherently for the Q series (Q mode) are unusable. We recommend you to
consider the Q mode if you are requiring new equipment design, etc.
Comparison between Q Mode and A Mode of PLC CPU

PLC CPU
Q Mode
A Mode
CPU type Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A, Q06HCPU-A
Q01CPU Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU,
Q25HCPU
Available functions, modules, etc.
Program Inherits the basic programming and instruction Programs for the current AnS series
representing methods of the MELSEC. However, the
programs of the A/AnS/QnA/Q2AS must be converted to
Q mode, because of different internal codes.
Functions Functions given in Chapter 3 "QCPU" are usable. Basically, there are only functions that are usable with the
AnS series though some specifications have been
expanded in performance.
I/O, For Q series Available Unavailable
special For AnS series Unavailable Available (Note 1) Available (Note 2)
function
module For A series Unavailable Available (Note 1) Unavailable
s
Base For loading Q Q3 SB, Q3 B, Q5 B, Q6 B (Note 3) Unavailable
unit series module
For loading AnS Unavailable QA1S6 B QA1S3 B, QA1S6 B
series modules
For loading A Unavailable QA65B Unavailable
series modules
Extension cable QC B QC B
Power For loading on Q Q6 P (-A1/A2) (Note 3) Unavailable
supply series base unit Q61SP (Note 9)
module For loading on Unavailable A1S6 P (N) A1S6 P (N)
AnS series base
unit
For loading on A Unavailable A6 P (EU) Unavailable
series base unit
Connectable networks
Ethernet Available Available
MELSECNET/H Available Unavailable
(PLC to PLC network)
MELSECNET/H Unavailable Available Unavailable
(Remote-I/O network)
MELSECNET/10 Available Available
(PLC to PLC network)
MELSECNET/10 Unavailable Available
(Remote-I/O network)
MELSECNET (II), Unavailable Available
MELSECNET/B
CC-Link Available (with automatic refresh parameter setting) Available (without automatic refresh parameter setting)
MELSECNET/MINI-S3 Unavailable Available (without Available (with automatic refresh parameter setting)
automatic refresh
parameter setting)
Serial communication module Available Available
(RS-232/422/485)
Other networks FL-net (OPCN-2) : Same as the network Same as the network compatible with the AnS/A series App
QJ71FL71(-B2)-F01 compatible with the AnS/A
series
App-9
Appendices App.4 A Mode
App.4.1 Comparison between Q Mode
and A Mode of PLC CPU

PLC CPU
Q Mode
A Mode
CPU type Q00JCPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A, Q06HCPU-A
Q00CPU, Q01CPU Q25HCPU
Usable peripheral devices and software
Windows®personal SW7D5C-GPPW-E SW4D5C-GPPW-E or later (Note 4) SW2D5C-GPPW-E or later (Note 5)
computer or later
DOS Unavailable Unavailable SW2IVD-GPPA-E or later (Note 5)
A6GPP/HGP/PHP Unavailable Unavailable SW3GP-GPPA-E or later (Note 5)
A8PUE Unavailable Unavailable Available (optional cable is needed)
EPU01 Unavailable Available Available
Usable GOTs and connection method

Usable GOT GOT-A900 GOT-A900 GOT-F900 GOT-A900/800 GOT-F900
Software SW5D5C-GOTRE- SW2D5C-GOTRE-PACK SW4D5C-GOTR A900 : SW0D5C-GOTRE-PACK SW1D5C-GOTRE
PACK version P or version C or later E-PACK version version A or later, -version A or later
later F or later A800 : SW0NIW-A8GOTP
version A or later
Bus connection Available (ladder Available (usable with Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable
monitor possible) SW3D5C-GOTRE-PACK
(Note 6) version C or later, ladder
monitor also possible)
CPU RS-232 port Available (ladder Available (ladder monitor Available (ladder Available (ladder monitor Unavailable
connection monitor possible) possible for monitor possible)
SW5D5C-GOTRE-PACK impossible)
version A or later)
CPU USB port Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable
connection
Serial communication Available (ladder Available (ladder monitor Available (ladder Available (ladder monitor Unavailable
(RS-232/422) monitor possible) possible for monitor possible)
SW5D5C-GOTRE-PACK impossible)
version A or later)
MELSECNET/10 Available (ladder Available (ladder monitor Unavailable Available (ladder monitor Unavailable
monitor impossible) possible)
impossible)
MELSECNET (II) Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Available (ladder monitor Unavailable
possible)
MELSECNET/B Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Available (ladder monitor Unavailable
possible)
CC-Link Available (ladder Available (usable with Unavailable Available (ladder monitor Unavailable
monitor SW4D5C-GOTRE-PACK possible)
impossible) version A or later, ladder
monitor possible for
SW5D5C-GOTRE-PACK
version A or later)
Ethernet Available (ladder Available (usable with Unavailable Available (usable with Unavailable
monitor SW5D5C-GOTRE-PACK SW5D5C-GOTRE-PACK
impossible) version P or later, ladder version P or later, ladder
monitor also possible) monitor also possible)
Note 1: The A6SIM-X64Y64 is unavailable. Also, some intelligent function modules are unavailable. For details, refer to "When using
QA1S6 B base unit" and "When using QA65B base unit" in Chapter 3, Section 3.3.1 "Applicable model list".
Note 2: The A6SIM-X64Y64 is unavailable.
Note 3: The Q00JCPU is not available for the main base, Q3 SB and Q3 B. The power supply is equipped as standard.
Note 4: Depending on the software version, there are restrictions on the functions.
Note 5: Depending on the software version, there are restrictions on the program capacities, CPU internal device capacities, etc.
Note 6: The bus extension connector box (A9GT-QCNB) cannot be used with the Q00JCPU's main base.
Note 7: The above table gives comparisons of the Q mode and A mode, in terms of general usability and connection information. Since
there may be restrictions on available/connectable products, always check details in the applicable model list and corresponding
model explanation sections.
Note 8: Check Chapter 3, Section 3.4 for details of the process CPU.
Note 9: The Q61SP can be mounted on the slim main base Q3 SB only.
App-10
Appendices
App.4 A Mode
App.4.2 Compatibility of A Mode PLC
and Ans
Compatibility between A Mode PLC and AnS
The following table indicates the compatibility between A mode PLC programs and AnS series programs. The following
table gives general information only. The corresponding module explanation sections provide a more detailed description.
Item Compatibility with AnS

General program The same programs as in AnS are available.
Ethernet Host system side The same programs as in AnS are available.
program
PLC side The same programs as in AnS are available.
MELSECNET/10 The same network parameters and programs as in AnS are available.
CC-Link The same programs as in AnS are available.
Serial Host system side The same programs as in AnS are available.
communication program
PLC side The same programs as in AnS are available.
Note: Because of the improved CPU processing speed, timing, etc. may have to be considered in the sequence program.
Other Precautions for Replacing AnS with A Mode

Item Compatibility
Peripheral device You can use the A series peripheral devices. However, you cannot load and use a portable peripheral
device, e.g. A8PUE, on a CPU module. It should be used via cable connection.
The RS-422/232 conversion cable is required when you connect a CPU with the RS-422 interface, device
e.g. A6GPP, A6PHP or A8PUE. (You cannot use the RS-232/422 conversion cable that connects a
personal computer to the A series PLC. Confirm the details in the section of peripheral devices.)
Though the RS-232/422 conversion cable was required for connection of a general-purpose personal
computer to the CPU, the QC30R2 RS-232 cable can be used for connection to the A mode CPU.
GOT display You can use the GOT-A900/800 series display.
However, it cannot connect to the PLC of the GOT in a bus connection system.
When you selected the CPU RS-422 connection system, you either need to 1) change the
A8GT-RS4/A9GT-RS4 for the A8GT-RS2/A9GT-RS2 or 2) use the RS-422/232 conversion cable to
connect the A8GT-RS4/A9GT-RS4 to the CPU.
Simulation module The A6SIM-X64Y64 is not available.
System configuration example

Power supply, I/O, special and
A mode CPU
network modules are all for AnS
QA1S3 B main
Personal computer
base.
Use A series-compatible software
on Windows R personal computer.
Alternatively, A6GPP, A8PUE or
Extension cable for
other A series peripheral device is
Q series.
available.
However, RS-422/232 conversion
QA1S6 B cable is required for use of A series
extension base. -compatible device of RS-422
specifications since peripheral port
of A mode CPU is RS-232.
App
App-11
Appendices
App.4 A Mode
App.4.3 System Configuration
System Configuration AnS modules having restrictions on the number to be

mounted
The A mode uses the AnS series modules. However, they
Product Type
use Q series main and extension bases, and extension Ethernet interface module A1SJ71E71N-B2/B5T
Computer link module A1SJ71UC24-R2/R4/PRF
cables designed for this series. (You cannot use the AnS CC-Link module (in intelligent A1SJ61BT11
series main and extension bases and extension cables.) mode)
Profibus module A1SJ71PB96F
Basic configuration Modbus module A1SJ71UC24-R2-S2
A1SJ71UC24-R4-S2
Mount the AnS series modules onto the QA1S3 B JEMA network (OPCN-1) master A1SJ71J92-S3
module
main base and QA1S6 B extension base. (Only when using GET/PUT
service)
Power supply module
CPU module + battery (5) When any of the network modules in the following table
[Option: memory card] is used to read/write the PLC data from an external
Main base unit device, the accessible device ranges are restricted.
(QA1S3 B)
Applicable network module
Product Type
Power supply MELSECNET (II)/B A1SJ71AP21, A1SJ71AR21,
module Input, output, special function, A1SJ71AT21B
network modules Ethernet interface module A1SJ71E71N-B2/B5T
JEMA network (OPCN-1) master A1SJ71J92-S3
module
(Only when using GET/PUT
Extension base unit service)
Extension cable(QC B)
(QA1S6 B)
Accessible device ranges
Device Type Range
X 0-7FF
Y 0-7FF
M/L/S 0-8191
B 0-FFF
Instructions for system configuration T Contact
Coil
0-2047
0-2047
Current value 0-2047
(1) The total number of I/O, special function and network Set value 0-2047
C Contact 0-1023
modules that can be mounted onto the main and
Coil 0-1023
extension bases is up to 64. Current value 0-1023
Set value 0-1023
(2) Up to 7 extension bases can be connected. (Up to 8 D 0-6143
bases including the main) W 0-FFF
F 0-2047
(3) The overall distance of extension cables is within R 0-8191
13.2m (43.28ft.). Special D 9000-9255
Special M 9000-9255
(4) Modules having restrictions on the number to be
(6) Among the GOT series graphic operation terminals, the
mounted.
GOT-A900/800 series are usable.
Module Number of Loadable Modules
MELSECNET/10 network module: Up to 4 Up to a total of Note that bus connection is not available.
A1SJ71LP21, A1SJ71BR11 4
MELSECNET(II)/B data link Up to 2
module: A1SJ71AP21,
A1SJ71AR21, A1SJ71AT21B
Interrupt module A1SI61 1
AnS series special function Up to a total of 6
module (Note 1)
Note 1: In the AnS series, the following modules have restrictions
on the number to be mounted. The other modules have
no restrictions on the number to be mounted.
App-12
Appendices
App.4 A Mode
App.4.4 CPU Modules: Q02CPU-A,
Q02HCPU-A, Q06HCPU-A
Overview I/O point comparison

The A mode CPU modules are designed to improve the CPU I/O Points (Note1)
Total I/O Points
processing capabilities of the AnS series system by (Note2)
applying the high-speed, high-performance CPU Q02CPU-A 4096 8192
processing technology developed for the Q series. Q02HCPU-A
Q06HCPU-A
Functions and Performance Capabilities A2USHCPU-S1 1024 8192
A2ASCPU-S1
Extended in A Mode
A2ASCPU 512 8192
The following functions and performance capabilities are A2SHCPU 512 2048
extended by changing the AnS series CPU module for the A1SHCPU 256 2048
A mode CPU. A1SJHCPU
Note 1: Number of CPU I/O points controlled on the main and
Increased processing speeds extension bases.
Note 2: Total number of CPU I/O points controlled on the main
The instruction processing times have been improved and extension bases and remote I/O points controlled in
significantly as compared to the AnS series CPU. the remote I/O network.
Processing speed comparison High speed communication with peripheral

CPU LD MOV PC MIX Value
devices
Q02HCPU-A 34ns 204ns 5.3 Though the programming interface of the conventional
Q06HCPU-A AnS series CPU was RS-422 (9.6k or 19.2kbps), the A
Q02CPU-A 79ns 474ns 2.2 mode CPU uses RS-232 to be compatible with the
A2USHCPU-S1 90ns 540ns 2.0 maximum transmission speed of 115.2kbps. It facilitates
A2ASCPU-S1 200ns 1,200ns 0.9 connection with a personal computer, already acting as a
A2ASCPU general programming device, to shorten program
A2SHCPU 250ns 9,100ns 0.61 write/read time.
A1SHCPU 330ns 11,800ns 0.46
A1SJHCPU Increased number of extension bases
The PC MIX value is the average number of instructions In the conventional AnS series, Only 1 extension base was
such as the basic and data processing instructions allowed to be connected. However, the A mode CPU
executable in 1 s. A larger value indicates a higher accepts up to seven extension bases (eight bases
processing speed. including the main and having up to 64 I/O slots). You can
The A mode CPU modules also have about 1.8 times increase the I/O points of the current AnS series system.
higher processing speeds than the conventional model Also, you can extend the overall distance of extension
(A2USHCPU-S1) in PLC system benchmark value. cables up to 13.2m (43.28ft.).
Increased program capacities Standard-equipped flash ROM

Upgrading to A mode CPU increases the program The CPU has a built in flash ROM, allowing easy storage
capacities. of programs in ROM.
Program capacity comparison Standard-equipped SRAM memory card

CPU Program Capacity loading slot
Q06HCPU-A 30k steps 2
Q02HCPU-A 28k steps Max. 152k points of extended file register area can be
Q02CPU-A secured in the SRAM card. When it is used with the built-in
A2USHCPU-S1 30k steps
A2ASCPU-S1 14k steps
RAM of max. 64k points, a total of 216k points of file
A2ASCPU registers are available.
A2SHCPU 14k steps Note 3: The number of file register points that can be secured in
A1SHCPU 8k steps the built-in RAM changes with the program size, etc.
A1SJHCPU Check the number of file register points that can be
secured in the section of "CPU Built-In Memories/Memory
Increased number of I/O points Cards".
Upgrading to A mode CPU increases the number of I/O 1ms-increment timer instruction available
points up to 4096 points (8192 points when used with a App
remote I/O network). Making setting with the new dedicated instruction
"ZHTIME" makes the 1ms-increment timer instruction
usable.
App-13
App.4.4 CPU Modules: Q02CPU-A,
Q02HCPU-A, Q06HCPU-A
Appearance
The appearances and part names of the CPUs are described below.
Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A, Q06HCPU-A

Q02CPU Q02HCPU
MODE MODE
RUN RUN
ERR ERR
USER USER
BAT BAT
BOOT BOOT
98 (3.86)
98 (3.86)
PULL PULL
USB
RS-232 RS-232
89.3 (3.52) 27.4 (1.08) 89.3 (3.52) 27.4 (1.08)

Unit: mm (inch)
Note 1: In the A mode CPU module, the USB port cannot be used.
App-14
Appendices
App.4 A Mode
App.4.5 CPU Built-in
Memories/Memory Cards
Overview Built-In RAM Built-In ROM

Type Memory Capacity Memory Capacity
This section describes the memory capacities of the PLC (Bytes) (Bytes)
memories that store user-created data, such as programs Q02CPU-A 144k 144k
and device comment files, and how to calculate the Q02HCPU-A
necessary memory capacities. Q06HCPU-A
Memory Capacities Built-in RAM
The A mode CPU has a built-in RAM memory and built-in The A mode CPU module includes a 144k Bytes user
ROM memory. It also allows a RAM memory card to be memory RAM, where user data such as programs are
loaded as external memory. The following diagram shows stored.
the memories and data stored in them.
Built-in ROM
CPU modules
RAM memory card Built-in RAM The A mode CPU module also includes a 144k Bytes user
Program
memory ROM to ensure ease of storing programs into
Extended file register Parameter ROM. Note that the program stored in the ROM will be
(Extended comment) T/C set value
(Online sampling trace) Main program transferred to the built-in RAM at the moment of power-on
(Online status latch) Subprogram
Network parameter or key reset, and executed in the RAM.
Comment
Extended comment RAM memory card (option)
File register
Extended file register
(Online status latch) A Memory card can be inserted in the CPU module
(Online sampling trace)
memory card slot. By utilizing the memory card, the
Built-in ROM memory capacity can be increased to 448k Bytes. The
RAM card can be used as extended file registers.
Program
Parameter Usable
T/C set value Memory Capacity of
Memory
Main program Type Standard RAM Memory +
Subprogram Capacity
Memory Card (Bytes)
Network parameter (Bytes)
Q2MEM-1MBS 304k 448k
Q2MEM-2MBS 304k 448k
Note 1: Online status latch and online sampling trace use the
(Note 3)
memory areas secured as extended file registers.
Note 3: All of the memory card capacity is not usable.
Note 2: Extended comments are stored in the built-in RAM if it has
free space, but if it does not, they use the memory area
secured as the extended file registers on the RAM
memory card.
App
App-15
Example of user memory area’s makeup in A mode

RAM operation Boot operation from ROM
Parameter
T/C set value (main)
Main program
MELSECNET/10
network parameter
T/C set value (sub)
Built-in ROM
memory capacity Subprogram
(max. 144k Bytes) Unusable
Boot operation
Not used from ROM
Parameter Stored into Parameter

T/C set value (main) ROM T/C set value (main)
Main program Main program
MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/10
network parameter network parameter
T/C set value (sub) T/C set value (sub)
Subprogram Subprogram
For internal system For internal system for

Built-in RAM for use of subprogram use of subprogram
memory capacity Extended comment Extended comment
(max. 144k Bytes) Extended file register Extended file register
File register File register
Comment Comment
Memory card Extended file register

RAM memory Extended file register
capacity
(max. 304k Bytes) Extended file register
Note 1: Subprogram can be used by Q06HCPU-A only.
App-16
Appendices
App.4 A Mode
Memory Capacity Calculation

Use the user memory after determining the stored data types and memory capacities by parameter setting.
Use the following table to calculate the memory capacities.
<For Q02CPU-A/Q02HCPU-A>
Setting Capacity Calculation Method
Item Max. Setting Capacity (Bytes) Remarks
Increments (Bytes)
Parameter — 3k 3k Total 144k
Main program T/C set value — 1k 1k
Sequence program 1k steps Number of steps 2 56k Total
Microcomputer 1k Bytes Set number of Bytes 54k 60k SFC only
program
MELSECNET/10 parameter — Note 1 16k
Extended comment 1k Bytes Set number of Bytes (1k Bytes = 63k (Note 3)
64 points)
Extended file register (built-in) 8k points Number of file register points 2 128k
File register 1k points Number of file register points 2 16k
Comment 1k Bytes Set number of Bytes (1k Bytes = 64k (Note 3)
64 points)
Extended file register (memory card) 8k points Number of file register points 2 302k
<For Q06HCPU-A>
Setting Capacity Calculation Method
Item Max. Setting Capacity (Bytes) Remarks
Increments (Bytes)
Parameter — 3k 3k Total 144k
Main program T/C set value — 1k 1k
Sequence program 1k steps Number of steps 2 60k Total
Microcomputer 1k Bytes Set number of Bytes 58k 60k SFC only
program
MELSECNET/10 parameter — Note 1 16k
Sub program T/C set value 1k Bytes 1k 1k
Sequence program 1k steps Number of steps 2 58k
Microcomputer — 5k 5k
program
Extended comment 1k Bytes Set number of Bytes (1k Bytes = 63k (Note 3)
64 points)
Extended file register (built-in) 8k points Number of file register points 2 128k
File register 1k points Number of file register points 2 16k
Comment 1k Bytes Set number of Bytes (1k Bytes = 64k (Note 3)
64 points)
Extended file register (memory card) 8k points Number of file register points 2 302k
Note 1: The capacity to be used changes with the settings of the MELSECNET/10 network parameters. The area of the network
parameter capacity is secured in 2k Bytes increments on the basis of the total capacity of their settings.
The memory capacities of the network parameters are as follows.
Item Memory Capacity (Bytes)
Internal data 30
Routing parameter 390
Inter-data link transfer parameter 246
Common parameter 2164/module (Note 2)
Refresh parameter 92/module
Station-specific parameter 1490/module
Note 2: 2722 Bytes for remote master station.
The MELSECNET/10 network parameter capacity is determined by the above calculated memory capacity total.
Total Capacity of Setting Capacity of Network Parameter Setting
30 to 2048 Bytes 2k Bytes
App
Note 3: When the comment and extended comment capacities are set, 1k Bytes are occupied for each capacity for the system.
Note 4: Online sampling trace and online status latch data are stored in the extended file registers
App-17
Appendices App.5 INSTRUCTIONS FOR DIVERSION
OF CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM
App.5.1 Diversion of AnSHCPU for Basic
Model QCPU
No. Item Sub Item Instructions for Basic Model QCPU What to Be Done by Customer
1 Performance I/O control Switching between the refresh system and direct When direct access is necessary, use direct access inputs
system system cannot be done. (Fixed to the refresh (DX) and direct access outputs (DY).
system)
2 Number of Note some instructions are unusable. Refer to the instruction list in Chapter 15, Section 15.1.4 and
instructions correct the program. (Note 1)
3 Standard RAM The Q00JCPU cannot use the file register (R) Use within the range of the standard device memory that has
capacity (standard RAM). been increased.
4 Processing time Higher speed. (The scan time and other processing Check the program timing.
times become shorter.)
5 Device Handling of the accumulator (A) and index register Use the conversion function of GX Developer.
(V) is different. Note that partial program correction may be needed. (Note 2)
6 System Power supply, The AnS series power supplies and bases cannot Use the Q series power supplies and bases.
connection base be used.
7 System The AnS series modules cannot be used. Use the Q series modules.
8 configuration Modules loaded are restricted to one Ethernet and The High Performance model QCPU accepts up to 4
two CC-Link modules. Ethernet and 64 CC-Link modules (Note 4).
9 Tool connection The AnS series tools (Note 3) cannot be used. Use GX Developer (version 7 or later) compatible with the
Basic model QCPU.
10 MX Links, MX Monitor and MX Chart cannot be Use MX Component. (The personal computer side
used. application program must be corrected.)
11 The AnS series programming unit (A8PUE/A7PU) The High Performance model QCPU can be used with the Q
cannot be used. series compatible programming unit (EPU01). (Note 5)
12 The Q00JCPU does not allow the bus extension When an extension base is connected, the bus extension
module (A9GT-QCNB) of the GOT to be connected module can be loaded on the extension base.
to the main base.
13 Hardware LED The status conditions of the LEDs differ from those Check the status conditions of the LEDs in the Basic Model
handling of the AnS series. QCPU User's Manual.
14 The LED display priorities cannot be set. If a LED display is not provided, choose the error check-free
setting or use the error cancel function to turn it off.
The High Performance model QCPU allows setting of the
LED display priorities.
15 Key switch The operation of the key switch differs from that of Perform latch clear by the remote operation of GX
the AnS series. Developer. To reset, move the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to
(Without latch clear key, resetting operation the RESET position for several seconds. (The ERR. LED
changed.) flickers on completion of reset.)
Note 1: The conversion function of GX Developer replaces unusable instructions with SM999.
After conversion using GX Developer, searching for SM999 allows you to confirm the instructions that could not be converted.
Note 2: The accumulators (A) and index registers (V, Z) in the AnSH are converted by the conversion function of GX Developer as
follows.
A0 SD718
A1 SD719
Z Z0
V Z7
Note that the way handling 32bits index registers is different in AnSH and QCPU.
While the AnSH represents the lower 16 bits with Z and the upper 16 bits with V, the Basic model QCPU represents the lower 16
bits with Zn and the upper 16 bits with Z(n+1).
Example
• Execution result when the following are described in an AnSHCPU program
DMOV K100000 Z Lower 16 bits are stored into Z and upper 16 bits into V.
• When the above program is executed after it has been converted into the one for Basic model QCPU
DMOV K100000 Z0 Lower 16 bits are stored into Z0 and upper 16 bits into Z1.
Note 3: A6GPP/A6PHP/A6HGP (SW GP-GPPA/GPPAU)
A7PHP/A7HGP (SW SRXV-GPPA)
DOS personal computer (SW IVD-GPPA)
Note 4: Up to 64 modules are made usable by dedicated instructions. (Network parameter setting can be made for up to four modules
per CPU.)
Note 5: The EPU01 is a product of Mitsubishi Engineering Co., Ltd. For details, refer to Section 3.3.2 System configuration in Chapter 3.
App-18
App.5 INSTRUCTIONS FOR DIVERSION Appendices
App.5.1 Diversion of AnSHCPU for Basic
Model QCPU
16 Hardware Memory cassette Can not be used. Use the built-in memory. (Program memory, standard RAM,
handling standard ROM) (Note 6)
17 Battery Can not be used. Use the Q series battery (Q6BAT).
18 Memory protect Can not be used. Password registration enables access restriction in file units.
switch The High Performance model QCPU can provide memory
protection by switch setting.
19 Program Language/instruc SFC can not be used. Use the High Performance model QCPU.
20 handling tion Some instructions are incompatible. Refer to the instruction list in Chapter 15, Section 15.1.4 and
correct the program. (Note 1)
21 A microcomputer program is incompatible. Do not use it.
22 Timers and counters operate differently. (Sequential Considering the timing, modify the program as required.
processing) (Note 7)
23 The AnS series special module dedicated Correct the program so that it will be the one for Q series
instructions can not be used. In addition, the buffer intelligent function module. (Note 8)
memory addresses are incompatible.
24 The special relays registers have been changed. The conversion function of GX Developer converts the
special relays/special registers for AnSH (M9000 and
later/D9000 and later) into the special relays/special
registers for Basic model QCPU (SM/SD). However, since
those incompatible are replaced by SM999/SD999, modify
the program as required.
25 Some error codes have been changed. Modify the program as required.
26 ROM handling It cannot be separated as a ROM cassette. (The Using GX Developer, write the program to the standard ROM
ROM cassette storing a program cannot be loaded built in the CPU.
into another CPU to perform ROM operation.)
27 Network MELSECNET(II) Connection cannot be made to the MELSECNET(II). Use MELSECNET/H or CC-Link.
handling
28 Debugging Sampling trace Sampling trace is unusable. Perform it using offline simulation of GX Simulator.
29 function Status latch Status latch is unusable. —
30 Offline switch Offline switch is unusable. —
Note 6: Q00/Q01CPU have standard RAM.
Note 7: There are the following differences in timer/counter present value update processing and contact ON/OFF processing timings.
AnSH: Processed at execution of the END instruction.
Basic model QCPU: Processed at execution of the OUT T /OUT C instruction. (Sequential processing)
Note 8: Making use of GX Configurator allows communication with the intelligent function module to be made by simple setting.
For details of GX Configurator, refer to the relevant section of the corresponding intelligent function module.
App
App-19
App.5.2 Transition from A2AS/A2USH CPU to
Basic Model QCPU
1 Performance I/O points The number of I/O points that can be controlled on Use the I/O points within the corresponding Basic model
the base decreases. (Q00J: 256 points, Q00/Q01: QCPU range.
1024 points) Configuring a remote I/O (CC-Link) system enables use of a
total of 2048 I/O points.
2 X and Y points are not enough to refresh all points Make parameter setting to refresh devices M, etc.
of 64 stations on CC-Link.
3 Program capacity The program capacity may sometimes reduce. The number of program steps decreases when an A2AS/
A2USH CPU program is converted into a Basic mode QCPU
program by the conversion function of GX Developer. (Note
1)
To check whether there is enough program capacity or not
after conversion, convert a program actually to check
whether it is converted correctly or not. (Note 2)
The program capacity is insufficient if the program has not
been converted to the end. In that case, use the
large-capacity High Performance model QCPU.
4 Number of There are unusable instructions. Refer to the instruction list in Chapter 15, Section 15.1.4 and
instructions correct the program. (Note 3)
5 Processing time The scan time and other processing times vary. While simultaneously checking the processing timing, correct
6 Program memory The built-in program capacity reduces. Adjust the comment file and other capacities that are stored
capacity into the program memory.
7 Standard RAM The Q00JCPU cannot use the file registers (R) Use within the range of the standard device memory that has
capacity (standard RAM). been increased.
8 Device 18kW or more of the device memory is unusable. Use it within the range of the Basic model QCPU range.
For the Q00/Q01CPU, examine the use of the file registers
(R).
9 Since devices B and W reduce, all LB and LW of the Perform device assignment to increase the number of B and
MELSECNET/H may sometimes be unusable. W points or allocate them to the file registers. (Note 4)
10 There are only up to 10 points of index registers. Use the index registers within the Basic model QCPU range.
The High Performance model QCPU allows use of 16 points
of index registers.
11 Handling of the accumulators (A) and index Use the conversion function of GX Developer. Note that partial
registers (V) is different. program correction may be needed. (Note 5)
Note 1: A Basic model QCPU requires only half program steps as A2AS/A2USHCPU.
Note 2: (1) When making program conversion, always backup the program.
The program will be deleted midway if the program capacity was insufficient as a result of program conversion.
If you save the program in that status, it cannot be reconverted into the original program.
(2) Note that whether a program has been converted to the end or not cannot be judged by the presence/absence of the END
instruction.
If the program has been deleted midway due to insufficient program capacity, the END instruction is added to the program
after conversion.
(The END instruction may not be added when the program is deleted midway in the ladder block, for example.)
Note 3: The conversion function of GX Developer replaces unusable instructions with SM999.
After conversion using GX Developer, searching for SM999 allows you to confirm the instructions that could not be converted.
Note 4: File registers can be used with the Q00/Q01CPU.
Note 5: The accumulators (A) and index registers (V, Z) used with the A2AS/A2USH are converted by the conversion function of GX
Developer as follows.
A0 SD718
A1 SD719
Z Z0 (Z1 to Z6 remain unconverted)
V Z7
V1 to V2 Z8 to Z9
V3 to V6 SD999 (10 points of index registers, Z0 to Z9, can be handled by the Basic model QCPU.)
Note that when index registers are handled as 32 bits, they are handled differently as described below.
While the A2AS(H) represents the lower 16 bits with Zn and the upper 16 bits with Vn, the Basic model QCPU represents the
lower 16 bits with Zn and the upper 16 bits with Z(n+1).
Example
• Execution result when the following are described in an A2AS/A2USH CPU program
DMOV K100000 Z1 Lower 16 bits are stored into Z1 and upper 16 bits into V1.
DMOV K200000 Z2 Lower 16 bits are stored into Z2 and upper 16 bits into V2.
• When the above program is executed after it has been converted into the one for Basic model QCPU
In this case, 32-bit data are not stored normally since Z2 is overwritten.
App-20
App.5 INSTRUCTIONS FOR DIVERSION Appendices
Basic Model QCPU
12 System Power supply, The AnS series power supplies and bases can not Use the Q series power supplies and bases.
connection base be used here.
13 System The AnS series modules are unusable. Use the Q series modules.
14 configuration An MELSECNET/H remote I/O system cannot be Use CC-Link instead.
achieved. An MELSECNET/H remote I/O system can be configured by
the High Performance model QCPU.
15 Modules loaded are restricted to one The High Performance model QCPU accepts up to
MELSECNET/H, one Ethernet and two CC-Link MELSECNET/H modules, 4 Ethernet and 64 CC-Link modules
modules. (Note 6).
16 Tool connection The AnS series tools (Note 7) can not be used here. Use GX Developer (version 7 or later) compatible with the
Basic model QCPU.
17 MX Links, MX Monitor and MX Chart are unusable. Use MX Component. (The personal computer side
application program must be corrected.)
18 The AnS series programming unit (A8PUE/A7PU) The High Performance model QCPU can be used with the Q
can not be used here. series compatible programming unit (EPU01). (Note 8)
19 The Q00JCPU does not allow the bus extension When an extension base is connected, the bus extension
module (A9GT-QCNB) of the GOT to be connected module can be loaded on the extension base.
to the main base.
20 Hardware LED The on/flickering conditions of the LEDs differ from Check the on/flickering conditions of the LEDs in the Basic
handling those of the AnS series. Model QCPU User's Manual.
21 The LED display priorities cannot be set. If a LED display is not provided, choose the error check-free
setting or use the error cancel function to turn it off.
The High Performance model QCPU allows setting of the
LED display priorities.
22 Key switch The operation of the key switch differs from that of Perform latch clear by the remote operation of GX
the AnS series. Developer. To reset, move the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to
(Without latch clear key, resetting operation the RESET position for several seconds. (The ERR. LED
changed.) flickers on completion of reset.)
23 Memory cassette The AnS series memory cassette is unusable. Use the built-in memory. (Program memory, standard RAM,
standard ROM) (Note 9)
24 Battery The AnS series battery (A6BAT) is unusable. Use the Q series battery (Q6BAT).
25 Memory protect The memory protect switch cannot provide Password registration enables access restriction in file units.
switch protection. The High Performance model QCPU can provide memory
protection by switch setting.
26 Program Language / SFC is unusable. Use the High Performance model QCPU.
27 handling instruction The following instructions are unusable. Use the High Performance model QCPU. (Note 3)
• Floating point
• Character string instruction
• PID instruction
Note 6: You can use dedicated instructions on up to 64 modules. (Network parameter setting can be made for up to four modules per
CPU.)
Note 7: A6GPP/A6PHP/A6HGP (SW GP-GPPA/GPPAU)
A7PHP/A7HGP (SW SRXV-GPPA)
DOS personal computer (SW IVD-GPPA)
Note 8: The EPU01 is a product of Mitsubishi Engineering Co., Ltd.
For details, refer to Section 3.3.2 System configuration in Chapter 3.
Note 9: The standard RAM can be used with the Q00/Q01CPU.
App
App-21
Basic Model QCPU
28 Program Language/instruc Timers and counters operate differently. (Sequential Considering the timing, modify the program as required.
handling tion processing) (Note 10)
29 The AnS series special module dedicated Correct the program so that it will be the one for Q series
instructions are unusable. In addition, the buffer intelligent function module. (Note 11)
memory addresses are incompatible.
30 The special relays/special registers have been The conversion function of GX Developer converts the
changed. special relays/special registers for A2AS/A2USH (M9000 and
later/D9000 and later) into the special relays/special
registers for Basic model QCPU (SM/SD). However, since
those incompatible are replaced by SM999/SD999, modify
31 Some error codes have been changed. Modify the program as required.
32 ROM handling It cannot be separated as a ROM cassette. (The Using GX Developer, write the program to the standard ROM
ROM cassette storing a program cannot be loaded built in the CPU.
into another CPU to perform ROM operation.)
33 Network Ethernet The method of access from a personal computer to By setting the "modules valid for other station access" of the
handling another station of the MELSECNET/10 via Ethernet network parameters, you can access the device memory
differs. without changing the personal computer side program.
(Ethernet has network numbers/station numbers.) (Some devices are inaccessible.) (Note 12)
When making other than access to the device memory,
correct the personal computer side program since the
protocol must be changed. For details, refer to the
Q-Compatible MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference
Manual.
(Note 13)
34 MELSECNET(II) Connection cannot be made to the MELSECNET Use MELSECNET/H or CC-Link.
(II).
35 MELSECNET/H The station-specific parameters cannot be set. Change the refresh parameter setting or use the link direct
device (J \ ).
36 Only up to eight routing parameters are usable. Use them within the permissible range.
37 Debugging Sampling trace Sampling trace is unusable. Perform it using offline simulation of GX Simulator.
38 function Status latch Status latch is unusable. —
39 Step run Step run cannot be done. Perform it using offline simulation of GX Simulator.
40 Offline switch Offline switch is unusable. —
Note 10: There are the following differences in timer/counter present value update processing and contact ON/OFF processing timings.
A2AS/A2USH: Processed at execution of the END instruction.
Basic model QCPU: Processed at execution of the OUT T /OUT C instruction. (Sequential processing)
Note 11: Exploitation of GX Configurator allows communication with the intelligent function module to be made by simple setting.
For details of GX Configurator, refer to the relevant section of the corresponding intelligent function module.
Note 12: The file register (R), special relay (SM), special register (SD) and index register (Z) are impossible to be accessed.
Also do, the device memories added to the QnA/Q series or, you must change the communication protocol.
Refer to the Q-Compatible MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual and correct the personal computer side
program. (Note 13)
Note 13: MX Component ensures ease of developing a personal computer side PLC communication program.
Refer to Chapter 19, Section 19.1.2 for details of MX Component.
App-22
App.6 MODEL LIST Appendices
App.6.1 PLC QCPU/Process CPU
Model List
CPU Modules (Q Mode)

Protective
Product Type Outline
Structure
CPU module Q00JCPU Number of I/O points: 256 points Number of I/O device points: 2048 Program capacity: IP1X
8k steps Basic instruction 200ns Base: 5-I/O slots for mounting Q series module. Power
supply: 100-240VAC input / 5VDC 3A
Q00CPU Number of I/O points: 1024 points Number of I/O device points: 2048 Program IP2X
capacity: 8k steps Basic instruction 160ns
capacity: 28k steps Basic instruction: 79ns
Q02HCPU Number of I/O points: 4096 points Number of I/O device points: 8192 Program IP2X
Q12PHCPU Number of I/O points: 4096 points Number of I/O device points: 8192 Program IP2X
Q25PHCPU Number of I/O points: 4096 points Number of I/O device points: 8192 Program IP2X
13JR43 Basic model QCPU (Q mode) User's Manual: Hardware Design, Maintenance and
—
Inspection (Sold separately)
13JR44 Basic model QCPU (Q mode) User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program
—
Fundamentals) (Sold separately)
13JL97 High performance model QCPU (Q mode) User's Manual: Hardware Design,
—
Maintenance and Inspection (Sold separately)
13JL98 High performance model QCPU (Q mode) User's Manual (Function Explanation,
—
Program Fundamentals) (Sold separately)
13JR55 Process CPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspections)
—
(Sold separately)
13JR56 Process CPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
—
(Sold separately)
13JF58 QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (Common Instructions) (Sold
—
separately)
13JF60 QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (SFC) (Sold separately) —
13JF61 QCPU (Q mode) Programming Manual (MELSAP-L) (Sold separately) —
13JF59 QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (PID Control Instructions) (Sold
—
separately)
13JF67 QnPHCPU Programming Manual (Process Control Instructions) (Sold separately) —
13JL96 QCPU (Q mode) User's Manual: Hardware (packed with Q3 SB, Q3 B, Q00JCPU) —
Q172CPU For 8-axis control IP00
Q172CPUN For 8-axis control, fan-less model IP2X
Q173CPU For 32-axis control IP00
Q173CPUN For 32-axis control, fan-less model IP2X
Battery Q6BAT Replacement battery —
IC memory card Q2MEM-1MBS Small SRAM card Capacity: 1MBytes
—
Q2MEM-2MBS Small SRAM card Capacity: 2MBytes —
Q2MEM-2MBF Small linear flash memory card Capacity: 2MBytes —
Q2MEM-4MBF Small linear flash memory card Capacity: 4MBytes —
Q2MEM-8MBA Small ATA card Capacity: 8MBytes —
SRAM card battery Q2MEM-BAT Replacement battery, for Q2MEM-1MBS/Q2MEM-2MBS —
Note 1: User's manual includes explanations of the corresponding setting/monitoring tool. The user's manual is included in the
corresponding setting/monitoring tool in PDF format. App
Note 2: The purchase order number is indicated in the manual's Type field.
Note 3: Confirm the manual number of the motion CPU (Q17 CPU) on MELFANSweb.
App-23
Appendices App.6 MODEL LIST
Model List
Protective
Structure
Base Slim type Q32SB Slim type power supply + CPU + 2 - I/O slots for mounting Q series module IP0X
unit Main Q33SB Slim type power supply + CPU + 3 - I/O slots for mounting Q series module IP0X
Q35SB Slim type power supply + CPU + 5 - I/O slots for mounting Q series module IP0X
Main Q33B Power supply + CPU + 3 - I/O slots for mounting Q series module IP0X
Q35B Power supply + CPU + 5 - I/O slots for mounting Q series module IP0X
Extension Q63B Power supply + 3 - I/O slots for mounting Q series module IP0X
Q65B Power supply + 5 - I/O slots for mounting Q series module IP0X
Q52B 2 - I/O slots, for mounting Q series module IP0X
Q55B 5 - I/O slots, for mounting Q series module IP0X
Adapter Q6DIN1 DIN rail mounting adapter for Q38B/Q312B/Q68B/Q612B —
Q6DIN2 DIN rail mounting adapter for Q35B/Q65B/Q00JCPU —
Q6DIN3 DIN rail mounting adapter for Q32SB/Q33SB/Q35SB/Q33B/Q52B/Q55B/Q63B —
Extension cable QC05B 0.45m (1.48ft.) cable for Q52B/Q55B/Q65B/Q68B/Q612B connection —
QC06B 0.6m (1.97ft.) cable for Q52B/Q55B/Q65B/Q68B/Q612B connection —
QC12B 1.2m (3.98ft.) cable for Q52B/Q55B/Q65B/Q68B/Q612B connection —
QC30B 3m (9.84ft.) cable for Q52B/Q55B/Q65B/Q68B/Q612B connection —
Slim type Q61SP 100-240VAC input/5VDC 2A output IP1X
power supply module
Power supply module Q61P-A1 100-120VAC input/5VDC 6A output IP1X
Q61P-A2 200-240VAC input/5VDC 6A output IP1X
Q62P 100-240VAC input/5VDC 3A, 24VDC 0.6A output IP1X
Q63P 24VDC input/5VDC 6A output IP2X
Q64P 100/200VAC input/5VDC 8.5A output IP1X
AC input module QX10 100-120VAC, input 16 points, input time constant: 20ms, terminal block IP1X
QX28 100-240VAC, input 8 points, input time constant: 20ms, terminal block IP1X
DC input module QX40 24VDC positive common input, 16 points, input time constant: 1/5/10/20/70ms, IP2X
terminal block
QX40-S1 24VDC positive common input, 16 points, input time constant: 0.1/0.2/0.4/0.6/1ms, IP2X
terminal block
QX41 24VDC positive common input, 32 points, input time constant: 1/5/10/20/70ms, IP2X
connector (Note 2)
connector (Note 2)
QX42 24VDC positive common input, 64 points, input time constant: 1/5/10/20/70ms, IP2X
connector (Note 2)
connector (Note 2)
QX70 5/12VDC positive/negative common shared input, 16 input points, input time IP2X
constant: 1/5/10/20/70ms, terminal block
constant: 1/5/10/20/70ms, connector (Note 2)
constant: 1/5/10/20/70ms, connector (Note 2)
QX80 24VDC negative common input, 16 points, input time constant 1/5/10/20/70ms, IP2X
terminal block
QX81 24VDC negative common input, 32 points, input time constant 1/5/10/20/70ms, IP2X
connector (Note 3)
Note 2: The connector is not supplied. Obtain the A6CON1/A6CON2/A6CON3/A6CON4 separately.
Note 3: The connector is not supplied. Obtain the A6CON1E/A6CON2E/A6CON3E separately.
App-24
Model List
Protective
Structure
Contact output module QY10 240VAC/24VDC 2A, 16 output points (16 points/ common), output delay: 12ms, IP1X
without fuse, terminal block
QY18A 240VAC/24VDC 2A, 8 independent output points, output delay: 12ms, without fuse, IP1X
terminal block
Triac output module QY22 100-240VAC 0.6A, 16 output points (16 points/ common), output delay: 1ms+0.5Hz, IP1X
Transistor output QY40P 12/24VDC 0.1A sink, 16 output points (16 points/ common), output delay: 1ms, with IP2X
module short protection function, terminal block
QY41P 12/24VDC 0.1A sink, 32 output points (32 points/ common), output delay: 1ms, with IP2X
short protection function, connector (Note 2)
QY42P 12/24VDC 0.1A sink, 64 output points (32 points/ common), output delay: 1ms, with IP2X
QY50 12/24VDC 0.5A sink, 16 output points (16 points/ common), output delay: 1ms, with IP2X
fuse, terminal block
QY68A 5/12/24VDC 2A, sink/source, 8 independent output points, output delay: 10ms, IP2X
QY70 5/12VDC 16mA sink , 16 output points (16 points/common), output delay: 0.5ms, IP2X
with fuse, terminal block
QY71 5/12VDC 16mA sink, 32 output points (32 points/common), output delay: 0.5ms, IP2X
with fuse, connector (Note 2)
QY80 12/24VDC 0.5A source, 16 output points (16 points /common), output delay: 1ms, with IP2X
QY81P 12/24VDC 0.1A source, 32 output points (32 points /common), output delay: 1ms, IP2X
with short protection function, connector (Note 3)
DC input/transistor QH42P 24VDC, positive common input, 32 input points, response time: 1/5/10/20/70ms IP2X
output hybrid module 12/24VDC 0.1A sink, 32 output points (32 points/common), output delay: 1ms, with
QX48Y57 24VDC, positive common input, 8 input points, response time: 1/5/10/20/70ms IP2X
12/24VDC 0.5A sink, 7 output points (7 points /common), output delay: 1ms, with
Interrupt module QI60 16 interrupt input points, response time:0.1/0.2/0.4/0.6/1.0ms IP2X
Spring Q6TE-18S For 16-point input/output, 0.3 to 1.5mm2(AWG22 to 16) IP2X
Clamp Terminal Block
IDC Q6TA32 For 32-point input/output, 0.5mm2(AWG20) IP2X
Terminal Q6TA32-TOL For Q6TA32 Dedicated tool
—
Block Adapter
Blank cover QG60 Blank cover for I/O module —
I/O module 13JL99 Q Series Building Block I/O Module User's Manual (Sold separately) —
Analog to Digital Q64AD 4 channels, analog-to-digital conversion, voltage/current input IP2X
Converter Modules Q68ADV 8 channels, analog-to-digital conversion, voltage input IP2X
Q68ADI 8 channels, analog-to-digital conversion, current input IP2X
13JR03 Q64AD, Q68ADV, A68ADI User's Manual (Sold separately) (Note 1) —
13JQ51 Q64AD, Q68ADV, A68ADI User's Manual: Hardware (packed with product) —
Channel-Isolated Q64AD-GH 4 channels, analog-to-digital conversion, voltage/current input IP2X
Analog to Digital Q62AD-DGH 2 channels, 16bit high resolution isolated analog input with Signal Conditioning IP2X
Converter Module Function
13JR51 Channel Isolated High Resolution Analog-Digital Converter Module Channel
Isolated High Resolution Analog-Digital Converter Module User's Manual (With
—
Signal Conditioning Function)Q64AD-GH Q62AD-DGH GX Configurator-AD
(SW0D5C-QADU-E) (Sold separately) (Note 1)
13JT82 Q64AD-GH Channel Isolated High Resolution Analog-Digital Converter Module
—
(packed with product)
13JT83 Q62AD-DGH Channel Isolated High Resolution Analog-Digital Converter Module
—
(with Signal Conditioning Function) (packed with product)
Digital to Analog Q62DA 2 channels, digital to analog conversion, voltage/current output IP2X
Converter Module Q64DA 4 channels, digital to analog conversion, voltage/current output IP2X
Q68DAV 8 channels, digital to analog conversion, voltage output IP2X
Q68DAI 8 channels, digital to analog conversion, current output IP2X
13JR02 Q62DA, Q64DA, Q68DAV, Q68DAI User's Manual (Sold separately) (Note 1) —
corresponding setting/monitoring tool in PDF format. App
Note 2: The connector is not supplied. Obtain the A6CON1/A6CON2/A6CON3/A6CON4 separately.
Note 3: The connector is not supplied. Obtain the A6CON1E/A6CON2E/A6CON3E separately.
App-25
Model List
Protective
Structure
Digital to Analog 13JQ49 Q62DA, Q64DA User's Manual: Hardware (packed with product) —
Converter Module 13JT24 Q68DAV, Q68DAI User's Manual: Hardware (packed with product) —
Channel-Isolated Q62DA-FG 2 channels, digital to analog conversion, voltage/current output (with output monitor) IP2X
Digital to Analog 13JT91 Channel Isolated Digital-Analog Converter Module Q62DA-FG (Sold
Converter Module —
separately)(Note 1)
13JR52 Channel Isolated Digital- Analog Converter Module User’s Manual Q62DA-FG/GX
—
Configurator-DA(SW0D5C-QDAU-E) (packed with product)
Channel-Isolated Q64TDV-GH 4ch, Thermocouple input, Micro Voltage Input IP2X
Thermocouple Input Q64TD 4 channels, Thermocouple input IP2X
Module 13JR30 Thermocouple Input Module, Channel Isolated Thermocouple/Micro Voltage Input
Module User's Manual Q64TD Q64TDV-GH/GX Configurator-TI (SW1D5C-QTIU-E) —
(Sold separately)(Note 1)
13JT30 Thermocouple Input Module User's(Hardware) Q64TD (packed with product) —
Temperature Input Q64RD 4 channels, Platinum temperature-measuring resistor input (3/4 wire type) IP2X
Module 13JR31 Thermocouple Input Module User's Q64RD (Sold separately) (Note 1) —
13JT31 Thermocouple Input Module User's (Hardware) Q64RD (packed with product) —
Temperature control Q64TCTT 4ch, Thermocouple input, transistor output IP2X
module Q64TCTTBW 4ch, Thermocouple input, transistor output, with disconnection detection function IP2X
Q64TCRT 4ch, Platinum temperature-measuring resistor input, transistor output IP2X
Q64TCRTBW 4ch, Platinum temperature-measuring resistor input, transistor output, with IP2X
disconnection detection function
13JR21 Q64TCTT, Q64TCTTBW, Q64TCRT, Q64TCRTBW User's Manual (Sold separately)
—
(Note 1)
13JQ97 Q64TCTT, Q64TCTTBW User's Manual (Hardware) (packed with product) —
13JQ98 Q64TCRT, Q64TCRTBW User's Manual (Hardware) (packed with product) —
High-speed counter QD62 2 channels, 200kpps, 5/12/24VDC input, sink transistor output (Note 3) IP2X
module QD62D 2 channels, 500kpps, differential input, sink transistor output (Note 3) IP2X
QD62E 2 channels, 200kpps, 5/12/24VDC input, source transistor output (Note 3) IP2X
13JL95 QD62, QD62D, QD62E User's Manual (Sold separately) (Note 1) —
13JQ69 QD62, QD62D, QD62E User's Manual: Hardware (packed with product) —
Channel-Isolated QD60P8-G 8ch, 5/12 to 24VDC input, input filter setting, with pre-scale function IP2X
Pulse Input Module 13JR54 Channel Isolated Pulse Input Module User’s Manual QD60P8-G (Sold separately)
—
(Note 1)
13JT94 Channel Isolated Pulse Input Module User’s Manual (Hardware) QD60P8-G
—
(packed with product)
Positioning module QD75P1 IP2X
1 axis, open collector output (Note 3)
QD75P2 2 axes, open collector output (Note 3) IP2X
QD75D1 1 axis, differential driver output (Note 3) IP2X
QD75D2 2 axes, differential driver output (Note 3) IP2X
QD75D4 4 axes, differential driver output (Note 3) IP2X
QD75M1 SSCNET compatible, 1 axis (Note 4) IP2X
QD75M2 SSCNET compatible, 2 axes (Note 4) IP2X
QD75M4 SSCNET compatible, 4 axes (Note 4) IP2X
13JR09 QD75P/QD75D User's Manual (Sold separately) —
13JQ73 QD75P/QD75D User's Manual: Hardware (packed with product) —
1CT750 QD75M User's Manual: Hardware (packed with product) —
1CT752 QD75M User's Manual (Sold separately) —
13JR39 QD70 User's Manual (Sold separately) (Note 1) —
13JT42 QD70 User's Manual: Hardware (packed with product) —
corresponding setting/monitoring tool in PDF format.
Note 3: The connector is not supplied. Obtain the A6CON1/A6CON2/A6CON4 separately.
Note 4: The SSCNET cable connecting the QD75 and servo amplifier, external device connection connector are not supplied. Obtain the
SSCNET cable and A6CON1/A6CON2/A6CON3/A6CON4 separately.
App-26
Model List
Protective
Structure
MELSECNET/H QJ71BR11 Coaxial 75 cable, simplex bus, control station, normal station, for remote IP1XB
module master station
QJ71LP21-25 SI/QSI/H-PCF optical cable, duplex loop, control station, normal station, for remote IP1XB
master station
QJ71LP21G GI-50/125 optical cable, duplex loop, control station, normal station, for remote IP1XB
master station
QJ71LP21GE GI-62.5/125 optical cable, duplex loop, control station, normal station, for remote IP1XB
master station
QJ72BR15 Coaxial 75 cable, simplex bus, for remote I/O station IP1XB
QJ72LP25-25 SI/QSI optical cable, duplex loop, for remote I/O station IP1XB
QJ72LP25G GI-50/125 optical cable, duplex loop, for remote I/O station IP1XB
QJ72LP25GE GI-62.5/125 optical cable, duplex loop, for remote I/O station IP1XB
13JF92 MELSECNET/H Reference Manual (PLC to PLC Network) (Sold separately) —
13JF96 MELSECNET/H Reference Manual (Remote I/O Network) (Sold separately) —
13JT16 QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21G, QJ71BR11 User's Manual (packed with product) —
13JT17 QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QJ72BR15 User's Manual (packed with product) —
13JR34 QJ71LP21GE, QJ72LP25GE User's Manual (packed with product) —
FL-net QJ71FL71-F01 FL-net(OPCN-2)Ver.2.00 interface, for 10BASE5/10BASE-T IP2X
module QJ71FL71-B2-F01 FL-net(OPCN-2)Ver.2.00 interface, for 10BASE2 IP2X
13JR61 FL-net(OPCN-2) Interface Module QJ71FL71-F01 QJ71FL71-B2-F01 GX
Configurator-FL (SW0D5C-QFLU-E) (English) User's Manual (Sold separately) —
(Note 1)
13JP01 FL-net (OPCN-2) Interface Module User's Manual (Hardware) (packed with
—
product)
CC-Link module QJ61BT11 For master/local IP1XB
13JL91 QJ61BT11 User's Manual (Sold separately) —
13JQ41 QJ61BT11 User's Manual: Hardware (packed with product) —
CC-Link/LT QJ61CL12 For master IP2X
module 13JR62 QJ61CL12 CC-Link/LT User's Manual (Sold separately) (Note 1) —
13JP01 QJ61CL12 CC-Link/LT Master Module User's Manual (Hardware) (packed with
—
product)
AS-i QJ71AS92 For master IP2X
module 13JR53 AS-i Master Module User's Manual (Sold separately) (Note 1) —
13JT88 AS-i Master Module User’s Manual (Hardware) QJ71AS92 (packed with product) —
Ethernet module QJ71E71 For 10BASE-5/10BASE-T IP2X
QJ71E71-B2 For 10BASE-2 IP2X
QJ71E71-100 For 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX IP2X
13JL88 Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual: Basic (Sold separately) —
13JL89 Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual: Applications (Sold separately) —
13JT53 Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual: Web function (Sold separately) —
13JF89 MC Protocol Reference Manual (Sold separately) —
13JQ35 QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2 User's Manual: Hardware (packed with product) —
Serial communication QJ71C24 RS-232 1ch, RS-422/485 1ch IP2X
module QJ71C24-R2 RS-232 2ch IP2X
13JL86 Serial Communication Module User's Manual: Basic (Sold separately) (Note 1) —
13JL87 Serial Communication Module User's Manual: Applications (Sold separately) —
13JF89 MC Protocol Reference Manual (Sold separately) —
13JQ31 QJ71C24, QJ71C241-R2 User's Manual: Hardware (packed with product) —
App
App-27
Model List
Protective
Structure
Intelligent QD51 RS-232 2ch, Basic language programming module IP2X
communication module QD51-R24 RS-232 1ch, RS-422/485 1ch, Basic language programming module IP2X
13JR16 QD51, QD51-R24 User's Manual (Sold separately) (Note 1) —
13JT05 QD51, QD51-R24 User's Manual (Hardware) (packed with product) —
SW1IVD-AD51HP-E QD51 software package (for DOS/V personal computer, also used with
—
AD51H-S3/A1SD51S)
13J484 SW1IVD-AD51HP-E Operating Manual (packed with product) —
PROFIBUS-DP module QJ71PB92D PROFIBUS-DP interface module, master IP2X
QJ71PB93D PROFIBUS-DP interface module, slave IP2X
13JR22 QJ71PB92D User’s Manual (Sold separately) —
13JT22 QJ71PB92D User’s Manual (Hardware) (packed with product) —
13JR57 QJ71PB93D User’s Manual (Sold separately)
13JT96 QJ71PB93D User’s Manual (Hardware) (packed with product)
DeviceNet QJ71DN91 DeviceNet Master-Slave module —
Master-Slave module 13JT21 DeviceNet Master-Slave module User’s Manual (Hardware) QJ71DN91 —
13JR32 DeviceNet Master-Slave module User’s Manual QJ71DN91/GX Configurator-DN
(SW1D5C-QDNU-E) —
Extension base unit QA1S65B Power supply + 5 - I/O slots, for AnS series module loading (Note 3) IP0X
QA1S68B Power supply + 8 - I/O slots, for AnS series module loading (Note 3) IP0X
QA65B Power supply + 5 - I/O slots, for A series module loading (Note 3) IP0X
Extension cable QC05B 0.45m(1.48ft.) cable for QA1S65B/QA1S68B connection (Note 4) —
QC06B 0.6m(1.97ft.) cable for QA1S65B/QA1S68B/QA65B connection —
QC12B 1.2m(3.93ft.) cable for QA1S65B/QA1S68B/QA65B connection —
QC30B 3m(9.84ft.) cable for QA1S65B/QA1S68B/QA65B connection —
AnS series module In addition to the above modules, the AnS series modules can be loaded and used in the QA1S65B/QA1S68B.
Refer to the AnS series module model list.
Note 3: Only for use of the High Performance model QCPU.
Note 4: The QC05B cannot be connected with the QA65B.
App-28
Appendices
App.6 MODEL LIST
App.6.2 QCPU- A Mode Model List
Protective
Structure
CPU module for A Q02CPU-A Number of I/O points: 4096 points Number of I/O device points: 8192 Program IP2X
mode capacity: 28k steps Basic instruction 79ns
Q02HCPU-A Number of I/O points: 4096 points Number of I/O device points: 8192 Program IP2X
Q06HCPU-A Number of I/O points: 4096 points Number of I/O device points: 8192 Program IP2X
capacity: 30k steps 2 Basic instruction 34ns
13JR10 QCPU (A mode) User's Manual (Sold separately) —
13J740 ACPU/QCPU-A (A mode) Programming Manual (Fundamentals) (Sold separately) —
13J741 ACPU/QCPU-A (A mode) Programming Manual (Common Instructions) (Sold
—
separately)
13J742 AnSHCPU/AnACPU/AnUCPU/QCPU-A (A mode) Programming Manual (Dedicated
—
Instructions) (Sold separately)
13J743 AnA/AnUCPU Programming Manual (AD57 Instructions) (Sold separately) —
13J744 AnA/AnUCPU Programming Manual (PID Control Instructions) (Sold separately) —
13JF40 MELSAP-II Programming Manual (Sold separately) —
13JL96 QCPU-A (A mode) User's Manual (Hardware) (packed with QA1S3 B) —
Battery Q6BAT Replacement battery —
IC memory card Q2MEM-1MBS Small SRAM card Capacity: 1M bytes —
Q2MEM-2MBS Small SRAM card Capacity: 2M bytes —
SRAM card battery Q2MEM-BAT Replacement battery, for Q2MEM-1MBS/Q2MEM-2MBS —
Base unit Main QA1S33B Power supply + CPU + 3-I/O slots for AnS series module loading IP0X
QA1S35B Power supply + CPU + 5-I/O slots for AnS series module loading IP0X
QA1S38B Power supply + CPU + 8-I/O slots for AnS series module loading IP0X
Extension QA1S65B Power supply + 5 I/O slots for AnS series module loading IP0X
QA1S68B Power supply + 8 I/O slots for AnS series module loading IP0X
Extension cable QC05B 0.45(1.48ft.) cable for QA1S65B/QA1S68B connection —
QC06B 0.6m(1.97ft.) cable for QA1S65B/QA1S68B connection —
QC12B 1.2m(3.93ft.) cable for QA1S65B/QA1S68B connection —
QC30B 3m(9.84ft.) cable for QA1S65B/QA1S68B connection —
AnS series module In addition to the above modules, the AnS series modules can be loaded and used in the QA1S65B/QA1S68B.
Refer to the AnS series module model list.
App
App-29
30
App.6 MODEL LIST

Appendices App.6.3 High Performance model
QCPU/A Mode Common
Model List
Compatible
Product Type Outline Mode
A Q
Power supply module A1S61PN 100-240VAC input (wide input)/5VDC 5A output
A1S62PN 100-240VAC input (wide input)/5VDC 3A/24VDC 0.6A output
A1S63P 24VDC input/5VDC 5A output
AC input module A1SX10 100-120VAC, 16 points, terminal block
A1SX10EU 100-120VAC, 16 points, terminal block
A1SX20 200-240VAC, 16 points, terminal block
A1SX20EU 200-240VAC, 16 points, terminal block
DC/AC input module A1SX30 12/24VAC, 12/24VDC, 16 points, terminal block
DC input module A1SX40 12/24VDC positive common (sink) input, 16 input points, terminal block
A1SX40-S1 24VDC positive common (sink) input, 16 input points, for high-speed input,
terminal block
A1SX40-S2 24VDC positive common (sink) input, 16 input points, for high leakage current
sensor, terminal block
A1SX41 12/24VDC positive common (sink) input, 32 input points, connector
connector
sensor, connector
A1SX42 12/24VDC positive common (sink) input, 64 input points, connector
connector
sensor, connector
A1S42X 12/24VDC input, input dynamic, 16/32/48/64 points, connector
A1SX71 5/12/24VDC positive common (sink)/negative common (source) shared input, 32
input points, connector
A1SX80 12/24VDC, positive common (sink)/negative common (source) shared input, 16
input points, terminal block
A1SX80-S1 24VDC positive common (sink)/negative common (source) shared input, 16 input
points, for high-speed input, terminal block
points, for high leakage current sensor, terminal block
A1SX81 12/24VDC positive common (sink)/negative common (source) shared input, 32
input points, connector
points, for high leakage current sensor, connector
points, for high-speed input, connector
Contact output module A1SY10 240VAC/24VDC 2A, 16 output points, without fuse, terminal block
A1SY10EU 240VAC/24VDC 2A, 16 output points, without fuse, terminal block
A1SY14EU 240VAC/24VDC 2A, 12 output points, without fuse, terminal block
A1SY18A 240VAC/24VDC 2A, 8 independent output points, without fuse, terminal block
A1SY18AEU 240VAC/24VDC 2A, 8 independent output points, without fuse, terminal block
Triac output module A1SY22 100-240VAC 0.6A, 16 output points, with fuse, terminal block
A1SY28A 100-240VAC 1A, 8 independent output points, without fuse, terminal block
A1SY28EU 100-240VAC 0.6A, 8 output points, without fuse, terminal block
Note 1: Please confirm the manual number of Ans Series Module with MELFANS web.
Note 2: Compatible mode : Usable, : Usable with restriction, : Unusable, —: External accessory
App-30
31

App.6.3 High Performance model
QCPU/A Mode Common
Model List
Compatible
A Q
Transistor output A1SY40 12/24VDC 0.1A sink, 16 output points, with fuse, terminal block
module A1SY41 12/24VDC 0.1A sink, 32 output points, with fuse, connector
A1SY42 12/24VDC 0.1A sink, 64 output points, with fuse, connector
A1S42Y 12/24VDC 0.1A, dynamic output, 16/32/48/64 output points, with fuse, connector
A1SY50 12/24VDC 0.5A sink, 16 output points, with fuse, terminal block
A1SY60 24VDC 2A sink/source, 16 output points, terminal block, with fuse
A1SY60E 5/12/24VDC 2A sink, 16 output points, with fuse, terminal block
A1SY68A 5/12/24/48VDC 2A sink, 16 independent output points, without fuse• terminal
block
A1SY71 5/12VDC, 16mA sink, 32 output points, with fuse, connector
A1SY80 12/24VDC 0.8A source, 16 output points, with fuse, terminal block
A1SY81 12/24VDC 0.1A source, 32 output points, with fuse, connector
A1SY81EP 12/24VDC 0.1A, 32 points, short-circuit protection (source)
A1SY82 12/24VDC 0.1A source, 64 output points, with fuse, connector
A1S60E 5/12/24VDC 2A sink, 16 output points, with fuse, terminal block (source)
DC input/transistor A1SH42 12/24VDC positive common (sink) input, 32 input points,
output hybrid module 12/24VDC 0.1A sink, 32 output points, with fuse, connector
A1SH42-S1 24VDC positive common (sink) input, 32 input points, high-speed input
12/24VDC 0.1A sink, 32 output points, with fuse, connector
A1SX48Y58 24VDC positive common (sink) input, 8 input points,
12/24VDC 0.5A sink, 8 output points, with fuse, terminal block
DC input/contact output A1SX48Y18 24VDC positive common (sink) input, 8 input points,
hybrid module 240VAC/24VDC 2A contact output, 8 output points, without fuse, terminal block
High-speed counter A1SD61 DC input sink, 50kpps, 1 ch
module A1SD62 DC input sink, 100kpps, 2 ch
A1SD62D Differential input (preset DC input), 200kpps, 2 ch
A1SD62D-S1 Differential input (preset differential input), 200kpps, 2 ch
A1SD62E DC input, source output type, 100kpps, 2 ch
Analog to digital A1S64AD Analog input, 4 ch
conversion module A1S68AD Analog input, 8 ch
Digital to analog A1S62DA Analog output, 2 ch
conversion module A1S68DAV 0 to 10V, analog output, 8 ch
A1S68DAI 4-20mA, analog output, 8 ch
Analog I/O module A1S63ADA Analog input, 2 channels/analog output, 1 ch
A1S66ADA Analog input, 4 channels/analog output, 2 ch
Temperature-digital A1S62RD3N Platinum temperature-measuring resistor Pt100 input (3 wire type), 2 ch
conversion module A1S62RD4N Platinum temperature-measuring resistor Pt100 input (4 wire type), 2 ch
A1S68TD Thermocouple input, 8 ch
Temperature control A1S64TCTT-S1 Thermocouple input/transistor output, 4 channels
module A1S64TCTTBW- Thermocouple input/transistor output, 4 channels, with heater wire breakage
S1 detection function
A1S64TCRT-S1 Pt100 input/transistor output, 4 channels
A1S64TCRTBW
Pt100 input/transistor output, 4 ch, with heater wire breakage detection function
-S1
A1S62TCTT-S2 Thermocouple input/transistor output (heating/cooling), 2 channels
A1S62TCTTBW- Thermocouple input/transistor output (heating/cooling), 2 channels, with heater
S2 wire breakage detection function
A1S62TCRT-S2 Pt100 input/transistor output (heating/cooling), 2 channels
A1S62TCRTBW Pt100 input/transistor output (heating/cooling), 2 channels, with heater wire
-S2 breakage detection function
Pulse catch module A1SP60 Pulse catch function, 16 point input
Analog timer module A1ST60 8 timer points
Interrupt module A1SI61 Interrupt input, 16 points
Note 1: Please confirm the manual number of Ans Series Module with MELFANS web.
App
App-31
32
App.6 MODEL LIST

Appendices App.6.3 High Performance model
QCPU/A Mode Common
Model List
Compatible
A Q
Positioning module A1SD70 Analog output, 1 axis
A1SD71-S2 Pulse train output, 2 axes
A1SD71-S7 Pulse train output, 2 axes, manual pulse generator usable
A1SD75M1 1 axis 2 axes (linear/circular interpolation)
SSCNET
A1SD75M2 2 axes Absolute system/incremental
compatible
A1SD75M3 3 axes system/speed-position switching control
A1SD75P1-S3 1 axis 2 axes (linear/circular interpolation)
A1SD75P2-S3 Pulse train output 2 axes 400kpps
A1SD75P3-S3 3 axes -2147483648 to 2147483647 pulses
A1SD75 cable A1SD75-C01HA D-Sub 25-pin/half-pitch D-Sub conversion adapter cable — —
Teaching module AD75TU For AD75/A1SD75 — —
Positioning AD75C20SH A1SD75P -Mitsubishi MR-H A connection cable (2m (6.56ft.)) — —
module-servo amplifier AD75C20SJ A1SD75P -Mitsubishi MR-J A connection cable (2m (6.56 ft.)) — —
connection cable AD75C20SJ2 A1SD75P -Mitsubishi MR-J2 A connection cable (2m (6.56 ft.)) — —
AD75C20SC A1SD75P -Mitsubishi MR-C A connection cable (2m (6.56 ft.)) — —
Ethernet module A1SJ71E71N-B
Ethernet interface module (10BASE2)
2
A1SJ71E71N-B
Ethernet interface module (10BASE5/10BASE-T)
5T
MELSECNET/10 A1SJ71LP21 SI/QSI optical cable, duplex loop, for control/normal/master station
A1SJ71BR11 Coaxial 75 cable, simplex bus, for control/ normal/master station
A1SJ72QLP25 SI/QSI optical cable, duplex loop, for remote I/O station
A1SJ72QBR15 Coaxial 75 cable, simplex bus, for remote I/O station
A6BR10 Repeater for coaxial bus, 100-240VAC power supply — —
A6BR10-DC Repeater for coaxial bus, 24VDC power supply — —
A6RCON-R75 75 terminating resistor for coaxial bus — —
MELSECNET(II) A1SJ71AP21 For master/local, SI/QSI optical cable, duplex loop
A1SJ71AR21 For master/local, coaxial 75 cable, duplex loop
MELSECNET/B A1SJ71AT21B For master/local module, twisted pair
A1SJ71T25B Remote I/O module, twisted pair
CC-Link A1SJ61BT11 Master/local module
MELSECNET/MINI-S3 A1SJ71PT32-S3 Master module for optical/twisted pair cables
A1SJ71T32-S3 Master module for twisted pair cables only
MELSEC-I/O LINK A1SJ51T64 Master module, twisted pair cables, cabtire cable
I/O Link master module A1SJ51T64 Master module, twisted pair/ cabtire cable
OCPN-1 module A1SJ71J92-S3 OPCN-1 master module, twisted pair
A1SJ72J95 OPCN-1 slave module, twisted pair
B/NET module A1SJ71B62-S3 Interface module for distribution controller transmission signal device B/NET
S-LINK master module A1SJ71SL92N Max. 128 control I/O points, S-LINK master module
AS-i master module A1SJ71AS92 AS-i master module
Computer link module A1SJ71UC24-R Computer link, RS-232C, 1ch
2
A1SJ71UC24-R Computer link/Multidrop Link, RS-422/RS-485, 1ch
4
A1SJ71UC24-PR Computer link/printer function, RS-232C, 1ch
F
Intelligent A1SD51S
Intelligent communication module
communication module
DeviceNet A1SJ71DN91 DeviceNet, Master
Position detection A1S62LS
Absolute position detection by dedicated sensor
module
PLC fault detection A1SS91 PLC fault detection module
Note 1: Please confirm the manual number of Ans Series Module with MELFANSweb.
App-32
33

App.6.3 High Performance model
QCPU/A Mode Common
Model List
Compatible
A Q
Memory card interface A1SD59J-S2 Memory card interface module
module A1SD59J-MIF Memory card module — —
AC20MIF-L Connection cable 2m (6.56ft.) — —
Blank cover A1SG60 Blank cover for I/O slot
A1SG62 16/32/64 point dummy module
AnS conversion A1S-TA32 2
Crimp-contact terminal block adapter for 32-point 0.5mm (AWG20) — —
adapter 2
A1S-TA32-3 Crimp-contact terminal block adapter for 32-point 0.3mm (AWG22) — —
A1S-TA32-7 2
Crimp-contact terminal block adapter for 32-point 0.75mm (AWG18) — —
A1S-TB32 2 2
Screw terminal block adapter for 32-point 0.14mm to 0.75mm (AWG26 to 18) — —
Note 1: Please confirm the manual number of Ans Series Module with MELFANSweb.
App
App-33
34

App.6.4 Accessories Shared Among
Q/AnS Series I/O

Connector/terminal A6TBXY36 For positive common sink type input module, sink type output module (standard type)
block conversion A6TBXY54 For positive common sink type input module, sink type output module (2-wire type)
module A6TBX70 For positive common sink type input module (3-wire type)
A6TBX36-E For negative common source type input module (standard type)
A6TBY36-E For source type output module (standard type)
A6TBX54-E For negative common source module input module (2-wire type)
A6TBY54-E For source module output module (2-wire type)
A6TBX70-E For negative common source module input module (3-wire type)
Cable AC05TB For 0.5m (1.64ft.) sink module
AC10TB For 1m (3.28ft.) sink module
AC80TB For 8m (26.25ft.) sink module (common current 0.5A max.)
AC100TB For 10m (32.80ft.) sink module (common current 0.5A max.)
AC05TB-E For 0.5m (1.64ft.) source module
AC10TB-E For 1m (3.28ft.) source module
Relay terminal module A6TE2-16SRN Relay terminal module 1
Cable AC06TE Cable for relay terminal Cable length 0.6m (1.97ft.)
AC10TE module connection Cable length 1m (3.28ft.) Application to QY42P, QH42P, AY42,
AC30TE Cable length 3m (9.84ft.) AY42-S1, AY42-S4, AH42, A1SY41,
AC50TE Cable length 5m (16.40ft.) A1SY42, A1SH42, A1SH42-S1
AC100TE Cable length 10m (32.80ft.)
Soldering A6CON1 Soldering 32-point connector
For crimp A6CON2 Crimp-contact connection 32-point connector
For sink
contact
40-pin connector
For pressure A6CON3 Flat cable pressure-displacement 32-point connector
I/O connector
welding
Soldering A6CON4 Soldering 32-point connector
Soldering A6CON1E Soldering 32-point connector
For source
For crimp A6CON2E Crimp-contact connection 32-point connector

contact 37-pin D-sub connector
For pressure A6CON3E Flat cable pressure-displacement 32-point connector
welding
App-34
Appendices
App.6 MODEL LIST
App.6.5 CC-Link Remote Devices
Protective
Structure
Small input module AJ65SBTB1-8D 8 input points, 24VDC (7mA), positive common (sink)/negative common (source) IP2X
shared input, 1-wire type, response time 1.5ms, terminal block type
AJ65SBT1-16D 16 input points, 24VDC (7mA), positive common (sink)/negative common (source) IP2X
AJ65SBTB1-16D1 16 input points, 24VDC (5mA), positive common (sink)/negative common (source) IP2X
AJ65SBTB1-32D 32 input points, 24VDC (7mA), positive common (sink)/negative common (source) IP2X
shared input 1-wire type, response time 1.5ms, terminal block type
AJ65SBTB1-32D1 32 input points, 24VDC (5mA), positive common (sink)/negative common IP2X
(source)shared input, 1-wire type, response time 0.2ms, terminal block type
AJ65SBTB2N-8A 8 input points, 100-120VAC (7mA), 2-wire type, response time 20ms, terminal block IP1X
type
AJ65SBTB2N-16A 16 input points, 100-120VAC (7mA), 2-wire type, response time 20ms, terminal block IP1X
type
AJ65SBTB3-8D 8 input points, 24VDC (7mA), positive common (sink)/negative common IP2X
(source)shared input• 3-wire type, response time 1.5ms, terminal block type
AJ65SBTB3-16D 16 input points, 24VDC (7mA), positive common (sink)/negative common IP2X
(source)shared input, 3-wire type, response time 1.5ms, terminal block type
AJ65SBTC4-16D 16 input points, 24VDC (5mA), positive common (sink)/negative common (source) IP2X
shared input: selected by switch,2-, 3-, 4-wire type(for 8 sensors), response time
1.5ms, one-touch connector type (plug: sold separately)
AJ65SBTC1-32D 32 input points, 24VDC (5mA), positive common (sink)/negative common (source) IP2X
shared input, 1-wire type, response time 1.5ms, one-touch connector type (plug sold
separately)
AJ65SBTC1-32D1 32 input points, 24VDC (5mA), positive common (sink)/negative common (source) IP2X
shared input, 1-wire type, response time 0.2ms, one-touch connector type (plug sold
separately)
AJ65SBTW4-16D 16 input points, 24VDC (5mA), positive common (sink)/negative common (source) IP67
shared input: selected by switch, response time 1.5ms, 2-, 3-, 4-wire type (for 8
sensors), waterproof type (cap: sold separately)
AJ65SBTCF1-32D 32input points, 24VDC (5mA), positive common (sink)/negative common (source) IP2X
shared input, 1-wire type, response time 1.5ms, FCN connector type
AJ65VBTCU3-8D1 8 input points, 24VDC (5mA), positive common (sink) input, 3-wire type, response IP1XB
time 0.2ms, one-touch connector type (plug available as option)
AJ65VBTCU3-16 16 input points, 24VDC (5mA), positive common (sink) input, 3-wire type, response IP1XB
D1 time 0.2ms, one-touch connector type (plug available as option)
AJ65FBTA4-16D 16 input points, 24VDC (7mA), positive common (sink) input, 2- to 4-wire type, IP67
response time 1.5ms, thin, waterproof type (cap available as option)
AJ65FBTA4-16DE 16 input points, 24VDC (7mA), negative common (source) input, 2- to 4-wire type, IP67
response time 1.5ms, thin, waterproof type (cap available as option)
Small output module AJ65SBTB1-8T 8 output points, 12/24VDC (0.5A), transistor output (sink), 1-wire type, terminal block IP2X
type
AJ65SBTB1-8T1 8 output points, 12/24VDC (0.5A), transistor output (sink), 1-wire type, OFF-time IP2X
leakage current 0.1mA, terminal block type
AJ65SBTB1-16T 16 output points, 12/24VDC (0.5A), transistor output (sink), 1-wire type, terminal IP2X
block type
AJ65SBTB1-32T 32 output points, 12/24VDC (0.5A), transistor output (sink), 1-wire type, terminal IP2X
block type
AJ65SBTB1-8TE 8 output points, 12/24VDC (0.1A), transistor output (source), 1-wire type, terminal IP2X
block type
AJ65SBTB1-16TE 16 output points, 12/24VDC (0.1A), transistor output (source), 1-wire type, terminal IP2X
block type
AJ65SBTB2-8T 8 output points, 12/24VDC(0.5A), transistor output (sink), 2-wire type, terminal block IP2X
type
App
App-35
Appendices
App.6 MODEL LIST
Protective
Structure
Small output AJ65SBTB2-8T1 8 output points, 12/24VDC (0.5A), transistor output (sink), 2-wire type, OFF-time IP2X
module leakage current 0.1mA, terminal block type
AJ65SBTB2-16T 16 output points, 12/24VDC(0.5A), transistor output(sink), 2-wire type, terminal block IP2X
type
AJ65SBTB2N-8R 8 output points, 240VAC/24VDC(2A), relay output, 2-wire type, terminal block type IP1X
AJ65SBTB2N-16R 16 output points, 240VAC/24VDC(2A), relay output, 2-wire type, terminal block type IP1X
AJ65SBTB2N-8S 8 output points, 100-240VAC(0.6A), triac output, 2-wire type, terminal block type IP1X
AJ65SBTB2N-16S 16 output points, 100-240VAC(0.6A), triac output, 2-wire type, terminal block type IP1X
AJ65SBTCF1-32T 32 output points, 12/24VDC (0.1A), transistor output(sink), 1-wire type, FCN IP2X
connector type
AJ65SBTC1-32T 32 output points, 12/24VDC (0.1A), transistor output(sink), 1-wire type, one-touch IP2X
connector type (plug: sold separately)
AJ65SBTC1-32T1 32 output points, 12/24VDC (0.1A), transistor output (sink), 1-wire type, OFF-time IP2X
leakage current 0.1mA, one-touch connector type (plug available as option)
AJ65VBTCU2-8T 8 output points, 12/24VDC (0.1A), transistor output(sink), 2-wire type, OFF-time IP1XB
AJ65VBTCU2-16T 16 output points, 12/24VDC (0.1A), transistor output(sink), 2-wire type, OFF-time IP1XB
AJ65FBTA2-16T 16 output points, 12/24VDC (0.5A), transistor output (sink), 2-wire type, thin IP2X
waterproof type (cap available as option)
AJ65FBTA2-16TE 16 output points, 12/24VDC (1.0A), transistor output (source), 2-wire type, thin IP2X
waterproof type (cap available as option)
Small I/O AJ65SBTB1-16DT 8 input points, 24VDC (7mA), positive common (sink)input, 1-wire type, response IP2X
composite module time 1.5ms
8 output points, 24VDC (0.5A), 1-wire type, transistor output (sink), terminal block
type
AJ65SBTB1-16DT1 8 input points, 24VDC (5mA), positive common (sink)input, 1-wire type, response IP2X
time 0.2ms
type
AJ65SBTB1-16DT2 8 input points, 24VDC (7mA), positive common (sink) input, 1-wire type, response IP2X
time 1.5ms
8 output points, 24VDC (0.5A), 1-wire type, transistor output (sink), OFF-time leakage
current 0.1mA, terminal block type
time 0.2ms
AJ65SBTB1-32DT 16 input points, 24VDC (7mA), positive common (sink)input, 1-wire type, response IP2X
time 1.5ms
type
AJ65SBTB1-32DT1 16 input points, 24VDC (5mA), positive common (sink)input, 1-wire type, response IP2X
time 0.2ms
type
time 1.5ms
16 output points, 24VDC (0.5A), 1-wire type, transistor output (sink), OFF-time
time 0.2ms
16 output points, 24VDC (0.5A), 1-wire type, transistor output (sink), OFF-time
AJ65SBTB32-8DT 4 input points, 24VDC (7mA), positive common (sink) input, 3-wire type, response IP2X
time 1.5ms
type
time 1.5ms
App-36
Appendices
App.6 MODEL LIST
Protective
Structure
Small I/O AJ65SBTB32-16DT 8 input points, 24VDC (7mA), positive common (sink) input, 3-wire type, response IP2X
composite module time 1.5ms
type
time 1.5ms
AJ65VBTCF1-32DT1 Input 16 points, 24VDC (5mA), positive common (sink)/negative common IP2X
(source)shared input, 1-wire type, response time 0.2ms
Output 8 points, 24VDC (0.1A), transistor output (sink), 1-wire type, FCN connector
type
AJ65FBTA42-16DT Input 8 points, 24VDC (7mA), positive common (sink type)input, 2- to 4-wire type, IP2X
response time 1.5ms,
Output 8 points, 24VDC (0.5A), transistor output (sink), 2-wire type,
Thin, waterproof type (cap available as option)
AJ65FBTA42-16DTE Input 8 points, 24VDC (7mA), negative common (source) input, 2- to 4-wire type, response IP2X
time 1.5ms,
Output 8 points, 24VDC (1.0A), 2-wire type, transistor output (source)
Thin, waterproof type (cap available as option)
AJ65SBTC1-32DT 16 input points, 24VDC (5mA), positive common (sink) input, 1-wire type, response IP2X
time 1.5ms
16 output points, 24VDC (0.1A), transistor output (sink), 1-wire type, one-touch
AJ65SBTC1-32DT1 16 input points, 24VDC (5mA), positive common (sink) input, 1-wire type, response IP2X
time 0.2ms
16 output points, 24VDC (0.1A), transistor output (sink), 1-wire type, one-touch
time 1.5ms
16 output points, 24VDC (0.1A), transistor output (sink), 1-wire type, OFF-time
time 0.2ms
16 output points, 24VDC (0.1A), transistor output (sink), 1-wire type, OFF-time
AJ65SBTB32-8DT 4 input points, 24VDC (7mA), 3-wire type, response time 1.5ms IP2X
4 output points, 24VDC (0.5A), 2-wire type, transistor output, terminal block type
AJ65SBTB32-16DT 8 input points, 24VDC (7mA), 3-wire type, response time 1.5ms IP2X
8 output points, 24VDC (0.5A), 2-wire type, transistor output, terminal block type
AJ65SBTC4-16DT 8 input points, 24VDC (5mA), positive common (sink) input, 2-, 3-, 4-wire type, IP2X
response time 1.5ms
8 output points, 24VDC (0.5A), transistor output (sink), 1-, 2-, 3-wire type, one-touch
connector type (for 8 sensors) (plug: sold separately)
AJ65SBTC4-16DT2 8 input points, 24VDC (5mA), positive common (sink) input, 2-, 3-, 4-wire type, IP2X
response time 1.5ms
8 output points, 24VDC (0.5A), transistor output (sink), 1-, 2-, 3-wire type, OFF-time
leakage current 0.1mA, one-touch connector type (for 8 sensors) (plug available as
option)
AJ65SBTCF1-32DT 16 input points, 12/24VDC (5mA), positive common (sink)/negative common (source) IP2X
shared input, 1-wire type, response time 1.5ms
16 output points, 12/24VDC (0.1A), transistor output (sink), 1-wire type, OFF-time
leakage current 0.1mA, FCN connector type
AJ65SBTW4-16DT 8 input points, 24VDC (5mA), positive common (sink) input, 2-, 3-, 4-wire type, IP2X
response time 1.5ms,
8 output points, 12/24VDC (0.5A), transistor output (sink), 1-, 2-, 3-wire type,
waterproof type (for 8 sensors) (cap: sold separately)
Input module AJ65BTB1-16D 16 input points, 24VDC (7mA), positive common (sink)/negative common (source) IP2X
shared input,1-wire type, response time 10ms,terminal block type
AJ65BTB2-16D 16 input points, 24VDC (7mA), positive common (sink)/negative common (source) IP2X
shared input,2-wire type, response time 10ms,terminal block type
AJ65BTC1-32D 32 input points, 24VDC (7mA), positive common (sink)/negative common (source) IP2X App
shared input,1-wire type, response time 10ms, FCN connector type
App-37
Appendices
App.6 MODEL LIST
Protective
Structure
Output module AJ65BTB1-16T 16 output points, 24VDC (0.5A), transistor output (sink), 1-wire type, terminal block IP2X
type
AJ65BTB2-16T 16 output points, 24VDC (0.5A), transistor output (sink), 2-wire type, terminal block IP2X
type
AJ65BTC1-32T 32 output points, 24VDC (0.1A), transistor output (sink), 1-wire type, FCN connector IP2X
type
AJ65BTB2-16R 16 output points, 24VDC/240VAC (2A), relay contact output, 2-wire type, terminal IP1X
block type
I/O composite AJ65BTB1-16DT 8 input points, 24VDC (7mA), positive common (sink) input, 1-wire type, response IP2X
module time 10ms,
8 output points, 24VDC (0.5A), transistor output (sink), 1-wire type, terminal block
type
AJ65BTB2-16DT 8 input points, 24VDC (7mA), positive common (sink) input, 2-wire type, response IP2X
time 10ms,
type
AJ65BTB2-16DR 8 input points, 24VDC (7mA), positive common (sink)/negative common (source) IP1X
shared input, 2-wire type, response time 10ms,
8 output points, 24VDC/240VAC (2A), relay contact output, 2-wire type, terminal
block type
Small type AJ65SBT-64AD 4 channel voltage/current input, analog input: -10V to +10V, 0mA to +20mA, IP2X
Analog to Digital Digital output: -4000 to +4000, 0 to 4000
Converter Modules AJ65VBTCU-68ADV 4 channel voltage input, analog input: -10V to + 10V, IP1XB
Digital output: -4000 to +4000
AJ65VBTCU-68ADI 4 channel current input, analog input: 0 to 20 mA, IP1XB
Digital output: 0 to 4000
Analog to digital AJ65BT-64AD 4 channel voltage/current input, analog input: -10V to +10V, -20mA to +20mA IP2X
conversion module Digital output: -2000 to +2000, 0 to +4000
Small type AJ65SBT-62DA 2 channel voltage/current output, IP2X
Digital to Analog Digital input: - 4000 to +4000, 0 to 4000,
Converter Module analog output: -10V to +10V, 0 to 20mA
AJ65VBTCU-68DAV 8 channel voltage output, Digital input: - 4000 to + 4000, IP1XB
Analog output: - 10V to + 10V
Digital to analog AJ65BT-64DAV 4 channel voltage output, digital input: -2000 to +2000 IP2X
conversion module Analog output: -10V to +10V
AJ65BT-64DAI 4 channel current output, digital input: 0 to +4000 IP2X
Analog output: 4mA to 20mA
High-speed AJ65BT-D62 DC input, preset DC input, counting range: 0 to 16777215 (24-bit binary) IP2X
counter module AJ65BT-D62D Differential input, preset DC input, counting range: 0 to 16777215 (24-bit binary) IP2X
AJ65BT-D62D-S1 Differential input, preset differential input, counting range: 0 to 16777215 (24-bit IP2X
binary)
Positioning module AJ65BT-D75P2-S3 2 axes (independent, with linear/circular interpolation simultaneous) IP2X
Temperature input AJ65BT-68TD 8-channel thermocouple input IP2X
module AJ65BT-64RD3 4-channel Pt100 (3-wire type) input IP2X
AJ65BT-64RD4 4-channel Pt100 (4-wire type) input IP2X
RS-232C Interface AJ65BT-R2 RS-232C, 1 channel, with 2 DC input points, 2 transistor output points IP2X
Module
Peripheral device AJ65BT-G4-S3 Peripheral device connection module Accessible to either of Q mode CPU and IP2X
connection module designed to perform A mode CPU
read/write/monitor/test for PLC CPUs of
master and local stations on CC-Link from
peripheral device
ID Interface module AJ65BT-D35ID2 Reader/writer 2-channel connection IP2X
Repeater module AJ65SBT-RPT For transmission distance increase or T-branch wiring in CC-Link system IP2X
AJ65SBT-RPS For transmission distance increase or T-branch wiring using SI/QSI type optical fiber IP2X
cables
AJ65SBT-RPG For transmission distance increase or T-branch wiring using GI type optical fiber IP2X
cables
AJ65BT-RPI-10A AJ65BT-RPI-10A and AJ65BT-RPT-10B space optical repeater modules are paired IP2X
AJ65BT-RPI-10B to achieve spatial transmission using infrared rays when cabling is difficult or to
simplify wiring.
App-38
Appendices
App.6 MODEL LIST
Protective
Structure
Plug for one-touch Applicable cable outline size
Plug color Applicable cable core size (mm2) —
connector (20-piece (mm2)
set) A6CON-P214 Transparent 0.14 to 0.2 1.0 to 1.4 —
A6CON-P220 Yellow (AWG#26 to 24) 1.4 to 2.0 —
A6CON-P514 Red 0.3 to 0.5 1.0 to 1.4 —
A6CON-P520 Blue (AWG#22 to 20) 1.4 to 2.0 —
One-touch connector A6CON-L5P Communication line 0.5
2.2 to 3.0 —
plug for (AWG#20)
Red
communication 1
Shield wire (drain wire) (AWG#20) — —
(10 pcs. contained)
One-touch connector A6CON-PW5P
plug for power 0.75 (0.66 to 0.98) (AWG#18)
Gray 2.2 to 3.0 —
supply/FG 1 Wire diameter 0.16mm or more
(10 pcs. contained)
Online connector for A6CON-LJ5P
communication Online communication part plugging/unplugging connector. —
(5 pcs. contained)
Online connector for A6CON-PWJ5P
power supply/FG 1 Online power supply/FG part plugging/unplugging connector. —
(5 pcs. contained)
Dustproof cap A6CAP-DC1 Unused connector protective cap, dustproof only (not compliant with IP67) (20-piece
—
set)
Waterproof cap A6CAP-WP1 Unused connector protective cap, waterproof structure: IP67-compliant, for
(20-piece set) —
AJ65SBTW4-16
A6CAP-WP2 Unused connector protective cap, waterproof structure: IP67-compliant, for
—
AJ65FBTA -16
One-touch connector A6CON-TR11 One-touch connector used for communication and provided with terminating resistor
plug with terminating (110 ). —
resistor 1 • When using a connector type module on a terminating station, always use this
(1 pc. contained) terminating resistor.
CC-Link connector type A6PLT-J65V1
mounting fixture 1 For 41mm module width only. M4 (8 pan head screw with SWPW: 10 pcs. supplied. —
(5 pcs. as a set)
A6PLT-J65V2
For 60mm module width only. M4 (8 pan head screw with SWPW: 10 pcs. supplied. —
Protective cover for A6CVR-8 Input : AJ65SBTB1-8D

compact remote I/O Output : AJ65SBTB1-8T, AJ65SBTB1-8TE, AJ65SBTB1-8T1 —
module Repeater : AJ65SBT-RPT
(10 pcs. contained) A6CVR-16 Input : AJ65SBTB1-16D, AJ65SBTB1-16D1, AJ65SBTC1-32D,
AJ65SBTC1-32D1, AJ65SBTC4-16D, AJ65SBTB3-8D,
AJ65SBTB2-8A, AJ65SBTB2N-8A
Output : AJ65SBTB1-16T, AJ65SBTC1-32T, AJ65SBTB1-16T1,
AJ65SBTB2-8T, AJ65SBTB1-16TE, AJ65SBTB2-8R,
AJ65SBTB2-8S, AJ65SBTB2N-8R, AJ65SBTB2N-8S,
AJ65SBTB2-8T1
—
Combined : AJ65SBTC1-32DT, AJ65SBTC1-32DT1, AJ65SBTC4-16DT
AJ65SBTB1-6DT, AJ65SBTB1-16DT1, AJ65SBTB1-16DT2,
AJ65SBTB32-8DT, AJ65SBTC1-32DT2, AJ65SBTC1-32DT3
AJ65SBTC4-16DT2, AJ65SBTB1-16DT3,
AJ65SBTB32-8DT2
Optical Repeater : AJ65SBT-RPS, AJ65SBT-RPG
Analog : AJ65SBT-64AD, AJ65SBT-62DA
A6CVR-32 Input : AJ65SBTB1-32D, AJ65SBTB1-32D1, AJ65SBTB2-16A,
AJ65SBTB2N-16A, AJ65SBTB3-16D
Output : AJ65SBTB1-32T, AJ65SBTB1-32T1, AJ65SBTB2-16T,
AJ65SBTB2-16R, AJ65SBTB2-16S, AJ65SBTB2N-16R, —
AJ65SBTB2N-16S, AJ65SBTB2-16T1
Combined : AJ65SBTB1-32DT, AJ65SBTB1-32DT1, AJ65SBTB1-32DT2,
AJ65SBTB32-16DT, AJ65SBTB1-32DT3, AJ65SBTB32-16DT2
Note: Please confirm the manual number of CC-Link remote device module with MELFANSweb. App
1: For CC-Link connector type module only (AJ65VBTCU - )
App-39
40

App.6.6 CC-Link/LT Remote
Devices
Protective
Structure
Small CL1X2-D1D3S 2 input points, 24VDC (4mA), positive common input, 2/3 wire type, response time IP2X
input module 0.5/1.5ms, cable type
CL1X4-D1B2 4 input points, 24VDC (4mA), positive common/negative common shared input, IP2X
2-wire type, response time 0.5/1.5ms, terminal block type
CL2X8-D1B2 8 input points, 24VDC (4mA), positive common/negative common shared input, IP2X
2-wire type, response time 0.5/1.5ms, terminal block type
CL2X8-D1C3V 8 input points, 24VDC (4mA), positive common input, 2/3 wire type, response time IP2X
0.5/1.5ms, sensor connector type (plug available as option)
CL2X16-D1M1V 16 input points, 24VDC (4mA), positive common input, 1-wire type, response time IP2X
0.5/1.5ms, MIL connector type (plug available as option)
Small CL1Y2-T1D2S 2 output points, 12/24VDC (0.1A), transistor output (sink), 2-wire type, leakage IP2X
output module current for the OFF condition 0.1mA, cable type
CL1Y4-T1B2 4 output points, 12/24VDC (0.1A), transistor output (sink), 2-wire type, leakage IP2X
current for the OFF condition 0.1mA, terminal block type
CL1Y4-R1B2 4 output points, 250VAC/30VDC (2A), relay output, 2-wire type, terminal block type IP1X
CL2Y8-TP1B2 8 output points, 12/24VDC (0.1A), transistor output (sink), 2-wire type, leakage IP2X
current for the OFF condition 0.1mA, terminal block type
CL2Y8-TP1C2V 8 output points, 24VDC (0.1A), transistor output (sink), 2-wire type, leakage current IP2X
for the OFF condition 0.1mA, sensor connector type (plug available as option)
CL2Y16-TP1M1V 16 output points, 12/24VDC (0.1A), transistor output (sink), 1-wire type, leakage IP2X
current for the OFF condition 0.1mA, MIL connector type (plug available as option)
Small I/O CL1XY2-DT1D5S 1 input point, 24VDC (4mA), positive common input, 2/3 wire type, response time IP2X
hybrid module 0.5/1.5ms
1 output point, 24VDC (0.1A), transistor output (sink), 2-wire type, cable type
CL1XY8-DT1B2 4 input points, 24VDC (4mA), positive common/negative common shared input, IP2X
2-wire type, response time 0.5/1.5ms
type
CL1XY8-DR1B2 4 input points, 24VDC (4mA), positive common/negative common shared input, IP1X
2-wire type, response time 0.5/1.5ms
4 output points, 250VAC/30VDC (2A), relay output, 2-wire type, terminal block type
Power supply CL1PAD1 Power supply adaptor for CC-Link/LT (5A) IP2X
adapter
App-40
41

App.6.7 Software and Peripheral
Devices
Compatible
Compati-
ble OS
A Q
GX Works SW3D5C-QSET-E GX Developer, GX Simulator, GX Explorer, GX Configurator-AD/-DA/-SC/-CT 5/8/M
(CD-ROM version) set product 1 /N/20
SW7D5C-GPPLLT-E GX Developer, GX Simulator, GX Explorer (CD-ROM version) set product 5/8/M
/N/20
GX Developer SW7D5C-GPPW-E Ladder/list/SFC programming tool (CD-ROM version) 5/8/M
/N/20
SW7D5C-GPPW-EA Multiple-license product (CD-ROM version) 5/8/M
(Customer can determine the number of licenses.) /N/20
13J966 Starting GPPW (Sold separately) — — —
13JU13 GX Developer, GX Simulator Operating Manual: Startup (Sold separately) 2 — — —
13JU14 GX Developer Operating Manual (Sold separately) 2 — — —
13JU15 GX Developer Operating Manual: SFC (Sold separately) 2 — — —
13JU16 GX Developer Operating Manual: MELSAP-L (Sold separately) 2 — — —
13JU20 GX Developer Operating Manual: Function Block (Sold separately) 2 — — —
GX Simulator SW6D5C-LLT-E Simulation tool (CD-ROM version) 5/8/M
/N/20
SW6D5C-LLT-EA Multiple-license product (CD-ROM version) 5/8/M
(Customer can determine the number of licenses.) /N/20
13JU17 GX Simulator Operating Manual (Sold separately) 2 — — —
GX Explorer SW1D5C-EXP-E Project management tool (CD-ROM version) 2 5/8/M
/N/20
SW1D5C-EXP-EA Multiple-license product (CD-ROM version) 5/8/M/N
(Customer can determine the number of licenses.) /20
13JU18 GX Explorer Operating Manual (Sold separately) 2 — — —
GX SW1D5C-RAS-E Remote maintenance tool (CD-ROM version) 5/8/M/N
RemoteService-I /20
SW1D5C-RAS-EA Multiple-license product (CD-ROM version) 5/8/M/N
13JU23 GX RemoteService-I Version1 Operating Manual (Sold separately) 2 — — —
GX Converter SW0D5C-CNVW-E For CSV file, TXT file data conversion tool (CD-ROM version) 5/8/M
/N/20
SW0D5C-CNVW-EA Multiple-license product (CD-ROM version) 5/8/M/N
13J949 GX Converter Operating Manual (packed with product) — — —
GX Configurator-AD SW0D5C-QADU-E MELSEC-Q dedicated Analog to digital conversion module setting/monitoring 5/8/M
tool (CD-ROM version) 2 /N/20
SW0D5C-QADU-EA Multiple-license product (CD-ROM version) 2 5/8/M/N
GX Configurator-DA SW0D5C-QDAU-E MELSEC-Q dedicated Digital to analog conversion module setting/monitoring 5/8/M
tool (CD-ROM version) 2 /N/20
SW0D5C-QDAU-EA Multiple-license product (CD-ROM version) 2 5/8/M/N
GX Configurator-SC SW0D5C-QSCU-E MELSEC-Q dedicated Serial communication module setting/monitoring tool 5/8/M
(CD-ROM version) 2 /N/20
SW0D5C-QSCU-EA Multiple-license product (CD-ROM version) 2 5/8/M/N
Note 1: Compatible mode: : Usable
® ® ® ® ®
Note 2: Compatible OS: 5: Windows 95, 8: Windows 98, M: Windows Me, N: Windows NT Workstation 4.0, 20: Windows 2000
®
Professional, XP: Windows XP Professional/Home Edition
1: GX Configurator-AD/-DA/-SC/-CT is dedicated to Q mode.
2: Manual data are contained in CD-ROM of the product in PDF format, and also available in printed form as option.
The Startup manual data are contained in the PDF format in the CD-ROMs of GX Developer and GX Simulator. The data are not
contained in the CD-ROMs of other software products.
App
App-41
42

Devices
Compatible
Compati-
ble OS
A Q
GX Configurator-CT SW0D5C-QCTU-E High-speed counter module setting/monitoring tool MELSEC-Q dedicated 5/8/M
counter module setting/monitoring tool (CD-ROM version) 1 /N/20
SW0D5C-QCTU-EA Multiple-license product (CD-ROM version) 1 5/8/M/N
GX Configurator-TI SW1D5C-QTIU-E MELSEC-Q dedicated Thermocouple Input Module setting/monitoring Tool 5/8/M
SW1D5C-QTIU-EA Multiple-license product (CD-ROM version) 1 5/8/M/N
GX Configurator-TC SW0D5C-QTCU-E MELSEC-Q dedicated Temperature control module setting/monitoring tool 5/8/M
SW0D5C-QTCU-EA Multiple-license product (CD-ROM version) 1 5/8/M/N
GX Configurator-FL SW0D5C-QFLU-E MELSEC-Q dedicated FL-net Interface module setting / monitoring tool 5/8/M/N
(CD-ROM version) 1 /20
SW0D5C-QFLU-EA Multiple-license product (CD-ROM version) 1 5/8/M/N
GX Configurator-PT SW1D5C-QPTU-E Type QD70 Positioning Module setting/monitoring Tool (CD-ROM version) 1 5/8/M
/N/20
SW1D5C-QPTU-EA Multiple-license product (CD-ROM version) 1 5/8/M/N
GX Configurator-QP SW2D5C-QD75P-E For QD75P/D/M Positioning module setting/monitoring tool (CD-ROM version) 5/8/M
/N/20
SW2D5C-QD75P-EA Multiple-license product (CD-ROM version) 1 5/8/M/N
13JU19 GX Configurator-QP Operating Manual (Sold separately) 1 —
GX Configurator-AP SW0D5C-AD75P-E For AD75P/M Positioning module setting/monitoring tool (CD-ROM version) 1 5/8/M/N
/20
SW0D5C-AD75P-EA Multiple-license product (CD-ROM version) 1 5/8/M/N
13J948 GX Configurator-AP Version 1 Operating Manual (packed with product) — — —
GX Configurator-CC SW0D5C-J61P-E MELSEC-A dedicatedCC-Link module setting/monitoring tool (CD-ROM version) 5/8/M/N
1 /20
SW0D5C-J61P-EA Multiple-license product (CD-ROM version) 1 5/8/M/N
13JUO5 GX Configurator-CC Operating Manual — — —
GX Configurator-DP SW5D5C-PROFID-E PROFIBUS-DP modulesetting/monitoring Tool (CD-ROM version) 1 N/20/XP
GX Configurator-DN SW1D5C-QDNU-E DeviceNet Master-Slave module setting/monitoring Tool (CD-ROM version) 1 5/8/M
/N/20
GX Configurator-AS SW1D5C-QASU-E MELSEC-Q dedicated AS-i Master module setting/monitoring tool 5/8/M/N
(CD-ROM version) 1 /20
SW1D5C-QASU-EA Multiple-license product (CD-ROM version) 1 5/8/M/N
® ® ® ® ®
Note 2: Compatible OS: 5: Windows 95, 8: Windows 98, M: Windows Me, N: Windows NT Workstation 4.0, 20: Windows 2000
®
Professional, XP: Windows XP Professional/Home Edition
App-42
43

Devices
Compatible
Compati-
ble OS
A Q
MX Component SW3D5C-ACT-E 5/8/M
MX Component Version 3 (CD-ROM version)
/N/20/XP
SW3D5C-ACT-EA Multiple-license product (CD-ROM version) 5/8/M
(Customer can determine the number of licenses.) /N/20/XP
13JU32 MX Component Version 3 Operating Manual (Sold separately) 1 — — —
13JU31 MX Component Version 3 Operating Manual (Startup) (packed with product) — — —
13JF66 MX Component Version 3 Programming Manual (Sold separately) 1 — — —
MX Sheet SW1D5C-SHEET-E MX Sheet Version1 (CD-ROM version)
8/M/N
SW1D5C- MX Sheet version 1 with MX Component Version 3 (CD-ROM version)
/20/XP
SHEETSET-E
SW1D5C-SHEET-EA Multiple-license product (CD-ROM version) 8/M/N
(Customer can determine the number of licenses.) /20/XP
13JU35 MX Sheet Version 1 Operating Manual (Sold separately) 1 — — —
13JU34 MX Sheet Version 1 Operating Manual(Introduction) (Sold separately) 1 — — —
MX Links SW3D5F-CSKP-E Basic communication support software tool (FD version) 5/8/N
SW3D5F-CSKP-E5 Basic communication support software tool (FD version), license product (for 5
5/8/N
licenses)
5/8/N
licenses)
5/8/N
licenses)
1LMS50 MX Links Operating Manual (packed with product) — — —
1LMS51 MX Links Programming Manual (packed with product) — — —
MX Chart SW3D5F-OLEX-E Excel communication support software tool (FD version) 5/8/N
SW3D5F-CSOLEX-E MX Links, Excel communication support software tool set product (FD version) 5/8/N
SW3D5F-OLEX-E5 Excel communication support software tool (FD version), license product (for 5
5/8/N
licenses)
SW3D5F-OLEX-E10 Excel communication support software tool (FD version), license product (for 10
5/8/N
licenses)
1LMS52 MX chart Operating Manual (packed with product) — — —
MX Monitor SW3D5F-XMOP-E Monitoring OCX software tool (FD version) 5/8/N
SW3D5F-CSXMOP-E MX Links, monitoring OCX software tool set product (FD version) 5/8/N
SW3D5F-XMOP-E5 Monitoring OCX software tool (FD version), license product (for 5 licenses) 5/8/N
SW3D5F-XMOP-E10 Monitoring OCX software tool (FD version), license product (for 10 licenses) 5/8/N
1LMS53 MX Monitor Operating Manual (packed with product) — — —
MX Parts SW0D5C-PIC-B Graphic data package (for both Japanese and English) 5/8/N
Special module data SW0IVD-MINIP-E MELSECNET/MINI-S3 data setting software V
setting software 13JF37 MINIP Operating Manual (packed with product) — — —
SW0IVD-ROMA-E Intel HEX format ROM write-compatible data transfer software V
13JF34 ROMA Operating Manual (packed with product) — — —
SW1IX-AD51HPE QD51/QD51-R24/A1SD51S BASIC programming software V
13J733 AD51HP Operating Manual (packed with product) — — —
13J916 AD71P Operating Manual (packed with product) — — —
Connection cable QC30R2 RS-232 cable for connecting personal computer to CPU, 3m(9.84ft.)
—
(mini-DIN6P)-(Dsub9P)
PC card adapter Q2MEM-ADP Adapter for standard PCMCIA slot of Q2MEM memory card —
RS-232 connector Q6HLD-R2
disconnection prevention For preventing disconnection of RS232 connector of CPU — — —
holder
Note 2: Compatible OS: 5: Windows® 95, 8: Windows® 98, M: Windows® Me, N: Windows NT® Workstation 4.0, 20: Windows® 2000
Professional, XP: Windows®XP Professional/Home Edition, V: MS-DOS®
1: Manual data are contained in CD-ROM of the product in PDF format, and also available in printed form as option. App
App-43
44

App.6.8 Personal Computer
Network Boards
Compatible
Com-pat
ible OS
A Q
MELSECNET/10 A70BDE-J71QLP23 MELSECNET/10 interface for ISA bus, optical SI/QSI (driver type:
5/8/N/V
interface board SW3DNF-MNET10)
A70BDE-J71QL MELSECNET/10 interface for ISA bus, optical GI-50/125 (driver type:
5/8/N/V
P23GE SW3DNF-MNET10)
A70BDE-J71QBR13 MELSECNET/10 interface for ISA bus, coaxial bus (driver type:
5/8/N/V
SW3DNF-MNET10)
A70BDE-J71QLR23 MELSECNET/10 interface for ISA bus (driver type: SW3DNF-MNET10) 5/8/N/V
13JL81 MELSECNET/10 Interface Board User's Manual (packed with product) — — —
MELSECNET/H Q80BD-J71LP21-25 MELSECNET/H interface for PCI bus, optical SI/QSI (driver type: 5/8/N/
interface board SWnDNC-MNETH-B) 20
Q80BD-J71LP21G MELSECNET/H interface for PCI bus, optical GI-50/125 (driver type: 5/8/N/
SWnDNC-MNETH-B) 20
Q80BD-J71LP21GE MELSECNET/H interface for PCI bus, optical GI-62.5/125 (driver type: 5/8/N/
SWnDNC-MNETH-B) 20
Q80BD-J71BR11 MELSECNET/H interface for PCI bus, coaxial bus (driver type: 5/8/N/
SWnDNC-MNETH-B) 20
13JT27 MELSECNET/H Interface Board User's Manual (Hardware) (packed
— — —
with Q80BD-J71LP21-25, Q80BD-J71LP21G, Q80BD-J71BR21)
13JR38 MELSECNET/H Interface Board User's Manual (Hardware) (packed
— — —
with Q80BD-J71LP21GE)
13JR24 MELSECNET/H Interface Board User's Manual (SW0DNC-MNETH-B
— — —
Compatible) (optional) 1
CC-Link interface A80BDE-J61BT11 CC-Link interface for PCI bus, master/local station, twisted pair (driver
5/8/N/20
board type: SW4DNF-CCLINK-B)
13JR28 A80BDE-J61BT11 User's Manual (packed with product) — — —
A80BDE-J61BT13 CC-Link interface for PCI bus, local station, twisted pair (driver type:
5/8/N/20
SW4DNF-CCLINK-B)
13JR29 A80BDE-J61BT13 User's Manual (packed with product) — — —
® ® ® ® ®
Note 1: Compatible OS: 5: Windows 95, 8: Windows 98, M: Windows Me, N: Windows NT 4.0, 20: Windows 2000 Professional,
®
V: MS-DOS
Note 2: The MELSECNET/10 board is compatible with MELSECNET/10 mode and is not compatible with MELSECNET/H mode.
Note 3: Compatible mode: : Usable, : Usable with restriction, : Unusable
App-44
45
Appendices
App.6 MODEL LIST
App.6.9 GOT-A900 Graphic Operation
Terminal

A985GOT-V A985GOT-TBA-V 800 600 dots, 256-color TFT color LCD, screen size: 12"
(100-240VAC power supply built in), high intensity video/RGB display function support
A985GOT-TBD-V 800 600 dots, 256-color TFT color LCD, screen size: 12"
(24VDC power supply built in), high intensity video/RGB display function support
A985GOT A985GOT-TBA 800 600 dots, 256-color TFT color LCD, screen size: 12"
(100-240VAC power supply built in), high intensity
A985GOT-TBD 800 600 dots, 256-color TFT color LCD, screen size: 12"
(24VDC power supply built in), high intensity
A975GOT A975GOT-TBA-B 640 480 dots, 256-color TFT color LCD, screen size: 10"
A975GOT-TBD-B 640 480 dots, 256-color TFT color LCD, screen size: 10"
A975GOT-TBA- 640 480 dots, 256-color TFT color LCD, screen size: 10"
EU (100-240VAC power supply built in), high intensity, CE/UL/cUL compliance
A970GOT A970GOT-TBA-B 640 480 dots, 16-color TFT color LCD, screen size: 10"
A970GOT-TBD-B 640 480 dots, 16-color TFT color LCD, screen size: 10"
A970GOT-TBA- 640 480 dots, 16-color TFT color LCD, screen size: 10"
EU (100-240VAC power supply built in), high intensity, CE/UL/cUL compliance
A970GOT-SBA 640 480 dots, 8-color STN color LCD, screen size: 10" (100-240VAC power supply built in)
A970GOT-SBD 640 480 dots, 8-color STN color LCD, screen size: 10" (24VDC power supply built in)
A970GOT-SBA- 640 480 dots, 8-color STN color LCD, screen size: 10"
EU (100-240VAC power supply built in), CE/UL/cUL compliance
A970GOT-LBA 640 480 dots, STN monochrome LCD, screen size: 10" (100-240VAC power supply built in)
A970GOT-LBD 640 480 dots, STN monochrome LCD, screen size: 10" (24VDC power supply built in)
A970GOT-LBA- 640 480 dots, STN monochrome LCD, screen size: 10"
A960GOT A960GOT-EBA 600 400 dots, 2-color EL (black, yellow-orange), screen size: 9" (100-240VAC power supply built
in)
A960GOT-EBD 600 400 dots, 2-color EL (black, yellow-orange), screen size: 9" (24VDC power supply built in)
A960GOT-EBA- 640 400 dots, 2-color EL (black, yellow-orange),, screen size: 9"
A956WGOT A956WGOT-TB 480 234 dots, 256-color TFT color LCD, screen size: 7 (24VDC power supply built in), high
D intensity
A95 GOT A950GOT-TBD 320 240 dots, 256-color TFT color LCD, RS-422 interface, 1MB built-in memory, 24VDC
power supply, high intensity
A950GOT-SBD 320 240 dots, 8-color STN color LCD, RS-422 interface, 1MB built-in memory,
24VDC power supply
A950GOT-LBD 320 240 dots, monochrome LCD, RS422 interface, 1MB built-in memory, 24VDC power supply
A951GOT-QTBD 320 240 dots, 256-color TFT color LCD, Q series bus interface, 1MB built-in memory,
24VDC power supply, high intensity
A951GOT-QSBD 320 240 dots, 8-color STN color LCD, Q series bus interface, 1MB built-in memory,
24VDC power supply
A951GOT-QLBD 320 240 dots, monochrome LCD, Q series bus interface, 1MB built-in memory,
24VDC power supply
A953GOT-TBD 320 240 dots, 256-color TFT color LCD, RS-232C interface, 1MB built-in memory, 24VDC
A953GOT-SBD 320 240 dots, 8-color STN color LCD, RS-232C interface, 1MB built-in memory, 24VDC power supply
A953GOT-LBD 320 240 dots, monochrome LCD, RS232C interface, 1MB built-in memory, 24VDC power supply
Note: Confirm the manual number of each GOT-A900 unit at MELFANSweb.
App
App-45
46

Terminal

A95 GOT A956GOT-TBD 320 240 dots, 256-color TFT color LCD, external communication interface required, 1MB
built-in memory, 24VDC power supply, high intensity
A956GOT-SBD 320 240 dots, 8-color STN color LCD, external communication interface required, 1MB built-in
memory, 24VDC power supply
A956GOT-LBD 320 240 dots, monochrome LCD, external communication interface required, 1MB built-in
A950GOT-TBD-M3 320 240 dots, 256-color TFT color LCD, RS-422 interface, 3MB built-in memory, 24VDC
A950GOT-SBD-M3 320 240 dots, 8-color STN color LCD, RS-422 interface, 3MB built-in memory,
24VDC power supply
A950GOT-LBD-M3 320 240 dots, monochrome LCD, RS422 interface, 3MB built-in memory,
24VDC power supply
A951GOT-QTBD-M3 320 240 dots, 256-color TFT color LCD, Q series bus interface, 3MB built-in memory,
24VDC power supply, high intensity
A951GOT-QSBD-M3 320 240 dots, 8-color STN color LCD, Q series bus interface, 3MB built-in memory,
24VDC power supply
A951GOT-QLBD-M3 320 240 dots, monochrome LCD, Q series bus interface, 3MB built-in memory,
24VDC power supply
A953GOT-TBD-M3 320 240 dots, 256-color TFT color LCD, RS-232C interface, 3MB built-in memory, 24VDC
A953GOT-SBD-M3 320 240 dots, 8-color STN color LCD, RS-232C interface, 3MB built-in memory,
24VDC power supply
A953GOT-LBD-M3 320 240 dots, monochrome LCD, RS-232C interface, 3MB built-in memory,
24VDC power supply
A956GOT-TBD-M3 320 240 dots, 256-color TFT color LCD, external communication interface required, 3MB
built-in memory, 24VDC power supply, high intensity
A956GOT-SBD-M3 320 240 dots, 8-color STN color LCD, external communication interface required, 3MB built-in
A956GOT-LBD-M3 320 240 dots, monochrome LCD, external communication interface required, 3MB built-in
Bus connection board A9GT-QBUSS For bus connection to Q mode PLC, for connection of one A985 (-V)/A97 (-B)/ A960 GOTs or
for last GOT when multiple GOTs are connected
A9GT-QBUS2S For bus connection to Q mode PLC, for connection of multiple A985 (-V)/A97 (-B)/A960 GOTs
A9GT-50WQBU For bus connection to Q mode PLC, for connection of one A956WGOT or for last GOT when
SS multiple GOTs are connected
Bus connection module A9GT-QBUS2SU For bus connection to Q mode PLC, for connection of multiple A985 (-V)/A97 (-B)/A960
GOTs, A956WGOT and A956 GOT(-M3)
Bus extension A9GT-QCNB
For bus connection to Q mode PLC, needed when distance to first GOT exceeds 13.2m (43.28ft.)
connector box
Serial communication A9GT-RS4 For CPU direct connection/computer link connection/microcomputer connection and RS-422
board connection (without clock function) for A985 (-V)/A97 (-B)/A960GOTs
A9GT-50WRS4 For CPU direct connection/computer link connection/microcomputer connection and RS-422
connection (without clock function) for A956WGOTs
A9GT-RS2 For CPU direct connection/computer link connection/microcomputer connection and RS-232
connection (without clock function) for A985 (-V)/A97 (-B)/A960GOTs
A9GT-50WRS2 For CPU direct connection/computer link connection/microcomputer connection and RS-232
connection (without clock function) for A956WGOTs
A9GT-RS2T For CPU direct connection/computer link connection/microcomputer connection and RS-232
connection (with built-in clock function) for A985 (-V)/A97 (-B)/A960GOTs
Network connection A7GT-J71LP23 MELSECNET/10 inter-PLC optical loop for A985 (-V)/A97 (-B)/A960 GOTs, A956WGOT and
module A956 GOT(-M3)
A7GT-J71BR13 MELSECNET/10 inter-PLC coaxial bus for A985 (-V)/A97 (-B)/A960 GOTs, A956WGOT and
A956 GOT(-M3)
Data link connection A7GT-J71AP23 MELSECNET (II) optical loop for A985 (-V)/A97 (-B)/A960 GOTs, A956WGOT and A956
module GOT(-M3)
A7GT-J71AR23 MELSECNET (II) coaxial loop for A985 (-V)/A97 (-B)/A960 GOTs, A956WGOT and A956
GOT(-M3)
A7GT-J71AT23B MELSECNET/B twisted pair bus for A985 (-V)/A97 (-B)/A960 GOTs, A956WGOT and A956
GOT(-M3)
A8GT-J61BT13 CC-Link (intelligent device station) twisted pair for A985 (-V)/A97 (-B)/A960 GOTs,
A956WGOT and A956 GOT(-M3)
CC-Link connection A8GT-J61BT15 CC-Link (remote device station) twisted pair for A985 (-V)/A97 (-B)/A960 GOTs, A956WGOT
module and A956 GOT(-M3)
Ethernet connection A9GT-J71E71-T For Ethernet connection for A985 (-V)/A97 (-B)/A960 GOTs, A956WGOT and A956
module GOT(-M3)
App-46
47
Appendices
App.6 MODEL LIST
Terminal

Backlight A9GT-80LTT A985GOT (-V) TFT color LCD display section replacement backlight (1 pc.)
A9GT-70LTT A97 GOT TFT color LCD display replacement backlight (1 pc.)
A9GT-70LTTB A97 GOT-B TFT color LCD display replacement backlight (1 pc.)
A9GT-70LTS A970GOT STN color LCD display replacement backlight (2-piece set)
A9GT-50LT A95 GOT (-M3) STN color/monochrome LCD display replacement backlight
Extension memory A9GT-FNB For optional OS (for MELSEC-A/FX ladder monitoring)
board A9GT-FNB1M For optional OS + extension memory 1MB (for MELSEC-A/FX ladder monitoring)
A9GT-FNB2M For optional OS + extension memory 2MB (for MELSEC-A/FX ladder monitoring)
A9GT-QFNB For optional OS (for MELSEC-Q/QnA/A/FX ladder monitoring)
A9GT-QFNB4M For optional OS + extension memory 4MB (for MELSEC-Q/QnA/A/FX ladder monitoring)
A9GT-QFNB8M For optional OS + extension memory 8MB (for MELSEC-Q/QnA/A/FX ladder monitoring)
Protective sheet A9GT-80PSC Protective sheet (for A985GOT (-V), logo can be removed) 5-piece set Any of these needed
A9GT-70PSC Protective sheet (for A97 GOT (-B), logo can be removed) 5-piece set (The GOT comes with
A9GT-60PSC Protective sheet (for A960GOT, logo can be removed) 5-piece set 1 protective sheet at
A9GT-50WPSC Protective sheet (for A956WGOT, logo can be removed) 5-piece set the time of purchase)
A9GT-50PSC Protective sheet (for A95 GOT (-M3), logo can be removed) 5-piece
set
Attachment Conventionally used model Replaceable model
A77GT-96ATT A77GOT-L/L-S3/L-S5/CL/CL-S3/CL-S5 A960GOT
A85GT-95ATT A85 GOT (-M3) A95 GOT (-M3)
A87GT-96ATT A77GOT-EL/EL-S3/EL-S5, A870GOT-EWS, A8GT-70GOT-EW/EB A960GOT
A87GT-97ATT A870GOT-SWS/TWS, A8GT-70GOT-SW/SB/TW/LB A97 GOT (-B)
Stand A9GT-80STAND Debugging stand for A985GOT (-V)
A9GT-70STAND Debugging stand for A97 (-B)/A960GOT
A9GT-50WSTA
Debugging stand for A956WGOT
ND
A9GT-50STAND Debugging stand for A95 GOT (-M3)
PC card — SRAM type (commercially available, JEIDA Ver 4.2 compliant (PCMCIA 2.1 compliant))
Flash PC card A9GTMEM-10MF GOT memory capacity 16M bytes, flash PC card formatted For A985(-V)/975/960GOT
A9GTMEM-20MF GOT memory capacity 32M bytes, flash PC card formatted (-B) with ROM-BIOS ver.F
A9GTMEM-40MF GOT memory capacity 48M bytes, flash PC card formatted or later, or A975/970/960
GOT with H/W ver.E or later.
Printer interface A9GT-50PRF For connection of parallel printer (ESC/P24-J84 feature) for A956WGOT or A95(GOT(-M3), 1
module channel
PC card interface A1SD59J-MIF
For A956WGOT or A95(GOT(-M3) (compact flash card and flash PC card are unusable)
memory module
External I/O interface A9GT-70KBF External I/O interface for A985/A97 (-B)/A960GOT
(12/24VDC, 8 input points/64 keyboard input points, 16 transistor output points)
A8GT-50KBF External I/O interface for A956WGOT, A95 GOT (-M3)
(12/24VDC, 8 input points/64 keyboard input points, 16 transistor output points)
Video input A9GT-80V4
Video input interface for A985GOT-V
interface module
RGB input A9GT-80R1
RGB input interface for A985GOT-V
interface module
Video/RGB A9GT-80V4R1 Video/RGB hybrid interface for A985GOT-V
hybrid interface module
GT Works-Plus SW5D5C-GTW
License key for SW5D5C-GTWORKS-E+GT Soft GOT
ORKS-SE
GT Works Version 5 SW5D5C-GTWOR
SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKE + GT Simulator + GT SoftGOT
KS-E
App
App-47
48

Terminal

GT Designer Version 5 SW5D5C-GOTR
GT Designer + GT Manager + GT Converter + GT Debugger
-PACKE
SW5D5C-GOTR Update-only product for updating the older version of SW D5C-GOTR-PACKE to latest
-PACKEV SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKE
Q series bus QC06B 0.6m(1.97ft.) cable Q mode PLC bus connection cable
connection cable QC12B 1.2m(3.93ft.) cable Q mode PLC bus connection cable
QC30B 3m(9.84ft.) cable Q mode PLC bus connection cable
A9GT-QC200BS 20m(65.57ft.) cable Q mode PLC bus connection cable For purchasing, contact Mitsubishi
A9GT-QC300BS 30m(98.36ft.) cable Q mode PLC bus connection cable Electric System Service Co., Ltd.
A9GT-QC350BS 35m(114.75ft.) cable Q mode PLC bus connection cable
Personal computer AC30N2A 3m(9.84ft.) cable For personal computer connection (both sides: D-sub 25-pin),
connection RS-232C 25-9 pin converter is needed for GOT side.
cable AC30R2 3m(9.84ft.) cable For personal computer connection (both sides: D-sub 25-pin),
25-9 pin converter is needed for GOT side.
AC30R2-9P 3m(9.84ft.) cable For personal computer connection (one side: D-sub 9-pin, D-sub 25-pin)
AC30R2-9SS 3m(9.84ft.) cable For personal computer connection (both sides: D-sub 9-pin)
FX-232CAB-1 3m(9.84ft.) cable For personal computer connection (both sides: D-sub 9-pin)
FX-232CAB-2 3m(9.84ft.) cable For personal computer connection (one side: D-sub 9-pin, D-sub 25-pin)
CPU connection QC30R2 3m(9.84ft.) cable CPU connection RS-232 cable
RS-232 cable
Parallel cable AC30PIO-20P 3m(9.84ft.) cable For parallel printer connection
(Centronics compliant)
PC card interface cable A85GT-H05H 0.5(1.64ft.) cable For A1SD59-MIF connection
App-48
49
Appendices
App.7 Worldwide Sales/Service
Network
Sales Office
North America
USA Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc. 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Tel: 1-847-478-2100
Vernon Hills, IL 60061 Fax: 1-847-478-2396
California-South Office 5665 Plaza Drive Tel: 1-714-220-2500
Cypress, CA 90630 Fax: 1-714-229-3897
Georgia Office 2810 Premiere Parkway, Suite 400 Duluth, Tel: 1-678-258-4500
GA 30097 Fax: 1-678-258-4504
Ohio-South Office 7566 Paragon Road Tel: 1-937-291-4600
Centerville, OH 45459 Fax: 1-937-291-4606
New Jersey Office Vantage Court South, 200 Cottontail Lane Tel: 1-732-560-4500
Somerset, NJ 08873 Fax: 1-732-560-4535
th
Canada Canada-Ontario Office 4299 14 Avenue Tel: 1-905-475-7728
Markham, Ontario L3R 0J2 Fax: 1-905-475-7935
Central & South America
Brazil MELCO-TEC Rep.Com.e Assessoria AV. Paulista 1471, Conj. 308, Sao Paulo Tel: 55-11-283-2423
Tecnica Ltda. City, Sao Paulo State, Brazil Fax: 55-11-288-3047
Chile Rhona S.A. Variante Agua Santa 4211 Tel: 56-32-610-896
Vina Del MaT-Chile Fax: 56-32-611-294
Mexico Mexico-Texas Office 1000 Nolen Drive, Suite 200 Grapevine, TX Tel: 1-817-416-9767
76051 Fax: 1-817-416-5000
Europe
UK Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Travellers Lane, Tel: 44-1707-276100
UK. Branch Automation Systems Division Hatfield, Herts., AL10 8XB Fax: 44-1707-278695
Ireland Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Westgate Business Park, Tel: 353-14198800
Irish Branch Ballymount, IRL-Dublin 24 Fax: 353-14198890
Germany Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.-German Gothaer Strasse 8 Tel: 49-2102-486-0
Branch Industrial Automation Division D-40880 Ratingen Fax: 49-2102-486-7170
France MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE, 25, Boulevard des Bouvets F-92741 Tel: 33-1-55685568
B.V.-French Branch Nanterre Cedex Fax: 33-1-55685685
Italy MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE Centro Dir. Colleoni, Pal. Perseo-Ingr.2 Via
Tel: 39-039-6053344
B.V. -Italian Branch Paracelo 12 I-20041 Agrate Brianza (Milano)
Fax: 39-039-6053312
Spain/Portugal MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE, Carretera de Rubi 76-80, E-08190 Sant Tel: 34-93-589-2948
B.V. -Spanish Branch Cugat del Valles (Barcelona) Fax: 34-93-4891579
Netherlands Getronics Industrial Automation B.V. Donauweg 2B, NL-1043 AJ Amsterdam Tel: 31-20-5876700
Fax: 31-20-5876839
Denmark Louis Poulsen Industri & Automation Geminivej 32, DK-2670 Greve Tel: 45-43-959595
Fax: 45-43-959591
Belgium N.V. Getronics Belgium S.A. PONTBEEKLAAN 43, B-1731 Asse-Zellik Tel: 32-2-4671751
Fax: 32-2-4671745
Sweden Beijer Electronics AB Krangatan 4, S-20124 Malmo Tel: 46-40-358600
Fax: 46-40-932301
Finland Beijer Electronics OY Ansatie 6A, FIN-01740 Vantaa Tel: 358-9-886-7700
Fax: 358-9-886-7755
Finland URHO POWEL OY Hevoshaankatu 3, FIN-28101 Pori Tel: 358-2-550800
Fax: 358-2-5508841
Norway Beijer Electronics A/S Teglverksveien 1, N-3002 Drammen Tel: 47-32-243000
Fax: 47-32-848577
Switzerland ECONOTEC AG Hinterdorfstrasse 12 CH-8309 Nuerensdorf Tel: 41-1-8384811
Fax: 41-1-8384812
Austria GEVA Electronik Handels GmbH Wiener Str. 89, A-2500 Baden Tel: 43-2252-85552
Fax: 43-2252-48860
Czech AutoCont Control Systems s.r.o. Nemocnicni 12, CZ-70100 Ostrava 1 Tel: 420-69-6152111
Fax: 420-69-6152562
Slovenia INEA d.o.o. Ljubljanska 80, SI-1230 Domzale Tel: 386-1721-8000
Fax: 386-1721-1672
Poland MPL Technology Sp. z.o.o. UL. Sliczna 36, PL-31-444 Krakow Tel: 48-12-6322885
Fax: 48-12-6324782
Turkey GTS Darulaceze Cad. No. 43A KAT;2, TR-80270 Tel: 90-212-320-1640
Okmeydani-Istanbul Fax: 90-212-320-1649
Russia MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE, Kosmodamianskaya nab., 52, building 5, Tel: 7-95-721-2070
B.V. -Russian Branch RUS-113054 Moscow Fax: 7-95-721-2071
Bulgaria TELECON CO. 4, A. Ljapchev Blvd. BG-1756 Sofia Tel: 359-2-9744058
Fax: 359-2-9744061
Estonia UTU ELEKTROTEHNIKA AS Parnu mnt. 160i, EE-11317 Tallinn Tel: 372-6-517280
Fax: 372-6-517288
Rumania Sirius Trading & Services srl Bd. Lacul tei nr. 1B, RO-72301 Tel: 40-12017147 App
Bucuresti 2 Fax: 40-12017148
Greece UTECO A.B.E.E. 5, Mavrogenous Str. GR-18542 Piraeus Tel: 30-14210050
Fax: 30-14212033
App-49
50
Appendices
Network
Europe
Israel SHERF Motion Techn. LTD Rehov Hamerkava 19, IL-5885 Holon Tel: 972-35595462
Fax: 972-35560182
TEXEL Electronics Ltd. P.O. Box 6272, IL-42160 Netanya Tel: 972-98630891
Fax: 972-98852430
ILAN & GAVISH Automation 24 Shenkar St., Qiryat-Arie 49513, Tel: 972-39221824
Service LTD IL-49001 Petach-Tikva Fax: 972-39240761
Slovakia ACP AUTOCOMP a.s. Chalupkova 7, SK-81109 Bratislava Tel: 42-752922248
Fax: 42-752922254
Ukraine JV-CSC Automation 15, M. Raskovoyi St., Floor 10, Office Tel: 380-44-2388316
1010, UKR-02002 Kiev Fax: 380-44-2388317
Africa
South Africa Circuit Breaker Industries Ltd. Tripswitch Drive, Elandsfontein Gauteng Tel: 27-11-9282000
Fax: 27-11-3922354
Asia
Korea Han Neung TECHNO CO.,LTD. DONGSEO GAME CHANNEL BLDG. 2F Tel: 82-2-3660-9607
660-11, DEUNGCHON-DONG, Fax: 82-2-3663-0475
KANGSEO-KU, SEOUL 157-030
China Ryoden Automation Shanghai Ltd. 3F Block5 Building Automation Tel: 86-21-6475-3228
Instrumentation Plaza 103 Cao Bao Fax: 86-21-6484-6996
Rd.Shanghai 200233, China
Hong Kong Ryoden Automation Ltd. (Hong Kong) 10/F MANULIFE TOWER, 169 ELECTRIC Tel: 852-2887-8870
ROAD, NORTH POINT Fax: 852-2887-7984
Taiwan Setsuyo Enterprise Co., Ltd. 6F., NO.105 Wu-Kung 3rd.RD, Wu-Ku Tel: 886-2-2299-2499
Hsiang Taipei Hsine, Taiwan Fax: 886-2-2299-2509
Singapore Mitsubishi Electric Asia Pte, Ltd, -Industrial 307 Alexandra Road #05-01/02, Tel: 65-6473-2308
Division Mitsubishi Electric Building, Singapore Fax: 65-6476-7439
159943
Singapore Pumas Automation & Robotics Pte, Ltd. 1001 JALAN BUKIT MERAH # 06-01 TO Tel: 65-6278-3289
#06-10 SINGAPORE 159455 Fax: 65-6278-8372
Malaysia Flexible Automation System Sdn, Bhd. 60 JALAN USJ10/1B 47620 Tel: 60-3-5633-1280
Head Office UEP SUBANG JAYA SELANGOR D.E. Fax: 60-3-5633-6613
MALYSIA [KUALA LUNPUR]
Thailand F.A. Tech Co., Ltd. 898/28,29,30 S.V.City Building, Office Tower Tel: 66-2-682-6522 to 31
2,Floor 17-18 Rama III RD, Bangkpongpang, Fax: 66-2-682-6020
Yannawa, Bangkok 10120
Thailand Oriental Electric Industry Co., Ltd. Bang-Chan Industrial Estate No.111, Moo 4, Tel: 66-2-517-1326
Serithai Rd T. Kannayao, A. Kannayao, Fax: 66-2-517-1328
Bangkok, 10230
Indonesia P.T. Autoteknindo SUMBER MAKMUR Murara Karang Selatan, Block A/Utara Tel: 62-21-663-0833
No.1 Kav. No.11 , Kawasan Industri Fax: 62-21-663-0832
Pergudangan Jakarta-Utara 14440, P.O.
Box.5045 Jakarta 11050-Indonesia.
India Messung Systems Pvt.Ltd. Electronic Sadan NO:111 Unit No.15 Tel: 91-20-712-2807,0807
M.I.D.C. BHOSARI, PUNE-411026 Fax: 91-20-712-0391
th
Philippines Edison Electric Integrated, Inc 24 Flr. Galleria Corporate Center Edsa Cr. Tel: 63-2-634-8691 to 96
Ortigas Avenue. Quezon City Metro Manila. Fax: 63-2-634-5899
Philippines Flexible Automation System Coporation Unit 411. Alabang Corporate Center Km 25. Tel: 63-2-807-2416
West Service Road South Super Highway Fax: 63-2-807-2417
Alabang Muntinlupa Metro Manila
Oceania
Australia Mitsubishi Electric Australia Pty. Ltd. 348 Victoria Road, Postal Bag No.2, Tel: 61-2-9684-7777
Rydalmere, N.S.W 2116 Fax: 61-2-9684-7245
New Zealand Melco Sales (New Zealand) Limited. 1 Parliament Street Lower Hutt, Tel: 64-4-569-7350
Wellington Fax: 64-4-569-3623
App-50
51
Appendices
Network
Global FA Center
North America Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc. 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Tel: 847-478-2100
FA Center Vernon Hills, IL 60061 Fax: 847-478-2396
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V Gothaer Strasse 8. D-40880 Ratingen Tel: 49-2102-486-0
Europe FA Center German Branch Fax: 49-2102-486-7170
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V U.K. Travellers Lane, Tel: 44-1707-276100
UK FA Center Branch Hatfield, Herfordshire, AL10 8XB Fax: 44-1707-278695
Han Neung TECHNO CO., Ltd. Dongseo Game Channel Bldg. 2F Tel: 82-2-3660-9607
Korea FA Center 660-11, Deungchon-dong, Fax: 82-2-3663-0475
Kangseo-ku, Seoul 157-030
Beijing FA Center Ryoden Automation (Shanghai) Ltd. Unit 917-918, 9/F Office Tower 2, Tel: 86-10-6518-8830
Beijing Office Henderson Center, 18 Fax: 86-10-6518-8030
Jianguomennei Dajie, Dongcheng
District, Beijing 100005
Shanghai FA Center Ryoden Automation (Shanghai) Ltd. 2F Block5 Building Automation Tel: 86-21-6484-9360
Instrumentation Plaza 103 Cao Fax: 86-21-6484-9361
Bao Rd. Shanghai 200233, China
Taipei FA Center Setsuyo Enterprise Co., Ltd. 6F., NO.105 Wu-Kung 3rd.RD, Tel: 886-2-2298-2499
Wu-Ku Hsiang Taipei Fax: 886-2-2299-2509
Hsine,Taiwan, R.O.C.
Mitsubishi Electric Asia Pte, Ltd. 307 ALEXANDRA ROAD #05-01/02 Tel: 65-6470-2480
Asean FA Center MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING Fax: 65-6476-7439
SINGAPORE 159943
In FA centers, we offer the technical advice about our products and meet your demands concerned with repairs, field
services and training.
App
App-51
Precautions for Choosing the Products For safe use
Mitsubishi will not be held liable for damage caused by factors found not to be the cause • To use the products given in this catalog properly, always read the "manuals" before
of Mitsubishi; machine damage or lost profits caused by faults in the Mitsubishi products; starting to use them.
• This product has been manufactured as a general-purpose part for general industries,
damage, secondary damage, accident compensation caused by special factors
and has not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system
unpredictable by Mitsubishi; damages to products other than Mitsubishi products; and to
used in purposes related to human life.
other duties. • Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power, electric power,
aerospace, medicine or passenger movement vehicles, consult with Mitsubishi.
• This product has been manufactured under strict quality control. However, when
installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails,
MELSEC-Q DATA BOOK

install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system.
Country/Region Sales office Tel/Fax

U.S.A Mitsubishi Electric Automation Inc. Tel : +1-847-478-2100
500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills, IL 60061 Fax : +1-847-478-2396
Brazil MELCO-TEC Rep. Com.e Assessoria Tecnica Ltda. Tel : +55-11-283-2423
AV. Paulista 1471, Conj. 308, Sao Paulo City, Sao Paulo State, Brazil Fax : +55-11-288-3047
Germany Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. German Branch Tel : +49-2102-486-0
Gothaer Strasse 8 D-40880 Ratingen, GERMANY Fax : +49-2102-486-7170
U.K Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. UK Branch Tel : +44-1707-276100
Travellers Lane, Hatfield, Herts., AL10 8XB,UK Fax : +44-1707-278695
Italy Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Italian Branch Tel : +39-039-6053344
Centro Dir. Colleoni, Pal. Perseo - Ingr.2 Fax : +39-039-6053312
Via Paracelso 12, 20041 Agrate B., Milano, Italy
Spain Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Spanish Branch Tel : +34-93-565-3131
Carretera de Rubi 76-80 Fax : +34-93-589-2948
08190 Sant Cugat del Valles, Barcelona, Spain
France Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. French Branch Tel : +33-1-5568-5568
25 Boulevard des Bouvets, F-92741 Nanterre Cedex, France Fax : +33-1-5568-5685
South Africa Circuit Breaker Industries LTD Tel : +27-11-928-2000
Tripswitch Drive, Elandsfontein Gauteng, South Africa Fax : +27-11-392-2354
Hong Kong Ryoden Automation Ltd. Tel : +852-2887-8870
10th Floor, Manulife Tower, 169 Electric Road, North Point, HongKong Fax : +852-2887-7984
China Ryoden Automation Shanghai Ltd. Tel : +86-21-6475-3228
3F Block5 Building Automation Instrumentation Plaza 103 Fax : +86-21-6484-6996
Cao Bao Rd. Shanghai 200233 China
Taiwan Setsuyo Enterprise Co., Ltd. Tel : +886-2-2299-2499
6F., No.105 Wu-Kung 3rd.RD, Wu-Ku Hsiang, Taipei Hsine, Taiwan Fax : +886-2-2299-2509
Korea HAN NEUNG TECHNO CO., LTD. Tel : +82-2-3660-9552
1F Dong Seo Game Channel Bldg., 660-11,Deungchon-dong Kangsec-ku, Fax : +82-2-3664-8372
Seoul, Korea
Singapore Mitsubishi Electric Asia Pte, Ltd. Tel : +65-6473-2308
307 Alexandra Road #05-01/02, Fax : +65-6476-7439
Mitsubishi Electric Bulding Singapore 159943
Thailand F. A. Tech Co.,Ltd. Tel : +66-2-682-6522
898/28,29,30 S.V.City Building, Office Tower 2, Floor Fax : +66-2-682-6020
17-18 Rama 3 Road, Bangkpongpang, Yannawa, Bangkok 10120
Indonesia P.T. Autoteknindo SUMBER MAKMUR Tel : +62-21-663-0833
Jl. Muara Karang Selatan Blok a Utara No.1 Kav. Fax : +62-21-663-0832
No.11 Kawasan Industri/Pergudangan Jakarta-Utara 14440
India Messung Systems Put,Ltd. Tel : +91-20-712-2807
Electronic Sadan NO:111 Unit No15, M.I.D.C BHOSARI,PUNE-411026,India Fax : +91-20-712-0391
Australia Mitsubishi Electric Australia Pty. Ltd. Tel : +61-2-9684-7777
348 Victoria Road, PostalBag, No 2, Rydalmere, N.S.W 2116, Australia Fax : +61-2-9684-7245
ELECTRIC CORPORATION
HEAD OFFICE: 1-8-12,OFFICE TOWER Z 14F HARUMI CHUO-KU 104-6212,JAPAN
NAGOYA WORKS: 1-14,YADA-MINAMI 5,HIGASHI-KU,NAGOYA,JAPAN
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Nagoya Works is a factory certified for ISO14001 (standards for environmental
Ministry of International Trade and Industry for service transaction permission. management systems) and ISO9001 (standards for quality assurance management systems)
New publication,effective Nov. 2002

Specifications subject to change without notice.
L(NA)-08029E-A 0211(MEE) http://www.nagoya.melco.co.jp/english/

Q DB e PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Q DB e PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Precautions for Choosing the Products For safe use

MELSEC-Q DATA BOOK

Country/Region Sales office Tel/Fax

New publication,effective Nov. 2002

L(NA)-08029E-A 0211(MEE) http://www.nagoya.melco.co.jp/english/

4. NETWORK/INFORMATION PROCESSING MODULES

7. HIGH-SPEED COUNTER, POSITIONING MODULES

9. POWER SUPPLY MODULES

10. BASE UNITS

12. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

13. PARTNER PRODUCTS

15. SIMULATION/OFFLINE DEBUGGING FUNCTIONS

16. PROJECT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS

17. REMOTE MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

18. PC-RELATED PRODUCTS

4. NETWORK/INFORMATION PROCESSING MODULES

7. HIGH-SPEED COUNTER, POSITIONING MODULES

9. POWER SUPPLY MODULES

10. BASE UNITS

12. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

13. PARTNER PRODUCTS

15. SIMULATION/OFFLINE DEBUGGING FUNCTIONS

16. PROJECT MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS

17. REMOTE MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

18. PC-RELATED PRODUCTS

CPU Selection Points

Large capacity memory

Integral with power supply and base (Q00J)

200 150 100 80 50 30

<Example for Q00JCPU>

Point 2)-2: Device points

The file register is designed to handle a large capacity of

Point 4)-2: Program division and priority

Basic model/High Performance model/

CPU Selection Point 5): Program Basic model/High Performance model/

Target CPU High Performance model/Process CPU

Detailed explanation Chapter 15, Section 15.1.2/

Detailed explanation Chapter 15, Section 15.1.2/

Target CPU High Performance model/Process CPU

Display what exactly macro instructions represent

Detailed explanation Chapter 15, Section 15.1.1/

Process 7 Target CPU High Performance model/Process CPU

Basic model/High Performance model/ CPU Selection Point 6): High-level

CPU Selection Point 7): Maintainability Target CPU

Point 7)-4: Online module change

This function allows the parameters and sequence

Point 7)-3: Utilization of device comments

Storing and managing device comments in the CPU

Section 3.3.3/ Section 3.4.3 Point 9)-1: Built-in serial communication

Section 3.4.3 Target CPU Basic model (except Q00JCPU)

CPU Selection Point 12): Utilization of A

Basic model High Performance model Process CPU

Basic model High Performance model

(Continued from preceding page)

(Continued from preceding page)

Basic model High Performance model

Basic model High Performance model

Compatibility of QCPU with AnS/Q2AS

Item Compatibility with AnS Compatibility with Q2AS

Frequency Acceleration Amplitude

Overview The following ‘applicable model list’ provides guidelines for

Applicable Model List

When using Q3 SB,Q3 B,Q5 B,Q6 B base unit